HomeMy WebLinkAboutGriffith Company Inc; 2004-08-10; PWS04-35RECRECORDED REQUESTED BY
CITY OF CARLSBAD
AND WHEN RECORDED PLEASE
MAIL TO:
City Clerk
City of Carlsbad
1200 Carlsbad Village Drive
Carlsbad, California 92008
feIf
DGC# 2007-0421097
JUN22, 2007 10:36 AM
OFFICIAL RE CO FIDS
SAN DIEGO COUNTY RECORDER'S OFFICE
G Fl E G 0 RY J. S MIT H. CO U N TY Fl E CO R D E R
FEES: 0.00
PAGES: 1
Space above this line for Recorder's use.
PARCEL NO: N/A
NOTICE OF COMPLETION
Notice is hereby given that:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
The undersigned is owner of the interest or estate stated below in the property hereinafter described.
The full name of the undersigned is City of Carlsbad, a municipal corporation.
The full address of the undersigned is 1200 Carlsbad Village Drive, Carlsbad, California 92008.
The nature of the title of the undersigned is: In fee.
A work or improvement on the property hereinafter described was completed on March 27, 2007.
The name of the contractor for such work or improvement is Griffith Company.
The property on which said work or improvement was completed is in the City of Carlsbad, County of
San Diego, State of California, and is described as follows: Project No. 38561-A, Hidden Canyon
Community Park.
The street address of said property is in the City of Carlsbad.
CITY OF CARLSBAD
rNBUatNA \ '
Robert T. Johnjson, Jr
Acting City Engineer
VERIFICATION OF CITY CLERK
I, the undersigned, say:
I am the City Clerk of the City of Carlsbad, 1200 Carlsbad Village Drive, Carlsbad, California,
92008; the City Manager of said City on tytVL*- y<? , 20^7 . accepted the above
described work as completed and ordered that a Notice of Completion be filed.
I declare under penalty of perjury that the foregoing is true and correct.
Executed ar\£S\~ustj> ag£ . 2007- at Carlsbad, California.
CIT/Y OF CARLSBAD
/LORRAI
• CityCle-
Word\Masters\Forms\Notice of Completion (City)3/9/98
CITY OF CARLSBAD
PROJECT: 38561-A, HIDDEN CANYON COMMUNITY PARK
CONTRACT CHANGE ORDER NO. 3
CONTRACT NO. 3856-1A
ACCOUNT NO. 33170009060/385619066
CONTRACTOR: Griffith Company
ADDRESS: 2020 South Yale Street
Santa Ana, Ca. 92704
P.O. NO. P114552
The Contractor is directed to make the following changes as described herein.
Changes shall include all labor, materials, equipment, contract time extension, and all
other goods and services required implementing this change. Payment stated on this
change order includes all charges, direct or indirect, arising out of this additional work
and is expressly agreed between the City and the Contractor to be the complete and
final costs hereof. The requirements of the specifications, where pertinent and not in
conflict with this change order, shall apply to these changes. This change order is not
effective unless signed by the City Manager and/or the Mayor.
Pursuant to Subsection 3-2.2.3, Agreed Prices, SSPWC 2003 Edition and the
Provisions of this Contract perform the following:
Item 1: Delete the Quick Crete trash receptacles and install San Diego Pre-cast
TR32RP-D/K trash receptacles for the lump sum price of $851.38.
Increase to contract cost ........................................................... $ 851.38
Item 2: Install fifty-three (53) tree sumps per attached drawing for the lump sum price
of $3,525.49.
Increase to contract cost.. ....................................................... $ 3,525.49
Item 3: Delete four 15-gallon Eucalyptus trees and instead plant four (4) twenty-four
inch (24") box Oak trees for the lump sum price of $674.68.
Increase to contract cost ............................................................ $ 674.68
Item 4: Remove and dispose of the existing Eucalyptus tree at the tot lot area for the
lump sum price of $377.74.
Increase to contract cost. .......................................................... $ 377.74
Project: 3856-1A, Hidden Canyon Community Park
Change Order No. 3
Page 2
Item 5: Remove the existing aggregate base and asphalt concrete on Vancouver
Street as marked in the field, prep and compact the subgrade as necessary,
place and compact 4" of Class II aggregate base and base pave with 2%
inches of %" AR-4000 Class B asphalt concrete and cap with 1 W' of %" AR-
4000 Class C2 asphalt concrete per following unit prices; excavation and
disposal of existing asphalt and aggregate base@ $46.00/CY, placement of
asphalt concrete and Class II AB@ $133.50/CY.
Increase to contract cost ....................................................... $ 19,878.50
Item 6: Install additional bender board (in the curve and turn areas) and DG per the
field modifications to the Decomposed Granite Trail for the lump sum price of
$1,914.32.
Increase to contract cost ........................................................ $ 1,914.32
Item 7: Delete the hydro-seed application and install Marathon Ill Sod instead for a
zero cost to the Contract.
Increase to contract cost. .............................................................. $0. 00
Item 8: Place Class II aggregate base on the SDG&E access road and the dog park
parking lot for a lump sum price of $2,161.77.
Increase to contract cost. ....................................................... $ 2,161.77
Item 9: As necessary, rip (saw) the 2x4" T&G roof decking to provide a butt joint that
will be flush with the surface of the adjacent roof sheathing for a lump sum
price of $2,361.74.
Increase to contract cost. ....................................................... $ 2,361.74
Item 10: Remove and dispose of the last five fence posts @ the DG Trail and return
the fence railing to the City of Carlsbad for the lump sum price of $471.31.
Increase to contract cost .......................................................... $ 471.31
Item 11: Apply a plaster finish to the ceilings in Room A 101 and A 102 of the Restroom
Facility for the lump sum price of $7,265.21.
Increase to contract cost ........................................................ $ 7,265.21
Project: 3856-1A, Hidden Canyon Community Park
Change Order No. 3
Page 3
Item 12: Remove and dispose of all debris from the eastern slope of the Park site for
the lump sum price of $1,609.25.
Increase to contract cost. ....................................................... $ 1,609.25
Item 13: Remove and relocate three Eucalyptus tree and one Pine tree as directed by
the City for the lump sum price of $748.90.
Increase to contract cost ........................................................... $748.90
Pursuant to Subsection 3-3, Extra Work, SSPWC 2003 Edition, and the Provisions of
this Contract perform the following:
Item 14: Install electrical conductors/conduit from the electrical meter pedestal to
Panel RB in the Electrical room of the Restroom Facility.
Estimated increase to contract cost. ......................................... $ 7,500.00
Item 15: Modify various lighting, landscape, and irrigation systems at the Park
entrance and to the existing Pine trees respectively.
Estimated increase to contract cost .......................................... $ 5,000.00
Item 16: Install additional countertop supports per attached drawing.
Estimated increase to contract cost. ......................................... $ 2,000.00
Item 17: Relocate the drinking fountain as directed by the City of Carlsbad.
Estimated increase to contract cost. ......................................... $ 2,250.00
TOTAL ESTIMATED INCREASE TO CONTRACT COST .......................... $58,590.29
Project: 3856-1A, Hidden Canyon Community Park
Change Order No. 3
Page 4
TIME FOR COMPLETION OF ALL WORK UNDER THIS CONTRACT SHALL BE
INCREASED AN ADDITIONAL 33 WORKING DAYS AS A RESULT OF THIS
CHANGE ORDER.
RECOMMENDED BY:
CONSTRUCTION MANAGER
DEPUTY CITY ENGINEER
CITY ENGINEER
FINANCE DIRECTOR
DISTRIBUTION:
INSPECTION FILE (ORIGINAL)
PURCHASING
CONTRACTOR
DEPUTY CITY ENGINEER, DESIGN
APPROVED BY:
(DATE) CONTRACTOR (DATE)
(DATE) CITY MANAGER/MAYOR (DATE)
(DATE)
(DATE)
CITY OF CARLSBAD
PROJECT: 38561-A, HIDDEN CANYON COMMUNITY PARK
CONTRACT CHANGE ORDER NO. 2
CONTRACT NO. 38561-A
ACCOUNT NO. 33170009060/38561921
CONTRACTOR: Griffith Company
ADDRESS: 2020 South Yale Street
Santa Ana, Ca. 92704
P.O. NO. P114552 /
The Contractor is directed to make the following changes as described herein.
Changes shall include all labor, materials, equipment, contract time extension, and all
other goods and services required implementing this change. Payment stated on this
change order includes all charges, direct or indirect, arising out of this additional work
and is expressly agreed between the City and the Contractor to be the complete and
final costs hereof. The requirements of the specifications, where pertinent and not in
conflict with this change order, shall apply to these changes. This change order is not
effective unless signed by the City Manager and/or the Mayor.
Pursuant to Subsection 3-2.2.3, Agreed Prices, SSPWC 2000 and the Special
Provisions perform the following:
Item 1: Provide, install and maintain a construction fence at the Vancouver Street
entrance to the Park for the lump sum price of $2,397.44.
Increase to contract cost. ........................................................ $ 2,397.44
Item 2: Delete the procurement and installation of the Calsense ET gauge for the lump
sum credit price of $1,624.00
Decrease to contract cost. ....................................................... ($ 1,624.00)
Item 3: Delete the 48" x 96" and 37" x 37" (AL-CM-1-BT-BA) skylights. Provide and
install (one each) 48" x 96" and 37" x 37" (AL-CM-1-BT-PC-BA) skylight in the
Restroom building for the lump sum price of $1,008.72
Increase to contract cost ........................................................... $ 1,008.72
Item 4: Remove and dispose of the existing eucalyptus tree at the tot lot area for the
lump sum price of $377.74.
Increase to contract cost. ........................................................... $ 377.74
Page 2
Item 5: Provide and install conduit, conductors and apparatuses per the building code
to supply power to the hand drier in the men's and woman's restrooms for the
lump sum price of $2,053.96.
Increase to contract price .......................................................... $ 2,053.96
Item 6: Delete the 24-station Calsense ET2000 controller. Provide and install a 32-
station Calsense ET2000 controller along and two additional valve stations (25
& 26) Including all apparatuses to irrigate the Oak tree and surrounding
landscaping for the lump sum price of $2,035.49.
Increase to contract cost. ......................................................... $ 2,035.49
Item 7: Delete the 5/8" meter and supply a one-inch meter for the Park at the lump
sum price of $6,670.49.
Increase to contract cost. ........................................................ $ 6,670.49
Pursuant to Subsection 3-3, Extra Work, SSPWC, and the Supplemental Provisions,
perform the following as directed by the Engineer:
Item 8: Provide and install exposed aggregate concrete around the light bollards (in the
sodded areas only) per SDRSD L-5. The material and application shall be per
the approved Contract Plans and Specifications.
Estimated increase to contract cost. ........................................... $ 5,000.00
TOTAL ESTIMATED INCREASE TO CONTRACT COST .......................... $17,919.84
Project: 3856-1A, Hidden Canyon Community Park
Change Order 2
Page 3
TIME FOR COMPLETION OF ALL WORK UNDER THIS CONTRACT SHALL NOT BE
AFFECTED AS A RESULT OF THIS CHANGE ORDER.
RECOMMENDED BY:
CITY ENGINEER
FINANCE DIRECTOR
C \6 ~f
DISTRIBUTION:
INSPECTION FILE (ORIGINAL)
PURCHASING
CONTRACTOR
DEPUTY CITY ENGINEER, DESIGN
APPROVED BY:
(DATE)
qac~
(DATE)
(DATE)
CITY OF CARLSBAD
PROJECT: 38561-A, HIDDEN CANYON COMMUNITY PARK
CONTRACT CHANGE ORDER NO. 1
CONTRACT NO. 38561-A
ACCOUNT NO. 33170009060/38561921
CONTRACTOR: Griffith Company
ADDRESS: 2020 South Yale Street
Santa Ana, Ca. 92704
P.O. NO. P114552
The Contractor is directed to make the following changes as described herein.
Changes shall include all labor, materials, equipment, contract time extension, and all
other goods and services required implementing this change. Payment stated on this
change order includes all charges, direct or indirect, arising out of this additional work
and is expressly agreed between the City and the Contractor to be the complete and
final costs hereof. The requirements of the specifications, where pertinent and not in
conflict with this change order, shall apply to these changes. This change order is not
effective unless signed by the City Manager and/or the Mayor.
Pursuant to Subsection 3-2.2.3, Agreed Prices, SSPWC 2000 and the Special
Provisions perform the following:
Item 1: Provide and install three (3) Iron Mountain Forge 198-X BBQ grills and delete one
(1) Quickcrete (QC-BBQ-2230) BBQ grill for the lump sum price of $700.38.
Increased to contract cost. ........................................................... $ 700.38
Item 2: Change the fifteen-inch (15") lettering for "Hidden Canyon Community Park" as
specified to ten-inch (1 O") lettering. Provide and install an additional fourteen
(14) six-inch (6") letters for " City of Carlsbad" to the monument sign for the
lump sum price of$ 464.36.
Increase to contract cost. ............................................................ $ 464.36
Item 3: Provide and install an encapsulated splice, pedestal and terminal per SBC
specifications, coordinate and schedule inspections through their office for the
lump sum price of $4,413.88.
Increase to contract cost. .......................................................... $ 4,413.88
Project: 38561-A, Hidden Canyon Community Park
Change Order 1
TOTAL INCREASE TO CONTRACT COST .................................................... $5,578.62
TIME FOR COMPLETION OF ALL WORK UNDER THIS CONTRACT SHALL NOT BE
AFFECTED AS A RESULT OF THIS CHANGE ORDER.
RECOMMENDED BY:
~ /2/27/0¢
cNsrGER (DATE)
lf±_~ /2-2{35"
DEPU~ Cl~NGINEER (DATE)
· ?-4... 62-/2, 3n -•"{
CITY ENGINEER (DATE)
DISTRIBUTION:
INSPECTION FILE (ORIGINAL)
PURCHASING
CONTRACTOR
DEPUTY CITY ENGINEER, DESIGN
APPROVED BY:
\50
(DATE)
(DATE)
--
CITY OF CARLSBAD
San Diego County
California
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND
SUPPLEMENTAL PROVISIONS
FOR
Hidden Canyon Community
Park
(Formerly known as Larwin Park)
PW S04-35RE C CONTRACT NO. 38561-A
Revised 8!10/04 Contract No. 38561 -A 1 of 109
INFORMATION TO BIDDERS
CONTRACT NO. 38561=A
HIDDEN CANYON COMMUNITY PARK
Questions on the bid documents during the bid period shall be
submitted in writing, via facsimile, solely to:
Liz Ketabian, Park Planner
Fax no. (760) 720-6917
Questions shall be definite and shall reference applicable
drawing sheets, notes, details or specification sections: Oral
questions will not be entertained.
The cut-off date to submit questions is 5:OO p.m June I, 2004.
No questions will be permitted after the above date and time.
The answers to questions regarding the bid documents for the
project will be published in an addendum for the project.
For additional information concerning questions on the bid
documents, refer to Notice Inviting Bids, page 7.
Requests for plan holders list shall be directed to the
Purchasing Dept. at 760-602-2460
.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Item . Pane
Notice Inviting Bids ........................................................................................................................ 8
Contractor's Proposal .................................................................................................................... 12
Bid Security Form .......................................................................................................................... 16
Bidder's Bond To Accompany Proposal ....................................................................................... 17
Guide For Completing The "Designation Of Subcontractors" Form ............................................. 19
Designation Of Subcontractor and Amount Of Subcontractor's Bid Items .................................. 21
Bidder's Statement Of Financial Responsibility ............................................................................ 22
Bidder's Statement Of Technical Ability And Experience ............................................................. 23
Bidder's Certificate Of Insurance For General Liability. Employers' Liability. Automotive
Liability And Workers' Compensation ........................................................................................... 24
Bidder's Statement Of Re Debarment .......................................................................................... 25
26
_-
Bidder's Disclosure Of Discipline Record .........................................................................
Non-Collusion Affidavit To Be Executed By Bidder And Submitted With Bid .............................. 28
Contract Public Works ................................................................................................................... 29
Labor And Materials Bond ............................................................................................................. 35
Faithful Performance/Warranty Bond ........................................................................................... 37
Optional Escrow Agreement For Surety Deposits In Lieu Of Retention ....................................... 39
Revised 8/10/04 Contract No . 38561 -A 2 of 109
.
Part 1
Section 1
1-1
1-2
1-3
Section 2
2-3
2-4
2-5
2-9
2-1 0
Section 3
3-2
3-3
3-4
3-5
Section 4
4- 1
4-2 .
Section 5
5- 1
5-4
5-6
Section 6
6-1
6-2
6-6
6-7
6-8
6-9
Section 7
7-3
7-4
7-5
7-7
7-8
7-1 0
7-1 3
Section 9
9-1
9-3 ..
SUPPLEMENTAL PROVISIONS
General Provisions
Terms. Definitions Abbreviations And Symbols
Terms ............................................................
Definitions ......................................................
Abbreviations .................................................
Scope And Control Of The Work
Subcontracts .................................................
Contract Bonds ..............................................
Plans And Specifications ...............................
Surveying .......................................................
Authority Of Board And Engineer ..................
Changes In Work
Changes Initiated by the Agency ..................
Extra Work .....................................................
Changed Conditions ......................................
Disputed Work ...............................................
....................................................... ....................................................... .......................................................
....................................................... ....................................................... ....................................................... ....................................................... .......................................................
....................................................... ....................................................... ....................................................... .......................................................
Control Of Materials
Materials And Workmanship ................................................................................
Materials Transportation. Handling and Storage ..................................................
Utilities
Location ................................................................................................................
Relocation .............................................................................................................
Cooperation ..........................................................................................................
Prosecution. Progress And Acceptance Of The Work
Construction Schedule And Commencement Of Work ........................................
Prosecution Of Work ............................................................................................
Delays And Extensions Of Time ..........................................................................
Liquidated Damages ............................................................................................
Responsibilities Of The Contractor
Liability Insurance .................................................................................................
Workers' Compensation Insurance ......................................................................
Permits .................................................................................................................
Cooperation and Collateral Work .........................................................................
Project Site Maintenance .....................................................................................
Public Convenience And Safety ...........................................................................
Laws To Be Observed ..........................................................................................
Measurement and Payment
Measurement Of Quantities For Unit Price Work .................................................
Time of Completion ..............................................................................................
Completion And Acceptance ................................................................................
..
Payment ................................................................................................................
42
42
43
44
44
45
47
50
51
51
51
52
55
55
56
56
56
57
60
61
61
62
62
62
62
62
63
63
64
68
68
68
Revised 8/10/04 Contract No . 38561 -A 3of 109
Part 2 Construction Materials
Section 200 Rock Materials
200-2 Untreated Base Materials .............,................ ....................................................... 72
-
Section 201
201 -1 Portland Cement Concrete ........................... ....................................................... 72
Concrete, Mortar And Related Materials
Section 203 Bituminous Materials
203-6 Asphalt Concrete ........................................... ....................................................... 72
203-1 1 73 Asphalt Pavement Crack Sealants ............... ................................ . ............... . ......
Section 204
204-1 Lumber And Plywood .................................... ....................................................... 74
Lumber And Treatment With Preservatives
Section 206 Traffic Signs
206-7 Traffic Signs .................................................. ....................................................... 74
Section 207 Pipe
207-2 Reinforced Concrete Pipe ............................. ....................................................,.. 78
207-25 Underground Utility Marking Tape ................ ....................................................... 79
Section 209 Materials and Installation
209-2 Materials and Installation ............................... ........................................... ............ 80
.- Section 21 0 Paint And Protective Coatings
21 0-1 Paint ................................................................ ....................................................... 81
21 0-3 Galvanizing ..................................................... ....................................................... 81
Section 21 2
21 2-1 Landscape Materials ..................................... ....................................................... 82
212-2 Irrigation System Materials ............................ ....................................................... 83
Landscape And Irrigation Materials
In addition to these Supplemental Provisions See Part 4, CSI Formatted Specifications
Division 2: Site Work
Section 02810 Landscape Irrigation and
Section 02900 Landscape Planting & MaintenancdDecomposed Granite Trail
Section 21 3 Engineering Fabrics
21 3-2 Geotextiles ............................................................................................................ 84
21 3-3 84 Erosion Control Specialties . . . . ... . . .. .. ... .. . . . .. . ... ... . ... . . , . . .. , . . . . . ... . . , . .. . ... . . ... . . ... ... ... . .. . . .
Section 21 4 Pavement Markers
214-5 Reflective Pavement Markers ....................... ....................................................... 84
PART 3 Construction Methods
Section 300 Earthwork
300-1 Clearing And Grubbing .......................................................,................................. 86
300-2 Unclassified Excavation ........................................................................................ 88
300-3 Structure Excavation And Backfill ..................................................-............... ....... 88
300-4 Unclassified Fill ..................................................................................................... 89
300-5 90
.__
Borrow Excavation ...... ... . . ..... . . . .. . ... . . ..... . .... ... .. .. .. . .. . . . . .... . ... . . . .. .. . .. .... . .. . .. .. . . . . ........ .
Revised 8/10/04 Contract No. 38561 -A 4of 109
300-9
300-1 1 -
Section 301
301 -1
Section 302
302-3
302-4
302-5
302-9
Section 303
303-1
303-5
Geotextiles For Erosion Control And Water Pollution Control. ................. ............
Stonework For Erosion Control .............. ........ .. ........... . ........................................
Treated Soil, Subgrade Preparation And Placement Of Base Materials
Subgrade Preparation ........................... .................................................... ............
Roadway Surfacing
Asphalt-Rubber Chip Seal Or lnterlayer ............................................,.................
Emulsion-Aggregate Slurry ....................................................................... ............
Asphalt Concrete Pavement .................................................................................
Asphalt Pavement Repairs And Remediation ............................................ ............
Concrete And Masonry Construction.
Concrete Structures ..............................................................................................
Concrete Curbs, Walks, Gutters, Cross Gutters, Alley Intersections,
Access Ramps, And Driveways ............................................................... .............
90
91
92
93
93
93
94
95
95
In addition to these Supplemental Provisions See Part 4, CSI Formatted Specification All
Sections under Division 2: Concrete and Division 4: Masonry
Section 306 Underground Conduit Construction
306-1 Open Trench Operations ....................................................................................... 96
306-5 Abandonment Of Conduits And Structures ........................................................... 99
Section 308 Landscape and Irrigation
308-4 Planting .......................................................... ....................................................... 100
308-7 Guarantee .............................................................................................................. 103
308-8 Measurement And Payment .......................... ....................................................... 109
In addition to these Supplemental Provisions See Part 4, CSI Formatted Specifications
Division 2: Site Work
Section 0281 0 Landscape Irrigation and
Section 02900 Landscape Planting & MaintenancdDecomposed Granite Trail
Section 31 0
31 0-5
31 0-7
Section 31 2
31 2-1
Section 31 3
31 3-1
31 3-2
31 3-4
Painting
Painting Various Surfaces .................................................................................... 1 06
Permanent Signing ................................................................................................ 108
Pavement Marker Placement And Removal
Placement .............................................................................................................. 108
Temporary Traffic Control Devices
Temporary Traffic Pavement Markers .................................................................. 108
Temporary Traffic Signing .................................................................................... 109
Measurement And Payment .................................................................................. 109
_-
Revised 8/10/04 Contract No. 38561 -A 5 of 109
PART 4 CSI FORMATIED SPECIFICATIONS
DIVISION 1 : GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Section
01 540 Testing Laboratory Services
-
DIVISION 2: SITE WORK
Section
021 15
0231 0 Tree Boxing
02235
02795 Playground Surface
0281 0 Landscape Irrigation
02870 Site Furnishings
02881 Playground Equipment and Structures
02900 Landscape Planting & Maintenance
Tree Protection and Trimming
Site Clearing, Demolition and Renovation
Decomposed Granite Trail
DIVISION 3: CONCRETE
Section
031 00 Concrete Formwork
03200 Concrete Reinforcement
0331 0 Cast-in-Place Concrete
03450 Cast Stone Components
- DIVISION 4: MASONRY
Section
04065 Mortar and Grout
0481 0
0481 5
Reinforced Unit Masonry and Veneer System
Glass Unit Masonry System
DIVISION 5: METALS
Section
051 20 Structural Steel
05500 Metal Fabrications
DIVISION 6: WOOD AND PLASTICS
Section
061 12 Framing and Sheathing
061 80
0661 5 Cast Plastic Countertops
Glue Laminated Structural Units
DIVISION 7: THERMAL AND MOISTURE CONTROL
Section
071 90 Water-Repellent Coatings
07322 Concrete Roofing Tiles
07620
7900 Joint Sealers
Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim
Appendix 1 & Appendix2
Revised 8/10/04 Contract No. 38561 -A 6of 109
DIVISION 8: DOORS AND WINDOWS
Section
081 10 0831 0 Access Doors
0871 0 Door Hardware
-
Steel Doors and Frames
DIVISION 9: FINISHES
Section
0931 0 Ceramic Tile 09675 Special Floor Treatment
09900 Painting
09961 Graffiti Resistant Coatings
DIVISION 10 SPECIALTIES
Section
101 72
1021 0 Metal Wall Louvers
10800 Toilet and Washroom Accessories
Solid Plastic Toilet/Shower Compartments
DIVISION 15: MECHANICAL- HVAC
Section 1501 0 Basic Mechanical Requirements
15400 Plumbing
15850 HVAC Equipment
15990 Balancing Air Systems
DIVISION 16: ELECTRICAL
Section 16050 Basic Electrical Requirements
16110 Raceways, Boxes, and Cabinets
161 20 Wire and Cable (600 volts and below)
161 30 Wire Connection Accessories
161 40 Wiring and Control Devices
16450 Grounding and Bonding
16470 Breakers and Panelboards
1651 0 Interior Lighting
APPENDICES
Appendix A
Appendix B
Appendix C
Appendix D Standard Drawings
Appendix E Soils Report
Appendix F
Bid Deduct Alternate No.1
Bid Deduct Alternate No.2
State Water Resources Control Board Waste Discharge Permit
Soil and Water Pollution Prevention Program (Not attached -On file at Engineering
counter at City of Carlsbad Faraday Center, 1635 Faraday Avenue)
Revised 8/10/04 Contract No. 38561 -A 7 of 109
CITY OF CARLSBAD, CALIFORNIA
NOTICE INVITING BIDS
Until 4:OO on June 9 I 2004, the City shall accept sealed bids, clearly marked as such, at
the Faraday Center, 1635 Faraday Avenue, Carlsbad, CA 92008-7314, Attn: Purchasing Officer, by
mail, delivery service or by deposit in the Bid Box located in the first floor lobby, at which time they
will be opened and read, for performing the work as follows:
Construction of a public park facility at 2685 Vancouver Street, formerly known as Larwin Park to
include all utilities, paved and unpaved parking areas, tot lots, picnic areas, restroom facility, site
furnishing and extensive landscaping.
CONTRACT NO. 38561-A
HIDDEN CANYON COMMUNITY PARK
This bid and the terms of the Contract Documents and Supplemental Provisions constitute an
irrevocable offer that shall remain valid and in full force for a period of 90 days and such additional
time as may be mutually agreed upon by the City of Carlsbad and the Bidder.
The work shall be performed in strict conformity with the plans and specifications as approved by the
City Council of the City of Carlsbad on file with the Engineering Department. The specifications for
the work include the Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction, 2003 Edition. and all
current supplements, all hereinafter designated “SSPWC” as issued by the Southern California
Chapter of the American Public Works Association and as amended by the supplemental provisions
sections of this contract. Reference is hereby made to the plans and specifications for full particulars
and description of the work.
The City of Carlsbad encourages the participation of minority and women-owned businesses.
The City of Carlsbad encourages all bidders, suppliers, manufacturers, fabricators and contractors to
utilize recycled and recyclable materials when available, appropriate and approved by the Engineer.
The City of Carlsbad may disqualify a contractor or subcontractor from participating in bidding when
a contractor or subcontractor has been debarred by the City of Carlsbad or another jurisdiction in the
State of California as an irresponsible bidder.
No bid will be received unless it is made on a proposal form furnished by the Purchasing
Department. Each bid must be accompanied by security in a form and amount required by law. The
bidder’s security of the second and third next lowest responsive bidders may be withheld until the
Contract has been fully executed. The security submitted by all other unsuccessful bidders shall be
returned to them, or deemed void, within ten (IO) days after the Contract is awarded. Pursuant to the
provisions of law (Public Contract Code section 10263), appropriate securities may be substituted for
any obligation required by this notice or for any monies withheld by the City to ensure performance
under this Contract. section 10263 of the Public Contract Code requires monies or securities to be
deposited with the City or a state or federally chartered bank in California as the escrow agent. The
escrow agent shall maintain insurance to cover negligent acts and omissions of the agent in
connection with the handling of retentions under this section in an amount not less than $100,000
per contract.
Revised 8/10/04 Contract No. 38561-A Page 8 of 109
- The documents which comprise the Bidder's proposal and that must be completed and properly
executed including notarization where indicated are:
Classification Description
A General Engineering
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Classification Description
Contractor's Proposal Bidder's Bond Non-Collusion Affidavit
Designation of Subcontractors and Amount of Subcontractor Bid Bidder's Statement of Financial Responsibility
Bidder's Statement of Technical Ability and Experience
Acknowledgement of Addendum(a)
8. Certificate of Insurance. The riders covering the City, its officials, employees and volunteers may
be omitted at the time of bid submittal but shall
be provided by the Bidder prior to award of this con tract.
9. Bidder' s Statement Re Debarment
IO. Bidder's Disclosure Of Discipline Record
11 .Escrow Agreement for Security Deposits -
(optional, must be completed if the Bidder
wishes to use the Escrow Agreement for Security)
All bids will be compared on the basis of the Engineer's Estimate. The estimated quantities are
approximate and serve solely as a basis for the comparison of bids. The Engineer's Estimate is
$1,316,000.
Except as provided herein a bid submitted to the City by a Contractor who is not licensed as a
contractor pursuant to the Business and Professions Code shall be considered nonresponsive and
shall be rejected by the City. In all contracts where federal funds are involved, no bid submitted shall
be invalidated by the failure of the bidder to be licensed in accordance with California law. Where
federal funds are involved the contractor shall be properly licensed at the time the contract is
awarded. In all other cases the contractor shall state their license number, expiration date and
classification in the proposal, under penalty of perjury. This invitation to bid does not involve federal
funds. The following classifications are acceptable for this contract:
-
c
If the Contractor intends to utilize the escrow agreement included in the contract documents in lieu of
the usual 10% retention from each payment, these documents must be completed and submitted
with the signed contract. The escrow agreement may not be substituted at a later date.
Sets of plans, supplemental provisions, and Contract documents may be obtained at the
Cashier's Counter of the Faraday Center located at 1635 Faraday Avenue, Carlsbad, California
92008-7314, for a non-refundable fee of $50 per set. If plans and specifications are to be
mailed, the cost for postage should be added.
Any prospective bidder who is in doubt as to the intended meaning of any part of the drawings,
specifications or other contract documents, or finds discrepancies in or omissions from the drawings
and specifications may submit to the Engineer a written request for clarification or correction. Any
response will be made only by a written addendum duly issued by the Engineer a copy of which will
be mailed or delivered to each person receiving a set of the contract documents. No oral response
will be made to such inquiry. Prior to the award of the contract, no addition to, modification of or
interpretation of any provision in the contract documents will be given by any agent,
employee or contractor of the City of Carlsbad except as hereinbefore specified. No bidder
may rely on directions given by any agent, employee or contractor of the City of Carlsbad
except as hereinbefore specified. -
Revised 811 0/04 Contract No. 38561-A Page 9 of 109
The City of Carlsbad reserves the right to reject any or all bids and to waive any minor irregularity or
informality in such bids.
The general prevailing rate of wages for each craft or type of worker needed to execute the Contract
shall be those as determined by the Director of Industrial Relations pursuant to the sections 1770,
1773, and 1773.1 of the Labor Code. Pursuant to section 1773.2 of the Labor Code, a current copy
of applicable wage rates is on file in the Office of the City Engineer. The Contractor to whom the
Contract is awarded shall not pay less than the said specified prevailing rates of wages to all workers
employed by him or her in the execution of the Contract.
The Prime Contractor shall be responsible for insuring compliance with provisions of section 1777.5
of the Labor Code and section 4100 et seq. of the Public Contracts Code, "Subletting and
Subcontracting Fair Practices Act." The City Engineer is the City's "duly authorized officer" for the
purposes of section 41 07 and 41 07.5.
The provisions of Part 7, Chapter 1, of the Labor Code commencing with section 1720 shall apply to
the Contract for work.
A non mandatory pre-bid meeting and tour of the project site will be held at 1O:OO am,
Wednesday, May 26,2004 at the project site, 2685 Vancouver Street, Carlsbad, CA, 92008.
All bids are to be computed on the basis of the given estimated quantities of work, as indicated in this
proposal, times the unit price as submitted by the bidder. In case of a discrepancy between words
and figures, the words shall prevail. In case of an error in the extension of a unit price, the corrected
extension shall be calculated and the bids will be computed as indicated above and compared on the
basis of the corrected totals. -
All prices must be in ink or typewritten. Changes or corrections may be crossed out and typed or
written in with ink and must be initialed in ink by a person authorized to sign for the Contractor.
Bidders are advised to verify the issuance of all addenda and receipt thereof one day prior to
bidding. Submission of bids without acknowledgment of addenda may be cause of rejection
of bid.
The Contractor shall provide bonds to secure faithful performance and warranty of the work in an
amount equal to one hundred percent (100%) of the Contract price on this project. The Contractor
shall provide bonds to secure payment of laborers and materials suppliers, in an amount equal to:
1) One hundred percent (100%) of the total amount payable by the terms of the contract when the
total amount payable does not exceed five million dollars ($5,000,000).
2) Fifty percent (50%) of the total amount payable by the terms of the contract when the total
amount payable is not less than five million dollars ($5,000,000) and does not exceed ten million
dollars ($1 0,000,000).
3) Twenty-five percent (25%) of the total amount payable by the terms of the contract if the contract
exceeds ten million dollars ($1 0,000,000).
These bonds shall be kept in full force and effect during the course of this project, and shall extend in
full force and effect and be retained by the City until they are released as stated in the Supplemental
Provisions section of this contract. All bonds are to be placed with a surety insurance carrier admitted
and authorized to transact the business of insurance in California and whose assets exceed their
liabilities in an amount equal to or in excess of the amount of the bond. The bonds are to be
accompanied by the following documents:
1) An original, or a certified copy, of the unrevoked appointment, power of attorney, by laws, or other
instrument entitling or authorizing the person who executed the bond to do so.
2) A certified copy of the certificate of authority of the insurer issued by the insurance commissioner.
-
Revised 8/10/04 Contract No. 38561 -A Page 10 of 109
- If the bid is accepted, the City may require copies of the insurer's most recent annual statement and
quarterly statement filed with the Department of Insurance pursuant to Article 10 (commencing with
section 900) of Chapter 1 of Part 2 of Division 1 of the Insurance Code, within 10 calendar days of
the insurer's receipt of a request to submit the statements.
Insurance is to be placed with insurers that:
1) Have a rating in the most recent Best's Key Rating Guide of at least A-:V
2) Are admitted and authorized to transact the business of insurance in the State of California by the
Insurance Commissioner.
Auto policies offered to meet the specification of this contract must:
1) Meet the conditions stated above for all insurance companies.
2) Cover any vehicle used in the performance of the contract, used onsite or offsite, whether owned,
non-owned or hired, and whether scheduled or non-scheduled. The auto insurance certificate
must state the coverage is for "any auto" and cannot be limited in any manner.
Workers' compensation insurance required under this contract must be offered by a company
meeting the above standards with the exception that the Best's rating condition is waived. The City
does accept policies issued by the State Compensation Fund meeting the requirement for workers'
compensation insurance.
The Contractor shall be required to maintain insurance as specified in the Contract. Any additional
cost of said insurance shall be included in the bid price.
- The award of the contract by the City Council is contingent upon the Contractor submitting the
required bonds and insurance, as described in the contract, within twenty days of bid opening. If the
Contractor fails to comply with these requirements, the City may award the contract to the second or
third lowest bidder and the bid security of the lowest bidder may be forfeited.
The prime contractor and all subcontractors are required to have and maintain a valid City of
Carlsbad Business License for the duration of the contract.
ISABELLE PAULSEN, CMC
Deputy Clerk
DATED: April 30, 2004
Revised 8/10/04 Contract No. 38561-A Page 11 of 109
- City of Carlsbad
May 24,2004
ADDENDUM NO. 1
RE: HIDDEN CANYON COMMUNITY PARK, CONTRACT NO. 38561-A
Please include the attached addendum in the Notice to BiddedRequest far Bids you
have for the above project.
This addendum--receipt acknowledged--must be attached to your Request for Bid when
your bid is submitted.
'- c! JIM SARTORIO
Buyer
JS:dli
Attachment
I ACKNOWLEDGE RECEIPT OF ADDENDUM NO. I
1635 Faraday Avenue Carlsbad, CA 92008-7314 (760) 602-2430 FAX (760) 602-8553
www.ci.carlsbad.ca.us - Business License (760) 602-2495 0 Utility Billing (760) 602-2420 @ Purchasing (760) 602-2460 - FAX (760) 602-8556 - Bid Line (760) 602-2464
[ ,,-- CITY OF CARLSBAD
I ,-
CONTRACT NO. 38561-A
HIDDEN CANYON COMMUNIITY PARK
CONTRACTORS PROPOSAL
OPENED, WITNESSED AND RECORDED:
City Council
City of Carlsbad
1200 Carlsbad Village Drive
Carlsbad, California 92008 DATE
The undersigned declares he/she has carefully examined the location of the work, read the Notice
Inviting Bids, examined the Plans, Specifications, Supplemental Provisions and addenda thereto,
and hereby proposes to furnish all labor, materials, equipment, transportation, and services required
to do all the work to complete Contract No. 38561-A in accordance with the Plans, Specifications,
Supplemental Provisions and addenda thereto and that he/she will take in full payment therefore the
following unit prices for each item complete, to wit:
Description
“ BASE BID”
Total amount of bid in words for “BASE BID”- Lump sum bid for the entire scope of work as
defined in the contract documents. rr/a NII lfbnl
r&+rAI#9fcr3 bn U/-Ftd .cI
rOrr&/LLCI N5136t7 - f=ii ULScCnJ r lyOUS CtIUE. 4
d 4
Total amount of bid in numbers for “BASE BID” - Lump sum bid for the entire scope of work as
defined in the contract documents.
00 $ !AIL/- c//4 .c
BID DEDUCT ALTERNATE NO. 1
Total amount of bid in words for “BID DEDUCT ALTERNATE N0.1” - Restroom Facility as
outlined in the plans and specifications. This deduct alternate includes deletion of restroom building
and concrete slab foundation in it‘s entirety. This bid alternate shall include the stub out of all utilities
necessary for the future construction of the restroom facility and additional installation of the
landscape area in place of the restroom facility as outlined in the plans and specifications.
( refer to Appendix “A )
DPOCW f tv-e T-Fcd4Mrl dd Lks
Total amount of bid in numbers for “BID DEDUCT ALTERNATE NO. 1”
.I $ r4 5, oar> -
Revised 8/10/04 Contract No. 38561 -A 12 of 109
BID DEDUCT ALTERNATE NO. 2 - Total amount of bid in words for “BID DEDUCT ALTERNATE NO. 2”- Play Area for 2-5 year olds,
as outlined in the plans and specifications. This deduct alternate includes deletion of 2-5 year old
play area in it’s entirety. This bid alternate shall provide for installation of irrigation and lawn in place
of the 2-5 year old play area as outlined in the plans and specifications. (refer to Appendix “B” )
4N T-H~uCAD ~dd.t.r< /
Total amount of bid in numbers for “BID DEDUCT ALTERNATE NO. 2”
The basis of award will be on the BASE BID. The City reserves the right to reduce the scope
of the project by accepting BID DEDUCT ALTERNATE NO.l and / or BID DEDUCT ALTERNATE
N0.2 after award of the contract.
Price(s) given above are firm for 90 days after date of bid opening.
Addendum(a) No(s). I
proposal.
haslhave been received and is/are included in this
The Undersigned has carefully checked all of the above figures and understands that the City will not
be responsible for any error or omission on the part of the Undersigned in preparing this bid.
- The Undersigned agrees that in case of default in executing the required Contract with necessary
bonds and insurance policies within twenty (20) days from the date of award of Contract by the City
Council of the City of Carlsbad, the City may administratively authorize award of the contract to the
second or third lowest bidder and the bid security of the lowest bidder may be forfeited.
The Undersigned bidder declares, under penalty of perjury, that the undersigned is licensed to do
business or act in the capacity of a contractor within the State of California, validly licensed under
license number 38 , classification d.2 A&-8C-/ZHTCyhich expires on
, and that this statement is true and correct and has the legal effect of
an affidavit.
A bid Submitted to the City by a Contractor who is not licensed as a contractor pursuant to the
Business and Professions Code shall be considered non responsive and shall be rejected by the City 5 7028.15(e). In all contracts where federal funds are involved, no bid submitted shall be invalidated
by the failure of the bidder to be licensed in accordance with California law. However, at the time the
contract is awarded, the contractor shall be properly licensed. Public Contract Code § 20104.
The Undersigned bidder hereby represents as follows:
I. That no Council member, officer agent, or employee of the City of Carlsbad is personally
interested, directly or indirectly, in this Contract, or the compensation to be paid hereunder; that no
representation, oral or in writing, of the City Council, its officers, agents, or employees has inducted
him/her to enter into this Contract, excepting only those contained in this form of Contract and the
papers made a part hereof by its terms; and
2. That this bid is made without connection with any person, firm, or corporation making a bid for the
same work, and is in all respects fair and without collusion or fraud.
-
Revised 8/10/04 Contract No. 38561 -A 13 of 109
License Detail Page 1 of 2
[A I FI n
License Detail CALIFORNIA CONTRACTORS STATE LICENSE BOARD
Contractor License # 88
- GENERAL ENGINEERING CONTRACTOR
GENERAL BUILDING CONTRACTOR
DISCLAIMER
A license status check provides information taken from the CSLB license data base.
Before relying on this information, you should be aware of the following limitations:
CSLB complaint disclosure is restricted by law (B&P 7124.6). If this entity is
subject to public complaint disclosure, a link for complaint disclosure will appear
below. Click on the link or button to obtain complaint and/or legal action
information.
are disclosed.
the arbitration.
onto the Board's license data base.
Per B&P 7071 .17, only construction related civil judgments known to the CSLB
Arbitrations are not listed unless the contractor fails to comply with the terms of
Due to workload, there may be relevant information that has not yet been entered
Extract Date: 06/10/2004
* * * Business Information * * *
GRlFFlTH COMPANY
P 0 BOX 2150
SANTA FE SPRINGS, CA 90670
Business Phone Number: (562) 929-1 128
Entity: Corporation
Issue Date: 09/24/1929 Reissue Date: 09/01/2000 Expire Date: 09/30/2004
* * * License Status * * *
This license was previously under #32168. Refer to license 32168 for license detail prior
to 9/1/2000.
This license is current and active. All information below should be reviewed.
* * * Classifications * * *
http://ww w2.c slb.ca.gov/CSLB~LIBRARY/License+Detail. asp?LicNum=8 8 6/10/2004
License Detail
IC-8 I
Page 2 of 2
CONCRETE
EARTHWORK AND PAVING
14
* * * Certifications * * *
Description
HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES REMOVAL
* * * Bonding Information * * *
CONTRACTOR'S BOND: This license filed Contractor's Bond number
5S103333096BCM in the amount of $10,000 with the bonding company
TRAVELERS CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY OF AMERICA. Effective Date: 01/01/2004
Contractor's Bonding History
BOND OF QUALIFYING INDIVIDUAL(1): This license filed Bond of Qualifying Individual number 5S103333097BCM for JAMES DOUGLAS WALTZE in the amount of
$7,500 with the bonding company
TRAVELERS CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY OF AMERICA. Effective Date: 08/31/2000
-
* * * Workers Compensation Information * * *
This license has workers compensation insurance with the
Policy Number: WC367660601 Effective Date: 12/31/2003 Expire Date: 12/31/2004
Workers Compensation History
ZURICH AMERICAN INSURANCE COMPANY (4581 -5)
Personnel listed on this license (current or disassociated) are listed on other
licenses.
Personnel List Other Licenses
License Number Request Contractor Name Request Personnel Name Request
Salesperson Request Salesperson Name Request
.-
0 2003 State of California. Conditions of Use Privacv Policy
http://www2.cslb.ca.gov/CSLB_LIBRARY/License+Detail.asp?LicNum=S8 6/ 10/2004
Personnel List Page 1 of 1
I^^ --_ ~~~~~- ~~~~ -~ -~ Personnel List CALIFORNIA CONTRACTORS STATE LICENSE BOARD
Contractor License # 88
Click on the person's name to see a more detailed page of information on that person.
Name Title Association
Date
Disassociation More
Date Class
1 0/25/1987 B More GEORGE P
GRiFFlTH RMO/C H/E 04/10/1972
LYNN LAVON KETTE Ri NG RME 1 1 /29/1990 12/18/1990 C-8
DONALD LLOYD MC
GREW
JAMES DOUGLAS
WALTZE
WILLIAM EARL
BARNES
ROBERT PERRY
MOLKO
BOBBY GENE
SCHULTZ
ROBERT D LYTLE
-
RMO/CH 06/14/1979 04/08/1997 B More
RMO/P/E 08/13/1986 A More
OFFICER 07/13/1992
07/23/1982
EMP 02/06/1992
06/01/1973
06/01/1973
HAZ
S/T
VICE
PRESIDENT
VICE
PRESIDENT
07/23/1982
07/23/1982 JOHN E TIGER
THOMAS LESLIE FOSS 08/14/2000
--____- License Number Request _.__~ Contractor Name Request Personnel Name Requs
Salesperson Request Salesperson Name Request
0 2003 State of California. Conditions of Use Privacy Policy
.-
http://www2.cslb.ca.gov/CSLB~LIBRARY/Personnel+List.asp?LicNum=8 8 6/ 1 0/2004
c
h
z- 7
0 a
W E
D N
D m
c)
0
do
I
c)
-
0 56 H
%l H e X
n 0 f
E 8 w ..
U rA
HCJ M'
sa
H
Accompanying this proposal is
Cashier's Check) for ten percent (10%) of the amount bid.
The Undersigned is aware of the provisions of section 3700 of the Labor Code which requires every
employer to be insured against liability for workers' compensation or to undertake self-insurance in
accordance with the provisions of that code, and agrees to comply with such provisions before
commencing the performance of the work of this Contract and continue to comply until the contract is
com plete .
3 id &J 401 (Cash, Certified Check, Bond or
r_
The Undersigned is aware of the provisions of the Labor Code, Part 7, Chapter 1, Article 2, relative
to the general prevailing rate of wages for each craft or type of worker needed to execute the
Contract and agrees to comply with its provisions.
IF A SOLE OWNER OR SOLE CONTRACTOR SIGN HERE:
(I) Name under which business is conducted
(2) Signature (given and surname) of proprietor
(3) Place of Business (Street and Number)
City and State
(4) Zip Code Telephone No.
(5) E-Mail
c
IF A PARTNERSHIP, SIGN HERE:
(1) Name under which business is conducted
(2) Signature (given and surname and character of partner) (Note: Signature must be made by a general partner)
(3) Place of Business
City and State
(Street and Number)
(4) Zip Code Telephone No.
(5) E-Mail
Revised 8/10/04 Contract No. 38561 -A 14 of 109
1
1
1
\
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
s
t
E
IF A CORPORATION, SIGN HERE:
(1) Name under which business is conducted c
DANIEL A. MCGREW
(S ig na tu re) (2)
v.p/DIST. MGR
(Title)
Impress Corporate Seal here
Incorporated under the laws of the State of CA &d?n;A
Place of Business
Cityand State -5md~ &A : CA
2020 s* YAk st (Street and Number)
I NOTARIAL ACKNOWLEDGMENT OF EXECUTION BY ALL SIGNATORIES MUST BE ATTACHED
-
List below names of president, vice president, secretary and assistant secretary, if a corporation; if a
partnership, list names of all general partners, and managing partners:
Revised 811 0/04 Contract No. 38561-A 15 of 109
California All-Purpose Acknowledgment
State of CalHornia
County of Orange
On June 1,2004 before me Denise Denapoli, Notary Public
personally appeared Daniel A. McGmw, vice Pmsicht/Disfrict Manager
MPersonally known to me OR uproved to me on the basis of satisfactory evidence
to be the person(s) whose name(s) idare
subscribed to the within instrument and
acknowledged to me that he/she/they
executed the same in his/her/their authorized
capacity and that by his/her/their signature on
the instrument the person(s) or the entity upon
behalf of which the person(s) acted, executed
the instrument
Witness my hand and official seal
GRIFFITH
COMPANY
GRIFFITH COMPANY OFFICERS
Name Title Address City Zip
James D. Waltze
Thomas L. Foss
Robert P. Molko
Russell S. Grigg
Daniel L. Muns
. .obert S. Dennis
Daniel A. McGrew
Jaimie R. Angus
Gary A. Hyles
Gordon M. Csutak
Jenene Ratti
Laura D. Rau
c
PresidentC.E.0.
Executive Vice President
V. P ./C . F. 0 ./Secretary
V.P./District Manager
V.P./District Manager
V.P./District Manager
V.P./District Manager
V.P./District Manager
Assistant Secretary
Treasurer
Assistant Secretary
Controller
1853 Kinglet Court Costa Mesa
1644 Aliso Ave. Costa Mesa
16795 Silverstar Ct. Riverside
125 Stockdale Circle Bakersfield
3800 Forest Glen Yorba Linda
4416 Ave. De Las Flores Yorba Linda
6227 E. Rocking Horse Wy Orange
42100 Altanos Temecula
21640 Brook Dr. #C Tehachapi
273 Roycroft Ave. Long Beach
15491 Pasadena Ave. #I 5 Tustin
13742 Terrace Place Whittier
92626
92627
92506
93309
92686
92686
92869
92592
9356 1
90803
92780
90601
Contractors License #88
GRIFFITH COMPANY RESOLUTIONS
RESOLVED, that any one or more of the following officers of this Corporation: Chairman of the
Board, Chief Executive Officer, President, Executive Vice President, Vice PresidentEecretary and
Chief Financial Officer, together with, when required, the Secretary or Assistant Secretary, be and
they are hereby authorized to execute and deliver in the name of this Corporation any and all bids,
authorizations, contracts) notes, deeds, bonds, stocks, declarations, releases and agreements of any
nature or sort whatever.
FURTHER RESOLVED, that any one or more of the following officers of this Corporation: Vice
President/District Manager, Vice PresidentDivision Manager, District Manager, Division Manager,
Assistant District Manager, Chief Estimator, Treasurer, Controller, Assistant Secretary, be and they
are hereby authorized to execute and deliver in the name of and on behalf of this Corporation any and
all bids, authorizations, contracts, certifications, declarations and releases, including: bid bonds, labor
and material bonds, performance bonds and stop notice bonds.
FURTHER RESOLVED, that any and all persons, firms, corporations and other entities shall be
entitled to rely on the authority of any one or more of the officers above named to bind this
Corporation by the execution and delivery of any of the documents or papers set forth hereinabove.
FURTHER RESOLVED, that the authority granted hereby shall not be modified or revoked except
by a resolution to that effect passed by the Board of Directors of this Corporation.
I
FURTHER RESOLVED, that any and all authorization heretofore granted by this Corporation to any
officers other than those above named, to perform acts in the name of and on behalf of this
Corporation similar to the acts authorized above, be and they are hereby revoked, rescinded and
annulled.
The undersigned hereby certifies that he is the Secretary of Gri.6t.h Company, a California
Corporation, and does hereby certifl that the above is a hll, true and correct copy of resolutions
passed by the Board of Directors of GRIFFITH COMPANY at a meeting thereof held on March 1,
2004, in accordance with the by-laws of said GRIFFITH COMPANY and at said meeting there was
at all times a quorum present and acting and that said resolution has not, to the date of this certificate,
been in any manner amended, modifled, revoked, rescinded or annulled.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the undersigned has hereunto set his hand and &ed the seal of
GRIFFITH COMPANY this 1 st day of March, 2004.
Robert P. Moko, Secretary
BID SECURITY FORM
(Check to Accompany Bid)
CONTRACT NO. 38561-A
HIDDEN CANYON COMM'UNITY PARK
(NOTE: The following form shall,be used if check accompanies bid.)
Accompanying this proposal is a *Certified *Cashiers check payable to the order of CITY OF
CARLSBAD, in the sum of
dollars ($ )I this amount being ten percent (10%) of the total amount of the bid. The proceeds of this check shall
become the property of the City provided this proposal shall be accepted by the City through action of
its legally constituted contracting authorities and the undersigned shall fail to execute a contract and
furnish the iequired Performance, Warranty and Payment Bonds and proof of insurance coverage
within the stipulated time; otherwise, the check shall be returned to the undersigned. The proceeds of
this check shall also become the property of the City if the undersigned shall withdraw his or her bid
within the period of fifteen (15) days after the date set for the opening thereof, unless otherwise
required by law, and notwithstanding the award of the contract to another bidder.
I
*Delete the inapplicable word.
(NOTE: If the Bidder desires to use a bond instead of check, the Bid Bond form on the following pages shall be
executed--the sum of this bond shall be not less than ten percent (10%) of the total amount of the bid.)
I k
I
t ,-
Revised 8/10/04 Contract No. 38561-A 16 of 109
BIDDER’S BOND TO ACCOMPANY PROPOSAL
HIDDEN CANYON COMMUNITY PARK
CONTRACT NO, 3856’lmA
Travelers Casualty and Surety KNOW ALL PERSONS BY THESE PRESENTS:
as Surety are held and Rrmfy bound unto the City of Carlsbad, California, in an amount as follows: (must be at least ten percent (10%) of the bid amount) Ten Percent (10%) of the * for which
payment, well and tnrb made, we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors and’ administrators,
successors or assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents.
THE CONDITION OF THE FOREGOING OBLIGATION IS SUCH that if the proposal of the above- bounden Principal for.
That we, Griff ith Company , as Pfincipal, and Company of America 1
* Total Amount of the Bid
HIDDEN CANYON COMMUNITY PARK, CONTRACT NO. 385616 *
in the City of Carfsbad, Is accepted by the City Council, and If the Principal shall duly enter Into and
execute a Contract inchding requlred bonds and insurance pollcies within twenty (20) days from the
date of award of Contract by the City Council of the City of Carlsbad. being duly ‘notifled of said
award, then this obligation shall become null and void; otherwise, it shall be and remain in full forcq
and effect, and the amount specified he& shall be forfeited to the said City.
,
Revised 8/10/04 Contract No. 38561 -A 17 of 109
In the event Principal executed this bond as an individual, It is agreed that the death of Principal shall not exonerate the Surety from its obligations under this bond.
Executed by PRINCIPAL thls 2nd day of June ,2004 ,
.C . .
DANIEL A. MCGREW
Executed by SUREN this 1st day of June # 20E.
SURETY:
(prht name here)
Assistant Secretary .
(Utle and organization of signatory}
Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America
(name af Surety)
(address of Surety)
(telephone nuTber of Surety)
21688 Gateway Center Drive
Diamond Bar, CA 91765 ---
909-612-3650 -
By:
\I Leigh McDonough, Attorney-in-Fact
(printed name of Attorney-in-Fact)
-
(Attach corporate resolution showing current power of attorney.)
(Proper notarlal acknowledgment of execution by. PRINCJPAL and SURETY must be attached.)
(President or vice-president and secretary or assistant secretary must sign for corporatlons. If only one officer signs, the corporation must attach a resolution certified by the secretary or assistant secretary under corporate seal empowering that officer to bind the corporation.)
APPROVED AS TO FORM:
RONALD R. BALL
City Afforney
A
Revised 8/1 Q104 Contract No. 3866 1. -A 18 of 109
County of Orange
On June 2,2004
personally appeared
before me
Daniel A. McGmw, Vice President/District Manager
Denise Denapoli, Notary Public
MPersonally known to me OR OProved to me on the basis of satisfactory evidence
to be the person(s) whose name(s) idare
subscribed to the within instrument and
acknowledged to me that he/she/they
executed the same in his/her/their authorized
capacity and that by his/her/their signature on
the instrument the person(s) or the entity upon
behalf of which the person(s) acted, executed
the instrument
-
Witness my hand and official seal
BID BOND
California All-Purpose Acknowledgment
State of California
County of Orange
On June 2,2004 before me Denise Denapoli, Notary Public
personally appeared Jenene Ratti; Assistant Secmary
HPersonally known to me OR OProved to me on the basis of satisfactory evidence
to be the person(s) whose name(s) idare
subscribed to the within instrument and
acknowledged to me that he/she/they
executed the same in his/her/their authorized
capacity and that by his/her/their signature on
the instrument the person(s) or the entity upon
behalf of which the person(s) acted, executed
the instrument
Witness my hand and official seal
I.
AA R Signature of Ndtary
BID BOND
CALIFORNIA ALL-PURPOSE ACKNOWLEDGMENT NO. 5907
State of California
County of Orange
On June 1, 2004 before me, Ashley K. Ward, Notary Public I
personally appeared Leigh McDonough 1
[XI personally known to me - OR - proved to me on the basis of satisfactory evidence to be the person(s)
whose name(s) idare subscribed to the within instrument and
acknowledged to me that he/she/they executed the same in
his/her/their authorized capacity(ies), and that by his/her/their
signature(s) on the instrument the person@), or the entity upon
behalf of which the person(s) acted, executed the instrument.
DATE NAME, TITLE OF OFFICER - E.G., "JANE DOE, NOTARY PUBLIC"
NAME(S) OF SIGNER@)
WITNESS my hand and official seal.
SIGNATURE OF NOTARY
OPTIONAL
Though the data below is not required by law, it may prove valuable to persons relying on the document and
could prevent fraudulent reattachment of this form.
0 0
0
IXI 0 0
CAPACITY CLAIMED BY SIGNER
INDIVIDUAL
CORPORATE OFFICER
DESCRIPTION OF ATTACHED DOCUMENT
TITLE OR TYPE OF DOCUMENT TITLE(S)
LIMITED E GENERAL
PARTNER(S)
ATTORNEY-IN-FACT
TRUSTEE(S)
GUARDIAN/CONSERVATOR
OTHER:
NUMBER OF PAGES
SIGNER IS REPRESENTING: DATE OF DOCUMENT
NAME OF PERSON(S) OR ENTITY(1ES)
SIGNER(S) OTHER THAN NAMED ABOVE
S4067lGEEF 2/98 6 1993 NATIONAL NOTARY ASSOCIATION 8236 Remmet Ave.. P.O. Box 7184 * Canoga Park, CA 91309-718
TRAVR~CASUALTYANDSURETYCOMPANYOFAMERICA TRAvE~cASUALTYANDsuBIGTycoMPANY FARM3NG"ONCASUALTY COMPANY FIluth* connectfcat 061834062
POWER OF ATTORNEY AND CERTIFICATE OF AUTHORITY OF ATI'ORNEY(S)-lN-FACT
-
IN WxTNESs WmREOP, TRAVELERS CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY OP AMERIcAp TRAVELER8 CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY and BARMlNGTON CASUALTY COMPANY hava caused thin bstmmmt to b(
signadby their Scnior VIce President and tbelr corporate seala to'ba hereto affixed this loth day afFcbruary 2003.
w Oeorge w. Thompson- -- Senlor Vlce President
-- *
Korl M. Johanson
Assistant Secretary, Bond '
.. .. .
., : .. .. ..
3.i. .- ._ .. .. .'. .. .. c .. ' .
IMPORTANT DISCLOSURE NOTICE OF TERRORISM
INSURANCE COVERAGE
On November 26, 2002, President Bush signed into law the
Terrorism Risk Insurance Act of 2002 (the "Act"). The Act
establishes a short-term program under which the Federal
Government will share in the payment of covered losses caused
by certain acts of international terrorism. We are providing you with
this notice to inform you of the key features of the Act, and to let
you know what effect, if any, the Act will have on your premium.
Under the Act, insurers are required to provide coverage for
in the Act. The Act further provides that the Federal Government
will pay a share of such losses. Specifically, the Federal
Government will pay 90% of the amount of covered losses caused
by certain acts of terrorism which is in excess of Travelers'
statutorily established deductible for that year. The Act also caps
the amount of terrorism-related losses for which the Federal
Government or an insurer can be responsible at
$1 00,000,000,000.00, provided that the insurer has met its
deductible.
I certain losses caused by international acts of terrorism as defined
Please note that passage of the Act does not result in any change
in coverage under the attached policy or bond (or the policy or
bond being quoted). Please also note that no separate additional
premium charge has been made for the terrorism coverage
required by the Act. The premium charge that is allocable to such
coverage is inseparable from and imbedded in your overall
premium, and is no more than one percent of your premium.
Company Profile Page 1 of 2
.-
Company Profile
TRAVELERS CASUALTY AND SURETY
COMPANY OF AMERICA
ONE TOWER SQUARE, 4MN TRAVELERS / Mary T. Restelli
HARTFORD, CT 06 183
877-872-8737
Former Names for Company
Effective Date: 07-01-1997 AETNA CASUALTY & SURETY COMPANY OF Old Name: AMERICA
Agent for Service of Process
ERE KEPRIOS, C/O CT CORPORATION SYSTEM 818 WEST SEVENTH STREET, 2ND FLOOR
LOS ANGELES, CA 90017
Unable to Locate the Agent for Service of Process?
Reference Information
NAIC #: 31194
NAIC Group #: 3548
Date authorized in California:
Company Type: Property & Casualty
State of Domicile: CONNECTICUT
California Company ID #: 2444- 8
July 3 1, 1981
License Status: UNLIMITED-NORMAL
Lines of Insurance Authorized to Transact
The company is authorized to transact business within these lines of insurance. For an explanation of
any of these terms, please refer to the glossary.
AIRCRAFT
AUTOMOBILE
BOILER AND MACHINERY
BURGLARY
COMMON CARRIER LIABILITY
CREDIT
http ://cdinsw ww . insurance .c a. gov/pl s/wu~co~prof/idb~co~prof~utl. ge t_co_prof?p_EID=6 1.. . 6/ 10/2004
Company Profile Page 2 of 2
DISABILITY
FIRE
LIABILITY
MARINE
MISCELLANEOUS
PLATE GLASS
SPRINKLER
SURETY
TEAM AND VEHICLE
WORKERS' COMPENSATION
Company Complaint Information
ComDanv Enforcement Action Documents
Company Performance & Comparison Data
Comuosite Complaint Studies
__
Want More?
Help Me Find a Company Representative in My Area
Financial Rating Organizations
Last Revised - April 26,2004 02:22 PM Copyright Q California Department of Insurance Disclaimer
http://cdinswww .insurance.ca. gov/pls/wu~co~prof/idb~co~prof~utl .get-co-prof?p-EID=6 1.. . 6/10/2004
GUIDE FOR COMPLETING
THE “DESIGNATION OF SUBCONTRACTORS” FORM
REFERENCES Prior to preparation of the following Subcontractor disclosure form Bidders are urged
to review the definitions in section 1-2 of the SSPWC (“Greenbook”) and in the Supplemental
Provisions to this Contract, especially, ”Bid”, “Bidder“, “Contract”, “Contractor“, “Contract Price”,
“Contract Unit Price”, “Engineer”, “Subcontractor” and “Work* and the definitions in section 1-2 of the
Supplemental Provisions especially “Own Organization.” Bidders are further urged to review sections
2-3 SUBCONTRACTS of the Greenbook and section 2-3.1 of these Supplemental Provisions.
CAUTIONS This form will be used by the Agency to determine the percentage of work that the
Bidder proposes to perform. Bidders are cautioned that failure to provide complete and correct
information may result in rejection of the bid as non-responsive. Any bid that proposes performance
of more than 50 percent of the work by subcontractors or otherwise to be preformed by forces other
than the Bidder’s own organization will be rejected as non-responsive. Specialty items of work that
may be so designated by the Engineer on the “Contractor‘s Proposal” are not included in computing
the percentage of work proposed to be performed by the Bidder.
INSTRUCTIONS The Bidder shall set forth the name and location of business of each and every
subcontractor whom the Bidder proposes to perform work or labor or render setvice in or about the
work or improvement, and every subcontractor licensed as a contractor by the State of California
whom the Bidder proposes to specially fabricate and install any portion of the work or improvement
according to detailed drawings contained in the plans and specifications in excess of one-half of one
percent (0.5%) of the Bidder‘s total bid or, in the case of bids or offers for the construction of streets
and highways, including bridges, in excess of one-half of one percent (0.5%) or ten thousand dollars
($10,000) whichever is greater. Said name(s) and location(s) of business of subcontractor(s) shall be
set forth and included as an integral part of the bid offer.
-
The Designation of Subcontractors form must be submitted as a part of the Bidder‘s sealed bid.
Failure to provide complete and correct information may result in reiection of the bid as non-
responsive.
Suppliers of materials from sources outside the limits of work are not subcontractors. The value of
materials and transport of materials from sources outside the limits of work, as shown on the plans,
shall be assigned to the Contractor or the Subcontractor as the case may be, that the Bidder
proposes as installer of said materials. The value of material incorporated in any Subcontractor-
installed bid item that is supplied by the Bidder shall be included as a part of the work that the Bidder
proposes to be performed by the Subcontractor installing said item.
When a Subcontractor has a Carlsbad business license, the number must be entered on the proper
form. If the Subcontractor does not have a valid business license, enter “NONE in the appropriate
space.
When the Bidder proposes using a Subcontractor to construct or install less than 100 percent of a
bid item, the Bidder shall attach an explanation sheet to the Designation of Subcontractor form. The
explanation sheet shall clearly apprise the City of the specific facts that show the Bidder proposes to
perform no less than fifty percent (50%) of the work with its own forces.
I Determination of the subcontract amounts for purposes of award of the contract shall be determined
by the City Council in conformance with the provisions of the contract documents and the
Supplemental Provisions. The decision of the City Council shall be final.
Revised 8/10/04 Contract No. 38561 -A 19 of 109
Contractor is prohibited from performing any work on this project with a subcontractor who is
ineligible to perform work on a public works project pursuant to Labor Code Sections 1771.1 or
1777.7.
Bidders shall make any additional copies of the disclosure forms as may be necessary to provide the
required information. The page number and total number of additional form pages shall be entered in
the location provided on each type of form so duplicated.
Revised 8/10/04 Contract No. 38561 -A 20 of 109
DESIGNATION OF SUBCONTRACTOR AND
AMOUNT OF SUBCONTRACTOR'S BID ITEMS
HIDDEN CANYON COMMUNITY PARK
CONTRACT NO. 38561-A
The Bidder certifies that it has used the sub-bid of the following listed subcontractors in preparing this bid for the Work and that the listed subcontractors will be used to perform the portions of the Work
as designated in this list in accordance with applicable provisions of the specifications and section 4100 et seq. of the Public Contract Code, "Subletting and Subcontracting Fair Practices Act." The Bidder further certifies that no additional subcontractor will be allowed to perform any portion of the Work in excess of one-half of one percent (0.5%) of the Bidder's total bid, or in the case of bids or
offers for construction of streets and highways, including bridges, in excess of one-half of one percent (0.5%) or ten thousand dollars ($10,000), whichever is greater, and that no changes in the subcontractors listed work will be made except upon the prior approval of the Agency.
SUBCONTRACTOR'S BID ITEMS
Subcontractor's License No.*
Page of 3 pages of this Subcontractor Designation form
* Pursuant to section 4104 (a)(2)(A) California Public Contract Code, receipt of the information preceded by an asterisk may be submitted
by the Bidder up to 24 hours after the deadline for submitting bids contained in the "Notice Inviting Bids."
Revised 8/10/04 Contract No. 38561 -A 21 of 109
DESIGNATION OF SUBCONTRACTOR AND
AMOUNT OF SUBCONTRACTOR'S BID ITEMS
HIDDEN CANYON COMMUNITY PARK
CONTRACT NO. 38561-A
The Bidder certifies that it has used the sub-bid of the following listed subcontractors in preparing this
bid for the Work and that the listed subcontractors will be used to perform the portions of the Work as designated in this list in accordance with applicable provisions of the specifications and section 4100 et seq. of the Public Contract Code, "Subletting and Subcontracting Fair Practices Act." The Bidder further certifies that no additional subcontractor will be allowed to perform any portion of the Work in excess of one-half of one percent (0.5%) of the Bidder's total bid, or in the case of bids or
offers for construction of streets and highways, including bridges, in excess of one-half of one percent (0.5%) or ten thousand dollars ($10,000), whichever is greater, and that no changes in the subcontractors listed work will be made except upon the prior approval of the Agency.
SUBCONTRACTOR'S BID ITEMS
Subcontractor's License No.*
Page 2 of 3 pages of this Subcontractor Designation form
Pursuant to section 41 04 (a)(2)(A) California Public Contract Code, receipt of the information preceded by an asterisk may be submitted
by the Bidder up to 24 hours after the deadline for submitting bids contained in the "Notice Inviting Bids."
Revised 811 0/04 Contract No. 38561-A 21 of 109
DESIGNATION OF SUBCONTRACTOR AND
AMOUNT OF SUBCONTRACTOR’S BID ITEMS
HIDDEN CANYON COMMUNITY PARK
CONTRACT NO. 38561-A
The Bidder certifies that it has used the sub-bic! of the following listed subcontractors in preparing this bid for the Work and that the listed subcontractors will be used to perform the portions of the Work as designated in this list in accordance with applicable provisions of the specifications and section
4100 et seq. of the Public Contract Code, “Subletting and Subcontracting Fair Practices Act.” The Bidder further certifies that no additional subcontractor will be allowed to perform any portion of the Work in excess of one-half of one percent (0.5%) of the Bidder’s total bid, or in the case of bids or
offers for construction of streets and highways, including bridges, in excess of one-half of one percent (0.5%) or ten thousand dollars ($lO,OOO), whichever is greater, and that no changes in the subcontractors listed work will be made except upon the prior approval of the Agency.
SUBCONTRACTOR’S BID ITEMS
Subcontractor’s License No.’
Page .3 of 3 pages of this Subcontractor Designation form
Pursuant to section 4104 (a)(Z)(A) California Public Contract Code, receipt of the information preceded by an asterisk may be submitted
by the Bidder up to 24 hours after the deadline for submitting bids contained in the ‘Notice Inviting Bids.”
Revised 8/10/04 Contract No. 38561 -A 21 of 109
BIDDER'S STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL RESPONSIBILITY
(To Accompany Proposal)
CONTRACT NO. 38561 -A
HIDDEN CANYON COMMUNITY PARK
Copies of the latest Annual Report, audited financial statements or Balance Sheets may be submitted under separate cover marked CONFIDENTIAL.
Revised 811 0/04 Contract No. 38561 -A 22 of I09
BIDDER'S STATEMENT OF
TECHNICAL ABILITY AND EXPERIENCE
(To Accompany Proposal)
CONTRACT NO. 38561 -A
HIDDEN CANYON COMMUNITY PARK
The Bidder is required to state what work of a similar character to that included in the proposed
Contract helshe has successfully performed and give references, with telephone numbers, which will
enable the City to judge his/her responsibility, experience and skill. An attachment can be used.
I
Revised 8/10/04 Contract No. 38561 -A 23 of I09
_-
GRIFFITH COMPANY
2020 Yale Street, Santa Ana, CA 92704
CONSTRUCTION EXPERIENCE REFERENCES
Projects Under Construction from: 1995 to Present
Orange County Division
CURRENT JOBS IN BOLD TYPE
Reference: Project :
The Irvine Company
Mr. Jim Lorman
VP Construction
949-720-2447
Northwoods Phase 1A & 1B
Pelican Hills, Phase I & II
SCE Access Road & Cribwalls
Ocean Ridge I & 11 Development
Mass Grading, Vista Ridge Road
Planning Area 10, Tract No. 15232
Peters Canyon Wash Facility - F06
Oakcreek Phase I Improvements
Oakcreek Phase 11 Improvements
Bison Ave. Extension/I-73/Irvine
Culver Dr. Imp./Lower Peters Cnyn
El Camino St. & Bridge Improve.
Portola Parkway Sector 2
Michelle Dr. Bridge & Street Imp
Bonita Canyon/Bayswater Imp
University Research Park
Newport Coast/ Ocean Heights
Market Place
Crystal Cove Phase I
Bonita Canyon - PA26
Lower Peters Canyon Ph-3
Portola Parkway Widening
Peter’s Canyon Wash
City of Newport Beach
Mr. Gail Pickart
Project Manager
MacArthur Blvd. Widening, Segment 1
MacArthur Blvd. Widening, Segment 2
949-673-6779
City of Vista
Mr. Marshall Plantz Vista Village
Senior Engineer
North Santa Fe Avenue Street Imp.
760-726- 1340
A City of Riverside
Mr. Sandy Caldwell
Principal Engineer
Jurupa Avenue Widening
909-782-4348
Value:
$5,194,008
$1,108,002
$1,850,062
$4,5 8 1,7 10
$1,253,048
$6,345,000
$4,660,736
$1,980,527
$2,007,118
$10,200,797
$3,323,005
$4,430,416
$1,047,853
$ 130,438
$2,149,156
$1,172,875
$2,988,799
$3,839,264
$1,290,043
$2,807,549
$4,244,367
$2,300,000
$5,141,989
$5,167,937
$2,010,000
$5,506,74 1
$1 7,385,323
$ 832,743
F:/user/denise/constction ref list
CONTINUED
Reference: Project:
Caltrans Sycamore Avenue Undercrossing
Mr. Arthur Padilla
Resident Engineer
Caltrans
Mr.Dat Pham
Resident Engineer
Rt. 78 - Near Vista - San Diego Co.
61 9-727-1 537
405 Freeway Harbor B1 to
Euclid St. Off Ramp
714-556-1 746
County of Orange
Mr. Dave Marshall
Chief of Construction
714-567-7838 Antonio Parkway Extension
Pacific Coast Highway Widening
Sand Canyon Avenue @ PCH
Newport Coast Drive / San Joaquin
Valencia Ave. Street Improv.
Newport Blvd. Widening Ph-II
City of Anaheim
Director of Construction
7 14-254-5386
Kraemer Avenue Rehabilitation
Harbor BoulevardLa Palma Avenue
Harbor B1. Imp. & Beautification
- Mr. Dave Nelson Area V Site Development
Caltrans PCH - Huntington Beach
Mr. Bill Decker
Mr. Larry Kellerman
Resident Engineers
Beach Boulevard, I405 to Lincoln
7 14-724-2277
City of Irvine Westpark II, Phase II
Mr. Tom Mazzola Yale Avenue Undercrossing
Project Engineer Bridge Deck Sealing
949-724-7546
City of Mission Viejo
Mr. Jerome Reddins
Project Manager
Crown Valley Parkway Offramp, Rte. 5
7 14-472-3505
Mr. Mark Chagnon Alicia Parkway Improvements
949-470-309 1
Value:
$4,038,689
$4,254,070
$8,100,000
$2,800,000
$23,781,842
$4,758,8 13
$1,198,678
$3,488,914
$ 166,653
$ 619,067
$1,591,828
$5,198,675
$3,578,743
$1 1,070,140
$4,878,000
$1,730,343
$ 25,000
$ 399,713
$ 778,321
,-
F:/user/denise/constction ref list
CONTINUED
Reference: Project: Value:
John Wayne Airport/ John Wayne Airport Runway/Taxiways $1 1,000,000
County of Orange Main St. Parking Lot SR55 Ramp - JWA $ 495,420
Mr. Dave McMiller Ron North Trench Drain - JWA $ 736,368
Project Manager
7 14-252-5 17 1
City of Dana Point
Dennis Jue
Deputy City Engineer
Doheny Village Street Improve.
949-248-3574
$98 1,945
Irvine Ranch Water District Channel Basin #1 Sand Removal $24,490.00
Eric Akiyoshi
Project Manager
949-453-5854
County of Riverside
Resident Engineer
Interstate 21 5 & Newport Road
c Wael Faqih
909-301-6991
City of Murrieta
Richard Soltysiak
Project Manager
Town Square Improvements
909-296-3466
City of Diamond Bar
Dewan, Lundin &
Associates
Brea Canyon Road Improvements
7 14-740-8840
$4,969,92 1
$1,545,258
$2,158,246
Fontana Unified Ted Porter Interim School Site Work $496,694.00
School District
WLC Construction Svc
Jonathan Clarke
909-476-6005
F:/user/denise/constction ref list
r? Ocean View School Dist. Four Gymnasium/Auditorium Buildings $798,798.00
Douglas E. Barnhart, Inc.
John Bernardy
714-734-8466
Los Angeles World Airports Ontario International Airport $6,162,490.00
Robert H. Millard Parking Lot Expansion
3 10-646-5252
,-
City of Corona
Steve Enna
909-736-2201
City of Fountain Valley
Bassam Alasker
714-593-4443
Temecula Valley
Unified School Dist.
Edge Development
David A. Irwin
909-296-0776
Dept. of Transportation
RE: Carl Lindquist
7 14-688- 1935
City of bine
Arthur Santelices
949-724-6000
Chase Dr. Improvements
Warner Ave. Rehabilitation
Temecula Valley H.S. Site Prep
Lincoln Ave. Park & Ride
1-405 / Sand Canyon Interchange
$477,6 1 1 .OO
$1,589,854.00
$650,650.00
$139,280.50
$1,363,473.40
F:/user/denise/constction ref list
County of Riverside
Tom Rafferty
Project Manager
Limonite & Hamner Ave
909-95 5-68 85
Dept. of General Svcs
John Feeney Military Department
Project Manager
Repair Shoulders Runway 22L
9 1 6-3 75-425 8
$2,197,064.90
$5 50,200.00
Ontario-Montclair School Dist Bandera Elementary School $2,168,278.00
Craig Misso
Project Manager
909-459-2500
Ontario-Montclair School Dist Oaks Elementary School $1,904,000.00
Craig Misso
Project Manager
909-459-2500
City of Laguna Niguel
Frank Borges
Civil Engineer
949-362-4337
City of Santa Ana
William Albright
Assistant Engineer
714-647-5029
City of Oceanside
Gary Kellison
Senior Civil Engineer
760-435-51 12
F:/user/denise/constction ref list
Retaining Walls $1,039,930.00
Street of the Golden Lantern
Memory Lane Bridge Widening $2,857,216.00
Rancho Del Oro Dr. Extension $5,898,306.00
I City of Murrieta
Jim Geyer
Project Engineer
909-304-2489
City of Oceanside
Kirk Streets
Project Engineer
760-43 5 -5 089
Ivey Ranch
Development Company
Jim Houlihan
949-588-2233
City of Hemet
Art Hernandez
Project Engineer
909-765-2348
City of Murrieta
Russ Napier
Associate Civil Engineer
909-304-2489
City of Murrieta
Russ Napier
Associate Civil Engineer
909-304-2489
Washington Ave Improvements $2,995,579.00
Alex Road Improvements $ 470,705.00
Collins Property WetlandlFlood $ 609,633.00
Control Basins
State Street & Channel
Improvements
Murrieta Town Square
Los Alamos Road
$3,983,145.00
$1,598,679.00
$1,098,018.71
F:/user/denise/constction ref list
BIDDERS CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE FOR
GENERAL LlABI LITY, EM PLOY ERS' LIABILITY, AUTO MOTIVE
LIABILITY AND WORKERS' COMPENSATION
(To Accompany Proposal)
HIDDEN CANYON COMMUNITY PARK
CONTRACT NO. 385614
As a required part of the Bidder's proposal the Bidder must attach either of the following to this page.
1) Certificates of insurance showing conformance with the requirements herein for each of:
!
Comprehensive General Liability
Automobile Liability
Workers Compensation
Employer's Liability
2) Statement with an insurance carrier's notarized signature stating that the carrier can, and upon
payment of fees and/or premiums by the Bidder, will issue to the Bidder Policies of insurance for
Comprehensive General Liability, Automobile Liability, Workers Compensation and Employer's
Liability in conformance with the requirements herein and Certificates of insurance to the Agency
showing conformance with the requirements herein.
All certificates of insurance and statements of willingness to issue insurance for auto policies offered
to meet the specification of this contract must:
1) Meet the conditions stated in The Notice Inviting Bids, the Standard Specifications for Public
Works Construction and the Supplemental Provisions for this project for each insurance
company that the Contractor proposes.
2) Cover any vehicle used in the performance of the contract, used onsite or offsite, whether owned,
non-owned or hired, and whether scheduled or non-scheduled. The auto insurance certificate
must state the coverage is for "any auto" and cannot be limited in any manner.
Revised 8/10/04 Contract No. 38561 -A 24 of 109
GRlFFlTH
COMPANY
CORPORATE OFFICE
12200 Bloomfield Ave
P.O. Box 2150
Santa Fe Springs, CA
90670-01 50
[562] 929-1 128
fax [562] 929-7116
BAKERSFIELD DISTRICT
1898 South Union Ave.
P.O. Box 70157
Bakersfield, CA
93387-01 57
16611 831-7331
fax 16611 831-0113
Los ANGELES DISTRIC~
12200 Bloomfield Ave
PO. Box2150
Santa Fe Springs, CA
90670-01 50
[562] 929-1 128
fax [562] 864-8970
/-- ORANGE COUNN DISTRICT
2020 South Yale Street
Santa Ana, CA
92704-3974
[714] 549-2291
fax 17141 549-4033
STRUCTURE DIVISION
12200 Bloomfield Ave
P.O. Box 2150
Santa Fe Springs, CA
90670-01 50
[562] 929-1 128
fax [562] 929-3799
UNDERGROUND DIVISION
12200 Bloomfield Ave
P.0 Box2150
Santa Fe Springs, CA
90670-0150
[562] 929-1 128
fax [562] 929-7116
www.griffithcompany.net
Griffith Company
2020 S. Yale Street
Santa Ana, CA 92704
Ph: 714-549-2291 Fax: 714-549-4033
Contractors Lic.# 88
Expires: 9/30/2004
Originally Issued 9/24/1929
Federal ID# 95-0795590
Date of Incorporation: December 7, 1922
State Unemployment Ins. No. 001 7141 3
State Sales Tax Registration No. SZAA 99-286787
California Corp.# D 101416
Class: HA2 A B C-8 C-12 HIC
Broker: Surety:
Aon
1901 Main Street
Suite 300
Irvine, CA 92614
Ph: 949-608-6358
Fax: 949-608-6398
Travelers Casualty & Surety Company
21688 Gateway Dr.
Diamond Bar, CA 91765
Bonding Capacity $58,568,000
Insurance Information:
General Liability, Automobile, Workers Compensation:
Zurich American Insurance Company
801 N. Brand Blvd., Penthouse Suite
Glendale, CA 91203
Mike Jones
818-409-7853
Policy Numbers:
General Liability: GL0367660700
Automobile: BAP367660800
Workers Comp: WC367660600 Contractors
License #88
No tarys :
c Denise Denapoli - Expires: December 5, 2006
Jenene Ratti - Expires: May 1, 2006
DATE(MM/DD/W)
07/13/04 I ACORD,. ~ERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE
~
THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY I AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS r 1901 Main street
PRODUCER Aon Risk Services, Inc. of southern California
CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE I COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW.
I- Suite 300 Irvine CA 92614 USA
INSURERS AFFORDING COVERAGE PHONE. (949) 608 - 6 300 FAX- (949) 608-6451
INSURED Griffith Company 2020 Yale street santa Ana CA 92704-3974 USA
INSURER A Zurich American Ins Co
INSURER B
INSURER C:
INSURER D:
I I MSIJRER E. .. - -
,,COVERAGES This Certificate is not intended to specify all endorsements, coverages, terms, conditions and excfusions of the policiis shown.
THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED, NOTWITHSTANDING I ANY REOUIREMENT. TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY
PERTAIN; THE INSU~ANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREM IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. AGGREGATE LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS.
TYPE OF INSURANCE I POLICY NUMBER
GL0367660701
General Liability I I A ~NERAL LIABLLITY
X COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY I CLAIMS MADE OCCUR
I HI
A AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY BAP367660801
Automobile 7 ANYAUTO
ALL OWNED AUTOS
SCHEDULED AUTOS
HIRED-AUTOS
NON OWNED AUTOS
'OLICY EFFECTlVl DATE(MMU)D\YY)
12/31/03
12/31/03
12/31/03
/SPECIAL PROVISIO
LIMITS OLICY EXPIRATION DATE(MMWD\YY)
12/31/04 EACH OCCURRENCE I s1,000,00 I FIRE DAMAGUA~~ one fire) I S50,00(
PERSONAL & ADV INJURY
I I 12/31/04 COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT
(Ea accident) 91,000,00~
I BODILY INJURY I (Peraccidcnt) I PROPERTY DAMAGE (Per accident) I
OTHERTHAN EAACC
AUTO ONLY
EACHOCCURRENCE
GARAGE LIABILITY
ANY AUTO
EXCESS LIABILITY 7 OCCUR CLAIMSMADE
DEDUCTIBLE
RETENTION
A WORKERS COMPENSATION AND wc367660601
EMPLOYERS LIABILITY workers' Compensation
OTHER
DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS/LOCATIONSNHICLES/EXCLUSIONS ADDED BY ENDORSEM
Re: Hidden canyon Community park - Contract # 38561-A - see Endorsement(5) Attached
AGGREGATE I
12/31/04 X WC STATU- OTH- TORY LIMITS ER s1,000,00~ E.L. EACH ACCIDENT
s1,000,00~ I E.L. DISEASE-POLICY LIMIT I I E L DISEASE-EA EMPLOYEE I sl,ooo,oo~ I I
Cit ot Carlsbad 163! Faraday Ave Carlsbad CA 92008 USA
SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION
DATE THEREOF, THE ISSUING COMPANY WILL
60 DAYS WRITTEN NOTICE TO THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER NAMED TO THE LEFT,
MAIL
AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE
W
POL1 CY NUMBER: GL036766070 1 COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY I
THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY
ADDITIONAL INSURED - OWNERS, LESSEES OR
CONTRACTORS (FORM B)
This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following:
COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY COVERAGE PART
SCHEDULE
Name of Person or Organization:
City of Carlsbad, its Officials, Employees and Volunteers
Re: Hidden Canyon Community Park - Contract # 38561-A
(If no entry appears above, information required to complete this endorsement will be shown in
the Declarations as applicable to this endorsement.)
WHO IS AN INSURED (Section 11) is amended to include as an insured the person or organization
shown in the Schedule, but only with respect to liability arising out of or related to “your work” or its
supervision for that insured by or for you.
f
PRIMARY INSURANCE: It is agreed that such insurance as afforded by this policy for the benefit
of the additional insured shall be primary insurance as respects any claim, loss or liability arising
directly or indirectly from the insured’s operations and any other insurance maintained by the
additional insured shall be non-contributory with the insurance provided hereunder.
AI-Primary CG20 1 Op( 1 1-85)
POLICY NUMBER: BAP367660801 AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY
THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. READ IT CAREFULLY.
ADDITIONAL INSURED
This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following:
BUSINESS AUTO COVERAGE FORM
SCHEDULE
Name of Person or Organization:
City of Carlsbad, its Officials, Employees and Volunteers
Re: Hidden Canyon Community Park - Contract # 38561-A
We agreg with you that the person or organization shown in the schedule above is an insured for
“bodily injury’’ or “property damage” &sing out of the operation of a covered “auto” under a
contract or agreement which is made prior to the injury or damage.
Authorized Representative ”
AUTOAI (1 0-95)
BIDDERS §TATEMENT RE DEBARMENT
(To Accompany Proposal)
CONTRACT NO. 38561 -A
HIDDEN CANYON COMMUNITY PARK
1) Have you or any of your subcontractors ever been debarred as an irresponsible bidder by another jurisdiction in the State of California? x Yes no
2) If yes, what wadwere the name(s) of the agency(ies) and what wadwere the period(s) of debarment(s)? Attach additional copies of this page to accommodate more than two debarments.
party debarred party debarred
agency agency
period of debarment periGd of debarment -
BY CONTRACTOR:
YJ. -
(sign here)
DANIEL A. MCGREW \/.P/DIST. MGR
(print namehitie) .
Page of pages of this Re Debarment form
_-
Revised 811 0104 Contract No. 38561 -A 25 of 109
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I-
!
I
1
I
I
I
I
I
1
-c.
-
BIDDER’S DISCLOSURE OF DISCIPLINE RECORD
(To Accompany Proposal)
CONTRACT NO. 38561-A
HIDDEN CANYON COMMUNITY PARK
Contractors are required by law to be licensed and regulated by the Contractors’ State License Board
which has jurisdiction to investigate complaints against contractors if a complaint regarding a patent
act or omission is filed within four years of the date of the alleged violation. A complaint regarding a
latent act or omission pertaining to structural defects must be filed within 10 years of the date of the
alleged violation. Any questions concerning a contractor may be referred to the Registrar,
Contractors’ State License board, P.O. Box 26000, Sacramento, California 95826.
Have you ever had your contractor’s license suspended or revoked by the California Contractors’
State license Board two or more times within an eight year period? x Yes no
Has the suspension or revocation of your contractors license ever been stayed?
3- no
Have any subcontractors that you propose to perform any portion of the Work ever had their
contractor‘s license suspended or revoked by the California Contractors’ State license Board two
or more times within an eight year period?
x Yes no
Has the suspension or revocation of the license of any subcontractor‘s that you propose to
perform any portion of the Work ever been stayed? x Yes no
If the answer to either of 1. or-3. above is yes fully identify, in each and every case, the party
disciplined, the date of and violation that the disciplinary action pertairi to, describe the nature of
the violation and the disciplinary action taken therefor.
(If needed attach additional sheets to provide full disclosure.)
Page of pages of this Disclosure of Discipline form
Revised 8/10/04 Contract No. 38561 -A 26 of 109
BIDDERS DISCLOSURE OF DlSClPLfNE RECORD
(CONTINUED)
(To Accompany Proposal)
CONTRACT NO. 38561-A
HIDDEN CANYON COMMUNITY PARK
6) If the answer to either of 2. or 4. above is yes fully identify, in each and every case, the party who's discipline was stayed, the date of the violation that the disciplinary action pertains to,
describe the nature of the violation and the condition (if any) upon which the disciplinary action
was stayed.
(If needed attach additional sheets to provide full disclosure.)
BY CONTRACTOR:
GRlFFlTH COMPAPJY
(sign here) V.f?/DIST. MGR DANIEL A. MCGREW
(print name/title)
Page of pages of this Disclosure of Discipline form
Revised 8/10/04 Contract No. 38561-A 27 of 109
NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT TO BE EXECUTED
PUBLIC CONTfUCT CODE SECTION 7106
CONTRACT NO. 38561 -A
HIDDEN CANYON COMMUNITY PARK
BY BIDDER AND SUBMITTED WITH BtD
,a-
State of California 1 ) ss.
County of '~izfine )
DANIEL A. MCGREW , being first duly sworn, deposes (Name of Bidder)
and says that he or she is V.F?/DIST. MGR
(Title)
of GRlFFlTH COMPANY (Name of Firm)
the party making the foregoing bid that the bid is not made in the interest of, or on behalf of, any
undisclosed person, partnership, company, association, organization, or corporation; that the bid is
genuine and not collusive or sham; that the bidder has not directly or indirectly induced or solicited
any other bidder to put in a false or sham bid, and has not directly or indirectly colluded, conspired,
connived, or agreed with any bidder or anyone else to put in a sham bid, or that anyone shall refrain
from bidding; that the bidder has not in any manner, directly or indirectly, sought by agreement,
communication, or conference with anyone to fix the bid price of the bidder or any other bidder, or to
fix any overhead, profit, or cost element of the bid price, or of that of any other bidder, or to secure
any advantage against the public body awarding the contract of anyone interested in the proposed
contract; that all statements contained in the bid are true; and, further, that ths bidder has not,
directly or indirectly, submitted his or her bid price or any breakdown thereof, or the contents thereof,
or divulged information or data relative thereto, or paid, and will not pay, any fee to any corporation,
partnership, company association, organization, bid depository, or to any member or agent thereof to
effectuate a collusive or sham bid.
perjury that the foregoing is true and correct and that this affidavit was
-
day of yu flR ,20 oq .
Signature of Bidder
day of ,duU ,20 0 q. st Subscribed and sworn to before me on the I
c
(NOTARY SEAL)
Signature of Notarf
I Revised 8/10/04 Contract No. 38561-A 28 of 109
CONTRACT
PUBLIC WORKS
This agreement is made this / oa day of ' 2@5 by and between the City of Carlsbad, California, a in a fte r ca I I ed "City") ,
and GRIFFITH COMPANY INC whose principal place of business
is 2020 SOUTH YALE STREET, SANTA ANA, CA 92704-3974
(hereinafter called "Contractor").
City and Contractor agree as follows:
1.
for:
Description of Work. Contractor shall perform all work specified in the Contract documents
HIDDEN CANYON COMMUNITY PARK, (former!y knwn as Lanvln Park), CONTRACT b!G. 38561-
A AND SPECIFICATIONS DATED APRIL 2,2004.
(hereinafter called "projecr')
2.
equipment, and personnel to perform the work specified by the Contract Documents.
Provisions of Labor and Materials. Contractor shall provide all labor, materials, tools,
3. Contract Documents. The Contract Documents consist of this Contract, Notice Inviting Bids,
Contractor's Proposal, Bidder's Bond, Designation of Subcontractors, Designation of Owner
Operator/Lessors, Bidder's Statements of Financial Responsibility, Technical Ability and Experience,
Re Debarment, Non-cothion Affidavit, Escrow Agreement, Release Form, the Plans and
Specifications, the Supplemental Provisions, addendum(s) to said Plans and Specifications and
Supplemental Provisions, and all proper amendments and changes made thereto in accordance with
this Contract or the Plans and Specifications, and all bonds for the project; all of which are
incorporated herein by this reference.
I_
Contractor, herlhis subcontractors, and materials suppliers shall provide and install the work as
indicated, specified, and implied by the Contract Documents. Any items of work not indicated or
specified, but which are essential to the completion of the work, shall be provided at the Contractor's
expense to fulfill the intent of said documents. In all instances through the life of the Contract, the
City will be the interpreter of the intent of the Contract Documents, and the City's decision relative to
said intent will be final and binding. Failure of the Contractor to apprise subcontractors and materials
suppliers of this condition of the Contract will not relieve responsibility of compliance.
'
4. Payment. For at1 compensation for Contractor's performance of work under this Contract, City
shall make payment to the Contractor per section 9-3 PAYMENT of the Standard Specifications for
Public Works Construction (SSPWC) 2003 Edition, and all current supplements thereto hereinafter
designated "SSPWC", as issued by the Southern California Chapter of the American Public Works
Association, and as amended by the Supplemental Provisions section of this contract. The Engineer
will close the estimate of work completed for progress payments on the last working day of each
month.
5. Independent Investigation. Contractor has made an independent investigation of the
jobsite, the soil conditions at the jobsite, and all other conditions that might affect the progress of the
work, and is aware of those conditions. The Contract price includes payment for all work that may be
done by Contractor, whether anticipated or not, in order to overcome underground conditions. Any
-
Revised 8/10/04 Contract No. 38567 -A 29 of I09
information that may have been furnished to Contractor by City about underground conditions or
other job conditions is for Contractor's convenience only, and City does not warrant that the
conditions are as thus indicated. Contractor is satisfied with all job conditions, including underground
conditions and has not relied on information furnished by City.
-
6. Hazardous Waste or Other Unusual Conditions. If the contract involves digging trenches
or other excavations that extend deeper than four feet below the surface Contractor shall promptly,
and before the following conditions are disturbed, notify City, in writing, of any:
A. Hazardous Waste. Material that Contractor believes may be material that is hazardous waste,
as defined in section 251 17 of the Health and Safety Code, that is required to be removed to a Class
I, Class 11, or Class Ill disposal site in accordance with provisions of existing law.
B.
indicated.
Differing Conditions. Subsurface or latent physical conditions at the site differing from those
C. Unknown Physical Conditions. Unknown physical conditions at the site of any unusual nature,
different materialfy frcm th~se m!inari!y encwntered and generally recognized 2s inherent i:: work d
the character provided for in the contract.
City shall promptly investigate the conditions, and if it finds that the conditions do materially so differ,
or do involve hazardous waste, and cause a decrease or increase in contractor's costs of, or the time
required for, performance of any part of the work shall issue a change order under the procedures
described in this contract.
- In the event that a dispute arises between City and Contractor whether the conditions materially
differ, or involve hazardous waste, or cause a decrease or increase in the contractor's cost of, or time
required for, performance of any part of the work, contractor shall not be excused from any
scheduled completion date provided for by the contract, but shall proceed with all work to be
performed under the contract. Contractor shall retain any and all rights provided either by contract or
by law which pertain to the resolution of disputes and protests between the contracting parties.
7. Immigration Reform and Control Act. Contractor certifies it is aware of the requirements
of the Immigration Reform and Control Act of 1986 (8 USC sections 1101-1525) and has complied
and will comply with these requirements, including, but not limited to, verifying the eligibility for
employment of all agents, employees, subcontractors, and consultants that are included in this
Contract.
8. Prevailing Wage. Pursuant to the California Labor Code, the director of the Department of
Industrial Relations has determined the general prevailing rate of per diem wages in accordance with
California Labor Code, section 1773 and a copy of a schedule of said general prevailing wage rates
is on file in the office of the City Engineer, and is incorporated by reference herein. Pursuant to
California Labor Code, section 1775, Contractor shall pay prevailing wages. Contractor shall post
copies of all applicable prevailing wages on the job site.
9. indemnification. Contractor shall assume the defense of, pay all expenses of defense, and
indemnify and hold harmless the City, and its officers and employees, from all claims, loss, damage,
injury and liability of every kind, nature and description, directly or indirectly arising from or in
connection with the performance of the Contract or work; or from any failure or alleged failure of
Contractor to comply with any applicable law, rules or regulations including those relating to safety
and health; and from any and all claims, loss, damages, injury and liability, howsoever the same may
be caused, resulting directly or indirectly from the nature of the work covered by the Contract, except
for loss or damage caused by the sole or active negligence or willful misconduct of the City. The
expenses of defense include all costs and expenses including attorneys' fees for litigation,
-
Revised 8/ 1 0/04 Contract No. 38561 -A 30 of 109
arbitration, or other dispute resolution method.
Contractor shall also defend and indemnify the City against any challenges to the award of the
contract to Contractor, and Contractor will pay all costs, including defense costs for the City. Defense
costs include the cost of separate counsel for City, if City requests separate counsel.
I
Contractor shall also defend and indemnify the City against any challenges to the award of the
contract to Contractor, arising in whole or in part from alleged inaccuracies or misrepresentation by
the Contractor, whether intentional or otherwise, and Contractor will pay all costs, including defense
costs for the City. Defense costs include the cost of separate counsel for City, if City requests
separate counsel.
lo. Insurance. Contractor shall procure and maintain for the duration of the contract insurance
against claims for injuries to persons or damage to property which may arise from or in connection
with the performance of the work hereunder by the Contractor, his or her agents, representatives,
employees or subcontractors. Said insurance shall meet the City's policy for insurance as stated in
Resolution No. 91-403.
(A) Coverages And Limits Contractor shall maintain the types of coverages and minimum limits indicted herein:
a. Comprehensive General Liability Insurance: $1,000,000 combined single limit per occurrence
for bodily injury and property damage. If the policy has an aggregate limit, a separate aggregate in
the amounts specified shall be established for the risks for which the City or its agents, officers or
employees are additional insured.
b. Business Automobile Liability Insurance: $1,000,000 combined single limit per accident for
bodily injury and property damage. In addition, the auto policy must cover any vehicle used in the
performance of the contract, used onsite or offsite, whether owned, non-owned or hired, and whether
scheduled or non-scheduled. The auto insurance certificate must state the coverage is for "any auto"
and cannot be limited in any manner.
c
c. Workers' Compensation and Employers' Liability Insurance: Workers' compensation limits
as required by the Labor Code of the State of California and Employers' Liability limits of $1,000,000
per incident. Workers' compensation offered by the State Compensation Insurance Fund is
acceptable to the City.
(B) Additional Provisions. Contractor shall ensure that the policies of insurance required under
this agreement with the exception of Workers' Compensation and Business Automobile Liability
Insurance contain, or are endorsed to contain, the following provisions.
a. The City, its officials, employees and volunteers are to be covered as additional insured as
respects: liability arising out of activities performed by or on behalf of the Contractor; products and
completed operations of the contractor; premises owned, leased, hired or borrowed by the
contractor. The coverage shall contain no special limitations on the scope of protection afforded to
the City, its officials, employees or volunteers. All additional insured endorsements must be
evidenced using separate documents attached to the certificate of insurance; one for each company
affording general liability, and employers' iiabiiity coverage.
b.
I
I
I ! - The Contractor's insurance coverage shall be primary insurance as respects the City, its
officials, employees
officials, employees
contribute with it.
and volunteers. Any insurance or self-insurance maintained by the City, its
or volunteers shall be in excess of the contractor's insurance and shall not E i i
Revised 811 0/04 Contract No. 38561-A 31 of 109
c.
to the City, its officials, employees or volunteers.
Any failure to comply with reporting provisions of the policies shall not affect coverage provided -
d. Coverage shall state that the contractor's insurance shall apply separately to each insured
against whom claim is made or suit is brought, except with respect to the limits of the insurer's
liability.
(C) Notice Of Cancellation. Each insurance policy required by this agreement shall be endorsed to
state that coverage shall not be nonrenewed, suspended, voided, canceled] or reduced in coverage
or limits except after thirty (30') days' prior written notice has been given to the City by certified mail,
return receipt requested.
(D) Deductibles And Self-Insured Retention (S.I.R.) Levels. Any deductibles or self-insured
retention levels must be declared to and approved by the City. At the option of the City, either: the
insurer shall reduce or eliminate such deductibles or self-insured retention levels as respects the
City, its officials and employees; or the contractor shall procure a bond guaranteeing payment of
losses and related investigation, claim administration and defense expenses.
(E) Waiver Of Subrogation. All policies of insurance required under this agreement shall contain a waiver of all rights of subrogation the insurer may have or may acquire against the City or any of its
officials or employees.
(F) Subcontractors. Contractor shall include all subcontractors as insured under its policies or shall furnish separate certificates and endorsements for each subcontractor. Coverages for
subcontractors shall be subject to all of the requirements stated herein.
(G) Acceptability Of insurers. Insurance is to be placed with insurers that have a rating in Best's
Key Rating Guide of at least A-:V. Insurers must also be authorized to transact the business of
insurance by the State of California Insurance Commissioner as admitted camers as evidenced by a
listing in the official publication of the Department of Insurance of the State of California and/or under
the standards specified by the City Council in Resolution No. 91 -403.
-
(H) Verification Of Coverage. Contractor shall furnish the City with certificates of insurance and
original endorsements affecting coverage required by this clause. The certificates and endorsements
for each insurance policy are to be signed by a person authorized by that insurer to bind coverage on
its behalf. The certificates and endorsements are to be in forms approved by the City and are to be
received and approved by the City before the Contract is executed by the City.
(I) in the Contractor's bid.
Cost Of Insurance. The Cost of all insurance required under this agreement shall be included
11. Claims and Lawsuits. All claims by contractor for $375,000 or less shall be resolved in
accordance with the provisions in the Public Contract Code, Division 2, Part 3, Chapter 1, Article 1.5
(commencing with section 20104) which are incorporated by reference. A copy of Article 1.5 is
included in the Supplemental Provisions I section. The contractor shall initially submit all claims over
$375,000 to the City using the informal dispute resolution process described in Public Contract Code
subsections 201 04.2(a), (c), (d). Notwithstanding the provisions of this section of the contract] all
claims shall comply with the Government Tort Claim Act (section 900 et seq., of the California
Government Code) for any claim or cause of action for money or damages prior to filing any lawsuit
for breach of this agreement. __
?
(A) Assertion of Claims. Contractor hereby agrees that any contract claim submitted to the City
must be asserted as part of the contract process as set forth in this agreement and not in anticipation
of litigation or in conjunction with litigation.
i I
I Revised 8/10/04 Contract No. 38561 -A .32 of 109
- (B) False Claims. Contractor acknowledges that if a false claim is submitted to the City, it may be considered fraud and the Contractor may be subject to criminal prosecution.
(C) Government Code. Contractor acknowledges that California Government Code sections 12650
et seq., the False Claims Act, provides for civil penalties where a person knowingly submits a false
claim to a public entity. These provisions include false claims made with deliberate ignorance of the
false information or in reckless disregard of the truth or falsity of the information.
(D) Penalty Recovery. If the City of Carlsbad seeks to recover penalties pursuant to the False
Claims Act, it is entitled to recover its litigation costs, including attorney's fees.
(E) Debarment for False Claims. Contractor hereby acknowledges that the filing of a false claim
may subject the Contractor to an administrative debarment proceeding wherein the Contractor may
be prevented from further bidding on public contracts for a period of up to five years.
(F) Carisbad Municipal Code. The provisions of Carlsbad Municipal Code sections 3.32.025,
3.32.026, 3.32.027 and 3.32.028 pertaining to false claims are incorporated herein by reference.
(G) Debarment from Other Jurisdictions. Contractor hereby acknowledges that debarment by
another jurisdiction is grounds for the City of Carisbad to disqualify the Contractor or subcontrac-
tor from participating in future contract bidding.
(H) Jurisdiction. Contractor agrees and hereby stipulates that the proper venue and jurisdiction for
resolution of any disputes between the parties arising out of
California.
I have read and understand all provisions of Section 1 I
12. Maintenance of Records. Contractor shall
City, upon request, records in accordance with sections 1776 and 1812 of Part 7, Chapter I,
Article 2, of the Labor Code. If the Contractor does not maintain the records at Contractor's
principal place of business as specified above, Contractor shall so inform the City by certified
letter accompanying the return of this Contract. Contractor shall notify the City by certified mail of
any change of address of such records.
13. Labor Code Provisions. The provisions of Part 7, Chapter 1, commencing with section 1720
of the Labor Code are incorporated herein by reference.
14. Security. Securities in the form of cash, cashier's check, or certified check may be substituted
for any monies withheld by the City to secure performance of this contract for any obligation
established by this contract. Any other security that is mutually agreed to by the Contractor and
the City may be substituted for monies withheld to ensure performance under this Contract.
J
15. Provisions Required by Law Deemed Inserted. Each and every provision of law and
clause required by law to be inserted in this Contract shall be deemed to be inserted herein and
included herein, and if, through mistake or otherwise, any such provision is not inserted, or is not
correctly inserted, then upon application of either party, the Contract shall forthwith be physically
amended to make such insertion or correction.
16. Additional Provisions. Any additional provisions of this agreement are set forth in the
"General Provisions" or "Supplemental Provisions" attached hereto and made a part hereof.
Revised 8/10/04 Contract No. 38561-A 33 of 109
NOTARIAL ACKNOWLEDGMENT OF EXECUTION BY ALL SIGNATORIES MUST BE
ATTACHED -
(CORPORATE SEAL)
CONTRACTOR:
(sign here) ATTEST:
DANIEL A. MCGREW v.k/DIST. MGR
LORW-INE M. WWD, City Clerk'
JFNF~ win ASSISTANT SECRETARY
(print name and title)
President or vice-president and secretary or assistant secretary must sign for corporations. If only
one officer signs, the corporation must attach a resolution certified by the secretary or assistant
secretary under the corporate seal empowering that officer to bind the corporation.
APPROVED AS TO FORM:
-
RONALD R. BALL
City Attorney
By:
Revised 8/10/04 Contract No. 38561-A
i
t
34 of 109
CONTRACT
California All-Purpose Acknowledgment
State of California
County of Orange
On July 19,2004 before me apali, N lie
personally appeared Daniel A. McGrew, Vice PresidentlDistrict Manager
MPersonally known to me OR uproved to me on the basis of satisfactory evidence
to be the person(s) whose name(s) is/are
subscribed to the within instrument and
acknowledged to me that he/she/they
executed the same in his/her/their authorized
capacity and that by his/her/their signature on
the instrument the person(s) or the entity upon
behalf of which the person(s) acted, executed
the instrument
Witness my hand and official seal
I I t we’ A/#&/) ---
Signature of N6tat-y
CONTRACT
California All-Purpose Acknowledgment
State of California
County of Orange
On July 19,2004 before me enapoli, Notary
personally appeared Jenene Ratti, Assistant Secretary
r;r]Personally known to me OR uproved to me on the basis of satisfactory evidence
to be the person(s) whose name(s) idare
subscribed to the within instrument and
acknowledged to me that he/she/they
executed the same in his/her/their authorized
capacity and that by his/her/their signature on
the instrument the person(s) or the entity upon
behalf of which the person(s) acted, executed
the instrument
Witness my hand and official seal
executed in duplicate Bond No. 104256682
LABOR AND MATERIALS BOND
WHEREAS, the City Council of the City of Carlsbad, State of California, by Resolution No.
2004-22 4 , adopted JULY 6, 2004 , has awarded to
GRIFFITH COMPANY INC
(hereinafter designated as the "Principal"), a Contract for: HIDDEN CANYON COMMUNITY PARK,
CONTRACT NO. 38561-A
in the City of Carlsbad, in strict conformity with the drawings and specifications, and other Contract
Documents now on file in the Office of the City Clerk of the City of Carlsbad and all of which are
incorporated herein by this reference.
WHEREAS, Principal has executed or is about to execute said Contract and the terms thereof
require the furnishing of a bond, providing that if Principal or any of their subcontractors shall fail to
pay for any materials, provisions, provender or other supplies or teams used in, upon or about the
performance of the work agreed to be done, or for any work or labor done thereon of any kind, the
Surety on this bond will pay the same to the extent hereinafter set forth.
NOW, THEREFORE, WE, GRIFFITH COMPANY INC I
as Principal, (hereinafter designated as the "Contractor"), and Travelers Casual ty and Surety
Company of America as Surety, are held firmly bound unto the City of Carlsbad
in the sum of ONE MILLION, FOUR HUNDRED FOURTEEN THOUSAND, FOUR
HUNDRED FOURTEEN E OO/lOO Dollars ($1 , 41 4,414-00 ),
said sum being an amount equal to: One hundred percent (100%) of the total amount payable under
the terms of the contract by the City of Carlsbad, and for which payment well and truly to be made we
bind ourselves, our heirs, executors and administrators, successors, or assigns, jointly and severally,
firmly by these presents.
THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH that if the Contractor or hidher subcontractors
fail to pay for any materials, provisions, provender, supplies, or teams used in, upon, for, or about the
performance of the work contracted to be done, or for any other work or labor thereon of any kind,
consistent with California Civil Code section 31 81 , or for amounts due under the Unemployment
Insurance Code with respect to the work or labor performed under this Contract, or for any amounts
required to be deducted, withheld, and paid over to the Employment Development Department from
the wages of employees of the contractor and subcontractors pursuant to section 13020 of the
Unemployment Insurance Code with respect to the work and labor, that the Surety will pay for the
same, and, also, in case suit is brought upon the bond, reasonable attorney's fees, to be fixed by the
court consistent with California Civil Code section 3248.
This bond shall inure to the benefit of any of the persons named in California Civil Code section
3181, so as to give a right of action to those persons or their assigns in any suit brought upon the
bond.
Surety stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of
the Contract, or to the work to be performed thereunder or the specifications accompanying the
same shall affect its obligations on this bond, and it does hereby waive notice of any change,
extension of time, alterations or addition to the terms of the contract or to the work or to the
specifications. -
In the event that Contractor is an individual, it is agreed that the death of any such Contractor shall
\ not exonerate the Surety from its obligations under this bond.
Revised 8/10/04 Contract No. 38561-A 35 of 109
, Executed by CONTRACTOR this 19th -
day of JULY ,20_1)4.
CONTRACTOR:
GrifRh Company
(nam
By:
(sign here)
DANIEL A. MCGREW
(print name here)
JFNF- (print name here)
ASSISTANT SECRETARY
Executed by SURETY this 13th day
Of July ,20=.
SURETY:
Travelers Casualty and Surety Company
Diamond Bar,-CA 91765
(address of Surety)
909 612-3650
-hone number of Surety)
By:
Asignature of Attomey-in-Fact)
Jane Kepner, Attorney-in-Fact
(printed name of Attorney-in-Fact)
(attach corporate resolution showing current power
of attorney)
(title and organization of signatory)
(Proper notarial acknowledgment of execution by CONTRACTOR and SURETY must be attached.)
(President or vice-president and secretary or assistant secretary must sign for corporations. If only one officer signs, the corporation must attach a resolution certified by the secretary or assistant secretary under corporate
seal empowering that officer to bind the corporation.)
APPROVED AS TO FORM:
RONALD R. BALL
Deputy City Attomef \
Revised 8/10/04 Contract No. 38561 -A 36 of 109
California All-Purpose Acknowledgment
State of California
County of Orange
On July 19,2004 before me Denise Denapolt, Nutary Public
personally appeared Daniel A. McGrew, Vice PresidentfDisfricf Manager
r;;]Personally known to me OR OProved to me on the basis of satisfactory evidence
to be the person(s) whose name(s) idare
subscribed to the within instrument and
acknowledged to me that he/she/they
executed the same in his/her/their authorized
capacity and that by his/her/their signature on
the instrument the person(s) or the entity upon
behalf of which the person(s) acted, executed
the instrument
Witness my hand and official seal
LABOR & MATERIALS BOND
California All-Purpose Acknowledgment
State of California
County of Orange
On July 19,2004 before me Denise Denapoli, Notary Public
personally appeared Jenene Ratti, Assistant Secretary
MPersonally known to me OR uproved to me on the basis of satisfactory evidence
to be the person(s) whose name(s) is/are
subscribed to the within instrument and
acknowledged to me that he/she/they
executed the same in his/her/their authorized
capacity and that by his/her/their signature on
the instrument the person(s) or the entity upon
behalf of which the person(s) acted, executed
the instrument
-
Witness my hand and official seal
-‘I
LABOR & MATERIALS BOND
executed in duplicate Bond No. 104256682
Premium: $7,385.00
FAITHFUL PERFORMANCENVARRAN'W BOND
WHEREAS, the City Council of the City of Carlsbad, State of California, by Resolution
No. 2004-224 , adopted JULY 6, 2004 , has awarded to
designated as the "Principal"), a Contract for: HIDDEN CANYON COMMUNITY PARK,
GRlFFlTH COMPANY INC , (hereinafter
CONTRACT NO. 38561-A
in the City of Carlsbad, in strict conformity with the contract, the drawings and specifications, and
other Contract Documents now on file in the Office of the City Clerk of the City of Carlsbad, ail of
which are incorporated herein try this reference.
WHEREAS, Principal has executed or is about to execute said Contract and the terms thereof
require the furnishing of a bond for the faithful performance and warranty of said Contract;
NOW, THEREFORE, WE, GRlFFlTH COMPANY INC , as Principal,
(hereinafter designated as the "Contractor"), and Company of America , as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto the City of Carlsbad,
in the sum of ONE MILLION, FOUR HUNDRED FOURTEEN THOUSAND, FOUR
HUNDRED FOURTEEN & 00/100 Dollars ($ 1,414,414.00 ),
said sum being equal to one hundred percent (100%) of the estimated amount of the Contract, to be
paid to City or its certain attorney, its successors and assigns; for which payment, well and truly to be
made, we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors and administrators, successors or assigns, jointly and
severally, firmly by these presents.
Travelers Casualty and Surety
-
THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH that if the above bounden Contractor, their heirs,
executors, administrators, successors or assigns, shall in all things stand to and abide by, and well
and truly keep and perform the covenants, conditions, and agreements in the Contract and any
alteration thereof made as therein provided on their part, to be kept and performed at the time and in
the manner therein specified, and in all respects according to their true intent and meaning, and shall
indemnify and save harmless the City of Carlsbad, its officers, employees and agents, as therein
stipulated, then this obligation shall become null and void; otherwise it shall remain in full force and
effect.
As a part of the obligation secured hereby and in addition to the face amount specified therefor, there
shall be included costs and reasonable expenses and fees, including reasonable attorney's fees,
incurred by the City in successfully enforcing such obligation, all to be taxed as costs and included in
any judgment rendered.
Surety stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of
the Contract, or to the work to be performed thereunder or the specifications accompanying the
same shall affect its obligations on this bond, and it does hereby waive notice of any change,
extension of time, alterations or addition to the terms of the contract or to the work or to the
.specifications.
Revised 811 0/04 Contract No. 38561-A 37 of 109
In the event that Contractor is an individual, it is agreed that the death of any such Contractor shall
not exonerate the Surety from its obligations under this bond. -
i
Executed by CONTRACTOR this 19th
dayof July ,20 04 .
CONTRACTOR:
GRIFFITH COMPANY
hame of Contractor)
-J- (sign here)
DANIEL A. MCGREW
(print name here)
V.f?/DIST. MGR
(Title and Organization of Signatory)
JENENE wm
(print name here)
Executed by SURETY this 13th day of
July ,20 04
SURETY:
Travelers Casualty and Surety Companv
of America (name of Surety) 21688 Gateway Plaza Drive
Diamond Bar, CA 91765
(address of Surety)
(telephone number of Surety)
By:
Mgnature of Attorney-in-Fact)
Jane Kepner, Attornev-in-Fact
(printed name of Attorney-in-Fact)
(Attach corporate resolution showing current
power of attorney.)
ASSISTANT SECRETARY
(Title and Organization of signatory)
{Proper notarial acknowledgment of execution by CONTRACTOR and SURETY must be attached.)
(President or vice-president and secretary or assistant secretary must sign for corporations. If only
one officer signs, the corporation must attach a resolution certified by the secretary or assistant
secretary under corporate seal empowering that officer to bind the corporation.)
APPROVED AS TO FORM:
RONALD R. BALL
City Attorney
By: I
Deguty City Attohe)\
Revised 8/10/04 Contract No. 38561 -A 38 of 109
-
California All-Purpose Acknowledgment
State of California
County of Orange
19,2004 defore me Denise Denapoll,
personally appeared Daniel A. McGrew, Vice PresidenttDistrict Manager
Personally known to me OR OProved to me on the basis of satisfactory evidence
to be the person(s) whose name(s) idare
subscribed to the within instrument and
acknowledged to me that he/she/they
executed the same in his/her/their authorized
capacity and that by hislherltheir signature on
the instrument the person(s) or the entity upon
behalf of which the person(s) acted, executed
the instrument
Witness my hand and official seal
-‘I
FAITHFUL PERFORMA NCEMIA RRA NTY BOND
,-
California All-Purpose Acknowledgment
State of California
County of Orange
On July 19,2004 before me Denis
personally appeared
HPersonally known to me
Jenene Ratfi, Assistant Secretary
OR OProved to me on the basis of satisfactory evidence
to be the person(s) whose name(@ is/are
subscribed to the within instrument and
acknowledged to me that he/she/they
executed the same in his/her/their authorized
capacity and that by his/her/their signature on
the instrument the person@) or the entity upon
behalf of which the person(s) acted, executed
the instrument
-
Witness my hand and official seal
Signature of Notary
NOTARY PUBLIC - CAL
FAITHFUL PERFORMANCUWARRANTY BOND
CALIFORNIA ALL-PURPOSE ACKNOWLEDGMENT No. 5907
State of California
County of Orange
On July 13, 2004 before me, Nanette Myers, Notary Public
personally appeared Jane Kepner ,
personally known to me - OR - 0 proved to me on the basis of satisfactory evidence to be the person(s)
whose name(s) is/are subscribed to the within instrument and
acknowledged to me that he/she/they executed the same in
hislherltheir authorized capacity(ies), and that by his/her/their
signature(s) on the instrument the person(s), or the entity upon
DATE NAME, TITLE OF OFFICER - E.G., "JANE DOE, NOTARY PUBLIC"
NAME(S) OF SIGNER(S)
behalf of which the person(s) acted, executed the instrument.
WITNESS my hand and official seal.
SIGNA@kE OF NOTARY 7%Y.G&h
OPTIONAL
Though the data below is not required by law, it may prove valuable to persons relying on the document and
could prevent fraudulent reattachment of this form.
CAPACITY CLAIMED BY SIGNER DESCRIPTION OF ATTACHED DOCUMENT
INDIVIDUAL 0 CORPORATE OFFICER
TITLE OR TYPE OF DOCUMENT TITLE(S)
LIMITED E GENERAL
0 PARTNER(S)
AlTORN EY-I N-FACT 0 TRUSTEE(S) 0 GUARDIAN/CONSERVATOR NUMBER OF PAGES
OTHER:
SIGNER IS REPRESENTING:
NAME OF PERSON(S) OR ENTIlY(1ES)
DATE OF DOCUMENT
SIGNER(S) OTHER THAN NAMED ABOVE
S4067lGEEF 2/98 Q 1993 NATIONAL NOTARY ASSOCIATION - 8236 Remmet Ave., P.O. Box 7184 Canoga Park, CA 91309-71€
CALIFORNIA ALL-PURPOSE ACKNOWLEDGMENT No. 5907
State of California
County of Orange
On July 13, 2004 before me, Nanette Myers, Notary Public .
personally appeared Jane Kepner ,
personally known to me - OR - 0 proved to me on the basis of satisfactory evidence to be the person(s)
whose name@) islare subscribed to the within instrument and
acknowledged to me that he/she/they executed the same in
his/her/their authorized capacity(ies), and that by his/her/their
signaturets) on the instrument the person(s), or the entity upon
behalf of which the person(s) acted, executed the instrument.
DATE NAME, TITLE OF OFFICER - E G , "JANE DOE, NOTARY PUBLIC"
NAME@) OF SIGNER(S)
Cornmission# 1331194
WITNESS my hand and official seal.
OPTIONAL
Though the data below is not required by law, it may prove valuable to persons relying on the document and
could prevent fraudulent reattachment of this form.
CAPACITY CLAIMED BY SIGNER DESCRIPTION OF ATTACHED DOCUMENT
0 INDIVIDUAL 0 CORPORATE OFFICER
TITLE OR TYPE OF DOCUMENT
TITLE(S)
LIMITED El GENERAL
0 PARTNER(S)
ATTORNEY-IN-FACT 0 TRUSTEEtS) 0 GUARD I AN/CON S E RVATO R 0 OTHER:
NUMBER OF PAGES
SIGNER IS REPRESENTING: DATE OF DOCUMENT
NAME OF PERSON(S) OR ENTITY(IES)
SIGNERtS) OTHER THAN NAMED ABOVE
S467/GEEF 2/98 8 1993 NATIONAL NOTARY ASSOCIATION 8236 Remmet Ave., P.O. Box 7184 Canoga Park. CA 91309-718
OPTIONAL ESCROW AGREEMENT FOR
SECURITY DEPOSITS IN LIEU OF RETENTION
This Escrow Agreement is made and entered into by and between the City of Carlsbad whose
address is 1200 Carlsbad Village Drive, Carlsbad, California, 92008, hereinafter called "City" and
whose address is
hereinafter called
"Contractor" and whose address is
hereinafter
called "Escrow Agent."
For the consideration hereinafter set forth, the City, Contractor and Escrow Agent agree as follows:
1. Pursuant to sections 22300 and 10263 of the Public Contract Code of the State of California,
the Contractor has the option to deposit securities with the Escrow Agent as a substitute for retention
earnings required to be withheld by the City pursuant to the Construction Contract entered into
between the City and Contractor for HIDDEN CANYON COMMUNITY PARK, CONTRACT NO.
38561-A, in the amount of dated (hereinafter
referred to as the "Contract"). Alternatively, on written request of the Contractor, the City shall make
payments of the retention earnings directly to the Escrow Agent. When the Contractor deposits the
securities as a substitute for Contract earnings, the Escrow Agent shall notify the City within 10 days
of the deposit. The Escrow Agent shall maintain insurance to cover negligent acts and omissions of
the Escrow Agent in connection with the handling of retentions under these sections in an amount
not less than $1 00,000 per contract. The market value of the securities at the time of the substitution
shall be a least equal to the cash amount then required to be withheld as retention under the terms of
the contract between the City and Contractor. Securities shall be held in the name of the City and
shall designate the Contractor as the beneficial owner.
I
2. The City shall make progress payments to the Contractor for such funds which otherwise would
be withheld from progress payments pursuant to the Contract provisions, provided that the Escrow
Agent holds securities in the form and amount specified above.
3. When the City makes payment of retentions earned directly to the Escrow Agent, the Escrow
Agent shall hold them for the benefit of the Contractor until such time as the escrow created under
this contract is terminated. The Contractor may direct the investment of the payments into securities.
All terms and conditions of this agreement and the rights and responsibilities of the parties shall be
equally applicable and binding when the City pays the Escrow Agent directly.
4. The Contractor shall be responsible for paying all fees for the expenses incurred by the Escrow
Agent in administering the Escrow Account and all expenses of the City. These expenses and
payment terms shall be determined by the City, Contractor and Escrow Agent.
5. The interest earned on the securities or the money market accounts held in escrow and all
interest earned on that interest shall be for the sole account of Contractor and shall be subject to
withdrawal by Contractor at any time and from time to time without notice to the City.
6. Contractor shall have the right to withdraw all or any part of the principal in the Escrow Account
only by written notice to Escrow Agent accompanied by written authorization from City to the Escrow
Agent that City consents to the withdrawal of the amount sought to be withdrawn by Contractor.
1
Revised 8/10/04 Contract No. 38561 -A 39 of 109
7. The City shall have a right to draw upon the securities in the event of default by the Contractor.
Upon seven days' written notice to the Escrow Agent from the City of the default, the Escrow Agent
shall immediately convert the securities to cash and shall distribute the cash as instructed by the City.
8. Upon receipt of written notification from the City certifying that the Contract is final and complete
and that the Contractor has complied with all requirements and procedures applicable to the
Contract, the Escrow Agent shall release to Contractor all securities and interest on deposit less
escrow fees and charges of the Escrow Account. The escrow shall be closed immediately upon
disbursement of all moneys and securities on deposit and payments of fees and charges.
9. The Escrow Agent shall rely on the written notifications from the City and the Contractor pursuant to sections (1) to (8), inclusive, of this agreement and the City and Contractor shall hold Escrow
Agent harmless from Escrow Agent's release, conversion and disbursement of the securities and
interest as set forth above.
10. The names of the persons who are authorized to give written notices or to receive written notice
on behalf of the City and on behalf of Contractor in connection with the foregoing, and exemplars of
their respective signatures are as follows:
For City: Title FINANCE DIRECTOR
Name
Signature
Address - For Contractor:
Name
Signature
Address
For Escrow Agent:
Name
Signature
Address
At the time the Escrow Account is opened, the City and Contractor shall deliver to the Escrow Agent
a fully executed counterpart of this Agreement.
Revised 8/10/04 Contract No. 38561 -A 40 of 109
.-
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties have executed this Agreement by their proper officers on the
date first set forth above.
For City:
For Contractor:
For Escrow Agent:
Title MAYOR
Name
Signature
Address
Title
Name
Signature
Address
Title
Name
Signature
Address
Revised 8/10/04 Contract No. 38561-A 41 of 109
SUPPLEMENTAL PROVISIONS
FOR
HIDDEN CANYON COMMUNITY PARK
CONTRACT NO. 38561-A
SUPPLEMENTAL PROVISIONS TO
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR PUBLIC WORKS CONSTRUCTION
PART I, GENERAL PROVISIONS
SECTION I -- TERMS, DEFINITIONS ABBREVIATIONS AND SYMBOLS
1-1 TERMS
Add the following section:
1-1 .I Reference to Drawings. Where words "shown", "indicated", "detailed", "noted", "scheduled", or
words of similar import are used, it shall be understood that reference is made to the plans
accompanying these provisions, unless stated otherwise.
Add the following section:
1-1.2 Directions. Where words "directed", "designated", "selected", or words of similar import are
used, it shall be understood that the direction, designation or selection of the Engineer is intended,
unless stated otherwise. The word "required" and words of similar import shall be understood to
mean "as required to properly complete the work as required and as approved by the Engineer,"
unless stated otherwise.
-
Add the following section:
1-1.3 Equals and Approvals. Where the words "equal", "approved equal", "equivalent", and such
words of similar import are used, it shall be understood such words are followed by the expression "in
the opinion of the Engineer", unless otherwise stated. Where the words "approved", "approval",
"acceptance", or words of similar import are used, it shall be understood that the approval,
acceptance, or similar import of the Engineer is intended.
Add the following section:
1-1.4 Perform. The word "perform" shall be understood to mean that the Contractor, at its expense,
shall perform all operations, labor, tools and equipment, and further, including the furnishing and
installing of materials that are indicated, specified or required to mean that the Contractor, at its
expense, shall furnish and install the work, complete in place and ready to use, including furnishing
of necessary labor, materials, tools, equipment, and transportation.
1-2 DEFINITIONS. Modify as follows: The following words, or groups of words, shall be exclusively
defined by the definitions assigned to them herein.
Hidden Canyon Community Park- Larwin Community Park
Agency - the City of Carlsbad, California.
I-
Revised 8/10/04 Contract No. 38561 -A Page 42 of 109
City Council -the City Council of the City of Carlsbad.
City Manager - the City Manager of the City of Carlsbad or hidher approved representative.
Dispute Board - persons designated by the City Manager to hear and advise the City Manager on
claims submitted by the Contractor. The City Manager is the last appeal level for informal dispute
resolution.
Engineer - the Public Works Director of the City of Carlsbad or hislher approved representative. The
Engineer is the third level of appeal for informal dispute resolution.
Minor Bid Item - a single contract item constituting less than 10 percent (10%) of the original
Contract Price bid.
Own Organization - When used in Section 2-3.1 - Employees of the Contractor who are hired,
directed, supervised and paid by the Contractor to accomplish the completion of the Work. Further,
such employees have their employment taxes, State disability insurance payments, State and
Federal income taxes paid and administered, as applicable, by the Contractor. When used in Section
2-3.1 "own organization" means construction equipment that the Contractor owns or leases and uses
to accomplish the Work. Equipment that is owner operated or leased equipment with an operator is
not part of the Contractor's Own Organization and will not be included for the purpose of compliance
with section 2-3.1 of the Standard Specifications and these Supplemental Provisions.
Owner OperatodLessor - Any person who provides equipment or tools with an operator provided
who is employed by neither the Contractor nor a subcontractor and is neither an agent or employee
of the Agency or a public utility.
Principal Inspector - The Senior Inspector's immediate supervisor and second level of appeal for
informal dispute resolution.
Project Inspector - the Engineer's designated representative for inspection, contract administration
and first level for informal dispute resolution.
Project Manager - the Park Planner of the City of Carlsbad or hislher approved representative.
Senior Inspector - the Project Inspector's immediate supervisor and first level of appeal for informal
dispute resolution.
1-3 ABBREVIATIONS
1-3.2 Common Usage, add the following:
Abbreviation Word or Words
Apts ........................................ Apartment and Apartments
Bldg ........................................ Building band Buildings
CMWD ................................... Carlsbad Municipal Water District
CSSD ..................................... Carlsbad Supplemental Standard Drawings
cfs .......................................... Cubic Feet per Second
Comm .................................... Commercial
DR .......................................... Dimension Ratio
E ............................................ Electric
G ............................................ Gas
gal ........................................... Gallon and Gallons
Gar ......................................... Garage and Garages
-
Revised 8/10/04 Contract No. 38561 -A Page 43 of 109
GNV ....................................... Ground Not Visible
gpm ........................................ gallons per minute
IE ........................................... Invert Elevation
MSL ....................................... Mean Sea Level (see Regional Standard Drawing M-12)
MTBM .................................... Microtunneling Boring Machine
NCTD ..................................... North County Transit Distrct
OHE ....................................... Overhead Electric
OMWD ................................... Olivenhain Municipal Water District
ROW ...................................... Right-of-way
S ............................................ Sewer or Slope, as applicable
SDNR .................................... San Diego Northem Railway
SDRSD .................................. San Diego Regional Standard Drawing
SFM ....................................... Sewer Force Main
T ............................................. Telephone
UE ....................... ................... Underground Electric
W ........................................... Water, Wider or Width, as applicable
VWD ...................................... Vallecitos Water District
I
LCWD .................................... Leucadia County Water District
SECTION 2 -- SCOPE AND CONTROL OF THE WORK
2-3 SUBCONTRACTS.
2-3.1 General, add the following: Should the Contractor fail to adhere to the provisions requiring the
Contractor to complete 50 percent of the contract price with its own organization, the Agency may at
its sole discretion elect to cancel the contract or to deduct an amount equal to 10 percent of the value
of the work performed in excess of 50 percent of the contract price by other than the Contractor’s
own organization. The City Council shall be the sole body for determination of a violation of these
provisions. In any proceedings under this section, the prime contractor shall be entitled to a public
hearing before the City Council and shall be notified ten (1 0) days in advance of the time and location
of said hearing. The determination of the City Council shall be final.
2-4 CONTRACT BONDS, modify the second sentence of paragraph one as follows: Delete, “who is
listed in the latest version of U.S. Department of Treasury Circular 570,”.
Modify paragraphs three and four to read: The Contractor shall provide a faithful perform-
ance/warranty bond and payment bond (labor and materials bond) for this contract. The faithful
performance/warranty bond shall be in the amount of 100 percent of the contract price. The
Contractor shall provide bonds to secure payment of laborers and materials suppliers, in an amount
equal to:
1) One hundred percent (100%) of the total amount payable by the terms of the contract when the
total amount payable does not exceed five million dollars ($5,000,000).
2) Fifty percent (50%) of the total amount payable by the terms of the contract when the total
amount payable is not less than five million dollars ($5,000,000) and does not exceed ten million
dollars ($1 0,000,000).
3) Twenty-five percent (25%) of the total amount payable by the terms of the contract if the contract
exceeds ten million dollars ($1 0,000,000).
Both bonds shall extend in full force and effect and be retained by the Agency during this project until
they are released according to the provisions of this section.
The faithful perforrnance/warranty bond will be reduced to 25 percent of the original amount 30 days
after recordation of the Notice of Completion and will remain in full force and effect for the one year
-_
Revised 8/10/04 Contract No. 38561 -A Page 44 of 109
warranty period and until all warranty repairs are completed to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The
bonds to secure payment of laborers and materials suppliers shall be released six months plus 30
days after recordation of the Notice of Completion if all claims have been paid.
Add the following: All bonds are to be placed with a surety insurance carrier admitted and authorized
to transact the business of insurance in California and whose assets exceed their liabilities in an
amount equal to or in excess of the amount of the bond. The bonds are to contain the following
documents:
1) An original, or a certified copy, of the unrevoked appointment, power of attorney, by laws, or other
2) A certified copy of the certificate of authority of the insurer issued by the insurance commissioner,
instrument entitling or authorizing the person who executed the bond to do so.
If the bid is accepted, the Agency may require a financial statement of the assets and liabilities of the
insurer at the end of the quarter calendar year prior to 30 days next preceding the date of the
execution of the bond. The financial statement shall be made by an officer's certificate as defined in
Section 173 of the Corporations Code. In the case of a foreign insurer, the financial statement may
be verified by the oath of the principal officer or manager residing within the United States.
2-5 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS.
2-5.1 General, add the following: The specifications for the work include the Standard Specifications
for Public Works Construction, (SSPWC), 2003 Edition and all current supplements thereto,
hereinafter designated "SSPW C", as written and promulgated by Joint Cooperative Committee of the
Southern California Chapter American Public Works Association and Southern California Districts
Associated General Contractors of California, and as amended by the Supplemental Provisions
section of this contract.
The construction plans consist of one set of plans and specifications. The set is designated as City
of Carlsbad Drawing No. 410-8AI 47 sheets. The standard drawings used for this project are the
latest edition of the San Diego Area Regional Standard Drawings, hereinafter designated SDRS, as
issued by the San Diego County Department of Public Works, together with the most recent editions
of the City of Carlsbad Supplemental Standard Drawings, hereinafter designated as CSSD, as issued
by the City of Carlsbad and the Carlsbad Municipal Water District Standard Plans hereinafter
designated as CMWDSD, as issued by the Carlsbad Municipal Water District. Copies of some of the
pertinent standard drawings are enclosed as an appendix to these Supplemental Provisions.
2-5.2 Precedence of Contract Documents, modify as follows: If there is a conflict between
Contract Documents, the document highest in precedence shall control. The precedence shall be the
most recent edition of the following documents listed in order of highest to lowest precedence:
1) 2) Supplemental Provisions.
3) CSI Formatted Specifications.
4) Plans.
5) Standard Plans.
a) City of Carlsbad Supplemental Standard Drawings.
b) Carlsbad Municipal Water District Standard Drawings.
c) City of Carlsbad modifications to the San Diego Area Regional Standard Drawings.
d) San Diego Area Regional Standard Drawings.
e) State of California Department of Transportation Standard Plans.
6) Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction. 7) Reference Specifications.
8) Manufacturer's Installation Recommendations.
Permits from other agencies as may be required by law.
Revised 8/10/04 Contract No. 38561 -A Page 45 of 109
Change Orders, Supplemental Agreements and approved revisions to Plans and Specifications will
take precedence over items 2) through 7) above. Detailed plans and plan views shall have
precedence over general plans.
2-5.2 Precedence of Contract Documents, add the following: Where CALTRANS specifications
are used to modify the SSPWC or added to the SSPWC by any of the contract documents the
CALTRANS specifications shall have precedence only in reference to the materials and construction
materials referred to in the CALTRANS specifications. The Invitation to Bid, Contract for Public
Works, Part 1 of these Supplemental Provisions and Part 1 of the SSPWC, in the order of
precedence in section 2-5.2 of the SSPWC, shall prevail over the CALTRANS specifications in all
other matters.
2-5.3.3 Submittals, add the following: Each submittal shall be consecutively numbered.
Resubmittals shall be labeled with the number of the original submittal followed by an ascending
alphabetical designation (e.g. The label '4-C' would indicate the third instance that the fourth
submittal had been given to the Engineer). Each sheet of each submittal shall be consecutively
numbered. Each set of shop drawings and submittals shall be accompanied by a letter of transmittal
on the Contractor's letterhead. The Letter of transmittal shall contain the following:
1) Project title and Agency contract number.
2) Number of complete sets.
3) Contractor's certification statement.
4) Specification section number@) pertaining to material submitted for review.
5) Submittal number (Submittal numbers shall be consecutive including subsequent submittals for the same materials.)
6) Description of the contents of the submittal.
7) Identification of deviations from the contract documents.
When submitted for the Engineer's review, Shop Drawings shall bear the Contractor's certification
that the Contractor has reviewed, checked, and approved the Shop Drawings and that they are in
conformance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. The Contractor shatl subscribe to
and shall place the following certification on all submittals:
"I hereby certify that the (equipment, material) shown and marked in this submittal is that proposed to
be incorporated into this Project, is in compliance with the Contract Documents, can be installed in
the allocated spaces, and is submitted for approval."
By: Title:
Company Name:
Add the following:
2-54 Record Drawings, The Contractor shall provide and keep up-to-date a complete "as-built"
record set of blue-line prints, which shall be corrected in red daily and show every change from the
original drawings and specifications and the exact "as-built" locations, sizes and kinds of equipment,
underground piping, valves, and all other work not visible at surface grade. Prints for this purpose
may be obtained from the Agency at cost. This set of drawings shall be kept on the job and shall be
used only as a record set and shall be delivered to the Engineer within ten (IO) days of completion of
the work. Payment for performing the work required by section 2-5.4 shall be included in the various
I bid items and no additional payment will be made therefor.
Revised 8/10/04 Contract No. 38561 -A Page 46 of 109
c
2-9 SURVEYING
2-9.1 Permanent Survey Markers, Delete sections 2-9.1 and replace with the following: The
Contractor shall not cover or disturb permanent survey monuments or benchmarks without the
consent of the Engineer. Where the Engineer concurs, in writing, with the Contractor that protecting
an existing monument in place is impractical, the Contractor shall employ a licensed land surveyor or
a registered civil engineer authorized to practice land surveying within the State of California,
hereinafter Surveyor, to establish the location of the monument before it is disturbed. The Contractor
shall have the monument replaced by the Surveyor no later than thirty (30) days after construction at
the site of the replacement is completed. The Surveyor shall file corner record@) as required by 53
8772 and 8773, et seq. of the California Business and Professions Code.
When a change is made in the finished elevation of the pavement of any roadway in which a
permanent survey monument is located, the Contractor shall adjust the monument frame and cover
to the new grade within 7 days of paving unless the Engineer shall approve otherwise. Monument
frames and covers shall be protected during street sealing or painting projects or be cleaned to the
satisfaction of the Engineer.
2-9.2 Survey Service, Delete sections 2-9.2 and replace with the following: The Contractor shall
hire and pay for the services of a Surveyor, hereinafter Surveyor to perform all work necessary for
establishing control, construction staking, records research and all other surveying work necessary to
construct the work, provide surveying services as required herein and provide surveying, drafting and
other professional services required to satisfy the requirements of the Land Surveyors Act. Surveyor
shall be resident on the site during all surveying operations and shall personally supervise and certify
the surveying work.
Add the following section:
2-9.2.1 Submittal of Surveying Data, All surveying data submittals shall conform to the
requirements of section 2-5.3.3, “Submittals”, herein. The Contractor shall submit grade sheets to the
Engineer before commencing work in the area affected by the grade sheets. The Contractor shall
submit field notes for all surveying required herein to the Engineer within ten days of performing the
survey. All surveying field notes, grade sheets and survey calculations shall be submitted in bound
form on 215mm by 280 mm (8’/; by 11”) paper. The field notes, calculations and supporting data
shall be clear and complete. Supporting data shall include all maps, affidavits, plats, field notes from
earlier surveys and all other evidence used by the Surveyor to determine the location of the
monuments set. The field notes and calculations will be labled with name of the Surveyor, the party
chief, field crew members and preparer of the field notes or calculations. They shall be annotated
with the date of observation or calculation, be numbered with consecutive page numbers and shall
be readable without resort to any electronic aid, computer program or documentation for any
computer program. The field notes shall be prepared in conformance with the CALTRANS “Surveys
Manual”. The Contractor shall have a Record of Survey prepared by the Surveyor and file it in
conformance with 5s 8700 - 8805 of the State of California Business and Professions Code when the
Surveyor performs any surveying that such map is required under §§ 8762 of the State of California
Business and Professions Code and whenever the Surveyor shall establish, set or construct any
permanent survey monument. SDRS drawing M-I 0 type monuments, bolts, spikes, leaded tacks and
nails (when set in concrete), iron pipes, reinforcing steel and all monuments and marks that are at, or
accessory to, property comers and street centerlines are permanent survey monuments. The Record
of Survey shall show all monuments set, control monuments used, the basis of bearings and all other
data needed to determine the procedure of survey and the degree of accuracy attained by the field
surveying including the unadjusted ratio of closure. The unadjusted ratio of closure shall not exceed
1 part in 40,000. The record of survey shall show the location and justification of location of all
permanent monuments set and their relation to the street right-of-way. Record(s) of Suwey(s) shall
be submitted for the Engineer’s review and approval before submittal to the County Surveyor and
Revised 8/10/04 Contract No. 38561 -A Page 47 of 109
before submittal to the County Recorder.
Add the following section:
2-9.2.2 Survey Requirements, Stakes shall be set at offsets approved by the Engineer at no
greater intervals than specified in TABLE 2-9.2.2(A) as measured along the project stationing. Stakes
shall be set to show the location and grade of future curbs adjacent to traffic signal locations where
the curb is not being built as a part of this contract. Staking and marking shall be completed by the
Surveyor and inspected and approved by the Engineer before the start of construction in the area
marked. Centerline monument shall have the disk stamped with the date the monument was set and
the registration number of the Surveyor. Habitat mitigation sites and other areas to be preserved that
are shown on the plans shall be staked and flagged prior to the start of any other activities within the
limits of the work. When curb and gutter does not exist and is not being installed as a part of the
project the location of adjacent facilities being constructed as a part of the contract the Contractor
shall place stakes defining the horizontal and vertical location of such adjacent utility vaults, poles or
other facilities that are being installed as parts of, or adjunct to, the project either by the Contractor
and/or those noted on the plans as to be installed by others.
A
TABLE 2-9.2.2(A)
Survey Requirements for Construction Staking
Feature Staked
Street Centerline
Clearing
Slope
Fence
Rough Grade Cuts or Fills 2 10 m (33’)
Final Grade (includes top of: Basement soil, subbase and base)
Asphalt Pavement Finish Course
Stake
Description
Q
SDRS M-10 Monument
Lath in soil, painted line on PCC & AC surfaces
RP + Marker Stake
RP + Marker Stake
RP + Marker Stake
RP + Marker Stake, Blue- top in grading area
RP, paint on previous course I
lath - Intervisible, s 15m (50’) on tangents
& .s 7.5m (25’) on curves, Painted line - continuous
lntervisible and .s 15m (50’)
I 60 m (200’) on tangents, s 15m (50’) on :urves when R2 300m (1000’) & 7.5m (25’) on
curves when Rs 300m (1000’)
I 15m (50’)
I15 m (50’) on tangents & curves when Rr 300m (1000’) & I 7.5m (25’) on curves when R I 300m (1 000’)
at clearing lint
Grade Breaks
& 17.6 m (25!
N/A ( constant offset)
N/A
s6.7 m (22’)
Revised 8/10/04
I 7.5m (25’) or as per the intersection grid points shown on the plan whichever provides the denser information
Centerline or Parallel to Centerline Lateral Spacing@, Q Spacing (3,0
edge of pavement, paving pass width, crown line & grade
Drainage Structures, Pipes & similar FacilitiesO, 0
Curb
Junction Box 0
RP + Marker Stake
RP + Marker Stake RP + Marker Stake
ntervisible & 5 7.5m (25’), beginning and end, BC & EC of facilities, Grade breaks, Alignment breaks, Junctions, Inlets 8 similar facilities, Risers 8 similar facilities (except plumbing), Skewed cut-off lines
I7.5m (25’), BC & EC, at %A, Yd & %A on curb returns & at beginning 8 end at each junction box location
Setting Tolerance (Within)
7 mm (0.02’) Horizontal, also see section 2-9.2.1 herein
0.3 m (1’) Horizontal
as apprOpriaC
( constant offset) as appropriatc
30 mm (0.1 ’) Vertical & Horizontal
30 mm (0.1’) Horizontal
30 mm (0.1’) Vertical & Horizontal
10 mm (‘/E”) Horizontal
& 7 mm (’/4*) Vertical
10 mm (“/E”) Horizontal & 7 mm (’/4”) Vertical
10 mm (’/E’’) Horizontal & 7 mm (’/4”) Vertical
10 mm (‘/E’’) Horizontal
& 7 mm (‘/4”) Vertical 10 mm (%”) Horizontal & 7 mm (‘/47 Vertical
Contract No. 38561 -A Page 48 of 109
Conduit 0
.-
Minor Structure d
Wall 0
Miscellaneous Q Contour Gradin! 0 Utilities 0, 0
Channels, Dike:
& Ditches 0
Signs 0
Subsurface Drains 0
- Overside Drain2
0
Markers 0
Railings & Barriers 0
Box Culverts
Pavement Markers0
0 Staking for feai
RP + Marker Stake
RP + Marker Stake + Line Stake
RP + Marker Stake + Line ’oint +Guam Stake
RP + Marker Stake RP + Marker Stake
RP + Marker Stake
RP + Marker Stake + Line Doint +Guarc Stake RP + Marker Stake
RP + Marker Stake
RP + Marker Stake
RP + Marker Stake
RP
2 may be OIT
5 15 m (50’) on tangents & curves when R2 300m (1000’) & 5 7.5m (25’) on curves when R 2 300m (1000’) or where grade 5 0.30%
for catch basins: at centerline of box, ends of
box & wings & at each end of the local depression Q
2 15 m (50’) and at beginning & end of: each wall, BC & EC, layout line angle points, changes in footing dimensions Mor elevation
& wall height
I15 m (50’)
5 15 m (50’) on tangents & curves when R2
300m (1000’) & I 7.5m (25’) on curves when R 5 300m (1 000’) or where grade 2 0.30%
intervisible & I 30 m (loo’), BC & EC of facilities, Grade breaks, Alignment breaks, Junctions, Inlets & similar facilities At sign location
intervisible & I 15m (50’), BC & EC of facilities, Grade breaks, Alignment breaks, Junctions, Inlets & similar facilities, Risers & similar facilities longitudinal location
for asphalt street surfacing I 15 m (50’) on :angents & curves when R2 300m (1000’) & 5 7.5m (25’) on curves when R 5300m (1000’).
At beginning & end and 5 15 m (50’) on angents & curves when R 2 300m (1000’) & 5
7.5m (25’) on curves when R 5 300m (1000’)
3 rn to 10 m (1 0’ to 33’) as required by the Engineer, BC & EC, transition points & at beginning & end. Elevation points on footings
& at invert
60 m (ZOO’) on tangents, 15m (50’) on curves when R 2 300m (1000’) & 7.5m (25’) on
curves when R s 300m (1 000’) For PCC surfaced streets lane cold joints will suffice
ed when adiacent marker stakes reference tl
as appropriate
as appropriate
as appropriate
along contour line as appropriate
as appropriate
Line point
as appropriate
At beginning & end
At marker location(s)
at railing & barrier location(s)
as appropriate
at pavement marker location(s)
10 mm (‘/E”) Horizontal &when depth cannot be measured from existing tavement 7 mm ( /4 ) Vertical
10 mm (‘/E”) Horizontal & 7 rnrn (‘/4*) Vertical (when vertical data needed)
7 mm (’I47 Horizontal 7 mm (‘/4”) Vertical
30 mm (0.1’) Vertical & Horizontal
10 mm (”/a”) Horizontal
& 7 mm (’/qn) Vertical
30 mm (0.1’) Horizontal & 7 mm
(‘14”) Vertical
30 mm (0.1’) Vertical & Horizontal
30 mm (0.1’) Horizontal & 7 mm
(’14”) Vertical
30 mm (0.1’) Horizontal & 7 mm
( 1 Id”) Vertical 7 mm (’hn) Horizontal
10 mm (‘la”) Horizontal & Vertical
10 mm (‘/8”) Horizontal
& 7 mrn (1/4”) Vertical
7 mm (’/4”) Horizontal
! offset and elevation of those features
0 Reference points shall be sufficiently durable and set securely enough to survive with accuracy intact throughout the installation & inspection of the features or adjacent facilities for which they provide control. RP means reference point for the purposes of this table
and the accuracy requirements of the RP me‘et the requirements for the feature
(3 Perpendicular to centerline.
(3 Some features are not necessarily parallel to centerline but are referenced thereto
0 Multi-plane surfaced features shall be staked so as to provide line & grade information for each plane of the feature
@ 2 means greater than, or equal to, the number following the symbol. I means less than, or equal to, the number fol- lowing the symbol. The cut datum for storm drainage & sanitary sewer pipes & similar structures shall be their invert. The cut datum for all other utilities shall be the top of their pipe or conduit. -
AI1 guard stakes, line stakes and lath shall be flagged. Unless otherwise approved by the Engineer
flagging, paint and marking cards shall be the color specified in TABLE 2-9.2.2(B)
Revised 811 0/04 Contract No. 38561 -A Page 49 of 109
TABLE 2-9.2.2(B)
Survey Stake Color Code for Construction Staking
Structure
Drainage, Sewer, Curb
Type of Stake IDescription 1 Color*
grade, etc. I
Bridges, sound and retaining walls, box culverts, etc.
Pipe culverts, junction boxes, drop inlets, headwalls, sewer lines, storm
I White I Blue
Horizontal Control I Coordinated control points, control lines, control reference points, centerline, I White/Red
Rig ht-of-W ay
Miscellaneous
I alignments, etc. I
drains, slope protection, curbs, gutters, etc.
Fences, R/ W lines, easements, property monuments, etc.
Signs, railings, barriers, lighting, etc.
WhitelYellow
Orange
I Bench marks I White/Oranae Vertical Control
Clearing 1 Limits of clearing I YellowlBlack
Grading I Slope, intermediate slope, abutment fill, rough grade, contour grading, final I Yellow
Add the following section:
2-9.2.3 Payment for Survey, Payment for work performed to satisfy the requirements of Sections 2-
9.1 through 2-9.3.2 shall be included in the actual bid items requiring the survey work and no
additional payment will be made. Extension of unit prices for extra work shall include full
compensation for attendant survey work and no additional payment will be made therefor. Payment
for the replacement of disturbed monuments and the filing of records of survey andlor corner
records, including filing fees therefor, shall be incidental to the work necessitating the disturbance of
said monuments and no additional payment will be made therefor.
I
2-10 AUTHORITY OF BOARD AND ENGINEER.
Add the following section:
2-10.1 Availability of Records, The Contractor shall, at no charge to the Agency, provide copies of
all records in the Contractor's or subcontractor's possession pertaining to the work that the Engineer
may request.
Add the following section:
2-10.2 Audit And Inspection, Contractor agrees to maintain and/or make available, to the
Engineer, within San Diego County, accurate books and accounting records relative to all its
activities and to contractually require all subcontractors to this Contract to do the same. The Engineer
shall have the right to monitor, assess, and evaluate Contractor's and its subcontractors performance
pursuant to this Agreement, said monitoring, assessments, and evaluations to include, but not be
limited to, audits, inspection of premises, reports, contracts, subcontracts and interviews of
Contractor's staff and the staff of all subcontractors to this contract. At any time during normal
business hours and as often as the Engineer may deem necessary, upon reasonable advance
notice, Contractor shall make available to the Engineer for examination, all of its, and all
subcontractors to this contract, records with respect to all matters covered by this Contract and will
permit the Engineer to audit, examine, copy and make excerpts or transcripts from such data and
records, and to make audits of all invoices, materials, payrolls, records of personnel, and other data
relating to all matters covered by this Contract. However, any such activities shall be carried out in a
manner so as to not unreasonably interfere with Contractor's ongoing business operations.
Contractor and all subcontractors to this contract shall maintain such data and records for as long as
may be required by applicable laws and regulations.
I
Revised 8/10/04 Contract No. 38561 -A Page 50 of 109
SECTION 3 -- CHANGES IN WORK
3-2 CHANGES INITIATED BY THE AGENCY.
3-2.2.1 Contract Unit prices, add the following: In the case of an increase or decrease in quantity
of a minor bid item in excess of 25 percent of the original quantity bid the adjustment of contract unit
price for such items will be limited to that portion of the change in excess of 25 percent of the original
quantity listed in the Contractor's bid proposal for this contract. Adjustments in excess of 25 percent
may, at the option of the Engineer, be paid pursuant to section 3-3, Extra Work.
3-3 EXTRA WORK.
3-3.2.2 ( c ) Tool and Equipment Rental, second paragraph, modify as follows: Regardless of
ownership, the rates and right-of-way delay factors to be used in determining rental and delay costs
shall be the edition of the, "Labor Surcharge and Equipment Rental Rates" published by CALTRANS,
current at the time of the actual use of the tool or equipment. The right-of-way delay factors therein
shall be used as multipliers of the rental rates for determining the value of costs for delay to the
Contractor and subcontractors, if any. The labor surcharge rates published therein are not a part of
this contract.
3-3.2.3 Markup, Delete sections 3-3.2.3 (a) and (b) and replace with the following:
(a) shall constitute the markup for all overhead and profits: - 1) Labor ................................... 20
2) Materials ............................. 15
3) Equipment Rental ................... 15
4) . Other Items and Expenditures .. 15
To the sum of the costs and markups provided for in this section, 1 percent shall be added as
compensation for bonding.
Work by Contractor. The following percentages shall be added to the Contractor's costs and
(b) Work by Subcontractor. When all or any part of the extra work is performed by a Subcontractor, the markup established in section 3-3.2.3(a) shall be applied to the Subcontractor's
actual cost of such work. A markup of 10 percent on the first $5,000 of the subcontracted portion of
the extra work and a markup of 5 percent on work added in excess of $5,000 of the subcontracted
portion of the extra work may be added by the Contractor.
3-3.3 Daily Reports by Contractor, add the following after the second sentence: Payment for extra
work will not be made until such time that the Contractor submits completed daily reports and all
supporting documents to the Engineer.
34 CHANGED CONDITIONS.
Delete the second sentence of paragraph three, delete paragraph five (5). and add the following: The
Contractor shall not be entitled to the payment of any additional compensation for any act, or failure
to act, by the Engineer, including failure or refusal to issue a change order, or for the happening of
any event, thing, occurrence, or other cause, unless the Contractor shall have first given the
Engineer due written notice of potential claim as hereinafter specified. Compliance with this section
shall not be required as a prerequisite to notice provisions in Section 6-7.3 Contract Time
Accounting, nor to any claim that is based on differences in measurement or errors of computation
as to contract quantities. The written notice of potential claim for changed conditions shall be
submitted by the Contractor to the Engineer upon their discovery and prior to the time that the
,-
Revised 8/10/04 Contract No. 38561 -A Page 51 of 109
Contractor performs the work giving rise to the potential claim. The Contractor’s failure to give written
notice of potential claim for changed conditions to the agency upon their discovery and before they
are disturbed shall constitute a waiver of all claims in connection therewith.
The Contractor shall provide the City with a written document containing a description of the
particular circumstances giving rise to the potential claim, the reasons for which the Contractor
believes additional compensation may be due and nature of any and all costs involved within 20
working days of the date of service of the written notice of potential claim for changed conditions.
Verbal notifications are disallowed.
The potential claim shall include the following certification relative to the California False Claims Act,
Government Code Sections 12650-1 2655.
“The undersigned certifies that the above statements are made in full cognizance of the California
False Claims Act, Government Code sections 12650-1 2655. The undersigned further understands
and agrees that this potential claim, unless resolved, must be restated as a claim in response to the
City’s proposed final estimate in order for it to be further considered.”
By: Title:
Company Name:
The Contractor’s estimate of costs may be updated when actual costs are known. The Contractor
shall submit substantiation of its actual costs to the Engineer within 20 working days after the
affected work is completed. Failure to do so shall be sufficient cause for denial of any claim
subsequently filed on the basis of said notice of potential claim.
It is the intention of this section that differences between the parties arising under and by virtue of the
contract be brought to the attention of the Engineer at the earliest possible time in order that such
matters be settled, if possible, or other appropriate action promptly taken.
3-5 DISPUTED WORK.
Add the following: The Contractor shall give the agency written notice of potential claim prior to
commencing any disputed work. Failure to give said notice shall constitute a waiver of all claims in
connection therewith.
Delete second sentence of paragraph one and add the following: Prior to proceeding with dispute
resolution pursuant to Public Contract Code provisions specified hereinafter, the contractor shall
attempt to resolve all disputes informally through the following dispute resolution chain of command:
1. Project Inspector
2. Senior Inspector
3. Principal Inspector
4. Public Works Director
5. City Manager
The Contractor shall submit a complete report within 20 working days after completion of the
disputed work stating its position on the claim, the contractual basis for the claim, along with all
documentation supporting the costs and all other evidentiary materials. At each level of claim or
_-
Contract No. 38561 -A Page 52 of 109 Revised 8/10/04
appeal of claim the City will, within 10 working days of receipt of said claim or appeal of claim, review
the Contractor's report and respond with a position, request additional information or request that the
Contractor meet and present its report. When additional information or a meeting is requested the
City will provide its position within 10 working days of receipt of said additional information or
Contractor's presentation of its report. The Contractor may appeal each level's position up to the City
Manager after which the Contractor may proceed under the provisions of the Public Contract Code.
The authority within the dispute resolution chain of command is limited to recommending a resolution
to a claim to the City Manager. Actual approval of the claim is subject to the change order provisions
in the contract.
All claims by the contractor for $375,000 or less shall be resolved in accordance with the procedures
in the Public Contract Code, Division 2, Part 3, Chapter 1, Article 1.5 (commencing with Section
201 04) which is set forth below:
ARTICLE I .5 RESOLUTION OF CONSTRUCTION CLAIMS
20104. (a)(l) This article applies to all public works claims of three hundred seventy-five thousand
dollars ($375,000) or less which arise between a contractor and a local agency.
(2) This article shall not apply to any claims resulting from a contract between a contractor and a
public agency when the public agency has elected to resolve any disputes pursuant to Article 7.1
(commencing with Section 10240) of Chapter 1 of Part 2.
(b)(l) "Public work" has the same meaning as in Sections 3100 and 3106 of the Civil Code, except
that "public work" does not include any work or improvement contracted for by the state or the
Regents of the University of California.
(2) "Claim" means a separate demand by the contractor for (A) a time extension, (B) payment of
money or damages arising from work done by, or on behalf of, the contractor pursuant to the contract
for a public work and payment of which is not otherwise expressly provided for or the claimant is not
otherwise entitled to, or (C) an amount the payment of which is disputed by the local agency.
(c) The provisions of this article or a summary thereof shall be set forth in the plans or specifications
for any work which may give rise to a claim under this article.
(d) This article applies only to contracts entered into on or after January 1, 1991.
20104.2. For any claim subject to this article, the following requirements apply:
(a) The claim shall be in writing and include the documents necessary to substantiate the claim.
Claims must be filed on or before the date of final payment. Nothing in this subdivision is intended to
extend the time limit or supersede notice requirements otherwise provided by contract for the filing of
claims.
(b)(l) For claims of less than fifty thousand dollars ($50,000), the local agency shall respond in
writing to any written claim within 45 days of receipt of the claim, or may request, in writing, within 30
days of receipt of the claim, any additional documentation supporting the claim or relating to
defenses to the claim the local agency may have against the claimant.
(2) If additional information is thereafter required, it shall be requested and provided pursuant to this
subdivision, upon mutual agreement of the local agency and the claimant.
(3) The local agency's written response to the claim, as further documented, shall be submitted to the
claimant within 15 days after receipt of the further documentation or within a period of time no greater
than that taken by the claimant in producing the additional information, whichever is greater.
(c)(l) For claims of over fifty thousand dollars ($50,000) and less than or equal to three hundred
seventy-five thousand dollars ($375,000), the local agency shall respond in writing to all written
claims within 60 days of receipt of the claim, or may request, in writing, within 30 days of receipt of
the claim, any additional documentation supporting the claim or relating to defenses to the claim the
local agency may have against the claimant.
(2) If additional information is thereafter required, it shall be requested and provided pursuant to this
Revised 8/10/04 Contract No. 38561 -A Page 53 of 109
subdivision, upon mutual agreement of the local agency and the claimant.
(3) The local agency's written response to the claim, as further documented, shall be submitted to
the claimant within 30 days after receipt of the further documentation, or within a period of time no
greater than that taken by the claimant in producing the additional information or requested
documentation, whichever is greater.
(d) If the claimant disputes the local agency's written response, or the local agency fails to respond
within the time prescribed, the claimant may so notify the local agency, in writing, either within 15
days of receipt of the local agency's response or within 15 days of the local agency's failure to
respond within the time prescribed, respectively, and demand an informal conference to meet and
confer for settlement of the issues in dispute. Upon a demand, the local agency shall schedule a
meet and confer conference within 30 days for settlement of the dispute.
(e) Following the meet and confer conference, if the claim or any portion remains in dispute, the
claimant may file a claim as provided in Chapter 1 (commencing with Section 900) and Chapter 2
(commencing with Section 910) of Part 3 of Division 3.6 of Title 1 of the Government Code. For
purposes of those provisions, the running of the period of time within which a claim must be filed
shall be tolled from the time the claimant submits his or her written claim pursuant to subdivision (a)
until the time that claim is denied as a result of the meet and confer process, including any period of
time utilized by the meet and confer process. (9 This article does not apply to tort claims and nothing in this article is intended nor shall be
construed to change the time periods for filing tort claims or actions specified by Chapter 1
(commencing with Section 900) and Chapter 2 (commencing with Section 910) of Part 3 of Division
3.6 of Title 1 of the Government Code.
20104.4. The following procedures are established for all civil actions filed to resolve claims subject
to this article:
(a) Within 60 days, but no earlier than 30 days, following the filing or responsive pleadings, the court
shall submit the matter to nonbinding mediation unless waived by mutual stipulation of both parties.
The mediation process shall provide for the selection within 15 days by both parties of a disinterested
third person as mediator, shall be commenced within 30 days of the submittal, and shall be
concluded within 15 days from the commencement of the mediation unless a time requirement is
extended upon a good cause showing to the court or by stipulation of both parties. If the parties fail to
select a mediator within the 15-day period, any party may petition the court to appoint the mediator.
(b)(l) If the matter remains in dispute, the case shall be submitted to judicial arbitration pursuant to
Chapter 2.5 (commencing with Section 1141.10) of Title 3 of Part 3 of the Code of Civil Procedure,
notwithstanding Section 1141 .I1 of that code. The Civil Discovery Act of 1986 (Article 3 (commencing
with Section 2016) of Chapter 3 of Title 3 of Part 4 of the Code of Civil procedure) shall apply to any
proceeding brought under the subdivision consistent with the rules pertaining to judicial arbitration.
(2) Notwithstanding any other provision of law, upon stipulation of the parties, arbitrators appointed
for purposes of this article shall be experienced in construction law, and, upon stipulation of the
parties, mediators and arbitrators shall be paid necessary and reasonable hourly rates of pay not to
exceed their customary rate, and such fees and expenses shall be paid equally by the parties, except
in the case of arbitration where the arbitrator, for good cause, determines a different division. In no
event shall these fees or expenses be paid by state or county funds.
(3) In addition to Chapter 2.5 (commencing with Section 1141.10) Title 3 of Part 3 of the Code of Civil
Procedure, any party who after receiving an arbitration award requests a trial de novo but does not
obtain a more favorable judgment shall, in addition to payment of costs and fees under that chapter,
pay the attorney's fees of the other party arising out of the trial de novo.
(c) The court may, upon request by any party, order any witnesses to participate in the mediation or
.-
arbitration process.
_. 20104.6. (a) No local agency shall fail to pay money as to any portion of a claim which is undisputed
except as otherwise provided in the contract.
(b) In any suit filed under Section 20104.4, the local agency shall pay interest at the legal rate on any
r
Revised 8/10/04 Contract No. 38561-A Page 54 of 109
arbitration award or judgment. The interest shall begin to accrue on the date the suit is filed in a court
of law.
SECTION 4 - CONTROL OF MATERIALS
4-1 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP.
4-1.3.1 General, add the following: The Contractor shall provide the Engineer free and safe access
to any and all parts of work at any time. Such free and safe access shall include means of safe
access and egress, ventilation, lighting, shoring, dewatering and all elements pertaining to the safety
of persons as contained in the State of California, California Code of Regulations, Title 8, Industrial
Relations, Chapter 4, Division of Industrial Safety, Subchapter 4, Construction Safety Orders and
such other safety regulations as may apply. Contractor shall furnish Engineer with such information
as may be necessary to keep the Engineer fully informed regarding progress and manner of work
and character of materials. Inspection or testing of the whole or any portion of the work or materials
incorporated in the work shall not relieve Contractor from any obligation to fulfill this Contract.
4-1.4 Test of Materials, delete the phrase, “and a reasonable amount of retesting”, from the third
sentence of the first paragraph.
I
add the following: Except as specified in these Supplemental Provisions, the Agency will bear the
cost of testing of locally produced materials and/or on-site workmanship where the results of such
tests meet or exceed the requirements indicated in the Standard Specifications and the
Supplemental Provisions. The cost of all other tests shall be borne by the Contractor.
At the option of the Engineer, the source of supply of each of the materials shall be approved by the
Engineer before the delivery is started. All materials proposed for use may be inspected or tested at
any time during their preparation and use. If, after incorporating such materials into the Work, it is
found that sources of supply that have been approved do not furnish a uniform product, or if the
product from any source proves unacceptable at any time, the Contractor shall furnish approved
material from other approved sources. If any product proves unacceptable after improper storage,
handling or for any other reason it shall be rejected, not incorporated into the work and shall be
removed from the project site all at the Contractor’s expense.
Compaction tests may be made by the Engineer and all costs for tests that meet or exceed the
requirements of the specifications shall be borne by the Agency. Said tests may be made at any
place along the work as deemed necessary by the Engineer. The costs of any retests made
necessary by noncompliance with the specifications shall be borne by the Contractor.
4-1.6 Trade names or Equals, add the following: The Contractor is responsible for the satisfactory
performance of substituted items. If, in the sole opinion of the Engineer, the substitution is
determined to be unsatisfactory in performance, appearance, durability, compatibility with associated
items, availability of repair parts and suitability of application the Contractor shall remove the
substituted item and replace it with the originally specified item at no cost to the Agency.
Add the following section:
4-2 MATERIALS TRANSPORTATION, HANDLING AND STORAGE.
The Contractor shall order, purchase, transport, coordinate delivery, accept delivery, confirm the
quantity and quality received, prepare storage area(s), store, handle, protect, move, relocate,
remove and dispose excess of all materials used to accomplish the Work. Materials shall be
delivered to the site of the work only during working hours, as defined in section 6-7.2, and shall be
Revised 8/10/04 Contract No. 38561-A Page 55 of 109
accompanied by bills of lading that shall clearly state for each delivery: the name of the Contractor
as consignee, the project name and number, address of delivery and name of consignor and a
description of the material(s) shipped. Prior to storage of any materials which have been shipped to
or by the Contractor to any location within the Agency’s boundaries the Contractor shall provide the
Engineer a copy of lease agreements for each property where such materials are stored. The lease
agreement shall clearly state the term of the lease, the description of materials allowed to be stored
and shall provide for the removal of the materials and restoration of the storage site within the time
allowed for the Work. All such storage shall conform to all laws and ordinances that may pertain to
the materials stored and to preparation of the storage site and the location of the site on which the
materials are stored. Loss, damage or deterioration of all stored materials shall be the Contractor’s
responsibility. Conformance to the requirements of this section, both within and outside the limits of
work are a part of the Work. The Engineer shall have the right to verify the suitability of materials
and their proper storage at any time during the Work.
SECTION 5 -- UTILITIES
5-1 LOCATION.
Delete the first paragraph and substitute the following: The Agency and affected utility companies
have, by a search of known records, endeavored to locate and indicate on the Plans, all utilities
which exist within the limits of the work. However, the accuracy and/or completeness of the nature,
size and/or location of utilities indicated on the Plans is not guaranteed.
5-4 RELOCATION.
Add the following: In conformance with section 5-6 the Contractor shall coordinate the work with
utility agencies and companies. Prior to the installation of any and all utility structures within the limits
of work by any utility agency or company, or its contractor, the Contractor shall place all curb or curb
and gutter that is a part of the work and adjacent to the location where such utility structures are
shown on the plans and are noted as being located, relocated or are otherwise shown as installed by
others. In order to minimize delays to the Contractor caused by the failure of other parties to relocate
utilities that interfere with the construction, the Contractor, upon the Engineer’s approval, may be
permitted to temporarily omit the portion of work affected by the utility. If such temporary omission is
approved by the Engineer the Contractor shall place survey or other physical control markers
sufficient to locate the curb or curb and gutter to the satisfaction of the utility agency or company.
Such temporary omission shall be for the Contractor’s convenience and no additional compensation
will be allowed therefor or for additional work, materials or delay associated with the temporary
omission. The portion thus omitted shall be constructed by the Contractor immediately following the
relocation of the utility involved unless otherwise directed by the Engineer.
5-6 COOPERATION.
Add the following:
Contractor shall coordinate with SDG&E for the installation of power to the site and obtain all
necessary permits, work orders and inspections associated with the associated electrical work.
Contractor shall protect the existing power to residences adjacent to the park and is responsible for
all landscape repairs needed to restore any trenching or damage to landscaping of adjacent
properties that may occur while performing the work. The contractor shall install electrical conduit
per SDG&E plans, Construction Order No. 500531 6, Project No. 336279-01 0.
Revised 8/10/04 Contract No. 38561-A Page 56 of 109
SECTION 6 -- PROSECUTION, PROGRESS AND
ACCEPTANCE OF THE WORK
6-1 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE AND COMMENCEMENT OF WORK.
Delete section 6-1 and substitute the following: Except as otherwise provided herein and unless
otherwise prohibited by permits from other agencies as may be required by law the Contractor shall
begin work within2 calendar days after receipt of the "Notice to Proceed".
The construction requirements for this project include a Project Mitigation Monitoring &
Reporting Program per CUP 02-23 and HDP 02-11, Planning Commission Resolution No. 5399
& 5398 respectively ( a copy is available at the Planning Department). Construction operation
restrictions are outlined in the Project Mitigation Monitoring & Reporting Program limiting
construction operations based upon nesting season for the California gnatcatcher.
Heavy equipment operations are not allowed during nesting season for the California
gnatcatcher. Nestinn season for the California gnatcatcher is February lst thru September 15.
All nrading and trenching (includinn utilities and irrination lines, and concrete paving) must
be completed bv February I. 2005.
Add the following section:
6-1.1 Pre-Construction Meeting. After, or upon, notification of contract award, the Engineer will set
the time and location for the Preconstruction Meeting. Attendance of the Contractor's management
personnel responsible for the management, administration, and execution of the project is mandatory
for the meeting to be convened. Failure of the Contractor to have the Contractor's responsible project
personnel attend the Preconstruction Meeting will be grounds for default by Contractor per section 6-
4. No separate payment will be made for the Contractor's attendance at the meeting. The notice to
proceed will only be issued on or after the completion of the preconstruction meeting.
Add the following section:
6-1 .I .I Baseline Construction Schedule Submittal. The Contractor shall submit the Baseline
Construction Schedule per the submittal requirements of section 2-5.3. The submittal of the Baseline
Construction Schedule shall include each item and element of work and shall be on hard (paper)
copy and electronic media in Microsoft Project Manager Program. ( or approved equal)
Add the following section:
6-1.2.7 Restraints to Activities. Any submittals, utility interfaces, or any furnishing of Agency
supplied materials, equipment, or services, which may impact any activity's construction shall be
shown as a restraint to those activities. Time periods to accommodate the review and correction of
submittals shall be included in the schedule.
Add the following section:
6-1.2.8 Late Completion. A Baseline Construction Schedule showing a project duration longer than
the specified contract duration will not be acceptable and will be grounds for determination of default
by Contractor, per section 64.
Add the following section:
6-1.2.9 Early Completion. The Baseline Construction Schedule will show the Contractor's plan to
support and maintain the project for the entire contractual time span of the project. Should the
Contractor propose a project duration shorter than contract duration, a complete Baseline
Construction Schedule must be submitted, reflecting the shorter duration, in complete accordance
-
Revised 8/10/04 Contract No. 38561-A Page 57 of 109
with all schedule requirements of section 6-1. The Engineer may choose to accept the Contractor’s
proposal of a project duration shorter than the duration specified; provided the Agency is satisfied the
shortened Baseline Construction Schedule is reasonable and the Agency and all other entities, public
and private, which interface with the project are able to support the provisions of the shortened
Baseline Construction Schedule. The Agency’s acceptance of a shortened duration project will be
confirmed through the execution of a contract change order revising the project duration and
implementing all contractual requirements including liquidated damages in accordance with the
revised duration.
Add the following section:
6-1.2.10 Engineer’s Review. The Construction Schedule is subject to the review of the Engineer.
The Engineer’s determination that the Baseline Construction Schedule proposed by the Contractor
complies with the requirements of these supplemental provisions shall be a condition precedent to
issuance of the Notice to Proceed by the Engineer. If the Engineer determines that the Construction
Schedule does not meet the requirements of these specifications the Contractor shall correct the
Construction Schedule to meet these specifications and resubmit it to the Engineer. Failure of the
Contractor to obtain the Engineer’s determination that the initial Construction Schedule proposed by
the Contractor complies with the requirements of these supplemental provisions within thirty (30)
working days after the date of the preconstruction meeting shall be grounds for termination of the
contract per section 6-4. Days used by the Engineer to review the initial Construction Schedule will
not be included in the 30 working days.
The Engineer will review and return to the Contractor, with any comments, the Baseline Construction
Schedule within 15 working days of submittal. The Baseline Construction Schedule will be returned
marked as per sections 6-1.2.10.1 through 6-1.2.10.3.
Add the following section:
6-1.2.10.1 “Accepted.” The Contractor may proceed with the project work upon issuance of the
Notice to Proceed, and will receive payment for the schedule in accordance with section 6-1.8.1.
-
Add the following section:
6-1.2.1 0.2 “Accepted with Comments.” The Contractor may proceed with the project work upon
issuance of the Notice to Proceed. The Contractor must resubmit the schedule incorporating the
comments prior to receipt of payment per section 6-1.8.1.
Add the following section:
6-1.2.10.3 “Not Accepted.” The Contractor must resubmit the schedule incorporating the
corrections and changes of the comments prior to receipt of payment per section 6-1.8.1. The Notice
to Proceed will not be issued by the Engineer if the changes of the comments are not submitted as
required hereinbefore and marked “Accepted”
Contractor, at the sole option of the Engineer,
under the provisions of section 6-4 DEFAULT
are not submitted as required hereinbefore and
or ‘‘Accepted with Comments” by the Engineer. The
may be considered as having defaulted the contract
BY CONTRACTOR if the changes of the comments
marked “Accepted” by the Engineer.
Add the following section:
6-1.3 Preparation of Schedule Updates and Revisions. The Contractor shall meet with the
Engineer during the last week of each month to agree upon each activity’s schedule status and shall
submit monthly updates of the Baseline Construction Schedule confirming the agreements no later
than the fifth working day of the following month. The monthly update will be submitted on hard
(paper) copy and electronic media conforming to section 6-1.3.3 Electronic Media per the submittal
requirements of section 2-5.3 and will include each item and element of sections 6-1.2 through 6-
1.2.9 and 6-1.3.1 through 6-1.3.7.
-
Revised 8/10/04 Contract No. 38561-A Page 58 of 109
Add the following section:
6-1.3.1 Actual Activity Dates. The actual dates each activity was started and/or completed during
the month. After first reporting an actual date, the Contractor shall not change that actual date in later
updates without specific notification to the Engineer with the update.
Add the following section:
6-1.3.2 Activity Percent Complete. For each activity underway at the end of the month, the
Contractor shall report the percentage determined by the Engineer as complete for the activity.
Add the following section:
6-1.3.3 Electronic Media. The schedule data disk shall be a 89 mm (3’/$) high density diskette,
labelled with the project name and number, the Contractor’s name and the date of preparation of the
schedule data disk. The schedule data disk shall be readable by the software specified in section 6-
1.2.4 “Schedule Soflware” and shall be free of file locking, encryption or any other protocol that would
impede full access of all data stored on it.
Add the following section:
6-1.3.4 List of Changes. A list of all changes made to the activities or to the interconnecting logic,
with an explanation for each change.
Add the following section:
6-1.3.5 Change Orders, Each monthly update will include the addition of the network revisions
reflecting the change orders approved in the previous month. The network revisions will be as
agreed upon during the review and acceptance of the Contractor’s change orders.
- Add the following section:
6-1.3.6 Bar Chart. Each monthly update will include a chart showing individual tasks and their
durations arranged with the tasks on the vertical axis and duration on the horizontal axis. The bar
chart shall use differing texture patterns or distinctive line types to show the critical path.
Add the following section:
6-1. 4 Engineer’s Review of Updated Construction Schedule. The Engineer will review and
return the Updated Construction Schedule to the Contractor, with any comments, within 5 working
days of submittal. The Updated Construction Schedule will be returned marked as per sections 6-
1.4.1 through 6-1.4.3. Any Updated Construction Schedule marked “Accepted with Comments” or
“Not Accepted” by the Engineer will be returned to the Contractor for correction. Upon resubmittal the
Engineer will review and return the resubmitted Updated Construction Schedule to the Contractor,
with any comments, within 5 working days. Failure of the Contractor to submit a monthly updated
construction schedule will invoke the same consequences as the Engineer returning a monthly
updated construction schedule marked “Not Accepted”.
Add the following section:
6-1.4.1 “Accepted.” The Contractor may proceed with the project work, and will receive payment for
the schedule in accordance with section 6-1.8.2.
. Add the following section:
6-1.4.2 “Accepted with Comments.” The Contractor may proceed with the project work. The
Contractor must resubmit the Updated Construction Schedule to the Engineer incorporating the
corrections and changes noted in the Engineer’s comments prior to receipt of payment per section
Add the following section:
6-1.8.2.
Revised 8/10/04 Contract No. 38561 -A Page 59 of 109
6-1.4.3 “Not Accepted.” The Contractor must resubmit the Updated Construction Schedule to the
Engineer incorporating the corrections and changes noted in the Engineer’s comments prior to
receipt of payment per section 6-1.8.2. The Contractor, at the sole option of the Engineer, may be
considered as having defaulted the contract under the provisions of section 6-4 DEFAULT BY
CONTRACTOR if the changes of the comments are not submitted and marked “Accepted” by the
Engineer before the last day of the month in which the Updated Construction Schedule is due. If the
Contractor fails to submit the corrected Updated Construction Schedule as required herein the
Contractor may elect to proceed with the project at its own risk. Should the Contractor elect not to
proceed with the project, any resulting delay, impact, or disruption to the project will be the
Contractor’s responsibility.
Add the following section:
6-1.5 Late Completion or Milestone Dates. Should the Schedule Update indicate a completion or
contractually required milestone date later than the properly adjusted contract or milestone duration,
the Agency may withhold Liquidated Damages for the number of days late. Should a subsequent
“Accepted” Schedule Update remove all or a portion of the delay, all or the allocated portion of the
previously held Liquidated Damages shall be released in the monthly payment to the Contractor
immediately following the “Accepted” schedule.
Add the following section:
6-1.6 Interim Revisions. Should the actual or projected progress of the work become substantially
different from that depicted in the Project Schedule, independently of and prior to the next monthly
update, the Contractor will submit a revised Baseline Construction Schedule, with a list and
explanation of each change made to the schedule. The Revised Construction Schedule will be
submitted per the submittal requirements of section 2-5.3 and per the schedule review and
acceptance requirements of section 6-1, including but not limited to the acceptance and payment
provisions. As used in this subsection “substantially different“ means a time variance greater than 5
percent of the number of days of duration for the project.
Add the following section:
6-1. 7 Final Schedule Update. The Contractor shall prepare and submit a final schedule update
when one hundred percent of the construction work is completed. The Contractor’s Final Schedule
Update must accurately represent the actual dates for all activities. The final schedule update shall
be prepared and reviewed per sections 6-1.3 Preparation of Schedule Updates and Revisions and 6-
1. 4 Engineer’s Review of Updated Construction Schedule. Acceptance of the final schedule update
is required for completion of the project and release of any and all funds retained per section 9-3.2.
Add the following section:
6-1 .I Measurement And Payment Of Construction Schedule. The Contractor’s preparation,
revision and maintenance of the Construction Schedule are incidental to the work and no separate
payment will be made therefor.
6-2 PROSECUTION OF WORK.
Add the following section:
6-2.1 Order of Work. The work to be done shall consist of furnishing all labor, equipment and
materials, and performing all operations necessary to complete the Project Work as shown on the
Project Plans and as specified in the Specifications. The construction requirements for this project
include a Project Mitigation Monitoring & Reporting Program per CUP 02-23 and HDP 02-11,
Planning Commission Resolution No. 5399 & 5398 respectively. A Report is available at the City
Planning Department for review. Construction operation restrictions are outlined in the Project
Mitigation Monitoring & Reporting Program limiting construction operations based upon nesting
Revised 8/10/04 Contract No. 38561 -A Page 60 of 109
season for the California gnatcatcher. Heavy equipment activities are not allowed during nesting
season for the California gnatcatcher. Nesting season for the California anatcatcher is Februarv 1”
thru September 15.
All gradina and trenching (includinq utilities and irrigation lines, and concrete pavinq must be
completed bv Februarv 1,2005.
Add the following section:
6-2.3 Project Meetings. The Engineer will establish the time and location of bi-weekly Project
Meetings. Each Project Meeting shall be attended by the Contractor’s Representative. The Project
Representative shall be the individual determined under section 7-6, “The Contractor’s
Representative”, SSPWC. No separate payment for attendance of the Contractor, the Contractor‘s
Representative or any other employee or subcontractor or subcontractor’s employee at these
meetings will be made.
6-6 DELAYS AND EXTENSIONS OF TIME.
6-6.4 Written Notice and Report. Modify as follows: The Contractor shall provide written notice to
the Engineer within two hours of the beginning of any period that the Contractor has placed any
workers or equipment on standby for any reason that the Contractor has determined to be caused by
the Agency or by any organization that the Agency may otherwise be obligated by. The Contractor
shall provide continuing daily written notice to the Engineer, each working day, throughout the
duration of such period of delay. The initial and continuing written notices shall include the
classification of each workman and supervisor and the make and model of each piece of equipment
placed on standby, the cumulative duration of the standby, the Contractor’s opinion of the cause of
the delay and a cogent explanation of why the Contractor could not avoid the delay by reasonable
means. Should the Contractor fail to provide the notice@) required by this section the Contractor
agrees that no delay has occurred and that it will not submit any claim(s) therefor.
6-7 TIME OF COMPLETION. Add the following: The Contractor shall diligently prosecute the
work to completion within working days after the starting date specified in the
Notice to Proceed.
200
6-7.2 Working Day. Add the following: Unless otherwise approved in writing by the Engineer, the
hours of work shall be between the hours of 7:OO a.m. and 4:OO p.m. on Mondays through Fridays,
excluding Agency holidays. The Contractor shall obtain the written approval of the Engineer if the
Contractor desires to work outside said hours or at any time during weekends and/or holidays. This
written permission must be obtained at least 48 hours prior to such work. The Engineer may approve
work outside the hours and/or days stated herein when, in hidher sole opinion, such work conducted
by the Contractor is beneficial to the best interests of the Agency. The Contractor shall pay the
inspection costs of such work.
Construction operation restrictions are outlined in the Project Mitigation Monitoring &
Reporting Program limiting construction operations based upon nesting season for the
California gnatcatcher. Heavy equipment activities are not allowed during nesting season for
the California gnatcatcher. Nesting season for the California anatcatcher is Februarv 1’‘ thru
September 15.
All grading and trenching (including utilities and irrigation lines, and concrete paving) must
be completed bv Februarv I, 2005.
The Contractor shall incorporate the dates, areas and types of work prohibited in this section
in the Construction Schedule required by section 6.1. No additional payment, adjustment of
Revised 8/10/04 Contract No. 38561 -A Page 61 of 109
contract price or adjustment of contract time of completion will be allowed as a consequence
of the prohibition of work being performed within the dates, areas andlor types of work
prohibited in this section.
6-8 COMPLETION AND ACCEPTANCE. Delete the second paragraph and add the following: The
Engineer will not accept the Work or any portion of the Work before all of the Work is completed and
all outstanding deficiencies that may exist are corrected by the Contractor and the Engineer is
satisfied that all the materials and workmanship, and all other features of the Work, meet the
requirements of all of the specifications for the Work. Use, temporary, interim or permanent, of all, or
portions of, the Work does not constitute acceptance of the Work. If, in the Engineer's judgment, the
Work has been completed and is ready for acceptance the Engineer will so certify to the Board.
Upon such certification by the Engineer the Board may accept the completed Work. Upon the
Board's acceptance of the Work the Engineer will cause a "Notice of Completion" to be filed in the
office of the San Diego County Recorder. The date of recordation shall be the date of completion of
the Work.
Delete the first sentence of the third paragraph and substitute the following two sentences: All work
shall be warranted for one (1) year after recordation of the "Notice of Completion" and any faulty
work or materials discovered during the warranty period shall be repaired or replaced by the
Contractor, at its expense. Twenty-five percent of the faithful performance bond shall be retained as
a warranty bond for the one year warranty period.
6-9 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES.
Modify the last sentence of the first paragraph and the first sentence of the second paragraph and
add the following: For each consecutive calendar day in excess of the time specified for completion
of Work, as adjusted in accordance with 6-6, the Contractor shall pay the Agency, or have withheld
monies due it, the sum of Fifeteen Hundred Dollars ($1.500.)
Execution of the Contract shall constitute agreement by the Agency and Contractor that $1,500 per
day is the minimum value of costs and actual damages caused by the Contractor to complete the
Work within the allotted time. Any progress payments made after the specified completion date shall
not constitute a waiver of this paragraph or of any damages.
SECTION 7 -- RESPONSIBILITIES of the CONTRACTOR
73 LIABILITY INSURANCE.
Modify as follows: All insurance is to be placed with insurers that have a rating in Best's Key Rating
Guide of at least A-:V and are admitted and authorized to conduct business in the state of California
and are listed in the official publication of the Department of Insurance of the State of California.
74 WORKERS' COMPENSATION INSURANCE.
Add the following: All insurance is to be placed with insurers that are admitted and authorized to
conduct business in the state of California and are listed in the official publication of the Department
of Insurance of the State of California. Policies issued by the State Compensation Fund meet the
requirement for workers' compensation insurance.
7-5 PERMITS.
Delete the first sentence and add the following four sentences: Except as specified herein the
agency will obtain, at no cost to the Contractor, all encroachment, right-of-way, grading, resource
Revised 8/10/04 Contract No. 38561 -A Page 62 of 109
agency and building permits necessary to perform work for this contract on Agency property, in
streets, highways (except State highway right-of-way), railways or other rights-of-way. Contractor
shall not begin work until all permits incidental to the work are obtained. The Contractor shall obtain
and pay for all permits for the disposal of all materials removed from the project. The cost of said
permit@) shall be included in the price bid for the appropriate bid item and no additional
compensation will be allowed therefor.
Add the following section:
7-5.1 Resource Agency Permits. Resource agency permits for the Work are included in Appendix
‘A’ of these supplemental provisions. Resource agency permits pertaining to this project include:
1) California Water Quality Control Board permit number 9 37C321868 renewed 5/09/04.
7-7 COOPERATION AND COLLATERAL WORK.
Add the following section:
7-7.1 Coordination. The Contractor shall coordinate and cooperate with all the utility companies
during the relocation or construction of their lines. The Contractor may be granted a time extension if,
in the opinion of the Engineer, a delay is caused by the utility company. No additional compensation
will be made to the Contractor for any such delay.
7-8 PROJECT SITE MAINTENANCE.
7-8.1 Cleanup and Dust Control. Add the following: Cleanup and dust control required herein shall
also be executed on weekends and other non-working days when needed to preserve the health
safety or welfare of the public. The Contractor shall conduct effective cleanup and dust control
throughout the duration of the Contract. The Engineer may require increased levels of cleanup and
dust control that, in hidher sole discretion, are necessary to preserve the health, safety and welfare
of the public. Cleanup and dust control shall be considered incidental to the items of work that they
are associated with and no additional payment will be made therefor.
7-8.5 Temporary Light, Power and Water. Add the following: The Contractor shall obtain a
construction meter for water used for the construction, plant establishment, maintenance, cleanup,
testing and all other work requiring water related to this contract. The Contractor shall contact the
appropriate water agency for requirements. The Contractor shall pay all costs of temporary light,
power and water including hookup, service, meter and any, and all, other charges, deposits and/or
fees therefor. Said costs shall be considered incidental to the items of work that they are associated
with and no additional payment will be made therefor.
7-8.6 Water Pollution Control. .Add the following The Contractor shall comply with all
requirements of the storm water pollution and monitoring plan prepared for this project in accordance
with the California State Water Resources Control Board order number 98-08-DWQ, NPDES
General Permit number CAS000002 and the “Water Discharge Requirement for Discharges of
Storm Water Runoff Associated with Construction Activity“
Add the following section:
7-8.8 Noise Control. All internal combustion engines used in the construction shall be equipped
with mufflers in good repair when in use on the project with special attention to the City Noise Control
Ordinance, Carlsbad Municipal Code Chapter 8.48.
Revised 8/10/04 Contract No. 38561 -A Page 63 of 109
7-10 PUBLIC CONVENIENCE AND SAFETY.
7-10.1 Traffic and Access. add the following: The Contractor shall schedule the work so as to
prevent damage by all traffic, including but not limited to mail delivery. The Contractor shall not
schedule work so as to conflict with trash pickup. The trash hauling schedule can be obtained by
calling the City’s contracted waste disposal company, Coast Waste Management at 929-941 7.
During overlay operations, the Contractors schedule for overlay application shall be designated to
provide residents and business owners whose streets are to be overlaid sufficient paved parking
within an 800 foot distance from their homes or businesses.
Seventy two hours prior to the start of any construction in the public right-of-way that affects vehicular
traffic and/or parking or pedestrian routes, the Contractor shall give written notification of the
impending disruption. For a full street closure, all residences and/or businesses on the affected street
or alley shall be notified. For partial street closures, or curb, sidewalk and driveway repairs, the
residences and/or businesses directly affected by the work shall be notified.
The notification shall be hand delivered and shall state the date and time the work will begin and its
anticipated duration. The notification shall list two telephone numbers that may be called to obtain
additional information. One number shall be the Contractor’s permanent office or field office and the
other number shall be a 24 hour number answered by someone who is knowledgeable about the
project. At least one of the phone numbers shall be in the (760) area code. An answering machine
shall not be connected to either number. The notification shall also give a brief description of the
work and simple instructions to the home or business owner on what they need to do to facilitate the
construction. The Contractor shall submit the contents of the notification to the Engineer for approval.
Notices shall not be distributed until approved by the Engineer. -
For residences, the notification shall be pre-cut in a manner that enables it to be affixed to a
doorknob without adhesives. It shall be a minimum size of 3-1/2 inches by 8-1/2 inches and shall be
brightly colored with contrasting printing. The material shall be equivalent in strength and durability to
65 Ib. card stock. The printing on the notice shall be no smaller than 12 point. An example of such
notice is provided in Appendix “A“.
In addition to the notifications, the contractor shall post no parking signs 48 hours in advance of the
work being performed. The no parking signs shall state the date and time of parking restriction for a
duration not to exceed the time necessary to complete the work at that location. Failure of the
contractor to meet the posted date requires re-posting the no parking signs 48 hours in advance of
the rescheduled work. If the work is delayed or rescheduled the no parking signs shall be removed
and re-posted 48 hours in advance of the rescheduled work.
The preparation, materials, printing and distribution of the notifications shall be included in the
contract price bid for traffic control and the Contractor will not be entitled to any additional
compensation for printing and distributing these notices.
7-1 0.3 Street Closures, Detours, Barricades. Modify the second paragraph as follows: After
obtaining the Engineers approval and at least 5 working days before closing, detouring, partially
closing or reopening any street, alley or other public thoroughfare the Contractor shall notify the
following :
1) The Engineer ..................................................................................... (760) 438-1161 X-4411
4) Carlsbad Traffic Signals Maintenance .............................................. (760) 438-2980 .X-2937
I 2) Carlsbad Fire Department Dispatch .................................................. (760) 931 -21 97
3) Carlsbad Police Department Dispatch .............................................. (760) 931 -21 97
Revised 8/10/04 Contract No. 38561-A Page 64 of 109
5) Carlsbad Traffic Signals Operations ................................................. (760) 438-1 161 X4500
6) North County Transit District ............................................................. (760) 743-9346
7) Coast Waste Management ................................................................ (760) 929-9400
The Contractor shall comply with their requirements. The Contractor shall obtain the Engineer's
written approval prior to deviating from the requirements of 2) through, and including, 7) above. The
Contractor shall obtain the written approval no less than five working days prior to placing any traffic
control that affects bus stops.
7-10.3 Street Closures, Detours, Barricades. Add the following: Traffic controls shall be in
accordance with the plans, Chapter 5 of the California Department of Transportation "Manual of
Traffic Controls," 1996 edition and these Supplemental Provisions. If any component in the traffic
control system is damaged, displaced, or ceases to operate or function as specified, from any cause,
during the progress of the work, the Contractor shall immediately repair said component to its original
condition or replace said component and shall restore the component to its original location. In the
event that the Contractor fails to install and/or maintain barricades or such other traffic signs,
markings, delineation or devices as may be required herein, the Engineer may, at hidher sole option,
install the traffic signs, markings, delineation or devices and charge the Contractor twenty dollars
($25.00) per day per traffic sign or device, or the actual cost of providing such traffic control facility,
whichever is the greater.
Add the following section:
7-10.3.1 Construction Area Signs and Control Devices. All construction traffic signs and control
devices shall be maintained throughout the duration of work in good order and according to the
approved traffic control plan. All construction area signs shall conform to the provisions of section
206-7.2 et seq. All temporary reflective pavement markers shall conform to the provisions of section
214-5.1 .et seq. All temporary reflective channelizers shall conform to the provisions of section 214-
5.2 et seq. All paint for temporary traffic striping, pavement marking, and curb marking shall conform
to the provisions of section 21 0-1.6 et seq. except that all temporary paint shall be rapid dry water
borne conforming to section 210-1.6for materials and section 310-5 et seq. For workmanship.
Warning and advisory signs, lights and devices installed or placed to provide traffic control, direction
and/or warning shall be furnished, installed and maintained by the Contractor. Warning and advisory
signs, lights and devices shall be promptly removed by the Contractor when no longer required.
Warning and advisory signs that remain in place overnight shall be stationary mounted signs.
Stationary signs that warn of nonexistent conditions shall be removed from the traveled way and
from the view of motorists in the traveled way or shielded from the view of the travelling public during
such periods that their message does not pertain to existing conditions. Care shall be used in
performing excavation for signs in order to protect underground facilities. All excavation required to
install stationary construction area signs shall be performed by hand methods without the use of
power equipment. Warning and advisory signs that are used only during working hours may be
portable signs. Portable signs shall be removed from the traveled way and shielded from the view of
the travelling public during non-working hours. During the hours of darkness, as defined in Division 1 ,
Section 280, of the California Vehicle Code, portable signs shall be illuminated or, at the option of the
Contractor, shall be in conformance with the provisions in section 206-7.2 et seq. If illuminated traffic
cones rather than post-type delineators are used during the hours of darkness, they shall be affixed
or covered with reflective cone sleeves as specified in CALTRANS "Standard Specifications", except
the sleeves shall be 180 rnm (7") long. Personal vehicles of the Contractor's employees shall not be
parked within the traveled way, including any section closed to public traffic. Whenever the
Contractor's vehicles or equipment are parked on the shoulder within 1.8 m (6') of a traffic lane, the
shoulder area shall be closed with fluorescent traffic cones or portable delineators placed on a taper
in advance of the parked vehicles or equipment and along the edge of the pavement at not less than
7.6 m (25') intervals to a point not less than 7.6 m (25') past the last vehicle or piece of equipment. A
minimum of nine (9) cones or portable delineators shall be used for the taper. A C23 (Road Work
Ahead) or C24 (Shoulder Work Ahead) sign shall be mounted, as required herein, on a sign post or
Revised 8/10/04 Contract No. 38561 -A Page 65 of 109
telescoping flag tree with flags. The sign post or flag tree shall be placed where directed by the
"_ Engineer.
Add the following section:
7-1 0.3.2 Maintaining Traffic. The Contractor's personnel shall not work closer than (insert minimum
acceptable lateral safety buffer distance, eg. 1.8 m (6')), nor operate equipment within 0.6 m (2') from
any traffic lane occupied by traffic. For equipment the than (insert minimum acceptable shy distance,
eg. 0.6 m (2')) shall be measured from the closest approach of any part of the equipment as it is
operated and/or maneuvered in performing the work. This requirement may be waived when the
Engineer has given written authorization to the reduction in clearance that is specific to the time,
duration and location of such waiver, when such reduction is shown on the traffic control plans
included in these contract documents, when such reduction is shown on the traffic control plans
prepared by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer or for the work of installing, maintaining
and removing traffic control devices. As a condition of such waiver the Engineer may require the
Contractor to detour traffic, adjust the width of, or realign the adjacent traffic lane, close the adjacent
traffic lane or provide barriers.
During the entire construction, a minimum one paved traffic lane, not less than (12')) wide, shall be
open for use by public traffic in each direction of travel.
Add the following section:
7-1 0.3.3 Traffic Control System for Lane Closure. A traffic control system consists of closing traffic
lanes or pedestrian walkways in accordance with the details shown on the plans, CALTRANS
"Manual of Traffic Control", 1996 edition and provisions under "Maintaining Traffic" elsewhere in
these Supplemental Provisions. The provisions in this section will not relieve the Contractor from its
responsibility to provide such additional devices or take such measures as may be necessary to
maintain public safety.
When lanes are closed for only the duration of work periods, all components of the traffic control
system, except portable delineators placed along open trenches or excavation adjacent to the
traveled way, shall be removed from the traveled way and shoulder at the end work period. If the
Contractor so elects, said components may be stored at selected central locations, approved by the
Engineer, within the limits of the right-of-way.
Add the following section:
7-10.3.4 Traffic Control for Permanent and Temporary Traffic Striping. During traffic stripe
operations, traffic shall be controlled with lane closures, as provided for under "Traffic Control System
for Lane Closure" of these Supplemental Provisions or by use of an alternative traffic control plan
proposed by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer. The Contractor shall not start traffic
striping operations using an alternative plan until the Contractor has submitted its plan to the
Engineer and has received the Engineer's written approval of said plan.
Add the following section:
7-10.3.5 Temporary Pavement Delineation. Temporary pavement delineation shall be furnished,
placed, maintained and removed in accordance with the minimum standards specified in Chapter 5
of the current "Traffic Manual", published by CALTRANS. Whenever the work causes obliteration of
pavement delineation, temporary or permanent pavement delineation shall be in place prior to
opening the traveled way to public traffic. Lane line or centerline pavement delineation shall be
provided at all times for traveled ways open to public traffic. All work necessary, including any
required lines or marks, to establish the alignment of temporary pavement delineation shall be
performed by the Contractor. When temporary pavement delineation is removed, all lines and marks
used to establish the alignment of the temporary pavement delineation shall be removed by grinding.
-
Revised 8/10/04 Contract No. 38561-A Page 66 of 109
Surfaces to receive temporary pavement delineation shall be dry and free of dirt and loose material.
Temporary pavement delineation shall not be applied over existing pavement delineation or other
temporary pavement delineation. Temporary pavement delineation shall be maintained until
superseded or replaced with permanent pavement delineation.
Temporary pavement delineation shall be removed when, as determined by the Engineer, the
temporary pavement delineation conflicts with the permanent pavement delineation or with a new
traffic pattern for the area and is no longer required for the direction of public traffic. When temporary
pavement delineation is required to be removed, all lines and marks used to establish the alignment
of the temporary pavement delineation shall be removed.
Add the following section:
7-10.3.6 Preparation of New, or Modifications and Additions to Existing, Traffic Control Plan Sheets. If no traffic control plans (TCP) or Traffic Control Staging plans (TCP) are included in the
project plans, or if the Contractor elects to modify TCP included in the project plans, the Contractor
shall have such new or modified TCP prepared and submitted as a part of the Work for any and all
construction activities that are located within the travelled way. The Contractor shall have TCP
prepared and submitted as a part of the Work for any construction activities that are a part of this
project that are not included in the project plans. The Contractor must submit the TCP for the
Engineer’s review in conformance with the requirements of section 2-5.3, et seq. and obtain the
Engineer’s approval of the TCP prior to implementing them. The minimum 20 day review period
specified in section 2-5.3.1 for shop drawings and submittals shall pertain to each submittal of TCP,
new, modified or added to, for the Engineer’s review. New or revised TCP submittals shall include all
TCP needed for the entire duration of the Work. Each phase of the TCP shall be shown in sufficient
scale and detail to show the lane widths, transition lengths, curve radii, stationing of features
affecting the traffic control plan and the methodology proposed to transition to the subsequent TCP
phase. ‘When the vertical alignment of the travelled surface differs from the finished pavement
elevation vertical curves must also be shown. Such modifications, supplements andlor new design of
TCP shall meet the requirements of the Engineer and of the “MANUAL OF TRAFFIC CONTROLS“,
current Edition as published by the State of California Department of Transportation. Such
modification, addition, supplement, and/or new design of TCP shall be prepared by a registered
professional engineer appropriately registered in the State of California. The Engineer shall be the
sole judge of the suitability and quality of any such modifications, supplements, and/or new designs
to TCP. The Engineer may approve any such modifications, supplements, andlor new designs to the
TCP when, in the Engineer’s sole opinion, such modifications, supplements, andlor new designs to
the TCP prepared by the registered professional engineer retained by the Contractor will be
beneficial to the best interests of the Agency. Such modification, addition, supplement, andlor new
design shall not be implemented and no work shall be commenced that is contingent on such
approval until the changed TCP are approved by the Engineer. The preparation of such modification,
addition, supplement, and/or new designs of TCP shall not presuppose their approval or obligate the
Agency in any fashion. Submittal and review requirements for such modifications, supplements,
and/or new designs to TCP shall conform to the requirements of section 2-5.3 Shop Drawings and
Submittals.
.
Add the following section:
7-10.3.7 Payment.
The Contractor shall prepare and implement traffic control plans and shall furnish all labor and
materials to perform, install, maintain, replace and remove all traffic control as incidentals to the work
with which they are associated and no other compensation will be allowed therefor.
- Add the following section:
7-10.4.4 Safety and Protection of Workers and Public. The Contractor shall take all necessary
precautions for the safety of employees on the work and shall comply with all applicable provisions of
Revised 8/10/04 Contract No. 38561 -A Page 67 of 109
Federal, State and Municipal safety laws and building codes to prevent accidents or injury to persons
on, about, or adjacent to the premises where the work is being performed. The Contractor shall erect
and properly maintain at all times, as required by the conditions and progress of the work, all
necessary safeguards for the protection of workers and public, and shall use danger signs warning
against hazards created by such features of construction as protruding nails, hoists, well holes, and
falling materials.
7-13 LAWS TO BE OBSERVED. Add the following: Municipal ordinances that affect this work
include Chapter 11.06. Excavation and Grading. If this notice specifies locations or possible
materials, such as borrow pits or gravel beds, for use in the proposed construction project which
would be subject to Section 1601 or Section 1603 of the Fish and Game Code, the conditions
established pursuant to Section 1601 et seq. of the Fish and Game Code shall become conditions of
the contract.
SECTION 8 -- FACILITIES FOR AGENCY PERSONNEL
8-2 FIELD OFFICE FACILITIES -ARE NOT REQUIRED FOR THIS PROJECT
SECTION 9 -- MEASUREMENT and PAYMENT
9-1 MEASUREMENT OF QUANTITIES FOR UNIT PRICE WORK
9-1.4 Units of Measurement, modify as follows: The system of measure for this contract shall be
the U.S. Standard Measures. - 9-3 PAYMENT.
9-3.1 General. Delete the eighth paragraph and substitute the following: Guarantee periods shall
not be affected by any payment but shall commence on the date of recordation of the “Notice of
Completion”
9-3.2 Partial and Final Payment. Delete the second paragraph and substitute the following: Each
month, the Engineer will make an approximate measurement of the work performed to the closure
date as basis for making monthly progress payments. The estimated value will be based on contract
unit prices, completed change order work and as provided for in Section 9-2 of the Standard
Specifications (SSPWC). Progress payments shall be made no later than thirty (30) calendar days
after the closure date. Five (5) working days following the closure date, the Engineer shall complete
the detailed progress pay estimate and submit it to the Contractor for the Contractor’s information.
Should the Contractor assert that additional payment is due, the Contractor shall within ten (IO)
days of receipt of the progress estimate, submit a supplemental payment request to the Engineer
with adequate justification supporting the amount of supplemental payment request. Upon receipt of
the supplemental payment request, the Engineer shall, as soon as practicable after receipt,
determine whether the Supplemental payment request is a proper payment request. If the Engineer
determines that the supplemental payment request is not proper, then the request shall be returned
to the Contractor as soon as practicable, but not later than seven (7) days after receipt. The
returned request shall be accompanied by a document setting forth in writing the reasons why the
supplemental payment request was not proper. In conformance with Public Contract Code Section
20104.50, the City shall make payments within thirty (30) days after receipt of an undisputed and
properly submitted supplemental payment request from the Contractor. If payment of the undisputed
supplemental payment request is not made within thirty (30) days after receipt by the Engineer, then
the City shall pay interest to the Contractor equivalent to the legal rate set forth in subdivision (a) of
Section 685.010 of the Code of Civil Procedure. Add paragraph 6 et seq. as follows: After final
-
Revised 8/10/04 Contract No. 38561 -A Page 68 of 109
inspection, the Engineer will make a Final Payment Estimate and process a corresponding
payment. This estimate will be in writing and shall be for the total amount owed the Contractor as
determined by the Engineer and shall be itemized by the contract bid item and change order item
with quantities and payment amounts and shall show all deductions made or to be made for prior
payments and amounts to be deducted under provisions of the contract. All prior estimates and
progress payments shall be subject to correction in the Final Payment Estimate.
The Contractor shall have 30 calendar days from receipt of the Final Payment Estimate to make
written statement disputing any bid item or change order item quantity or payment amount. The
Contractor shall provide all documentation at the time of submitting the statement supporting its
position. Should the Contractor fail to submit the statement and supporting documentation within the
time specified, the Contractor acknowledges that full and final payment has been made for all
contract bid items and change order items.
If the Contractor submits a written statement with documentation in the aforementioned time, the
Engineer will review the disputed item within 30 calendar days and make any appropriate
adjustments on the Final Payment. Remaining disputed quantities or amounts not approved by the
Engineer will be subject to resolution as specified in subsection 3-5, Disputed Work.
The written statement filed by the Contractor shall be in sufficient detail to enable the Engineer to
ascertain the basis and amount of said disputed items. The Engineer will consider the merits of the
Contractor’s claims. It will be the responsibility of the Contractor to furnish within a reasonable time
such further information and details as may be required by the Engineer to determine the facts or
contentions involved in its claims. Failure to submit such information and debits will be sufficient
cause for denying payment for the disputed items.
9-3.2.1 Payment for Claims. Add the following: Except for those final payment items disputed in the
written statement required in subsection 9-3.2 all claims of any dollar amount shall be submitted in a
written statement by the Contractor no later than the date of receipt of the final payment estimate.
Those final payment items disputed in the written statement required in subsection 9-3.2 shall be
submitted no later than 30 days after receipt of the Final Payment estimate. No claim will be
considered that was not included in this written statement, nor will any claim be allowed for which
written notice or protest is required under any provision of this contract including sections 3-4
Changed Conditions, 3-5 Disputed Work, 6-6.3 Payment for Delays to Contractor, 6-6.4 Written
Notice and Report, or 6-7.3 Contract Time Accounting, unless the Contractor has complied with
notice or protest requirements.
,-
The claims filed by the Contractor shall be in sufficient detail to enable the Engineer to ascertain the
basis and amount of said claims. The Engineer will consider and determine the Contractor’s claims
and it will be the responsibility of the Contractor to furnish within a reasonable time such further
information and details as may be required by the Engineer to determine the facts or contentions
involved in its claims. Failure to submit such information and details will be sufficient cause for
denying the claims.
Payment for claims shall be processed within 30 calendar days of their resolution for those claims
approved by the Engineer. The Contractor shall proceed with informal dispute resolution under
subsection 3-5, Disputed Work, for those claims remaining in dispute.
.-
Revised 811 0/04 Contract No. 38561 -A Page 69 of 109
Add the following section:
93.3.1 Delivered Materials. The cost of materials and equipment delivered but not incorporated
into the will not be included in the progress estimate.
Add the following section:
9-3.4.1 Mobilization and Preparatory Work. Payment for mobilization and preparatory Work will be
included in the various items of work and no other payment will be made.
Revised 8/10/04 Contract No. 38561 -A Page 70 of 109
Add the following section:
9-3.3.1 Delivered Materials. The cost of materials and equipment delivered but not incorporated
into the will not be included in the progress estimate.
-
Add the following section:
93.4.1 Mobilization and Preparatory Work. Payment for mobilization and preparatory Work will be
included in the various items of work and no other payment will be made.
Revised 8/10/04 Contract No. 38561 -A Page 70 of 109
SUPPLEMENTAL PROVISIONS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR PUBLIC
TO
CONSTRUCTION
Sieve Sizes
50-mm (2")
12.5-mm (I/;)
9.5-mm (3/;)
37.5-mm (I1/;)
19-mm (3/4")
4.75-mm (No. 4)
2.36-mm (No. 8)
75ym (no. 200)
PART 2, CONSTRUCTION MATERIALG
Percentage Passing
Type A Type B --- I00 --- 95-1 00
100 50-1 00
95-1 00 ---
70-1 00 15-55
0-55 0-25
0-1 0 0-5
0-3 0-3
WORKS
Q
Sieve Sizes
25-mm (1")
19-mm (3/.+")
9.5-mm (3/;)
2.36-mm (No. 8)
600-pm (No. 30)
300-pm (No. 50)
75-pm (no. 200)
4.75-mm (No. 4)
SECTION 200 - ROCK MATERIALS
Percentage Passing
100
90-1 00
40-1 00
25-40
18-33
5-1 5
0-7
0-3
200-1 ROCK PRODUCTS
Add the following section:
200-1 2.2 Permeable Material. Permeable material shall consist of hard, durable, clean sand,
gravel, or crushed stone, and shall be free from organic material, clay balls, or other deleterious
substances. Class 1 and Class 2 permeable material shall have a Durability Index of not less than
40. Class 2 Permeable material shall have a Sand Equivalent value of not less than 75. Class 1
permeable material shall conform to the requirements in this section and Table 200-1.2.2(A). Class 2
permeable material shall conform to the requirements in this section and Table 200-1.2.2(B). When
permeable material is required and the class or kind is not specified, Class I permeable material
shall be used. The alternative gradings within Class 1 permeable material are identified by types.
Unless otherwise shown on the plans the Contractor will be permitted to furnish and place any one of
the types provided for this class. The percentage composition by mass of permeable material in
place shall conform to the gradings in Tables 200-1.2.2(A) and 200-1.2.2(B).
Revised 8/10/04 Contract No. 38561 -A Page 71 of 109
200-2 UNTREATED BASE MATERIALS
Type of Construction
All Concrete Used Within the Right-of-way
Trench Backfill Sluny
Street Light Foundations and Survey Monuments
Traffic Signal Foundations
Concreted-Rock Erosion Protection
200-2.1 General.
200-2.2)
Add the following: Aggregate base shall be crushed aggregate base (Section
Concrete Maximum
Class Slump mm (Inches)
330-C-23 (2)
(560-C-3250) (I)
(1 90-E-400)
(560-C-3250)
(590-C-3750)
(520-C-25OOP)
1 15-E-3 200 (8")
330-C-23 100 (4")
350-C-27 100 (4")
3 1 O-C- 1 7 per Table 300-1 1.3.1
SECTION 201 - CONCRETE, MORTAR, AND RELATED MATERIALS
201-1 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE
TABLE 201-1 .I .2(A) Modify as follows:
201 -1.2.4 Chemical Admixtures. (e) Air-entraining Admixtures. Substitute the following: The
air content shall not deviate from the percentage specified or permitted by more than 1-1/2
percentage points. The air content of freshly mixed concrete will be determined by California Test
Method No. 504.
SECTION 203 - BITUMINOUS MATERIALS
203-6 ASPHALT CONCRETE.
203-6.2 Materials. Add the following: Asphalt concrete shall be class C2-AR 4000 for surface
course, and B-AR 4000 for base course.
203-6.6.1, Batch Plant Method, modify as follows:
from the Engineer's field laboratory". Last paragraph, add after D 2172: "method A or B."
Third paragraph, last sentence, delete "and
203-6.7 Asphalt Concrete Storage. Open graded asphalt concrete stored in
excess of 2 hours, and any other asphalt concrete stored in excess of 18 hours, shall not be used in
the work.
add the following:
Revised 8/10/04 Contract No. 38561-A Page 72 of 109
Add the following section:
203-1 1 ASPHALT PAVEMENT CRACK SEALANTS
ASTM D 412 Die C,
203-1 1 .I Elastomeric Sealant. Elastomeric sealant shall be a polyurethane material of a
composition that will, within its stated shelf life, cure only in the presence of moisture. No elastomeric
sealant shall be incorporated into any portion of the work that is beyond the shelf life recommended
by its manufacturer. No elastomeric sealant shall be incorporated into any portion of the work that
has been stored under conditions not recommended by its manufacturer. Sealant shall be suitable
for use in both asphalt concrete and portland cement concrete. The cured sealant shall have the
performance characteristics in Table 203-1 1 (A).
400%, minimum
Property
Film Bend (1 80")
ASTM D 822
Hardness
(indentation)
Tensile
Strength
Elongation
Slight chalking
Flex at -40°C
Weathering
Resistance
Salt-Spray
Resistance
Dielectric
Constant
TABLE 203-1 1 .I (A)
ELASTOMERIC SEALANT CHARACTERISTICS
Measuring Standard I Resu I ts
m
0.6 mm (25 mil) Free I No cracks
Weatherometer 350 h I
ASTM B 117 28 days
at 38°C
3.45 MPa, minimum
tensile; 400% minimum 1 Elonaation
ASTM D 150 I Less than 25% change
Conditions
25°C @ 50% relative
humidity
pulled at 508 mm (20") per
minute
pulled at 508 mm (20") per
minute
over 13 mm ('1;) Mandrel
Cured 7 days at 25°C @ - 50% relative humidity
5% NaCI, Die C, pulled at
508 mm (20") per minute
over a temperature range of
-3OQC to 50QC
203-1 1.2 Asphaltic Emulsion Sealant. Asphaltic emulsion sealant shall conform to the State of
California Specification 8040-41A-15 and shall be used only for filling slots in asphalt concrete
pavement. This material shall not be used in slots which exceed 16 mm (5/8") in width or where
the slope causes the material to run from the slot. The material shall not be thinned in excess of
the manufacturer's recommendations and shall not be placed when the air temperature is less
than 7°C (45°F).
203-1 1.3 Hot-Melt Rubberized Asphalt Sealant. Hot-melt rubberized asphalt shall be in solid
form at room temperature and fluid at an application temperature of 190°C (375°F) to 205°C
(400°F). Fumes from the material shall be non-toxic. Sealant shall be suitable for use in both
asphalt concrete and portland cement concrete. Performance characteristics of the cured hot-
melt rubberized asphalt shall be as per Table 203-1 1.3(A).
Revised 8/10/04 Contract No. 38561-A Page 73 of 109
TABLE 203-1 I .3(A)
Cone Penetration
Flow, 60°C
Resilience
Softening Point,
Ductility,
Flash Point, COC, "C
Viscosity, Brookfield
Thermosel,
CURED HOT-MELT RUBBERIZED ASPHALT
Property I Measuring Standard (ASTM I Results I Conditions Designation)
ASTM D 3407, Sec. 5
ASTM D 3407, Sec. 6
,ASTM D 3407, Sec. 8 25%, min. 25°C
ASTM D 36
ASTM D 113 300 mm, min. 25"C, 50 mm/min
ASTM D 92
ASTM D 4402 2.5-3.5 Pa-s No. 27 Spindle, 20
3.5 mm, max.
5 mm, max.
82 "C, min.
288 "C, min.
25"C, 150 g, 5 s
rpm, 19O"C,
USES
Headers for bituminous pavement up to 50 mm x
100 mm (2"x4")
Headers for bituminous pavement larger than 50
mm xl00 mm (2"x4")
SECTION 204 - LUMBER AND TREATMENT WITH PRESERVATIVES
GRADES
Construction grade Redwood or preservative
treated construction grade Douglas Fir
Number 1 grade Redwood, or preservative
treated number 1 grade Douglas Fir
204-1 LUMBER AND PLYWOOD
Add the following section:
206-7 TRAFFIC SIGNS.
Add the following section:
206-7.1 Permanent Traffic Signs
cold-rolled steel perforated tubing. This includes all signs used for the direction, warning, and
regulation of vehicle (including bicycle) and pedestrian traffic upon the completion of the Work unless
othetwise shown on the plans.
Permanent traffic signs shall consist of 10-gage and 12-gage
Add the following section:
206-7.1.1 General. Materials, legend, proportion, size, and fabrication of all signs used for the
direction, warning, and regulation of vehicle (including bicycle) and pedestrian traffic shall conform to
the requirements of "SPECIFICATIONS FOR REFLECTIVE SHEETING SIGNS, October 1993",
Sheets I through 5 that accompany "SPECIFICATIONS FOR REFLECTIVE SHEETING SIGNS,
October 1993" of dimensions and details, dated April 1987, and "OPAQUE COLOR CHART, dated
February 1980, all published by the State of California, Department of Transportation, Division of
Procurement Services, Office of Material Operations, 1900 Royal Oaks Drive, Sacramento, CA
95819 and as modified herein. Where the "SPECIFICATION FOR REFLECTIVE SHEETING SIGNS,
October 1993" require the Contractor or supplier to notify the Department of Transportation or to
certify compliance to said SPECIFICATIONS, to provide a quality control program or to allow testing,
approval, observation of manufacturing or assembly operations by the State of California,
Department of Transportation and/or its employees or officials, such rights shall be vested in the
Engineer.
Revised 8/10/04 Contract No. 38561 -A Page 74 of 109
Add the following section:
206-7.1.2 Sign Identification. Modify the “SPECIFICATIONS FOR REFLECTIVE SHEETING
SIGNS, October 1993” as follows: Sign identification shall be as per “SPECIFICATIONS FOR
REFLECTIVE SHEETING SIGNS, October 1993”, except that the notation shall be “PROPERTY OF
THE CITY OF CARLSBAD.
Add the following section:
206-7.1.3 Drawings. Mod@ the “Specifications For Reflective Sheeting Signs, October 1993” as
follows: Standard signs shall be as per the most recently approved “Approved Sign Specification
Sheets” of the State of California, Department of Transportation. The date of approval shall be the
date most closely preceding the date of manufacture of the sign(s) or the date of the “Notice to
Proceed” of this contract, whichever is most recent.
Add the following section:
206-7.1.4 Reflective Sheeting. Modify the “Specifications For Reflective Sheeting Signs, October
1993” as follows: All advisory signs, warning signs and all regulatory signs, excepting only those
hereinafter listed, shall be fabricated with Type Ill encapsulated lens sheeting conforming to the
requirements of this specification. Signs listed below shall be fabricated with Type II encapsulated
lens sheeting conforming to the requirements of this specification. Regulatory signs which shall be
fabricated with Type II encapsulated lens sheeting are: R5; R24 through, and including, R32B; R47
through, and including, R53C; R62A through, and including, R62D; R74 through, and including,
R96C; and R99 through, and including, R105A. All sign designations shall be as per the “Traffic
Manual”, 1996 revision, as published by the California Department of Transportation.
Add the following section:
206-7.1.5 Substrate. Modify the “Specifications For Reflective Sheeting Signs, October 1993” as
follows: All permanent traffic signs used for the direction, warning, and regulation of vehicle
(including bicycle) and pedestrian traffic shall use aluminum substrate.
Add the following section:
206-7.1.6 Mounting Traffic Signs. Traffic signs shall be installed on 10-gage or 12-gage cold-
rolled steel perforated tubing posts as shown on San Diego Regional Standard drawing M-45 or,
when the sign area exceeds the maximum area allowed for on that drawing, on multiple 10-gage or
12-gage cold-rolled steel perforated tubing posts. The number of posts shall be determined by the
parameters in SDRS drawing M-45 or as approved by the Engineer. Traffic signs will be provided
with back braces and mounting blocks as approved by the Engineer consisting of 10-gage or
12-gage cold-rolled steel perforated tubing when multiple posts are used.
Add the following section:
206-7;1.6 Traffic Sign Posts.
perforated tubing posts as shown on San Diego Regional Standard drawing M-45.
Posts shall be constructed of 10-gage or 12-gage cold-rolled steel
Add the following section:
206-7.2 Temporary Traffic Signs. Temporary traffic signs shall consist of all signs used for the
direction, warning, and regulation of vehicle (including bicycle) and pedestrian traffic during the
Contractor’s performance of the Work. Temporary traffic signs include both stationary and portable
signs.
Add the following section:
206-7.2.1 General. Materials, legend, proportion, size, and fabrication of all temporary traffic signs
used for the direction, warning, and regulation of vehicle (including bicycle) and pedestrian traffic
shall conform to the requirements of “Specifications For Reflective Sheeting Signs, October 1993”,
Sheets 1 through 5 that accompany “Specifications For Reflective Sheeting Signs, October 1993” of
Revised 8/10/04 Contract No. 38561 -A Page 75 of 109
dimensions and details, dated April 1987, and "OPAQUE COLOR CHART", dated February 1980, all
published by the State of California, Department of Transportation, Division of Procurement Services,
Office of Material Operations, 1900 Royal Oaks Drive, Sacramento, CA 95819 and as modified
herein, Where The "Specification For Reflective Sheeting Signs, October 1993" require the
Contractor or supplier to notify the Department of Transportation or to certify compliance to said
"Specifications For Reflective Sheeting Signs, October 1993", to provide a quality control program or
to allow testing, approval, observation of manufacturing or assembly operations by the State of
California, Department of Transportation and/or its employees or officials, such rights shall be vested
in the Engineer.
Add the following section:
206-7.2.2 Drawings. Modify the "Specifications For Reflective Sheeting Signs, October 1993" as
follows: Standard temporary traffic signs shall be as per the most recently approved "Approved
Sign Specification Sheets" of the State of California, Department of Transportation. The date of
approval shall be the date most closely preceding the date of manufacture of the sign(s) or the date
of the "Notice to Proceed" of this contract, whichever is most recent.
Add the following section:
206-7.2.3 Reflective Sheeting. Modify the "Specifications For Reflective Sheeting Signs, October
1993" as follows: All advisory signs, warning signs and all regulatory signs, excepting only those
hereinafter listed, shall be fabricated with Type Ill encapsulated lens sheeting conforming to the
requirements of this specification. The signs listed below shall be fabricated with Type II
encapsulated lens sheeting conforming to the requirements of this specification. Warning and
regulatory signs which shall be fabricated with Type II encapsulated lens sheeting are: R5; R24
through, and including, R32B; R47 through, and including, R53C; R62A through, and including,
R62D; R74 through, and including, R96C; and R99 through, and including, R105A. All sign
designations shall be as per the "Traffic Manual", 1996 revision, as published by the California
Department of Transportation.
Add the following section:
206-7.2.4 Substrate. Modify the "Specifications For Reflective Sheeting Signs, October 1993" as
follows: Excepting only construction warning signs used at a single location during daylight hours
for not more than five (5) consecutive days, all signs used for the direction, warning, and regulation of
vehicle (including bicycle) and pedestrian traffic shall be stationary mounted and shall use aluminum
substrate.
Add the following section:
206-7.2.5 Stationary Mounted Temporary Traffic Signs. Stationary mounted temporary traffic
signs shall be installed on 10-gage and 12-gage cold-rolled steel perforated tubing posts in the same
manner shown on the State of California, Department of Transportation "Standard Plans" 1995
edition standard plans numbers RS1, RS2, RS3 and RS4 for installation of roadside signs, except as
follows:
a) Wood posts shall not be used.
b) Back braces and blocks for sign panels will not be required.
c) The height to the bottom of the sign panel above the edge of traveled way shall be at least
2.1 m (7').
d) Unless otherwise shown on the plans traffic sign posts shall conform in materials and
installation to SDRS drawing M-45 and shall have one post provided for each 0.48 m2 (5
f?)of sign area, or the signs may be installed on existing lighting standards when approved
by the Engineer.
e) Sign panels mounted on temporary traffic sign posts shall conform to the requirements
specified for aluminum signs in the "Specifications For Reflective Sheeting Signs, October
1993".
Revised 811 0104 Contract No. 38561-A Page 76 of 109
Add the following section:
206-7.2.6 Temporary Traffic Sign Posts. Posts shall be IO-gage or 12-gage cold-rolled steel
perforated tubing used for the support and stabilization of stationary mounted temporary signs. Post
size and number of posts shall be as shown on the plans, except that when stationary mounted signs
are installed and the type of sign installation is not shown on the plans, post size and the number of
posts will be determined by the Engineer. Sign panels for stationary mounted signs shall consist of
reflective sheeting applied to a sign substrate.
Add the following section:
206-7.2.7 Portable Temporary Traffic Signs. Each portable temporary traffic sign shall consist of
a base, standard or framework and a sign panel. The units shall be capable of being delivered to the
site of use and placed in immediate operation. Sign panels for portable signs shall conform to the
requirements of sign panels for stationary mounted signs in the “Specifications For Reflective
Sheeting Signs, October 1993, or shall be cotton drill fabric, flexible industrial nylon fabric, or other
approved fabric. Fabric signs shall not be used during the hours of darkness. Size, color, and leg-
end requirements for portable signs shall be as described for stationary mounted sign panels in
section 206-7.2 of these Supplemental Provisions. The height to the bottom of the sign panel above
the edge of traveled way shall be at least 0.3-m (12”). All parts of the sign standard or framework
shall be finished with 2 applications of,an orange enamel which will match the color of the sign panel
background. Testing of paint will not be required.
Add the following section:
206-8 LIGHT GAGE STEEL TUBING AND CONNECTORS.
Add the following section:
206-8.1 General. This Section pertains to I O-gage and 12-gage cold-rolled steel perforated tubing
used for the support and stabilization of signs. All shapes shall have a galvanized finish and shall be
cold-roll-formed steel conforming to ASTM Designation A-446, Grade A. Galvanizing shall conform to
ASTM A-525, Designation G-90. Galvanizing shall be performed after all forming and punching
operations have been completed. Cold-rolled steel perforated tubing shall be perforated on all four
faces with 11 mm (7/16”) holes on 25 mm (1”) centers.
Add the following section:
206-8.2 Tolerances. Wall thickness tolerance shall not exceed +0.28 mm, -0.13 mm (+0.01 I”,
-0.005). Convexity and concavity measured in the center of the flat side shall not exceed a tolerance
of +0.25 mm (+0.010”) applied to the specific size determined at the comer. Straightness tolerance
variation shall not exceed 1.6 mm in 1 m (1/16 in 3’). Tolerance for corner radius is 4.0mm (5/32”),
plus or minus 0.40 mm (1/64”). Weld flash on corner-welded square tubing shall permit 3.60 mm
(9/64”) radius gage to be placed in the corner. Using 10-gage or 12-gage square tube, consecutive
size tubes shall telescope freely for 3.lm (IO’). Tolerance on hole size is plus or minus 0.40 mm
(1/64“) on a size. Tolerance on hole spacing is plus or minus 3.2 mm in 6.1 m (1/8” in 20’). In
addition, for the following specific sizes of light gage steel tubing, dimensional tolerances shall not
exceed those listed in tables 206-8.2 (A) and 206-8.2(B).
_-
Revised 8/10/04 Contract No. 38561 -A Page 77 of 109
c
mm (inches)
25 x 25 (I x 1)
32 x 32 (I x I~/~)
38 x 38 (1 '/2 x 1 l/2)
44x44 (1 "4 x 1 3/4)
51 x51 (2 x 2)
56 x 56
57 x 57
64 x 64
(23/16 x 23/d
(21/4 x 21/4)
(2V2 x 2'/2)
TABLE 2068.2(A)
LIGHT GAGE STEEL TUBING SIZE TOLERANCE
Nominal Outside Dimensions I Outside Tolerance for All Sides at Comers
mm (inches)
0.1 3 0.005
0.1 5 0.006
0.1 5 0.006
0.20 0.008
0.20 0.008
0.25 0.01 0
0.25 0.01 0
0.25 0.01 0
Nominal Outside Dimension
25 x 25 (1 XI)
32 x 32
38 x 38
44 x 44
51 x 51
56 x 56
57 x 57
64 x 64
51 x76 (2 x 3)
mm (Inches)
(I -1/4 x I-~/~)
(1 -l/2 x 1-'/2)
(1 -3/4 x 1 -"4)
(2 x 2)
(2-3/,6 x 2-3/16)
(2-1/4 x z-'/~)
(24 x 2-'/2)
Twist Permissible in 900 mm 3") b) Squareness(')
mm (Inches) mm(2) (Inches)
0.1 5 0.006 1.3 0.050
0.1 8 0.007 1.3 0.050
0.20 0.009 1.3 0.050
0.25 0.010 1.6 0.062
0.30 0.012 1.6 0.062
0.36 0.014 1.6 0.062
0.36 I .014 1.6 0.062
0.38 0.01 5 1.9 0.075
0.46 0.01 8 1.9 0.075
Add the following section:
206-8.3 Fasteners. Fasteners used to assemble cold-rolled steel perforated tubing shall be steel
"pull-through" electrogalvanized rivets with 9.5 mm (318") diameter shank, 22 mm (7/8") diameter
head, and a grip range of from 5 mm (0.200") to 0.90 mm (0.356"). The fasteners shall conform to
ASTM 8-633, Type Ill
SECTION 207 - PIPE
207-2 REINFORCED CONCRETE PIPE.
207-2.5 Joints. Add the following: When watertight joints are indicated on the plans they shall be of
the rubber-gasketed type meeting the requirements of ASTM Standard Specification designations C
361-95 and C 443-94.
Revised 8/10/04 Contract No. 38561 -A Page 78 of 109
,-
Property Method
Thickness ASTM D2103
Tensile strength ASTM D882
Elongation ASTM D882-88
Printability ASTM D2578
Flexibility ASTM D671-81
Inks Manufacturing specifications
Message repeat Manufacturing specifications
Foil Manufacturing specifications
Top layer Manufacturing specifications
Bottom layer Manufacturing specifications
Adhesives Manufacturing specifications
Add the following section:
207-25 UNDERGROUND UTILITY MARKING TAPE.
Value
01 14 mm (0.0056”)
4500g/cm (25 Ibs/inch) (5,500 PSI)
60 percent at break
>50 dyneskquare centimeter
Pliable hand
Heat-set Myiex
Every 500 mm(20”)
Dead sowannealed
Virgin PET
Virgin LDPE
>30 percent, solid 1.5#/R
.-
Color
Red
Yellow
Orange
Blue
Green
Brown
Purple
Add the following section:
207-25.1 Detectable Underground Utility Marking Tape: Detectable Underground Utility
Marking Tape shall have a minimum 0.13 mm (0.005”) overall thickness, with no less than a 35
gauge (AWG), 0.14 mm aluminum foil core. The foil must be visible from both sides. The layers shall
be laminated together with the extrusion lamination process, not adhesives. No inks or printing shall
extend to the edges of the tape. All printing shall be encased to avoid ink rub-off. Detectable
Underground Utility Marking Tape shall conform to the properties listed in Tables 207-25(A) and 207-
25 (B).
Utility Marked
Electric power, distribution, transmission, and municipal electric systems.
Gas and oil distribution and transmission, dangerous materials, product and steam.
Telephone and telegraph systems, police and fire communications, and cable television.
Water systems.
Sanitary and storm sewer systems, nonpotable.
Force mains.
Reclaimed water lines.
TABLE 207-25.1 (A)
DETECTABLE UNDERGROUND UTILITY MARKING TAPE PROPERTIES
Bond strength I Five hours without peel
Colors I APWACode I See Table 207-25.1 (BI
I Boiling H20 at 100 degrees Celsius
Revised 8/10/04 Contract No. 38561 -A Page 79 of 109
Add the following section:
207-25.2 Materials Approvals.
requirements of each of the following agency/association publications.
Detectable Underground Utility Marking Tape shall meet the
A. Department of Transportation, Materials Transportation Bureau, Office of Pipeline Safety.
USAS code for pressure piping 831.8, paragraph 192.321 (e).
B. National Transportation Safety Board, Washington, DC, Special Study Prevention of Damage
to Pipelines. Adopted June 7, 1974. Report NTSB-PSS-73-1.
C. American Petroleum Institute (API). Recommended practice for marking buried liquid
petroleum pipelines - APR RP 1 109.
D. General Services Administration, Washington, DC, Public Buildings Service Guide
Specification for Mechanical and Electrical Equipment - PBS 4-1501, Amendment 2, Page
501-14, Paragraph 18, Subparagraph 18.1, Clause 18.1.1.
E. Rural Electrification Authority (REA), U.S. Department of Agriculture, Washington, DC, National
Electrical Safety Code for Underground Construction for remote and immediate hazards.
209-2 MATERIALS AND INSTALLATION
209-2.01 Excavating and Backfilling. The excavations required for the installation of conduit,
foundations, and other appurtenances shall be performed in such a manner as to avoid any
unnecessary damage to streets, sidewalks, landscaping, and other improvements. The trenches
shall not be excavated wider than necessary for the proper installation of the electrical
appurtenances and foundations. Excavation shall not be performed until immediately before
installation of conduit and other appurtenances. The material from the excavation shall be placed in
a position that will not cause damage or obstruction to vehicular and pedestrian traffic nor interfere
with surface drainage.
Unless otherwise permitted in writing by the Engineer, all surplus excavated material shall be
removed and disposed of, within 48 hours, outside the public right of way in accordance with the
provisions in Sections 7-8.1, “Cleanup and Dust Control”, 300-1.3, “Removal and Disposal of
Materials” and 302-6, “Surplus Material”, depending on the origin and nature of the materials to be
removed and disposed.
The excavations shall be backfilled in conformance with the provisions in Sections 300-3.5,
“Structure Backfill” or 306-1.3, “Backfill and Densification,” depending on the nature of the structure
or conduit that the excavation being backfilled accommodates. Excavations after backfilling shall be
kept well filled and maintained in a smooth and well-drained condition until permanent repairs are
made. All excavations shall be filled, and sidewalks, pavement, and landscaping restored at each
intersection prior to excavating at any other intersection, unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer.
Excavations in the street or highway shall be performed in such a manner that not more than one
traffic lane is restricted at any time, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
Revised 8/10/04 Contract No. 38561-A Page 80 of 109
SECTION 210 - PAINT AND PROTECTIVE COATINGS
210-1 PAINT.
-
Surface to be Painted Pre-reatment / Surface
Preparation
Temporary Railing type (K) Abrasive Blast Cleaning to a
Roughened, Textured Appearance
210-1.5 Paint Systems. Add the following to Table 210-1.5(A)
Finish Coats
Two coats white Acrylic
Emulsion Paint (‘I
210-1.6 Paint for Traffic Striping, Pavement Marking, and Curb Marking. Modify as follows:
Paint for traffic lane lines, tum pocket lines, edge lines, channelizing lines, bike lane lines, chevrons,
and curbs shall be rapid dry water borne conforming to CALTRANS Specification No. 8010-91 D-30.
Paint for pavement legends, pavement symbols, pavement arrows, cross walks, parking stall
markings and stop bars shall be alkyd thermoplastic conforming to CALTRANS Specification No.
8010-21 C-19. Glass beads shall be applied to the surface of the rapid dry water borne paint and the
molten thermoplastic material and shall conform to the requirements of CALTRANS Specification No.
801 0-21 C-22 (Type 11). CALTRANS Specifications for water borne paint, thermoplastic material and
glass beads may be obtained from the CALTRANS Transportation Laboratory, P.O. Box 19128,
Sacramento, CA 9581 9, telephone number (91 6) 227-7000.
Add the following section.
210-1.8 Preformed Thermoplastic Pavement Markings. Preformed Thermoplastic Pavement
Markings shall be Premark brand manufactured by Flint Trading Company 115 Todd Court,
Thomasville, NC 27360, Premark 20/20 Flex brand manufactured by Flint Trading Company 1 15
Todd Court, Thomasville, NC 27360, Pavemark brand manufactured by Stimsonite Corporation,
6565 West Howard Street, Niles, IL 60714 or approved equal.
-
210-3 GALVANIZING
Add the following section:
21 03.6 Galvanizing for Traffic Signal Facilities. The requirements of this section shall pertain
only to the preparation and galvanizing of traffic signal facilities. Galvanizing of products fabricated
from rolled, pressed and forged steel shapes, plates, bars and strip 3.2 mm (’/au) thick or thicker,
shall conform to the specifications of ASTM Designation: A 123, except that complete seal welding
of tightly contacting surfaces of these products prior to galvanizing is required only where seal
welding is shown on the plans or specified in these special provisions. Except for pre-galvanized
standard pipe, galvanizing of material 3.2 mm (‘/e”) thick or thicker shall be performed after
fabrication into the largest practical sections.
At the option of the Contractor, material thinner than 3.2 mm (I/() shall be galvanized either before
fabrication in conformance with the requirements of ASTM Designation: A 525M, Coating
Designation 2600, or after fabrication in conformance with the requirements of ASTM Designation:
A 123, except that the weight of zinc coating shall average not less than 365 g per square meter (1.2
oz. per e) of actual surface area with no individual specimen having a coating weight of less than
305 g per square meter (1 .O oz. per e).
Revised 811 0/04 Contract No. 38561 -A Page 81 of 109
Galvanizing of standard pipe shall conform to the requirements of ASTM Designation: A53.
Galvanizing will not be required for stainless steel, monel metal and similar corrosion resistant parts.
Fabrication shall include all operations such as shearing, cutting, punching, forming, drilling, milling,
bending, welding and riveting. All welded areas shall be thoroughly cleaned prior to galvanizing to
remove all slag or other material that would interfere with the adherence of the zinc. When it is
necessary to straighten any sections after galvanizing, the work shall be performed without damage
to the zinc coating.
Galvanizing of iron and steel hardware and nuts and bolts, when specified or shown on the plans,
shall conform to the specifications of ASTM Designation: A 153, except whenever threaded studs,
bolts, nuts, and washers are specified to conform to ASTM Designation: A 307, A 325, A 325M,
A449, A563, A563M, or F436 and zinc coating is required, they shall be hotdip zinc coated or
mechanically zinc coated in accordance with the requirements of the ASTM Designations. Unless
otherwise specified, galvanizing shall be performed after fabrication. Components of bolted
assemblies shall be galvanized separately before assembly. Tapping of nuts or other internally
threaded parts to be used with zinc coated bolts, anchor bars or studs shall be done after galvanizing
and shall conform to the requirements for thread dimensions and overtapping allowances in ASTM
Designation: A563 or A 563M. When specified, painting of zinc coated surfaces shall be in
accordance with the procedures in Section 21 0-1, "Paint." Galvanized surfaces that are abraded or
damaged at any time after the application of the zinc coating shall be repaired by thoroughly wire
brushing the damaged areas and removing all loose and cracked coating, after which the cleaned
areas shall be painted with 2 applications of unthinned zinc-rich primer (organic vehicle type)
conforming to the provisions in Section 210-3.5, "Repair of Damaged Zinc Coating." Aerosol cans
shall not be used.
SECTION 212 - LANDSCAPE AND IRRIGATION MATERIALS
212-1 LANDSCAPE MATERIALS. See Also Part 4, CSI Formatted Specifications, Section
02900 for Landscape Material Requirements and Part 4, CSI Formatted Specifications Section
0281 0 for Irrigation Materials Requirements.
Add the following section: .
212-1.2.6 Herbicides and Pesticides. Shall be used in their appropriate applications with strict
adherence to manufacturer's specifications and instructions. Postemergent herbicide for all areas
shall be Glyphosate, N-(phosphonomethyl) glycine, in the form of its isopropylamine salt such as
Roundup Pro, Diquat, Montar, or approved equal. Preemergent herbicide for shrubs and
groundcover areas planted from flats shall be Treflan, Sudan, Eptan, or approved equal.
212-1.4.1 General. Add the following: Plants shall be the variety and size shown on the plans or in
the special provisions and shall conform to the requirements of these specifications. Contractor shall
notify the Engineer 48 hours before each plant delivery so that the Engineer can inspect the plants.
The scientific and common names of plants herein specified shall conform to the approved names
given in "A Checklist of Woody Ornamental Plants in California, Oregon and Washington" published
by the University of California, Division of Agriculture Sciences, Publication 4091 (1 979). Each group
of plant materials delivered on site shall be labeled clearly as to species and variety. All patented
plants (cultivars) required by the plant list shall be delivered with a proper plant patent attached. The
Contractor shall obtain clearance from the County Agricultural Commissioner, as required by law,
before planting plants delivered from outside the County in which they are to be planted. Evidence
that clearance has been obtained shall be filed with the Engineer. All plants furnished by the
Contractor shall be true to type or name as shown on the plans and shall be tagged identifying the
plants by species or variety; however, determination of plant species or variety will be made by the
Engineer and the Engineer's decision shall be final. Plants shall be individually tagged or tagged in
Revised 811 0/04 Contract No. 38561 -A Page 82 of 109
Plants furnished by the Contractor shall be healthy, shapely, and well-rooted, and roots shall show no
evidence of having been restricted or deformed at any time. Plants shall be well-grown, free from
insect pests and disease, and shall be grown in nurseries which have been inspected by the State
Department of Food and Agriculture and have complied with the regulations thereof.
The Engineer is the sole judge as to acceptability of each plant. Vigorous, healthy, well-proportioned
plants are the intent of this specification. Plants which are even moderately “overgrown”, or are
showing signs of decline or lack of vigor, are subject to rejection. The size of the plants will be as
shown on the plans. Plants larger in size than specified may be used with the approval of the
Engineer, but the use of larger plants will make no change in contract price. If the use of larger plants
is approved, soil amendments shall be increased proportionately. All plants not conforming to the
requirements herein specified shall be considered defective and such plants, whether in place or not,
shall be marked as rejected, and immediately removed from the site and replaced with new plants by
the Contractor at the Contractor‘s expense. The Engineer reserves the right to change the species,
variety, and/or sizes of plant material to be furnished, provided that the cost of such plant changes do
not exceed the cost of plants in the original bid, and with the provision that the Contractor shall be
notified in writing, at least 60 days before the planting operation has commenced.
No plant shall be transported to the planting area that is not thoroughly wet throughout the ball of
earth surrounding the roots. Any plant that, in the opinion of the Engineer, has a damaged root ball
or is dry or in a wilted condition when delivered to the planting area will not be accepted, and shall be
replaced by the Contractor at the Contractor‘s expense. Each plant shall be handled and packed in
the approved manner for that species or variety, and all necessary precautions shall be taken to
ensure that the plants will arrive at the site of the work in proper condition for successful growth.
Trucks used for transporting plants shall be equipped with covers to protect plants from windburn.
Root condition of plants furnished by the Contractor in containers will be determined by removal of
earth from the roots of not less than 2 plants nor more than 2 percent of the total number of plants of
each species or variety, except when container-grown plants are from several sources, the roots of
not less than 2 plants of each species or variety from each source will be inspected by the Engineer.
In case the sample plants inspected are found to be defective, the Agency reserves the right to
reject the entire lot or lots of plants represented by the defective samples. Any plants rendered
unsuitable for planting because of this inspection will be considered as samples and will not be paid
for.
The Contractor shall notify the Engineer when plants are to be shipped to the project site. The
notification shall be given not less than 48 hours prior to the actual shipment date.
Add the following section:
212-1.6 Erosion Control Matting. Erosion control matting shall be made of IOO-percent-
biodegradable, weed-free wheat straw of thickness and density yielding 270 grams per square meter
(0.50 Ib./sy) with photodegradable polypropylene netting with a density of 0.89 grams per square
meter (1.64 Ib/l000 sy) having an approximate mesh interval of 50 mm x 50 mm (2” x 2“) on each
face of the straw mat. The straw mat shall be sewn together with unidirectional lines of cotton or
polypropylene thread spaced approximately 50 mm (2”) apart. Erosion control matting shall be “North
American Green, DS150”, “BonTerra S2”, or approved equal.
212-2 IRRIGATION SYSTEM MATERIALS. See Part 4 CSI Formatted Specification
Section 0281 0 for Irrigation System Materials Requirements.
Revised 8/10/04 Contract No. 38561 -A Page 83 of 109
SECTION 213 - ENGINEERING FABRICS
and 3 rn (IO’) Post Spacing
Erosion Control Fence with 1.8 rn (6’) Post Spacing and No Wire Fencinn
213-2 GEOTEXTILES.
200w s
213-2.1 General. Add the following: Geotextile types shall be used for the applications listed in
Table 213-2.1 (A)
Table 213-2.1(A)
GEOTEXTILE APPLICATIONS
Add the following section:
2133 EROSION CONTROL SPECIALTIES.
Add the following section:
2133 Gravel bags. Gravel bags for the use of temporary erosion control shall be burlap type, filled
with no less than 23kg (50 Ibs) of 19 mrn (3//) crushed rock and securely tied closed. Plastic bags
are not acceptable.
SECTION 214 PAVEMENT MARKERS
214-5 REFLECTIVE PAVEMENT MARKERS
Add the following section:
214-5.1 Temporary Reflective Pavement Markers. Temporary pavement markers shown on the
plans and required in the specifications shall be one of the types shown in Table 214-5.1(A), or equal
thereto.
Revised 8/10/04 Contract No. 38561 -A Page 84 of 109
Type
Stimsonite Chip
SeaVTemporary Overlay.
Marker (Models 300 and 301)
TFPM
Revised 8/10/04
Manufacturer of Distributor
John C. Henberger Co., Traffic Safety and Control,
San Diego, California,
Telephone (619) 292-5772
DAPCO Davidson Plastics Company, 18726 East Valley Highway,
Kent, Washington 98032,
Telephone (206) 251 -81 40.
Contract No. 38561-A Page 85 of 109
SUPPLEMENTAL PROVISIONS
TO
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR PUBLIC WORKS
CONSTRUCTION
PART 3, CONSTRUCTION METHODS
SECTION 300 - EARTHWORK
300-1 CLEARING AND GRUBBING.
300-1 .I General. add the following to the third paragraph: During surface clearing operations, the
Contractor shall not cover or bury any plant growth or other objectionable materials. If the Contractor
cannot successfully separate the plant growth from the surface soil and advertently or inadvertently
mixes organic or other objectionable materials with the soil, the soil so Contaminated shall be
removed from the site by the Contractor. All costs, if any, associated with removing the soil mixed
with organic or other objectionable materials and importing soil to replace said contaminated soil
shall be borne by the Contractor and no additional payment therefor shall be made to the Contractor.
300-1.3 Removal and Disposal of Materials. add the following: Also included in clearing and
grubbing shall be removal and disposal of existing street poles and lights, metal guard rail, fences,
asphalt concrete and aggregate base, concrete curb and gutter, concrete sidewalk, existing gate,
existing headwalls, rip-rap, traffic signs, and other existing features which interfere with the work.
Whether or not such items are shown on the plans they shall be removed as a part of clearing and
grubbing. Existing underground pipes and conduits that are shown on the plans and designated to
be removed shall be removed by the Contractor as a part of clearing and grubbing.
300-1.4 Payment. modify as follows: Payment for clearing and grubbing shall be made at the
contract lump sum price for clearing and grubbing within the project limits and at stockpile locations
and no other payments will be made. Unless otherwise noted on plans, the Contractor shall remove
all existing abandoned pipelines and conduits of any type, or use, and pipelines and conduits of any
type, or use, that are abandoned during the course of the work and shall replace said pipelines and
conduits with properly compacted soils. Payment for removal and disposal of abandoned utilities
shall be included in the lump-sum bid for Clearing and Grubbing, and no additional payment will be
made.
300-2 U NCLASSI FlED EXCAVATION.
300-2.1 General. add the following: Unclassified excavation shall include removal and stockpile of
suitable material, recompaction, mixing, grading for mitigation work, trenching and backfilling of
storm drains, sewers, other utilities, disposal of unsuitable materials not included in the bid item for
clearing and grubbing, all cut and fill including removal and recompaction of unsuitable soil,
salvaging clean excavated material and
filling areas to the required grades and cross section. Unclassified excavation shall be utilized onsite
to make all fills shown on the plans. Unclassified excavation shall also include scarification and
moisture adjustment and compaction of the top 300 mm (1’) of the subgrade in the roadway prism in
cut areas to 95 percent relative compaction, wetland mitigation grading and attendant work, export of
remaining excess material to a disposal site or spoil area acquired by the Contractor and pumping
and disposal of storm and ground water.
Revised 8/10/04 Contract No. 38561 -A Page 86 of 109
300-2.2.1 General. add the following: Alluvial and colluvial removal and recompaction shall
consist of excavating, blending and recompacting loose soils in areas that are designated to receive
fills. The existing loose soils shall be removed by the Contractor until a firm unyielding surface is
exposed or to a depth determined by the Engineer. If the excavated material contains 4%, or more,
water than the optimum moisture content the Contractor shall blend the wet soil with soils having a
lower moisture content and/or spread the excavated material in a manner that enables the material to
dry to optimum moisture content. The cost of spreading and/or drying shall be included in the
contract unit price for removal and recompaction. The excavated material shall be placed and
compacted in accordance with section 300-4 of the specifications except that section 300-4.9,
Measurement and Payment, shall not apply.
-
300-2.2.1 General. add the following to the first paragraph: Such direction may include, but is not
limited to, directing the Contractor to blend, adjust moisture content of, rework, and place unsuitable
soils at specific locations or elevations on the site.
Add the following section:
300-2.2.3 Compressible Soil. Compressible soils such as existing uncontrolled or unacceptable
fill, alluvium, and colluvium may exist within portions of the Project site. Where required by the
Engineer, the Contractor shall remove such compressible soils from areas to receive fill or from
areas upon which surface improvements are to be placed. The removal and disposal of such
compressible soils shall be paid for at the Contract Unit Price for unclassified excavation unless it is
considered otherwise unsuitable by the Engineer in which case it may be paid for in accordance with
section 300-2.2.1.
_-
300-2.2.4 Instability of Cuts. Add the following: The Contractor shall remove additional material
as directed by the Engineer to improve the stability of excavated cuts. The removal of such
excavated material shall be paid for at the Contract Unit Price for unclassified excavation unless it is
considered otherwise unsuitable by the Engineer, in which case it will be paid for in accordance with
Subsection 300-2.2.1.
300-2.5 Slopes. add the following:
located within 75 mm (0.25’) of the locations shown on the plans.
The hinge points (the top and bottom) of slopes shall be
300-2.5 Slopes. add the following: after the first sentence of the first paragraph:
defined as any area steeper than three horizontal to one vertical.
A slope shall be
300-2.6 Surplus Material. add the following: The Contractor shall haul and dispose of all surplus
material from the project. The Contractor shall utilize highway legal haul trucks for this export of
material from the project site and to a site secured by the Contractor. No earth moving equipment or
special construction equipment, as defined in section 565 of the California Vehicle Code, will be
allowed for hauling material on public streets.
300-2.8 Measurement. delete the second paragraph relating to materials removed from stockpiles
and add the following: Unclassified Excavation shall be measured based on the volume it occupies
in its original position before excavating. The measurement shall be from the original ground
contours after clearing and grubbing and the bottom of areas of excavation to the design elevations
shown on the plans or actual ground contours existing in borrow sites after excavation or those for
removal and recompaction of alluvial and colluvial materials or those for materials excavated to
improve the stability of cuts, whichever is lower in elevation. No excavated material which is re-
excavated will be measured for payment. Materials excavated or otherwise removed as all or part of
any other bid item shall not be measured as Unclassified Excavation.
Revised 8/10/04 Contract No. 38561-A Page 87 of 109
300-2.8 Measurement. delete the second paragraph relating to materials removed from stockpiles
and add the following: Unclassified Excavation shall be measured based on the volume it occupies
in its original position before excavating. The measurement shall be from the original ground
contours after clearing and grubbing and the bottom of areas of excavation to the design elevations
shown on the plans or actual ground contours existing in borrow sites after excavation. No
excavated material which is re-excavated will be measured for payment. Materials excavated or
otherwise removed as all or part of any other bid item shall not be measured as Unclassified
Excavation. The measurement of work performed under sections 300-2.2.1 and 300-2.2.2, 300-
2.2.3 and 300-2.2.4 when the Engineer determines that the soils are unsuitable shall be the actual
labor, materials and equipment used to accomplish the work as per section 3-3 EXTRA WORK of the
specifications.
300-2.9 Payment. add the following: Payment for work performed under sections 300-2.2.1, 300-
2.2.2, 300-2.2.3 and 300-2.2.4, when the Engineer determines that the soils are unsuitable, shall be
made for the actual labor, materials and equipment used to accomplish the work as per section 3-3
EXTRA WORK of the specifications.
Lump Sum Price Bid
300-2.9 Payment. substitute the following: Payment for all unclassified excavation will be made
at the Contract Lump Sum price bid for unclassified excavation and shall include compensation for
excavation, sloping, rounding tops and ends of excavation, matching existing graded slopes, loading,
exporting and disposing of surplus material and unsuitable material shown on the plans or specified
herein to be removed, stockpiling, hauling to designated sites, placing and compacting, mixing,
grading of mitigation site, salvaging clean and suitable material and filling areas to the required
grades and cross sections. Unclassified fill, slope rounding, all work incidental to Section 3004.8
and construction of transitions will be paid for as a part of unclassified excavation, and no additional
payment will be made therefor.
When required by the plans or specifications or where directed by the Engineer, the excavation and
stockpiling of selected material will be paid for at the Contract Lump Sum price for unclassified
excavation. Removing such selected material from the stockpile and placing it in its final position will
also be paid for at the Contract Lump Sump Price for unclassified excavation and no additional
compensation will be allowed therefor.
Add the following section:
300-2.10 Grading Tolerance. The Contractor shall finish excavated areas other than slopes and
subgrade below structures, within the roadway and sidewalk areas within 30 mm (0.1’) of the grades
shown on the plans. Subgrade tolerances shall conform to the requirements of section 301-1.4
SSPWC.
300-3 STRUCTURE EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL
300-3.1 General. add the following: The Contractor shall excavate to the lines and levels required
and/or shown on the Drawings. The Contractor shall provide all shoring, bracing, cribbing, pumping,
and planking required. The Contractor shall excavate and maintain the bottom of all trenches in a
condition that is level, firm, clean and free from all debris or foreign matter. Excavations shall be kept
free from water at all times. The Contractor shall remove any unsuitable material encountered
below grade as directed by the Engineer
3003.6 Payment. Add the following: Dewatering shall be paid for as an incidental to unclassified
excavation and no additional compensation will be made therefor. Except for unsuitable materials
removed as part of the clearing and grubbing item unsuitable material encountered below grade will
be paid for at the lump sum price bid for unclassified excavation.
Revised 8/10/04 Contract No. 38561 -A Page 88 of 109
3004 UNCLASSIFIED FILL I
3004.2 Preparation of Fill Areas. add the following: Except as provided in section 3004.7,
“Compaction”, areas proposed for improvements all fill (including backfill and scarified ground
surfaces) shall be compacted by the Contractor to no less than 90 percent of maximum dry density
as determined in accordance with ASTM Test Procedure DI 557-91.
300-4.4 Benching. add the following: Benching shall conform to The (City of Carlsbad
Supplemental Standard Drawing GS-14.
3004.5 Placing Materials for Fills. add the following: The Contractor shall perform grading such
that the upper 900 mm (3’) of fill placed in the roadway pavement area is composed of properly
compacted low expansive soils. The more highly expansive soils shall be placed in the deeper fill
areas and properly compacted or exported from the site. Low expansive soils are defined as those
soils that have an Expansion Index of 50 or less when tested in accordance with 1994 UBC Standard
18-2 as published by the International Conference of Building Officials. Should insufficient soils
meeting the requirement of an expansion index of 50 or less be present within the limits of work, soils
of the least expansion index that are available within the limits of work shall be incorporated in the
upper 900 mm (3’) of fill placed in the roadway.
The Contractor shall break rock encountered in the excavation into particles of less than 75 mm (3”).
Particles with dimensions greater than 75 mm (3”) shall be uniformly distributed over the area to be
filled so that construction equipment can be operated in such a manner that the larger pieces will be
broken into smaller particles and become incorporated with the other materials in the layer. This
requirement for particle size reduction does not apply to cobbles, small boulders, and small hard
rocks found within the surface soils and formational materials. Rocks having any dimension greater
than 460mm (18) shall not be incorporated into the fill. Rock exceeding 150 mm (6“) in diameter
shall not be placed in the upper 900 mm (3’) of any fill. When there are large quantities of rock to be
placed in the fill, rocks shall not be nested, but shall be spread with sufficient room between them so
that intervening voids can be adequately filled with fine material to form a dense, compact mass.
Oversize material which cannot be utilized for erosion mitigation or landscaping onsite shall be
broken to acceptable sizes or removed from the site by the Contractor. If disposed of within the City
of Carlsbad, a separate grading permit will be required for disposal of rock.
3004.6 Application of Water. add the following: The Contractor shall place all fill soil at a moisture
content no less than one (1) percent below optimum moisture as determined by ASTM test D-1557-
91.
300-4.7 Compaction. add the following: The Contractor shall compact all fill soils placed within the
top 1 m (3’) of roadway subgrade to a minimum of 95 percent relative compaction. On all areas to
receive planting, the top 150 mm (6”) shall be compacted to 85%, +2% -5%, to allow for plant growth.
3004.8 Slopes. add the following: Feathering of fill over the tops of slopes will not be permitted.
The Contractor shall compact the faces of fill slopes with a sheep’s foot roller at vertical intervals no
greater than 600 mm (2’) or shall be built and cut back to finish grade. In addition, if not over built and
cut back, the face of the slope shall be track walked upon completion.
3004.9 Measurement and Payment. delete and substitute the following: Unclassified fill,
grading, shaping, compacting or consolidating, slope rounding, construction of transitions and all
work included in and incidental to Section 300-4, “Unclassified Fill” will be paid for as a part of
unclassified excavation, and no additional payment will be made therefor.
Revised 8/10/04 Contract No. 38561 -A Page 89 of 109
300-5 BORROW EXCAVATION.
Tests
R-value
Expansion Index
Plasticity Index
Sieve Analvsis
Add the following section:
300-5.2.1 Imported Borrow Properties. The Contractor shall provide imported borrow that is clean
well graded soil consisting of material conforming to all of the requirements in Table 300-5.2.1 (A) and
the following requirements. Rock included in the top 1 m (3') of imported borrow shall be particles of
less than 75 mm (3"). Rock included below the top 1 m (3') of imported
borrow shall be particles of less than 150 mm (6").
Test Method No. Requirements
Calif. 301 40 Min.
UBC Standard 18-2 10 Max.
ASTM D 424 4 Max.
ASTM D 422 Percent Passina 751.1 (No. 200) 15 Max.
300-9 GEOTEXTILES FOR EROSION CONTROL. Modify as follows: 300-9 GEOTEXTILES FOR
EROSION CONTROL AND WATER POLLUTION CONTROL.
Add the following section:
300-9.2 General. The Contractor shall provide erosion control and water pollution control
conforming to the requirements shown on the plans, as specified herein, and as elsewhere required
by the Contract Documents. Erosion control and water pollution control shall include the work
specified herein, and such additional measures, as may be directed by the Engineer, to meet Best
Management Practices, as defined herein, and to properly control erosion and storm water damage
of the limits of work and construction impacts upon areas receiving drainage flows from within the
limits of work.
Add the following section:
300-9.2.1 Grading Controls. The Contractor shall protect all areas that have been graded and/or
cleared and grubbed as well as areas that have not been graded and/or cleared and grubbed within
the limits of work from erosion. The Contractor shall provide temporary earth berms, gravel bags, silt
fences, stabilized construction entrances and similar measures, coordinated with its construction
procedures, as necessary and as shown on the plans to control on site and off site erosion during the
construction period. The Contractor will be required to protect areas which have been cleared and
grubbed prior to excavation or embankment operations, and which are subject to runoff during the
duration of the contract. The criteria used to determine the appropriate erosion control measures
shall be the "Best Management Practices", hereinafter BMP, defined and described in the, "California
Storm Water Best Management Handbook, Construction Activity", January 2003 edition as published
by the Storm Water Quality Task Force. The Contractor shall maintain a copy of the "California
Storm Water Best Management Handbook, Construction Activity", January 2003 on the project site
and shall conduct its operations in conformity to said Handbook.
Temporary erosion control measures provided by the Contractor shall include, but not be limited to,
the following:
a) Embankment areas, while being brought up to grade and during periods of completion prior to
final roadbed construction, shall be graded so as to direct runoff into impoundment areas within
the limits of work where such runoff shall have pollutants removed by BMP methods .
b) The Contractor shall provide protection by BMP measures to eliminate erosion and the siltation of
downstream facilities and adjacent areas. These measures shall include, but shall not be limited
Revised 8/10/04 Contract No. 38561 -A Page 90 of 109
~ ~~
to: temporary down drains, either in the form of pipes or paved ditches with protected outfall
berms; graded berms around areas to eliminate erosion of embankment slopes by surface runoff;
confined ponding areas to desilt runoff; and to desilt runoff.
c) Excavation areas, while being brought to grade, shall be protected from erosion and the resulting
siltation of downstream facilities and adjacent areas by the use of BMP measures . These
measures shall include, but shall not be limited to, methods shown on the plans and described
herein.
Add the following section:
300-9.2.2 Payment. Full compensation for performing erosion control and water pollution control,
conforming to the operational requirements herein, of the BMP and conforming to the requirements
of the Federal Water Pollution Control Act, including the latest amendments thereto, which is not a
part of the planned permanent work or included as a separate bid item shall be considered as
included in the contract price bid for unclassified excavation, and no additional compensation will be
allowed therefor.
300-1 1 STONEWORK FOR EROSION CONTROL.
300-1 1.4 Payment. delete and replace as follows: Rock protection will be paid for at the lump sum
contract Price Bid for rock protection, complete and in place, in accordance with the details and
requirements of the plans and specifications.
300-1 3 ROCK SLOPE PROTECTION FABRIC.
Add the following section:
300-13.1 ’ Preparation of Subgrade. Prior to placing rock slope protection fabric the Contractor
shall clear the surfaces upon or against which rock slope protection fabric is to be placed of loose or
extraneous material and sharp objects that may damage the fabric during installation. Equipment or
vehicles shall not be operated or driven directly on the rock slope protection fabric. Rock slope
protection fabric damaged during placement shall be replaced or repaired by the Contractor at its
expense as directed by the Engineer.
Add the following section:
300-13.2 Placement. The Contractor shall place rock slope protection fabric prior to placing rock
slope protection. The Contractor shall grade surfaces to be covered by rock slope protection so as to
provide full support for the fabric. Rock slope protection fabric shall conform to the provisions in
Section 21 3-2, ”Geotextiles,“ and shall be placed by the Contractor in accordance with the details
shown on the plans and as specified herein. The Contractor shall handle rock slope protection fabric
with care that it is not torn or stretched and place it in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations, these specifications and as directed by the Engineer. The Contractor shall place
and fit rock slope protection fabric loosely upon or against the surface to receive the fabric so that the
fabric conforms to the surface without damage when the cover material is placed. Rock slope
protection fabrics shall be joined, at the option of the Contractor, either with overlapped joints or
stitched seams. When fabric is joined with overlapped joints, all adjacent borders of the fabric shall
be overlapped not less than 610 mm (24”). The fabric shall be placed such that the fabric being
placed shall overlap the adjacent section of fabric in the direction the cover material is being placed.
When the fabric is joined by stitched seams, the fabric shall be stitched with yarn of a contrasting
color. The size and composition of the yarn shall be as recommended by the fabric manufacturer.
The number of stitches per 25 mm (1”) of seam shall be 6 X 1. The strength of stitched seams shall
be the same as specified for the fabric, except when stitched seams are oriented up and down a
slope the strength shall be a minimum of 80 percent of that specified for the fabric. Fabric
damaged beyond repair, as determined by the Engineer, shall be replaced by the Contractor
and no additional payment will be made therefor. Repairing damaged fabric shall consist of placing
Revised 8/10/04 Contract No. 38561 -A Page 91 of 109
new fabric over the damaged area. The minimum fabric overlap from the edge of the damaged area
shall be 1 m (3') for overlap joints. If the new fabric joints at the damaged areas are joined by
stitching, the stitched joints shall conform to the requirements specified herein. Damaged fabric that
is suitable for repair, as determined by the Engineer, shall be repaired by the Contractor and no
additional payment will be made therefor.
Add the following section:
300.13.3 Measurement and Payment. Payment for rock slope protection fabric will be included
in the lump sum prices for items which have said fabric in their design and no additional payment
will be made therefore.
SECTION 301 - TREATED SOIL, SUBGRADE PREPARATION AND
PLACEMENT OF BASE MATERIALS
301 -1 SUBGRADE PREPARATION.
301 -1.2 Preparation of Subgrade. Modify the second and third paragraphs as follows: Change
each instance reading "150mm (6 inches)" to "300 mm (12")".
301-1.3 Relative Compaction. Delete the first paragraph and substitute the following: The
Contractor shall compact the upper 300 mm (12") of subgrade beneath areas to be paved, have
base or subbase material placed on them, or curb, gutter, curb and gutter, alley pavement, driveway
or sidewalk constructed over them to no less than 95 percent maximum dry density as determined by
ASTM test D-1557-91.
301 -1.7 Payment. Modify the first paragraph as follows: Payment for subgrade preparation shall
be included in the contract bid price for which the subgrade is prepared and shall include all labor,
materials; including water, operations and equipment to scarify, adjust moisture, compact or
recompact the subgrade, both in cut areas and in fill areas, and no further compensation will be
allowed.
SECTION 302 - ROADWAY SURFACING
302-1 OILED ROADWAYS AND SHOULDERS
302-1 .I General. add the following: The Contractor shall treat roadway or shoulder to be oiled with
a post emergent herbicide applied to all vegetation within the limits of the area to be oiled. Herbicide
shall be applied at least 2 (two) working days prior to oiling the roadway or shoulder. Allowance for
the two day period shall be shown in the schedule required per section 6-1.
302-1.2. Measurement and Payment. add the following: Payment for oiled roadways and
shoulders shall include post emergent herbicide treatment of the areas to be oiled.
302-2 CHIP SEAL
302-2.1 General. add the following: The Contractor shall treat all vegetation within the limits of the
paved area to be chip sealed with a post emergent herbicide. Herbicide shall be applied at least 2
(two) working days prior to chip sealing the street. Allowance for the two day period shall be shown
in the schedule required per section 6-1.
302-2.8. Measurement and Payment. add the following:
emergent herbicide treatment of the areas to be chip sealed.
Payment for chip seal shall include post
Revised 8/10/04 Contract No. 38561-A Paae 92 of 109
_- 3023 ASPHALT-RUBBER CHIP SEAL OR INTERLAYER
Add the following section:
302-3.1 General. The Contractor shall treat all vegetation within the limits of the paved area to
receive asphalt-rubber chip seal treatment with a post emergent herbicide. Herbicide shall be applied
at least 2 (two) working days prior to sealing of street. Allowance for the two day period shall be
shown in the schedule required per section 6-1. Payment for asphalt-rubber chip seal treatment
shall include post emergent herbicide treatment of the areas to receive asphalt-rubber chip seal
treatment.
302-4 EMULSION-AGGREGATE SLURRY
Add the following section:
3024.3.4 Surface Preparation. As part of surface preparation prior to application of emulsion-
sluny seal the Contractor shall:
treat the area to receive emulsion-slurry seal with a post emergent herbicide. Herbicide shall be
applied at least 2 (two) working days prior to sealing of street. Allowance for the two day period shall
be shown in the schedule required per section 6-1.
remediate cracks, potholes, and large areas of alligator cracking. Remediation shall be
accomplished by:
Removal of existing asphalt pavement, base material and soil and replacement with full depth
asphalt concrete in locations designated by the Engineer
Crack cleaning and sealing of all cracks designated by the Engineer.
The Engineer will designate and mark the final limits of the full depth asphalt concrete patching and
-- crack sealing limits.
302-5 ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVEMENT.
302-5.1 General. add the following: The Contractor shall treat all vegetation within the limits of the
paved area to receive asphalt concrete paving with a post emergent herbicide. Herbicide shall be
applied at least 2 (two) working days prior to paving the area. Allowance for the two day period shall
be shown in the schedule required per section 6-1.
302-5.2.5 Pavement Transitions. add the following: The Contractor shall ramp the approaches and
termini to all structures and vertical joints in the cold-milled area which are transverse to through
traffic with temporary asphalt concrete pavement as specified in section 306-1 5.1. Ramps shall be
constructed the same day as cold milling and removed the same day as permanent paving. Ramp
dimensions and compaction shall be as approved by the Engineer.
302-5.4 Tack Coat. add the following: The Contractor shall place a tack coat between the
successive interfaces of existing pavement and new pavement when, in the opinion of the engineer,
the Contractor has failed to maintain or prepare each existing or previously laid course of asphalt
receiving the subsequent course of asphalt in a sufficiently clean state and the asphalt receiving the
new pavement course is dirty enough to impair bonding between the next lift of asphalt.
302-5.5 Distribution and Spreading. modify as follows After second sentence of sixth
paragraph, add: The Contractor shall provide the spreading and finishing machine used to construct
the asphalt concrete surface course with an automatic screed control for surface course paving. The
automatic screed control shall be 9 m (30’) minimum length. The paving machine shall be operated
by an operator and two full-time screed men during all paving.
Revised 8/10/04 Contract No. 38561 -A Page 93 of 109
302-5.6.1 General. modify as follows: Second paragraph, Part (2), add: Pinched joint rolling
procedures shall be required, and vibratory rollers shall be limited to breakdown, unless otherwise
directed by the Engineer.
modify as follows: After last paragraph, add: Unless directed othewise by the Engineer, the initial
breakdown rolling shall be followed by a pneumatic-tired roller as described in this section.
302-5.9 Measurement and Payment. add the following:
the unit price bid per ton. No additional payment shall be made for any tack coat.
Payment for asphalt concrete shall be at
Add the following section:
302-9 ASPHALT PAVEMENT REPAIRS AND REMEDIATION
Add the following section.
302-9.1 General. Asphalt pavement Repairs and Remediation shall consist of the repair and
restoration of existing asphalt pavement. Repair of asphalt pavement shall consist of the saw
cutting, removal and disposal of existing asphalt pavement in conformance with section 300-1.3,
compaction of existing subgrade in conformance with section 301-1, grading and compaction of base
material in conformance with section 301-2, application of grade SS-1 h emulsified asphalt and the
placement of asphalt concrete base and wearing courses as specified herein
Add the following section.
302-9.2 Full Depth Asphalt Concrete Patch. Full depth asphalt concrete patch shall consist of
removing asphalt concrete andlor aggregate basehubgrade to 300 mm (1’) below existing asphalt
surface and placing replacing the material so removed with asphalt concrete. The area shown on
the plans or set forth in the bid item are for estimating purposes only, final quantity will be as
measured in the field. The Engineer will designate and mark the final limits of the asphalt patch area
by outlining the area to be patched. The Contractor shall cut such areas to straight lines in square or
rectangular areas as marked. The area so cut shall have two of the sides at right angles to the
direction of traffic. The excavated faces of the basehbgrade shall be straight and vertical. The
Contractor shall compact the upper 300mm (1’) of subgrade to 95% relative compaction. A tack
coat of SS-1 h emulsified asphalt shall be applied uniformly to all asphalt to asphalt contact surfaces
at a rate of 0.25 Urn2 to 0.45 Urn2 (0.05 to 0.lOgallons per square yard) in accordance with
subsection 302-5.4, SSPWC. The Contractor shall fill and compact areas designated to be removed
with 300 mm (1 .O’) full depth asphalt concrete. Asphalt concrete for full depth asphalt concrete patch
shall be B-AR-4000. The asphalt concrete so constructed shall have a finish surface and density
conforming to subsection 302-5.6.2 SSPWC.
Add the following section.
302-9.3 Crack Sealing The Contractor shall wash, blow out and thoroughly dry all cracks
designated to be sealed before installing elastomeric sealant material. The Contractor shall dispose
debris from crack cleaning outside the public way in accordance with Section 7-8.1, “Cleanup and
Dust Control.” The hot-melt rubberized asphalt shall be melted in a jacketed, double boiler type
melting unit. Temperature of the heat transfer medium shall not exceed 245°C (475°F). Application
of the hot-melt sealant shall be made with a pressure feed applicator or pour pot. Sealant shall be
applied when the pavement surface temperature is greater than 4°C (40°F). Containers of hot-melt
sealant shall be delivered to the job-site in unopened containers that are clearly marked with data
showing the manufacturer‘s name, the product designation and the manufacturer‘s batch number
and lot numbers. The level of the sealant shall be flush with the surface of the existing pavement.
All excess sealant shall be removed from the crack with a minimum overlap onto adjacent pavement.
Add the following section.
302-9.4. Measurement and Payment. Quantities of full depth asphalt concrete patch and crack
sealing set forth in the bid item are for estimating purposes only, final quantity will be as designated
Revised 8/10/04 Contract No. 38561-A Paae 94 of 109
and measured in the field. The Engineer will designate and mark the limits of the Full depth asphalt
concrete patch and crack sealant application areas. Payment for emulsion-aggregate slurry
treatments shall include post emergent herbicide treatment of the areas to receive for emulsion-
aggregate slurry treatment. Full compensation for conforming to the requirements of constructing full
depth asphalt concrete patch shall include but not be limited to: furnishing all labor, tools, equipment,
and materials necessary for doing the work including, but not be limited to, saw cutting and removing
300 mm (1’) thick section of existing asphalt concrete, aggregate basekubbase and basement soil
as designated by the engineer, placement of asphalt concrete, compaction of subbase and asphalt
concrete, placement of SS-1 h asphalt emulsion and all other work incidental to full depth asphalt
concrete patch shall be considered as included in the contract unit price bid for full depth asphalt
concrete patch and no additional compensation will be allowed therefor. Full compensation for
conforming to the requirements of crack sealing shall include but not be limited to, furnishing all
labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals necessary to do the work. Crack cleaning,
roadway clean up, application of sealant, removal of excess sealant and all other work incidental to
crack sealing shall be considered as included in the contract unit price bid and no additional
compensation will be allowed therefor.
SECTION 303 CONCRETE AND MASONRY CONSTRUCTION.
308-7 CONCRETE STRUCTURES
303-1.6.2 Falsework Design. add the following: The Contractor shall provide all temporary bracing
necessary to withstand all imposed loads during erection, construction, and removal of any
falsework.The Contractor shall provide falsework drawings and calculations prepared by a
registered professional engineer, civil or structural, that show provisions for resolution of all
loads that may be imposed upon the falsework. Such plans and calculations shall include:
1. Resolution of all live, dead, wind, construction and impact loads that may be imposed on
the falsework.
2. Temporary bracing or methods to be used during each phase of erection and removal of
the falsework.
1. Concrete placement sequence.
2. Erection and removal sequence.
3. Deflection values for the falsework that include recommended methods to compensate for
falsework deflections, vertical alignment, and anticipated falsework deflection.
303-2 AIR-PLACED CONCRETE.
303-2.1.1 General. add the following:
replace stucco netting with 150mm x 150mm (6” x 6”) by No. 10 by No. IO welded wire mesh.
Modify Regional Standard Drawing D-75 as follows:
Add the following section:
303-5 CONCRETE CURBS, WALKS, GUTTERS, CROSS GUTTERS, ALLEY INTERSECTIONS,
ACCESS RAMPS, AND DRIVEWAYS.
303-5.5.2 Curb. add the following: The Contractor shall stamp the curb face with 75 mm (3) high
block letters directly above the point that it is crossed by underground facilities with the marking
specified in Table 303-5.5.2(A)
Revised 8/10/04 Contract No. 38561 -A Page 95 of 109
Type of underground facilities
Water Service Lateral
Sewer Service Lateral
Irrigation Water Lateral or Sleeve I RW
Marking
W
S
303-5.9 Measurement and Payment. add the following: Curb and gutter, and curb, shall be
considered as continuing across driveways and access ramps when constructed adjacent thereto.
Neither curb and gutter nor curb will be paid for across the length of local depressions, except that
which occurs in gutter transitions at each side of an inlet.
Add the following section:
303-6.6 Payment. Payment for stamped concrete shall be made on the basis of the contract unit
price bid and shall include full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, including sand bed,
tools, equipment, and installing complete and in place, and no further compensation will be allowed.
SECTION 306 - UNDERGROUND CONDUIT CONSTRUCTION
306-1 OPEN TRENCH OPERATIONS
Add the following section:
306-1.1.7 Steel Plate Bridging - With a Non-Skid Surface. This section covers the use of steel
plate bridging. The Contractor shall not employ the use or use steel plate bridging or trench plate
that does not meet the requirements of this section both in application and circumstance of use.
Add the following section:
306-1.1.7.1 Requirements for Use. Alternate construction methods that avoid the use of steel
plate bridging shall be used by the Contractor unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. It is
recognized that to accommodate excavation work, steel plate bridging may be necessary. All
conditions for use of steel plate bridging set forth in the following requirements must be fulfilled as
conditions of approval of the use of steel plate bridging. Consideration of steel plate bridging in the
review process will take into account the following factors:
1. Traffic volume and composition.
2. Duration of use of the steel plate bridging.
3. size of the proposed excavation.
3. Weather conditions.
The following formula shall be used to score the permitted use of steel plate bridging:
PS = [ ADT + EWL + DAYS + 10 X WEEKEND + 5 X NIGHTS + 20 X WEATHER + SPEED lkmh) + SLOPE X 1001 X LANES
1000 8
PS = [ ADT + EWL + DAYS + 10 X WEEKEND + 5 X NIGHTS + 20 X WEATHER + SPEED (mDh) + SLOPE X 1001 X LANES
1000 5
where:
PS
ADT EWL -
plate score.
average daily traffic as defined in the CALTRANS Traffic Manual.
equivalent wheel loads as defined in the CALTRANS Traffic Manual.
- -
-
Revised 8/10/04 Contract No. 38561 -A Page 96 of 109
DAYS
site
WEEKEND
-
NIGHTS
WEATHER
SPEED
number
SLOPE
spanning a
total number of 24 hour periods during which the plates will be utilized at the
being considered.
total number of Saturdays, Sundays and holidays that the plates will be utilized
at the site being considered.
total number of overnight periods that the plates will be in place, exclusive of
Saturday, Sunday and holiday nights.
total number of 24-hour periods that the plates will be utilized at the site being
considered when the possibility of rain exceeds 40 percent.
the design speed in kilometers per hour or miles per hour, as applicable in the
formulae above, of the street where the plates are to be installed. This
shall not be reduced for construction zone speed reductions.
the quotient of the vertical differential divided by the horizontal distance. The
vertical and horizontal dimensions shall be measured at the locations
distance of 15 m (50’) up and downstream of the position of the
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
proposed steel plate bridging.
LANES - - the number of lanes where plates will be used.
When the computed value of the plate score exceeds 50, steel plate bridging shall not be used
unless, and at the sole discretion of the Engineer, the Engineer determines that no alternative
method of construction is possible in lieu of using steel plate bridging or that other overriding
considerations make the use of steel plate bridging acceptable. Alternatives considered to bridging
shall include, but not be limited to, detouring traffic, construction detour routes, tunneling, boring and
other methods of trenchless construction. Unless specifically noted in the provisions of the
Engineer’s approval, the use of steel plate bridging at each location so approved shall not exceed
four (4) consecutive working days in any given week.
Add the following section:
306-1.1.7.2 Additional Requirements. In all cases when the depth of the trench exceeds the
width of the steel plate bridging resting on each side of the pavement adjacent to the trench, safety
regulations require or the Engineer determines that shoring is necessary to protect the health or
safety of workers or the public the Contractor shall install shoring conforming to Section 7-10.4.1 of
the Standard Specifications. The trench shoring shall be designed and installed to support the steel
plate bridging and traffic loads. All approvals for design, substitution of materials or methods shall be
submitted by the Contractor in accordance with all provisions of section 2-5.3 Shop Drawings and
Submittals. The Contractor shall backfill and resurface excavations in accordance with section 306-
1.5.
-
Add the following section:
306-1 .I .7.3 Installation. When backfilling operations of an excavation in the traveled way,
whether transverse or longitudinal cannot be properly completed within a work day, steel plate
bridging with a non-skid surface and shoring may be required to preserve unobstructed traffic flow.
In such cases, the following conditions shall apply:
Steel plate bridging when the plate score exceeds 50 is not allowed except when, at the sole
discretion of the Engineer, it is approved as specified hereinbefore.
Steel plates used for bridging must extend a minimum of 610 mm (2’) beyond the edges of the
trench.
Steel plate bridging shall be installed to operate with minimum noise.
When the use of steel plate bridging and shoring is approved by the Engineer, the Contractor shall
install using either Method (1) or (2) depending on the design speed of the portion of street where the
steel plate bridging is proposed for use.
Method 1 [For speeds more than 70 Km/hr (45 MPH)]: The pavement shall be cold planed to a
Revised 8/10/04 Contract No. 38561-A Page 97 of 109
depth equal to the thickness of the plate and to a width and length equal to the dimensions of the
plate. The cold milling shall produce a flat surface that the plate shall rest on with no horizontal or
vertical movement. Horizontal gaps between the unmilled pavement and the plate shall not exceed
25 mm (1”) and shall be filled with elastomeric sealant material which may, at the contractor‘s option,
be mixed with no more that 50%, by volume, of Type I aggregate conforming to the requirements of
tables 203-5.2(8) and 203-5.3(A).
Maximum Trench Width (I)
0.3 m (IO)
0.6 m (23”)
0.8 m (31”)
1.0 m (41”)
Method 2 [For speeds 70 Km/hr (45 MPH) or less]: Approach plate(s) and ending plate (if
longitudinal placement) shall be attached to the roadway and shall be secured against displacement
by using two adjustable cleats that are no less than 50 mm (2”) shorter than the width of the trench
bolted to the underside of each plate and located within 150 mm (6”) of the beginning and end of the
trench for plates at the beginning and end of the trench, a minimum of two 300 mm long by 19 mm
diameter (12” x W) steel bolts placed through the plate and driven into holes drilled 300 mm (12”)
into the pavement section, or other devices approved by the Engineer. Subsequent plates shall be
butted to each other. Fine graded asphalt concrete shall be compacted to form ramps, maximum
slope 8.5% with a minimum 300 mm (12”) taper to cover all edges of the steel plates. When steel
plates are removed, the dowel holes in the pavement section shall be completely filled with
elastomeric sealant material. At the Contractor‘s option, the methods required for Method 1 may be
used. If the Contractor so elects, all requirements of Method 1 shall be used. The Contractor shall
maintain the steel plates, shoring, and asphalt concrete ramps and maintain and restore the street
surface during and after their use.
Minimum Plate Thickness
13 mm (’/*”)
19 mm (3/4n)
22 mm (7/8n)
25 mm (1”)
(1) For spans greater than 1.6 m (Y), a structural design shall be prepared by a registered civil engineer and submitted to the Engineer for review and approval in accordance with section 2-5.3.
Steel plate bridging shall be steel plate designed to support the HS2044 truck loading per
CALTRANS Bridge Design Specifications Manual. The Contractor shall maintain a non-skid
surface on the steel plate with no less than a coefficient of friction of 0.35 as determined by
California Test Method 342. If a different test method is used, the Contractor may utilize
standard test plates with known coefficients of friction available from the CALTRANS District
11 Materials Engineer to correlate skid resistance results to California Test Method 342. In
addition to all other required construction signing, the Contractor shall install Rough Road
(W33) sign with black lettering on an orange background in advance of steel plate bridging.
Add the following section:
306-1 .I .7.5 Measurement and Payment. Steel plate bridge materials including, but not limited to:
steel plates, anchoring devices, cold milling, elastomeric sealant material, asphalt ramping and
padding, signage, placing, installation, removal, relocation, preparation and processing of shop
drawings and submittals to support the use of steel plate bridging and all other materials, labor,
supervision, overhead of any type or description will be paid for as an incidental to the work that the
bridging is installed to facilitate. No separate payment for steel plate bridging will be made. No
Revised 8/10/04 Contract No. 38561-A Page 98 of 109
extension to contract time will be allowed for, or because of, the use of steel plate bridging.
308-7.1.1 Pipe Laying. add the following: The Contractor shall place electrical conduit per SDG&E
plans, Construction Order No. 5005316, Project No. 33627991 0.
306-1.2.4 Field Jointing of Reinforced Concrete Pipe. add the following: The Contractor shall
provide Gasket-type joints for reinforced concrete pipe (watertight joints) where indicated on plans.
306-1.3.1 General. add the following: The Contractor shall install detectable underground utility
marking tape 230 mm X75 mm (9” X 3”) above each or, in the case of bundled underground
conduit of the same type, the upper underground conduit being installed by the open trench method.
The type and color of detectable underground utility marking tape shall conform to the requirements
of section 207-25 et seq.
306-1.3.4 Compaction Requirements. delete Section 306-1.3.4 and replace with the following: The
Contractor shall densify trench backfill to a minimum of 90 percent relative compaction except that in
the top 300 mm (12”) of the street right-of-way, compaction shall be 95 percent.
306-1.5 Trench Resurfacing.
306-1.5.1 Temporary Resurfacing. Delete the fourth and fifth paragraphs and substitute the
following: Temporary bituminous resurfacing materials which are placed by the Contractor are for its
convenience and shall be at no cost to the Agency. Temporary bituminous resurfacing materials shall
be used in lieu of permanent resurfacing only when approved by the Engineer. When temporary
bituminous resurfacing materials are used in lieu of permanent resurfacing it shall be removed and
replaced with permanent resurfacing within 7 days of placement. No additional payment will be
made for temporary bituminous resurfacing materials. The price bid for the associated conduit or
structure shall include full compensation for furnishing, placing, maintaining, removing, and disposing
of such temporary resurfacing materials.
-
306-1.5.2 Permanent Resurfacing. Add the following: Except as provided in section 306-1 51,
“Temporary Resurfacing,” the Contractor shall perform permanent trench resurfacing within 24 hours
after the completion of backfill and densification of backfill and aggregate base materials.
306-1.6 Basis of Payment for Open Trench Installation. add the following: Payment for utilities
undergrounding which includes the utility trench for CATV and SDG&E and conduit for SDG&E’s
electric conversion shall be made on the basis of contract lump sum price for utilities undergrounding
and no other payments will be made. Cox Cable will supply and deliver conduits and fittings to be
installed by the Contractor. Cox Cable will install enclosures. The Contractor will furnish and install
6.4 mm (IC) nylon pull ropes in all conduit.
306-5 ABANDONMENT OF CONDUITS AND STRUCTURES. Add the following: Unless otherwise
noted on plans, the Contractor shall remove all existing abandoned pipelines and conduits of any
type, or use, and pipelines and conduits of any type, or use, that are abandoned during the course of
the work and shall replace said pipelines and conduits with properly compacted soils. Payment for
removal and disposal of abandoned utilities shall be included in the lump-sum bid for Clearing and
Grubbing, and no additional payment will be made.
Revised 8/10/04 Contract No. 38561 -A Page 99 of 109
SECTION 307 - STREET LIGHTING AND TRAFFIC SIGNALS
3073 STREET LIGHTING CONSTRUCTION. Modify as follows: Section 209, “Signals,
Lighting and Electrical Systems” herein, shall replace Section 307-3, “Electrical Components”,
of the SSPWC in all matters pertaining to the specifications for measurement, payment,
warranty, and methods of construction for all elements of street lighting and traffic signals.
3074 TRAFFIC SIGNAL CONSTRUCTION. Modify as follows: Section 209, “Signals,
Lighting and Electrical Systems” herein, shall replace Section 307-4, “Electrical Components“,
of the SSPWC in all matters pertaining to the specifications for measurement, payment,
warranty, and methods of construction for all elements of street lighting and traffic signals.
SECTION 308 LANDSCAPE AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATION
308-2 EARTHWORK AND TOPSOIL PLACEMENT
308-2.3.2 Fertilization and Conditioning Procedures. add the following: The Contractor
shall cultivate the surface of all areas to be planted or hydroseeded by discing, ripping or
scarifying the finish grade. After cultivation the Contractor shall clear the planting areas of
stones to the depth of cultivation and shall be rake the planting areas to a smooth friable and
plantable surface. The Contractor shall cultivate all planting areas, except slopes steeper
than 3-1/2:1 (horizontal to vertical), to a depth of 300 mm (12”). The planting areas that are
slopes steeper than 3-1/2:1, shall be cultivated to a depth of 150 mm (6”). After cultivation,
the soil amendments shown in Part 4 of the Supplemental Provisions, CSI Formatted
Specifications, Section 02900. The Contractor shall certify, in writing, that the ground
surface has been prepared in accordance with this section and shall request inspection by
the Engineer prior to any planting or seeding. The Contractor shall obtain the Engineer’s
approval before any planting or hydroseeding.
308-2.4 Finish Grading.. add following: The Contractor shall prepare the finish grade in
hydroseed slope areas with a moderately rough texture to provide a suitable surface for
adherence of the hydroseed mix.
3084 PLANTING.
3084.1 General. add the following: The Contractor shall perform actual planting during
those periods when weather and soil conditions are suitable and in accordance with locally
accepted horticultural practice and as approved by the Engineer. No planting shall be done in
any area until it has been satisfactorily prepared in accordance with these specifications. Soil
moisture level prior to planting shall be no less than 75 percent of field capacity. The Contrac-
tor shall obtain the Engineer’s approval of planting pits before planting operations begin. For
pit planted vegetation when the soil moisture level is found to be insufficient for planting, the
Contractor shall fill the planting pits with water and allow them to drain before starting planting
operations. No more plants shall be distributed in the planting area on any day than can be
planted and watered on that day. The Contractor shall plant and water all plants as herein
specified immediately after removal from their containers. Containers shall not be cut prior to
placing the plants in the planting area. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to
provide continuous horticultural services and temporary and/or permanent irrigation to all
planted and hydroseeded areas so that the planted and hydroseeded vegetation is
100 percent healthy and thriving prior to, and throughout the, landscape maintenance period.
3084.2 Protection and Storage. add the following: The Contractor shall submit a sheltered and
Revised 8/10/04 Contract No. 3856 1 -A Page 100 of 109
secure location for on-site plant storage area for the Engineer's approval prior to the delivery of any
plant materials. Any plant determined by the Engineer to be wilted, broken, or otherwise damaged
shall be rejected at any time during the project, whether in the ground or not. All plants shall be
handled by their containers. Any plant that has been handled by its trunk or stem shall be rejected.
All rejected plants shall be removed from the site immediately.
3084.3 Layout and Plant Location. modify as follows: Planting areas shall be staked by the
Contractor and the Contractor shall obtain the Engineer's approval of the planting layout before
planting operations begin.
-
3084.5 Tree and Shrub Planting. add the following: The Contractor shall amend the backfill for
planting holes to a thoroughly blended mixture of clean loamy soil meeting the requirements of the
CSI Formatted Specifications, Specification Section 02900 Landscape Planting.
Pruning shall be limited to the minimum necessary to remove injured twigs and branches, and to
compensate for loss of roots during transplanting, but never to exceed one-tenth the branching
structure. Pruning may be done only with the approval of, and in the presence of, the Engineer. Cuts
over 19 mm (%") shall be painted with an approved tree wound paint.
3084.6 Plant Staking and Guying. add the following: The Contractor shall install all boxed
trees per drawings L-8 of the Plans and in accordance with the CSI Formatted Specifications,
Section 02900, Landscape Planting & Maintenance.
Add the following section:
3084.8.3.1 Weed Eradication. The Contractor shall water all irrigated areas to be hydroseeded for
three (3) weeks prior to hydroseeding to allow for germination of the weed seeds. The Contractor
shall spray all weeds with a post emergent herbicide immediately after the completion of the three
week irrigation period. After two (2) weeks, the Contractor shall again eradicate the weeds and
complete the preparation of the soil prior to the application of the hydroseed mixes.
Add the following section,
3084.10 Erosion Control Matting Installation
Add the following section,
3084.10.1 General. Before installation of erosion control matting the Contractor shall complete all
soil preparation, fine grading, and hydroseeding of the areas to receive erosion control matting.
Add the following section:
3084.10.2 Coordination with Hydroseeding. Erosion control matting shall be installed by the
Contractor immediately after the first application of hydroseed materials. In all cases the Contractor
shall place the erosion control matting within three days after the first hydroseed material application.
Should any seed in the hydroseed materials begin to germinate within the threeday period after
application or before the installation of the erosion control matting, the installation of the erosion
control matting shall be considered as late and the Contractor shall disc the hydroseed materials into
the top 100m (4") of the underlying soil, condition the soil for hydroseeding, apply hydroseeding
materials at the rates and of the type specified and then install the erosion control matting. No
additional payment will be made for second or subsequent hydroseed applications resulting from late
installation of erosion control matting.
Add the following section:
3084.1 0.3 Installation. The Contractor shall install erosion control matting using the following
techniques:
1. Begin at the top of the slope by placing the erosion control matting into a 150 mm (6") wide
by 150 mm (6) deep trench with the end of the matting laid flat in the bottom of the trench
#--
Revised 8/10/04 Contract No. 38561 -A Page 101 of 109
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Anchor the end of the erosion control matting with erosion control mat staples spaced no
more than 300 mm (12") on centers placed at the intersection of the bottom and the downhill
vertical face of the trench.
Roll the erosion control matting down the slope.
Staple the erosion control matting on an alternating grid consisting of three across and two
across lines of staples in horizontal lines spaced 900mm (3') on centers.
Erosion control mat so stapled shall be spaced such that no less than 1 % staples per
square meter (1% staples per square yard) are provided to anchor the erosion control mat-
ting.
Start the adjacent erosion control mat as in Item 1. of this section, overlapping the previ-
ously placed mat by no less than 50 mm (2").
Staple placement may be such as to use the staples used to secure the adjacent mat to
secure both mats along their edges.
308-5 IRRIGATION SYSTEM INSTALLATION. This project includes Part 4 CSI Format-
ted Specifications for Irrigation. The CSI Formatted Specification Section 0281 0 shall
take precedence over these Supplemental Provisions.
3084.1 General. add the following: The Contractor shall apply irrigation water as often and
in sufficient amounts, as conditions may require, to germinate and establish the seed and
keep the container plants healthy and growing. The Contractor shall lay out lines, valves, and
other underground utilities and receive the approval of the Engineer before digging trenches.
The Contractor shall be responsible for damages caused by its operations. Connections
shall be made at approximately the locations shown on the drawings. The Contractor shall be
responsible for unapproved changes. Permission to shut off any existing in-use water lines
must be obtained 48 hours in advance, as to the date, time and exact length of time of each
shut-off. The Contractor shall demonstrate that the entire irrigation system is under full
automatic operation for a period of seven days prior to any planting.
308-5.2 Irrigation Plpeline Installation. add the following: The Contractor shall install all
pressure main line piping from the irrigation system so as to maintain 3.1 m (IO') minimum
horizontal separation from all potable water piping. Where reclaimed and potable water
pressure mainline piping cross, the reclaimed water piping shall be installed below the
potable water piping, sleeved in a pressure rating of 200 PSI SDR 21 "Alertline" PVC sleeve
which extends a minimum of 3.1 m (IO') on either side of the potable water piping and be
located to provide a minimum vertical clearance of 300 mm (12") between the reclaimed and
potable water lines. Conventional (white) PVC pipe Schedule 40 may be used for sleeving
material if it is taped along its entire length with 75 mm (3") wide purple warning tape which
reads "Caution Reclaimed Water".
For trenching through areas where topsoil has been spread, the Contractor shall deposit
topsoil on one side of trench and subsoil on opposite side. Subsoil shall be free of all rocks
13 mm ('k) in diameter or larger, debris, and litter, prior to use as backfill. The Contractor
shall repair any leaks and replace all defective pipe or fittings until lines meet test require-
ments. The Contractor shall not cover any lines until they have been inspected and approved
by the Engineer for tightness, quality of workmanship, and materials. The Contractor shall not
be backfill trenches until all required tests and observations are performed. Observations
include sprinkler heads, all fittings, lateral and mainline pipe, valves, and direct burial wire.
308-5.2.3 Plastic Pipeline. add the following: The Contractor shall store all pipe and fittings
under cover until used, and all pipe and fittings shall transported in a vehicle with a bed long
enough to allow the length of pipe to lay flat so as not to be subjected to undue bending or
concentrated external load at any point. Pipe ends and fittings shall be wiped with MEK, or
equal, before welding solvent is applied. Welded joints shall be given a minimum of
Revised 8/10/04 Contract No. 38561 -A Page 102 of 109
15 minutes to set before moving or handling. All field cuts shall be beveled to remove burrs
and excess before fitting and gluing together. The Contractor shall center load pipe with small
amount of backfill to prevent arching and slipping under pressure. Joints shall be exposed for
inspection during testing. Plastic-to-plastic joints shall be solvent-welded, using only solvent
recommended by pipe manufacturer.
Add the following section:
308-5.2.6 Installation of Brass Pipe. The Contractor shall cut brass piping by power hacksaw,
circular cutting machine using an abrasive wheel, or hand hacksaw. No piping shall be cut with
metallic wheel cutter of any description. The Contractor shall ream and remove rough edges or burrs
on all pipe so that smooth and unobstructed flow is obtained, place Teflon tape, Teflon dope, or
approved equal on male threads only, and tighten to prevent any leakage. The Contractor shall
tighten screwed joints with tongs or wrenches. Caulking is not permitted.
Add the following section:
308-5.3.1 Valves. add the following:
The Contractor shall install each control valve in a separate valve box with a minimum of 300 mm (12")
separation between valves and 150 mm (6) from any fixed object or structure.
Add the following section
308-5.3.2 Valve Boxes. The Contractor shall install no more than one valve per box. All boxes are to
be marked as to the type of valve. Remote control valve boxes shall also indicate control station
number.
Add the following section:
308-5.3.3 Backflow Preventer. The Contractor shall install backflow preventer assembly in
accordance with manufacturer's specifications and as directed on drawings. Exact location and
positioning shall be verified on the site by the Engineer.
308-5.4.4 Sprinkler Head Adjustment. add the following: The Contractor shall flush and adjust
all irrigation heads and valves for optimum performance and to prevent overspray onto walks,
roadways buildings, walls, and other structures.
308-5.5 Automatic Control System Installation. add the following: The Contractor shall install all
portions of the electrical installation with materials and methods conforming to the requirements of
the 1996 National Electrical Code. The Contractor shall provide no less than one control wire and
one common ground wire to service each valve in system.
308-5.6.3 Sprinkler Coverage Test.
any ground cover is planted.
add the following: This test shall be accomplished before
308-6 MAINTENANCE AND PLANT ESTABLISHMENT. See Part 4, CSI Formatted
Specification Section 02900.
308-7 GUARANTEE. Add following: The Contractor shall guarantee all 600 mm (24") box trees
installed under the contract to live and grow for one year from the day of final acceptance of the
contract work. The Contractor shall guarantee all other plant material, including ground covers
to live and grow for a period of 30 days from the last day of the maintenance period or final
acceptance of the contract work, whichever is the later. The Contractor shall replace, at its
expense, all plant material found to be dead, missing, or in poor condition during the
maintenance period within 5 days of discovery of such plant material. The Engineer shall be the
sole judge as to the condition of the plant material. Plant material found to be dead or in poor
condition within the guarantee period shall be replaced by the Contractor, at its expense, within
Revised 8/10/04 Contract No. 38561-A Page 103 of 109
15 days of written notification. Replacements shall be made to the same specifications required
for the original plantings.
The Contractor shall submit written vegetation, planting and irrigation guarantee in approved
form that all work showing defects in materials or workmanship will be repaired or replaced at
no cost to the Engineer for a period of one year from the date of acceptance by the Engineer.
The Guarantee form shall be retyped on the Contractor's letterhead and contain the following
verbiage:
308-8
"Guarantee For Vegetation, Planting and Irrigation System For (Project Name)
We hereby guarantee that the vegetation, planting and irrigation system we have
furnished and installed for (project name) is free from defects in materials and workmanship,
and the work has been completed in accordance with the drawings and specifications. We
agree to repair or replace any defect in vegetation, material or workmanship, including that
due to ordinary wear and tear, which may develop during the periods specified in section 308-
7 of the Standard Specifications and the Special Provisions of said project from date of
completion of the Work or termination of any maintenance period, whichever is the later, and
also to repair or replace any damage resulting from the repairing or replacing of such defects
at no additional cost to the Agency.
This guarantee does not exfend to unusual abuse or neglect that may occur subsequent to
the date of completion of the Work or termination of any maintenance period, whichever is the
later. We shall make such repairs or replacements within a reasonable time, as defermined
by the Engineer, affer receipt of written notice. In the event of failure to make such repairs or
replacements within a reasonable time affer receipt of writfen notice from the Engineer, we
authorize the Engineer to proceed to have said repairs or replacements made at our ex-
pense, and we will pay the costs and charges therefore upon demand.
Project: (Project Name)
Location: (Legal Description of Projecf P ropetfy)
Name of Contractor:
Address: (Of Contractor)
Telephone: : (Of Contractor)
the Contractor in legal matters)
Title: (Of said officer(s))
Signature@)
By: (Typed or printed names of signing Officer(s) of the Contractor authorized to bind
Date of Execution:"
Add the following section:
308-7.1 Record Drawings. In addition to the requirements of section 2-5.4, herein, the
Contractor shall prepare record drawings that show all changes in the work constituting
departures from the original contract drawings, including those involving both constant-pressure
and intermittent-pressure lines and appurtenances. The Contractor shall accurately record, on a
daily basis, on one set of blue line prints of the irrigation drawings, all changes in work constituting
departures from the original contract drawings, including changes in both pressure and
nonpressure line. The Contractor shall post information on record drawings no later than the next
working day after the work is installed. The Contractor shall record changes and dimensions in a
legible and professional manner. When the drawings are approved by the Engineer the Contractor
shall transfer all information to a set of reproducible photo mylar drawings. Items required to be
shown shall be dimensioned by the Contractor from two permanent points of reference (buildings,
Revised 8/10/04 Contract No. 38561 -A Page 104 of 109
monuments, sidewalks, curbs, pavement). The accuracy of location of all items to be shown on the
drawings shall be 150 mm (6") in both the vertical and horizontal planes. All text and numerals
placed on drawings shall be 0.30 mm (I/<) in size. Facilities and items to be located in their
horizontal and vertical positions and shown on the record drawings include all:
Point@) of connection, for water and electrical services
Routing of irrigation pressure mainlines
Backflow preventors
Ball, gate and check valves
Irrigation control valves.
Quick coupler valves
Routing of service wires
Routing of control wires
Electrical service equipment
Electrical junction boxes
Irrigation controllers
Sleeves for future connections
Other equipment of a similar nature (as directed by the Engineer).
The Contractor shall keep the blue print drawings available for the Engineer's inspection at any time.
The Contractor shall make all changes to reproducible drawings in waterproof black ink (no ball point
pen). Changes in dimensions shall be recorded in a legible and professional manner. Record
construction drawings shall be maintained at the job site during construction. The Contractor shall
provide one set of mylar "record" drawings to the Engineer after submitting blue-line prints of the
proposed "record" drawings for, and obtaining their approval by, the Engineer.
Add the following section:
308-7.2 Controller Chart. The Contractor shall prepare record drawings which shall be submitted to
the Engineer for approval by the Engineer before charts are prepared. The Contractor shall provide
one controller chart of the maximum size the controller doonvill allow, for each controller supplied,
showing the area covered by that automatic controller. The chart shall be a reduction of the actual
record system drawing with a legend to explain all symbols. If the controller sequence is not legible
when the drawing is reduced, The Contractor shall enlarge it to a size that will be readable when
reduced. The Contractor shall photocopy the chart, with a pastel transparent color used to show area
of coverage for each station. When completed and approved, the Contractor shall hermetically seal
the chart between two pieces of plastic, each piece being a minimum 20 mils thick. The Contractor
shall complete the charts and obtain the Engineers approval prior to final inspection of the irrigation
system.
-
Add the following section:
308-7.3 Operation and Maintenance Manuals. The Contractor shall prepare and deliver to
the Engineer, within 10 calendar days prior to completion of construction, all required and
necessary descriptive material in complete detail and sufficient quantity, properly prepared in
four individual bound copies. The descriptive material shall describe the material installed in
sufficient detail to permit qualified operating personnel to understand, operate, and maintain
all equipment. The Contractor shall include spare parts list and related manufacturer informa-
tion for each equipment item installed. Each manual shall include the following:
a) b) Duration of Guarantee period.
c)
d)
e)
Index sheet stating Contractor's address and telephone number.
List of equipment, with names and addresses of manufacturer's local representative.
Complete operating and maintenance instructions on all major equipment.
In addition to the maintenance manuals, the Contractor shall provide the agency mainte-
nance personnel with instructions for major equipment, and show written evidence to the
Engineer at the conclusion of the work that this service has been rendered.
Revised 8/10/04 Contract No. 38561-A Page 105 of 109
Add the following section:
308-7.4 Check List. The Contractor shall complete and forward signed and dated checklist to
the Engineer before final acceptance of project.
the following checklist at the end of the project, using the format shown:
a) b) Materials approval
c)
d)
e) 9
g)
h)
i)
j)
Plumbing permits (if none required, so note)
Pressure mainline test (by whom, and date)
Record drawings completed (received by, and date)
Controller chart completed (received by, and date)
Materials furnished (received by, and date)
Operation and maintenance manuals furnished (received by, and date)
System and equipment operation instructions (received by, and date)
Manufacturer warranties (received by, and date)
Written guarantee by Contractor (received by, and date)
308-8 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT. add the following: The lump-sum or unit prices
set forth in the contract documents shall include, but not be limited to, full compensation for
furnishing all labor, materials, tools, and equipment and performing all work necessary to
complete, maintain, and guarantee the planting and irrigation work described or specified in
the contract documents, including soils testing and recommended soil amendments, seed
and hydroseed slurry, tree stakes, bark mulch, erosion control matting, plant materials,
temporary irrigation and permanent irrigation, including reduced-pressure back-flow pre-
venter, ball valves, drip valve assembly, electric control valves, quick couplers, control wires,
pull boxes, valve boxes, all piping and sleeves, electrical conduits, irrigation heads, drip
emitters, bubblers, drip irrigation equipment, connection from electrical service to irrigation
electrical meter, connection from meter to irrigation controller(s), installation of controller
enclosure, concrete pads, preparation, correction, reproduction and lamination of "as-built"
drawings, controller charts, assembly and submittal of the check list and operation and
maintenance manuals and all appurtenances to the aforementioned items, as well as
120 days' maintenance and project guarantees. After completion of the project, the Engineer
will retain $12,000 of the total contract amount, and will subsequently disburse the $12,000 to
the Contractor on a monthly basis of $3,000 per month. The Engineer reserves the right to
stop payment until all punch list submitted to the Contractor every month are completed.
SECTION 310 - PAINTING
310-5 PAINTING VARIOUS SURFACES.
3106.6 Painting Traffic Striping, Pavement Markings and Curb Markings. Modify the
fifth paragraph as follows: The Contractor shall furnish all equipment, materials, labor, and
supervision necessary for painting traffic lanes, directional arrows, guidelines, curbs, parking
lines, crosswalks, and other designated markings in accordance with the Plans, or for ap-
proved temporary detours essential for safe control of traffic through and around the
construction site. The Contractor shall remove by wet grinding all existing or temporary traffic
markings and lines that may confuse the public. When temporary detour striping or markings
are no longer required, they shall be removed prior to painting the new traffic stripes or
markings.
31 0-5.6.3 Equipment. Delete the ninth paragraph and substitute the following: The Contrac-
tor shall provide a wet grinding machine with sufficient capacity to completely remove all
existing or temporary traffic striping or markings that conflict with the striping plan, or are
contrary to the Traffic Manual, or that may be confusing to the public. The surface produced
by grinding the existing or temporary traffic striping or markings on pavement shall not exceed
Revised 8/10/04 Contract No. 38561-A Page 106 of 109
variations from a uniform plane more than 3 mm ('/<) in 3 m (IO') when measured parallel to
the centerline of the street or more than 6 mm (I/;) in 3 m (IO') when measured perpendicu-
lar to the centerline of the street. The use of any equipment that leaves ridges, indentations or
other objectionable marks in the pavement shall be discontinued, and equipment capable of
providing acceptable surface shall be furnished by the Contractor. This equipment shall meet
all requirements of the air pollution control district having jurisdiction.
310-5.6.6 Preparation of Existing Surfaces. Modify the first paragraph as follows: The
Contractor shall remove all existing markings and striping, either permanent or temporary,
which are to be abandoned, obliterated or that conflict with the plans by wet grinding meth-
ods. Removal of striping by high velocity water jet may be permitted when there is neither
potential of the water and detritus from the high velocity water jetting to damage vehicles or
private property nor to flow from the street into any storm drain or water course and when
approved by the Engineer. The Contractor shall vacuum all water and detritus resulting from
high velocity water jet striping removal from the pavement immediately after the water jetting
and shall not allow such materials to flow in the gutter, enter the storm drain system or to
leave the pavement surface. Surface variation limitations for high velocity water jet striping
removal shall be the same as for grinding. The Contractor shall not use dry or wet sandblast-
ing in any areas. Alternate methods of paint removal require prior approval of the Engineer.
Obliteration of traffic striping with black paint, light emulsion oil or any other masking method
other than a minimum 30mm (0.1 0') thick asphalt concrete overlay is not permitted.
31 0-5.6.7 Layout, Alignment, and Spotting. Modify the first paragraph as follows: The Contractor
shall establish the necessary control points for all required pavement striping and markings by
surveying methods. No layout of traffic striping shall be performed by the Contractor before
establishment of the necessary control points. The Contractor shall establish all traffic striping
between these points by string line or other method to provide striping that will vary less than 80mm
per IOOm (112 inch in 50 feet) from the specified alignment. The Contractor shall obliterate, straight
stripes deviating more than 80mm per IOOmm (I/ 2 inch in 50 feet) by wet grinding, and then
correcting the markings. The Contractor shall lay out (cat track) immediately behind installation of
surface course asphalt and as the work progresses.
-
310-5.6.8 Application of Paint. Modify the second paragraph as follows: The Contractor shall apply
the first coat of paint immediately upon approval of striping layout by the Engineer. The Contractor
shall paint the ends of each median nose yellow.
Add the following to the eighth paragraph: The Contractor shall apply temporary traffic stripes in
one coat. Temporary traffic stripes shall be maintained by the Contractor so that the stripes are
clearly visible both day and night.
310-5.6.10 Measurement and Payment. Modify the first paragraph as follows: Final and
temporary traffic striping, curb markings and pavement markings as shown on the plans and required
by the specifications shall be included in the lump-sum price bid for temporary and final traffic
striping, and no additional compensation will be allowed therefor. Reapplication of temporary stripes
and markings shall be repainted at the Contractor's expense, and no additional compensation will be
allowed therefor. The lump sum prices bid and shall include all labor, tools, equipment, materials,
and incidentals for doing all work in installing the final and temporary traffic striping.
Add the following section:
31 0-5.6.1 1 Preformed Thermoplastic Pavement Markings.
For asphalt concrete pavement the Contractor shall be apply preformed thermoplastic pavement
markings using the propane torch method recornmended by the manufacturer. The preformed
thermoplastic pavement markings shall not be applied at ambient and road temperatures below 0" C
(32" F). The Contractor shall clean, dry and remove all debris from the pavement before applying
preformed thermoplastic pavement markings. portland cement concrete pavement the Contractor
-
Revised 8/10/04 Contract No. 38561 -A Page 107 of 109
shall use the same application procedure as described for asphalt concrete pavement. However, at
the Contractor's option a compatible primer sealer may be applied before application to assure
proper adhesion.
Add the following Section:
310-7 PERMANENT SIGNING
Add the following Section:
310-7.1 General. Add the following section: The Contractor shall provide and install all permanent
traffic control signs at locations shown on plans and as specified herein.
Add the following section:
31 0-7.2 Measurement And Payment. Permanent signing and appurtenances thereto shown on the
plans or required in the specifications are a part of the lump-sum item for permanent signing and
payment therefor shall include full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment,
and incidentals and for doing all the work involved in supplying and installing permanent signing and
appurtenances, complete in place, as shown on the plans, as specified in the Standard Specification
and these special provisions, and as directed by the Engineer.
SECTION 312 - PAVEMENT MARKER PLACEMENT AND REMOVAL
312-1 PLACEMENT. Add the following to the third paragraph:
4) When being installed on asphalt concrete pavement sooner than 14 days after placement of the
asphalt concrete pavement course on which the pavement markers are to be placed.
Section 313 - Temporary Traffic Control Devices
Add the following section:
313-1 TEMPORARY TRAFFIC PAVEMENT MARKERS.
Add the following section:
313-1 .I General. The Contractor shall supply and install temporary traffic pavement markers,
channelizers, signing, railing (type K), crash cushions and appurtenances at the locations shown on
the plans and as required in the specifications, complete in place prior to opening the traveled way
served by said final and temporary traffic pavement markers, signing, railing (type K) and
appurtenances to public traffic.
313-1.2 Temporary Pavement Markers. Temporary reflective raised pavement markers shall be
placed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Temporary reflective raised pavement
markers shall be cemented to the surfacing with the adhesive recommended by the manufacturer,
except epoxy adhesive shall not be used to place temporary reflective raised pavement markers in
areas where removal of the markers will be required. Pavement striping, legends and markers which
conflict with any traffic pattern shall be removed by grinding as determined by the Engineer. The
Contractor shall use temporary reflective raised pavement markers for temporary pavement marking,
except when the temporary pavement markers are used to replace patterns of temporary traffic stripe
that will be in place for less than 30 days. Reflective pavement markers used. in place of the
removable-type pavement markers shall conform to the section 31 2 "Pavement Marker Placement
and Removal", except the 14-day waiting period before placing the pavement markers on new
asphalt concrete surfacing as specified in section 312-1 "Placement", shall not apply; and epoxy
adhesive shall not be used to place pavement markers in areas where removal of the markers will be
required.
Revised 8/10/04 Contract No. 38561-A Page 108 of 109
- Add the following section:
313-2 TEMPORARY TRAFFIC SIGNING.
Add the following section:
31 3-2.1 General. The Contractor shall provide and install all temporary traffic control signs, markers,
markings, and delineators at locations shown on plans and specified herein.
Add the following section:
313-2.2 Maintenance of Temporary Traffic Signs. If temporary traffic signs are displaced or
overturned, from any cause, during the progress of the work, the Contractor shall immediately
replace the signs in their original approved locations. The Contractor shall maintain all temporary
traffic signs used in the Work in a clean, reflective and readable condition. The Contractor shall
replace or restore graffiti marked temporary traffic signs and posts used in the Work within 18 hours
of such marking being discovered during non-working hours or, when the marking is discovered
during working hours, within 2 hours of such discovery of marking.
Add the following section:
313-4 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT. Temporary traffic pavement markers, temporary
channelizers, temporary signing, and temporary appurtenances thereto shown on the plans or
required in the specifications are a part of the lump-sum item for traffic control and payment therefor
shall include full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals
and for doing all the work involved in applying, installing, maintaining, and removing temporary traffic
pavement markers, channelizers, signing, railing (type K), crash cushions and appurtenances,
complete in place, as shown on the plans, as specified in the Standard Specification and these
special provisions, and as directed by the Engineer. Payment for temporary crash cushions, concrete
barriers and the signs and reflectors marking them shall include the installation, grading for
installation, grading for the approach path, maintenance, painting and re-painting, replacement of
damaged units and removal and shall also be included in the lump-sum price bid for traffic control.
Payment for relocation of K-rails and crash cushions when not shown on the plans and requested by
the Engineer shall be made per section 3-3, Extra Work, SSPWC.
Revised 8/10/04 Contract No. 38561-A Page 109 of 109
PART 4
CSI
FORMATTED
SPECS
1.
1.1.
1.2.
1.3.
1.4.
SECTION 01450
TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
SECTION INCLUDES
1.1.1. Selection and payment.
1 .I .2. Contractor submittals.
1 .I .3. Laboratory responsibilities.
I .I .4. Laboratory reports.
1 .I .5. Limits on testing laboratory authority.
1 .I .6. Contractor responsibilities.
1 .I .7. Schedule of inspections and tests.
RELATED DOCUMENTS OR SECTIONS
1.2.1. Document - General Conditions: Inspections, testing, and approvals required by public
authorities.
1.2.2. Section 01 330 - Submittals.
1.2.3. Section 01 770 - Contract Closeout.
1.2.4. Individual Specification Sections: Inspections and tests required, and standards for
testing.
REFERENCES
1.3.1. Uniform Building Code, current edition.
1.3.2. ASTM D 3740 - Practice for Evaluation of Agencies in Testing and/or Inspection of Soil
and Rock as Used in Engineering Design and Construction.
1.3.3. ASTM E 329 - Recommended Practice for Inspection and Testing Agencies for
Concrete, Steel, and Bituminous Materials as Used in Construction.
SELECTION AND PAYMENT
1.4.1. Owner will employ and pay for services of an independent testing laboratory to perform
inspection and testing as specified in this Section.
1.4.1.1. Unless specified as the Owners responsibility, all other testing, mix design
preparation and related quality control and certification requirements shall be
paid by the Contractor at no additional cost to Owner.
Larwin Park
City Of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
1.4.1.2. All concrete mix designs shall be prepared at Contractors cost and in
compliance with Section 0331 0.
TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES
01450 - 1
1.4.1.3. All grout and mortar mix designs shall be prepared at Contractors cost and
in compliance with Section 04065.
1.4.1.4. All asphalt concrete mix designs shall be prepared at Contractors cost and in
compliance with Section 02741.
1.4.2. Only local legally constituted public authorities having jurisdiction over the Work, and the
Owner or their designated representative shall be authorized to direct testing and
inspection to determine compliance or non-compliance to the requirements of the Work.
1.4.3. The Contractor shall reimburse the Owner, through Contract adjustment, for inspection
and testing costs caused by the following Contractor actions:
1.4.3.1.
1.4.3.2.
I .4.3.3.
1.4.3.4.
1.4.3.5.
1.4.3.6.
1.4.3.7.
1.4.3.8.
1.4.3.9.
All testing costs incurred after initial test established non-conformance with
con tract requirements.
Inspection costs caused by Contractors scheduling of work requiring
inspections of less than 4 hours duration.
Inspection costs caused by Contractors failure to complete work requiring
inspection within the scheduled duration period shown on Contractors initial
construction schedule.
Inspection costs caused by Contractors failure to order sufficient or required
quantity of material.
Inspection costs of items repaired following damage caused by Contractor
Inspection costs caused by Contractors substitution of material, system or
process, where such inspection and testing is required by the Architect,
Owner or jurisdictional authority to demonstrate compliance with specified
criteria.
Inspection costs caused by Contractors use of batch plant that does not
comply with criteria waiving batch plant inspection.
Inspection costs caused by Contractors use of a supplier or subcontractor
requiring inspection services to be performed at a location exceeding a 100
mile radius of project site.
Inspection costs caused by Contractors failure to complete work within
normal hours and days, requiring overtime costs.
I .5. QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.5.1. Laboratory: Authorized to operate in State in which Project is located, and currently
approved by Building Department.
1.5.2. Laboratory Staff: Maintain a full time registered Engineer on staff to review services
1.5.3. Testing Equipment: Calibrated at reasonable intervals with devices of an accuracy
traceable to either National Bureau of Standards (NBS) Standards or accepted values of
natural physical constants.
1.5.4. Welding Inspectors shall be certified in accordance with AWS QCI Standard for Certified
Welding inspectors (CWI).
Larwin Park
City Of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES
01450 - 2
1.6. LABORATORY RESPONSIBILITIES
1.6.1. Perform specified inspection, sampling, and testing of Products in accordance with
specified standards.
Ascertain compliance of materials and mixes with requirements of Contract Documents.
Promptly notify Architect of observed irregularities or non - conformance of Work or
Products.
Perform special inspections for areas of work as shown on drawings and specified in
respective sections of the specifications in compliance with Uniform Building Code.
Perform additional inspections and tests required by Architect.
1.6.2.
I .6.3.
I .6.4.
1.6.5.
1.7. LABORATORY REPORTS
1.7.1. After each inspection and test, promptly submit copies of laboratory report to Architect,
Structural Engineer, Contractor, Owner, Construction Manager, Building Department,
and other parties as required by referenced sections and applicable regulations.
I .7.2.
.-
I-
Include:
1.7.2.1.
1.7.2.2.
1.7.2.3.
1.7.2.4.
I .7.2.5.
1.7.2.6.
I .7.2.7.
1.7.2.8.
1.7.2.9.
1.7.2.10.
1.7.2.1 1.
1.7.2.12.
Date issued.
Project title, NTD project number and Building Department Application
Number.
Name of inspector.
Date and time of sampling or inspection.
Method of obtaining sample.
Identification of product and Specifications section.
Location in the Project.
Type of inspection or test.
Date of test.
Results of tests.
Conformance with Contract Documents.
Indicate samples taken but not tested.
1.7.3.
LIMITS ON TESTING LABORATORY AUTHORITY
1.8.1.
When requested by Architect, provide interpretation of test results.
1.8.
Laboratory may not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on requirements of Contract
Documents.
Laboratory may not approve or accept any portion of the Work. 1.8.2.
Larwin Park
City Of Carlsbad TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES
01450 - 3 NTD # 2002-0037
1.8.3. Laboratory may not assume any duties of Contractor.
1.8.4. Laboratory has no authority to stop the Work.
1.9. CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES
1.9.1. Deliver or make available to laboratory at designated location, adequate samples of
materials proposed to be used which require testing, along with proposed mix designs.
1.9.2. Do not incorporate material or products requiring compliance with specified testing and
inspection criteria without receiving documentation of compliance from approved agency.
I .9.3. Cooperate with laboratory personnel, and provide access to the Work and to
manufacturer’s facilities.
1.9.4. Provide incidental labor and facilities to provide access to Work to be tested, to assist
testing laboratory in obtaining and handling samples, to obtain and handle samples at the
site or at source of Products to be tested, to facilitate tests and inspections, storage and
curing of test samples.
1.9.4.1. Upon completion of inspection, testing, sample taking and similar services,
repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes.
1.9.4.2. Comply with requirements of Section 01770 and Section 01350.
1.9.4.3. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities, and
protect repaired construction.
1.9.4.4. Repair and protection is Contractor’s responsibility, regardless of the
assignment of responsibility for inspection, testing, or similar services.
1.9.5. Contractor shall prepare integrated schedule for the course of construction showing all
required inspection and testing. Determine the time required for the laboratory to
perform testing and to issue reports and findings. Provide all required testing and
inspection time within the construction schedule.
1.9.5.1. Notify Construction Manager, Architect, Owners representative and laboratory minimum two working days prior to expected time for operations
requiring inspection and testing services.
1.9.5.2. Coordinate the sequence of activities to accommodate required services
with a minimum of delay. Coordinate activities to avoid the necessity of
removing and replacing construction to accommodate inspections and tests.
1.9.6. Notify the Construction Manager a sufficient time in advance of the manufacture or
material to be supplied by Owner under the Contract Documents, which must by terms of
the Contract be tested, in order that the Owner may arrange for testing at the source of
supply.
1.10. SCHEDULE OF INSPECTIONS AND TESTS BY OWNERS TESTING AGENCY
1.1 0.1. Site Excavation, Fills and Foundation Preparation (Uniform Building Code)
1.10.1.1. All earthwork, including earth fill compaction - 1801, 1802, Chapter 33,
Appendix Chapter 33.
Larwin Park
City Of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES
01450 - 4
L
,.-
1.10.1.2. Inspection of Excavationlfill Installation - 1801, 1802, Chapter 33, Appendix
Chapter 33.
1.10.2. Concrete (Uniform Building Code)
I .10.2.1. Materials
1.10.2.1 .I.
1.10.2.1.2. Concrete Aggregates - 1903.3
1.10.2.1.3. Reinforcing Bars - 1903.5
1.10.2.1.4. Admixtures - 1903.6
Portland Cement Tests - 1903.2
1.10.2.2. Concrete Quality
1.10.2.2.1. Proportions of Concrete - 1904; 1905.1; 1905.2; 1905.3;
1906.4; and 1905.5.
Strength Tests for Concrete - 1905.6 1.10.2.2.2.
1.10.2.3. Concrete Inspection
1.10.2.3.1.
1.10.2.3.2.
Job Site Inspection - 1905.7
Reinforcing Bar Welding - 1903.5
1.10.3. Masonry (Uniform Building Code)
I .10.3.1.
I .10.3.2.
1 .I 0.3.3.
Larwin Park
City Of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
Materials
1.10.3.1.1.
1.10.3.1.2.
1.10.3.1.3.
1.10.3.1.4.
1.10.3.1.5.
Masonry Quality
1 .I 0.3.2.1.
1.10.3.2.2.
1.10.3.2.3.
1.10.3.2.4.
1.10.3.2.5.
1.10.3.2.6.
Masonry Inspection
Masonry Units - 2102.2, Item 4, 5, and 6.
Portland Cement - 2102.2, Item 2; and 2102.2, Item 3
Mortar & Grout Aggregates - 21 02.2, Item 1.
Reinforcing Bars - 1903.5; and 21 02.2, Item 10
Mortar and Grout - 2102.2, Items 8 and 9; and 2103.
Portland Cement Tests - 1903.2
Mortar and Grout Tests - 2105.3.4
Masonry Core Tests - 2105.3.2; 2105.3.3; and 2105.3.5
Masonry Prism Tests - 2105A.3.2; 2105A.3.3; 2105A.3.5
Masonry Unit Tests - 2105.3.4
Reinforcing Bar Tests - 1903.5
TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES
01450 - 5
2.
3.
1.10.3.3.1.
1.10.3.3.2.
Reinforced Masonry - 1701.5, Item 7
Reinforcing Bar Welding Inspection - 1701.5, Item 5.
1.10.4. Structural Steel (Uniform Building Code)
1.10.4.1. Materials
1.10.4.1.1.
1.10.4.1.2. Material Identification - 2203
Structural Steel, Cold Formed Steel - 2202.1
1.10.4.2. Inspection of Structural Steel
1.10.4.2.1. Tests of Structural and Cold Formed Steel - 2202.1; 2205;
Chapter 22 Divisions II, Ill, VI, and VI1
1.10.4.2.2. Tests of High Strength Bolts, Nuts, Washers - 2205;
Chapter 22, Divisions II and Ill
Shop Fabrication Inspection - 1701.5, Item 5 1.10.4.2.3.
1.10.4.2.4.
1.10.4.2.5.
High Strength Bolt Inspection - 1701.5, Item 6
Welding Inspection - 1701.5, Item 5
1.10.5. Wood (Uniform Building Code)
1 .10.5.1. Materials
1 A0.5.1 .l. Lumber and Plywood Grading - 2304
1.10.6. Miscellaneous Fasteners
1.10.6.1. Anchorage test methods as shown on drawings and specified in respective
sections.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
\\ Not Used
PART 3 - EXECUTION
\\ Not Used
Lawin Park
City Of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
END OF SECTION
TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES
01450 - 6
SECTION 021 15
TREE PROTECTION AND TRIMMING
1.3.
1.4.
2.
2.1.
1.
1.1.
1.2.
PART 1 - GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
1.4.1. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUM MARY
1.2.1. This Section includes the protection and trimming of trees that interfere with, or are af-
fected by, execution of the Work, whether temporary or new construction.
1.2.2. Related Sections include the following:
1.2.2.1 Division 1 Section "Summary of Work" for limits placed on Contractor's use
of the site.
1.2.2.2. Division 2 Section "Site Clearing" for removal limits of trees, shrubs, and
other plantings affected by new construction.
1.2.2.3. Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for building and utility trench excavation,
backfilling, compacting and grading requirements, and soil materials.
1.2.2.4. Division 2 Section "Landscaping" for tree and shrub planting and transplant-
ing, tree support systems, and soil materials.
SUBM IlTALS
1.3.1. Certification: From a qualified arborist that trees indicated to remain have been pro-
tected during construction according to recognized standards and that trees were
promptly and properly treated and repaired when damaged.
1.3.2. Imported Topsoil: Submit agricultural suitability soil test from an accredited soils testing
laboratory.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.4.1. Arborist Qualifications: An arborist certified by the international Society of Arboriculture
or licensed in the jurisdiction where Project is located.
1.4.2. Tree Pruning Standards: Comply with ANSI A300, "Trees, Shrubs, and Other Woody
Plant Maintenance--Standard Practices," unless more stringent requirements are indi-
cated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
MATERIALS
2.1 .I. Drainage Fill: Selected crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed gravel, washed,
ASTM D 448, Size 24, with 90 to 100 percent passing a 2-1/2-inch sieve and not more
than 10 percent passing a 3/4-inch sieve.
Lawin Community Park
TREE PROTECTION AND TRIMMING
02115-1
2.1.2. Topsoil: Fertile, friable, surface soil, containing natural loam and complying with
ASTM D 5268. Provide topsoil that is free of stones larger than 1 inch in any dimension
and free of other extraneous or toxic matter harmful to plant growth. Obtain topsoil only
from well-drained sites where soil occurs in depth of 4 inches or more; do not obtain
from bogs or marshes.
2.1.3. Filter Fabric: Manufacturer's standard, nonwoven, pervious, geotextile fabric of polypro-
pylene, nylon, or polyester fibers.
2.1.4. Chain Link Fence: Metallic-coated steel chain link fence fabric, 0.1 20-inch- diameter
wire size; 48 inches high, minimum; line posts, 1.9 inches in diameter; terminal and cor-
ner posts, 2-3/8 inches in diameter; top rail, 1-5/8 inches in diameter; bottom tension
wire, 0.177 inch in diameter; with tie wires, hog ring ties, and other accessories for a
complete fence system.
3. PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1. PREPARATION
3.1 .I. Temporary Fencing: Install temporary fencing located as indicated or outside the drip
line of trees to protect remaining vegetation from construction damage.
3.1.1 .I. Install chain link fence according to ASTM F 567 and manufacturer's written
instructions.
3.1.2. Protect tree root systems from damage due to noxious materials caused by runoff or
spillage while mixing, placing, or storing construction materials. Protect root systems
from flooding, eroding, or excessive wetting caused by dewatering operations.
3.1.3. Do not store construction materials, debris, or excavated material within the drip line of
remaining trees. Do not permit vehicles or foot traffic within the drip line; prevent soil
compaction over root systems.
3.1.4. Do not allow fires under or adjacent to remaining trees or other plants.
3.2. EXCAVATION
3.2.1. Install shoring or other protective support systems to minimize sloping or benching of
excavations.
3.2.2. Do not excavate within drip line of trees, unless otherwise indicated.
3.2.3. Where excavation for new construction is required within drip line of trees, hand clear
and excavate to minimize damage to root systems. Use narrow-tine spading forks and
comb soil to expose roots.
3.2.3.1. Relocate roots in backfill areas where possible. If encountering large, main
lateral roots, expose roots beyond excavation limits as required to bend and
relocate them without breaking. If encountered immediately adjacent to lo-
cation of new construction and relocation is not practical, cut roots approxi-
mately 3 inches back from new construction.
3.2.3.2. Do not allow exposed roots to dry out before placing permanent backfill.
Provide temporary earth cover or pack with peat moss and wrap with burlap.
Water and maintain in a moist condition. Temporarily support and protect
roots from damage until they are permanently relocated and covered with
soil.
Larwin Community Park
TREE PROTECTION AND TRIMMING
02115-2
3.3.
3.4.
3.2.4. Where utility trenches are required within drip line of trees, tunnel under or around roots
by drilling, auger boring, pipe jacking, or digging by hand.
3.2.4.1. Root Pruning: Do not cut main lateral roots or taproots; cut only smaller
roots that interfere with installation of utilities. Cut roots with sharp pruning
instruments; do not break or chop.
REGRADING
3.3.1. Grade Lowering: Where new finish grade is indicated below existing grade around
trees, slope grade away from trees as recommended by qualified arborist, unless other-
wise indicated.
3.3.1.1. Root Pruning: Prune tree roots exposed during grade lowering. Do not cut
main lateral roots or taproots; cut only smaller roots. Cut roots with sharp
pruning instruments; do not break or chop.
3.3.2. Minor Fill: Where existing grade is 6 inches or less below elevation of finish grade, fill
with topsoil. Place topsoil in a single uncompacted layer and hand grade to required fin-
ish elevations.
3.3.3. Moderate Fill: Where existing grade is more than 6 inches, but less than 12 inches, be-
low elevation of finish grade, place drainage fill, filter fabric, and topsoil on existing grade
as follows:
3.3.3.1. Carefully place drainage fill against tree trunk approximately 2 inches above
elevation of finish grade and extend not less than 18 inches from tree trunk
on all sides. For balance of area within drip-line perimeter, place drainage
fill up to 6 inches below elevation of grade.
3.3.3.2. Place filter fabric with edges overlapping 6 inches minimum.
3.3.3.3. Place fill layer of topsoil to finish grade. Do not compact drainage fill or top-
soil. Hand grade to required finish elevations.
TREE PRUNING
3.4.1. Prune remaining trees affected by temporary and new construction.
3.4.2. Prune remaining trees to compensate for root loss caused by damaging or cutting root
system. Provide subsequent maintenance during Contract period as recommended by
qualified arborist.
3.4.3. Pruning Standards: Prune trees according to ANSI A300 as follows:
3.4.3.1.
3.4.3.2.
3.4.3.3.
3.4.3.4.
3.4.3.5.
3.4.3.6.
Type of Pruning: Crown cleaning.
Type of Pruning: Crown thinning.
Type of Pruning: Crown raising.
Type of Pruning: Crown reduction.
Type of Pruning: Vista pruning.
Type of Pruning: Crown restoration.
Larwin Community Park TREE PROTECTION AND TRIMMING
02115-3
3.4.4. Cut branches with sharp pruning instruments; do not break or chop.
3.4.5. Chip branches removed from trees. Spread chips where indicated or as directed by Ar-
chi tect .
3.5. TREE REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT
3.5.1. Promptly repair trees damaged by construction operations within 24 hours. Treat dam-
aged trunks, limbs, and roots according to written instructions of the qualified arborist.
3.5.2. Remove and replace dead and damaged trees that the qualified arborist determines to
be incapable of restoring to a normal growth pattern.
3.5.2.1. Provide new trees of 6-inch caliper size and of a species selected by Archi-
tect when trees more than 6 inches in caliper size, measured 12 inches
above grade, are required to be replaced.
3.5.3. Aerate surface soil, compacted during construction, 10 feet beyond drip line and no
closer than 36 inches to tree trunk. Drill 2-inch- diameter holes a minimum of 12 inches
deep at 24 inches O.C. Backfill holes with an equal mix of augered soil and approved
compost humus material.
3.6. DISPOSAL OF WASTE MATERIALS
3.6.1. Burning is not permitted.
END OF SECTION
Larwin Community Park
TREE PROTECTION AND TRIMMING 02115-4
1.
1.1.
I .2.
1.3.
1.4.
1.5.
SECTION 02235
SITE CLEARING AND DEMOLITION
PART 1 - GENERAL
SECTION INCLUDES
1.1.1. Remove planting materials within areas of work, including curbs, fencing, trees and
shrubs, roots and footings of fencing if present.
1 .I .2. Remove existing site improvements, including asphalt paving, walkways, utility and
irrigation system components, and related items.
1 .I .3. Protection of existing trees as shown on drawings and designated to remain in planted
areas.
RELATED WORK
1.2.1. Section 0231 1 - Grading and Excavation.
1.2.2. Section 0231 5 - Filling and Backfilling.
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
1.3.1. Conform to applicable jurisdictional authority regulations and codes for disposal of
debris.
1.3.2. Coordinate clearing Work with utility companies.
1.3.3. Maintain emergency access ways at all times.
1.3.4. Contractor shall comply with all applicable laws and ordinances regarding hazardous
materials, including contaminated soils, hazardous material transformers, and similar
materials or components.
REFERENCES
1.4.1. Geotechnical Reports:
1.4.1 .I. Per Document 00220.
1.4.2. Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction (SSPWC) ("Green Book"), latest
edition as adopted by jurisdictional authority, including all amendments.
EXISTING CONDITIONS
1.5.1. Conduct demolition to minimize interference with adjacent residential property. Maintain
protected egress and access at all times.
1.5.2. Provide, erect, and maintain temporary barriers and security devices as necessary to
provide safe pathways, maintaining continuous separation of construction activity from
occupied areas.
Larwin Community Park
SITE CLEARING, DEMOLITION AND RENOVATION
02235 - 1
1.6. COMPENSATION FOR DAMAGED PLANTING
1.6.1. The Owner shall be compensated per requirements specified in the schedule below for
all trees damaged or destroyed. Compensation shall be deducted from Contractor's
progress payments.
1.6.2. Injury is defined, without limitation, as all bruising, scarring, tearing, or breaking of roots,
branches, or trunk, as defined by Architect.
1.6.3. It is and will be impracticable and difficult to determine the actual damage, whether
physical or aesthetic for existing planting materials. Therefore, the Owner has assigned
a total value to a tree or shrub based on its diameter at 30 inches above the ground.
1.6.4. The total value shown shall be paid to the Owner for a tree or shrub totally destroyed.
1.6.5. For injuries to roots or branches the Owner will assign a value proportional to the total
value of the tree or shrub.
1.6.6. Proportional amount of the total value shown shall be paid to the Owner, for each tree or
shrub injured, as follows:
1.6.6.1. Measure the diameter of the tree or shrub at 30 inches above grade level.
Multiply the diameter by 3.14 to get the circumference (or, with a tape
measure, measure distance around the tree or shrub).
1.6.6.2. Divide the total value of the tree or shrub per schedule established below by
its circumference at 30 inches above grade to determine a value per inch of
circumference (value of tree or shrub divided by circumference equals value
per inch).
1.6.6.3. Measure the length of the injury.
1.6.6.4. Multiply the length of the injury by the value per circumferential inch; the
result is the amount of compensation for each injury (length of injury
multiplied by value per inch equals compensation).
1.6.6.5. Example:
1.6.6.5.1. A tree with a diameter of 17 inches at 30 inches above grade is
valued at $20,000.
1.6.6.5.2. Circumference at that point: 17 multiplied by 3.14 equals
53.38 inches.
1.6.6.5.3. Value per inch of 17 inch diameter tree: $20,000 divided by
53.38 inches equals $374.67.
1.6.6.5.4. Injury is 12 inches in length.
1.6.6.5.5. Compensation for injury: 12 multiplied by $374.67 equals
$4,496.04.
1.6.7. Tree Value Schedule
Tree diameter at 30 inches heiaht Total value of tree
up to 314 Inch
Larwin Community Park
$ 100.00
SITE CLEARING, DEMOLITION AND RENOVATION
02235 - 2
7/8 to 1 Inch $ 150.00
1-1/8 to 2 Inches $ 250.00
2-1/8 to 4 Inches $ 600.00
4-1/8 to 6 Inches
6-1/8 to 8 Inches
$ 1,200.00
$ 2,400.00
8-1 /8 to 10 Inches $ 4,800.00
10-1/8 to 12 Inches $ 9,000.00
12-1/8 to 14 Inches $1 5,000.00
14-1/8 to 16 Inches $18,000.00
16-1/8 to 18 Inches $20,000.00
18-1/8 Inches and over $ 1,200.00 per inch diameter
1.6.8. Where trees are damaged, or where limbs are required to be trimmed or removed
because of operations under this contract, the cutting or removal of limbs or branches
shall be performed in accordance with California Association of Certified Arborists
(CACA) tree surgery practices. No damaged trees shall be removed, or pruned
unless approved in advance by the Architect. All branch cuts 2 inches or more in
diameter shall be treated promptly with an approved emulsified asphalt sealant.
1.6.9. Trees or shrubs damaged by the Contractor shall have the scars treated as specified in
this Section or shall be cut and removed to 24 inches below the ground and disposed of,
if approved, and replaced with an equal sized tree or shrub installed at Contractor's
expense. The Architect shall determine whether a damaged tree or shrub is to be
repaired or replaced.
1.6.10. The correct pruning or removal of trees or shrubs in whole or in part, as specified in the
plans, is not subject to the damage provisions under this section.
1.6.1 1. Repair of damaged tree or shrub will not relieve Contractor of payment for damage.
1.7. QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.7.1. Contractor Qualifications
1.7.1 .l. Installing Company: Company specializing in demolition and site clearing
work, with minimum 5 years documented experience in projects of similar
scale and scope.
1.7.1.2. Installing Foreman: Individual specializing in demolition and site clearing
work, with minimum 5 years documented experience in projects of similar
scale and scope.
2. PART 2 - PRODUCTS
- 2.1. PRODUCTS FOR PATCHING AND EXTENDING WORK
2.1 .l. General:
Larwin Community Park
SITE CLEARING, DEMOLITION AND RENOVATION
02235 - 3
2.1.1 .I. Unless noted otherwise, provide products matching existing finish, color,
dimension, and assembly.
2.2.
3.
3.1.
3.2.
2.1.1.2.
2.1 .I .3.
All products shall be new, unless specifically noted otherwise.
Provide lead and asbestos-free materials.
2.1.2. Contractor's Responsibilities:
2.1.2.1. Review all items designated as salvage. Prepare summary report of
condition of each item, establishing general condition and quality, functional
status, inventoried spare parts and supplies, and related description. Obtain
Owners approval of summary report.
Remove designated items as specified below.
Provide all required equipment to load, transport and off-load at location
designated by Owner. Coordinate time and delivery schedule.
2.1 -2.2.
2.1.2.3.
OTHER MATERIALS
2.2.1. Provide all other materials, not specifically described but required for complete and
proper execution or installation of this work
PART 3 - EXECUTION
SURFACE CONDITIONS
3.1 .I. Inspection
3.1 .I .I. Prior to work of this section, carefully inspect previously installed work.
Verify all such work is complete to the point where this installation may
properly commence.
Verify that work of this section may be provided in strict accordance with
pertinent codes and regulations, and all pertinent portions of the referenced
standards.
In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Architect.
Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such
discrepancies have been fully resolved.
3.1.1.2.
3.1 .I .3.
3.1.1.4.
PREPARATION
3.2.1. Verify that existing plant life and features designated to remain are tagged or identified.
3.2.1.1. The Architect will mark the features, trees, and shrubs to remain within the
construction area. Contractor shall not commence clearing and grubbing
operations until authorized by the Owner and all protective measures are in
place.
3.2.1.2. Provide barricades, coverings, or other types of protection necessary to
prevent damage to existing improvements indicated to remain in place.
Provide adequate coverings or barricades to prevent damage. Any
improvements damaged by this work shall be restored to original condition.
Lawin Community Park SITE CLEARING, DEMOLITION AND RENOVATION
02235 - 4
3.2.1.3. Protect all existing trees not designated for removal against unnecessary
cutting, breaking or skinning of roots, skinning and bruising of bark,
smothering of trees by stockpiling building materials, or excavated materials
within drip line, excess foot or vehicular traffic, or parking of vehicles within
drip line. Provide temporary fences, barricades, or guards as required to
protect trees. The natural topsoil around shallow root systems shall also be
maintained.
3.2.2. Protect existing items which are not indicated to be altered.
3.2.2.1. Protect utilities designated to remain from damage.
3.2.2.2. Protect trees, plant growth, and features designated to remain as final
landscaping as shown on drawings.
3.2.2.3. Protect bench marks from damage or displacement.
3.2.3. Utility and Service Termination
3.2.3.1. Locate and identify existing utility, service and irrigation system components
affected by work of this contract. Review existing record drawings, conduct
site investigations, contact Underground Service Alert and other qualified
cablelpipelline locator services, and implement all other means necessary to
define the location of underground systems.
3.2.3.2. Prior to beginning any demolition, properly disconnect all water, gas and
electrical power supply at appropriate disconnect locations. Obtain all
necessary releases and approvals from serving utility companies.
3.2.3.3. Prior to demolition or disconnect, obtain Owners approval that such system
does not impact facilities or systems beyond the extent of this contract.
3.2.3.4. Mark location of disconnected systems. Identify and indicate stub-out
locations on Project Record Documents.
3.2.4. Coordinate the time and duration of all system disconnects with Owner.
3.3. GENERAL SITE DEMOLITION
3.3.1. General Requirements
3.3.1 .I.
3.3.1.2.
3.3.1.3.
3.3.1.4.
3.3.1.5.
Clear areas required for access to site and execution of Work, including
pavements, structures, foundations, vegetation, trash and debris.
Demolish in an orderly and careful manner. Protect existing supporting
members and adjacent finishes.
Coordinate with Owner the time of day and route to remove demolished
materials from premises.
Remove demolished materials from site as work progresses. Upon
completion of work, leave areas of work in clean condition.
Remove all buried debris, rubble, trash, or other material not deemed
suitable by the Geotechnical Engineer.
Larwin Community Park
SITE CLEARING, DEMOLITION AND RENOVATION
02235 - 5
3.3.1.6. Fill all voids or excavations resulting from clearing, demolition, or removal of
vegetation per Section 02315. Compact to 90 percent relative compaction
per ASTM D 1557.
3.3.2. Fixture and Equipment Removal:
3.3.2.1. Remove existing fixtures and equipment as identified and shown on
drawings and required by Architect.
3.3.2.2. Verify all service connections to fixtures and equipment designated for
removal have been properly disconnected.
3.3.2.3. Remove all conductors from conduit at all abandoned circuits.
3.4. UTILITY AND BUILDING SERVICES REMOVAL AND RE-INSTALLATION
3.4.1. Where crossing paths and potential points of interference with existing utility services
are shown or can be reasonably inferred from surface conditions or evidence of
subsurface systems, such as meter boxes, vaults, relief vents, cleanouts and similar
corn ponen ts.
3.4.1 .I. Review all contract documents showing crossing paths and potential points
of interference.
3.4.1.2. Pot-hole or determine by other means the accurate depth and location of
such utilities.
3.4.1.3. Incorporate all costs required to complete work under this contract, including
additional trenching, re-routing of existing and new utilities, and all means
necessary to construct work under this contract.
3.4.1.4. No additional cost to the Owner will be allowed for work necessary to
accommodate utility conflicts where such crossing paths are shown on
contract drawings or can be reasonably inferred from surface conditions or
components.
3.4.2. Remove all conductors from conduit at all. abandoned electrical circuits.
3.4.3. Seal off ends of all piping, drains and other components as directed by Architect and
serving utility.
3.4.4. Where necessary to maintain service to existing utility and building systems, relocate or
redirect all conduit and conductors, piping, drains, and associated system components.
3.4.4.1. Re-circuit all electrical as required.
3.4.4.2. Re-circuit all landscape irrigation valving and control systems as required.
3.4.4.3. Temporarily terminate landscape system components in approved boxes or
with approved caps, suitable for re-connection or extension.
3.4.4.4. Extend or otherwise modify all site drainage systems, including catch
basins, drain inlets and piping. Fine grade to maintain proper drainage flow
pattern to drains.
3.4.5. Fixture and Equipment Removal:
Larwin Community Park SITE CLEARING, DEMOLITION AND RENOVATION
02235 - 6
3.4.5.1. Remove existing fixtures and equipment as identified and shown on
drawings and required by Architect.
3.4.5.2. Verify all service connections to fixtures and equipment designated for
removal have been properly disconnected.
3.4.6. Coordinate with Owner the time of day and route to remove demolished materials from
premises.
3.4.7. Remove demolished materials from site as work progresses. Upon completion of work,
leave areas of work in clean condition.
3.5. SITE PAVEMENT REMOVAL AND REPAIR
3.5.1. Demolish in an orderly and careful manner. Protect existing supporting members and
adjacent finishes .
3.5.2. Remove concrete sidewalk and curb where required for new construction as specified
and as indicated on the Drawings.
3.5.2.1. Remove all paving by saw-cutting.
3.5.2.2. Remove concrete paving and curbing at locations shown on drawings.
Locate closest adjacent expansion or weakened plane joint to define start of
removal or saw-cutting.
3.6. DISPOSAL
3.6.1. Dispose of all demolished material, trash, debris, and other materials not used in the
work in accordance with the regulations of jurisdictional authority.
3.6.2. Remove demolished materials and debris from site on a daily basis.
3.7. DUST CONTROL
3.7.1. Provide for dust control under the provisions of Section 01 500.
3.7.2. Maintain all streets and public ways free of dust and mud as directed by local
jurisdictional authority, including use of wash down and street sweeper equipment.
3.8. AIR AND WATER POLLUTION CONTROL
3.8.1. Take all measures to reduce air and water pollution caused by material or equipment
used during construction.
3.8.2. Do not dispose of any volatile wastes or oils in storm or sanitary sewers. Comply with
Section 01500.
3.8.3. Do not allow waste materials to be washed into streams or storm drains.
END OF SECTION
.-
Lawin Community Park SITE CLEARING, DEMOLITION AND RENOVATION
02235 - 7
TREE BOXING AND TRANSPLANTING --
PART I -GENERAL
1.1 The Contractor shall box and move the tree that have been indicated on the
plans and located in the field. The tree shall be moved to, planted and
maintained at the project site. A California State Contractor‘s License,
Classification (2-27 is required for all work performed. The Contractor shall show
evidence that they have successfully completed three (3) tree boxing projects of
the same scale or larger within the past five (5) years in order to perform the
work. Submit client references with people to contact including telephone
numbers.
PART 2 - PERMITS AND FEE
2.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for procuring and paying for all permits and
fees required by the governing regulatory agencies for the work described in
these specifications. Fees and permits shall be paid for and obtained by the
Contractor far enough in advance of the work so as not to create a delay in the
construction schedule.
PART 3 - MATERIALS -
3.1 Boxing materials shall be:
1. 2” X 12” Douglas Fir for sides and bottom.
2” x 6” Douglas Fir for braces.
2” x 6” Douglas Fir for skidding to brace top of box.
1” x (as needed for box size) Hemlock or Cedar for top pad.
2. 4” x 4” Douglas Fir bottom stringers for moving.
3. Hardware: 16 penny and 10 penny nails, other sizes as needed. Steel
strapping 1-1/4 “ x 1.031. No Redwood or other similar soft wooded
lumber will be allowed in the construction of these tree boxes. Pruning
sterilant shall be Physan 20 or approved equal.
Larwin Park
City of Carlsbad
TREE BOXING AND PLANTING
SECTION 02310
PART 4 - PROCEDURE
4. I
Permits and fees for the closure of roads, redirection of traffic, the alteration of
overhead lines, wide loads, or any other related change in the normal traffic flow
shall be obtained by the Contractor in accordance with Part 2 of these
specifications.
The Owner Representative and the Contractor shall inspect trees that require
pruning prior to boxing before starting the work. A sample tree of each species
to be boxed and moved shall be pruned under the direction of the Landscape
Architect.
The Contractor shall retain as much of the tree head (approximately two-thirds)
as possible without endangering the life of the tree. All trees whose pruning does
not conform to the sample tree shall be disposed of and replaced with a new
specimen tree, in accordance with Part 7.
All pruning cuts over one-half (1/2”) in diameter shall be coated with pruning paint
within eight (8) hours of pruning.
All trees to be boxed shall be dug and boxed in compliance with the best
horticultural practices. The Contractor shall determine box sizes.
The Contractor shall prepare the moisture count of the soil around the trees so
that no soil breaks away from the ball during root trimming. The existing
landscape irrigation system will not be available for use by the Contractor during
work. The Contractor shall be responsible for bringing water to the site so that
normal irrigation occurs in each area in which boxing shall occur.
The Contractor shall spray all trees to be moved prior to digging with “Wilt Proof”
or an approved equal. Application shall be made according to manufacturer‘s
specifications.
Dig and box trees to the full box size. Exposed end of all roots shall be cut clean
and square with pruning loppers or a pruning saw, then painted within eight (8)
hours with tree seal before boxing.
Lawin Park
City of Carlsbad
TREE BOXING AND PLANTING
SECTION 0231 0
.-
The box sides shall be secured firmly around the root-ball with strapping before
placing the bottom boards. The soil shall be placed against the sides of the box
to contain water and to produce a well basin on the top of the root-ball.
Bottom boxing shall be performed in consideration of different soil types. The
technique of “Breaking Over” shall be used in high-density soils such as hardpan,
clay type, or decomposed rock soils. In sandy loam soils the root-ball bottoms
shall be tunneled by hand.
The crane cable shall be secured around the tree box in order to lift the tree out
of the ground. Under no circumstances shall the crane cable or sling be directly
secured or tightened around the tree trunk or branches.
Banding and strapping shall run vertically on all four sides of the box. It shall be
applied twice wrapped under and over the box on each end of the four sides.
Band strapping will likewise be placed horizontally at each end of the four side
panels. This procedure will be duplicated on all boxes 84” and larger. Apply 2” x
4” skids of Douglas Fir on the top and bottom of the box. Bottom strapping skids
shall be applied to 60” boxes and larger varying from 2” x 4” to 2” x 12” as
needed.
Place temporary guy wires, slings or other such devices as needed to permit the
safe moving of the trees. These devices shall remain until the tree is securely
rooted within the box.
Required pruning of trees will be designated by the Landscape Architect at the
site visit to start the plant maintenance period. The guying of unstable trees and
other incidental work to finish the preparation of the site shall, be outlined during
the site visit. A “Punch List” that itemizes these tasks shall be compiled by the
Owner Representative and issued to the Contractor. The Contractor shall
perform the pruning and incidentals as part of the maintenance work.
After the Owner Representative “Punch List” items are completed by the
Contractor, a field notification will be issued to the Contractor to establish the
effective beginning date of the plant maintenance period. The maintenance
period shall last until the entire landscape portion of the project is accepted by
The Owner Representative at the end of the specified 60-day maintenance
period in section 02900, and shall be extended if the trees are improperly
maintained, appreciable replacement is required, or other corrective work
becomes necessary.
No compensation will be allowed the Contractor should such extension of the
maintenance period be required.
The maintenance of trees shall comply with good horticultural practice for the
proper watering, fertilizing, pruning and spraying of the specimen-boxed trees.
Lawin Park
City of Carlsbad
TREE BOXING AND PLANTING
SECTION 02310
A fertility test of the boxed tree soil shall be required at the establishment of the
maintenance period. The Landscape Architect shall approve the testing
laboratory. Upon receipt of the soils analysis report, a bulletin to these
specifications will be issued if a revision to the fertilizer chemistry is necessary.
The Contractor shall apply pesticides to the trees and perform any other work
necessary in maintaining healthy growing for the trees.
The Contractor shall keep the tree storage site and tree box free from weeds and
refuse at all times.
Upon completion of the maintenance period, the City Representative will perform
a final check for acceptance. The Contractor shall request the final check visit
seven (7) days prior to the date of the check visit. The Owner Representative
shall note all tasks that the Contractor must complete with these specifications at
the time of the final check visit. These tasks, including tree replacement, shall be
completed to the satisfaction of the Owner before the termination of the plant
maintenance period. The plant maintenance period will be extended if
necessary, until the successful completion of all “Punch List” tasks.
The Contractor shall be responsible for assuring that all boxes are constructed to
withstand the strains and stresses of moving and weathering. All trees in boxes
that break shall be re-boxed in new boxes in accordance with these
specifications at the Contractors expense.
All boxed trees shall be top padded with 1” material grade #3 or ##4 to protect the
tree and root-ball during transportation. No sheet plywood will be allowed in top
padding procedure.
Transport the trees to the storage site in a manner least disturbing to the tree ball
and head during moving. Lift trees with equipment such as, but not limited to,
hydraulic or conventional crane, semi truck and trailer, balling carts, and skidding
rollers. All overhead lines that will interfere with the tree transport shall be raised
or temporarily removed according to the direction of the local governing
agencies.
Every effort shall be made to box the largest size root mass as possible.
PART 7 -TREE PLACEMENT
7.1 Trees that are damaged, stolen, destroyed, or die during the pruning, moving and
plant maintenance period shall be replaced. At the end of the plant maintenance
period, all trees that are not in a state of healthy, vigorous growth, as determined
by the Owner Representative, shall be replaced.
Lamin Park
City of Carlsbad
TREE BOXING AND PLANTING
SECTION 0231 0
_- Replacement trees shall be procured, delivered, and unloaded at the tree storage
site at the expense of the contractor with no additional cost to the Owner.
Every placement tree shall be of the same species and of equal or greater
height, width, and caliber as the original, before being pruned by the Contractor.
The Owner shall approve all replacement trees before they are delivered to the
tree storage site.
The Contractor shall deliver the replacement trees to the tree site within fourteen
(14) calendar days of the date the original trees are rejected by the Owner.
In the event of the Contractors failure to properly maintain the storage site and
boxed trees or replace the rejected trees in accordance with these specifications
the Owner may make the necessary replacements and complete the said
maintenance and charge the Contractor with the actual cost of all labor and
materials required. The Contractor upon demand shall pay payment for said
services.
c_
Lawin Park
City of Carlsbad
TREE BOXING AND PLANTING
SECTION 0231 0
SECTION 02795
PLAYGROUND SURFACE SYSTEMS
1.
1.1.
1.2.
1.3.
PART1 GENERAL
RELATED SECTIONS
1.1.1. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
1.2.1. This Section includes the following types of playground surface systems and accesso-
ries:
1.2.1 .I. Non-loose fill systems (resilient poured in place rubber matting).
1.2.2. Related Sections include the following:
1.2.2.1. Division 2 Section “Earthwork“ for excavation, filling, and grading work, in-
cluding compacted subgrades and subbase courses, and dewatering.
1.2.2.2. Division 2 Section “Playground Equipment and Structures” for play struc-
tures installed only over protective use zones, at appropriate fall heights.
1.2.2.3. Division 2 Section “Materials and Methods”
1.2.2.4. Division 2 Section “Excavation”.
1.2.2.5. Division 2 Section “Concrete Paving”
1.2.2.6. Division 2 Section “Sub-Drainage”.
I .2.2.7. Division 2 Section “Storm Drainage”
REFERENCES
1.3.1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
1.3.1.1. ASTM D412 Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermo-
plastic Rubbers and Thermoplastic Elastomers-Tension.
1.3.1.2. ASTM D624 Standard Test Method for Tear Strength of Conventional Vul-
canized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers.
1.3.1.3. ASTM D2047 Standard Test Method for Static Coefficient of Friction of Pol-
ish-Coated Floor Surfaces as Measured by the James Machine.
1.3.1.4. ASTM D2859 Standard Test Method for Flammability of Finished Textile
Floor Covering Materials.
1.3.1.5. ASTM E303 Standard Test Method for Measuring Surface Frictional Proper-
ties Using the British Pendulum Tester.
Larwin Community Park
’ PLAYGROUND SURFACE SYSTEMS 02795 - 1
1.3.1.6. ASTM F1292 Standard Specification for Impact Attenuation of Surface Sys-
tems Under and Around Playground Equipment.
ASTM F1951 Standard Specification for Determination of Accessibility of
Surface Systems Under and Around Playground Equipment.
1.3.1.7.
1.4. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
1.4.1. Performance Requirements: Provide a 2 layer rubber-polyurethane playground surfacing
system which has been designed, manufactured and installed to meet the following cri-
teria:
1.4.1.1.
1.4.1.2.
1.4.1 -3.
1.4.1.4.
1.4.1.5.
1.4.1.6.
1.5. DEFINITIONS
Shock Attenuation (ASTM F1292):
1.4.1.1.1. G,: Less than 200.
1.4.1.1.2.
Flammability (ASTM D2859): Pass.
Tensile Strength (ASTM D412): 60 psi (413 kPa).
Tear Resistance (ASTM D624): 140%.
Water Permeability: 0.4 gal/yd 2/second.
Accessibility: Comply with requirements of ASTM F1951
Head Injury Criteria: Less than 1000.
1 s.1. Critical Height: Standard measure of shock attenuation. According to CPSC No. 325,
this means "the fall height below which a life-threatening head injury would not be ex-
pected to occur.''
1.5.2. Fall Height: According to ASTM F 1487-01, this means "the vertical distance between a
designated play surface and the protective surfacing beneath it." The fall height of play-
ground equipment should not exceed the Critical Height of the protective surfacing be-
neath it.
1.5.3. SBR: Styrene butadiene rubber.
1.5.4. Use Zone: According to ASTM F 1487-01, this means "the area beneath and immedi-
ately adjacent to a play structure that is designated for unrestricted circulation around
the equipment and on whose surface it is predicted that a user would land when falling
from or exiting the equipment."
1.6. SUBMITTALS
1.6.1. General: Submit listed submittals in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Di-
vision 1 Submittal Procedures Section.
1.6.2. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include material descriptions and
construction details for each component of playground surface system.
1.6.3. Shop Drawings: For each playground surface system, include materials, cross sections,
drainage, installation, penetration details, and edge termination including border edge
tiles.
Larwin Community Park
PLAYGROUND SURFACE SYSTEMS
02795 - 2
1.7.
1.8.
1.9. -
1.6.4. Coordination Drawings: Layout plans and elevations drawn to scale and coordinating
installation of playground surface systems with playground equipment. Show play-
ground equipment locations, use zones, fall heights, extent of protective surfacing, and
Critical Heights.
1.6.5. Color Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts are available from
Owner showing the full range of colors and textures available for components with fac-
tory-applied color finishes. Color selections for surfacing are shown on Plans. Contrac-
tor shall verify color with Owner prior to placing order.
1.6.6. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of playground surface systems certifying
that protective surfacings furnished comply with requirements.
1.6.7. Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating playground surface
system complies with requirements, based on comprehensive testing of current prod-
ucts.
1.6.8. Maintenance Data: For playground surface system to include in maintenance manuals
specified in Division 1.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.7.1. Qualifications: Utilize an installer approved and trained by the manufacturer of the play-
ground surfacing system, having 3 years installation experience with other projects of
the scope and scale of the work described in this section.
1.7.2. Certifications: Certification by manufacturer that installer is an approved applicator of the
playground surfacing system.
1.7.3. International Play Equipment Manufacturers Association (IPEMA) certified.
1.7.4. Source Limitations: Provide secondary materials including adhesives, anchoring mate-
rials, filler/sealant material, and repair materials of type and from source recommended
by manufacturer of primary playground surface system materials.
1.7.5. Standards and Guidelines: Provide playground surface systems complying with appli-
cable provisions of the following, unless more stringent provisions are indicated:
1.7.5.1. CPSC No. 325, "Handbook for Public Playground Safety"; ASTM F 1292;
and ASTM F 1487.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
1.8.1. General: Comply with Division 1 Product Requirement Section.
1.8.2. Deliver manufactured materials in original packages with seals unbroken and bearing
manufacturer's labels indicating brand name and directions for storing.
1.8.3. Store manufactured materials in a clean, dry location, protected from the weather and
deterioration, and complying with manufacturer's written instructions for minimum tem-
perature of 40 degrees F and. maximum temperature of 90 degrees F for storage.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
1.9.1. Environmental Limitations: Do not apply playground surface system materials or com-
ponents over wet, or excessively damp substrates if prohibited by manufacturer's written
instructions.
Larwin Community Park
PLAYGROUND SURFACE SYSTEMS
02795 - 3
1.9.2. Environmental Requirements: Install surfacing system when minimum ambient tempera-
ture is 33 degrees F (1 degree C) and maximum ambient temperature is 90 degrees F
(32 degrees C). Do not install in steady or heavy rain.
1.9.3. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted
weather conditions permit playground surface system to be performed according to
manufacturer's written instructions.
1.9.4. Field Measurements: Where playground surface system is indicated to fit to other con-
struction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements.
1.9.5. Adhesively Applied Products: As follows:
1.9.5.1.
1.9.5.2.
1.9.5.3.
Apply adhesives only when temperature of surfaces to be adhered to and
ambient air temperatures are within range permitted by manufacturer's writ-
ten instructions.
Close area to traffic during surfacing installation and for time period after in-
stallation recommended in writing by manufacturer.
Do not install products over stone base materials unless base is sufficiently
dry and surfaces are within acceptable pH range to bond with adhesive, as
determined by surfacing manufacturer's recommended procedures.
1.10. COORDINATION
1.10.1. Coordinate construction of playground surface systems with installation of playground
equipment, including accurate use zones and fall heights, specified in Section 02881,
"Playground Equipment and Structures."
1 .I 1. WARRANTY
1 .I 1 .I. Project Warranty: Refer to Conditions of the Contract for project warranty provisions.
I .I 1.2. Manufacturer's Warranty: Submit, for Owner's acceptance, manufacturer's standard war-
ranty document executed by authorized company official. Manufacturer's warranty is in
addition to, and not a limitation of, other rights Owner may have under contract docu-
ments.
1 .I 1.2.1. Warranty Period: 5 years from date of completion of work.
2. PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1. MANUFACTURERS - POURED-IN-PLACE PLAYGROUND SURFACING SYSTEM
2.1 .I. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
2.1.1.1. Bonded Rubber Particle Surface System Units or equal:
2.1 .I .I .I. SurfaceAmerica. Inc.; Distributed by Coast Recreation,
Phone: 716-632-841 3 or 1-800-999-0555.
Larwin Community Park
PLAYGROUND SURFACE SYSTEMS 02795 - 4
2.2.
r^
2.3.
2.4.
PLAYGROUND SURFACE SYSTEMS, GENERAL
2.2.1. Accessibility: Provide playground surface system determined to be accessible when
tested according to ASTM PS 83 and designed to comply with requirements for an ac-
cessible route as recommended by US. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compli-
ance Board's "ADA Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)".
NON-LOOSE FILL PLAYGROUND SURFACE SYSTEMS
2.3.1. General: Provide protective surfacing designed to drain water freely when installed ac-
cording to manufacturer's written instructions.
2.3.2. Bonded Rubber Particle Units: Factory-fabricated surfacing formulated from rubber par-
ticles in a flexible polyurethane binder; compression molded into water-permeable, UV-
light-stable, impact-attenuating units as follows:
2.3.2.1.
2.3.2.2.
2.3.2.3.
2.3.2.4.
2.3.2.5.
2.3.2.6.
2.3.2.7.
2.3.2.8.
Binder: Weather resistant, UV stabilized, flexible, nonhardening,
100 percent solids polyurethane.
Critical Height: Not less than 5 feet for coordination with fall heights not
greater than Critical Height.
Overall Thickness: Not less than as required for Critical Height indicated,
but not less than 3 inches.
Base Profile: With integral ribbed or grid-patterned underside forming chan-
nels for water drainage between surfacing and substrate.
Border Edge and Corners: Tapered, bevel-edged units that transition from
the face of playground surfacing to the adjacent surface below it with a
straight-sloped outside edge; size compatible with field units maintaining
layout pattern continuity.
Installation Method: Adhesively bonded to hard-surface substrate with
manufacturer's standard weather-resistant adhesive suitable for unit, sub-
strate, and location indicated.
Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
Color Pattern: As indicated on Drawings.
2.3.3. Concrete Leveling and Patching Material: Trowelable, leveling, portland cement based
grout or epoxy- or polyurethane-based formulation suitable for exterior use and ap-
proved by playground surface system manufacturer.
POURED-IN-PLACE PLAYGROUND SURFACING SYSTEM
2.4.1. Poured-in-place playground surfacing system, including the following:
2.4.1 .I. Poured-ln-Place Primer:
2.4.1 .I .I. Material: Polyurethane.
,.---
Larwin Community Park
PLAYGROUND SURFACE SYSTEMS
. 02795 - 5
2.5.
2.6.
3.
3.1.
3.2.
2.4.1 -2.
2.4.1.3.
Poured-in-Place Base Mat:
2.4.1.2.1. Material: Blend of 100% recycled SBR (styrene butadiene rub-
ber) and polyurethane.
2.4.1.2.2. Thickness: 3" (76 mm).
2.4.1.2.3. Formulation Components: Blend of strand and granular mate-
rial.
Poured-In-Place Top Surface:
2.4.1.3.1. Material: Blend of recycled EPDM (ethylene propylene diene
monomer) and polyurethane.
Thickness: Nominal 112" (12.7 mm), minimum 3/8" (9.5 mm),
maximum 5/8" (15.9 mm).
Dry Static Coefficient of Friction (ASTM D2047): 1 .O.
Wet Static Coefficient of Friction (ASTM D2047): 0.9.
Dry Skid Resistance (ASTM E303): 89.
Wet Skid Resistance (ASTM E303): 57.
2.4.1.3.2.
2.4.1.3.3.
2.4.1.3.4.
2.4.1.3.5.
2.4.1.3.6.
PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS
2.5.1. An approved equal may be substituted for specified products.
MIXES
2.6.1. Required mix proportions by weight:
2.6.1 .I. Base Mat: 14% polyurethane, 86% rubber.
2.6.1.2. Top Surface: 18% polyurethane, 82% rubber.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS
3.1 .I. Comply with the instructions and recommendations of the playground surfacing manu-
facturer.
EXAM I NATION
3.2.1. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for subgrade and substrate conditions, for compliance with playground sur-
face system manufacturer's requirements, and for other conditions affecting perform-
ance.
3.2.2. Hard-surface Substrates: Verify that substrates are satisfactory for non-loose fill play-
ground surface system installation and that substrate surfaces are dry, cured, and uni-
formly sloped to drain within recommended tolerances according to playground surface
system manufacturer's written requirements for cross-section profile.
Lalwin Community Park
PLAYGROUND SURFACE SYSTEMS
02795 - 6
’ 3.2.3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.3. PREPARATION
3.3.1. Stake locations of playground perimeter, playground equipment, use zones, and path-
ways. Clearly indicate locations of utilities, lawn sprinkler system, subgrade drainage
systems, and underground structures.
3.3.2. General: Prepare, fill, patch, clean, remove high spots and ridges, and remove incom-
patible coatings from substrates to receive surfacing products according to playground
surface system manufacturer‘s written instructions. Verify that substrates are sound
without high spots, ridges, holes, and depressions.
3.3.2.1. Surface Preparation: Using a brush or short nap roller, apply primer to the
substrate perimeter and any adjacent vertical barriers such as playground
equipment support legs, curbs or slabs that will contact the surfacing system
at the rate of 300 ft2/gal (7.5 m2/L).
3.4. INSTALLATION, GENERAL
3.4.1. General: Comply with playground surface system manufacturer’s written installation in-
structions. Install playground surface system over area and in thickness indicated and
as required to comply with specified requirements for impact-attenuation performance
and, where indicated, for accessibility. Installer should have CPSl on staff. All installa-
tion shall be inspected by City’s CPSI.
- 3.5. INSTALLATION OF POURED-IN-PLACE PLAYGROUND SURFACE SYSTEMS
3.5.1. Do not proceed with playground surfacing installation until all applicable site work, in-
cluding substrate preparation, playground equipment installation and other relevant
work, has been completed.
3.5.2. Base Mat Installation:
3.5.2.1. Using screeds and hand trowels, install the base mat at a consistent density
of 29 pounds, 1 ounce per cubic foot (466 kg/m3) to the specified thickness.
3.5.2.2. Allow base mat to cure for sufficient time so that indentations are not left in
the base mat from applicator foot traffic or equipment.
3.5.2.3. Do not allow foot traffic or use of the base mat surface until it is sufficiently
cured per manufacturer’s installation requirements.
3.5.3. Primer Application: Using a brush or short nap roller, apply primer to the base mat pe-
rimeter and any adjacent vertical barriers such as playground equipment support legs,
curbs or slabs that will contact the surfacing system at the rate of 300 ft2/gal (7.5 m2/L).
3.5.4. Top Surface Installation:
3.5.4.1. Using a hand trowel, install top surface at a consistent density of 58 pounds,
9 ounces per cubic foot (938 kg/m3) to a nominal thickness of %,, (12.7 mm).
.- 3.5.4.2. Allow top surface to cure for a minimum of 48 hours.
Larwin Community Park
PLAYGROUND SURFACE SYSTEMS
02795 - 7
3.5.4.3. At the end of the minimum curing period, verify that the top surface is suffi-
ciently dry and firm to allow foot traffic and use without damage to the sur-
face.
3.5.4.4. Do not allow foot traffic or use of the surface until it is sufficiently cured in
accordance with manufacturer requirements.
3.5.4.5. Do not allow foot traffic or use of the surface until it is sufficiently cured.
3.6. CLEANING AND PROTECTION
3.6.1. Loose and Non-Loose Fill Systems: Prevent traffic over system for not less than 48
hours after installation. Protect playground surface system from damage and wear dur-
ing the remainder of construction period. Clean playground surface system after time
period recommended in writing by playground surface system manufacturer but not
more than four days before dates scheduled for inspections intended to establish date of
Substantial Completion. Use cleaning materials and procedures recommended in writ-
ing by playground surface system manufacturer.
3.6.1 .I. During installation of adhesively applied products, immediately remove visi-
bie adhesive from surfaces. Use cleaner recommended by playground sur-
face system manufacturer.
END OF SECTION
Larwin Community Park
PLAYGROUND SURFACE SYSTEMS
02795 - 8
SECTION 0281 0
LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION
1. PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .l. DESCRIPTION
1.1.1. Division 1 applies to this Section. Provide all labor, materials, labor, services,
transportation, and equipment required to complete the Irrigation Work indicated on the
Drawings and specified herein, and be ready for operation satisfactory to the City.
1.1.2. All work called for on the drawings by notes or details shall be furnished and installed
whether or not specifically mentioned in the specifications. When an item is shown on
the plans but not shown on the specifications or vice versa, it shall be deemed to be as
shown on both. The Landscape Architect shall have final authority for clarification.
1.1.3. Manufacturer's directions and detailed drawings shall be followed in all cases where the
manufacturer of articles used in this contract furnish directions covering points not shown
in the drawings and specifications.
1.2. QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.2.1. Irrigation Coverage: The Contractor is responsible for full and complete coverage of all
irrigated areas; make all adjustments needed to achieve this at no additional cost to the
City. The pattern of the system layout, spacing, discharge pressure, and the radius of
the throw of the sprinkler heads shall be as designed and shall provide full coverage of
landscaped areas.
1.2.2. Applicable Standards:
1.2.2.1. ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials.
1.2.2.2. ANSI - American National Standards Institute.
1.2.2.3. PVC - Polyvinyl Chloride.
1.2.2.4. NSF - National Science Foundation.
1.2.3. All local, municipal, and state laws, rules and regulations governing or relating to any
portion of this work are hereby incorporated into and made a part of these specifications,
and their provisions shall be carried out by the Contractor. Anything contained in these
specifications shall not be construed to conflict with any of the above rules and
regulations of the same. However, when these specifications and drawings call for or
describe materials, workmanship, or construction of a better quality, higher standard, or
larger size than is required by the above rules and regulations, the provisions of these
specifications and drawings shall take precedence.
1.2.4. All materials supplied for this project shall be new and free from any defects. All
defective materials shall be replaced immediately at no additional cost to City.
1.2.5. The Contractor shall secure the required licenses and permits including payments of
charges and fees, give required notices to public authorities, verify permits secured or
arrangements made by others affecting the work of this section.
Larwin Park City Of Carlsbad Recreation - Park Development LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION 02810 - 1
1.2.6. Provide at least one person who shall be present at all times during execution of this
portion of the work and who shall be thoroughly familiar with the type of materials being
installed and the manufacturer's recommended methods of installation, who can
demontrate and explain how the equipment works, and who shall direct all work
performed under this section.
1.2.7. Site Reviews:
1.2.7.1. Job Start Meeting: Before starting Irrigation Work, schedule a conference
regarding requirements of the Work. Provide at least seven days notice to
all parties for this conference.
1.2.7.2. Construction Reviews: Provide advance notification as noted for the
following reviews:
1.2.7.2.1. Pressure supply line installation and testing - 72 hours.
1.2.7.2.2. System layout and materials review - 48 hours.
1.2.7.2.3. Coverage Tests: Prior to landscape planting - 48 hours.
1.2.7.2.4. Final review - 72 hours.
1.3. SUBMITTALS: Refer to Section 01 330 for procedures.
1.3.1. List of Materials: Submit for approval 3 copies of a complete typed list of materials with
manufacturer name, the item model number, descriptive literature, and the pages in the
submittal that contain the catalog cuts marked for each item. Submittals shall include,
but are not limited to, the following:
1.3.1 .l. Wire and connectors.
1.3.1.2. Valve box.
1.3.1.3. Remote control valves.
1.3.1.4. Pipe and fittings.
1.3.1.5. Sprinkler heads.
1.3.1.6. Quick coupling valves.
1.3.1.7. Backflow preventer
1.3.1.8. Strainer.
1.3.1.9. Master valve.
1.3.1 .lo. Pipe solvent.
1.3.1.1 1. Controller.
1.3.1.12. Drip irrigation equipment.
1.3.1.13. Pressure regulator
1.3.1.14. Gate valves.
Larwin Park
City Of Carlsbad Recreation - Park Development
LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION
02810 - 2
1.3.1.1 5. Check valves.
1.3.1 -16. Equipment enclosures.
1.3.2. Controller Chart:
1.3.2.1.
1.3.2.2.
1.3.2.3.
1.3.2.4.
1.3.2.5.
1.3.2.6.
Project Record Drawings shall be approved by the Architect (or Owner's
Representative) before controller charts are prepared.
Provide one controller chart for each controller supplied, showing the area
serviced by each controller.
The-chart shall to be a reduced diagram of the actual system, of the
maximum size that will fit inside controller housing, double sided if required
for readability. In the event the controller sequence is not legible when the
drawing is reduced, it shall be enlarged to a readable size.
The chart shall be a blackline print, indicating the area of coverage of each
remote control valve with a distinctly different color highlighter pen marked
over entire area of coverage. A minimum of six individual colors shall be
used for the controller chart unless less than six control valves are indicated.
Landscape Architect or City's authorized representative must approve record
drawings before controller charts are prepared.
When completed and approved, the chart shall be hermetically sealed
between two pieces of plastic, each piece being a minimum 20 mils.
These charts shall be completed and approved prior to final acceptance of
the irrigation system. .-
1.3.3. Operating and Maintenance Manuals: Prepare and submit in conformance with
Section 01 770. Provide five manuals detailing operation and maintenance requirements
for Irrigation system, 10 days prior to completion of Work, with sufficient detail to permit
maintenance personnel to understand, operate, and maintain the equipment. Each
complete, bound manual shall include the following information:
1.3.3.1. Index sheet stating Contractor's address and telephone number, duration of
guarantee period, list of equipment including names and addresses of local
manufacturer representatives.
1.3.3.2. Operating and maintenance instructions for all equipment.
1.3.3.3. Spare parts lists and related manufacturer information for all equipment.
1.3.4. Submittal Log: Prior to final review of the Work, submit a log with dates and approval or
acceptance signatures for the following:
1.3.4.1. Job start meeting.
1.3.4.2. Plumbing permits.
1.3.4.3. List of materials.
1.3.4.4. Construction reviews.
1.3.4.5. Controller charts.
Larwin Park City Of Carlsbad
Recreation - Park Development
LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION
02810 - 3
1.3.4.6. Receipt of materials at site.
1.3.4.7. Record drawings.
1.3.4.8. Operation and maintenance manuals.
1.3.4.9. Training of Owner's personnel.
1.3.4.1 0. Manufacturers' warranties.
1.3.4.1 1. Written guarantee.
1.3.5. Substitutions:
1.3.5.1. The Landscape Architect or City's authorized representative will allow no
substitutions without prior written acceptance.
1.3.5.2. If the Irrigation Contractor wishes to substitute any equipment or materials
for those equipment or materials listed on the irrigation drawings and
specifications, he may do so by providing the following information to the
Landscape Architect or City's authorized representative for approval.
1,353. Provide a written statement indicating the reason for making the substitution.
1.3.5.4. Provide catalog cut sheets, technical data, and performance information for
each substitute item.
1.3.5.5. Provide in writing the difference in installed price if the item is accepted.
1.3.6. Record Drawings: Prepare and submit in conformance with Section 01770. Submit
dimensioned drawings showing location and depth of points of connection, pressure
lines, control wires, gate valves, backflow prevention unit, master valve, isolation valves,
automatic remote control valves (indicate station number and size), controller (indicate
controller number and station count), quick coupling valves, remote control valves,
sprinkler heads, stub up locations for raised planters, and related equipment as may be
directed.
1.4. JOB CONDITIONS
1.4.1. Examination of Drawings and Site:
1.4.1 .l. . Drawings: Drawings are diagrammatic. Avoid conflicts between the
irrigation systems, planting, architectural features, and utilities. Install
plumbing in planting areas wherever possible. Do not exceed irrigation head
spacing as shown on the Drawings. Verify exact location with Owner's
Representative. The approximate point of connection shall be as indicated
on the Drawings. Provide minor changes due to actual site conditions.
1.4.1.2. Fittings: Drawings do not indicate all offsets, fittings, sleeves, etc., which
may be required by structural and finished conditions. Furnish fittings
required to meet these conditions.
1.4.1.3. Field Conditions: The Contractor shall not willfully install the irrigation
system as shown on the drawings when it is obvious in the field that
obstructions, grade differences or discrepancies in area dimensions exist
that might not have been considered in engineering. Such obstructions or
differences should be brought to the attention of the Landscape Architect as
Larwin Park City Of Carlsbad Recreation - Park Development
LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION
02810 - 4
1.4.1.4.
1.4.1.5.
_-
soon as detected. In the event this notification is not performed, the
Irrigation Contractor shall assume full responsibility for any revision
necessary. The Contractor shall verify and be familiar with the locations,
size and detail of points of connection provided as the source of water,
electrical supply, and telephone line connection to the irrigation system.
Provide written notification of field conditions such as obstructions, grade
differences, or discrepancies in dimensions or in available water pressure at
the point of connection (water pressure should be a minimum of 150% more
than design pressure). Irrigation design is based on the available static
water pressure shown on the drawings. Contractor shall verify static water
on the project prior to the start of construction. Should a discrepancy exist,
notify the Landscape Architect and City's authorized representative prior to
beginning construction. Start of Irrigation Work shall indicate acceptance of
all field conditions encountered and acceptance of the responsibility for
revisions necessary because of field conditions.
Grading: Verify that the grading has been completed before starting the
Irrigation Work.
Utilities and Soils: Exercise extreme care in excavating and working near
existing utilities. Prior to cutting into the soil, the Contractor shall locate all
cables, conduits, sewer septic tanks, and other utilities as are commonly
encountered underground and he shall take proper precautions not to
damage or disturb such improvements. If a conflict exists between such
obstacles and the proposed work, the Contractor shall promptly notify the
Landscape Architect and City who will arrange for relocations. Repair any
damage to utilities caused by Irrigation Work. Check existing utility drawings
for locations and verify in the field. The Irrigation Contractor shall coordinate
with the General Contractor for installation of required sleeving as shown on
the plans. The Contractor will proceed in the same manner if a rock layer or
any other such conditions are encountered.
1.5. GUARANTEE
1.5.1. In addition to manufacturers' specific warranties, warrant the entire irrigation system for a
period of one year from date of generally substantial completion per Section 01770. The
entire sprinkler system, including all work done under this contract, shall be
unconditionally guaranteed against all defects and fault of material and workmanship,
including settling of backfilled areas below grade, for a period of one (1) year following
the filing of the Notice of Completion.
1.5.2. Should any problem with the irrigation system be discovered within the guarantee period,
that problem shall be corrected by the Contractor at no additional expense to City within
ten (10) calendar days of receipt of written notice from City. When the nature of the
repairs as determined by the City constitute an emergency (i.e. broken pressure line) the
City may proceed to make repairs at the Contractor's expense. All damages to existing
improvement resulting either from faulty materials or workmanship, or from the
necessary repairs to correct same, shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the City by the
Contractor, all at no additional cost to the City.
1.5.3. At Contractor's expense, promptly repair all damage to paving, planting and other
components that are due to settlement of improperly compacted trench soil.
.C
Larwin Park City Of Carlsbad Recreation - Park Development
LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION
02810 - 5
1.5.4. Guarantee shall be submitted on Contractor’s own letterhead as follows:
GUARANTEE FOR SPRINKLER IRRIGATION SYSTEM
We hereby guarantee that the sprinkler irrigation system we have furnished and
installed is free from defects in materials and workmanship, and the work has been
completed in accordance with the drawings and specifications, ordinary wear and tear
and unusual abuse, or neglect excepted. We agree to repair or replace any defective
material during the period of one year from date of filing of the Notice of Completion and
also to repair or replace any damage resulting from the repairing or replacing of such defects at no additional cost to the City. We shall make such repairs or replacements
within 10 calendar days following written notification by the City. In the event of our
failure to make such repairs or replacements within the time specified after receipt of
written notice from City, we authorize the City to proceed to have said repairs or
replacements made at our expense and we will pay the costs and charges therefore
upon demand.
PROJECT NAME:
PROJECT LOCATION:
CONTRACTOR NAME:
ADDRESS:
TELEPHONE:
SIGNED:
DATE:
1.6. INSPECTIONS
1.6.1. The Contractor shall permit the Landscape Architect and City’s authorized representative
to visit and inspect at all times any part of the work and shall provide safe access for
such visits.
1.6.2. Where the specifications require work to be tested by the Contractor, it shall not be
covered over until accepted by the Landscape Architect, City’s authorized representative,
and/or governing agencies. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for notifying the
Landscape Architect, City, and governing agencies, a minimum of 48 hours in advance,
where and when the work is ready for testing. Should any work be covered without
testing or acceptance, it shall be, if so ordered, uncovered at the Contractor’s expense.
1.6.3. Inspections will be required for the following at a minimum:
1.6.3.1, System layout
1.6.3.2. Pressure test of irrigation mainline (Four hours at 125 PSI or 120% of static
water pressure, which ever is greater.) Mainline pressure loss during test
shall not exceed 2 PSI.
1.6.3.3. Coverage test of irrigation system. Test shall be performed prior to any
planting.
1.6.3.4. Final inspection prior to start of maintenance period
Larwin Park City Of Carlsbad Recreation - Park Development
LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION 02810 - 6
1.6.3.5. Final acceptance
1.6.4. Site observations and testing will not commence without the field record drawings as
prepared by the Irrigation Contractor. Record drawings must complete and up to date for
each site visit.
1.6.5. Work that fails testing and is not accepted will be retested. Hourly rates and expenses of
the Landscape Architect, City's authorized representative, and governing agencies for
reinspection or retesting will be paid by the Irrigation Contractor at no additional expense
to City.
1.7. STORAGE AND HANDLING
1.7.1. Use all means necessary to protect irrigation system materials before, during, and after
installation and to protect the installation work and materials of all other trades. In the
event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to the
acceptance of the Landscape Architect and City and at no additional cost to the City.
1.7.2. Exercise care in handling, loading, unloading, and storing plastic pipe and fittings under
cover until ready to install. Transport plastic pipe only on a vehicle with a bed long
enough to allow the pipe to lay flat to avoid undue bending and concentrated external
load.
1.8. EQUIPMENT
1.8.1. Supply as a part of this contract the following items:
1.8.1.1. Two (2) wrenches for disassembly and adjustment of each type of sprinkler
head used in the irrigation system.
1.8.1.2. Three 30-inch sprinkler keys for manual operation of control valves.
1.8.1.3. Two keys for each automatic controller.
1.8.1.4. Two quick coupler keys with a 1" bronze hose bib, bent nose type with hand
wheel and two coupler lid keys.
1.8.1.5. One valve box cover key or wrench.
1.8.1.6. Six extra sprinkler heads of each size and type.
1.8.2. The above equipment shall be turned over to City's authorized representative at the final
inspection.
1.9. COMPLETION
1.9.1. At the time of the pre-maintenance period inspection, the Landscape Architect, City's
authorized representative, and governing agencies will inspect the work, and if not
accepted, will prepare a list of items to be completed by the Contractor. At the time of
the post-maintenance period or final inspection the work will be re-inspected and final
acceptance will be in writing by the Landscape Architect, City's authorized representative,
and governing agencies.
1.9.2. The City's authorized representative shall have final authority on all portions of the work.
Larwin Park
City Of Carlsbad
Recreation - Park Development
LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION
02810 - 7
2.
2.1.
2.2.
2.3.
2.4.
1.9.3. After the system has been completed, the Contractor shall instruct City's authorized
representative in the operation and maintenance of the irrigation system and shall furnish
a complete set of operating and maintenance instructions.
1.9.4. Any settling of trenches which may occur during the one-year period following
acceptance shall be repaired to the City's satisfaction by the Contractor without any
additional expense to the City. Repairs shall include the complete restoration of all
damage to planting, paving or other improvements of any kind as a result of the work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
SUMMARY
2.1 .l. Use only new materials of the manufacturer, size and type shown on the drawings and
specifications. Materials or equipment installed or furnished that do not meet Landscape
Architect's, City's, or governing agencies standards will be rejected and shall be removed
from the site at no expense to the City.
METAL PIPE AND FITTINGS
2.2.1. Pipe: ANSI, Schedule 40 galvanized mild steel screwed pipe.
2.2.2. Fittings: ANSI, Schedule 40 screwed beaded malleable iron or flanged cast iron,
125 pound class.
2.2.3. Unions 2" and Smaller: Ground joint pattern.
2.2.4. Brass Pipe and Fittings: Brass pipe of 85% red brass, ANSI Schedule 40 screwed pipe;
fittings of medium brass, screwed 125 pound class.
COPPER PIPE
2.3.1. Pressure supply line between the water meter and the backflow prevention device shall
be type K copper. Copper pipe and fittings shall be Type "K" sweat soldered. Piping to
containers and terrace planters shall be copper pipe, type "K".
2.3.2. Copper pipe in building walls for terrace planters shall be installed in accordance with the
codes listed in Section 01 060, Regulation Requirements.
PLASTIC PIPE AND FllTlNGS
2.4.1. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe: Pressure supply lines 1 1/2 inches in diameter and
smaller downstream of the backflow prevention unit shall be Schedule 40 solvent weld
PVC. The PVC pipe shall conform to ASTM D1785 solvent weld type, virgin PVC
compound, 2000 psi hydrostatic design stress rate, Schedule 40, marked with
manufacturer's name, size, class rating, material designation, date extruded, and NFS
seal of approval. J-M, Vinyltech, H & W, Pacific Western, Extrusion Technologies, or
equal. To be used exclusively for exterior applications; no PVC pipe shall be used in fire
rated structures.
2.4.2. Pressure supply lines 2 inches in diameter and up to 3 inches in diameter downstream of
backflow prevention unit shall be Class 315 solvent weld PVC. Piping shall conform to
ASTM D2241.
2.4.3. Non-pressure lines 3/4 inch in diameter and larger downstream of the remote control
valve shall be Class 200 solvent weld PVC conforming to ASTM D2672.
Larwin Park City Of Carlsbad
Recreation - Park Development
LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION
02810 - 8
2.4.4. Recycled water PVC pipe to be color-coded purple on two sides with recycled water
warning statements "Caution-Recycled Water". Recycled water piping must be
acceptable by the Carlsbad Municipal Water District.
2.4.5. Pipe shall be marked continuously with manufacturer's name, nominal pipe size,
schedule or class, PVC type and grade, National Sanitation Foundation approval,
Commercial Standards designation, and date of extrusion.
2.4.6. All plastic pipe shall be extruded of an improved PVC virgin pipe compound in
accordance with ASTM D2241 or ASTM D1785.
2.4.7. All solvent weld PVC fittings shall be standard weight Schedule 40 and shall be injection
molded of an improved virgin PVC fitting compound. Slip PVC fittings shall be the "deep
socket" bracketed type. Threaded plastic fittings shall be injection molded. All tees and
ells shall be side gated. All fittings shall conform to ASTM 02466.
2.4.8. Threaded Nipples and Risers: Schedule 80 PVC, with molded threads and shall conform
to ASTM D1785.
2.4.9. Risers: Schedule 80, threaded, with #5 deformed rebars.
2.5. SOLVENT CEMENTS, PRIMERS AND THREAD LUBRICANT
2.5.1. All solvent cementing of plastic pipe and fittings shall be a two-step process, using primer
and solvent cement applied per the manufacturer's recommendations. Cement shall be
of a fluid consistency, not gel-like or ropy. Solvent cements and primers shall comply
with ASTM D2564. Socket joints shall be made per recommended procedures for joining
PVC plastic pipe and fittings with PVC solvent cement by the pipe and fitting
manufacturer and procedures outlined per ASTM D2564 and ASTM D2855. T. Christy
Enterprises, IPS Weld-On, or equal.
2.5.2. When connection is plastic to metal, female adapters shall be hand tightened, plus one
turn with a strap wrench. Joint compound shall be non-lead base Teflon paste, tape, or
equal.
+6+ II and gasket pressure supply lines shall be ductile iron deepbell type.
Larwin Park City Of Carlsbad Recreation - Park Development
LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION
02810 - 9
2.7. SPLICE CONNECTORS
2.7.1. Remote control wires: all control wires shall be solid copper, 600.volt, type UF,
polyethylene insulation of 45 ML, conforming to the following wire colors and installation
requirements:
2.7.1.1. Common Wires: White (#12 AWG).
2.7.1.2. Control Wires: Different color per each station (different color than any other
wire) (#12 AWG).
2.7.1.3. Spare Wires: Two (2) red #12 AWG wires from furthest valve or manifold to
controller, minimum (see also plans).
2.7.2. All wire runs under paving or through hardscape structures shall be made in PVC
SCH 40 electrical conduit, a minimum of 2 times the diameter of the wire bundle, and
shall sweep up into pull boxes (where greater than 200 ft distance under paving occurs).
Pull box spacing shall not exceed 200 ft intervals.
2.8. VALVES
2.8.1. Quick Coupling Valves: Two-piece type brass body, designed for maximum working
pressure of 150 psi operable with quick coupler. Valves shall have 1" female threads
opening at base. Valves to be operated only with a coupler key, designed for that
purpose. Coupler key is inserted into valve and a positive, watertight connection shall be
made between the coupler key and valve. Provide 1" swivel ell quill assembly as
approved. See plans for manufacturer size and model.
2.8.2. Automatic Remote Control Valves: Electrically controlled, 200 psi rated globe style valve,
normally closed, glass-filled nylon body and bonnet with 24 VAC 50/60 cycle solenoid
power requirement at 0.41 amp each. See plans for manufacturer, size, and model.
Master Valve: Cast iron and bronze solenoid control valve with water-tight coil assembly.
Flow stem for flow rate and closing speed adjustment. Normally open type. See plans
for manufacturer and model.
2.8.3.
2.8.4. Ball Valves: Shut-off valves shall be PVC ball valves with double union, Schedule 80.
King Bros. or equal. One ball valve per remote control valve. One ball valve for quick
coupler valve. One ball valve per remote control valve. Size equal to main line. See
plans for manufacturer, size, and model.
2.8.5. Bronze "Y" type strainer with cleanout valve and monel mesh strainer; size per main line.
See plans for manufacturer and model.
2.8.6. Butterfly Valves:
2.8.6.1. Butterfly valves shall be of the manufacturer, size, and type indicated on the
drawings.
2.8.6.2. Butterfly valves shall have cast iron bodies, and stainless steel stems.
Butterfly valves shall have ductile iron porcelain enamel coated disc.
2.8.6.3. All Butterfly valves shall have a minimum working pressure of not less than
150 psi and shall conform to AWWA standards.
Larwin Park City Of Carlsbad Recreation - Park Development LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION 02810 - 10
.-
2.9. BACKFLOW PREVENTION UNITS
2.9.1. The backflow prevention unit shall be of the manufacturer, size, and type indicated on the
drawings.
The backflow prevention unit shall be installed in accordance with the requirements set
forth by local codes.
The backflow enclosure shall be of the manufacturer, size, and type indicated on the
drawings.
2.9.2.
2.9.3.
2.10. AUTOMATIC CONTROLLER: Shall be a Calsense ET-2000 (stations and other information as per
drawings) controller operating on 11 5 volt service, fused and chassis grounded, programmable, wall
mount, and housed in restroom buildings. Controller shall be capable of receiving (and provided
here with) two (2) radio remote transmitters, including carrying cases.
IRRIGATION HEADS AND DRIP EMITTERS
2.11.1.
2.11.
Sprinkler Heads: All sprinkler heads shall be of the manufacturer size, type, and deliver
the same rate of precipitation with the diameter, or radius, of throw, pressure, and
discharge as shown on the Drawings and specified.
2.1 1.1 .l.
2.1 1.1.2.
2.1 1.1.3.
2.1 1.1.4.
2.1 1.1.5.
2.1 1.1.6.
2.1 1.1.7.
Heads shall have screw adjustments.
Riser units shall be fabricated in accordance with the details shown on the
Drawings.
Riser nipples for all sprinkler heads shall be the same size as the riser
opening in the sprinkler body.
All sprinkler heads of the same type shall be of same manufacturer.
When noted, body shall be equipped with a built-in check valve.
Irrigation heads and drip emitters shall be used as indicated on the drawings.
Irrigation heads shall have purple recycled water warning cover.
2.11.2. Drip Irrigation Equipment
2.1 1.2.1. Drip equipment such as flush valves and tubing shall be of the manufacturer,
size, and type indicated on the drawings.
2.1 1.3. Miscellaneous Equipment
2.1 1.3.1. Equipment such as flow meters, rain sensors, and master valves shall be of
the manufacturer, size and type indicated on the drawings.
2.12. PRESSURE REGULATOR
2.12.1. Pressure regulator make and model per irrigation legend. Set to reduce pressure by 20
psi.
2.13. VALVE BOXES
Larwin Park City Of Carlsbad Recreation - Park Development
LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION 02810 - 11
2.13.1.
2.1 3.2.
2.1 3.3.
2.13.4.
2.1 3.5.
2.1 3.6.
2.1 3.7.
2.1 3.8.
Valve boxes shall be fabricated from a durable, weather-resistant plastic material
resistant to sunlight and chemical action of soils. Plastic rectangular purple irrigation
control box with locking lid, by Brooks Products, or equal.
The cover and box shall be capable of sustaining a load of 1,500 pounds.
Valve box extensions shall be by the same manufacturer as the valve box.
PVC, 6" diameter communication cable pull box.
Automatic control valve and ball valve boxes shall be 16"xll "xl2" rectangular size.
Valve box covers shall be marked "RCV" with the valve identification number, or "BV"
"heat branded" onto the cover in 2 inch high letters / numbers.
Quick coupler valve boxes shall be 10 circular size. Valve box covers shall be marked
with "QCV" "heat branded" onto the cover in 2 inch high letters.
Valve box cover shall be the same color as the valve box.
Valve box cover shall be purple and permanently marked on the cover plate with the
words "Warning, Recycled Water Do Not Drink".
2.14. DRIP IRRIGATION EQUIPMENT:
2.1 4.1. Bubblers: Molded UV stabilized ABS resin 4 outlet self-cleaning flow control device
operating within a pressure range of 10 to 100 psi. Bubblers shall be of the manufacturer,
size, and type indicated on the drawings or an approved equal.
Drip System Filter: Pepco PKPC-64 150 mesh screen, or equal (no known equal).
Drip System Pressure Regulator: Pepco PR-30, or equal (no known equal).
2.14.2.
2.14.3.
2.15. FLOW SENSOR WIRES AND COMMUNICATION WIRES
2.15.1. Flow sensor wires shall be as recommended by the flow sensor manufacturer.
2.15.2. Communication wires for controllers and weather sensor shall be as recommended by
the manufacturer.
2.15.3. All wire runs shall be made in PVC SCH 40 electrical conduit, a minimum of 2 times the
diameter of the wire bundle, and shall sweep up into pull boxes (where greater than
200 ft distance under paving occurs). Pull box spacing shall not exceed 200 ft intervals.
Utilize joint trenching with other utilities where controller communication wiring is to
connect between controllers.
2.1 5.4. Electrical:
2.15.4.1. All electrical equipment shall be NEMA Type 3, waterproofed for exterior
installations.
2.15.4.2. All electrical work shall conform to local codes and ordinances.
2.16. AUTOMATIC CONTROLLER ASSEMBLY
2.1 6.1. Controller assembly shall be furnished and installed complete with all electrical
connections, ready for operation. All power lines shall be placed in rigid conduit and pull
Larwin Park City Of Carlsbad
Recreation - Park Development LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION 02810 - 12
2.17.
2.1 8.
2.19.
2.20.
2.21.
2.22.
boxes.
controller.
Furnish 115 volt outlet and shut-off switch on independent circuit for each
2.16.2. Automatic Controller assembly and enclosure shall be the latest model of the
manufacturer, size, and type on the drawings.
WEATHER SENSOR ASSEMBLY
2.17.1.
FLOW SENSOR ASSEMBLY
2.18.1.
WARNING LABLES AND TAGS
2.19.1.
Weather sensor assembly shall be as specified in the irrigation legend.
Flow sensor assembly shall be as specified in the irrigation legend.
Use T. Christy’s riser markers, with “RECYCLED WATER - DO NOT DRINK’ in English
and Spanish, for all recycled water sprinkler risers installed.
Use T. Christy‘s riser markers, with “WARNING - RECYCLED WATER DO NOT DRINK“
in English and Spanish, for all recycled water remote control valves.
2.19.2.
WARNING TAPES
2.20.1. Warning tape for recycled water mainlines:
2.20.1.1. The plastic warning tape shall be prepared with silver printing on a purple
field having the words, “CAUTION: RECYCLED WATER LINE BELOW”.
The overall width shall be 3 inches.
CONCRETE FOOTINGS
2.21.1. Concrete footings shall be 2,000 PSI. concrete at 28 days, 5 sack minimum mix, natural
color.
EXTRA EQUIPMENT OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE TOOLS
2.22.1. Contractor shall provide to the Owner:
2.22.1 .l.
2.22.1.2.
2.22.1.3.
2.22.1.4.
2.22.1.5.
2.22.1.6.
Five (5) keys for opening and locking each automatic controller cabinet and
enclosure. All automatic controller enclosures shall be keyed alike. All
automatic controller cabinets shall be keyed alike.
Extra drip emitters, drip access boxes, sprinkler heads, shrub adapters, filter
screens and nozzles in amounts. equal to two (2) of each type used on the
project.
Extra tools for adjusting sprinkler heads, in the amounts of two (2) tools
minimum per type of head used.
Two (2) quick coupler keys, with matching swivel hose ells, for each type of
quick coupling valve used.
Two (2) 75 foot long 3/4“ diameter virgin rubber hoses.
Valve box keys: two (2).
Latwin Park City Of Carlsbad Recreation - Park Development
LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION
02810 - 13
2.23. OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE TOOLS
Wrenches:
supplied.
Couplers and Matching Hose Swivels with Globe Valves: Two each.
2.23.1. Two, for disassembly and adjustments of each type of sprinkler head
2.23.2.
2.23.3. Valve Box Keys: Two.
2.23.4. Controller Keys: Two.
3. PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1. EXAMINATION
3.1.1. Verification of Conditions:
3.1.1 .lo
3.1.1.2.
3.1.1.3.
3.1.1.4.
3.1.1.5.
3.1.1.6.
3.1.1.7.
Prior to all work of this section, carefully inspect the installed work of all other
trades and verify that all such work is complete to the point where this
installation may properly commence. Contractor shall acquaint himself with
all site conditions and proposed site conditions as indicated on the plans and
specifications.
Verify that irrigation system may be installed in strict accordance with all
pertinent codes and regulations, the original design, the referenced
standards, and the manufacturer's recommendations.
All scaled dimensions on drawings are approximate. Before proceeding with
any work, Contractor shall carefully check and verify all dimensions and
quantities and shall immediately inform Owner of discrepancies between
drawings and specifications and actual conditions. No work shall be
conducted where discrepancies occur, until approval has been given by the
Owner.
Plan locations of point of connection, pull boxes, existing equipment,
sprinkler heads, backflow prevention devices, valves, controller and pipe
lines are diagrammatic and indicate the spacing and relative locations of all
installations. Locations shall be changed and adjusted as necessary and as
directed to meet existing conditions and obtain complete water coverage.
Final locations shall be determined by final site conditions and plantings.
Install and extend system as shown on the drawings, and as necessary to
carry out the intent of the drawings and specifications.
Point of connection shall be approximately as shown on drawings. Connect
new underground piping and valves and provide all flanges, adapters or
other necessary fittings for connection.
Before starting work, carefully check all grades to determine that work may
safely proceed, keeping within the specified material depths with respect to
finish grade.
Final grades shall be accepted by the Engineer before work on this section
will be allowed to begin.
3.1.2. Field Measurements:
Larwin Park
City Of Carlsbad
Recreation - Park Development
LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION
02810 - 14
3.1.2.1. Make all necessary measurements in the field to ensure precise fit of items
in accordance with the original design. Contractor shall coordinate the
installation of all irrigation materials with all other work.
All scaled dimensions are approximate. The Contractor shall check and
verify all size dimensions prior to proceeding with work under this section.
Exercise extreme care in excavating and working near existing utilities.
Contractor shall be responsible for damages to utilities, which are caused by
his operations or neglect.
3.1.2.2.
3.1.2.3.
3.1.3. Diagrammatic Intent:
3.1.3.1.
3.1.4. Layout:
3.1.4.1.
3.1.4.2.
The drawings are essentially diagrammatic. The size and location of
equipment and fixtures are drawn to scale where possible. Provide offsets
in piping and changes in equipment locations as necessary to conform with
structures and to avoid obstructions or conflicts with other work at no
additional expense to City.
Prior to installation, the Contractor shall stake out all pressure supply lines,
routing and location of sprinkler heads, valves, backflow preventer, and
automatic controller.
Layout irrigation system and make minor adjustments required due to
differences between site and drawings. Where piping is shown on drawings
under paved areas, but running parallel and adjacent to planted areas, install
the piping in the planted areas.
3.1.5. Water Supply:
3.1.5.1. Connections to, or the installation of, the water supply shall be at the
locations shown on the drawings. Minor changes caused by actual site
conditions shall be made at no additional expense to City.
3.1.6. Electrical Service:
3.1.6.1. Connections to the electrical supply shall be at the locations shown on the
drawings. Minor changes caused by actual site conditions shall be made at
no additional expense to City.
3.1.6.2. Contractor shall make electrical connections to the irrigation controller.
Electrical power source to controller locations shall be provided by others.
3.2. POLYVINYL CHLORIDE PIPE INSTALLATION
3.2.1. Storage of Materials:
3.2.1.1. Because of the nature of plastic pipe and fittings, exercise caution in
handling, loading and storing, to avoid damage.
3.2.1.2. The pipe and fittings shall be stored under cover until using, and shall be
transported in a vehicle with a bed long enough to allow the length of pipe to
lay flat so as not to be subjected to undue bending or concentrated external
load at any point.
Latwin Park City Of Carlsbad Recreation - Park Development LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION 02810- 15
3.2.1.3.
3.2.2. Excavation
3.2.2.1.
3.2.2.2.
3.2.2.3.
3.2.2.4.
3.2.2.5.
3.2.2.6.
3.2.2.7.
3.2.3. Piping:
3.2.3.1.
3.2.3.2.
3.2.3.3.
3.2.3.4.
3.2.3.5.
3.2.3.6.
All pipe that has been dented or damaged shall be discarded unless such
dent or damaged section is cut out and pipe rejoined with a coupling.
and Backfilling of Trenches:
Refer to Trenching and Reclaimed Water General Requirements where
applicable.
Locate existing lines, valves and other underground utilities before digging
trenches. Excavate trenches, prepare subgrade, and backfill to line and
grade with sufficient room for pipe fittings, testing and inspecting operations. Do not backfill until the pipe system has been subjected to a hydrostatic test
as specified. Do not cover any installed control wiring until it has been tested
for shorts and visually observed by the Landscape Architect.
Trenches for buried irrigation pressure lines shall be excavated wide enough
to allow a minimum of six inches between parallel pipe lines and eight inches
from lines of other trades. Lines shall not be installed parallel and directly
over one another. Maintain three (3) inches vertical clearance between
crossing irrigation lines; minimum transverse angle is 45 degrees.
Depth of Trench:
Buried Polyvinyl Chloride Pressure Line, 18 inches min., 24 inches max.
All Non-Pressure Piping, 12 inches min., 18 inches max.
All Pressure Pipe Under Roads, 24 inches min., 36 inches max.
Trench depth for buried pipe shall be as specified above from the finish
grade to the top of the pipe. The bottom of the trench shall be free of rocks,
clods, and other sharp-edged objects over 1" diameter size.
Deposit topsoil on one side of trench and subsoil on the opposite side, then
install irrigation lines and test each section.
Backfill trenches, after approval of piping, with approved material, tamping
around pipe and thoroughly compacting all trench fills until 90% relative
compaction has been achieved. Backfill material shall be free from rocks
and clods.
Piping under existing pavement may be installed by jacking, boring, or
hydraulic driving. No hydraulic driving is permitted under asphalt pavement.
Cutting or breaking of existing pavement is not permitted.
Carefully inspect all pipe and fittings before installation, removing dirt, scale,
burrs, and reaming. Install pipe with all markings up for visual inspection
and verification.
Remove all dented and damaged pipe sections.
All lines shall have a minimum clearance of 6 inches from each other and
12 inches from lines of other trades.
Parallel lines shall not be installed directly over each other.
Larwin Park City Of Carlsbad Recreation - Park Development
LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION
02810 - 16
3.2.3.7.
3.2.3.8.
3.2.3.9.
3.2.3.1 0.
3.2.3.1 1.
In solvent welding, use only the specified primer and solvent cement and
make all joints in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommended
methods including wiping all excess solvent from each weld. Allow solvent
welds at least 15 minutes setup time before moving or handling and
24 hours curing time before filling.
PVC pipe shall be installed in a manner, which will provide for expansion and
contraction as recommended by the pipe manufacturer.
Centerload all plastic pipe prior to pressure testing.
All threaded plastic-to-plastic connections shall be assembled using Teflon
tape or Teflon paste.
For plastic-to-metal connections, work the metal connections first. Use a
non-hardening pipe dope on all threaded plastic-to-metal connections,
except where noted otherwise. All plastic-to-metal connections shall be
made with plastic female adapters.
3.2.4. Irrigation Piping and Fittings:
3.2.4.1.
3.2.4.2.
3.2.4.3.
3.2.4.4.
3.2.4.5.
3.2.4.6.
3.2.4.7.
3.2.4.8.
Pipe shall be snaked from side-to-side to allow for expansion and
contraction. Pipe shall rest on smooth ground without bumps, humps, etc.
whether underground or above-grade.
Center load below-grade pipe at 10' intervals with small amount of backfill to
prevent arching and slipping under pressure. Leave joints exposed for site
observation during testing.
Repair any leaks and replace all defective pipe or fittings until lines meet test
requirements. Do not cover any below-grade lines until they have been
checked and approved for tightness, quality of workmanship and materials.
Pipe ends and fittings shall be wiped with "MEK primer, Weld-On "P-70" or
equal, before welding solvent is applied. Welded joints shall be given a
minimum of 15 minutes to set before moving or handling. All field cuts shall
be bevelled to remove burrs and excess material before fitting and gluing
together.
Plastic to brass joints shall be made with plastic female adapters, metal
nipple hand tightened, plus one turn with a strap wrench.
Plastic to plastic joints shall be solvent-weld, assembled per pipe
manufacturer's specifications and using solvent recommended by pipe
manufacturer only.
All connections to polyvinyl chloride pipe mains shall be made horizontally.
No water shall be permitted in the pipe until a period of at least 24 hours has
elapsed for solvent weld setting and curing.
3.3. BRASS PIPE INSTALLATION
3.3.1. Cut brass piping by power hacksaw, circular cutting machine using an abrasive wheel, or
hand hacksaw. No piping shall be cut with metallic wheel cutter of any description.
Ream and remove rough edges of burrs so smooth and unobstructed flow is obtained.
Larwin Park
City Of Carlsbad Recreation - Park Development LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION 02810 - 17
3.3.2. Carefully and smoothly place thread lubricant on male thread only. Tighten screwed joints with tongs or wrenches. Caulking is not permitted.
3.4. REMOTE CONTROL WIRING INSTALLATION
I
3.4.1.
3.4.2.
3.4.3.
3.4.4.
3.4.5.
3.4.6.
3.4.7.
3.4.8.
3.4.9.
3.4.1 0.
Provide one control wire and one common ground wire to service each valve in system.
Provide 4'-0" minimum expansion loop at each valve to permit removal and maintenance
of valves.
A continuous run of wire shall be used between a controller and each remote control
valve. Under no circumstances shall splices be used without prior approval.
Install control wires at least 18" below finish grade when not installed in same trench with
buried pressure pipe. Bundle wire together with electrical tape 10 feet on center. Bundle
shall be secured to the mainline with tape at intervals of 20 feet. All connections shall be
of an approved type and shall occur in a valve box. Provide an 18-inch service loop at
each connection. Install wires with a 2 foot coiled loop up into each remote control valve
box along mainline route.
Install control wires and irrigation pressure piping in common trenches wherever
possible.
All irrigation control wiring passing through structure, underneath paving, traveled ways
or roadways shall be placed inside conduits.
As a part of the work to allow for possible damage to any common or control wire, the
Contractor shall run an extra control wire on each leg of mainline from the controller to
the farthest RCV. Any other additional wires required to be pulled shall be as noted on
plans.
All wires in pull boxes shall be loose and shall not come within three inches (3") from lid.
Wire Connections: Common, control and spare wires shall be installed with a 4'-0" coiled
excess wire length at each end enclosure. Each wire splice shall be encased in the
waterproof epoxy of waterproof connectors. Wire splices shall be made only in valve or
pull boxes.
Testing: All wiring shall be tested for continuity, open circuits and unintentional grounds
prior to connecting to equipment. The minimum insulation resistance to ground shall be
fifty (50) megaohms. Any wiring not meeting this requirement shall be replaced, at the
Contractor's expense. The responsibility of testing lies with the Contractor to insure it is
completed.
Numbering and Tagging: Identify direct burial control wires at each automatic valve and
at the terminal strips of the controller with corresponding valve station numbers shown on
the drawings. Tag wires at the terminal strips with 3M Scotchcode SER Wire Markers or
equal. Identify spare wires by capping ends with waterproof connectors as specified
above and tagging with an I.D. tag marked "SP".
3.5. BACKFILLING
3.5.1. Backfill material on all lines shall be the same as adjacent soil free of debris, litter, and
rocks over 1/2 inch in diameter.
3.5.2. Backfill shall be tamped in 4-inch layers under the pipe and uniformly on both sides for
the full width of the trench and the full length of the pipe. Backfill materials shall be
sufficiently damp to permit thorough compaction, free of voids. Backfill shall be
Larwin Park City Of Carlsbad Recreation - Park Development LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION
02810 - 18
3.6.
3.7.
3.8.
3.9.
compacted to dry density equal to adjacent undisturbed soil and shall conform to
adjacent grades.
3.5.3. Flooding in lieu of tamping is not allowed.
3.5.4. Under no circumstances shall truck wheels be used to compact backfill.
3.5.5. Provide sand backfill a minimum of 6 inches over and under all piping under paved
areas.
AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER CONTROLLER ASSEMBLY INSTALLATION
3.6.1. The exact location of the controller shall be approved by the Landscape Architect or
City's authorized representative before installation. Automatic controller shall be installed
as Shown in detail drawings and as directed. Controllers shall be tested with complete
electrical power connections. The Contractor shall be responsible for temporary and
permanent power to the controller for operation and testing purposes. Controller shall be
fully operable prior to planting operations.
3.6.2. Connections to control wiring shall be made within wiring boxes.
3.6.3. Electrical supply wiring shall be installed in a rigid PVC conduit from controller to
electrical outlet or power pedestal. The Electrical Contractor shall be responsible for
installing all wiring to the sub-panels, clocks, or elsewhere as required, in order to
complete this installation. A disconnect switch shall be included as a part of this work.
3.6.4. Seal open ends of all electrical conduit with waterproof sealant to keep out pests.
3.6.5. The irrigation system shall be programmed to operate during the periods of minimal use
of the design area. Program time on each station prior to testingkite observation by the
Landscape Architect, County Health Dept., and Carlsbad Municipal Water District.
WEATHER SENSOR ASSEMBLY INSTALLATION
3.7.1. Weather sensor (Rain Bucket) shall be installed per the manufacturer's instructions and
details, in a location where it shall be exposed to unobstructed rainfall.
3.7.2. Install sensor wire its entire length from controller to sensor, inside electrical conduit.
Seal open ends with waterproof sealant to keep out pests.
.
REMOTE CONTROL VALVE INSTALLATION
3.8.1. Install remote control valves in locations approximately as shown on the drawings, with
4" distance from top of flow control stem to valve box lid. Install a union type connection,
with one ball valve per remote control valve. Fit with valve box and locking cover as
shown in the detailed drawings. Fit with reclaimed water use warning tag where
reclaimed water is to be used with valve.
3.8.2. Install one valve per valve box, maximum. Do not run other pipes through valve boxes.
Valves shall be installed in planted areas, 12" from curbs or paved areas, wherever
possible. Never place valves in traffic areas or in pavement.
VALVE BOX AND PULL BOX INSTALLATION
3.9.1. Install valve boxes as shown in the detail drawings. Valve boxes shall be installed in
shrub areas whenever possible. Install no more than one valve per box.
Larwin Park City Of Carlsbad Recreation - Park Development
LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION
02810 - 19
3.9.2. Each valve box shall be installed on a foundation of 3/4 inch gravel backfill, 3 cubic feet
minimum. Valve boxes shall be installed with their tops 112 inch above the surface of
surrounding finish grade in lawn areas and 2 inches above finish grade in ground cover
areas.
3.9.3. Heat brand in 2“ high lettering, the identification number of the valve and the controller
clock on the cover of the remote control valve box.
3.9.4. Pull boxes shall be labeled “PB” in like manner described for valves, “BV” for ball valve,
etc., etc.
3.10. BACKFLOW PREVENTION UNITS
3.10.1. Backflow Prevention Units shall be installed as indicated on the drawings. The backflow
prevention unit shall be installed in accordance with the requirements set forth by local
codes.
3.10.2. The exact location of the backflow device shall be approved by the Landscape Architect
or City‘s authorized representative before installation.
3.10.3. The contractor shall be responsible for the testing and certification of the backflow device
for proper operation. Testing and certification shall be performed by a state qualified
backflow tester.
3.11. MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT
3.1 1.1. Install all assemblies specified herein according to the respective detail drawings or
specifications, using best standard practices.
3.11.2. Quick coupler valves shall be set approximately 12 inches from walks, curbs, header
boards, or paved areas where applicable.
3.11.3. Install devices such as rain sensors, freeze sensors, flush valves, air relief valves and
master valves as indicated on the drawings and as recommended by the manufacturer.
3.12. FLUSHING
3.12.1. Main Lines: Flush underground mains and lead-in connections to sprinkler system
thoroughly before connecting to control valves. Flush mains using a flush out assembly
at lowest elevation.
3.12.2. Prior to installation of irrigation heads, the valves shall be opened and a full head of
water used to flush out the lines and risers.
3.12.3. Lateral Pipes: After all sprinkler pipe lines and risers are in place and connected and
prior to installation of sprinkler heads, flush all lines with a full head of water. Do not
install heads until lines have been flushed and approved.
3.12.4. Irrigation heads shall be installed after flushing the system has been completed.
3.13. MULTI-EXIT DRIP EMITTER AND DISTRIBUTION TUBING INSTALLATION
3.13.1. Thoroughly flush out all lateral PVC lines prior to connecting drip emitters to risers.
3.13.2. Install drip emitters onto risers. Connect distribution tubing to outlets and extend (15 ft
max.) with bundles in relaxed manner, to plantings. Secure tubing with tubing stakes
Larwin Park
City Of Carlsbad
Recreation - Park Development
LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION
0281 0 - 20
and equip each tube outlet with bug cap. Install per the drip emitter and typical layout
details, and per manufacturer's recommendations.
3.13.3. Drip tubing shall be installed as indicated on the drawings. Spacing of drip tubing shall
not exceed maximum indicated on the drawings. For dripline tubing system, install PVC
non-pressure lines connecting between each planter area, from the drip valve outward.
Flush system, then install dripline on grade, using tubing stakes every five feet along
tubing length. Flush system again. Install airhacuum relief valves and flush valves.
Test system.
3.14. SPRINKLER HEAD INSTALLATION
3.14.1. Install all sprinkler heads as shown in the details, and as shown in the manufacturer's
instructions. Spacing of heads shall not exceed maximum indicated on the drawings.
Riser nipples shall be the same size as the riser opening in the sprinler body.
3.14.2. Nozzle size of all heads shall be adjusted to suit any particular conditions of the area.
This shall be done after the system has been thoroughly tested, immediately after written
notification by the Landscape Architect and/or County Health Department.
3.15. Y-STRAINER ASSEMBLY INSTALLATION
3.15.1. Install Y-strainer assembly immediately downstream backflow preventer on mainline,
prior to any other valves. Coordinate exact location with Park and Recreation
Representative for review and determination of placing assembly.
3.16. SCREEN FILTER ASSEMBLY INSTALLATION
3.16.1. Install screen filter assembly as shown in the detail. Allow clearance around assembly
inside box for maintenance of filter.
3.17. SHUT-OFF VALVE AND PRESSURE REGULATOR INSTALLATION
3.17.1. Install all shut-off valves and pressure regulator approximately where shown on drawings
and as shown on the details.
3.18. QUICK COUPLING VALVE INSTALLATION
3.18.1. Install quick coupling valves next to paving, as per plan, a maximum of 150 ft. apart on
mainline, and as per the detail.
3.19. FLOW SENSOR INSTALLATION
3.19.1. Install flow sensor immediately downstream V-strainer. Install one per automatic
controller. Install flow sensor wires within electrical conduit.
3.20. SPRING CHECK VALVE INSTALLATION
3.20.1. Install spring check valves on risers of sprinklers to prevent low head drainage. Install
spring check valves on laterals where indicated.
3.21. SWING CHECK VALVE INSTALLATION
3.21 .l. Swing check valves shall be installed on laterals where shown, and as detailed.
.-
Larwin Park City Of Carlsbad Recreation - Park Development LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION 0281 0 - 21
3.22. CONCRETE FOOTING INSTALLATION
3.22.1. Footings shall be placed on 90% minimurn compacted or undisturbed subgrade,
Construct to shapes specified and parallel to adjacent paved areas. Broom finish
exposed surface.
3.23. PRESSURE TESTS
3.23.1. Do not allow or cause any of the work of this section to be covered up or enclosed until it
has been observed, tested and accepted by the Landscape Architect, City, and
governing agencies. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for notifying the
Landscape Architect, City, and governing agencies, a minimum of 48 hours in advance,
where and when the work is ready for testing. Test pressure supply lines under 150 psi
hydrostatic pressure for a period of 4 hours. All laterals shall be tested under existing
static pressure to ensure all fittings and connections are water tight. Cap all risers for
testing. Do not backfill over any line more than necessary for testing until line has been
inspected, tested, and approved. Center load only. Leave pipe connections uncovered,
Install remote control valves, quick couplers, and other valve assemblies after testing
has been approved.
3.24. COVERAGE TESTS
3.24.1. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for notifying the Landscape Architect, City,
and governing agencies, a minimum of 48 hours in advance, where and when the work is
ready for testing. When the sprinkler system is completed, and before any planting, the
Contractor shall perform a coverage test of each system in its entirety to determine if the
water coverage for the planted areas is complete and adequate in the presence of the
Landscape Architect. Furnish all materials and perform all Work required to correct any
inadequacies of coverage due to deviations from the Drawings or where the system has
been willfully installed as shown on Drawings when it is obviously inappropriate or
ineffective without bringing it to the attention of the Architect (or Owner's Representative).
This test shall be performed prior 'to the planting of any lawns, hydroseed, or
g rou ndcove r.
3.25. SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT
3.25.1. Adjust valve flow controls for proper operation. Adjust sprinkler heads for alignment or
change nozzles for coverage and minimum overthrow. Make adjustments prior to any
planting. Entire irrigation system shall be under full automatic operation for 5 days prior to
any planting.
3.25.2. If it is determined by the Landscape Architect or City's authorized representative that
additional adjustments or nozzle changes will be required to provide proper coverage, all
necessary changes or adjustments shall be made prior to any planting.
3.25.3. The entire system shall be operating properly before any planting operations commence.
3.25.4. Automatic control valves are to be adjusted so that the irrigation heads and drip tubing
operate at the pressure recommended by the manufacturer.
3.26. ACCEPTANCE
3.26.1. The Work of this Section shall be accepted in writing when completed to the satisfaction
of the Owner's Representative after the 90-day Maintenance Period.
Larwin Park City Of Carlsbad Recreation - Park Development LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION
02810 - 22
3.26.1.1. Sprinkler Heads: Clean and adjust heads and repeat coverage test after
planting to ensure full coverage at end of landscape maintenance period.
Refer to Section 02900 - Landscaping.
3.26.1.2. Training: Make arrangements to train Owner's maintenance personnel in
the proper operations of the irrigation system and equipment. Submit affidavit stating date and duration of training giving all names of those
present.
3.27. IRRIGATION MAINTENANCE
3.27.1. Maintenance period shall begin when all Work indicated on Drawings and specified has
been completed, inspected and approved by Owner's Representative. Maintenance
work shall be performed as specified herein after, and shall be continued for a minimum
period of 90 calender days. During the maintenance period the Contractor shall adjust
and maintain the irrigation system in a fully operational condition providing complete
irrigation coverage to all intended plantings. The Contractor shall not be released from
the maintenance period obligation until all items found during inspections have been
resolved to Owner's Representative's satisfaction in conformance with the Drawings and
Specifications, and a written statement so stating has been issued.
3.27.1 .l.
3.27.1.2.
3.27.1.3.
3.27.1.4.
3.27.1 -5.
Repair Materials: Have at the job site, at all times, a repair kit and spare
parts for plastic pipe and irrigation heads.
Tools: Provide adequate garden hoses, sprinkler heads, hose bibb keys,
and other equipment and materials as necessary for the execution of
maintenance work as required.
Weekly Inspection: Once each week of operation, after turning on a valve,
examine visually each sprinkler head in the section to make certain there is
no blockage by dirt or rock particles. If damage occurs to any sprinkler head
causing an unrepairable effect, the damaged part shall be immediately
replaced with a new part of the same manufacture at no additional cost to
Owner.
Repairs: If leakage occurs around junction of bonnet and body of sprinkler
head, control valves, hose bibbs, or gate valves, correct by replacing the
gasket between the two parts. If leakage occurs at the point where the valve
stem emerges through the top of the bonnet, correct by tightening the
packaging nut against the bonnet. Tighten only-enough to cause the leak to
stop. Replace packing if necessary.
Irrigation Timing, Tests, Schedules:
3.27.1.5.1. Supervised watering of grounds shall follow a preplanned
schedule, differing only as required by the season of the year.
3.27.1.5.2. The criterion for developing a schedule for irrigation is the
proper maintenance of soil moisture. Adjust and improve the
schedule as necessary and as approved by Owner's
Representative.
3.27.1.5.3. Perform precipitation and soil moisture tests as approved by
Owner's Representative.
Larwin Park City Of Carlsbad Recreation - Park Development
LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION
02810 - 23
3.28. FINAL OBSERVATION AT END OF MAINTENANCE PERIOD PRIOR TO ACCEPTANCE OF
IRRIGATION WORK
3.28.1. Operate each system in its entirety for Owner's Representative at the time of final
observation. Any items deemed not acceptable shall be reworked to the complete
satisfaction of Owner's Representative. Show evidence to the Owner's Representative
that Owner has received all accessories, charts, Record Drawings, and equipment as
required before final observation occurs. Final inspection will not commence without
record drawings as prepared by the Irrigation Contractor.
3.29. CLEAN UP
3.29.1. Refer to Section 01770. Clean up as each portion of the Work of this Section
progresses. Remove refuse and excess dirt from the site, broom clean walks and
paving, and repair any damage to surrounding areas as approved. Any damage
sustained on the work of others shall be repaired to original conditions. Upon completion
of the Work, restore ground surfaces to required elevations and remove excess
materials, debris, and equipment from the site.
END OF SECTION
Larwin Park City Of Carlsbad Recreation - Park Development LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION
0281 0 - 24
SECTION 02870
SITE FURNISHINGS
1.
1.1.
1.2.
1.3.
1.4.
2.
2.1.
PART 1 - GENERAL
DESCRIPTION
1.1.1. The work includes furnishing and installing site furnishings as indicated and as specified.
Potable water supply and plumbing for water fountains are specified in Section 02810.
SUBMITTALS
1.2.1.
1.2.2.
Submittal procedures and quantities are specified in Section 01 330.
Shop Drawings and Descriptive Data:
showing dimensions and cross-section location, size, and type of reinforcement,
Submit shop drawings and descriptive data
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.3.1. Installer shall have provided park and playground equipment and surfacing materials for
a minimum of 5 years. The installation of manufactured products shall be completed in
accordance with manufacturers specifications.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
1.4.1, Handle and store units in a manner that will guard against cracking, chipping, warping,
soiling, staining or other physical damage, discoloration, or distortion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
MATERIALS
2.1 .I. Cement: Type I or Ill conforming to ASTM C 150-85. All cement for exposed concrete
surfaces shall be of the same type and from the same manufacturing plant.
Water: Water for mixing and curing shall be free of acid, alkali, oil or organic material
that may interfere with setting of the cement.
Aggregates: Clean, hard, strong, durable material, free of injurious amounts of organic
impurities.
Admixtures: Use of admixtures is at the Contractor's option.
2.1.4.1. Air-Entraining Admixtures: ASTM C 260-77.
2.1.4.2. Retarding and Water Reducing Admixtures: ASTM C 494-82.
Reinforcement: All reinforcing steel, except No. 2 bars shall be deformed.
2.1 51.
2.1.5.2. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185-85.
2.1.2.
2.1.3.
2.1.4.
2.1.5.
Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 61 5-84a, Grade 40 or 60.
Larwin Community Park
SITE FURNISHINGS 02870 - 1
2.2. CONCRETE MIXES
2.2.1. Proportions: Proportion concrete design mix in accordance with ACI 21 1 .I or ACI 318,
Chapter 4 as required to obtain a compressive strength of 4,000 pounds per square inch
at 28 days when tested on a 6" by 12' cylinder in accordance with ASTM C 39-84. Air
content of the concrete shall be between 4 percent and 6 percent. Mixture shall consist
of sand and stone aggregates in a ratio of 1 to 4 by weight; white portland cement or a
blend of white and standard portland cement, coloring agent and water as required to
achieve the color selected by the Engineer.
2.2.2. Mixing: Materials shall be mixed in proportions controlled by weight in a semi-automatic
batch plant. Mixing shall be done in a turbine type mixer which will distribute coarse and
fine aggregates evenly throughout the mix. Water content shall be held to a minimum
necessary for placement in order to prevent shrinkage cracking. Take all precautions
necessary to ensure uniform color throughout the mix.
2.3. FABRICATION
2.3.1. Casting Molds: Precast concrete furnishings shall be cast in polished molds of sufficient
rigidity to assure products with dimensional tolerances equal to or better than those
specified in PCI MNL 116. Concrete shall be vibrated in place in closed molds. Molds
shall have characteristics to achieve a smooth surface.
2.3.2. Reinforcement: Provide all reinforcing necessary to structurally support the anticipated
loads on the units and all stresses imposed by transportation and handling.
2.3.3. Finishes: Finish of formed surfaces shall be smooth and free of all irregularities.
Surfaces shall receive an acid etch finish. Texture of surfaces shall be uniform after
etching. Color shall be as indicated per plan.
2.4. FURNITURE ITEMS
2.4.1. Trash Receptacles: San Diego Precast Model No. TR 32 RP with Lid TRLD 32 Seagull
or approved equal. Natural Concrete color, with a medium sandblast finish.
2.4.1.1. Contact: San Diego Precast, 619-449-6810.
2.4.2. Bollards
2.4.2.1. Driveway Location: Removable type as manufactured by QuickCrete Model
QR-8B-C2-T2, or approved equal. Color shall be C1, Natural with a medium
sandblast finish.
2.4.2.2. ADA Parking Location: Precast bollard as shown on Architectural Plans
2.4.2.3. Contact: Brian Gotz, (909) 737-6240.
2.4.3. Picnic Tables: QuickCrete Model No. Q-LBT-96-ADA PT, or approved equal. Color shall
be natural concrete.
Larwin Community Park SITE FURNISHINGS
02870 - 2
2.4.4. Park Bench: QuickCrete Model No. Q2CLS72B or approved equal with cast aluminum
skateboard busters, spacing per manufacturer’s recommendation, or at a minimum of 3
per each side. Color shall be C1, Natural, with light sandblast finish.
,-
2.4.4.1 - Contact: Brian GO~, (909) 737-6240.
2.4.5. BBQ - Hot Ash Container:
2.4.5.1. BBQ Prep Center:
approved equal. Color shall be C1, Natural, with medium sandblast finish.
QuickCrete Model No. QC-BBQ 2230 T2(LSB) or
2.4.5.2. Hot Ash Container: QuickCrete Model No. Q-PSHA-2842 T2(LSB) or
approved equal. Color shal be cl, Natural, with medium sandblast finish
See attached drawing at end of this specification.
2.4.5.3. Contact: Brian Gok, (909) 737-6240.
2.4.6. Bike Rack: Concrete Bike Block, Robbins Precast, Inc., (909) 277-8888 or approved
equal.
2.4.7. Precast Park Monument Sicln: QuickCrete Model No. Q- 3s to be one sided, color to be
C3, Latte, light sandblast finish. Include costs for colored City Recreation Logo and
provide shop drawings for Owner review and approval. Contractor to provide conceptual sign drawing ( attached at end of this specification) to supplier for use in preparing final
shop drawings for precast concrete park monument sign.
3. PART 3 - EXECUTION
.- 3.1. INSTALLATION
3.1 .l. Install furnishings in accordance with approved shop drawings and descriptive data.
Unload and place units as recommended by the manufacturer and in locations approved by Agency Representative. Unload and handle the units without exposing them to
stresses or loads for which they were not designed. Exact location of units shall be as
directed by the Architect or owner. Connect furnishings to supporting pads by means of
the connection devices indicated on the approved shop drawings.
END OF SECTION
c
Larwin Community Park SITE FURNISHINGS 02870 - 3
* APPROX. WT: 968 Ibs. F’LE No. PSHA284
1 1 /3/91
1” = 1
W.C.
* INSTALLATION IS REQUIRED BY OTHERS. * ALL EDGES TO HAVE 1/4” RADIUS MIN. * MANUFACTURING TOLERANCE *1/4”. * PRODUCT: Q-PSHA-2842
Authorized Signature * QUANTITY: * CONCRETE COLOR: 3 /- Ashy&/
* CONCRETE TEXTURE: 7-4- Ml”d/~ “no exceplion token” authorizotion is given lo Ouick Crete * SEALER: STANDARD GLOSS sEALERSICd47ius’t~ produce this drowing os shown within o 1/4” toteronce.
* INCLUDES BLACK GRATE & CHAIN
DATE:
SCALE:
Date DRAFTER: By signing obove or slomping this drowing ”opproved” or
741 W. Parkridge Ave. P.O. Box 639
Norco. Ca 91760
(909) 737-6240 FOX (909) 737-7032
i
HOT ASH CONTAINER (0-PSHA-2842) - 1 OF 1
28”SQ. 23 1/4”SQ. L
42”HT
I
I
-STEEL ASH GRATE
-
PLAN VIEW
ELEVATION VIEW
(4) CAST-IN LOGOS
LETTERS PAINTED: WHITE
BACKROUND PAINTED: RED
__ @ 90’ APART
ATTACHMENT
/I1 QUICK CRETE PRODUCTS CORP. I C 0 N STR U CT IO N P LAN
SECTION 02881
PLAYGROUND EQUIPMENT AND STRUCTURES
1.
1.1.
1.2.
1.3.
1.4. -
2.
2.1.
3.
3.1.
PART I - GENERAL
DESCRIPTION
1.1.1. Provide all labor, materials, equipment, tools, services, and miscellaneous and incidental
work to complete all play equipment installations as indicated on the Drawings and as
specified.
SUBMITTALS
1.2.1. Product literature.
1.2.2. Shop Drawings: Installation of Playground Equipment in accordance with IPEMA and
Manufacturer's recommendations.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.3.1. Installer shall have provided park and playground equipment and surfacing materials for
a minimum of 5 years. The installation of manufactured products shall be completed in
accordance with manufacturers specifications.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
1.4.1. Handle and store units in a manner that will guard against cracking, chipping, warping,
soiling, staining or other physical damage, discoloration, or distortion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
PLAY EQUIPMENT
2.1 .Is As manufactured by Landscape Structures or approved equal.
2.1.2. A detailed Play Equipment Specification including a list of play equipment components
specific to this project for ordering purposes has been attached as :
2.1.3. Appendix 1- Equipment for 2-5 Year Olds and Appendix 2- Equipment for 5-12 Year
Olds), Contractor shall verify that all components, including hardware, and any special
tools required for installation, have been included in bidding and installation of the play
equipment in accordance with the Construction Drawings and the specifications herein.
Contractor shall review play equipment order with Owner Representative prior to placing
order with supplier or manufacturer to verify color and play components.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
3.1.1. Install all play equipment in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions.
3.1.2. Repair damaged surfaces to acceptance of the City's Representative. Clean items to
remove dirt and stains.
Latwin Community Park PLAYGROUND EQUIPMENT AND STRUCTURES
02881 - 1
APPENDIX 1
.-
A#
Material Specifications
Larwin Community Park
Tot Lot Equipment
(2-5 Year Olds)
General Specifications: Material: All materials shall be structurally sound and suitable for safe play. Durability shall be
ensured on all steel parts by the use of time-tested coatings such as zinc plating, zinc-nickel
plating, powdercoating, TenderTuff-coating, etc. Colors shall be specified.
Fasteners: Primary fasteners shall be socketed and pinned tamperproof in design, stainless steel
(SST) per ASTM F 879 unless otherwise indicated (see specific product
installatiodspecifications). All primary fasteners shall include a locking patch type material that
will meet the minimum torque requirements of IFI-125. Manufacturer to provide special tools for
pinned hex fasteners.
TenderTuff-Coating: All metal components to be TenderTuff-coated shall be thoroughly cleaned
in a hot phosphatizing pressure washer, then primed with a clear acrylic thermosetting solution.
Primed parts shall be preheated prior to dipping in U.V. stabilized, liquid poly vinyl chloride, then
salt cured at approximately 400 degrees. The finished coating shall be approximately .080" +/-
.020" thick at an 85 durometer hardness and have a matte finish. Four standard colors are
available.
Polyester Powdercoating: All metal components to be powdercoated shall be free of excess weld
and spatter. Parts shall be thoroughly cleaned in a 6-Stage Pretreatment system with a hot
phosphatizing bath and a non-chrome seal for corrosion resistance, then thoroughly dried.
Powdercoating shall be electrostatically applied and oven cured at 350 degrees. Average
thichess: .004".
Super Durable TGIC polyester powder shall be specially formulated for optimum U.V. stability
and glossiness and shall meet or exceed ASTM Standards for:
Adhesion (D-3359B)
Hardness (D-3363)
Impact (D-2794)
Salt Spray resistance (B-117)
Paint Line shall employ a "checkered" adhesion test daily.
Fifteen standard colors are available.
Decks: All Tenderdecks shall be of modular design and have 5/16" diameter holes on the standing
surface. There shall be (4) slots in each face to accommodate face mounting of components.
Tenderdecks shall be manufactured fkom a single piece of low carbon 12 GA (.lOSll) sheet steel
conforming to ASTM specification A-569. The sheet shall be perforated then flanged formed and
reinforced as necessary to ensure structural integrity. The unit shall then be TenderTuff-coated
brown only. Tenderdecks shall be designed so that all sides are flush with the outside edge of the
supporting posts.
Page 1 ofEC'7
Rotationally Molded Poly Parts: These parts shall be molded using prime compounded linear low-
density polyethylene with a tensile strength of 2500 psi per ASTM D638 and with color and UV-
stabilizing additives. Wall thrckness varies by product fiom .187" (3/16") to .3 12" (5/16"). Four
standard colors are available.
Perrnalene Parts: These parts shall be manufactured from 3/4" thick high-density polyethylene that
has been specially formulated for optknum U.V. stability and color retention. Products shall meet
or exceed density of .933 G/cc pe~ ASTM D1505, tensile strength of 2400 PSI per ASTM D638.
Five standard solid colors are available. Some Permalene parts are available in a two-color product
with (2) .070" thrck exterior layers over a .610" interior core of a contrasting color. Eight standard
two-color options are available.
Footings: Unless otherwise specified, the bury on all footings shall be 34" below Finished Grade
(FG) on all in-ground play events/posts. Other types of anchoring are available upon request.
(PS) General Specifications: Posts: 2 3/8" square aluminum posts shall have a minimum wall thickness of .125" and be
extruded of 6061-T6 aluminum alloy and have rounded comers and ribbed faces for maximum
safety. A cast aluminum top cap shall be installed at the factory with stainless steel knurled
spacers and aluminum drive rivets. Flanges for panels and deck supports shall be extruded of
6061-T6 aluminum alloy and slide into slots extruded in posts. Flanges and deck supports shall be
attached in the factory with stainless steel knurled spacers and aluminum drive rivets. All direct
bury posts shall have a "finished grade marker" positioned on the post identifying the 34" bury
line and the top of the required surfacing. A molded low-density polyethylene cap, with drain
holes, shall be pressed onto the bottom end of the post to increase the footing area. Posts shall
have a post number sticker for installation purposes. All surface mount posts shall be continuously
welded to a 1/4" x 6" square 6061-T6 aluminum surface mount plate and allow for 2" ofprotective
surfacing. Posts shall be powdercoated to a specified color.
Aluminum Post Mechanical Properties:
Yield Strength (min): 35,000 PSI
Tensile Strength (min): 38,000 PSI
% Elongation in 2 inches: 10
Modulus of Elasticity: 10 x 106 PSI
Arch Posts: Arch posts shall have the same shape as the posts and be extruded from 6063-T4
aluminum alloy. Roof support flanges shall be of the same shape and material as the panel flanges.
Arch shall be formed in a 180 degree arc on a 2 1 'I center line radius. Arches shall be secured to
standard length posts with solid aluminurn sleeves that are tapped to receive (16) 3/8" x 5/8" hex-
pin cap screws per arch. Arch posts shall be powdercoated to a specified color.
111397B - Posts For Decks 114"/48" DecWSlideWinder Off 40" Deck
Post:
111396B - Posts For Roofs 137"/48"'Deck
Post:
See Playshaper (PS) General Specifications.
See Playshaper (PS) General Specifications.
Page 2 of 8
134973C - Transfer Module, Brown Deck Only To 48" Deck, Curved, Left or Right Stee
Deck
Railings:
Flange formed from 12 GA (. 105") sheet steel conforming to ASTM A569. Standmg surface is
perforated with 5/16" diameter holes and measures 29" per (2) sides. Finish TenderTufT, brown in
color.
Weldment comprised of formed 1 1/8" O.D. x 11 GA (.l20") steel tubing with 203 or 303 stainless
steel threaded inserts. Finish TenderTa, color specified.
Infill Panel: Solid color panel measures 7 518" wide x 30" high, color specified.
Step Sectionsmop Step Section: Formed from 12 GA (.105") sheet steel conforming to ASTM A569. Standing surface is 24 3/8"
wide x 14" deep and is perforated with 5/16" diameter holes. Finish: TenderTuff, brown in color.
Deck Support:
Fasteners:
Weldment comprised of 3 1/2" O.D. RS-20 (.125") galvanized steel tubing and 3/8" O.D. x 5"
long CRS rod. Finish: Powdercoat, brown in color.
Primary fasteners shall be socketed and pinned tamperproof in design, stainless steel (SST) per
ASTM F 879 unless otherwise indicated (see specific product installatiodspecifications).
21949A - Kick Plate 8" Rise. 90* Tri-Deck
Kick Plate: Fabricated from 11 GA (.120") HR flat steel. Finish: TenderTuff, brown in color.
Fasteners: Primary fasteners shall be socketed and pinned tamperproof in design, stainless steel (SST) per
ASTM F 879 unless otherwise indicated (see specific product installatiodspecifications).
111237A - Sauare Tenderdeck, Brown Only
Square Deck:
Fasteners:
Flange formed from 12 GA (.lOS") sheet steel conforming to ASTM A569. Standing surface is
perforated with 5/16" diameter holes. Deck face has (4) slotted holes for face mounting
components. The finished size measures 2 5/8" x 44 3/8" x 44 3/8". Finish TenderTuff, brown in
color.
Primary fasteners shall be socketed and pinned tamperproof in design, stainless steel (SST) per
ASTM F 879 unless otherwise indicated (see specific product installatiodspecifications).
117495A - Trianpular Tenderdeck. Brown Only
Triangular Deck
Fasteners:
rc-
Flange formed from 12 GA (.lOS') sheet steel conforming to ASTM A569. Standing surface is
perforated with 5/16" diameter holes. Deck face has (4) slotted holes for face mounting
components. The finished size of two of the three sides measures 2 5/8" x 39 1/4" on the face of
the deck and the other side measures 2 5/8" x 55 1/2". Finish: TenderTuff, brown in color.
Primary fasteners shall be socketed and pinned tamperproof in design, stainless steel (SST) per
ASTM F 879 unless otherwise indicated (see specific product installatiodspecifications).
Page 3 of S3
129816A - Sauare Polv Roofs Sauare Peak Tile Roof, w/L,o~o Panels"
Square Tile Roof Rotationally molded fr0mU.V. stabilized linear low density polyethylene. Roof measures 53 1/2"
x 55 3/4" x 34 3/8" high, color specified.
Roof Logo: Two color roof logo measures 41" wide x 5 1/8" high, color specified.
Fasteners: Primary fasteners shall be socketed and pinned tamperproof in design, stainless steel (SST) per
ASTM F 879 unless otherwise indicated (see specific product installatiodspecifications).
Roof Sleeve: Cast from 3 19 almag. Finish: Powdercoat, color specified.
111288A - Driver Panel, (1") Learning Wall Panels
Pennalene Panel: Two color panel measures 39 1/2" wide x 30 314" high, color specified.
Hub: Solid color pennalene, color specified.
Wheel:
Wheel Bracket:
12" diameter cast 319.1 aluminum alloy. Shaft-303 stainless steel. Finish: TenderTuff, color
specified.
Weldment comprised of formed 3/16" plate and 5/8" O.D. shaft. Finish: Powdercoat, color
specified.
Steering Wheel Cap: Aluminum alloy 6061-T6. Finish Powdercoat, white in color.
Fasteners : Primary fasteners shall be socketed and pinned tamperproof in design, stamless steel (SST) per
ASTM F 879 unless otherwise indicated (see specific product installatiodspecifications).
111291A - Store Panel. Ground Level Only
Pennalene Panel: Solid color panel measures 39 1/2" wide x 30 314" high, color specified.
Fasteners: Primary fasteners shall be socketed and pinned tamperproof in design, stainless steel (SST) per
ASTM F 879 unless otherwise indicated (see specific product installationhpecificatiom).
117946A - Wire Barriers Short (Sa.. Corner and Extension Decks)
Bamer:
Fasteners :
Weldment comprised of 5/8" solid steel vertical rails, 1 1/8" O.D. steel horizontal rails with 203 or
303 stainless steel welded inserts with 5/8" internal threads, and 114" diameter wire. Barrier
measures 39 1/2" wide x 30 3/4" high. Finish: TenderTa, color specified.
Primary fasteners shall be socketed and pinned tamperproof in design, stainless steel (SST) per
ASTM F 879 unless otherwise indicated (see specific product installatiodspecifications).
123339A - Curved Polv Slide 40" Deck
Slide: Rotationally molded from U.V. stabilized linear low density polyethylene, color specified.
Permalene Panel: Solid color panel measures 39 1/2" wide x 30 314" high, color specified.
Page 4 of Sy
Mid-Support :
Exit Footer:
Fasteners:
Weldment comprised of 1.315" O.D. RS-20 (.080" - .090'') and 1/4" x 1 1/2" x 6" mounting plate.
Finish: Powdercoat, color specified.
Weldment comprised of 2.375" O.D. RS-20 (.095" - .lOS") galvanized steel tubing and 1/4" x 3"
mounting plate. Finish: Powdercoat, color specified.
Primary fasteners shall be socketed and pinned tamperproof in design, stainless steel (SST) per
ASTM F 879 unless otherwise indcated (see specific product installatiodspecifications).
123336A - Double Wave Polv Slide 48" - 56" Deck
Slide: Rotationally molded from U.V. stabilized linear low density polyethylene, color specified.
Hood Rotationally molded from U.V. stabilized linear low density polyethylene, color specified.
Rail: Extruded from 1.125" O.D. x .312" W. 6061-T6 aluminum. Finish: Powdercoat, color specified.
Rail Spacer: Fabricated from 1.3125" O.D. x 16 GA (.065") steel tubing. Finish: Powdercoat, color specified.
- Mid-Support:
Exit Support:
Fasteners:
Weldment comprised of 1.660" O.D. RS-20 (.OSS'l- .095") galvanized steel tubing and 1/4" x 3"
zinc plated flat steel. Finish Powdercoat, color specified.
Weldment comprised of 2.375" O.D. RS-20 (.095" - .lOS") galvanized steel tubing and 1/4" x 3"
mounting plate. Finish Powdercoat, color specified.
Primary fasteners shall be socketed and pinned tamperproof in design, stainless steel (SST) per
ASTM F 879 unless otherwise indicated (see specific product installatiodspecifications).
Offset Bolt Bracket: Cast from 535 almag. Finish: Powdercoat, color specified.
128953B - Crawl Tunnels, wmntrance Panels 56" Long
Pennalene Panel: Solid color panel measures 39 1/2" wide x 30 314" high, color specified.
Tunnel Section: Rotationally molded from U.V. stabilized linear low-density polyethylene, color specified.
Attachment Blocks: U.V. stabilized high-density polyethylene, color specified.
Clear Cover: Drape formed .177" x 23" x 30 7/8" clear polycarbonate.
Fasteners: Primary fasteners shall be socketed and pinned tamperproof in design, stainless steel (SST) per
ASTM F 879 unless otherwise indicated (see specific product installatiodspecifications).
111348A - Arch Bridge, 42" Low. Brown Deck Onlv
Bridge Deck - Fabricated from 12 GA (. 1 OS") sheet steel conforming to ASTM A569. Standing surface is
perforated with 5/16" diameter holes. Finish: TenderTuff, brown in color.
Panels: Solid color panel measures 41 I' wide x 35 1 1/16" high, color specified.
Page 5 of87
Attachment Bracket: Fabricated from 1/8" x 1 1/4" x 2" 6061-T6 aluminum angle. Finish: Powdercoat, color specified.
Fasteners: Primary fasteners shall be socketed and pinned tamperproof in design, stainless steel (SST) per
ASTM F 879 unless otherwise indicated (see specific product installatiodspecifications).
132023B - Cow Climbers, Brown Planks Onlv 48" Deck
139262A - Loop Arch, 32" - 40" Deck -
Loop Arch: Weldment comprised of 1.660" O.D. RS-20 (.085" - .095") galvanized steel tubing, 1.3 15" O.D.
RS-20 (.080" - .090") galvanized steel tubing and 1/4" flat steel. Finish Powdercoat, color
specified.
Handhold Panel: Solid color Pennalene panel measures 13 1/16" wide x 30 high with 314" x 1 1/8" handholds, color
specified.
Fasteners: primary fasteners shall be socketed and pinned tamperproof in design, stainless steel (SST) per
ASTM F 879 unless otherwise indicated (see specific product installatiodspecifications).
115198A - Talk Tubes-Structure Mounted, No Posts (Not Shown) Ground Level, Attaches Next to 40" to 48" Deck Onlv. One
Talk Tube: Weldment comprised of 1.660'' O.D. RS-20 (.085" - .095") and 3/16" HMO bracket. Finish
Powdercoat, color specified.
Offset Bolt Bracket: Cast from 535 almag. Finish: Powdercoat, color specified.
Fasteners: Primary fasteners shall be socketed and pinned tamperproof in design, stainless steel (SST) per
ASTM F 879 unless otherwise indicated (see specific product installatiodspecifications).
115198F - Talk Tubes-Structure Mounted, No Posts (Not Shown) 48" Deck, One Onlv
Talk Tube: Weldment comprised of 1.660" O.D. RS-20 (.OSSI' - .095") and 3/16" HRPO bracket. Finish:
Powdercoat, color specified.
Offset Bolt Bracket: Cast from 535 almag. Finish: Powdercoat, color specified.
Fasteners: Primary fasteners shall be socketed and pinned tamperproof in design, stainless steel (SST) per
ASTM F 879 unless otherwise indicated (see specific product installatiodspecifications).
111362A - Talk Tube TubinP Kit
Talk Tube Hose: Made from reinforced suction hose, black in color.
Hose Clamp: Band and housing made from 300 series stainless steel. Slotted screw with hex head and safety
collar is cadmium-plated carbon steel.
Page 6 of8'
.-
Fasteners: Primary fasteners shall be socketed and pinned tamperproof in design, stainless steel (SST) per
ASTM F 879 unless otherwise indicated (see specific product installatiodspecifications).
123284C - Wiggle Ladders 48" Deck
Chain: 4/0 Chain zinc plated. Finish TenderTuff, color specified.
Rail: Fabricated from 13/16" diameter x 27 15/16" long CRS solid bar stock with both ends tapped 3/8".
Finish: TenderTuff, color specified.
support: Fabricated from 1.315" O.D. RS-20 (.080" - .090") galvanized steel tubing.
Handhold Panel: Solid color pennalene with 3/4" x 1 1/8" handholds, color specified.
Fasteners: Primary fasteners shall be socketed and pinned tamperproof in design, stainless steel (SST) per
ASTM F 879 unless otherwise indicated (see specific product installatiodspecifications).
100013B - TuffRiders* TuffRider, Motorcvcle, Direct Bury
- 117962B - Toddler Swings Toddler Swinp, w/ (2) Full-Bucket Seats
Post: See PlayBooster (PB) General Specifications.
Swing Beam: Weldment comprised of 3.500" O.D. RS-20 (.120" - .130") galvanized steel tubing, 6" wide zinc
plated steel clamp, 3.500" pipe cap, and 1 1/4" housings with bronze bushings. Finish:
Powdercoat, color specified.
Chain Spacer: Made from white nylon measuring .080" x .785" O.D..
Chain: Steel 3/16" straight link chain, 800 lb. working load limit. Finish Hot galvanized.
Full Bucket Seat:
Fasteners:
Made of U.V. stabilized high-quality black rubber encapsulating a 24 GA (.024") stainless steel
reinforcement plate. Handles cast from 356-T6 aluminum alloy with a 60 durometer black
neoprene grip placed over handles. Handles attach to seat with (3) 1/4" x 1 5/16" long stainless
steel rivets. The fill bucket measures 9'' deep x 10 1/2" wide.
Primary fasteners shall be socketed and pinned tamperproof in design, stainless steel (SST) per
ASTM F 879 unless otherwise indicated (see specific product installatiodspecifications).
100105A - Age ADDroDriate Sbn. (2-Color Permalene). w/PlavShaDer Posts, 2 - 5 Years
Sign Panel: Two color panel measures 19-1/2" wide x 27-3/4" high color specified.
Post: See Playshaper (PS) General Specifications.
Fasteners:
I
Primary fasteners shall be socketed and pinned tamperproof in design, stainless steel (SST) per
ASTM F 879 unless otherwise indicated (see specific product installatiodspecifications).
APPENDIX 2
, .- r Material Specifications
Larwin Community Park
Tot Lot Equipment
(5-12 Year Olds)
General Specifications: Material: All materials shall be structurally sound and suitable for safe play. Durability shall be
ensured on all steel parts by the use of time-tested coatings such as zinc plating, zinc-nickel
plating, powdercoating, TenderTuff-coating, etc. Colors shall be specified.
Fasteners: Primary fasteners shall be socketed and pinned tamperproof in design, stainless steel
(SST) per ASTM F 879 unless otherwise indicated (see specific product
installatiodspecifications). All primary fasteners shall include a locking patch type material that
will meet the minimum torque requirements of IFI-125. Manufacturer to provide special tools for
pinned hex fasteners.
TenderTuff-Coating: All metal components to be TenderTuff-coated shall be thoroughly cleaned
in a hot phosphatizing pressure washer, then primed with a clear acrylic thermosetting solution.
Primed parts shall be preheated prior to dipping in U.V. stabilized, liquid poly vinyl chloride, then
salt cured at approximately 400 degrees. The finished coating shall be approximately .080" +/-
.020" thick at an 85 durometer hardness and have a matte finish. Four standard colors are
available.
Polyester Powdercoating: All metal components to be powdercoated shall be free of excess weld
and spatter. Parts shall be thoroughly cleaned in a 6-Stage Pretreatment system with a hot
phosphatizing bath and a non-chrome seal for corrosion resistance, then thoroughly dried.
Powdercoating shall be electrostatically applied and oven cured at 350 degrees. Average
hckness: .004".
Super Durable TGIC polyester powder shall be specially formulated for optimum U.V. stability
and glossiness and shall meet or exceed ASTM Standards for:
Adhesion (D-3359B)
Hardness (D-3363)
Impact (D-2794)
Salt Spray resistance (B-117)
Paint Line shall employ a "checkered" adhesion test daily.
Fifteen standard colors are available.
Decks: All Tenderdecks shall be of modular design and have 5/16" diameter holes on the standing
surface. There shall be (4) slots in each face to accommodate face mounting of components.
Tenderdecks shall be manufactured from a single piece of low carbon 12 GA (. 105") sheet steel
conforming to ASTM specification A-569. The sheet shall be perforated then flanged formed and
reinforced as necessary to ensure structural integrity. The unit shall then be TenderTuff-coated
brown only. Tenderdecks shall be designed so that all sides are flush with the outside edge of the
supporting posts.
Rotationally Molded Poly Parts: These parts shall be molded using prime compounded linear low-
density polyethylene with a tensile strength of 2500 psi per ASTM D638 and with color and W-
stabilizing additives. Wall thickness varies by product from .187" (3/16") to .312" (5/16"). Four
standard colors are available.
Page 1 of 13
Permalene Parts: These parts shall be manufactured from 3/4" thick high-density polyethylene that
has been specially formulated for optimum U.V. stability and color retention. Products shall meet
or exceed density of .933 G/cc per ASTM D1505, tensile strength of 2400 PSI per ASTM D638.
Five standard solid colors are available. Some Permalene parts are available in a two-color product
with (2) .070" thick exterior layers over a .610" interior core of a contrasting color. Eight standard
two-color options are available. '
Footings: Unless otherwise specified, the bury on all footings shall be 34" below Finished Grade
(FG) on all in-ground play eventdposts. Other types of anchoring are available upon request.
(PB) General Specifications: Posts: Post length shall vary depending upon the intended use and shall be a minimum of 42"
above the deck height. All posts shall be powdercoated to specified color. All posts shall have a
"finished grade marker" positioned on the post identifjmg the 34" bury line required for correct
installation and the top of the loose fill protective surfacing. Top caps for posts shall be aluminum
die cast from 369.1 alloy and powdercoated to match the post color. All caps shall be factory
installed and secured in place with (3) self sealing rivets. A molded low-density polyethylene cap,
with drain holes, shall be pressed onto.the bottom end of the post to increase the footing area.
Steel Posts: All steel PlayBooster posts are manufactured from 5" O.D. tubing with a wall thickness of .120" and shall be galvanized
after rolling and shall have both the I.D. and the cut ends sprayed with a corrosion resistant
coating.
Steel Post Mechanical Properties:
Yield Strength (min): 50,000 PSI
Tensile Strength (min): 55,000 PSI
% Elongation in 2 inches: 25
Modulus of Elasticity: 29.5 x 106 PSI
Aluminum Posts: All aluminum PlayBooster posts are manufactured from 6005-T5 extruded tubing conforming to ASTM B-221.
Posts shall have a 5" outside diameter with a .125" wall thickness.
Aluminum Post Mechanical Properties:
Yield Strength (min): 35,000 PSI
Tensile Strength (min): 38,000 PSI
% Elongation in 2 inches: 10
Modulus of Elasticity: 10 x 106 PSI
Arch Posts: Aluminum arch posts shall be manufactured from 6005-T5 alloy. The arch shall be formed to a 2 1 It center line radius to
complement the 42" center to center module. The arch shall be of one continuous piece
construction. There shall be no welds or additional pieces mechanically fastened to manufacture
the arch. Each arch shall be designed to provide a minimum of 90 1/2" clear span from the deck to
the inside of the arch at the radius peak. Arches shall be powdercoated to a specified color.
Clamps: All clamps, unless otherwise noted, shall be die cast using a 369.1 aluminum alloy and have the following mechanical
properties:
Ultimate Tensile: 47,000 PSI
Yield Strength: 28,000 PSI
Elongation: 7% in 2 inches
Shear Strength: 29,000 PSI
Endurance Limit: 20,000 PSI
Each functional clamp assembly shall have an appropriate number of half clamps and shall be fastened to mating parts with (2) 3/8" x
1 1/8" hex-pin cap screws (SST) and (2) stainless steel (SST) recessed "T" nuts. A 1/4" aluminum
drive rivet w/stainless steel pin is used to insure a secure fit to the post.
PlayBooster clamps have three functional applications and shall be named as follows:
Page 2 of 13
1 .) Offset hanger clamp assembly.
2.) Deck hanger clamp assembly.
3.) Hanger clamp assembly.
PlayOdyssey General Specifications: Structural Frame: Post length of the double laddedcentral column shall vary depending
upon the deck height and shall be flush with the bottom of a deck infill or a minimum of 46"
above the deck height. All posts shall be powdercoated to specified color. All posts shall have a
"finished grade marker" positioned on the post identifying the 60" bury he required for correct
installation and the top of the loose fill protective surfacing. Post caps shall be aluminum die cast
from 369.1 alloy and powdercoated to match the post color. All caps shall be factory installed and
secured in place with (3) self sealing rivets. A molded low-density polyethylene cap, with drain
holes, shall be pressed onto the bottom end of the ladder posts to increase the footing area.
Ladders are bolted together below grade to act as a single column for installation purposes. The
deck support weldmentdarms are comprised of 5/16" (.312") steel conforming to 1010 steel per
ASTM A635 and welded to a 52" steel post. Arms are secured to each ladder post with (4) 5/8" x
1 1/2" hex-pin cap screws thru (2) 1/4" flanges.
Steel Posts: All steel PlayOdyssey posts are manufactured fiom 5" O.D. tubing with a wall thickness of .120" and shall be galvanized
after rolling and shall have both the I.D. and the cut ends sprayed with a corrosion resistant
coating.
Steel Post Mechanical Properties:
Yield Strength (min): 50,000 PSI
Tensile Strength (min): 55,000 PSI
% Elongation in 2 inches: 25
Modulus of Elasticity: 29.5 x 106 PSI
Optional Aluminum Roof Posts: All formed aluminum PlayOdyssey roof posts are manufactured
from 6005-T5 extruded tubing conforming to ASTM B-22 1. Posts shall have a 5" outside diameter
with a .125" wall thickness. Post sleeve shall have 4.675" outside diameter with a .150" wall
thickness. Post cap shall be aluminum die cast from 369.1 alloy and powdercoated to match the
post color. All caps shall be factory installed and secured in place with (3) self sealing rivets.
Aluminum Post Mechanical Properties:
Yield Strength (min): 35,000 PSI
Tensile Strength (min): 38,000 PSI
% Elongation in 2 inches: 10
Modulus of Elasticity: 10 x 106 PSI
Clamps: All clamps, unless otherwise noted, shall be die cast using a 369.1 aluminum alloy and have the following mechanical
properties:
Ultimate Tensile: 47,000 PSI
Yield Strength: 28,000 PSI
Elongation: 7% in 2 inches
Shear Strength: 29,000 PSI
Endurance Limit: 20,000 PSI
Each PlayOdyssey offset hanger clamp shall have an appropriate number of half clamps and shall be fastened to mating parts with (2)
3/8" x 1 1/8" hex-pin cap screws (SST) and (2) stainless steel (SST) recessed "T" nuts. A 1/4"
aluminum drive rivet whtainless steel pin is used to insure a secure fit to the post.
111404A - Posts For Decks 148"/72" Deck -
3st: See PlayBooster (PB) General Specifications.
Page 3 of 13
111404B - Posts For Decks 140"/64" Deck
Post:
111404C - Posts For Decks 132"/56" Deck
See PlayBooster (PB) General Specifications.
Post: See PlayBooster (PB) General Specifications.
111404D - Posts For Decks 124"/48" Deck
Post: See PlayBooster (PB) General Specifications.
11 1404E - Posts For Decks 11 6"/40" Deck
Post: . See PlayBooster (PB) General Specifications.
111404G - Posts For Decks 100"/24" Deck
Post: See PlayBooster (PB) General Specifications.
111404H - Posts For Decks 92"/16" Deck
Post: See PlayBooster (PB) General Specifications.
1114041 - Posts For Decks 84"/8" Deck
Post: See PlayBooster (PB) General Specifications.
136689D - Posts for CoolTomers, Full Sail 204"/72" Deck (60" Burv)
136488A - CoolTopuers, Full Sail -
Large/Small Sail: High-density polyethylene with ultra violet additives. All comers to be strengthened with 16 02.
non-tear vinyl material. Protective webbing is sewn into all areas where steel cable enterdexits
cloth pockets. Live loads 20.00 psf. Wind design speed withstands up to 80 mph. Uplift 18.75 psf.
Snow loads 5.00 psf. Tear strength warp 220.46 lb. and weft 462.97 lb.. Burst strength 37.70
PSIA.
Center Tube:
Half Bracket:
Post Cap:
Clamps:
Fasteners:
Weldment comprised of 5" O.D. x 11 GA (.120") galvanized steel tubing and 4.690" O.D. sleeve.
Finish: Powdercoat, color specified.
Weldment comprised of 5" O.D. x 1 1 GA (. 120") galvanized steel tubing and 1 /4" hanger
brackets. Finish: Powdercoat, color specified.
Cast fiom 535 almag. Finish: Powdercoat, color specified.
Cast fiom 369.1 aluminum alloy. Finish: Powdercoat, color specified.
Cast aluminum. Finish Powdercoat, color specified.
Primary fasteners shall be socketed and pinned tamperproof in design, stainless steel (SST) per
ASTM F 879 unless otherwise indicated (see specific product installatiodspecifications).
111240A - Balconv Deck. Brown Tenderdeck Only
Page 4 of 13
.-
eck
Barrier:
Fasteners:
Straight edge flange formed from 12 GA (.105") sheet steel conforming to ASTM A569. Curved
edge roll formed from 11 GA (.120") sheet steel conforming to ASTM A569. Standing surface is
perforated with 5/16" diameter holes perforated. The finished size measures 2 518" x 34" (straight
edge) x 17" radius (curved edge). Finish: Tendertuff, brown in color.
Weldment comprised of 5/8" solid steel vertical rails, 1 l/8" O.D. steel horizontal rails with 203 or
303 stainless steel welded inserts with 5/8" internal threads. Finish: TenderTuff, color specified.
Primary.fasteners shall be socketed and pinned tamperproof in design, stainless steel (SST) per
ASTM F 879 unless otherwise indicated (see specific product installationlspecifications).
136905C - Transfer Modules. Brown Deck Onlv To 48" Deck, Curved, Ripht or Left Ster,
Deck
Railings:
Flange formed from 12 GA (.105") sheet steel conforming to ASTM A569. Standing surface is
perforated with 5/16" diameter holes and measures 29" per (2) sides. Finish TenderTufT, brown in
color.
Weldment comprised of formed 1 1/8" O.D. x 11 GA (.120") steel tubing with 203 or 303 stainless
steel 5/8" threaded inserts. Finish TenderTufT, color specified.
Step SectionstTop Step Section: Formed from 12 GA (.105") sheet steel conforming to ASTM A569. Standing surface is 24 3/8"
wide x 14" deep and is perforated with 5/16" diameter holes. Finish TenderTuff, brown in color.
Deck Support: Weldment comprised of 3 1/2" O.D. RS-20 (.125") galvanized steel tubing and 3/8" O.D. x 5"
long CRS rod. Finish: Powdercoat, brown in color.
-pacer: Made from 6061-T6 aluminum 1 1/8" O.D. x 5/8". Finish Powdercoat, color specified.
Infill Panel: Solid color pennalene panel measures 6" wide x 37" high, color specified.
Fasteners: Primary fasteners shall be socketed and pinned tamperproof in design, stainless steel (SST) per
ASTM F 879 unless otherwise indicated (see specific product installatiodspecifications).
Offset Hanger Clamp Assembly: Cast aluminum. Finish: Powdercoat, color specified.
121948A - Kick Plate 8" Rise
Kick Plate: Fabricated from 1 1 GA (. 120") HR flat steel. Finish TenderTuff, brown in color.
Fasteners : Primary fasteners shall be socketed and pinned tamperproof in design, stainless steel (SST) per
ASTM F 879 unless otherwise indicated (see specific product installatiodspecifications).
121949A - Kick Plate 8" Rise. 90* Tri-Deck
Kick Plate: Fabricated from 1 1 GA (. 120") HR flat steel. Finish TenderTuff, brown in color.
Fasteners: Primary fasteners shall be socketed and pinned tamperproof in design, stainless steel (SST) per
ASTM F 879 unless otherwise indicated (see specific product installationlspecifications).
111228A - Sauare Tenderdeck, Brown Onlv
Square Deck:
I
Flange formed from 12 GA (.l05") sheet steel conforming to ASTM A569. Standing surface is
perforated with 5/16" diameter holes. Deck face has (4) slotted holes for face mounting components. The finished size measures 2 5/8" x 47" x 47". Finish: TenderTuff, brown in color.
Page 5 of 13
Deck Hanger Clamp Assembly:
Fasteners:
122197A - 90* Tri-Deck
Triangular Deck:
Deck Hanger Clamp Assembly:
Fasteners:
Cast aluminum. Finish Powdercoat, color specified.
Primary fasteners shall be socketed and pinned tamperproof in design, stainless steel (SST) per
ASTM F 879 unless otherwise indicated (see specific product installatiodspecifications).
Flange formed from 12 GA (.105") sheet steel conforming to ASTM A569. Standing surface is
perforated with 5/16" diameter holes. Deck face has (4) slotted holes for face mounting
components. The finished size measures 2 5/8" x 37 3/4". Finish: TenderTu$ brown in color.
Cast aluminum. Finish: Powdercoat, color specified.
Primary fasteners shall be socketed and pinned tamperproof in design, stainless steel (SST) per
ASTM F 879 unless otherwise indicated (see specific product installatiodspecifications).
115236A - Ball Maze Panel (2-Color Permalene)
Pennalene Panel:
Cover:
Ball:
Angled Panel Bracket:
Spacer Tube:
Fasteners:
Offset Hanger Clamp Assembly:
123319A - Hour Glass Panel
Permalene Panel:
Hour Glass:
Hour Glass Beads:
Spacer Tube:
Angled Panel Bracket:
Fasteners:
Offset Hanger Clamp Assembly:
123483A - %ace Travel Panel
Pennalene Panel:
Two color panel measures 35 5/8" wide x 41" high, color specified.
Made fiom .177" thick x 18 5/16" diameter clear polycarbonate.
1/2" in diameter, SST.
Weldment comprised of .190" thick 5052 aluminum formed angle with (2) 6061-T6 aluminum
threaded tubes 1 1/8" O.D. x 1 112" long. Finish: Powdercoat, color specified.
Made from 6061-T6 aluminum 7/8" O.D. x 1 11/16". Finish: Powdercoat, color specified.
Primary fasteners shall be socketed and pinned tamperproof in design, stamless steel (SST) per
ASTM F 879 unless otherwise indicated (see specific product installatiodspecifications).
Cast aluminum. Finish: Powdercoat, color specified.
Solid color panel measures 35 5J8" wide x 41" high, color specified.
Vacuum formed, clear polycarbonate.
#40 stainless steel beads.
Made from 6061-T6 aluminum 7/8" O.D. x 1 11/16". Finish: Powdercoat, color specified.
Weldment comprised of .190" thick 5052 aluminum formed angle with (2) 6061-T6 aluminum
threaded tubes 1 1/8" O.D. x 1 112" long. Finish Powdercoat, color specified.
Primary fasteners shall be socketed and pinned tamperproof in design, stainless steel (SST) per
ASTM F 879 unless otherwise indicated (see specific product installatiodspecifications).
Cast aluminum. Finish Powdercoat, color specified.
Two color panel measures 35 5/8" wide x 41" high, color specified.
Page 6 of 13
Spacer Tube: Made fi-om 6061-T6 aluminum 7/8" O.D. x 1 11/16". Finish: Powdercoat, color specified.
Weldment comprised of .190" thick 5052 aluminum formed angle with (2) 6061-T6 aluminum
threaded tubes 1 1/8" O.D. x 1 1/2" long. Finish: Powdercoat, color specified.
Angled Panel Bracket:
Fasteners: Primary fasteners shall be socketed and pinned tamperproof in design, stainless steel (SST) per
ASTM F 879 unless otherwise indicated (see specific product installatiodspecifications).
Offset Hanger Clamp Assembly: Cast aluminum. Finish: Powdercoat, color specified.
124863F - SlideWinder2 72" Deck
Slide Sections: Rotationally molded from U.V. stabilized linear low density polyethylene, color specified.
Rail: 1 1/8" O.D. 6061-T6 aluminum extrusion with 5/16" walls. Finish Powdercoat, color specified.
Mid-Support: Weldment comprised of 1.900" O.D. RS-20 (.09O1' - .loo") galvanized steel tubing and 3/16" x 1
1/4" zinc plated steel strap. Finish Powdercoat, color specified.
Support Base (SM): Weldment comprised of 1.660" O.D. RS-20 (.085" - .095") galvanized steel tubing and 1/4" x 3" x
8" mounting plate. Finish: Powdercoat, color specified.
Exit Footer: Weldment comprised of 2.375" O.D. RS-20 (.095" - .105") galvanized steel tubing and 1/4" x 3" x
7 1/2" mounting plate. Finish Powdercoat, color specified.
Fasteners : Primary fasteners shall be socketed and pinned tamperproof in design, stainless steel (SST) per
ASTM F 879 unless otherwise indicated (see specific product installatiodspecifications).
Cast aluminum. Finish: Powdercoat, color specified.
-
jffset Hanger Clamp Assembly:
122033A - SpvroSlides 72" Deck
Slide, Hood & Barriers: Rotationally molded fi-om U.V. stabilized linear low-density polyethylene, color specified.
Entrance Deck
Center Column:
Flange formed from 12 GA (.lOY) sheet steel conforming to ASTM A569. Standing surface is
perforated with 5/16" diameter holes and measures 32 1/4" wide x 36 27/32" long. Finish:
TenderTuff, brown in color.
Fabricated from 3.500" O.D. RS-20 (.l20" - .130") galvanized steel tubing. Finish Powdercoat,
color specified.
Barrier Plates: Fabricated from 1/4" x 1 1/2" zinc plated HR flat steel. Finish Powdercoat, color specified.
Exit Support: Weldment comprised of 2.375" O.D. RS-20 (.095" - .105") galvanized steel tubing and 1/4" x 3" x
11 3/4" mounting plate. Finish: Powdercoat, color specified.
Handbar: Formed fiom 7/8" O.D. x 1 1 GA (.120") black steel tubing. Finish TenderTuff, brown in color.
Rail: 1 1/8" O.D. 6061-T6 aluminum extrusion with 5/16" walls. Finish: Powdercoat, color specified.
Fasteners: Primary fasteners shall be socketed and pinned tamperproof in design, stainless steel (SST) per
ASTM F 879 unless otherwise indicated (see specific product installatiodspecifications).
- Offset Hanger Clamp Assembly: Cast aluminum. Finish: Powdercoat, color specified.
,30390A - Double Polv Slides Double Swoosh Slide, 64" - 72" Deck
Page 7 of 13
Slide: Rotationally molded fiom U.V. stabilized linear low density polyethylene, color specified.
Hood: Rotationally molded from U.V. stabilized linear low density polyethylene, color specified.
Rail: Extruded fiom 1.125" O.D. x .312" W. 6061-T6 aluminum. Finish: Powdercoat, color specified.
Rail Spacer: Fabricated fiom 1.3125" O.D. x 16 GA (.065") steel tubing. Finish: Powdercoat, color specified.
support:
Fasteners:
Weldment comprised of 2.375" O.D. RS-20 (.095" - .l05") galvanized steel tubing and 1/4" x 3"
mounting plate. Finish: Powdercoat, color specified.
Pnmary fasteners shall be socketed and pinned tamperproof in design, stainless steel (SST) per
ASTM F 879 unless otherwise indicated (see specific product installatiodspecifications).
Offset Hanger Clamp Assembly: Cast aluminum. Finish: Powdercoat, color specified.
111342A - Bridge/Ramp. Max. 48" Decks. Brown Onlv. No Rails or Curbs
Bridge/Ramp:
Fasteners:
Fabricated from 11 GA (. 120") sheet steel conforming to ASTM A569. Standing surface is
perforated with 5/16" diameter holes. Finish TenderTuff, brown in color.
Primary fasteners shall be socketed and pinned tamperproof in design, stainless steel (SST) per
ASTM F 879 unless otherwise indicated (see specific product installatiodspecifications).
120211A - Curved Bridge, 90*. 8" - 72" Decks
Bridge: Fabricated from 11 GA (.120") sheet steel conforming to ASTM A569. Standing surface is
perforated with 5/16" diameter holes. Finish: TenderTuff, brown in color.
Offset Hanger Clamp Assembly:
123291A - Centbede Climber 48"-56" Deck
Cast aluminum. Finish: Powdercoat, color specified.
Climber:
support:
Weldment comprised of 2.375" O.D. RS-40 (. 130" - .140") galvanized steel tubing, 1.3 15" O.D.
RS-20 (.OSO" - .090") galvanized steel tubing and 1/4" flat steel. Finish: Powdercoat, color
specified.
Formed from 2.375" O.D. RS-40 (.130" - .140") galvanized steel tubing. Finish: Powdercoat, color
specified.
Handhold Panel: Solid color pennalene with 314" x 1 1/8" handholds, color specified.
Spacer Tube: Made from 6061-T6 aluminum 7/8" O.D. x 1 11/16". Finish Powdercoat, color specified.
Fasteners: Primary fasteners shall be socketed and pinned tamperproof in design, stainless steel (SST) per
ASTM F 879 unless otherwise indicated (see specific product installatiodspecifications).
Offset Hanger Clamp Assembly: Cast aluminum. Finish: Powdercoat, color specified.
123537C - Corkscrew 64" - 72" Deck
Corkscrew: Weldment comprised of 1.900'' O.D. RS-20 (.090" - .lOO") galvanized steel tubing, and 1.3 15"
O.D. RS-20 (.080" - .090") galvanized steel tubing. Finish: Powdercoat, color specified.
Page 8 of 13
-Formed Overhead Rail: Formed from 1.315" O.D. RS-20 (.080" - .090") galvanized steel tubing. Finish Powdercoat, color
specified.
Handhold Panel:
Spacer Tube:
Fasteners:
Solid color permalene with 3/4" x 1 1/8" handholds, color specified.
Made from 6061-T6 aluminum 7/8" O.D. x 1 11/16". Finish: Powdercoat, color specified.
Primary fasteners shall be socketed and pinned tamperproof in design, stainless steel (SST) per
ASTM F 879 unless otherwise indicated (see specific product installationlspecifications).
Offset Hanger Clamp Assembly: Cast aluminum. Finish Powdercoat, color specified.
135345B - Pod Climbers 24" Deck
Disc: Rotationally molded from U.V. stabilized linear low density polyethylene, disc measures 14" in
diameter x 7" high, color specified.
Handhold Panel: Solid color permalene, color specified.
Handloop:
support:
Weldrnent comprised of 1.125" O.D. x 11 GA (.120fl) steel tubing with 203 or 303 stainless steel
inserts, with 3/8" internal thread. Finish Tendertuff, color specified.
Weldment comprised of 1.900" O.D. RS-20 (.090" - .lOO"), 1.315" O.D. RS-20 (.080" - .090") and
3/16" x 5" diameter plate. Finish Powdercoat, color specified.
Spacer Tube: Made from 6061-T6 aluminum 7/8" O.D. x 1 11/16". Finish Powdercoat, color specified.
-Fasteners: Primary fasteners shall be socketed and pinned tamperproof in design, stainless steel (SST) per
ASTM F 879 unless otherwise indicated (see specific product installatiodspecifications).
Offset Hanger Clamp Assembly: Cast aluminum. Finish Powdercoat, color specified.
122914C - LOOD Arches 64"-72" Deck
Loop Arch Weldment comprised of 1.660" O.D. RS-20 (.085" - .095") galvanized steel tubing, 1.3 15" O.D.
RS-20 (.080" - .090") galvanized steel tubing and 1/4" flat steel. Finish: Powdercoat, color
specified.
Handhold Panel: Solid color permalene with 3/4" x 1 1/8" handholds, color specified.
Spacer Tube: Made from 6061-T6 aluminum 7/8" O.D. x 1 11/16". Finish: Powdercoat, color specified.
Fasteners: Primary fasteners shall be socketed and pinned tamperproof in design, stamless steel (SST) per
ASTM F 879 unless otherwise indicated (see specific product installatiodspecifications).
Offset Hanger Clamp Assembly: Cast aluminum. Finish: Powdercoat, color specified.
122914B - LOOD Arches 56" Deck
Loop Arch: Weldment comprised of 1.660" O.D. RS-20 (.085" - .095") galvanized steel tubing, 1.315" O.D.
RS-20 (.080" - .090") galvanized steel tubing and 1/4" flat steel. Finish Powdercoat, color
specified.
.- Handhold Panel:
>pacer Tube:
Solid color permalene with 3/4" x 1 1/8" handholds, color specified.
Made from 6061-T6 aluminum 7/8" O.D. x 1 11/16". Finish Powdercoat, color specified.
Page 9 of 13
Fasteners: Primary fasteners shall be socketed and pinned tamperproof in design, stainless steel (SST) per
ASTM F 879 unless otherwise indicated (see specific product installatiodspecifications).
Offset Hanger Clamp Assembly: Cast aluminum. Finish: Powdercoat, color specified.
128252A - LOOD Ladder. 40"-48" Deck
Loop Ladder: Weldment comprised of 1.125" O.D. x 11 GA (.120") black steel tubing. Finish: TenderTuff, color
specified.
Handhold Panel: Solid color permalene with 314" x 1 118" handholds, color specified.
Fasteners: Primary fasteners shall be socketed and pinned tamperproof in design, stamless steel (SST) per
ASTM F 879 unless otherwise indicated (see specific product installatiodspecifications).
Spacer Tube:
Offset Hanger Clamp Assembly:
Made from6061-T6 aluminum 7/8" O.D. x 1 11/16". Finish: Powdercoat, color specified.
Cast aluminum. Finish: Powdercoat, color specified.
122916B - Double Wave Climbers 64" to 64" Deck or 72" to 72" Deck
Climber:
support:
Weldment comprised of 1.660" O.D. RS-40 (. 1 11" - .I2 1") galvanized steel tubing, and 1.3 15"
O.D. RS-20 (.080" - .0901') galvanized steel tubing. Finish Powdercoat, color specified.
Formed from 1.660" O.D. RS-40 (. 11 1" - .121") galvanized steel tubing. Finish Powdercoat, color
specified.
Handhold Panel: Solid color permalene with 3/4" x 1 118" handholds, color specified.
Spacer Tube: Made from 6061-T6 aluminum 7/8" O.D. x 1 11/16". Finish: Powdercoat, color specified.
Fasteners: Primary fasteners shall be socketed and pinned tamperproof in design, stainless steel (SST) per
ASTM F 879 unless otherwise indicated (see specific product installatiodspecifications).
Offset Hanger Clamp Assembly: Cast aluminum. Finish Powdercoat, color Specified.
119840A - S Curved Horizontal Ladder, Max. 32" Decks
Horizontal Ladder:
support:
Fasteners:
Weldment comprised of 2.375" O.D. RS-40 (.130" - .140") galvanized steel tubing, 1.315" O.D.
RS-20 (.080" - .090") galvanized steel tubing and cast 535 aluminum magnesium attachment
brackets. Finish: Powdercoat, color specified.
Weldment comprised of 2.750" O.D. x .125" wall zinc plated steel tubing and 2.375" O.D. RS-20
(.095" - .l05") galvanized steel tubing. Finish: Powdercoat, color specified.
Primary fasteners shall be socketed and pinned tamperproof in design, stainless steel (SST) per
ASTM F 879 unless otherwise indicated (see specific product installatiodspecifications).
Hanger Clamp Assembly: Cast aluminum. Finish: Powdercoat color specified.
126203A - Ring-a-Ling
support: Weldment comprised of 2.750" O.D. x .125" wall zinc plated steel tubing and 2.375" O.D. RS-20
(.095" - .lOY) galvanized steel tubing. Finish: Powdercoat, color specified.
Page 10 of 13
-Fasteners:
Ladders:
Primary fasteners shall be socketed and pinned tamperproof in design, stainless steel (SST) per
ASTM F 879 unless otherwise indicated (see specific product installatiodspecifications).
Weldment comprised of 2.375" 0,D. RS-40 (.130" - .140") galvanized steel tubing crossover,
2.375" O.D. RS-20 (.095" - .lOS') galvanized steel tubing, formed 1.315" O.D. RS-20 (.080" -
.090") galvanized steel tubing and formed 1/4" x 3" wide zinc plated steel. Finish: Powdercoat,
color specified.
3" Half Clamp: Fabricated from formed 1/4" x 3" wide zinc plated steel. Finish Powdercoat, color specified.
122589A - 16" Offset Crawl Tunnel
Permalene Panel: Solid color panel measures 35 5/8" wide x 41" high, color specified.
Tunnel Section: Rotationally molded from U.V. stabilized linear low-density polyethylene, color specified.
Spacers: Solid color permalene, color specified.
Attachment Blocks: U.V. stabilized high-density polyethylene, color specified.
Angled Panel Bracket: Weldment comprised of .190" thick 5052 aluminum formed angle with (2) 6061-T6 aluminum
threaded tubes 1 1/8" O.D. x 1 1/2" long. Finish: Powdercoat, color specified.
Spacer Tube: Made from 6061-T6 aluminum 7/8" O.D. x 1 11/16". Finish Powdercoat, color specified.
Fasteners: Primary fasteners shall be socketed and pinned tamperproof in design, stainless steel (SST) per
ASTM F 879 unless otherwise indicated (see specific product installatiodspecifications).
ffset Hanger Clamp Assembly: Cast aluminum. Finish Powdercoat, color specified.
111357A - Chinninp Bar, (1) Aluminum Post
Rail:
Fasteners:
Weldment comprised of 1.125" O.D. x 1 1 GA (. 120") steel tubing with 203 or 303 stainless steel
5/8" threaded inserts. Finish TenderTuff, color specified.
Primary fasteners shall be socketed and pinned tamperproof in design, stainless steel (SST) per
ASTM F 879 unless otherwise indicated (see specific product installationhpecifications).
Post: See PlayBooster (PB) General Specifications.
Offset Hanger Clamp Assembly: Cast aluminum. Finish: Powdercoat, color specified.
138505A - Deck Link 1-Step. wmandrail
Upper Infill Panel: Solid color permalene panel measures 6" wide x 37" high, color specified.
Lower Infill Panel: Solid color permalene panel measures 6" wide x 4 1 'I high, color specified.
Step Section:
Handrail:
Formed fiom 12 GA (.lOS") sheet steel conforming to ASTM A569. Standing surface is 24 1/4"
wide x 14" deep and is perforated with 5/16" diameter holes. Finish TenderTuff, brown in color.
Weldment comprised of 1 1/8" O.D. x 11 GA (.120") steel tubing and 1/8" HR flat steel. Finish
TenderTuff, color specified. - 3acer Tube: Made from 6061-T6 aluminum 7/8" O.D. x 1 11/16". Finish Powdercoat, color specified.
Page 11 of 13
Fasteners: Primary fasteners shall be socketed and pinned tamperproof in design, stainless steel (SST) per
ASTM F 879 unless otherwise indicated (see specific product installatiodspecifications).
Offset Hanger Clamp Assembly:
11 1356A - Loe Roll. (1) Aluminum Post, Tan Log Onlv
Log Roll:
Bushing: Oil impregnated bronze.
Cast aluminum. Finish Powdercoat, color specified.
Rotationally molded from U.V. stabilized linear low density polyethylene, tan in color.
Handloop: Weldment comprised of 1.125" O.D. x 11 GA (.120") steel tubing with 203 or 303 stainless steel
inserts, with 5/8" internal thread. Finish: Tendertuff, color specified.
Rail: Extruded fiom 1.125" O.D. x .312" W. 6061-T6 aluminum.
Fasteners: Primary fasteners shall be socketed and pinned tamperproof in design, stainless steel (SST) per
ASTM F 879 unless otherwise indicated (see specific product ~tallatiodspecifications).
Post: See PlayBooster (PB) General Specifications.
Offset Hanger Clamp Assembly: Cast aluminum. Finish Powdercoat, color specified.
1113631 - Talk Tubes. Deck Mount, No Posts 72" Deck, One Onlv
Talk Tube: Weldment comprised of 1.660" O.D. RS-20 (.OS5" - .095") and 3/16" "0 bracket. Finish
Powdercoat, color specified.
Fasteners: Primary fasteners shall be socketed and pinned tamperproof in design, stainless steel (SST) per
ASTM F 879 unless otherwise indicated (see specific product installatiodspecifications).
Offset Hanger Clamp Assembly: Cast aluminum. Finish: Powdercoat, color specified.
111363A - Talk Tubes, Deck Mount, No Posts Ground Level, One Onlv
Talk Tube:
Fasteners:
Weldment comprised of 1.660" O.D. RS-20 (.085" - .095") and 3/16" HRPO bracket. Finish:
Powdercoat, color specified.
Primary fasteners shall be socketed and pinned tamperproof in design, stainless steel (SST) per
ASTM F 879 unless otherwise indicated (see specific product installatiodspecifications).
Offset Hanger Clamp Assembly: Cast aluminum. Finish: Powdercoat, color specified.
111362A - Talk Tube Tubing Kit
Talk Tube Hose: Made fiom reinforced suction hose, black in color.
Hose Clamp:
Fasteners:
Band and housing made from 300 series stainless steel. Slotted screw with hex head and safety
collar is cadmium-plated carbon steel.
Primary fasteners shall be socketed and pinned tamperproof in design, stainless steel (SST) per
ASTM F 879 unless otherwise indicated (see specific product installatiodspecifications).
Page 12 of 13
100041A - Curved Balance Beam
jalance Beam:
Support Leg:
Fasteners:
Weldment comprised of 1 1/2" x 3" x 1 1 GA (.120") rectangular steel tubing. Finish: TenderTuff,
color specified.
Weldment comprised of 1.900" O.D. RS-20 (.0901' - .loo") galvanized steel tubing and 3/8" x 2
1/2" mounting plate. Finish Powdercoat, color specified.
Primary fasteners shall be socketed and pinned tamperproof in design, stainless steel (SST) per
ASTM F 879 unless otherwise indicated (see specific product installatiodspecifications).
120710A - Pod Climber 8", One Pod Onlv
Disc:
support:
Fasteners:
Rotatio~lly molded from U.V. stabilized linear low density polyethylene, disc measures 14" in
diameter x 7" high, color specified.
Weldment comprised of 1.900" O.D. RS-20 (.090" - .loo8'), 1.315" O.D. RS-20 (.080" - 090") and
3/16" x 5" diameter plate. Finish: Powdercoat, color specified.
Primary fasteners shall be socketed and pinned tamperproof in design, stainless steel (SST) per
ASTM F 879 unless otherwise indicated (see specific product installatiodspecifications).
120711A - Pod Climbers 16", One Pod Only
Disc:
-%lpport:
Fasteners:
Rotationally molded from U.V. stabilized linear low density polyethylene, disc measures 14" in
diameter x 7" high, color specified.
Weldment comprised of 1.900" O.D. RS-20 (.090" - .100"), 1.315" O.D. RS-20 (.080" - 090") and
3/16" x 5" diameter plate. Finish: Powdercoat, color specified.
Primary fasteners shall be socketed and pinned tamperproof in design, stainless steel (SST) per
ASTM F 879 unless otherwise indicated (see specific product installatiodspecifications).
100050C - Arch Belt Swings Arch Belt Swing, 2-Place, Uncoated Chain
111579C - Arch Belt SwinPs Additional 2-Place Bav, Uncoated Chain
100106A - Age ADDroDriate Sim (2-Color Permalene) WPlavShaDer Posts, 5 - 12 Years
Sign Panel: Two color panel measures 19-1/2" wide x 27-314" high, color specified.
Post: See Playshaper (PS) General Specifications.
Fasteners: Primary fasteners shall be socketed and pinned tamperproof in design, stainless steel (SST) per
ASTM F 879 unless otherwise indicated (see specific product installatiodspecifications).
Page 13 of 13
SECTION 02900
LANDSCAPE PLANTING AND MAINTENANCE
Delete Sections 212 and 308 of the SSPWC and replace with the following
Landscape Specifications.
I. PART I GENERAL
1 .I. DESCRIPTION
1.1.1. Division 1 applies to this Section. Provide all labor, materials, and equipment required to
install and maintain all Landscape Planting and Decomposed Granite Trail as shown on
the Drawings and specified herein.
1.2. QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.2.1. Applicable Standards:
1.2.1 .I. American Association of Nurserymen, Horticultural Standards.
1.2.1.2. American Joint Committee on Horticultural Nomenclature - Standardized
Plant Names. Mount Pleasant Press, Harrisburg PA, current edition.
.-
1.2.1.3. California Standard Grading Code of Nursery Stock.
1.2.2. Inspection of Plant Materials: Provide notification within 10 days after the award of
Contract if plant materials of specified type and size are not available.
1.2.3. Site Reviews: Obtain approval at each of the reviews listed below before proceeding
with the Work. Provide 48 hour advance notification of readiness for the following:
1.2.3.1. Delivery: Delivery of plant material; including trees, shrubs, sod, vines and
groundcover.
1.2.3.2. Spotting: Spotting of all plant materials before excavation of planting holes.
1.2.3.3. Completion: Completion of Landscaping Work.
I .2.3.4. Final Review: Completion of Maintenance period.
1.2.4. Plant Names:
names.
In all cases, botanical names shall take precedence over common
1.3. SUBMllTALS
1.3.2. Prior to ordering 36" box and larger trees, submit photographs of specimens for
Landscape Architect's review
Larwin Community Park
LANDSCAPE P LANTl NG
02900 - 1
1.3.3.
1.3.4.
1.3.5.
1.3.6.
I .3.7.
1.3.8.
1.3.9.
1.3.1 0.
1.3.11.
1.3.1 2.
Delivery: Submit delivery receipts stating source and quantity for each of the following
types of material:
1.3.3.1. Top soil.
1.3.3.2. Bulk materials.
1.3.3.3. Fertilizers.
1.3.3.4. Sod.
1.3.3.5. Trees, shrubs, and groundcovers.
Contractor shall submit to Owner a complete list of soil amendments, fertilizers, and
plant materials, specified with quantities and suppliers of each, a minimum of (4) weeks
prior to delivery to the site.
Contractor shall submit signed copies of certificates, invoices and trip slips to the Owner
for verification of quantities of all materials delivered to site for incorporation into work.
Contractor shall submit one pint of bark mulch to the Owner for approval.
Contractor shall submit the nursery source for contract grown plant material upon award
of the project.
Upon completion of grading, Contractor shall obtain four (4) one quart soil samples from
four (4) locations and at the depth designated by the Owner for horticultural soil testing
by an independent soils laboratory.
Agri-Service, phone: (760)727-5454 (or equal). The test report shall list the following
information:
1.3.9.1. pH.
1.3.9.2. ECe X10.
1.3.9.3. Sodium Absorption Rate.
1.3.9.4.
1.3.9.5.
Percolation Rate and soil texture.
Recommendation for soil conditioner, pH Adjuster, Fertilizers and quantities
of each.
Check List: Prior to final review submit a log of all check list items showing dates and
approval signatures for soil sampling locations, site reviews, and acceptance of punch
list corrections.
Pest 81 Weed Control Applicators: Submit evidence of licensing by State of California as
Pest Control Operator and Advisor.
Soil Testing:
1.3.12.1. Contractor shall notify Owner's Representative at the appropriate time soil
analyses are to be made and request a site plan showing sampling
locations.
Larwin Community Park
LANDSCAPE PLANTING
02900 - 2
.-
1.3.12.2. Contractor shall arrange and pay for a soils laboratory to make the
necessary tests for a complete horticultural analysis with recommendations
for amending the soil at the following times: 1) after construction but prior to
planting; and 2) after planting.
1.4. PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
1.4.1. Delivery of Materials:
1.4.1 .I. Packaged Materials: Deliver packaged materials in unopened bags or
containers, each bearing the name, guarantee, and trademark of the
producer, and the composition, analysis and the weight of the material.
1.4.2. Storage of Materials, Equipment and Fixtures:
1.4.2.1. Plant Protection: Plant nursery stock at once upon delivery. If this is not
feasible, plants shall be heeled-in, e.g. all bundles open, the plants spread
out into a spade depth trench, the roots fully covered with damp soil, and
protected from the sun and wind.
1.4.2.1.1. Protect plants from the drying action of sun and wind until
planted. Protect container grown plants, which cannot be
planted immediately upon delivery with soil, wood shavings, or
other protective material.
1.5. JOB CONDITIONS
1 51. Do not begin the Landscaping Work until site irrigation system has been reviewed,
tested, and approved. .-
1.5.2. Examination of Drawings and Site:
1 S.2.1. Drawings: Drawings are diagrammatic. Plant placement will be approved in
field by Owner Representative.
1.5.2.2. Field Conditions: Verify field conditions such as obstructions, grade
differences, and discrepancies in dimensions. The start of Landscaping
Work shall indicate acceptance of field conditions. Assume responsibility for
any revisions necessary.
1.5.3. Protection:
1.5.3.1. Existing Trees: Protect trees and roots from injury as specified in Section
021 15 - Tree Protection and Trimming.
1.5.3.2. Utilities: Verify that all existing utilities have been located and protected
before start of Landscape Work.
1.6. GUARANTEES AND REPLACEMENTS
1.6.1. Shrubs, vines and groundcovers shall be guaranteed to remain healthy and vigorously
growing for 6 months, from date of final acceptance of project.
1.6.2. All Contract grown plants shown on the drawings shall be guaranteed to remain healthy
and vigorously growing until final acceptance of project. ,
Larwin Community Park
LANDSCAPE PLANT1 NG
02900 - 3
1.6.3. All plants found to be dead and all plants not in a vigorous condition noted within the
Guarantee Period shall be replaced within fourteen (14) calendar days.
1.6.4. Plants used for replacement shall be the same kind and size as specified in the plant list.
They shall be furnished, planted and fertilized as originally specified.
I .6.5. Submit replacement guarantee for upright growth and health of plant materials for
following periods. Replacement shall be with plants of same type and size as those
originally planted, maintained, and guaranteed for original period specified.
1.6.5.1. Trees: 12 months after final acceptance for plants 15 gallons and larger.
1.6.5.2. Shrubs and Groundcover: 6 months after final acceptance for plants up to
15 gallon size.
1.6.5.3. Vines: 6 months after final acceptance for plants up to 15 gallon size.
1.7. SITE OBSERVATION VISITS
1.7.1. Site observation visits herein specified shall be made by the Owner or his
representative. The Contractor shall request site observation two (2) days in advance of
the time observation is required.
1.7.2. Site observation will be required for the following parts of the work:
1.7.2.1. Incorporation of soil conditioner and fertilizer into the soil and upon
completion of grading prior to planting.
1.7.2.2. Approval of plant materials with trees and shrubs spotted in place for
planting, but before planting holes are excavated.
1.7.2.3. When planting, and all other indicated or specified work, except the
Maintenance Period, has been completed. Acceptance and written approval
shall establish beginning of the Maintenance Period.
1.7.2.4. Final site observation visit at the completion of the ninety (90) day
Maintenance Period. This site observation visit shall establish the beginning
date for the guarantee period of plant material.
1.7.3. The Contractor or his authorized representative shall be on the site at the time of each
site observation visit by the Owner.
1.8. MAINTENANCE
1.8.1. The Maintenance Period begins on the first day after all landscape and irrigation work on
this project is complete, checked, accepted and written approval from the Owner is given
to begin the Maintenance Period, and shall continue thereafter for no less than ninety
(90) continuous calendar days.
1.8.2. Acceptance: Upon completion of the final site observation visit and the work of this
section, the Contractor will be notified in writing (1) whether the work is acceptable;
(2) of any requirements necessary for completion and acceptance.
1.8.3. The Contractor shall continuously maintain all involved areas of the Contract during the
progress of the work and during the Maintenance Period until the Final Acceptance of
the work.
Larwin Community Park
LANDSCAPE PLANTING
02900 - 4
1.8.4.
1.8.5.
1.8.6.
1.8.7.
1.8.8.
Regular planting maintenance operations shall begin immediately after each plant is
planted. Plants shall be kept in a healthy, growing condition and in a visually pleasing
appearance by watering, pruning, trimming, edging, fertilizing, restaking, pest and
disease controlling, spraying, weeding, cleaning-up and any other necessary operation
of maintenance. Landscape areas shall be kept free of weeds, noxious grass, and all
other undesired vegetative growth and debris. All plants found to be dead or in an
impaired condition shall be replaced immediately.
No pruning of tree limbs shall be permitted without the consent of the Owner.
The Contract completion date of the Contract Maintenance Period will be extended,
when in the opinion of the Owner, improper maintenance and/or possible poor or
unhealthy condition of planted material or unestablished non-covering lawns are evident
at the termination of the scheduled Maintenance Period. The Contractor shall be
responsible for additional maintenance of the work at no change in Contract price until
all of the work is completed and acceptable.
The Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining adequate protection of the areas.
Damaged areas shall be repaired immediately at the Contractor's expense.
Decomposed Granite (maintenance):
1.8.8.1. Remove debris, such as paper, grass clippings, leaves or other organic
material by blowing or hand raking.
1.8.8.2. During maintenance period, a minor amount of loose aggregate may appear
on the surface. If this material exceeds %", redistribute material over entire
surface and water thoroughly to a depth of 1". Compact with power roller of
no less than % ton. Owner should also note same treatment'to apply after
maintenance period for first year.
1.8.8.3. If cracking occurs, simply sweep fines into cracks, water thoroughly and
hand tamp with 8" to 10" tamp plate.
1.9. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
1.9.1. The term "Planting Area" shall mean all areas to be planted with grass, shrubs,
groundcovers, and vines.
1.9.2. Actual planting shall be performed during those periods when weather and soil
conditions are suitable in accordance with locally accepted horticultural practice.
1.9.3. All rock and other growth or debris accumulated within the duration of the project shall
be removed from the site.
1.9.4. Upon completion of all soil preparation operations, two (2) soil samples shall be taken by
the Contractor and analyzed as to their respective agronomic suitabilities by a soil
laboratory approved by the Owner. The results of these tests are to be reviewed by the
Owner for any required modifications to specified soil preparation.
1.9.5. Prior to excavation for planting or placing of plant materials, locate all underground utility
lines still in use and take proper precautions to avoid damage to such improvements. In
the event of a conflict between such lines and plant locations, immediately notify the
Owner who shall arrange for the re-location of one or the other. The Contractor
assumes all responsibility for making any and all repairs for damages resulting from
work as herein specified.
Larwin Community Park LANDSCAPE PLANTING
02900 - 5
1.9.6. Grading and soil preparation work shall be performed only during the period when
beneficial and optimum results may be obtained. If the moisture content of the soil
should reach such a level that working it would destroy soil structure, spreading and
grading operations shall be suspended until the moisture content is increased or
reduced to acceptable levels and the desired results are likely to be obtained.
1.9.7. All scaled dimensions are approximate. Before proceeding with any work, carefully
check and verify all dimensions and immediately inform the Owner of any discrepancy
between the drawings and/or specifications and actual conditions.
1.9.8. Quantities for plant materials are shown for convenience only, and not guaranteed.
Check and verify count and supply sufficient number to fulfill intent of drawings. Verify
any clarifications with the Owner.
1.9.9. Adequately stake, barricade, and protect all irrigation equipment, existing trees,
manholes, utility lines, and other existing property during all phases of the soil amending
planting and grading operations.
I .I 0. PLANT SELECTION
1.10.1. Upon award of the project the Contractor shall inform the Owner of the nursery source of
all plants. The Owner will check the plants at the nursery source for approval. If the plants are rejected, the Contractor shall be responsible for locating other sources of
plants. The contract price for the project shall not change due to rejected plants. The
Contractor shall make all necessary financial arrangements or purchase orders to
reserve the plants specifically for this project.
1.10.2. Shrub Samples: Typical samples, one (1) each of all varieties and sizes (15 gallon and
under) shrubs of all plant materials shall be submitted for approval at the site after
grading and prior to planting operations. Approved samples shall remain on the site and
shall be maintained by the Contractor as standards of comparison for plant materials to
be furnished. Samples may be incorporated into the work.
1 .I 1. REJECTION AND SUBSTITUTION
1.11.1. All plants not conforming to the requirements herein specified and on the drawings shall
be considered defective, and such plants, whether in place or not, shall be marked as
rejected and be immediately removed from the site of the work and replaced with
acceptable plant materials. The plant materials shall meet all applicable inspections
required by law. All plants shall be of the species, variety, size, age, flower color and
condition as specified herein and/or as indicated on the drawings. Under no condition
will there be any substitution of plant species, variety, or reduced sizes for those listed
on the accompanying drawings, except with the express written consent of the Owner.
1.12. INVOICING OF PLANT MATERIALS AND SOIL PREPARATION CONFORMANCE TESTapproval
1.12.1. Upon delivery of materials and/or completion of all soil conditioning and grading, but
prior to initiating planting operations, the Owner Representative with the heretofore
specified signed copies of required certificates, trip slips, and invoices for soil
preparation materials, shall compare the total quantities of each material furnished
against the total area for each operation. If the minimum rates of application have not
been met, the Owner will require at the Contractor’s expense, the distribution of
additional quantities of these materials to fulfill the minimum application requirements
specified.
1.12.2. After installation of plant materials, but prior to the premaintenance site observation visit,
the Owner, with the heretofore specified signed copies of the required certifications, trip
Larwin Community Park
LANDSCAPE PLANTING
02900 - 6
slips, and invoices for the plant materials and related items, shall compare the total area
and/or the amounts specified. If the minimum amounts have not been furnished, the
Owner will require at the contractors expense, the installation of additional materials to
fulfill the minimum requirements specified.
1.13. DECOMPOSED GRANITE REQUIREMENTS
1.13.1.
1 .I 3.2.
1 .I 3.3.
1.13.4.
1 .I 3.5.
Tests: Perform gradation of decomposed granite material in accordance with ASTM C
136 - Method of Sieve Analysis for Fine and Course.
Mock-ups: Install 4 ft. wide x 10 ft. long mock-ups of decomposed granite paving with
and without Stabilizer additive at locations specified by City representative or Landscape
Architect.
Environmental Conditions: Do not install decomposed granite paving while it is raining.
For Stabilized Decomposed Granite, contractor must check forecast and proceed only if
rain is not predicted for a minimum of 72 hours, and it has not rained for a minimum of
48 hours.
Quality Assurance: Installer - Provide evidence to indicate successful experience in
installing decomposed granite or crushed 3/8" or 114" aggregate paving containing
Stabilizer binder additive.
Excess Materials: Provide owner's authorized representative. With the following excess
materials for use in future decomposed granite repair: 40, 50 Ib. Bags of the aggregate
paving 1, 10 Ib. Bag of Stabilizer additive.
2. PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1. SOIL AMENDMENT AND FERTILIZER
&
2.1 .I. Soil conditioner shall be commercially processed bark or wood product which has been
well composted, consisting of a commercial blend of organic fractions supplying gradient
degrees of breakdown and conforming to the following requirements:
2.1.1 .I. Derived from bark of pine, white fir or redwood, or from cedar or redwood
shavings. Prior to odering provide sample to Owner for approval.
2.1 .I .2. Composted a minimum of 180 days and a maximum of 1 year. pH shall be
7.0 maximum and 5.5 minimum.
2.1.1.3. Salinity maximum 3.1 mmhos per centimeter at 25 degrees C as measured
by saturation extract conductivity.
2.1.1.4. Impregnated with a minimum of 1% nitrogen, 0.04% phosphoric acid, 0.04%
available potash, 0.02% calcium, 0.03% magnesium and 0.05% iron.
Redwood particles to be 1/50" to 1/4" in size, organic matter 97%, moisture
content 30%.
2.1 .I .5. Ash content not to exceed 10%.
2.1.2. Soil Conditioner shall be Organo life, A.J. - Ecohumus, Loamex or approved equal by
Landscape Architect. Pre-plant Commercial Fertilizer (1 5-1 5-1 5) shall be uniform in
composition, free flowing, suitable for application with approved equipment and
delivered to the project site in unopened original container or package, each bearing the
manufacturer's statement of guaranteed analysis, and shall contain the following
minimum available percentage by weight of plant nutrients:
Larwin Community Park LANDSCAPE PLANT1 N G
02900 - 7
2.2.
2.3.
2.4.
2.1.3.
2.1.4.
2.1.5.
2.1.6.
2.1 -7.
2.1.8.
2.1 9.
2.1 .lo.
Nitrogen 15% minimum
Phosphoric Acid 15% minimum
Potash 15% minimum
Wil-Gro, Bandini, Gro Power, Kellogg or approved equal,
Post-Plant Fertilizer (14-7-3). Federal Specifications L-F 241, shall be a long lasting,
slow release, pelleted or chip type, uniform in composition, free flowing, with less than
thirty percent (30%) passing through a twenty-eight (28) mesh Tyler screen, suitable for
application with approved equipment, and containing the following minimum available
percentages by weight of plant nutrients:
Nitrogen 14.0% minimum
Phosphoric Acid 7.0% minimum
Potash 3.0% minimum
Best, Bandini, Gro Power, Western Farm Services or approved equal.
Soil Sulfur: Shall be 99% elemental sulfur, Wilgro Life, Union Chemical or approved
equal.
Wetting Agent:
approved equal.
shall be “Naiad” turf and Ornamental Plantings Soil Penetrate or
Iron Sulfate: 20% Iron by volume. Warning: Fertilizers containing chelated iron
will‘stain concrete surfaces. The Contractor shall take care not to stain concrete
and shall be responsible for removing all iron stains from concrete at no
additional cost to the Owner.
Fertilizer Tablets: Shall be Agriform (20-10-5) chip tablets, 21 gram and 5 gram size, or
approved equal.
Gypsum - Commercially packaged, free flowing gypsum containing not less than 95% by
volume of calcium sulfate as an active ingredient.
Soil Moist - An acrylic co-polymers, ‘Terra Sorb’ or approved equal by landscape
architect.
Mulch: Clean shredded bark mulch, not to exceed %” in its largest dimension.
BACKFILL MIX
2.2.1. For trees, shrubs, and vines, thoroughly mix per cubic yard: 6 parts by volume of site
topsoil, 4 parts by volume of nitrogen stabilized organic amendment and nitrolized fir
bark, 4 pounds commercial fertilizer, and plant tablets per the manufacturer’s
recommendations. Blend ingredients at adjacent paved work area.
TREE TIES
2.3.1. VIT Cinch-Tie or equal.
TREESTAKES
2.4.1. 2” square x 10’ -0” or 2” diameter lodge pole pointed at one end and stained with green
copper naphthenate, TT-W-572, type I, composition B.
Larwin Community Park
LANDSCAPE PLANTING
02900 - 8
2.5.
2.6.
2.7.
2.8.
TREE TRUNK PROTECTORS
2.5.1. For Trees In Lawn Areas: "Trim Guard," by V.I.T. Products (619) 673-1797, or "Arbor-
Gard," by Deep Root Corporation, (714) 632-7083.
Protectors shall be plastic and of uniform color throughout the Project site. 2.5.2.
VINE TIES
2.6.1. Per detail.
WEED, FUNGUS AND PEST CONTROL
2.7.1.
PLANT MATERIALS
Materials recommended by a licensed Pest Control Advisor.
2.8.1.
2.8.2.
2.8.3.
2.8.4.
2.8.5.
2.8.6.
2.8.7.
2.8.8.
2.8.9.
2.8.10.
2.8.1 1.
Nomenclature: The scientific and common names of plants herein specified conform
with the approved names given in "A Checklist of Woody Ornamental Plants of
California", published by the University of California, College of Agriculture, Publication
4091 (1979). See list of plant material on drawings.
Container stock (1 gallon, 5 gallon, and 15 gallon) shall have grown in containers for at
least six months, but not over two years. No container plants that have cracked or
broken balls of earth, when taken from the container, shall be planted, except upon
special approval. No trees with damaged roots or broken balls shall be planted.
Pruning shall not be done, prior to delivery, except by written approval by the Landscape
Architect .
Inspection of Plant Materials, required by City, County or Owner authorities, shall be a
responsibility of the Contractor, and where necessary the Contractor shall secure
permits or certifications prior to delivery of plants to site.
Plants shall be subject to approval or rejection, at the project site at any time before or
during progress of work, for size, variety, condition, latent defects and injuries. Rejected
plants shall be removed from the project site immediately.
Substitutions will not be permitted unless proof is submitted by the Contractor that any
plant specified is not obtainable. A proposal for substitution will be submitted by the
Contractor to the Owner for approval.
Quantities shall be furnished as needed to complete work shown on drawings.
The Owner reserves the right to check root condition of any species, particularly those
grown from seed, and if found defective, to reject the plants represented by the defective
sample.
Identify plant species or varieties correctly on legible, weatherproof labels attached
securely to the plant material. There shall be a minimum of one labeled plant for each
25 plants in a lot.
Groundcover plants shall be healthy vigorous rooted cuttings grown in flats until
transplanting.
Lawn shall be as indicated on the drawings.
Larwin Community Park
LANDSCAPE PLANTING 02900 - 9
2.9. TURFGRASS HYDROSEED
2.9.1. All lawn seed shall be labeled and shall be furnished in sealed standard containers with
duplicate signed copies of a statement from the vendor certifying that each container of
seed delivered is fully labeled in accordance with the California State Agricultural Code.
Evidence of compliance to these specifications, such as invoice or tag, is required. Any
changes or alternations must be approved.
2.9.1.1. Slurry Mix Seed: All open play grass seed mixtures are available through
Agrono-Tec Seed Company, Inc., 909-674-0638.
Seed
Mulch
Polymer
Fertilizer
Agrono-Tec 2A @ 8 Ibsl1,OOO SF
Agrono Mulch @ 1,500 lbslac
Terra-Sorb GB @ 50 lbslac
Gro Power @ 200 Ibs/ac
2.10. IRRIGATED HYDROSEED MIX
2.10.1. All seed in hydroseed mix shall be labeled and furnished in sealed standard containers
with duplicate signed copies of a statement from the vendor certifying that each
container of seed delivered is fully labeled in accordance with the California State
Agricultural Code. Seed which has become wet, moldy or otherwise damaged in transit
or storage will not be acceptable. The minimum percentage by weight of pure, live seed
in each lot of seed shall be as follows:
MIN. PURITY/
BOTANICAL NAME GERMINATION LBS./ACRE
PER PLAN
2.1 1. HERBICIDES
2.11 .I. Pre-emergence herbicide shall be Surflan, Trefan, Dymid or approved equal.
2.12. BARK MULCH (2” depth in all planting bed areas with less than 2:1 slope)
2.12.1. Bark mulch shall be fir or pine “walk-on” shredded bark, clean and free of debris. Submit
1/2 cu. ft. for approval.
Larwin Community Park
LANDSCAPE PLANTING
02900 - 10
2.1 3. DECOMPOSED GRANiTE SCREENINGS
2.13.1. Crushed Stone Sieve Analysis Percentage of Weight Passing Square Mesh Sieve,
AASHTO TI 1-82 and T27-82
% " Minus Aggregate Gradation
Sieve Designation
Range of % Passing
318"
No. 4
No. 8
No. 16
No. 30
No. 50
No. 100
No. 200
1 00
95-1 00
75-80
65-55
40-50
25-35
20-25
5-1 5
2.13.1.1 Provided by KRC, Inc., ph. # 800427-0572, or approved equal.
2.13.1.2 Submit color sample to Owner for approval
2.13.2. Stabilizer Binder
2.13.2.1. Patented, non-toxic, organic binder that is colorless and odorless
concentrated powder that naturally binds crushed Aggregate screenings
(CAS) together to produce a natural firm surface.
3.
3.1.
3.2.
3.3.
2.1 3.2.2. Provided by Stabilizer Solutions, Inc., 800-336-2468, or approved equal.
Local suppliers (via Stabilizer Solutions Inc.): KRC Inc. (800-427-0572),
Gail Materials (800442-ROCK).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
. .a
SITE CLEARANCE
3.1 .I. Clean up and completely remove weeds and grass including any roots and any
accumulated debris and rubbish from the planting areas before commencing Landscape
Work.
TESTS
3.2.1. Composite Soil Tests: Take samples at depths of 8" to 12" and at depths of 24" to 36".
Obtain one agricultural suitability and fertility test by the University of California method.
Contractor shall amend soil based on soil test results and recommendations. Copies of
soil test results and analyses shall be sent to the Owner's Representative.
3.2.2. Water Percolation Tests: Carry out 3 tests with widely separated holes 2' x 2' x 2' deep.
Fill holes with water and allow to drain. Refill holes and measure drop in level over a
period of 4 hours or more. Report test results. Drop of less than 1" per hour will require
remedial measures.
SOIL CONDITIONING, FERTILIZING AND ROTOTILLING
3.3.1. After the areas have been graded, the following rates of soil conditioning and
amendment materials shall be evenly spread over all planting areas and shall be
Larwin Community Park LANDSCAPE PLANTING
02900 - 11
thoroughly scarified to an average depth of eight (8) inches by rototilling a minimum of
two (2) alternating passes, followed by eight (8) inches of water leaching performed in
four (4) applications of two (2) inches each.
3.3.1 .I. Soil Conditioner 5 cu. yd./l,OOO sq. ft.
3.3.1.2. Soil Sulfur 25 Ibs./l,OOO sq. ft.
3.3.1.3. Gypsum 100 Ibs./l ,000 sq. ft.
3.3.1.4. Pre Plant Fertilizer 30 IbsA ,000 sq. ft.
3.3.1.5. Iron Sulfate 40 Ibs./l,OOO sq. ft.
3.3.1.6. Naid 1 Quart per acre (prior to amending soil).
3.3.1.7. Soil Moist 1 lb./1,000 sq. ft.
Planting backfill in shrub planting areas shall be a thoroughly blended mixture of
excavated soil from the planting pits and soil amendments at the following mixture:
3.3.2.
3.3.2.1.
3.3.2.2.
3.3.2.3.
3.3.2.4.
3.3.2.5.
3.3.2.6.
3.3.2.7.
3.3.2.8.
Soil Conditioner
On Site Soil
Soil Sulfur
Pre-Plant Fertilizer
Iron Sulfate
Gypsum
Naid
Soil Moist
Vin es/S hru bs
40%
60%
1 Ib./cu. yd.
3 Ibs./cu. yd.
3 Ibs./cu. yd.
12 Ibslcu. yd.
1 oz./cu. yd.
1 Ib./cu. yd.
3.3.3. Rate of application shown is for bidding purposes only. Soil test may reduce or increase
total soil amendment yardage. Adjustment (plus or minus) may be necessary. The Contractor shall obtain four (4) soil tests of final grade at site as specified herein and
submit results to City representative for interpretation and recommendation. Contractor shall submit unit prices on above amendments for addldeduct options based on
submitted soil test reports.
3.3.4. The thoroughness and completeness of the rototilling and incorporation of the soil
conditionerslamendments shall be acceptable to the Owner prior to commencement of
planting operations.
3.4. FINISH GRADING
3.4.1. Finish grades shall be as existing at the site and as indicated on the as-built Civil
drawings.
Larwin Community Park
LANDSCAPE PLANTING 02900 - 12
3.4.2.
3.4.3.
3.4.4.
3.4.5.
3.4.6.
3.4.7.
3.4.8.
3.4.9.
3.4.1 0.
3.4.1 I.
3.4.1 2.
3.4.1 3.
3.4.1 4.
Finish grades shall be measured as the final water compacted and settled surface
grades and shall be within plus or minus 0.1 foot of the spot elevations and grade lines
indicated on the drawing.
Finish grades shall be measured at the top surface of surface materials.
Molding and rounding of the grades shall be provided at all changes in slope and as
directed by the Owner or Landscape Architect.
All undulations and irregularities in the planting surfaces resulting from tillage, rototilling
and all other operations shall be leveled and floated out before planting operations are
initiated.
The Contractor shall take every precaution to protect and avoid damage to existing and
new sprinkler heads, irrigation lines, and other underground utilities during his grading
and conditioning operations.
Final finish grades shall insure positive drainage of the site with all surface drainage
away from buildings, walls, and toward roadways, swales, drains and catch basins.
Final grades shall be acceptable to the Owner or Landscape Architect before planting
operations will be allowed to begin.
Planting surfaces shall be graded with no less than one (1) percent surface slope for
positive drainage.
Weed Control: Apply pre-emergent or contact herbicides recommended by a licensed
pest control advisor. Provide notification to Owner 48 hours in advance of intent to apply
spray herbicides. Avoid frequent soil cultivation which could destroy shallow roots. Make
final application at least 3 weeks before installation of plant materials or longer as
recommended by manufacturer.
Moisture Content: Do not work the soil when moisture content is so great that excessive
compaction will occur, nor when it is so dry that dust will form or clods will not break up
readily.
Contaminated Soil: Remove and dispose of soil which contains foreign materials or
deleterious substances such as oil, plaster, concrete, gasoline, paint, solvents, etc.
Replace affected soil with approved native or imported top soil. Contractor will be held
responsible for damage to installed plants caused by such substances.
Ripping: Loosen planting areas to a depth of 8" by ripping soil in two directions. Do not
invade root zone of existing trees on site without approval. Do not rip slopes 2:l and
greater.
Finish Grade: Grade planting areas to a smooth and even condition, without water
pockets or irregularities. Water settle backfilled areas. Remove clods over 2" and rocks
over 1" in diameter within 6" of surface. Fine grade so that after conditioning and
planting, finish grade is 1-1/2" (for groundcover areas) below the top of curbs and walks.
Slope to drain away from building to adjacent roadways, drainage swales, or catch
basins at 2%.
3.5. PLANTING
3.5.1. Protection: Protect plant materials from sun, wind, and drying during transit, at the site
before, during, and after planting. Water to full depth of backfill immediately after
planting, including groundcover areas.
-
Lawin Community Park LANDSCAPE PLANTING 02900 - 13
3.5.2.
3.5.3.
3.5.4.
3.5.5.
3.5.6.
3.5.7.
3.5.8.
3.5.9.
3.5.10.
Do not plant until irrigation system installation is complete, and until final grades are
established and approved.
Plant Locations: Plant locations shown on the Drawings are diagrammatic and subject
to minor modification in the field as approved by the Owner's Representative and at no
additional cost to the Owner.
Pits: Dig with vertical sides. Size as indicated on the Drawings.
Setting: Place plants in center of pits in vertical setting. Place so that crown will be at
least 2" above finish grade for trees and shrubs after watering and settling and create a
temporary water basin around pits. Keep groundcover 114" above grade and water with
a fine spray.
Backfill: For trees, shrubs, and vines, backfill with thoroughly mixed specified mixture
and then water. Thoroughly water settle all backfilled areas.
Fertilizer Tablets: See item 3.6.9 below.
Staking: Stake as noted and detailed on Landscape Detail Drawings. Remove nursery
stakes and labels as soon as planting detail stakes and guys are installed.
Mulching: For tree, shrub, and groundcover areas. Apply 2" settled thickness of mulch
over planting beds within 2 days after planting. Rake to an even surface and water to full
depth of mulch.
Tree Trunk Protectors: For trees in lawn areas. Install per manufacturer's instructions.
3.6. PLANTING SHRUBS AND VINES
3.6.1.
3.6.2.
3.6.3.
3.6.4.
3.6.5.
3.6.6.
3.6.7.
3.6.8.
In general, planting holes shall be two times the size of the rootball, but in no case too
small to accommodate plants.
Excavation shall include the stripping and stacking of all acceptable soil encountered
within the areas to be excavated for plant pits and planting beds. Protect all areas that
are to be trucked over and upon which soil is to be temporarily stacked pending its re- use for the fillings of holes, pits and beds. .
Excess soil, generated from the planting holes shall be spread evenly over the site by
the Contractor.
All used containers shall be removed from the site by the Contractor at the end of each
working day or stored at project area storage location if to be discarded at a later time.
The plants shall be planted at approved locations with the heretofore specified
conditioner and soil planting backfill.
The plants shall be placed in the planting pits on the soil which has been hand tamped
and water settled to the root ball base levels prior to the placement of the plants. After
setting the plants, the remaining backfill material shall be carefully tamped and settled
around each root ball to fill all voids.
Each shrub shall be placed in the center of the hole and shall be set plumb and held
rigidly in position until the planting backfill has been tamped from around each root ball.
All plants shall be set at such a level that after settling they bear the same relationship to
the surrounding finish grade as they bore to the soil in the container.
Larwin Community Park
LANDSCAPE PLANTING
02900 - 14
3.7.
3.8.
3.9.
3.10.
3.6.9.
3.6.10.
3.6.1 1.
3.6.12.
3.6.13.
Planting tablets shall be placed in each shrub planting hole at the following rates.
3.6.9.1. 2-21 gram tablets per 15 gallon container.
3.6.9.2. 2-21 gram tablets per 5 gallon container.
3.6.9.3. 1-21 gram tablet per each 1 gallon container
No plant will be accepted if the root ball is broken or cracked, either before or during
installation. Pot bound container grown plant nursery stock materials will not be
acceptable.
All plants shall be thoroughly watered into the full depth of each plant hole immediately
after planting.
The Contractor shall be responsible for all surface and subsurface drainage required
which may affect his guarantee of the shrubs, and vines.
Pruning after planting shall be required on all shrubs and vines when necessary to
provide the specified or approved standard shapes, form and/or sizes characteristic to
each plant. Pruning may include thinning, topping, and/or cutting and shall be under the
direction of the Owner.
PLANTING GROUNDCOVERS
3.7.1. Groundcovers shall be planted in the areas indicated on the drawings. The groundcover
plants shall be rooted cuttings grown in flats, and shall remain in those flats until
transplanting.
3.7.2. All groundcover plants shall be planted with soil around roots in staggered rows, evenly
spaced at the intervals called out on the drawings.
3.7.3. The groundcover plants shall be planted sufficiently deep to cover all roots and shall be
fertilized with a 5 gram plant tablet and immediately sprinkled after planting until the
entire area is soaked to the full depth of all holes.
BARK MULCH APPLICATION
3.8.1. Apply 2" minimum depth of bark mulch to all shrub and groundcover areas less than 2:l
slope.
H E RBI C ID E AP P L I CAT1 0 N
3.9.1. Apply approved herbicide to subgrade in all planting areas and decomposed granite
areas as required by owner.
3.9.2. Apply herbicides according to manufacturer's directions only, using all proper safety
precautions. Do not apply herbicides during high winds or rainy weather.
GUYING MATERIALS
3.10.1. Guy wires shall be of pliable, zinc-coated steel of No. 12 gauge.
3.10.2. Anchors (deadman) for holding guy wires shall be 8" x 8 x 16" concrete blocks. Set 18"
below finish grade.
3.10.3. Pipe for covering wire, shall be 1/2" dia. by 5' long white PVC plastic pipes.
Larwin Community Park
LANDSCAPE PLANTING 02900 - 15
3.1 1. HYDROSEEDING
3.1 1 .I. Inspection of Conditions: Before proceeding with any work, the hydroseeding landscape
contractor shall carefully check planting area conditions and shall immediately inform the
Owner of any discrepancies between the drawings and actual conditions. No work shall,
be done on any area where there are such discrepancies or where conditions are
unsuitable for successful plant material establishment until approval has been given by
the Owner Reprsentative.
3.11.2. Quality of Work: The hydroseeding work shall be performed by a competently trained
individual or hydroseeding company in accordance with the best standards and
practices related to the trade.
3.1 1.3. Soil Preparation:
3.1 1.3.1. Water all planting areas thoroughly and continuously for three (3)
consecutive days to saturate upper layers of soil prior to hydroseeding
operation.
3.11.3.2. Allow planting area soil surface to dry out for one day only prior to the
hydroseeding application. Care must be taken to not allow the soil surface
to be super saturated with water prior to the hydroseeding installation. At
the same time the soil surface should not be bone dry. There should be
some residual moisture within the first 114 inch of soil surface.
3.1 1.3.3. Begin the hydroseeding operation on all areas as specified herein.
3.11.4. Materials: All materials shall be standard, approved, first grade quality and in prime
condition when installed. All commercial process or packaging material shall be
delivered to the site in the original unopened containers bearing the manufacturer's
guaranteed analysis.
3.1 1.4.1. Hydromulching Application and Planting Schedule: The hydromulching shall
be applied in the form of a slurry consisting of organic soil amendments,
commercial fertilizer, and other chemicals called for. When hydraulically
sprayed onto the soil, the mulch shall not form a blotter like material. The
spray operation must be so directed that the slurry spray will also penetrate
the soil surface as to drill and mix the slurry components into the soil, thus
ensuring maximum impregnation and coverage.
3.1 1.5. Preparation of Hydroseeding Mixture:
3.1 1 51. The slurry shall be prepared at the site and its components shall be mixed to
supply the rates of application as per specifications.
3.1 1.5.2. Slurry preparation shall begin by adding water to the link when the engine is
at one-half throttle. When the water level has reached the height of the
agitator shaft and good recirculation has been established, the fertilizers
shall be added to the mixture (the tank shall be at least 1/3 filled with water
at this time).
3.1 1.5.3. The engine throttle shall be open to full speed when the tank is 112 filled with
water. All organic amendments, fiber, and chemicals shall then be added by
the time the tank is 2/3 to 3/4 full. At this time the seed mix shall also be
added.
Latwin Community Park LANDSCAPE PLANTING
02900 - 16
3.11.6.
3.1 1.7.
3.1 1.8.
3.1 1.9.
3.11.10.
3.1 1.1 1.
3.1 1 .I 2.
3.11.13.
3.11.5.4. Spraying shall commence immediately when the tank is full and the slurry is
m ixed .
Application: The operator shall spray the area with a uniform visible coat using the dark
color of the cellulose fiber or organic amendment as a visual guide. The slurry shall be
applied in a downward drilling motion via a fan stream nozzle.
Time Limit: The hydromulching slurry components are not to be left in the machine for
more than two hours. If slurry components are left for more than two hours in the
machine, the Contractor shall add 50% more of the originally specified seed mix to any
slurry mix which has not been applied within the two hours after mixing. The Contractor
shall add 75% more of the original seed mix to any slurry mixture which has not been
applied eight hours after mixing. Any mixture not applied after eight hours shall be
rejected and disposed of off-site at Contractor's expense.
Protection: Special care is to be exercised by the Contractor to prevent any of the slurry
from being sprayed onto any adjacent property, etc. Any slurry sprayed onto these
areas shall be cleaned off at the Contractor's expense.
Hydromulching Schedule: As an added precaution, the hydroseeded area shall be
presoaked with water by the irrigation system to a depth ofthree (3) inches 48 hours
prior to the hydroseeding installation.
Hydroseeding Equipment: The specified components shall be mixed together in a
hydroseeding machine described as follows:
3.11.10.1.
3.1 1.10.2.
The hydromulching equipment shall meet the minimum requirements of a
slurry distribution line large enough to prevent closing and shall be equipped
with a set of hydraulic spray nozzles which will provide a continuous non-
fluctuating discharge of at least 25 psi at the end of the spray nozzle. The
slurry tank shall have a minimum capacity of 2000 gallons and shall be
mounted on a traveling unit either self-propelled or drawn by a separate unit.
The equipment shall have a built-in agitation system under operating
capacity sufficient to agitate, suspend and homogeneously mix a slurry
containing not less than 20 kilos (44 Ibs.) of organic mulching amendment
plus fertilizer chemical additives and solids for each 100 gallons of water.
Water: Apply adequate moisture to germinate seed. Best applied via several short
durations. Seed shall be kept moist, not wet.
Post-Emergent Fertilizer: Fertilize with 21-7-14 fertilizer 10 to 14 days after planting.
Apply at the rate of 3 to 4 Ibs. per 1,000 SF. Water thoroughly.
Weed Control: Do not apply any post-emergent herbicides for 45 to 60 days after
planting.
3.12. DECOMPOSED GRANITE
3.12.1. Stake and measure areas according to the rate of Decomposed Granite (D.G.) and
Stabilizer to be used. See Plans for trail width and configuration and trail detail for trail
edging requirements.
3.12.2. Spread all decomposed granite mixes to desired depths and levels to grade over
specified base material. (See Landscape Detail Plans for depth and locations of
designated stabilized D.G. trail). It is critical that stabilizer be thoroughly and uniformly
Larwin Community Park
LANDSCAPE PLANTING
02900 - 17
3.12.3.
3.12.4.
3.12.5.
3.12.6.
3.1 2.7.
premixed (at the supplier plant) throughout the total depth of the decomposed granite
profile. Contractor to provide trip slips and invoices of materials provided to the Owner.
Water heavily with a hose to achieve full depth moisture penetration of the mix. (Do not
water with a water truck). Test for penetration by random core inspection.
Roll and compact to 95% relative compaction with a two- to five-ton double drum roller.
If the surface is flaky or sticks to the roller drum, add more water. If the roller creates a
washboard effect or rills, extra setup time is necessary. Do not begin compaction for
6 hours after placement and up to 48 hours. Take care in compacting decomposed
granite screenings when adjacent to planting and irrigation systems.
Remove and replace decomposed granite paving that is damaged, defective, or does
not meet minimum requirements of this section.
Contractor to grade all decomposed granite areas as per Civil engineers drawings to
shed water off the sides.
Repairs:
3.12.7.1. Excavate damaged areas to the depth of Stabilized decomposed granite
and square up side walls.
3.12.7.2. If area is dry, moisten damaged portion lightly.
3.12.7.3. Preblend the dry required amount of Stabilizer powder with the proper
amount of decomposed granite in a cement mixer or pug mill.
3.12.7.4. Add water to the pre-blended decomposed granite/Stabilizer mix.
Thoroughly moisten mix with 25-35 gallons per ton of pre-blended material,
or to approximately 10% moisture content.
Apply moistened, pre-blended decomposed granite screenings to excavated
area to finish grade.
Compact with an 8" to 10" hand tamp or 250 to 300 Ib. Roller (if the area is
high traffic area, i.e..
3.12.7.5.
3.12.7.6.
3.13. CLEANUP
3.13.1. Refer also to Section 01 770.
3.13.2. Site: During the course of the Work, remove surplus materials from the site and leave
premises in a neat and clean condition. Sweep walks and paving.
3.1 3.3. Plants: After pre-maintenance observation remove nursery tags and labels from plant
materials.
3.14. MAINTENANCE - NE3 PLANT MATERIALS
3.14.1. Refer also to Section 0281 0 for Landscape Irrigation Maintenance Requirements
3.14.1. Maintenance period shall begin when all Work indicated on Drawings and specified has
been completed, inspected and approved by Owner's Representative. Maintenance
work shall e Brformed as specified herein after, and shall be continued for a minimum
period of & alendar days. Contractor shall not be released from the maintenance
period obligation until all items found during inspections have been resolved to the
LANDSCAPE PLANTING
Larwin Community Park
02900 - 18
.-
Owner's Representative's satisfaction in conformance with the Drawings and
Specifications, and a written statement so stating has been issued.
3.14.2. Tree Pruning:
3.1 4.2.1. Prune trees selectively to provide the following characteristics:
3.14.2.1 .I. To allow development of permanent scaffold branches that are
smaller in diameter than the trunk or branch to which they are
attached, and which have a vertical spacing of 18" to 24", with
radial orientation and do not overlap one another.
3.14.2.1.2. Eliminate narrow V-shaped branch forks which lack strength.
3.14.2.1.3. Thin out crowns to reduce toppling and wind damage.
3.14.2.1.4. As necessary to maintain growth within space limitations.
3.14.2.1.5. As necessary to maintain a natural appearance, and to balance
the crown with roots.
3.14.2.2. Stripping of lower branches (raising up) of young trees will not be permitted.
Retain lower branches in a "tipped back" or pinched condition, with as much
foliage as possible to promote trunk growth (tapered trunk). Lower branches
may be cut flush with the trunk only after the tree is able to stand erect
without staking or other support.
3.14.2.3. Thin out and shape evergreen trees when necessary to prevent wind and
storm damage.
3.14.2.4. Perform primary pruning of deciduous trees during the dormant season.
Prune damaged trees or those that constitute health or safety hazards
promptly, without regard to season.
3.14.2.5. Make all pruning cuts of lateral branches or buds flush with trunk. "Stubbing"
is not permitted.
3.14.2.6. Prune lower branches interfering with mowing operations, but only with the
approval of the Owner's Representative.
3.14.3. Shrub Pruning: Objectives of shrub pruning are as specified for trees. Do not clip shrubs
into balled or boxed form.
3.14.4. Plant Supports: Inspect stakes and guys to prevent girdling of trunks or branches. Make
adjustments as necessary to prevent rubbing or injury to bark.
3.14.5. Weed Control: Maintain basins and areas between plants free of weed growth. Apply
pre-emergent herbicides as recommended by a licensed pest control advisor. Avoid
frequent soil cultivation that may damage shallow roots.
3.14.6. Insect and Disease Control: Maintain effective controls using approved materials and
application techniques in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
3.14.7. Pest Control: Provide all measures necessary to exterminate gophers and moles
immediately when their presence is discovered, Repair and restore all surfaces to their
original conditions.
Larwin Community Park
LANDSCAPE PLANTING
02900- 19 ,
3.14.8: Fertilization: Provide application of 15-1 5-15 commercial fertilizer; apply at the rate of 10
Ibs. per 1,000 square feet at the following periods:
3.14.8.1. Sixty (60) calendar days following beginning date of maintenance period.
3.14.9. Plant Replacement: Remove dead and dying plants and replace with healthy plants of
equal size, condition, and variety indicated on the Contract Drawings. Prepare soils and
plant in accordance with Contract Specifications.
3.14.1 0. Miscellaneous:
3.14.10.1. All paved areas shall be kept continuously clear of mud, debris and puddles.
3.14.1 0.2. Hoses, maintenance equipment, and materials shall be neatly stored when
not in use in an area authorized by the Owner's Representative.
3.14.10.3. Maintain a water basin around plants sized so that enough water can be
applied to establish moisture through major root zone. When hand watering,
use a water wand to break force of water.
3.14.10.4. Maintenance foreman on the job shall be a competent English speaking
supervisor, experienced in landscape maintenance, and capable of
discussing matters with the City Representative on the site.
3.1 5. FINAL ACCEPTANCE
3.15.1. After final inspection and acceptance of completed Work, Owner will assume
maintenance of accepted Work.
END OF SECTION
Larwin Community Park
LANDSCAPE PLANTING
02900 - 20
1.
1.1.
1.2.
- 1.3.
I .4.
1.5.
1.6.
I .7. _-
SECTION 03100
CONCRETE FORMWORK
DELETE SECTION 201 OF THE SSPWC AND REPLACE WITH THE FOLLOWING CONCRETE
SPECIFICATION FOR ARCHITECTURAL WORK PART I - GENERAL
SECTION INCLUDES
1.1.1.
1 .I .2.
I .I .3. Form accessories.
1 .I .4. Form stripping.
PRODUCTS INSTALLED BUT NOT FURNISHED UNDER THIS SECTION
1.2.1.
Formwork for cast-in-place concrete, with shoring, bracing and anchorage.
Openings for other work.
Section 0331 0 - Cast-ln-Place Concrete: Supply of concrete accessories for placement
by this Section.
Section 04810 - Reinforced Unit Masonry System : Supply of masonry accessories for
placement by this Section.
Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications: Supply of metal fabrications for placement by this
Section.
1.2.2.
1.2.3.
RELATED SECTIONS
1.3.1.
1.3.2.
1.3.3.
REFERENCES
1.4.1.
I .4.2.
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
1 51.
Section 02751 - Portland Cement Concrete Paving.
Section 03200 - Concrete Reinforcement.
Section 0331 0 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.
ACI 347R - Guide to Formwork for Concrete.
PS - 1 - Construction and Industrial Plywood.
Design, engineer and construct formwork, shoring and bracing to conform to design and
code requirements, with resultant concrete conforming to required shape, line and
dimension.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.6.1.
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
1.7.1.
Perform Work in accordance with ACI 347R.
Conform to Uniform Building Code for design, fabrication, erection and removal of
formwork, including Section 1906. ..-
-.-.d L Larwin Park
City Of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
CONCRETE FORMWORK 03100 - 1
1.8.
1.9.
2.
2.1.
2.2.
COORDINATION
1.8.1.
1.8.2. Coordinate this Section with other Sections of work which require attachment of
Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01310 .
components to formwork.
If formwork is placed after reinforcement resulting in insufficient concrete cover over
reinforcement, request instructions from Architect before proceeding.
1.8.3.
PRODUCT HANDLING
1.9.1.
1.9.2.
On delivery to Project Site, place materials in area protected from weather.
Store materials above ground on framework or blocking and cover with protective
waterproof covering providing for adequate air circulation and ventilation. Handle
materials to prevent damage.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
WOOD FORM MATERIALS
2.1 .I. Formwork Re-Use Criteria
2.1.1 .I.
2.1.1.2.
Provide all new materials.
Materials may be reused during the progress of the work, provided surface
finish, formwork quality and structural capability are maintained.
Completely clean and recondition all reused formwork materials. Recoat for
each reuse.
2.1 .I .3.
2.1.2. Softwood Plywood - Vertical and horizontal surfaces.
2.1.2.1.
2.1.2.2.
2.1.2.3.
Lumber: Provide Douglas Fir, Standard or Better grade, 2 inch nominal thickness,
dressed S4S.
Grade Certification: APA Grade stamped, complying with PS-1.
Type: APA Plyform, Exterior Type.
Class/Face Veneer: Class I or II, B-B Veneer.
2.1.3.
FORMWORK ACCESSORIES
2.2.1 * Form Ties:
2.2.1.1. Concealed Condition:
2.2.1 .I .I. Burke Penta-Tie or equal. Snap-off type, fixed length, cone
type, 1 inch back break dimension, free of defects that could
leave holes larger than one inch in concrete surface; provide
flush plugs for cone holes.
Burke Taperlies or equal. 2.2.1 .I .2.
Larwin Park
City Of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
CONCRETE FORMWORK
03100 - 2
2.3.
2.4.
3.
3.1.
3.2.
2.2.2. Form Release Agent: Cresset or equal, colorless, water based material which will not
stain concrete, or absorb moisture, or impair natural bonding or color characteristics of
coating intended for use on concrete.
2.2.2.1. Select type suitable and appropriate for achieving CCS 2 surface at exposed
concrete applications.
2.2.2.2. Select type suitable and appropriate for achieving CCS 4 surface at
concealed concrete applications.
2.2.3. Sleeves for pipe penetrations: Corrosion Resistant metal/Polyvinyl Chloride pipe, size as
required for necessary clearances and installation of sealants.
Nails, Spikes, Lag Bolts, Through Bolts, Anchorages: Sized as required, of sufficient
strength and character to maintain formwork in place while placing concrete.
Form Stakes: Steel bar stock, pre-drilled for nails.
2.2.4.
2.2.5.
TUBE FORM
2.3.1. Provide Burke or equal prefabricated tube form.
2.3.1.1. Light pole bases: Seamless Series, wall type as required by application.
OTHER MATERIALS
2.4.1. Provide all other materials, not specifically described but required for complete and
proper installation of this work, as selected by the contractor and subject to the approval
of the Architect.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
SURFACE CONDITIONS
3.1 .I. I n s pect ion
3.1 .I .I. Prior to work of this section, carefully inspect previously installed work.
Verify all such work is complete to the point where this installation may
properly commence.
Verify that work of this section may be installed in strict accordance with the
original design, all pertinent codes and regulations, and all pertinent portions
of the referenced standards.
In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Architect.
Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such
discrepancies have been fully resolved.
3.1.1.2.
3.1.1.3.
3.1.1.4.
EARTH FORMS
3.2.1. Earth forms may be used for footings and grade beams where soil is stable. Any exposed footings shall be formed.
Hand trim sides and bottom of earth forms. Remove loose soil prior to placing concrete.
Increase width of earth formed members one inch each side.
3.2.2.
Larwin Park
City Of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
CONCRETE FORMWORK
03100 - 3
3.2.3. Construct wood edge forms, as specified below, to extend not less than 2 inches below
soil level. Do not permit stakes to extend into or through footing zone. Form all concrete
without penetrating footing concrete.
3.2.4. Fill over-excavated footings and foundations with concrete at no additional contract cost.
3.2.5. Excavate as necessary to accommodate installation and removal of formwork.
3.2.6. Fill voids resulting from collapse or sloughing of foundation excavation and sidewalls with
concrete at no additional contract cost.
3.2.7. Prior to pouring footings or foundations, remove all debris, loose material, and water
from excavation.
3.2.7.1. Where water has accumulated in excavation, obtain Architects and
Geotechnical Engineers review of the suitability of sub-grade condition.
3.2.7.2. Repair sub-grade as required by Geotechnical Engineer at no additional
contract cost.
3.2.7.3. Do not place concrete on mud or saturated soils.
3.3. ERECTION - FORMWORK
3.3.1. Erect formwork, shoring and bracing to achieve design requirements, in accordance with
requirements of ACI 347R.
3.3.2. Formwork bracing and supports:
3.3.2.1. Provide bracing to ensure stability of formwork.
3.3.2.2. Shore or strengthen formwork subject to overstressing by construction loads.
3.3.2.3. Do not permit form stakes to extend into or through footing zone. Form all
concrete without penetrating footing concrete. '
3.3.3. Arrange and assemble formwork to permit dismantling and stripping. Do not damage
concrete during stripping. Provide crush plates or other approved guards where stripping
operation may damage concrete. Kerf wood inserts to permit easy removal.
3.3.4. Plywood Lay-out:
3.3.4.1. Place plywood panels with horizontal joints level, vertical joints plumb.
3.3.4.1.1. Unless noted otherwise, place panel edge at center of
surface and extend in equal dimension in each direction.
3.3.4.1.2. Set form tie so that visible cones are placed in a uniform
and aligned pattern. Maintain cones level and vertically
aligned.
3.3.4.2. Keep form joints to a minimum. Use maximum size panels.
3.3.4.3. Back all joints by a stud or solid blocking, and provide shaped filler where
necessary for smoothness. Provide foam form edge striping to prevent
grout washout.
Lawin Park
City Of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
CONCRETE FORMWORK
03100 - 4
3.4.
3.5.
3.6.
3.7.
3.8.
3.3.4.4. Reused panels shall be thoroughly cleaned, damaged edges or surfaces
repaired, and both sides and edges coated with specified material.
Nail plywood along edges and to intermediate supports with common wire
nails spaced as necessary to maintain alignment and prevent warping.
3.3.4.5.
3.3.5.
3.3.6.
Openings in structural members which are not indicated on Drawing are not permitted.
Depressions and transitions: Review all drawing? and identify all areas requiring
depressions and transitions. Coordinate with work in other sections to verify required
depth and profile prior to setting forms.
APPLICATION - FORM RELEASE AGENT
3.4.1. Apply form release agent on formwork in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations.
Apply prior to placement of reinforcing steel, anchoring devices, and embedded items.
Do not apply form release agent where concrete surfaces will receive special finishes or
applied coverings which are effected by agent. Soak inside surfaces of untreated forms
with clean water. Keep surfaces wet prior to placement of concrete.
3.4.2.
3.4.3.
INSERTS, EMBEDDED PARTS, AND OPENINGS
3.5.1. Provide formed openings where required for items to be embedded in or passing through
concrete work.
Locate and set in place items which will be cast directly into concrete. 3.5.2.
3.5.3. Coordinate work of other Sections in forming and placing openings, slots, reglets,
recesses, chases, sleeves, bolts, anchors, and other inserts.
Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, straight, level, and
plumb. Ensure items are not disturbed during concrete placement.
3.5.4.
FORM CLEANING
3.6.1.
3.6.2.
3.6.3.
Clean and remove foreign matter within forms as erection proceeds.
Clean formed cavities of debris prior to placing concrete.
Flush with water or use compressed air to remove remaining foreign matter. Ensure that
water and debris drain to exterior through clean-out ports.
FORMWORK TOLERANCES
3.7.1.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
3.8.1.
Construct formwork to maintain tolerances required by ACI 347R.
Erected formwork, shoring, and bracing will be inspected under the provision of Section
01450 to ensure that work is in accordance with formwork design, and that supports,
fastenings, wedges, ties, and items are secure.
Request inspection 48 hours prior to placing concrete. 3.8.2.
Larwin Park
City Of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
CONCRETE FORMWORK
03100 - 5
3.8.3. Deformation of formwork under load causing finish surface to be out of line, level, or
plumb will be cause for rejection of concrete and subsequent removal.
3.9. FORM REMOVAL
3.9.1.
3.9.2.
3.9.3.
3.9.4.
3.9.5.
3.9.6.
3.9.7.
Larwin Park
City Of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
Do not remove forms or bracing until concrete has gained sufficient strength to carry its
own weight and imposed loads, and in accordance with the following:
Loosen forms carefully. Do not wedge pry bars, hammers, or tools against finish
concrete surfaces scheduled for exposure to view.
Store removed forms in manner that surfaces to be in contact with fresh concrete will not
be damaged. Discard damaged forms.
Plug exposed snap tie holes as specified in Section 0331 0.
Plug taper tie holes with approved cement grout.
Grout concealed form holes as specified in Section 0331 0.
Remove and finish fiberglass form tie per manufacturers recommendations.
END OF SECTION
CONCRETE FORMWORK
03100 - 6
SECTION 03200
CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
DELETE SECTION 201 OF THE SSPWC AND REPLACE WITH THE FOLLOWING SPECIFICATION FOR
ARCHITECTURAL WORK ONLY
1.
1.1.
1.2.
1.3.
1.4.
PART 1 - GENERAL
SECTION INCLUDES
1.1.1.
RELATED SECTIONS
1.2.1.
1.2.2.
Reinforcing steel bars, wire fabric and accessories for cast-in-place concrete.
Section 02751 - Portland Cement Concrete Paving.
Section 03100 - Concrete Forrnwork.
1.2.3.
REFERENCES
Section 0331 0 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.
I .3.1.
I .3.2.
ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements For Structural Concrete.
ACI SP-66 - American Concrete Institute-Detailing Manual.
1.3.3.
1.3.4.
ASTM A82 - Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement.
ASTM A185 - Steel Welded Wire Fabric, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement
1.3.5.
1.3.6.
1.3.7.
I .3.8.
1.3.9.
S U BM IlTALS
1.4.1.
1.4.2.
ASTM A615 - Deformed and Plain Billet Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.
ASTM A706 - Low Alloy Steel Deformed and Plain Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.
CRSl - Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute Manual of Practice.
CRSl - Placing Reinforcing Bars (5th ed.)
AWS D1.4 Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel.
Submit under provisions of Section 01 330.
Test Reports: Submit certified copies of mill test report of reinforcing steel analysis to
testing laboratory, indicating products meet or exceed specified requirements. Include
grades, physical and chemical properties.
1.4.2.1. Where welding of reinforcing steel is required, submit mill reports indicating
the chemical composition and the carbon equivalent (C.E.).
Larwin Park
City Of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
03200 - I
1.4.3. Submit steel reinforcement shop drawings in accordance with ACI 315 for reinforcing
work which deviates from structural drawings and specifications.
1.5. QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.5.1. Perform Work in accordance with CRSI, ACI SP-66, and ACI 318 and applicable section
of Chapter 19, Uniform Building Code.
1.6. QUALIFICATIONS
1.6.1. Manufacturer
1.6.1.1. Manufacturer shall have produced the specified products for a period of five
(5) years prior to beginning work of this section, and shall have the capability
to produce the specified products to the delivery and quantity criteria of the
project.
1.6.1.2. Unless noted otherwise, reinforcing steel may be of domestic or imported
origin, subject to compliance with specified criteria.
1.6.2. Fabricator/Erector
1.6.2.1. For fabrication and installation of work, use only personnel who are
thoroughly trained and experienced in the skills required, have installed
similar applications of the specified products within one year prior to
beginning work on this section, and who are completely familiar with the
requirements of this work.
1.6.2.2. Fabricator shall be currently licensed and approved by jurisdictional authority
as an approved fabricator of reinforcing steel.
1.7. COORDINATION
1.7.1. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01 31 0 ,
1.7.2. Coordinate with placement of formwork, formed openings and other Work.
1.8. PRODUCT HANDLING
1.8.1. Deliver reinforcement to the Project Site bundled, tagged and marked. Indicate on tags,
bar size, lengths, and other information corresponding to markings shown on placement
diagrams.
1.8.2. Store materials at the Project Site to prevent damage and accumulation of dirt and
excessive rust, Store welding electrodes in accord with AWS Dl .4.
2. PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1. REINFORCEMENT
2.1 .I. Reinforcing Steel:
2.1.1.1. Non-Welded Systems: ASTM A61 5, deformed billet steel bars, plain finish.
2.1 .I .I .I. Bar size #5 and larger: 60 ksi yield grade.
2.1 .I .I 2. Bar size less than #5: 40 ksi yield grade.
Larwin Park
City Of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
03200 - 2
2.1 .I .I .3. Provide reinforcing steel complying with ASTM A 706,
Grade 60, where shown.
2.1 .I .2. Welded Systems: ASTM A706, Grade 60.
2.1.1.3. Deformed wire: ASTM A 496.
2.1.2. Welded Steel Wire Fabric: ASTM A185, Plain Type; flat sheets; plain finish.
2.1.3. Dowels: Same as 2.1 .l.
2.2. ACCESSORY MATERIALS
2.2.1. Tie Wire: Minimum 16 gage annealed type .
2.2.2. Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports, Spacers: Sized and shaped for strength and support of
reinforcement during concrete placement conditions including load bearing pad on
bottom to prevent vapor retardedbarrier puncture.
2.2.3. Electrodes for welding ASTM A 615 reinforcing steel: Conform to requirements of
Specifications for Low Alloy Steel Covered Arc-Welding Electrodes, AWS A5.5, E9OXX
Series, low hydrogen, having a minimum yield point of 90,000 psi.
2.2.4. Electrodes for welding ASTM A 706 reinforcing steel: Conform to requirements of
Specifications for Low Alloy Steel Covered Arc-Welding Electrodes, AWS A5.5, E80XX
Series, low hydrogen.
2.3. FABRICATION
2.3.1.
-
Fabricate concrete reinforcing in accordance with CRSl Manual of Practice, ACI SP-66,
and ACI 318.
2.3.2. Do NOT bend or straighten bars in manner that will weaken or injure bar. Do not re-bend
bars.
2.3.3. Do NOT use heat to bend bars.
2.3.4. Remove and replace reinforcement with following fabrication defects.
2.3.4.1. Bar lengths, depths and bends exceeding specified fabrication tolerances.
2.3.4.2. Bends or kinks not shown on Drawings or final shop drawings.
2.3.4.3. Bars with reduced cross-section due to excessive rusting or other cause
2.3.5. Locate reinforcing splices as shown on Drawings.
Engineer for splices not shown on drawings.
Obtain approval of Structural
2.4. SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL AND TESTING
2.4.1. Provide for testing under the provisions of Section 01450.
2.4.1 .I. Reinforcing Bars: Sections 1903.5.2 and 1906.5.3, Chapter 19, Uniform
Building Code.
2.4.1.2. Cost of testing for unidentified stock shall be reimbursed to the Owner by the
Contractor.
Latwin Park
City Of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT 03200 - 3
2.5.
3.
3.1.
3.2.
2.4.2. Provide mill test certificates indicating the following information:
2.4.2.1. Steel Source and Description
2.4.2.2.
2.4.2.3.
Sample and test reinforcing for compliance with ASTM A 61 5 and ASTM A 706.
2.4.3.1.
Ultimate tensile strength, Bend test, Elongation percentage and Yield point.
Heat number and Chemical analysis.
2.4.3.
When materials are delivered with heat number and mill test, the Testing
Laboratory shall make one series of tests (tensile and bend) for each 10.0
tons, or fraction, of each size and kind of reinforcing steel.
When materials cannot be identified, the Testing Laboratory shall make one
series of tests (tensile and bend) for each 2.5 tons, or fraction, of each size
and kind of reinforcing steel.
Payment for such testing will be borne by Contractor.
2.4.3.2.
2.4.3.3.
OTHER MATERIALS
2.5.1. Provide all other materials, not specifically described but required for complete and
proper installation of this work, as selected by the contractor and subject to the approval
of the Architect.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
SURFACE CONDITIONS
3.1 .I, Inspection
3.1.1.1.
3.1 .I .2.
3.1.1.3.
3.1 .I .4.
PLACEMENT
Prior to work of this section, carefully inspect previously installed work.
Verify all such work is complete to the point where this installation may
properly commence.
Verify that work of this section may be installed in strict accordance with the
original design, all pertinent codes and regulations, and all pertinent portions
of the referenced standards.
In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Architect.
Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such
discrepancies have been fully resolved.
3.2.1. Place all concrete reinforcing in accordance with CRSI Manual of Practice and Section
1907, Chapter 19, Uniform Building Code.
3.2.2. Before placing, clean reinforcing of loose scale, rust, oil, dirt, and any coating adversely
affecting concrete bond.
3.2.3. Place, support and secure reinforcement against displacement. Do not deviate from
required position.
3.2.4. Do not displace or damage vapor barrier
Lawin Park
City Of Carlsbad
NTD ## 2002-0037
CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
03200 - 4
3.2.5. Accommodate placement of formed openings.
3.2.6.
3.2.7.
Maintain concrete cover around reinforcing as indicated.
Do NOT bend or straighten bars after placement.
3.2.8. Interrupt reinforcement at control, contraction, and expansion joints.
3.2.9. Place reinforcement to achieve slab and curb alignment as detailed.
3.2.1 0. Provide dowel joints at interruptions of concrete.
3.2.11. Comply with UBC Standard 19-2, Section 1903, Chapter 19, Uniform Building Code, and
applicable AWS standards at all welding of reinforcing bars.
3.3. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
3.3.1. Field inspection will be performed under provisions of Section 01430 and 01450.
3.3.2. Notify Architect 48 hours minimum prior to placement of concrete.
3.3.3. Inspections and tests of welds as required by AWS D1.4 will be made by the Testing
Laboratory for reinforcing bar welds, including:
3.3.3.1. Certification of welders engaged in welding of reinforcing.
3.3.3.2. Inspection of reinforcing bar welds.
3.3.3.3. Perform 2 tensile tests of sample welds of the largest size bar for each type
of welding.
3.3.4. Deficient welds will require the Contractor to provide and pay for such additional tests
and inspections as required. Repair or replace defective welds as acceptable.
END OF SECTION
Larwin Park
City Of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
03200 - 5
SECTION 03300 - SPECIALTY PAVEMENT
CAST-IN-PLACE EXPOSED AGGREGATE CONCRETE
PART I - GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL CONDITIONS:
A. The General Conditions and Special Conditions are a part
of this section and the contract for this work and apply to
this work and apply to this section as fully as if repeated
herein.
1.02 SUMMARY:
A. The work includes the furnishing and installing of cast-in-
place concrete work as indicated and specified herein.
I .03 REFERENCES:
A. Except as modified by the requirements specified herein or
as indicated, work shall conform to the applicable
provisions of the following codes and standards:
1. Uniform Building Code, Chapter 26, Concrete.
2. American Concrete Institute:
ACI 301 -81 Structural Concrete for Buildings.
ACI 31 8-77 Building Code Requirements for
Reinforced Concrete.
3. American Society for Testing and Materials
(ASTM): Specifications and standards referred
to herein.
1.04 SUBMITTALS:
A. Product Date: Submit manufacturer's product data with
application and installation instructions for proprietary
materials and items, such as admixtures, curing materials,
joint systems.
Larwin Community Park
City of Carlsbad
Specialty Concrete- Exposed Aggregate
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01. MATERIALS:
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150-81, Type I or 11. Type II
cement shall meet the strength requirements of Type I
cement. Use only one brand of cement on the project.
B. Normal Weight Aggregate: ASTM C 88-81. Provide
aggregate from a single source for exposed concrete.
1. Fine Aggregate: Grade from 1/4 inch to fine.
2. Course Aggregate: Grade from 1/4 inch to maximum
size specified for each use.
C. Exposed Aggregate: Mohave 318” to be provided by:
KRC Stone, Inc.
P.O. Box 729
San Marcos, CA 92079-0729
D. Water: Clean and potable, free of impurities detrimental to
concrete.
E. Curing Materials:
1. Waterproof Paper and Polyethylene Film:
ASTM C 171-69 (1980).
2. Burlap: Federal Specification CCC-C-467B.
E. Expansion Joint Filler: Premolded, of sizes and
thicknesses indicated, meeting requirements of ASTM D
1751 -73.
F. Expansion Joint Sealing Compound: Cold-applied poured
latex rubber type sealant, meeting requirements of ASTM
D 1850-74 (I 979). Color to match adjacent surface color.
G. Curing Compound: ASTM C 309-81, Type I-D, liquid
membrane forming, compatible with finishes scheduled to
be applied thereto.
Res-x: The Burke Company
Hydrocide Curing Compound: Sonneborn Building
Products
Larwin Community Park
City of Carlsbad
Specialty Concrete- Exposed Aggregate
H. Color-conditioning admixtures: Meet requirements of
ASTM C 494.
Larwin Community Park
City of Carlsbad
Specialty Concrete- Exposed Aggregate
2.02
2.03
2.04
MIX DESIGNS:
A. Obtain any pay for design of concrete mixers, including
recommended amounts of water to be used in the mixes,
from a recognized independent testing laboratory.
Incorporate concrete into the improvements of the
minimum strengths specified.
CONCRETE STRENGTHS AND PROPORTIONS:
A.
B.
MIXING:
A.
Provide concrete with the following minimum compressive
strengths at 28 days proportioned within the following
limits:
Minimum Maximum Minimum Location of PSI at Size of Sacks Cement Maximum SlumDs Concrete 28 Daw Aaareaate per cu. vd.
Driveway and Parking Lot Paving, Footings,
Walls and Slabs4000 1" 6.0 4"
Walks 3000 1" 5.0 4"
Specialty Pavement areas 3000 318" 5.0 4"
The exact proportions of the mix, including amounts of
admixture (if any) and water, will be determined by the
Testing Laboratory or batch plant based on cement and
aggregate submitted by the Contractor.
Use ready-mixed concrete mixed and delivered in
accordance with the requirements of ASTM C 94-81, and
U.B.C. Standard No. 26-13. In the event concrete is mixed
at a central batching plant, arrange delivery so intervals
between batches area kept at a minimum, and in any
event not more than 30 minutes. Do not add water during
transit or at the Project Site without the Architect's
approval. Place concrete within 90 minutes after cement
has been mixed with aggregate and 45 minutes after
addition of water and admixtures.
Lawin Community Park
City of Carlsbad
Specialty Concrete- Exposed Aggregate
.- PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 CONVEYING AND PLACING CONCRETE:
A. Notification: Notify the Landscape Architect at least three
working days in advance of the placing of any concrete.
B. Soil bottoms for footings and slabs shall be approved
before placing concrete.
C. Forms: Before placing concrete inspect forms. Remove
wood chips, dirt other objectionable materials. Remove
temporary bracing and cleats, box openings for pipes,
other devices, secure forms in correct position and make
tight, secure reinforcement, anchors, and embedded items
in place. Remove set and dry concrete from forms or
reinforcement, clean forms and wash off before
proceeding. Remove water and foreign matter from forms
and excavations.
D. Pre-soak subgrade in all expansive soil areas prior to
pouring operation and sprinkle semiporous su bgrades
sufficiently to eliminate suction.
E. Handling and Depositing:
1. Complete concreting, once started, in a
continuous operation until the section of
approved size and shape is completed.
2. Handle as rapidly as practicable from the mixer
to place of final deposit by methods which
prevent the separation or loss of ingredients.
Deposit as neatly as practicable, in its final
position to avoid rehandling or flowing.
3. Do not drop concrete freely where reinforcing
will cause segregation, no more than four feet.
Deposit concrete to maintain a plastic surface
approximately horizontal.
4. Do not deposit concrete that has partially
hardened in the work.
F. Vibrating and Compacting:
Latwin Community Park
City of Carlsbad
Specialty Concrete- Exposed Aggregate
1. Consolidate and compact concrete by suitable
means during the operation of placing and
depositing, and thoroughly work around
reinforcement, embedded items, and in to the
concerns of the forms. Spade concrete against
forms. Use internal vibrators, and keep out of the contact with reinforcement and wood forms.
Do not use vibrators in a manner that forces
mortar between individual form members.
2. Vibrate close to the forms but do not continue at
one spot to the extent that large areas of grout
are formed or heavier aggregates are caused to settle. Take care not to disturb concrete which
has its initial set.
3.02 JOINTS:
A. Construction Joints: Provide construction joints in all
slabs, beams, walls, and other areas at not over 30 feet in
any direction where concrete is exposed to the elements.
Locate joints not indicated to least impair strength,
appearance of the improvement, acceptable to the
Architect.
1. Provide keyways at least 1-1/2 inches deep in
all construction joints in walls, slabs and
between walls and footings; accepted
bulkheads designed for this purpose may be
used for slabs.
2. Place construction joints perpendicular to the
ma in re info rce men t . Con tin u e re in force men t across construction joints. Clean reinforcement
before next pour is made.
B. Expansion Joints in Slabs-On-Ground: Provide premolded
expansion joints to full depth of slabs where indicated or as
directed by the Architect. Install with top edge 1/2 inch
below the surface and tool adjacent edges to a 1/8 inch
radius. Use steel pins to hold material in place during
placing and floating of concrete. After a minimum of 28
days after slabs have been placed and finished, fill tops of
expansion joints with sealer to 1/8 inch below surface of
slabs. Do not permit traffic over sealed joints until sealer is
thoroughly dry.
3.03 TEMPERATURE REQUIREMENTS:
Larwin Community Park
City of Carlsbad
Specialty Concrete- Exposed Aggregate
A. Hot weather Requirements: Maximum placing temperature
of concrete, when deposited, shall be 80 degrees F. ' If the
weather causes the placing temperature to exceed 80
degrees F., cool the mix by wetting aggregate or other
appropriate method approved by the Landscape Architect.
Lawin Community Park City of Carlsbad
Specialty Concrete- Exposed Aggregate
3.04 PATCH I NG:
A. Immediately after stripping forms, patch minor defects,
form-tie holes, honely-combed areas, before concrete is
thoroughly dry. Remove ledges and bulges. Repair gravel
pockets by cutting out to solid surface, from key, and
thoroughly wet before placing patching mortar. Use
patching mortar consisting of one part cement to two parts
fine sand; compact into place and neatly finish to match
surface. Grind or fill surfaces to produce level, true planes.
3.05 CONCRETE SLAB FINISHES:
A. Steel Trowel Finish: Provide slabs with a monolithic steel
trowel finish. Screed, wood float, and steel-trowel
surfaces. Provide a smooth, hard, dense, impewious
surface, free of defects. Finishers shall work from knee
boards laid flat upon the surface. Mechanical troweling
machines may be used if the desired finish and level tolerances can be obtained by their use.
B. Slab Levels: Finish surfaces true to 118 inch to 10 feet on
a straight-edge in any direction with maximum high and
low variance occurring in not less than 20 feet and with
1/16 inch maximum tolerance in any one running foot.
Take care to finish troweling around the edges of the slabs
so finish surface edges will be at same elevation as the
rest of the top surface of the slab. Use temporary screeds
set level at the proper elevations.
C. Mark-Off Lines: Form mark-off lines with curved edging
tool, neat and true to line, uniform throughout. Conform to
markings indicated.
D. For other concrete paving finishes and colors see plans.
3.06 PROTECTION AND CURING:
A. Protect concrete from injurious action of the elements and
defacement during construction operations,
B. Keep concrete in a thoroughly moist condition from the
time it is placed until it has cured for at least seven days.
C. Keep forms sufficiently wet to prevent drying out of the
concrete.
Larwin Communtty Park
City of Carisbad
Specialty Concrete- Exposed Aggregate
D. Carefully protect exposed concrete corners from traffic or
use which will damage them in any way.
E. Fog spray freshly placed slabs continuously until finishing
operations commence. Allow no slabs to become dry until
curing operations are complete. Cure slabs with
nonstaining curing paper, wet burlap, fog sprays or curing
compound. Protect fresh concrete from drying wind, rain,
damage, or soiling. Cover exposed interior and exterior
finished slabs with curing paper lapped 4 inch minimum at
joints and sealed with waterproof adhesive or masking
tape.
3.07 CLEAN-UP:
A. Do not allow any concrete spill or waste on planting areas.
B. Remove all concrete debris and spill from all planting
areas, leaving the area clean and free of all noxious
materials.
*END OF SECTION*
Larwin Community Park
City of Carlsbad
Specialty Concrete- Exposed Aggregate
SECTION 0331 0
CAST-IN -PLACE CONCRETE
1.
1.1.
1.2.
1.3.
1.4.
DELETE SECTION 201 OF THE SSPWC AND REPLACE WITH THE FOLLOWING CONCRETE
SPECIFICATION FOR ARCHITECTURAL WORK ONLY
PART 1 - GENERAL
SECTION INCLUDES, BUT NOT LIMITED TO:
1.1.1. All cast-in-place concrete.
1 .I .2.
PRODUCTS FURNISHED BUT NOT INSTALLED UNDER THIS SECTION
1.2.1.
RELATED SECTIONS
1.3.1.
1.3.2.
1.3.3.
1.3.4.
REFERENCES
Slabs on grade.
Section 03100 - Concrete Formwork: Placement of joint device anchors in formwork.
Section 02751 - Portland Cement Concrete Paving.
Section 03100 - Concrete Formwork.
Section 03200 - Concrete Reinforcement.
Section 09675 - Special Floor Treatment
1.4.1.
1.4.2.
1.4.3.
1.4.4.
1.4.5.
1.4.6.
1.4.7.
1.4.8.
1.4.9.
1.4.1 0.
1.4.1 1.
Larwin Park
City Of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
ACI 117 - Specification for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials.
ACI 301 - Specification for Structural Concrete.
ACI 302.1 R - Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction.
ACI 305R - Hot Weather Concreting, and ACI 306.1, Cold Weather Concreting.
ACI 308 - Standard Practice for Curing Concrete.
ACI 31 8 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete.
ASTM C 33 - Concrete Aggregates.
ASTM C 94 - Ready-Mixed Concrete.
ASTM C 150 - Portland Cement.
ASTM C 171 - Sheet Materials For Curing Concrete.
ASTM C 309 - Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03310 - 1
1.4.12.
1.5. SUBMITTALS
1 51.
1.5.2.
ASTM D1752 - Preformed Sponge Rubber and Cork Expansion Joint Fillers.
Submit under provisions of Section 01 330.
Product Data: Provide data on admixtures, finishing and curing compounds, including
product characteristics, compatibility and limitations.
Manufacturer's installation Instructions: Submit criteria for preparation and application. 1.5.3.
1.5.4. Mix designs: Prepare mix designs for Architect's review, Include the following
information in mix design data:
1.5.4.1. Design
1 S.4.1 .I.
1.5.4.1.2.
1.5.4.1.3.
1 S.4.1.4.
1.5.4.1.5.
1 S.4.1.6.
1.5.4.2. Materials
1.5.4.2.1.
1.5.4.2.2.
1.5.4.2.3.
1.5.4.2.4.
1.5.4.2.5.
1.5.4.2.6.
1.5.4.2.7.
Project name, address, site location, and location of mix
design usage.
Contractor, Sub-Contractor, Supplier and Plant Location.
Mix Number.
Specified compressive strength, maximum aggregate size,
slump, and placement method.
Application and location in structure.
Signature and stamp of licensed civil or structural engineer
responsible for mix design.
Design Method.
Water-Cement Ratio.
Cement: Type, amount, and compliance with specified
criteria statement.
Aggregates: Source(s), gradations (individual and
combined).
Admixtures: Brand, classification, dosage, addition method.
Water source.
Test Results, Batch Quantities, Yield (calculations).
1.5.4.3. Special Considerations
1.5.4.3.1. Unit Weight.
1.5.4.3.2. Other considerations relative to placement, curing, finishing
and testing.
Larwin Park
City Of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03310 - 2
1.6.
1.7.
1.8.
2.
2.1.
2.2.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
I .6.1.
1.6.2.
PRODUCT HANDLING AND STORAGE
1.7.1.
1.7.2.
COORDINATION
1.8.1.
1.8.2.
Conform to Section 1905, and other applicable sections of Uniform Building Code.
Acquire cement and aggregate from same source for all work.
Deliver, store, protect and handle products under provisions of Section 01 600 .
Deliver materials in manufacturer's packaging including application instructions.
Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01 31 0.
Coordinate the placement of joint devices with erection of concrete formwork and
placement of form accessories.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
CONCRETE MATERIALS
2.1 .I. Cement: Conform to Section 1903.2, Chapter 19, Uniform Building Code; and ASTM
C150; normal - Type II, low alkali, grey color.
Fine and Coarse Aggregates: Conform to Section 1906.3, Chapter 19, Uniform Building
Code; ASTM C 33, and the following:
2.1.2.1. Coarse Aggregate: Clean, hard, fine-grained, sound, crushed rock or
2.1.2.
washed gravel;
2.1.2.1 .I. Slabs, Walls: Class Designation 5M per ASTM C 33, Table
3, with 1 inch grading.
Foundations: Class Designation 3M per ASTM C 33, Table
3, with 1-1/2 inch grading.
2.1.2.1.2.
2.1.2.2. Fine Aggregate: Washed natural or manufactured sand, hard, strong,
durable particles: not more than 1 percent deleterious materials.
Aggregate shall be non-reactive per ASTM C 289. . 2.1.2.3.
2.1.3.
2.1.4. Concrete slab-on-grade cushion: Clean washed crushed rock or concrete sand
Water: Clean, potable, and not detrimental to concrete.
complying with ASTM C 33.
CONCRETE ACCESSORY PRODUCTS
2.2.1. Membrane Curing Blankets
2.2.1.1. Provide Whitecap or equal 483-Curelap light colored plastic faced 10 oz.
burlap curing blankets complying with ASTM C 171.
2.2.2. Vapor Retarder
Larwin Park
City Of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03310 - 3
2.2.2.1. Manufacturer: Stego Wrap or equal, 15 mil polyolefin film.
2.2.2.2. Perm Rating: Maximum 0.01 grainslsquare footlhour per ASTM E-96.
2.2.2.3. Water vapor Transmission Rate: Maximum 0.006 grains/square footlhour
per ASTM E-96.
2.2.2.4. Puncture resistance: Minimum puncture resistance of 200 poundshquare
foot per GRllGSl - 86.
2.2.2.5. Tensile Strength: Minimum tensile strength of 54 pounds MD/55 pounds
CMD per ASTM D 1004. Values shall be based on ASTM E 154 Resistance
to Decay test portion.
2.2.2.6. Low Temperature Brittleness: Pass per ASTM D 1790.
2.2.3. Non-Shrink Grout
2.2.3.1. Burke or equal, non shrink when tested in accordance with CRD-C-621-88
and ASTM C 827-87, providing minimum compressive strength of 2,500 psi
at 24 hours and 8,000 psi at 28 days.
2.2.4. Admixtures
2.2.4.1. Concrete admixtures shall be a subject to prior approval by the jurisdictional
authority and Architect. Calcium Chloride or admixtures containing chloride
shall not be used. Admixture(s) shall not adversely affect concrete strength.
2.2.5. Bonding Agent
2.2.5.1. Provide SikaDur 32 Hi-Mod bonding agentladhesive conforming to
manufacturers criteria.
2.3. JOINT FORMING MATERIALS
2.3.1. Formed Construction Joints: Burke Keyed Kold or equal, galvanized steel, tongue and
groove type.
2.3.2. Isolation Joint at radiused conditions: W.R. Meadows or equal, Ceramar, 3/8 inch thick
by full depth of slab.
2.3.3. Isolation Joint at perimeter conditions: W.R. Meadows or equal, Sealtight Fiber, 3/8 inch
thick by full depth of slab.
2.3.4. Weakened plane/control joints: Provide Sof-Cut system or sawcutting at all slab areas.
Use of cast-in-place concrete joints is not acceptable.
2.4. JOINT SEALANTS
2.4.1. Provide sealants per Section 07900.
2.5. CONCRETE MIX
2.5.1. Prepare concrete mix design in accordance with Section 01450 and Section 1905.2
through 1905.6, Chapter 19, Uniform Building Code.
Larwin Park
City Of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03310 - 4
2.5.1 .I. Provide concrete mixes as necessary to attain strengths and characteristics
as noted on the drawings and in the specifications, and in accordance with
Method B or Method C..
,-
2.5.1.2. In addition, provide concrete mixes for all interior slab-on-grade applications
with maximum water-cement ratio of 0.45. -
2.5.2. Mix concrete in accordance with UBC Standard 19-3 and Section 1905.8, Chapter 19,
UBC..
2.5.2.1. Deliver to Inspector on site, with each mixer load of concrete, certificate
bearing signature of the Weighmaster and Testing Laboratory batch plant
inspector stating quantities of each material contained in load and time mixer
was loaded.
2.5.2.2. Delivery Requirements:
2.5.2.2.1. Licensed Weighmaster shall positively identify materials as
to quantity and certify each load by ticket.
2.5.2.2.2. Ticket shall be transmitted to Project Inspector by truck
driver.
2.5.2.2.3. Project Inspector shall keep daily record of pours, identify
each truck, its load and time of receipt.
2.5.2.2.4. Concrete arriving at Work without Weighmaster ticket will be
rejected.
2.5.2.2.5. Weighmaster shall furnish affidavit to Architect, certifying
concrete furnished conforms to proportions established by
mix designs.
2.6. SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL AND TESTING
2.6.1. Provide for testing under the provisions of Section 01450.
2.6.1 .I. Cement: Section 1903.2, Chapter 19, Uniform Building Code.
2.6.1.2. Aggregate: Section 1903.3, Chapter 19, Uniform Building Code.
2.7. OTHER MATERIALS
2.7.1. Provide all other materials, not specifically described but required for complete and
proper installation of this work, as selected by the contractor and subject to the approval
of the Architect.
3. PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1. SURFACE CONDITIONS
3.1 .I. Inspection
Larwin Park
City Of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
3.1 .I .I. Prior to work of this section, carefully inspect previously installed work.
Verify all such work is complete to the point where this installation may
properly commence.
CAST-I N-PLAC E CONCRETE 03310 - 5
3.2.
3.1.1.2. Verify that work of this section may be installed in strict accordance with the
original design, all pertinent codes and regulations, and all pertinent portions
of the referenced standards.
3.1.1.3, Verify all excavations have been inspected and approved by the
Geotechnical Engineer. Verify all reinforcement and forms have been
inspected and approved.
3.1.1.4. Verify concrete elevations, dimensions, and alignment with work specified in
other sections.
3.1.1.5. Verify requirements for concrete cover over reinforcement.
3.1.1.6. Identify, verify, and coordinate placement of piping and conduit sleeves
through concrete.
3.1 .I .7. Identify, verify, and coordinate the location, dimension, and requirements of
all depressions, recesses, block-outs and other provisions.
3.1 .I .8. Verify anchors, seats, plates, reinforcement and other items embedded in
concrete are accurately placed, positioned securely, and will permit proper
concrete placement.
3.1.2. Discrepancies
3.1.2.1. In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Architect.
3.1.2.2. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such
discrepancies have been fully resolved.
PREPARATION
3.2.1. Prepare previously placed concrete by cleaning with steel brush and applying bonding
agent in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Before concrete is deposited upon
or against concrete that has taken its initial set or has hardened, mechanically roughen
hardened concrete to minimum 1/4 inch amplitude. Remove all encrustations from
forms and reinforcements
3.2.2. Vapor retarder and barrier installation
3.2.2.1. Proof roll subgrade.
3.2.2.2. Place 2 inch sand /rock cushion over sub-grade.
3.2.2.3. Place vapor retarderlbarrier over sandrock cushion, lapping edges 12
inches. Tape and seal edges and penetrations. ' Extend vapor
retardedbarrier to footing face and turn down to bottom of footing.
3.2.2.4. Obtain inspectors approval of vapor retarderlbarrier installation before
placing sandrock cushion.
3.2.2.5. Place 2 inch sandhock cushion over vapor retardedbarrier. Proof roll prior to
reinforcement placement.
3.2.2.6. Exercise care in placing reinforcing steel and concrete to avoid puncturing
the sheeting. Do not drive stakes through the barrier. Use flat base screed
supports.
Larwin Park
City Of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
0331 0 - 6
3.2.3. Construction, Weakened plane and ExpansionlControl Joints: Prior to beginning work of
this Section, meet and coordinate with installing contractor for tile specified in Section
09310. Locate all joints in slabs to align with joint pattern shown on architects drawings.
Where no pattern is shown, coordinate location to align with tile joints.
3.3. PLACING CONCRETE
3.3.1. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 304 and Section 1905.7, Chapter 19, Uniform
Building Code.
3.3.2. Ready mix Concrete shall be delivered in accordance with ASTM C94. Concrete shall be
placed within 90 minutes after start of mixing.
3.3.3. Conform to ACI 305R when concreting during hot weather or when weather conditions
may cause rapid evaporation of moisture. Conform to ACI 306R-78 for concrete
placement in cold weather conditions.
3.3.4. Ensure reinforcement, inserts, embedded parts, formed joint fillers, and joint devices are
not disturbed during concrete placement.
3.3.5. Repair vapor retardedbarrier damaged during placement of concrete reinforcing. Repair
with same material; lap over damaged areas minimum 6 inches and seal watertight.
3.3.6. Maintain records of concrete placement. Record date, location, quantity, air temperature,
and test samples taken.
3.3.7. Place concrete continuously between predetermined expansion, control, and
construction joints. Deposit in approximately horizontal layers, maximum twelve inches
in thickness. Top surfaces of vertically formed lifts shall be generally level.
3.3.7.1. Place construction joints only at locations shown on drawings or as approved
by Architect.
3.3.7.2. Install construction joints in accordance with Section 1906.4, Chapter 19,
Uniform Building Code.
3.3.8. Conveying and Placing
3.3.8.1. Convey concrete from the mixer to the place of final deposit by methods
which will prevent the separation or loss of materials.
3.3.8.2. To maximum extent possible, deposit concrete in its final position to avoid
segregation due to rehandling or flowing. Deposit no concrete that has
partially hardened or been contaminated by foreign materials. Do not use
retempered concrete or concrete which has been remixed after initial set.
3.3.8.3. Once concrete placement begins, maintain a continuous operation until the
placing of the panel or section is completed. Maintain level top surfaces of
vertically formed lifts.
3.3.8.4. Thoroughly consolidate concrete during placement. Work around
reinforcement and embedded fixtures using mechanical vibrators. Transmit
vibration directly to concrete and in no case through forms. Do not allow
vibrators to contact forms or reinforcing.
3.3.9. Pumped Concrete.
Larwin Park
City Of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
CAST- I N -PLACE CONCRETE
03310 - 7
3.3.9.1.
3.3.9.2.
3.3.9.3.
3.3.9.4.
3.3.9.5.
Do not use aluminum or aluminum lined pipe.
contacting aluminum fittings.
Prevent concrete from
Provide minimum 3 inch hose diameter for 1 inch aggregate concrete, with
three workers at hose. Provide minimum 4 inch hose diameter for 1-1 /2 inch
aggregate concrete, with four workers at hose. Provide mechanically
supported and operated hose for hose exceeding 4 inch diameter.
Use only piston type reversible pumps. Provide standby pump of same
capacity available onsite within one hours notice.
Do not add more water to the mix than the maximum allowed on the delivery
ticket.
Thoroughly consolidate concrete during placement. Work around
reinforcement and embedded fixtures using mechanical vibrators. Transmit
vibration directly to concrete and in no case through forms. Do not allow
vibrators to contact forms or reinforcing.
3.3.10. Compaction and Screeding
3.3.10.1. Tamp freshly placed concrete with a heavy tamper until at least 3/8” of
mortar is brought to the surface. Tamp concrete with a light tamper, screed
with a heavy straightedge until all depressions and irregularities are worked
out and the surface is true to finish grades or elevations. Remove excess
water and debris worked to the surface. Screed slabs to specified
tolerances and slope to drain as noted on the drawings.
3.4. CONCRETE FINISHING
3.4.1.
3.4.2.
3.4.3.
3.4.4.
Larwin Park
City Of Carlsbad
Unless otherwise specified in paragraph 3.4.3, comply with the following criteria:
3.4.1.1. Unless specified otherwise, provide steel trowel finish at all slabs per ACI
302.1R Class 3, free of defects. Steel troweling shall consist of three
separate operations.
3.4.1.2. Provide medium swirl texture at all areas. Obtain Architect‘s approval of
finish prior to proceeding.
3.4.1.3. Slabs receiving clear sealer. See Section 09675.
Exterior Slab Floors at Entry area:
3.4.2.1. Exterior Entry Concrete Slab: Provide steel trowel and medium broom finish.
Broom finish shall be placed in a pattern as directed by the Architect.
All Other Surfaces
3.4.3.1. All other surfaces shall be as-cast, subject to repair of surface deficiencies
as specified.
Surface Defects
3.4.4.1. Surface defects shall be as defined in ACI 309.2R.
3.4.4.2. Surface irregularities shall be as defined in ACI 347 for Class B surfaces.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
NTD # 2002-0037 03310 - 8
3.4.4.3.
3.4.4.4.
3.4.4.5.
3.4.4.6.
3.4.4.7.
All surface defects shall be repaired per approved methods and as specified.
All void defects, such as honeycombing, air holes, and form streaking, shall
be repaired by removing all defective material to sound surfaces. Patch void
created with approved portland cement based, polymer modified mortar.
Match color and texture of adjacent surfaces.
All fins, grout lines, ridges and other form leakage defects shall be ground
smooth per Architect's direction.
All concrete surfaces exceeding tolerances specified shall be brought within
tolerance by grinding or filling.
Where, in the Architect's opinion, it is necessary to maintain satisfactory
appearance, the entire surface of any one component or element shall be
repaired by the "sack and patch" method or other approved method.
3.5. EXPANSION AND WEAKENED PLANE JOINT INSTALLATION
3.5.1. Locate and form expansion control and contraction joints. Coordinate location with joint
pattern shown for finish flooring.
Place formed construction joints in floor slab. Set top screed to required elevations.
Secure to resist movement of wet concrete.
Install isolation joints between slab edges and vertical structural elements.
Install sealants in accordance with Section 07900.
Provide Sof-cut or equal weakened plane joints at locations shown on drawings.
3.5.2.
3.5.3.
3.5.4.
3.5.5.
3.6. CURING AND PROTECTION
3.6.1.
3.6.2. Inclement Weather Curing:
Cure all floor slabs and all formed surfaces in accordance with ACI 308.
3.6.2.1. Hot Weather Curing: Conform with ACI 305, Chapter 4. In any case,
concrete shall not be placed when the ambient temperature exceeds 90
degrees F.
3.6.2.2. Cold Weather Curing: Conform with ACI 306R. Provide heaters, blankets
or other means as required to comply with referenced standards.
3.6.3. Floor Surface Curing
3.6.3.1.
3.6.3.2.
Cure floor surfaces in accordance with ACI 308.
Curing Blanket Placement: Install blankets immediately after finishing and
joint placement is completed. Place over all surfaces, including face of
footings and depressions. Anchor as required to maintain in place for a
period of 7 days.
Larwin Park City Of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03310 - 9
3.6.4. Vertical and Other Formed Surface:
3.6.4.1. After the concrete has hardened and while the forms are still in place, form
ties may be loosened and water applied to run down on the inside of the
form if necessary to keep the concrete wet.
3.6.4.2. When forms are removed, the exposed concrete surfaces shall be wet with
water immediately and kept moist until curing compound is applied.
3.6.4.3. Just prior to application of curing compound, the concrete shall be allowed to
reach a uniformly damp appearance with no free water on the surface and
then the application of curing compound should be begun at once.
3.6.4.4. Apply membrane curing compound in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions. Provide minimum of two coats, with the second coat at right
angles to the first.
3.7. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
3.7.1. Perform work of this section under the supervision of a capable concrete superintendent.
3.7.2. Provide free access to Work and cooperate with appointed testing and inspection firm.
3.7.3. Field inspection and testing per UBC Section 1903 will be performed in accordance with
provisions of Sections 01430 and 01450.
3.7.3.1. Inspector will reject concrete not conforming to this Section, including
concrete which is not placed within 90 minutes after batching.
3.7.4. Comply with requirements of Section 1905.6.1.1, Uniform Building Code regarding
frequency of testing for concrete test specimens, including:
3.7.4.1. Prepare one test for each 50 cubic yards or fraction thereof.
3.7.4.2. Prepare one test for each 2,000 square feet of surface area placed, or
fraction thereof.
3.7.5. One slump test will be taken for each set of test cylinders taken.
3.8. TOLERANCES
3.8.1. All tolerances shall be as defined in ACI 117-90 and as specified.
3.8.2. Classification shall be per General Building: Cast-in-Place, ACI 117, Section 4.0, unless
noted otherwise.
3.8.3. Unless noted otherwise, depressions in slab floors between high spots shall be a
maximum 3/16 inch in ten feet, using a metal straight edge placed at any location on
slab, and measured within 72 hours of pour.
3.8.4. Slab Floor Tolerance Defects:
3.8.4.1. Repair all slab areas not complying with specified floor values by grinding or
filling as required to achieve compliance.
Larwin Park
City Of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03310 - IO
3.9. PATCHING
3.9.1. Exposed formed concrete surfaces, both interior and exterior, including surfaces
designated to receive painted finish, shall provide surfaces suitable for subsequent
finishing, free from imperfect joints, fins, "honeycombing", air pockets or "bug" holes, or
other such imperfections.
3.9.2. Remove rough spots, stains and hardened mortar or grout from intended smooth
surfaces by rubbing such surfaces lightly with fine Carborundum stone. Use liberal
amount of water and rub sufficiently to remove defects without changing texture of
concrete.
3.9.3. If surfaces designated as smooth are not uniform in texture and finish, treat as follows:
3.9.3.1. Prepare patching mix and apply to test location as directed by Architect.
3.9.3.2. Obtain Architects approval of finish, color and texture of patching mix.
3.9.3.3. Repair remaining defects with approved mixture.
3.9.3.4. Texture surface to match approved finish..
3.9.3.5. Complete entire operation for any area the day it is started.
3.9.3.6. Do not use dry cement sacking.
3.9.4. Filling Snap Tie Cone Holes:
3.9.4.1. Break off tie rods at bottom of cone holes.
3.9.4.2. Concealed Applications: Flush hole with water, and allow to dry. Coat entire
inner surface of cone hole with liquid bonding agent, then grout holes solid
with approved cement grout and grind smooth.
3.9.4.2.1. Finish patches as specified above in Article 3.9.3.
3.9.4.3. Exposed Applications: Flush hole with water, and allow to dry. Coat entire
inner surface of cone hole with liquid bonding agent. Insert semi-recessed
plug with approved cement.
3.9.5. Filling Taper Tie Holes:
3.9.5.1. Flush hole with water, and allow to dry. Grout holes solid with approved
cement grout and grind smooth.
3.9.5.2. Finish patches as specified in paragraph 3.9.3.
3.10. DEFECTIVE CONCRETE
3.10.1. Concrete will be considered defective if strength characteristics indicated by tests of
molded cylinders and core tests fall below the minimum 28-day strengths specified or
indicated. Replace or adequately strengthen such defective concrete in a manner
acceptable to the Architect and Structural Engineer.
3.1 0.2. Concrete will be considered defective if any one of the following conditions occurs:
Larwin Park
City Of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03310 - 11
3.10.2.1.
3.10.2.2.
3.10.2.3.
3.1 0.2.4.
3.10.2.5.
Any concrete work not formed as indicated or is not in conformance with
specified tolerances.
Any concrete with voids or honeycomb that has been cut, resurfaced or
filled, unless under the direction of the Structural Engineer.
Any concrete with sawdust, shavings, wood, or embedded debris.
Any concrete placed more than 90 minutes after batching.
Replace or repair such defective concrete to the satisfaction of the Architect
at no extra cost to the Owner.
3.1 1. EQUIPMENT BASES
3.11.1. Provide concrete bases and anchorage for mechanical, electrical, and other work as
required and shown on the drawings and in accord with reviewed Shop Drawings of
related trades.
3.12. MlSCELLANEOUS CONCRETE WORK
3.12.1. Provide cast-in-place valve boxes, pits, splash blocks, bases, and other miscellaneous
concrete as shown and required to complete the Work. Conform to applicable requirements as specified in this section.
3.13. ADJUST AND CLEAN
3.13.1. Protect exposed concrete finish as necessary to prevent damage resulting from impact
or from subsequent work or rubbish.
3.13.2. Protect work of other Sections from damage by Work of this Section with heavy craft
paper.
3.13.2.1. Maintain protection in effective condition for as long as the need for
protection exists.
3.13.2.2. Control use of water within the building so that no damage to previously
installed work or existing structure and finish is permitted to occur.
Larwin Park
City Of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
END OF SECTION
CAST4 N-PLACE CONCRETE
03310 - 12
SECTION 03450
CAST STONE COMPONENTS
,-
I. PART I - GENERAL
I .I. WORK INCLUDED
1.1.1. Cast stone precast concrete wall caps, seat wall caps, and window sill elements where
shown.
1 .I .2. Connection devices, hardware, and accessories necessary to install moldings and
components.
1 .I .3. Preparation and design required for reinforcing and anchoring of units, including
engineering design, shop drawing documentation and calculations as specified.
1.2. RELATED SECTIONS
1.2.1.
1.2.2.
Section 03200 - Concrete Reinforcement.
Section 0331 0 - Cast-in Place Concrete.
I .3. QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.3.1. Manufacturer
1.3.1 .I.
I .3.2. Staff
I .3.2.1.
1.3.2.2.
1.4. REFERENCES
Manufacturer shall have produced the specified products for a period of five
(5) years prior to beginning work of this section, and shall have the capability
to produce the specified products to the delivery and quantity criteria of the
project.
For fabrication and installation of work, use only personnel who are
thoroughly trained and experienced in the skills required, have installed
similar applications of the specified products within one year prior to
beginning work of this section, and who are completely familiar with the
manufacturers' recommended methods of installation as well as the
requirements of this work.
Provide full time supervision of this portion of the work by a single individual
throughout the course of the work. The supervisor shall have a minimum of
3 years experience in this capacity for this type of construction.
1.4.1. Codes and Regulations
1.4.1 .I. Uniform Building Code, 1997 Edition.
Larwin Park
City Of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
CAST STONE COMPONENTS
03450 - 1
1.5. SUBMITTALS
1 S.1, Shop Drawings:
1 S.1 .l.
1 51.2.
1.5.1.3.
1 S.1.4.
1.5.2. Samples
1.5.2.1.
1.5.2.2.
1.5.2.3.
Submit shop drawings in accordance with the provisions of Section 01330.
Indicate ail components, connections, sizes, finishes, and patterns. Clearly
elevate to show all joint locations.
Detail all connections to the structure, including all required calculations
verifying compliance with Code requirements for in-place dead and live
loads, seismic forces, and wind loads.
1 S.1.3.1. Engineer all seismic loading conditions based on UBC
Chapter 16, I value equal to 1.5.
Stamp and sign shop drawings and calculations by a Structural Engineer
licensed in the State of California.
Accompanying shop drawings, provide samples in accordance with Section
01 330.
Provide two 12 inch square samples showing finish and color of each
specified component.
Provide two 12 inch long samples showing profile and detail of each
specified component.
1.5.3. Materials List:
1.5.3.1. Accompanying shop drawings, provide complete list of all proposed
materials.
1.5.4. Certificates of Compliance:
1.5.4.1. Submit manufacturer's certificates attesting that components and detailing
comply with specifications.
1.6. PRODUCT HANDLING
I .6.1. Protection
1.6.1.1. Deliver, store and handle all products in a manner to prevent damage and
deterioration.
1.6.1.2. Use all means necessary to protect the installed work and materials of all
other trades.
Larwin Park
City Of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
CAST STONE COMPONENTS
03450 - 2
2. PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1, CAST STONE COMPONENTS
2.1 .I. Materials
-
2.1 .I .I. Portland Cement
2.1 .I .I .Is ASTM C-150, Types I or II, low alkali.
2.1 .I .I .2. Provide white Portland cement.
2.1 .I .I .3. Use one manufacturer and type of cement throughout
production.
2.1 .I .2. Aggregates
2.1.1.2.1 * Per ASTM C 33, 314 inch max size, with aggregate selected
for alkali resistance and light color.
2.1 .I .2.2. Provide aggregates from one source.
2.1.1.2.3. Provide coarse and fine aggregate of same type, color, and
gradation as on submittal samples.
2.1 .I .3. Reinforcing and InsertslSupports
2.1.1.3.1. Provide reinforcing bar complying with ASTM A 615, Grade
40. Provide reinforcing bar complying with ASTM A 706,
Grade 40 at welded reinforcing bar conditions. Where
reinforcing used as a means of connection to structure,
provide epoxy or other approved corrosion resistant coating
2.1.1.3.2. Provide welded wire mesh complying ASTM A 185,
galvanized.
2.1 .I .3.3. Provide steel angles, clips, and other support devices
complying with ASTM A 36 or equivalent, hot dip galvanized.
2.1 .I .4. Water
2.1 .I .4.1. Provide water from a domestic source, fit for human
consumption, and free of amounts of deleterious matter.
2.1 .I .5. Admixtures
2.1 .I 5.1. If required, workability admixtures shall conform to ASTM C
260 or ASTM C 494, completely free of chlorides.
2.1 .I -6. Integral Color Admixture
2.1 .I .6.1. Pure mineral oxide, Davis Colors or equal.
2.1.2. Mix Design Characteristics
2.1.2.1. Compressive Strength: Minimum 5,000 psi at 28 days per ASTM C 39.
Larwin Park
City Of Carlsbad NTD # 2002-0037
CAST STONE COMPONENTS
03450 - 3
2.1.2.2. Absorption Rate: Maximum 5%, by weight, per approved test method
2.2.
2.1.3. Finish
2.1.3.1. Cast Stone Components: Provide light sandblast finish.
2.1.4. Color
2.1.4.1. Cast Stone Components: Provide color equal to Davis Colors "San Diego
Buff'. Color shall match integral color paving per Section 02751 and integral
color concrete per Section 0331 0.
FA6 R1 CAT1 0 N
2.2.1. Formwork
2.2.1 .l. Type and construction of forms shall be at the option of the Contractor.
2.2.1.2. Cast units in leak-proof molds of sufficient strength to withstand deformation
of units.
2.2.1.3. Surfaces of molds shall be free from irregularities, dents or sags, and
produce surfaces of smooth appearance, free of fins and holes.
2.2.1.4. Use form coatings that will not leave residual matter on surfaces of panels.
2.2.2. Component fabrication
2.2.2.1. Fabricate components true to dimension and plane, free of defacing,
chipping, twist or warp, with clean, accurate edges and arrises.
2.2.2.2. Cast components to design and profile as indicated on the Drawings.
2.2.2.3. Unless noted otherwise, review drawings and establish joint pattern in
accordance with the following:
2.2.2.3.1. Provide one-piece prefabricated outside corner components, returning each side of corner 6 inches.
2.2.2.3.2. Divide remainder into equal lengths, maximum of 48 inches
long. Provide 112 inch joint spacing between components.
2.2.2.3.3. Provide coped or mitered inside corners.
2.2.2.3.4. Mitering of outside corners is not acceptable.
2.2.2.4. Cast to match color, finish, and workmanship standards of the submittal
samples.
2.2.2.5. Where anchor devices are required by calculation, design components for
concealed fastener installation.
2.2.2.6. Remove from molds only when sufficient strength has been achieved to
prevent damage to unit.
2.2.2.7. Do not deliver units to site until 28 day strength has been achieved.
Larwin Park
City Of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
CAST STONE COMPONENTS
03450 - 4
2.3.
2.4.
2.5.
2.6.
3. - 3.1.
3.2.
2.2.3. Fabrication Tolerances
2.2.3.1.
2.2.3.2.
Length and width: Plus or minus 1/8 inch in 10 feet.
Profile tolerance:
approved sample.
Warping or Bowing: Plus or minus 1/16 inch per foot, maximum 1/8 inch in
any unit.
Plus or minus 118 inch in any 12 inch length from
2.2.3.3.
SEALANTS
2.3.1.
MORTAR
2.4.1.
GROUT
2.5.1.
OTHER PRODUCTS
2.6.1.
Per Section 07900, color as selected by Architect.
Provide mortar complying with UBC Chapter 14, Section 1403.
Custom or equal, sanded, color as selected by Architect from complete color line..
Provide all other products necessary for complete installation and operation.
products shall be subject to the review of the Architect.
Such
PART 3 - EXECUTION
SURFACE CON D IT1 0 N S
3.1 .I. Inspection
3.1 .I .I. Prior to installation, carefully inspect the installed work of all other trades and
verify that all such work is complete to the point where this installation may
properly commence.
Verify that all work can be installed in strict accordance with all pertinent
codes and regulations, the original design, reviewed submittals, and
manufacturers' recommendations.
In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Architect.
Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such
discrepancies have been fully resolved.
3.1.1.2.
3-1 .I .3.
3.1.1.4.
3.1.2. Acceptance of Surface Conditions:
3.1 2.1. Provide Architect with written acceptance of surface conditions, certifying
that all surfaces are suitable for work of this section to proceed.
I N STAL LAT ION
3.2.1, Coordination
Larwin Park
City Of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
CAST STONE COMPONENTS
03450 - 5
3.2.1 .I. Coordinate the installation requirements with structural framing and
substrate to insure overall acceptable connections and conditions for the
attachment of components.
3.2.2. Component Installation
3.2.2.1.
3.2.2.2.
3.2.2.3.
3.2.2.4.
3.2.2.5.
3.2.2.6.
3.2.2.7.
Erect in sequence indicated on the reviewed shop drawings, using fastener
and attachment method selected by manufacturer and as specified.
3.2.2.1 .I. Install components as adhered veneer as shown on
drawings and in accordance with UBC Section 1403.
3.2.2.1.2. Where component weights and sizes exceed allowable
adhered veneer, install in accordance with UBC Section
1403 for anchored veneer.
Install plumb, level, and in alignment within the specified tolerances.
Provide temporary supports and bracing as required to maintain position,
stability, and alignment as members are being permanently connected.
Maintain alignment of horizontal and vertical joints.
Maintain uniform joint width.
Provide grout joints between components using grout bag technique. Tool
slightly concave, tight and smooth.
Provide sealant joint at locations as shown on drawings and in accordance
with Section 07900.
3.3. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
3.3.1. Tolerances:
3.3.1 .I.
3.3.1.2.
3.3.1.3.
3.3.1.4.
3.3.1.5.
Joint Dimension:
cumulative.
Variations from Plumb: Plus or minus 1/8 inch in any distance of 10 feet
maximum.
Variations from Level or Elevation: plus or minus 1/8 inch in any 20 feet.
Variations from Linear Building Lines or from Established Positions in Plan:
Plus or minus 1/4 inch at any location.
Maximum Differential Between Adjacent Installed Units (non-cumulative):
Plus or minus 1/8 inch.
plus or minus 1/8 inch, in any 12 inch length, non-
3.4. CLEANING AND REPAIR
3.4.1. Cleaning
3.4.1.1. Clean all exposed units as necessary to remove all dirt and stains on
components after completion of installation.
Lawin Park
City Of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
CAST STONE COMPONENTS
03450 - 6
3.4.1 2. Clean components with detergents recommended by Manufacturer, followed
by a thorough rinse with clean water.
Larwin Park
City Of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
3.4.1 -2.1. Provide detergents of type which will not affect future finish.
3.4.1.2.2. Schedule cleaning when ambient temperature and humidity
are such to allow for quick drying.
3.4.1.2.3. Do not use acid and alkali cleaning agents.
3.4.1.3. Exercise care to not damage character or finish of components with cleaning
materials or processes.
3.4.2. Repair
3.4.2.1. Repair all joint defects to the satisfaction of the Architect.
3.4.2.2. Replace all chipped, cracked or spalled units. Repair of damaged
components not acceptable.
END OF SECTION
CAST STONE COMPONENTS
03450 - 7
SECTION 04065
MORTAR AND GROUT
1.
1.1.
I .2.
1.3.
1.4.
1.5.
1.6. -
PART 1 - GENERAL
SECTION INCLUDES
1.1.1.
RELATED WORK
1.2.1.
1.2.2.
1.2.3.
REFERENCES
1.3.1.
I .3.2.
1.3.3.
1.3.4.
1.3.5.
1.3.6.
1.3.7.
Mortar and grout for masonry.
Section 01450 - Testing Laboratory Services.
Section 04810 - Reinforced Unit Masonry System.
Section 04865 -Adhered Simulated Stone Veneer.
ASTM C144 - Aggregate for Masonry Mortar.
ASTM C150 - Portland Cement.
ASTM C207 - Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes.
ASTM C270 - Mortar for Unit Masonry.
ASTM C404 - Aggregates for Masonry Grout.
ASTM C476 - Grout for Masonry.
IMIAC - International Masonry Industry All-Weather Council: Recommended Practices
and Guide Specifications for Cold Weather Masonry Construction.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
1.4.1.
1.4.2.
1.4.3.
Deliver products to site under provisions of Section 01600.
Store and protect products under provisions of Section 01600.
Maintain packaged materials clean, dry, and protected against dampness, freezing, and
foreign matter.
SUBMITTALS
1 51.
1.5.2.
Submit under provisions of Section 01330.
Product Data: Provide data on admixtures, including product characteristics, compatibility
and limitations.
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
1.6.1. Maintain materials and surrounding air temperatures to minimum 50 degrees F prior to,
during, and 48 hours after completion of masonry work.
Larwin Park
City Of Carlsbad NTD # 2002-0037
MORTAR AND GROUT
04065 - 1
2. PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1. MATERIALS
2.1 .I.
2.1.2.
2.1.3.
2.1.4.
2.1.5.
2.1.6.
2.1.7.
Portland Cement: ASTM C150 and Section 2102.2, Item 2.2, Chapter 21, Uniform
Building Code; Type I or II, free alkali content 0.06 percent maximum, gray color. Use
Type II where soil contact will occur.
Mortar Aggregate: ASTM C144 and Section 2102.2, Item 1.1, Chapter 21, Uniform Building Code; with not less than 3 percent passing #lo0 sieve.
Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207 and Section 2102.2, Item 3.2, Chapter 21, Uniform Building
Code.
Grout Aggregate: ASTM C404 and Section 2102.2, Item 1.2, Chapter 21, Uniform
Building Code.
2.1.4.1. Coarse Aggregate: 100 percent passing 318 inch sieve and not more than 5
percent passing #8 sieve.
Fine Aggregate: Washed, natural sand; not more than 2 percent by weight
deleterious substances; 5 percent minimum passing # 100 sieve.
2.1.4.2.
Water: Clean and potable.
Admixtures:
2.1.6.1.
2.1.6.2.
Mortar Colorant: Approved for use in mix, 100 percent mineral oxide, two separate colors
as selected by Architect from standard color range. Provide mortar colorant at
applications where masonry is exposed to view in final construction.
Grout Admixtures: Sika, Grout Aid Type II.
Mortar: No admixtures permitted, except colorant.
2.2. MORTAR MIXES
2.2.1. Mortar for Reinforced Masonry: ASTM C270; Section 2102.2, Item 8, UBC; Section
2103.1 and Section 2103.3, Chapter 21, UBC.
2.2.1.1. Provide Type S, minimum compressive strength of 1800 psi at 28 days as
indicated on the drawings.
2.2.2. Proportions - Type S:
2.2.2.1. 1 Part Portland Cement.
2.2.2.2. Mortar Aggregate: Not less than 2-114 and not more than 3 times the sum of
the separate volumes of cementitious materials.
2.2.2.3. Not less than 114 part nor more than 1/2 part lime.
Larwin Park
City Of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037 MORTAR AND GROUT
04065 - 2
2.3.
2.4.
2.5.
2.6.
2.7.
MORTAR MIXING
2.3.1. Thoroughly mix mortar ingredients in quantities needed for immediate use in accordance
with ASTM C270 and Section 2103.3.1, Uniform Building Code, and the following
2.3.1 .I.
2.3.1.2.
Use mixer with capacity for batches using full sack volumes of cement.
Charge the mixer in the following sequence:
2.3.1.2.1.
2.3.1.2.2.
2.3.1.2.3.
2.3.1.2.4. Full quantity of lime.
2.3.1.2.5.
1/2 quantity of sand, water, and admixture and colorant.
Full quantity of cement; Partial sack batches are prohibited.
112 quantity of sand, water, and admixture and colorant.
Additional water as required for workable mix.
2.3.2. If water is lost by evaporation, retemper only within one hour of mixing or prior to cement
reaching initial set, which ever occurs first.
GROUT MIXES
2.4.1. Engineered Masonry: Comply with ASTM C476 and Section 2103.4, Uniform Building
Code.
2.4.1 .I.
2.4.1.2.
2.4.1.3.
Type: coarse grout for concrete masonry units.
Slump: 7-8 inches slump at low lift grouting applications.
Strength: Minimum compressive strength as indicated on the Drawings.
GROUT MIXING
2.5.1. Mix grout concrete in accordance with ASTM C94; and Section 2103.4 and 2102.2, Item
9, Chapter 21, Uniform Building Code.
Add admixtures in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Provide uniformity of
mix.
Do not use anti-freeze compounds to lower the freezing point of grout.
2.5.2.
2.5.3.
OTHER MATERIALS
2.6.1. Provide all other materials, not specifically described but required for complete and
proper installation of this work, as selected by the contractor and subject to the approval
of the Architect.
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
2.7.1.
2.7.2.
Provide for testing under the provisions of Section 01450.
Cement: Section 2102.2, Item 2, Uniform Building Code.
Larwin Park
City Of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
MORTAR AND GROUT
04065 - 3
3. PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1. SURFACE CONDITIONS
3.1.1. Inspection
3.1 .I .I. Prior to work of this section, carefully inspect previously installed work.
Verify all such work is complete to the point where this installation may
properly commence.
3.1.1.2. Verify that work of this section may be installed in strict accordance with the
original design, all pertinent codes and regulations, and all pertinent portions
of the referenced standards.
3.1.1.3. In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Architect.
3.1.1.4. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such
discrepancies have been fully resolved.
3.2. INSTALLATION
3.2.1. Install mortar and grout to requirements of the specific masonry Sections.
3.3. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
3.3.1. Test mortar and grout in accordance with Section 01450, including Section 2105,
Chapter 21, Part 2, Uniform Building Code.
3.3.2. Testing of Mortar Mixes:
3.3.2.1. Mortar Test: For each type of mortar, provide mortar field tests per UBC
Standard 21-16.
3.3.2.2. For the first three days of masonry work, prepare three test specimens for
each masonry crew.
3.3.2.3. Following the first three days of masonry work, prepare one masonry sample
per week for each masonry crew. Prepare additional specimens when
changes in job conditions or materials occur.
3.3.3. Testing of Grout Mixes:
3.3.3.1. Grout Test: For each grout strength, provide grout sample field tests per
UBC Standard 21-18.
3.3.3.2. For the first three days of masonry work, prepare three test specimens for
each masonry crew.
3.3.3.3. Following the first three days of masonry work, prepare one masonry sample
per week for each masonry crew. Prepare additional specimens when
changes in job conditions or materials occur.
END OF SECTION
Larwin Park
City Of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
MORTAR AND GROUT
04065 - 4
SECTION 0481 0
REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY SYSTEM
1.
1.1.
I .2.
1.3.
1.4.
I .5.
1.6.
PART 1 - GENERAL
SECTION INCLUDES
1.1.1. Masonry units.
I .I .I .I. Hollow concrete masonry units.
1 .I .2.
PRODUCTS INSTALLED BUT NOT FURNISHED UNDER THIS SECTION
1.2.1. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications: Placement of fabricated metal items built into
Reinforcement, anchorage, and accessories.
masonry.
RELATED SECTIONS
1.3.1.
1.3.2.
1.3.3.
Section 01450 - Testing Laboratory Services.
Section 03200 - Concrete Reinforcement
Section 03450 - Cast Stone Components.
1.3.4.
1.3.5.
Section 04065 - Mortar and Grout.
Section 04815 - Glass Unit Masonry System.
1.3.6.
1.3.7.
REFERENCES
1.4.1.
QUALIFICATIONS
1.5.1.
Section 07190 - Water Repellent Coating.
Section 09961 - Graffiti Resistant Coatings.
UBC Standard 21-4 Hollow and Solid Load Bearing Concrete Masonry Units.
Installer: Company specializing in performing the work of this Section with minimum 5
years documented experience.
SUBMITTALS
1.6.1.
1.6.2. Samples:
Submit under provisions of Section 01330.
1.6.2.1. Submit two 6-inch square samples indicating surface texture and color of
block.
1.6.3. Certification: Submit certification from block manufacturer confirming compliance with
criteria established by referenced standard and this section.
Latwin Park
City Of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY SYSTEM 04810 - 1
1.7.
1.8.
1.9.
2.
2.1.
2.2.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
1.7.1.
SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
1.8.1.
GUARANTEE
1.9.1. Guarantee
Deliver products to site under provisions of Section 01600.
Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01310.
1.9.1.1. Provide, in Architect approved form, the Owner with a guarantee against the
following specific defects or failures for a period of three (3) years after
Notice of Substantial Completion:
1.9.1 .l .l. Expansionlcontraction cracks.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
MANUFACTURERS
2.1 .l. Basis of Design: Characteristics of specific products, where named in this Section, are
indicated to establish required level of quality, appearance, and performance. The
Architect will consider comparable products by alternate manufacturers where listed, and
requests for substitutions, under the provisions of Section 0161 0.
CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS: SPLIT FACE
2.2.1. Type :
2.2.1.1. Block: Hollow Load Bearing Block Units per ASTM C 90 and Section 2102A.2,
Item 5, Chapter ZlA, Part 2, Title 24, CCR..
2.2.2. Grade: Grade N, Type I-Moisture Controlled
2.2.3. Weight Classification:
2.2.3.1. All units: Medium Weight (greater than 105 pcf to less than 125 pcf).
2.2.4. Size and style
2.2.4.1. Block: Nominal 8 x 8 x 16, hollow load bearing units, one open end at vertical
reinforcing, bond beam units at horizontal reinforcing.
2.2.4.2. Provide closed end units at all outside corners and ends.
2.2.5. Finish
2.2.5.1. Type 1: Provide split face finish as produced by RCP Block at exposed exterior
surfaces and as shown on drawings.
2.2.5.2. Type 2: Provide split face with 5 score tapered finish as produced by RCP Block
at exposed exterior horizontal band as shown on drawings.
2.2.5.3. Where outside corners, ends, and free-standing exterior walls are provided,
provide split face finish at all surfaces visible in completed construction.
Larwin Park
City Of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY SYSTEM
04810 - 2
2.2.5.4. Unless noted otherwise, provide precision block finish at all interior surfaces.
2.2.6. Color:
2.2.6.1. Exposed Exterior Applications at Buildings: Provide specified RCP splitface
block colors. Color match is critical. Architect will be sole judge of color
match when considering acceptability of proposed substitutions.
2.2.6.1 .I. Color 1 : RCP splitface block color Terra Cotta.
2.2.6.1.2. Color 2: RCP splitface block color El Rancho.
2.3. CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS: PRECISION
2.3.1. Type:
2.3.1.1. Block: Hollow Load Bearing Block Units per UBC Standard 21-4 and Section
2102.2, Item 5, Chapter 21, UBC.
2.3.1 .I .I. All units of high-strength walls: Minimum compressive
strength of 3750 psi as a component of design f'm assembly
value of 2500 psi.
2.3.2. Grade: Grads N, Type I-Moisture Controlled
2.3.3. Weight Classification:
2.3.3.1. All units: Medium Weight (greater than 105 pcf to less than 125 pcf).
2.3.4. Size and style
2.3.4.1. Block: Nominal 6 x 8 x 16 and 8 x 8 x 16, hollow load bearing units, one
open end at vertical reinforcing, bond beam units at horizontal reinforcing.
Provide additional sizes as required and as shown on drawings.
2.3.4.2. Provide closed end units at all outside corners and ends.
2.3.5. Finish:
2.3.5.1. Finish: Manufacturers Precision Block finish.
2.3.6. Color:
2.3.6.1. Provide natural gray color.
2.4. ACCESSORIES, REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE
2.4.1. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A 615 or ASTM A 706, in accordance with Section 2102.2.1,
Item 10, UBC, and as specified in Section 03200 of this Project Manual.
2.4.2. Where required or shown on structural drawings, provide prefabricated horizontal joint
reinforcement complying with Section 21 06.5, UBC, hot dipped galvanized.
2.5. SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL AND TESTING
2.5.1.
x
Provide for testing under the provisions of Section 01450.
Larwin Park
City Of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY SYSTEM 04810 - 3
2.7.
3.
3.1.
3.2.
3.3.
2.6. Masonry Units: Section 2105.3, Chapter 21, UBC.
OTHER MATERIALS
2.7.1. Provide all other materials, not specifically described but required for complete and
proper installation of this work, as selected by the contractor and subject to the approval
of the Architect.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
SURFACE CONDITIONS
3.1.1, Inspection
3.1.1 .I.
3.1.1.2.
3.1.1.3.
3.1.1 -4.
3.1 .I .5.
Prior to work of this section, carefully inspect previously installed work.
Verify all such work is complete to the point where this installation may
properly commence.
Verify that work of this section may be installed in strict accordance with the
original design, all pertinent codes and regulations, and all pertinent portions
of the referenced standards.
Verify that built-in items are in proper location, and ready for roughing into
masonry work.
In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Architect.
Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such
discrepancies have been fully resolved.
PREPARATION
3.2.1. Direct and coordinate placement of metal anchors supplied to other Sections.
3.2.2. Provide temporary bracing during installation of masonry work. Maintain in place until
building structure provides permanent bracing.
3.2.3. Provide templates for setting anchor bolts, maintaining clearances and embedment in
compliance with Section 2106.2.14.1, Uniform Building Code.
COURSING
3.3.1. Establish lines, levels, and coursing indicated. Protect from displacement.
3.3.2. Maintain masonry courses to uniform dimension. Form vertical and horizontal joints of
uniform thickness.
3.3.3. Lay masonry units in running bond. Course one unit and one mortar joint to equal 8
inches.
3.3.4. Joint Tooling:
3.3.4.1. Tool exterior wall joints concave.
3.3.4.2. Tool exposed interior wall joints concave.
Larwin Park
City Of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY SYSTEM
0481 0 - 4
3.3.4.3. Tool joints tight and flush at locations where plaster, waterproofing or tile
finish occurs.
Where furring or framing assemblies are installed over masonry, tool joints
tight and flush.
3.3.4.4.
3.3.5. Surface preparation for waterproofing membranes: Provide smooth mortar parge coat at
all block surfaces receiving below grade waterproofing systems, free of ridges, gaps,
holes or other surface imperfections.
Preparation for flashing assemblies: Where roof or other flashing assemblies butt against
or slope against adjoining masonry wall surface, sawcut reglet joint as required to receive
flashing termination and as directed by Architect.
3.3.6.
3.4. REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGES - REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY
3.4.1. Install reinforcement at spacing indicated and to allow a minimum grout coverage of 112
inch or 1 bar diameter, whichever is greater.
Support and secure reinforcing bars from displacement. Maintain position within 1/2 inch
of dimensioned position.
Retain vertical reinforcement in position at top and bottom of cells and at intervals not
exceeding 192 bar diameters.
Splice reinforcing bars in accordance with Section 21 07.2.2.6, Chapter 21, Uniform
Building Code; and as shown on structural drawings.
Embed anchors for attachment of metal fabrications.
3.4.2.
3.4.3.
3.4.4.
3.4.5.
3.5. PLACING AND BONDING
3.5.1.
3.5.2.
3.5.3.
3.5.4.
3.5.5.
3.5.6.
3.5.7.
3.5.8.
3.5.9.
Lay masonry in accordance with Section 2104.6, Chapter 21, Uniform Building Code.
Perform jobsite cutting of masonry units with proper tools to provide straight, clean,
unchipped edges. Prevent broken masonry unit corners or edges.
Lay hollow masonry units with full face shell bedding on bed joints and full head joints.
Lay claykoncrete brick masonry units with full head and bed joints.
Buttering corners of joints or excessive furrowing of mortar joints are not permitted.
Lay masonry units with core cells grout space vertically aligned, clear of mortar, and
unobstructed with a minimum cell dimension of 3 inches.
Interlock intersections and external corners.
Where expansion or control joints are shown on structural drawings, provide Type 1
sealant and backer rod as specified in Section 07900 at both sides of joint.
Remove excess mortar as Work progresses. Do not shift or tap masonry units after
mortar has achieved initial set. Where adjustment must be made, remove mortar and
replace.
Grout may be placed after mortar has achieved initial set. Permit mortar to cure 3 days
before placing grout at high lift grouting operations.
Larwin Park
City Of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY SYSTEM
04810 - 5
3.6. GROUTING
3.6.1. Wet masonry unit surfaces in contact with grout just prior to grout placement.
3.6.2. Provide coarse grout at hollow unit masonry applications.
3.6.3. Grout hollow unit masonry using specified grouting techniques.
3.6.4. When grouting is stopped for more than one hour, terminate grout 112 inch below top of
upper masonry unit to form a positive key for subsequent grout placement.
3.6.5. Low Lift Grouting
3.6.5.1. Install masonry units to a maximum height of 24 inches.
3.6.5.2. Remove all overhanging mortar and mortar droppings.
3.6.5.3. Place first lift of grout and mechanically vibrate for grout consolidation. Place
subsequent lifts in not more than 24 inch increments and mechanically
vibrate for grout consolidation.
3.6.6. High Lift Grouting:
3.6.6.1. Conform to requirements of Section 21 04.6, UBC requirements.
3.6.6.2. Provide clean-out openings no less than 4 inches high at the bottom of each
grout pour by cutting one face shell of masonry unit at each vertical
reinforcing bar.
3.6.6.3. Clean out masonry cells, reinforcing and cavities with high pressure water
stream. Completely drain cavity and cell bottom of water.
3.6.6.4. Obtain Architects review of cleaned cells and cavities. Provide Architect with
3 days advance notice.
3.6.6.5. After review, seal opening with masonry face shell.
3.6.6.6. Pump grout into cells. Maintain water content in grout as required to achieve
required slump without aggregate segregation.
3.6.6.7. Place grout in maximum 4 foot lifts. Provide initial grout consolidation by
mechanical vibration.
3.6.6.8. After the grout has become plastic, but before any setting has occurred,
place next grout lift. In normal weather conditions, delay placing subsequent
grout lifts for 30 minutes minimum, and 60 minutes maximum.
Reconsolidate the preceding grout lift by mechanical vibration, and repeat
procedure.
3.7. BUILT - IN WORK
3.7.1. As work progresses, build in anchor bolts, plates, and other items furnished by other
Sections.
3.7.2. Build in items plumb and level.
3.7.3. Do NOT build in pipes or ducts unless specifically detailed.
Larwin Park
City Of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY SYSTEM
04810 - 6
3.7.4.
3.8. TOLERANCES
3.8.1.
3.8.2.
Do NOT build in organic materials subject to deterioration.
_*-
Maximum Variation From Unit to Adjacent Unit: 1/16 inch.
Maximum Variation From Plane of Wall: 114 inch in 10 feet and 112 inch in 20 feet or
more.
Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch per story non-cumulative.
Maximum Variation From Level Coursing: 1/8 inch in 3 feet and 1/4 inch in 10 feet; 112
inch in 30 feet.
Maximum Variation of Joint Thickness: 1/8 inch in 3 feet.
3.8.3.
3.8.4.
3.8.5.
3.9. CUTTING AND FITTING
3.9.1. Cut and fit for chases, pipes, conduit, sleeves, grounds, and other penetrations.
Coordinate with other Sections of work to provide correct size, shape, and location.
Obtain Architect approval prior to cutting or fitting masonry work not indicated or where
appearance or strength of masonry work may be impaired.
3.9.2.
3.10. CLEANING
3.10.1.
3.10.2.
3.1 0.3.
3.1 0.4.
3.10.5.
Clean work under provisions of Section 01770.
Remove excess mortar and mortar smears.
Replace defective mortar. Match adjacent work.
Use non-metallic tools in cleaning operations.
Do not use acid or acid base cleaning agents.
3.11. PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
3.1 1 .I.
3.1 1.2.
Protect finish installation under provisions of Section 01 500.
Without damaging completed work, provide protective boards at exposed external
corners which may be damaged by construction activities.
3.12. FIELD QUALITY ASSURANCE
3.1 2.1.
3.1 2.2.
3.1 2.3.
3.12.4.
Perform testing and inspection under the provisions of Section 01450.
Masonry Inspection: Provide inspection per Section 1701.4, Item 7, Uniform Building
Code.
Masonry Testing: Provide testing per Section 2105.3, Chapter 21, Uniform Building
Code.
Masonry Prism Testing: For each different masonry compressive strength, provide
testing per Section 2105.3.2, Chapter 21, Uniform Building Code. Prepare prisms as
follows:
Larwin Park
City Of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY SYSTEM 04810 - 7
Larwin Park
City Of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
3.12.4.1. A set of five masonry prisms shall be built and tested in accordance with
U.B.C. Standard No. 21-47 prior to the start of construction. Materials used
for the construction of the prisms shall be taken from those specified to be
used in the project. Prisms shall be constructed under the observation of the
special inspector or an approved agency and tested by an approved agency.
3.12.4.2. A set of three prisms shall be built and tested during construction in
accordance with U.B.C. Standard No. 21-17 for each 5,000 square feet of
wall area, but not less than one set of three masonry prisms for the project.
END OF SECTION
REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY SYSTEM
04810 - 8
MANUFACTURER’S SPECIFICATION
CULTURED STONE VENEER
@ Eldorado Stone, LLC
1370 Grand Ave., Bldg., B
San Marcos, CA 92069
Tel: (760) 736-3232
Fax: (760) 736-8890
e-mail: customerservice@eldoradostone.com
website: www.eIdoradostone.com
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Portland cement based manufactured [stone] [and] [brick]
veneer and trim.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. Building code applicable to project site.
B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
1. ANSI AI 18.4 Specifications for Latex-Portland Cement Mortar
C. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
1. ASTM C 67-Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Brick and Structural Clay
Tile
2. ASTM C 144-Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar
3. ASTM C 177-Test Method for Steady-State Head Flux Measurements and
ThermalTransmission Properties by Means of the Guarded-Hot-Plate Apparatus
4. ASTM C 207-Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes
5. ASTM C 270-Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry
6. ASTM C 482- Standard Test Method for Bond Strength of Ceramic Tile to
Portland Cement
7. ASTM C 51 3-Test Method for Obtaining and Testing Specimens of Hardened
Lightweight Insulating Concrete for Compressive Strength
8. ASTM C 567-Test Method for Unit Weight of Structural Lightweight Concrete
9. ASTM C 847-Specification for Metal Lath
IO. ASTM C 979-Specification for Pigments for Integrally Colored Concrete
11: ASTM D 226-Specification for Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used in
Roofing and Waterproofing
D. Uniform Building Code Standards:
2. UBC Standard 32-1 2-Roof Tile
1. UBC Standard 14-I-Kraft Waterproof Building Paper
1.43 SUBMITTALS
A. Reference Section 0 1330-Submittal Procedures; submit following items:
I. Product Data.
2. Samples:
a. Standard sample board consisting of small-scale pieces of
veneer units showing full range of textures and colors.
b. Full range of mortar colors.
3. Quality Assurance/Control Submittals:
a. Qualifications:
1 ) Proof of manufacturer qualifications.
2) Proof of installer qualifications.
b. Regulatory Requirements: Evaluation reports
c. Veneer manufacturer’s installation instructions.
d. Installation instructions for other materials
B. Closeout Submittals: Reference Section 01 780-Closeout Submittals; submit
following items:
I. Maintenance Instructions.
2. Specia I Warranties.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications:
1. Manufacturer Qualifications: Licensee of Eldorado Stone Corporation
2. Installer Qualifications: Experienced mason familiar with installation
procedures for manufactured veneer.
B. Field Sample:
I. Prepare [2 foot by 4 foot [ 2 foot by 4 foot at a location on the structure
as selected by the Owner. Use approved selection
sample materials and colors. Include top cap and grouting.
2. Obtain Owner approval.
3. Protect and retain sample as a basis for approval of completed
manufactured stonework. Approved sample may be incorporated into
completed work.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Reference Section 01 660-Product Storage and Handling Requirements.
B. Follow manufacturer’s instructions. Follow manufacturer’s instructions.
1.06 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer’s standard warranty coverage against defects in
materials when installed in accordance with manufacturer’s installation
instructions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS ,-
2.0 I MANUFACTURER
A. Eldorado Stone, LLC Tel: (800) 925-1491
1370 Grand Ave., Bldg. B Fax: (760) 736-8890
San Marcos, CA 92069 E-Mail: customerservice@eldoradostone.com
Website: www.eldoradostone.com
B. Product:: Smokey Mountain Ledge
C. Substitutions: None Allowed.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Veneer Units: Precast veneer units consisting of portland cement, sand,
lightweight aggregates, and mineral oxide pigments.
a. Compressive Strength: ASTM C 513, 5 sample ave ............ 2,200 psi (15 MPa).
b. Shear Test: ASTM C 482, ...................................................... 50 psi (335 kPa).
d. Freeze-Thaw Test: ASTM C 67, ................................................... i 0.67 percent.
e. Thermal Resistance: ASTM C 177 ............................................... R0.60 (0.11).
f. Density: ASTM C 567 (Dry density) ............................ 75 pcf (1200 kg per m 3 ).
1. Physical Properties:
c. Water Absorption: UBC Standard 32-1 2 , ......................................... 22 percent.
B. Moisture Barrier: [ASTM D 226 No. 15 non-perforated asphalt-saturated organic
felt] ,[UBC Standard 14-1 kraft waterproof building paper].
C. Reinforcing: [ASTM C 847 galvanized expanded metal lath] [ASTM C 847 painted
expanded metal lath] [I inch galvanized steel, 18 gauge woven wire mesh]
complying with code agency requirements for the type of substrate over which
stone veneer is installed.
D. Mortar:
1. Cement: Any cement complying with ASTM C 270.
2. Lime: ASTM C 207.
3. Sand: ASTM C 144, natural or manufactured sand.
4. Pigment: ASTM C 979, mineral oxide pigments.
5. Water: Potable.
6. Pre-Packaged Latex-Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI AI 18.4.
E. Bonding Agent: DaraweldoC as manufactured by Grace Construction, or
equal Products.
F. Sealer: Water based silane or siloxane masonry sealer, [clear] [semi-gloss]
finish.
2.03 MORTAR MIXES
A. Standard Installation (Grouted Joints):
1. Mix mortar in accordance with [ASTM C 270, Type N or SI [or]
[Eldorado Stone, LLC mortar preparation instructions].
a. Add color pigment in grout joint mortar in accordance with
pigment manufacturer’s instructions.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates upon which work will be installed.
B. Coordinate with responsible entity to perform corrective work on
unsatisfactory substrates.
C. Commencement of work’by installer is acceptance of substrate.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Protection: Protect adjacent work from contact with mortar
6. Surface Preparation: Prepare substrate in accordance with manufacturer’s
installation instructions for the type of substrate being covered.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install and clean stone in accordance with manufacturer’s installation
instructions for[Standard (Grouted Joint)] [Jointless/Dry-Stacked] installation.
B. Apply sealer in accordance with sealer manufacturer’s installation instructions.
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer‘s Field Services: Manufacturer’s Field Service Representative
shall make periodic site visits for installation consultation and inspection if
requested by Owner.
3.05 CLEANING
A.. Remove protective coverings from adjacent work.
B. Cleaning Veneer Units: 1. Wash with soft bristle brush and watedgranulated
detergent solution. 2. Rinse immediately with clean water.
C. Removing Effloresence:
1. Allow veener to dry thoroughly. 2. Scrub with soft bristle brush and clean water.
3. Rinse immediately with clean water; allow to dry.
4. If efflorescence is still visible, repeat above procedure using a solution of 1 part
household vinegar and 5 parts water. Rinse immediately with clean water.
END OF SECTION
I I i
..
0 m -I
I- Er
C?
SECTION 0481 5
GLASS UNIT MASONRY
I.
1.1.
I .2.
1.3.
,-
I .4.
1.5. -
PART 1 - GENERAL
SECTION INCLUDES
1.1.1. Glass masonry units.
1 .I .2. Mortar bedding and pointing mortar.
1 ,I .3.
RELATED SECTIONS
Perimeter frame system.
1.2.1. Section 04065 - Mortar and Grout.
1.2.2. Section 04810 - Reinforced Unit Masonry System.
1.2.3. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers.
REFERENCES
1.3.1. ASTM B 221 - Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Shapes, and
Tubes.
1.3.2. ASTM C780 - Preconstruction and Construction Evaluation of Mortars for Plain and
Reinforced Unit Masonry.
I .3.3. IMIAC-International Masonry Industry All - Weather Council: Recommended Practices
and Guide Specifications for Cold Weather Masonry Construction.
QUAL I F I CAT I 0 N S
1.4.1. Contractor Qualifications
1.4.1.1. Installing Contractor shall have Class C-29 Masonry Contractor license .
1.4.1.2. Installing Company: Company specializing in installation of masonry
systems, with minimum 5 years documented experience in installation of
projects of similar scale and scope.
1.4.1.3. Installing Foreman: Individual specializing in installation of masonry systems,
with minimum 5 years documented experience in installation of projects of
similar scale and scope..
1.4.1.4. Use only staff who are completely familiar with the manufacturers'
recommended methods of installation as well as the requirements of this
work.
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
1 S.1. Maintain materials and ambient air temperatures to minimum 50 degrees F prior to,
during, and 48 hours after completion of work.
Larwin Park
City Of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
GLASS UNIT MASONRY
04815 - 1
1.6, SUBMITTALS
1.6.1. Submit under provisions of Section 01330.
1.6.2. Samples:
1.6.2.1. Submit two samples indicating surface texture and color of each specified
glass unit.
1.6.3. Certification: Submit certification from manufacturer confirming compliance with criteria
established by referenced standard and this section.
Materials List: Submit proposed materials list for all products used. 1.6.4.
1.6.5. Shop Drawings
1.6.5.1. Provide shop drawings of all veneer work showing proposed attachment
method, materials used, and relationship of glass unit to adjacent materials.
1.6.5.2. Include details of joints between glass unit, frame and adjacent materials.
1.7. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
1.7.1. Deliver products to site under provisions of Section 01600,
1.7.2. Store and protect products under provisions of Section 01600.
1.7.3. Accept glass units on site on pallets. Inspect for damage.
2. PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1. GLASS BLOCK
2.1 .l. Basis of Design: Characteristics of specific products manufactured by Pittsburgh Corning
Corp. and distributed by RCP Block and Brick are indicated to establish required level of
quality, appearance, and performance. The Architect will consider comparable products
by alternate manufacturers listed in this Section, and requests for substitutions, under the
provisions of Section 01 61 0.
2.1.1 .la Acceptable Alternate Manufacturers: Mulia, Solaris, or equal.
2.1.2. Type: Permanently sealed hollow glass masonry unit.
2.1.3. Characteristics:
2.1 -3.1. Pattern: Decora.
2.1.3.2. Nominal Size: 8 x 8 x 4 inches thick.
2.1.3.3. Performance Criteria:
2.1.3.3.1. Compressive Strength: 400 - 600 psi.
2.1.3.3.2. Impact Strength: 50-60 inch/pounds.
2.1.4. FirelLifelHabitability Criteria:
Larwin Park
City Of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037 GLASS UNIT MASONRY
04815 - 2
2.2.
2.3.
2.4.
2.5.
3.
3.1.
2.1.4.1. Fire Rating: UL Listed as a component of 314 hour rated window assemblies.
2.1.4.2. Safety: Comply with Chapter 24, Part 2, Title 24 CCR safety glazing
requirements, and CSPC 16 CFR, Part 1201, Category II.
Thermal Resistance: R value of 1.96, winter night value. 2.1.4.3.
2.1.5. Color:
2.1.5.1. Type 1: Clear
2.1 52. Type 2: Clear
FRAME SYSTEM
2.2.1.
ACCESSORIES
2.3.1.
2.3.2.
Provide metal channel frame per Section 05500, hot dip galvanized.
Expansion Strips: 7/16 x 4 inches nominal size, dense glass fiber matting.
Panel Anchors: 20 gage x 1-3/4 inch wide steel strips, punched with three rows of
elongated holes, pattern staggered, hot dip galvanized after fabrication to 1.25 oz/sq ft in
accordance with ASTM A123.
Panel Reinforcing: Laddertype, 9 gage parallel wire reinforcing, with welded cross wires,
hot dip galvanized after welding.
Asphalt Emulsion: Water based asphalt emulsion.
Sealant: As specified in Section 07900.
2.3.3.
2.3.4.
2.3.5.
MORTAR
2.4.1. Comply with Section 04065 and as specified.
2.4.1 .I.
2.4.1.2.
Provide Type S mortar, minimum 1,500 psi compressive strength.
Provide integral color admixture color as selected by Architect.
OTHER MATERIALS
2.5.1. Provide all other materials, not specifically described but required for complete and
proper installation of this work, as selected by the contractor and subject to the approval
of the Architect.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
SURFACE CON DIT IONS
3.1 .I. Inspection
3.1 .I .I. Prior to work of this section, carefully inspect previously installed work.
Verify all such work is complete to the point where this installation may
properly commence.
Larwin Park
City Of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
GLASS UNIT MASONRY
04815 - 3
3.1.1.2. Verify that work of this section may be installed in strict accordance with the
original design, all pertinent codes and regulations, and all pertinent portions
of the referenced standards.
3.1 .I .3. In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Architect.
3.1.1.4. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such
discrepancies have been fully resolved.
3.2. PREPARATION
3.2.1.
3.2.2.
Clean glass units of foreign substances.
Establish and protect lines, levels, and coursing.
3.2.3. Protect elements surrounding the work of this Section from damage and disfiguration.
3.3. INSTALLATION
3.3.1. Erect glass units and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.3.2. Locate and secure perimeter metal frame system. Install expansion strips at head and
jambs.
3.3.3. Coat sill under units with asphalt emulsion as a bond breaker, and allow to dry.
3.3.4. Provide full mortar joints. Furrowing not permitted. Remove excess mortar.
3.3.5. Maintain uniform joint width of 1/4 inch. Tool joint concave.
3.3.6. Place continuous ladder reinforcing in horizontal joint in full mortar bed per Section
2110A and 2113A, Chapter 21A, Part 2, Title 24, CCR. Provide % inch mortar cover at
each side.
3.3.7. Isolate glass block from jamb and head frame with expansion strips concealed within
frame. Keep expansion joint voids clear of mortar.
3.3.8. Shore assembly until mortar setting bed is set.
3.4. TOLERANCES
3.4.1. Variation from Joint Width: Plus 118 inch and minus 0 inches.
3.4.2, Maximum Variation from Plane of Unit to Adjacent Unit: 1/32 inch.
3.5. CLEANING AND PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
3.5.1. Clean Work under provisions of Section 01 770.
3.5.2. Do not scratch or deface units.
3.5.3. Protect finished installation under provisions of Section 01 500.
END OF SECTION
Larwin Park
City Of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
GLASS UNIT MASONRY
04815 - 4
SECTION 051 20
STRUCTURAL STEEL
1.
1.1.
I .2.
1.3.
1.4.
PART I - GENERAL
SECTION INCLUDES
1.1.1.
PRODUCTS FURNISHED BUT NOT INSTALLED UNDER THIS SECTION
1.2.1.
I .2.2.
Structural steel framing and support members.
Section 0331 0 - Cast-in-Place Concrete : Anchors for casting into concrete.
Section 04810 - Reinforced Unit Masonry System: Anchors for casting into masonry
work.
RELATED SECTIONS
1.3.1.
1.3.2. Section 09900 - Painting.
REFERENCES
Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications.
I .4.1.
I .4.2.
1.4.3.
1.4.4.
1.4.5.
1.4.6.
I .4.7.
I .4.a.
1.4.9.
1.4.10.
1.4.1 1.
1.4.1 2.
1.4.1 3.
ASTM A36 - Structural Steel.
ASTM A53 - Hot-Dipped, Zinc-coated Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe.
ASTM A123 - Zinc (Hot-Dipped Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products.
ASTM A307 - Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 PSI Tensile Strength.
ASTM A449 - Quenched and Tempered Steel Bolts and Studs.
ASTM A500 - Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in
Round and Shapes.
ASTM A 992 - Standard Specification for Steel of Structural Shapes for Use in Building
Framing.
AWS A2.1 - Standard Welding Symbols.
AWS D1.l - Structural Welding Code.
AWS D1.3 - Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel.
AWS Dl .4 - Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel.
SSPC-Steel Structures Painting Council.
Uniform Building Code Standards 22-1, Material Specification for Structural Steel, 1997
edition.
Larwin Park
City Of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
STRUCTURAL STEEL
05120 - 1
1.4.14. AlSC - Specification for Structural Steel Buildings - Allowable Stress Design and Plastic
Design - 9th Edition.
1.4.15. AlSC - Code of Structural Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges and Commentary,
modified as follows:
1.4.15.1. In Paragraph 4.2.1, delete the following sentence: "This approval constitutes
the owner's acceptance of all responsibility for the design adequacy of any
connections designed by the fabricator as a part of his preparation of these
shop drawings."
1.4.15.2. In Paragraphs 7.4, 7.11.4, and 7.11.5, replace "Owner" with "Contractor"
1.4.16. AISC - Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or ASTM A 490 Bolts.
1.5. SUBMITTALS
1 s.1. Submit under provisions of Section 01 330.
1 S.2. Shop Drawings:
1.5.2.1. Shop drawings shall include complete details and procedures and diagrams.
Include details of cuts, connections, camber, holes, and other pertinent data.
1.5.2.2. Provide setting drawings, templates, and directions for installation of anchor bolts and other anchorage to be installed as work of other sections.
1.5.2.3. Indicate welds by standard AWS A2.1 and A2.4 symbols, and show size,
length, sequence, and type of each weld. Indicate net weld lengths.
1.5.2.4. Shop drawings shall clearly identify, in graphic form, all deviations from
contract documents. Provide complete description and rationale for
deviation.
1.5.2.4.1. Where shop drawings propose deviations from contract
documents, prior approval by Building Department is
required. Do not fabricate steel prior to obtaining such
approval.
1 S.2.4.2. The Architect will prepare documents for submission to
Building Department for review documenting proposed
deviations from contract documents. Cost of such
preparation, all Building Department plan check fees and all
related charges will be paid by Contractor by deductive
change order.
1.5.2.4.3. Contractor shall incorporate all delays caused by Building
Department review into schedule. No cost increase will be
allowed by Owner for such delay.
1 S.2.5. Shop Drawings shall be originals developed by Contractor. Copying of
Engineers or Architects drawings is not acceptable.
1.5.2.6. Clearly identify all changes made in re-submitted shop drawings.
Incorporate changes necessary due to field conditions in re-submittal.
Larwin Park
City Of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
STRUCTURAL STEEL
05120 - 2
1.5.3. Product DataIMaterials List
1.5.3.1. Submit producer’s or manufacturer’s specifications and installation
instructions for following products. Include laboratory test reports and other
data to show compliance with specifications, including specified standards.
1.5.3.2. Structural steel (each type), including certified copies of mill reports covering
chemical and physical properties.
I .5.3.3. Normal and high-strength bolts (each type), including nuts and washers.
1.5.3.4. Structural steel primer paint.
1.5.3.5. Shrinkage-resistant grout.
1.5.3.6. Power driven fasteners, shot pins, and related items.
1.5.4. Welders’ Certificates: Submit documentation to the Testing Laboratory stating welders
have been qualified and have current certification in accordance with AWS Standard
1.5.4.1. Welders shall be certified for not less than 24 months and have received
certification within past 12 months.
1.5.5. Welding Procedure Specification Submittal:
1.5.5.1. Submit to Testing Laboratory written Welding Procedure Specifications
(WPS) as defined by AWS D1.l, Section 5. The WPS shall be prepared by
the Fabricator for review and approval by the Testing Laboratory as
complying with specified criteria, and shall be readily available to the welding
Inspector.
1.6. QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.6.1. Codes and standards: comply with provisions of following, except as otherwise indicated.
1.6.1 .I. American Institute of Steel Construction: (AISC) “Specifications for the
Design, Fabrication, and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings”, including
the “Commentary” and Supplements thereto as issued.
I .6.1.2. American Welding Society (AWS) : Structural Welding Code, latest edition.
1.6.1.2.1. The minimum requirements for a qualified welding inspector
shall be as those for an AWS certified welding inspector
(CWI), as defined in the provision of the 1992 edition of
AWS, QCI, Standard Guide for Qualification and
Certification of Welding Inspectors published by the
American Welding Society. All welding inspectors shall be
approved by the DSA prior to inspection of any work.
I .7. QUALIFICATIONS
1.7.1. Manufacturer
I .7.1 .I. Manufacturer shall have produced the specified products for a period of five
(5) years prior to beginning work of this section, and shall have the capability
to produce the specified products to the delivery and quantity criteria of the
project .
Lawin Park
City Of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
STRUCTURAL STEEL
05120 - 3
1.7.1.2.
1.7.2. Fa bricator/Erector
Provide structural steel manufactured within the continental United States.
1.7.2.1. For fabrication and installation of work, use only personnel who are
thoroughly trained and experienced in the skills required, have installed
similar applications of the specified products within one year prior to
beginning work of this section, and who are completely familiar with the
manufacturers' recommended methods of installation as well as the
requirements of this work.
Provide structural steel fabrication within the continental United States in
accordance with specified criteria.
1.7.2.2.
FIELD MEASUREMENTS
1.8.1.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
1.9.1,
1.9.2.
1.9.3.
1.9.4.
1.9.5. .
Verify field measurements are as shown on shop drawings.
Deliver and store on site under the provisions of Section 01600.
Store materials above ground, protected from dirt, grease, corrosion and other damage.
Store all other materials in a waterproof manner.
Provide original packaged welding electrodes, clearly marked as to type and rating.
Do not store materials on structure in a manner causing potential distortion or damage to
members, surfaces, or supporting structures.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
MATERIALS
2.1 .l.
2.1.2.
2.1.3.
2.1.4.
2.1.5.
Structural Steel Members: ASTM A36 complying with Uniform Building Code Standard
22-1 or ASTM A 572, Grade 50 and ATM A 992, as shown on structural drawings.
Structural Tubing: ASTM A500, Grade B, and UBC Standard 22-1.
Threaded Fasteners:
2.1.3.1. Machine Bolts: Unless noted otherwise, ASTM A307, Grade A, and ANSI,
B18.1 and 818.2. Provide ASTM A563, Hex, Grade A Nuts and Washers.
2.1.3.2. Anchor Bolts:
2.1.3.2.1. ASTM A307, Grade A, unless noted otherwise on structural
drawings.
2.1.3.3.
Welding Materials: AWS D5.5; E70XX electrodes, type as required for application. Use
E9OXX low hydrogen electrodes for welding reinforcing steel.
Grouts
Miscellaneous Fasteners: As indicated on drawings.
Larwin Park
City Of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
STRUCTURAL STEEL
05120 - 4
2.2.
2.3.
2.1 51. Plastic Grout: Non-shrink type, pre-mixed compound consisting of non-
metallic aggregate, cement, water reducing and plasticizing additives,
capable of developing a minimum compressive strength of 8,000 psi at 28
days.
2.1.5.2. Dry-Pack Grout: Portland cement (ASTM C150, Type I or Type II) and
clean, uniformly graded, natural sand (ASTM C404, Size No. 2). Mix at a
ratio of 1.0 part cement to 3.0 parts sand by volume, with minimum water
required for placement and hydration.
2.1.6. Touch-up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: Galvalloy or equal.
2.1.7. Primer: Approved VOC compliant primer, suitable for subsequent finishes as specified
and shown in other portions of the Contract Documents.
COMPONENT FABRICATION
2.2.1. General
2.2.1.1. Conform to the approved submittals and other Reference Standards as
applicable to the Work and the requirements of this Section.
2.2.1.2. Fabricate and form the Work to meet actual installation conditions as verified
at the site.
2.2.1.3. Welding shall be done in strict adherence with written Welding Procedure
Specifications (WPS) as defined by AWS D1.l, Section 5. Coordinate
inspection with Owners Special Inspector.
2.2.1.4. Mark weight on member of all components exceeding 4 tons in weight.
2.2.2. Cleaning and Straightening
2.2.2.1. In accordance with SSPC-SP-2 or SP-3, thoroughly clean material of loose
mill scale and rust.
2.2.2.2. Produce finished members free from twists, bends and open joints when
erected .
CONNECTIONS: FABRICATION AND JOINTING CRITERIA
2.3.1.
2.3.2.
General
2.3.1 .I.
2.3.1.2.
Welding
2.3.2.1,
2.3.2.2.
2.3.2.3.
Comply with requirements of referenced standards.
Unless noted otherwise, make all connections with common bolts.
Conform to AWS D1.l, as modified by referenced AlSC Standards and as
indicated or noted on the Drawings.
Employ certified welding operators who are thoroughly trained and
experienced in arc welding, produce uniformly reliable groove and fillet welds in flat, vertical and overhead positions, and make neat and consistent welds.
Weld structural steel joints by the shielded metal electric-arc method
Lawin Park
City Of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
STRUCTURAL STEEL
05120 - 5
2.3.2.4. Provide inspection and testing of welds as required under Article “Field
Quality Control of this section and per Section 01430.
2.3.2.5. Grind exposed welds subject to contact or visible in final construction to
smooth surfaces free of holes, slag or other defects, flush with the adjoining
surfaces. No finish treatment is required for permanently concealed welds
and other exposed welds.
2.3.2.6. Storage and Care of Electrodes:
2.3.2.6.1. Coatings of low-hydrogen type electrodes shall be
thoroughly dry when used. After removal from container,
electrodes shall be kept in heating quiver until immediately
prior to use.
2.3.2.6.2. Use electrodes as taken from hermetically sealed packages
within 4 hours of the time the package is opened.
Electrodes not used within this 4 hour period and electrodes
that have been exposed more than one hour to air having a
relative humidity of 75 percent or greater shall be dried for at
least two hours at a temperature of 200 to 250 degrees
Fahrenheit before they are used or shall be reconditioned
according to the manufacturer’s recommendations.
2.3.2.6.3. Electrodes so dried or reconditioned not used within 4 hours
after drying is completed shall be redried before use.
2.3.2.6.4. Electrodes of any class that have been wet shall not be
used under any conditions.
2.3.2.7. Completed welds shall be wire brushed and shall show uniform section,
smoothness of welded metal, feather edges without undercuts or overlays
and freedom from porosity and inclusions. Visual inspection at edges and
ends of fillet welds shall show good fusion and penetration into base metal.
2.4. ’ SHOP FINISHING
2.4.1. General
2.4.1 .l. Prepare in accordance with referenced specification standards. Unless
specified otherwise, shop prime all structural steel.
2.4.1.2. Do not galvanize or shop prime structural steel embedded in concrete.
2.4.1.3. Do not shop prime galvanized structural steel, or steel concealed in final
construction.
2.4.2. Shop Prime Painting
2.4.2.1. Clean steel in accordance with SSPC-SP-2 or SSPC-SP-3 criteria.
2.4.2.2. Apply shop coat per SSPC-Paint 2 criteria, minimum 1.5 mil thickness.
2.4.2.3. Work primer into joints, corners, and edges.
2.4.2.4. Block out at connections and omit shop primer.
Larwin Park
City Of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
STRUCTURAL STEEL
05120 - 6
2.4.3. Hot Dip Galvanizing
2.4.3.1. Steel framing members and ferrous metal items, specifically shown or noted
on drawings as galvanized, shall be galvanized by the hot-dip process,
conforming to ASTM A 123.
2.4.3.2. All required hot-dip galvanizing shall be done after fabrication, in the largest
sections possible.
2.4.3.3. Weight of the zinc coating per square foot of actual surface shall average
not less than 2.5 ounces-and no individual specimens shall show less than
1.8 ounces.
2.5. SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
2.5.1, Structural Shapes
2.5.1.1. Identified Structural Steel: Tests are waived for steel identified by heat
number, accompanied by mill analyses and mill test reports and properly
tagged with Identification Certificate so as to be readily identified for
conformance with applicable ASTM standard.
2.5.1.2. Unidentified Steel: If structural steel cannot be identified or its source is
questionable, not less than one tension and one bend test shall be made for
each 5 tons or fractional part thereof. Additional tests may be required when
deemed necessary by the Architect or Structural Engineer. Contractor shall
bear test costs.
2.5.1.3. Conform to testing requirements of Section 2203 and 2231.1, Chapter 22,
Uniform Building Code.
2.5.2. Threaded Connections
2.5.2.1. Random inspection of shop fabrication procedures may be performed by
Owner's testing service without notification.
3. PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1, SURFACE CONDITIONS
3.1 .I. Inspection
3.1 .I .I.
3.1 .I .2.
3.1 .I .3.
3.1 .I .4.
Prior to work of this section, carefully inspect previously installed work.
Verify all such work is complete to the point where this installation may
properly commence.
Verify that work of this section may be installed in strict accordance with the
original design, all pertinent codes and regulations, and all pertinent portions
of the referenced standards. Verify existing construction complies with the
following tolerances:
In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Architect.
Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such
discrepancies have been fully resolved.
Larwin Park
City Of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
STRUCTURAL STEEL
05120 - 7
3.2. ERECTION
3.2.1. Field weld components indicated on Drawings. Do NOT field cut or alter structural
members without approval of Architect.
3.2.2. After erection, touch up welds, abrasions, and surfaces of exterior galvanized members,
except surfaces to be in contact with concrete. Touch up primer with approved primer
paint.
3.2.3. Connections
3.2.3.1. Field welding shall conform to requirements for shop fabrication.
3.2.3.2. Tighten 'and upset common bolt threads to preclude loosening or use
approved self-locking nuts.
3.3. ERECTION TOLERANCES
3.3.1. Tolerances shall conform to referenced AlSC standards and AlSC Code. Tolerances
shall be compensating, not cumulative.
3.4. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
3.4.1. Field inspection will be performed under provisions of Section 01450.
3.4.2. Inspection of Welding
3.4.2.1. Conform to testing and inspection requirements of Section 1701.5, Item 5,
Chapter 17, Chapter 22, Uniform Building Code.
3.4.2.2. Inspector shall be certified in accordance with AWS QC1 CWI program
Larwin Park
City Of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
END OF SECTION
STRUCTURAL STEEL
05120 - 8
SECTION 05500
METAL FABRICATIONS
1.
1.1.
I .2.
I .3.
- 1.4.
I .5.
PART 1 - GENERAL
SECTION INCLUDE
1.1.1.
I .I .2.
PRODUCTS FURNISHED BUT NOT INSTALLED UNDER THIS SECTION
I .2.1.
RELATED SECTIONS
1.3.1.
1.3.2.
1.3.3.
1.3.4. Section 09900 - Painting.
REFERENCES
I .4.1.
1.4.2.
1.4.3. ASTM A 653, Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-lron-Alloy Coated
Miscellaneous fabricated ferrous metal items, galvanized, plated, and prime painted.
Miscellaneous fabricated structural connectors and clips.
Section 03310 - Cast-ln-Place Concrete.
Section 03310 - Cast-ln-Place Concrete.
Section 0481 5 - Glass Unit Masonry System.
Section 05120 - Structural Steel.
ASTM A36 - Structural Steel.
ASTM A123 - Zinc (Hot-Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products.
(Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.
AWS A2.0 - Standard Welding Symbols.
AWS D1.l - Structural Welding Code.
SSPC - Steel Structures Painting Council.
1 A.4.
1.4.5.
I .4.6.
SUBMITTALS
1 51.
1.5.2.
Submit under provisions of Section 01330.
Shop Drawings: Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing, anchorage,
size and type of fasteners, and accessories. Include erection drawings, elevations, and
details where applicable.
Indicate welded connections using standard AWS A2.0 welding sym bok. Indicate net
weld lengths.
1.5.3.
*-
Larwin Park
City Of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
METAL FAB Rl CATIONS
05500 - 1
1.6. QUALIFICATIONS
1.6.1. Welders' Certificates: Submit under provisions of Section 01 330, certifying welders
employed on the Work, verifying AWS qualification within the previous 12 months.
1.7. FIELD MEASUREMENTS
1.7.1. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings.
2. PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1. MANUFACTURERS
2.1 .I. Basis of Design: Characteristics of specific products, where named in this Section, are
indicated to establish required level of quality, appearance, and performance. The
Architect will consider comparable products by alternate manufacturers where listed, and
requests for substitutions, under the provisions of Section 01610.
2.2. MATERIALS
2.2.1. Plates and Bars: ASTM A283, Grade D or approved equal.
2.2.2. Sheet Steel: ASTM A 653, gage and profile indicated, galvanized to G90 finish in
accordance with ASTM A 653.
2.2.3. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A307 galvanized to ASTM A153 for galvanized
corn ponents.
2.2.4. Welding Materials: AWS D1.l; type required for materials being welded.
2.2.5. Shop and Touch-Up Primer: VOC approved primer.
2.2.6. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: Zinc rich Type.
2.3. STRUCTURAL SHAPES
2.3.1. Provide structural shapes in accordance with Section 051 20.
2.4. FABRICATION
2.4.1. Fit and shop assemble in each item in largest practical sections, for delivery to site.
2.4.2. Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted and secured.
2.4.3. Continuously seal joined members by continuous welds.
2.4.4. Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. Make exposed joints
butt tight, flush, and hairline. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius.
2.4.5. Exposed Mechanical Fastenings: Flush countersunk screws or bolts; unobtrusively
located; consistent with design of component, except where specifically noted otherwise.
2.4.6. Supply components required for anchorage of fabrications. Fabricate anchors and
related components of same material and finish as fabrication, except where specifically
noted otherwise.
Larwin Park
City Of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
METAL FABRICATIONS
05500 - 2
.-
A
2.5.
2.6.
3.
3.1.
3.2.
3.3.
FIN ISH ES
2.5.1. Galvanize all exterior components, after fabrication, in accordance with ASTM A123 or
A386. Provide minimum 2.00 ozlsq ft galvanized coating. Fill vent holes after
galvanizing.
Prime paint interior items with one coat rust inhibitive VOC approved primer compatible
with finish specified in Section 09900.
2.5.2.1.
2.5.2.2.
2.5.2.
Prepare surfaces to be primed in accordance with SSPC SP 2.
Do not prime surfaces in direct contact with concrete or where field welding
is required.
OTHER MATERIALS
2.6.1. Provide all other materials, not specifically described but required for complete and
proper installation of this work, as selected by the contractor and subject to the approval
of the Architect.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
SURFACE CONDITIONS
3.1 .I. Inspection
3.1 .I .I. Prior to work of this section, carefully inspect previously installed work.
Verify all such work is complete to the point where this installation may
properly commence.
Verify that work of this section may be installed in strict accordance with the
original design, all pertinent codes and regulations, and all pertinent portions
of the referenced standards.
In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Architect.
Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such
discrepancies have been fully resolved.
3.1 .I .2.
3.1 .I .3.
3.1.1.4.
PREPARATION
3.2.1.
3.2.2.
Clean and strip primed steel items to bare metal where site welding is required.
Supply items required to be cast into concrete or embedded in masonry with setting
templates, to appropriate sections.
INSTALLATION
3.3.1.
3.3.2.
Install items plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects.
Allow for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain true alignment
until completion of erection and installation of permanent attachments.
Perform field welding in accordance with AWS DI .1.
After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed or galvanized,
except surfaces to be in contact with concrete.
3.3.3.
3.3.4.
Larwin Park
City Of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
METAL FABRICATIONS
05500 - 3
3.3.4.1. Use primer as specified in above for interior steel fabrications.
3.3.4.2. Use Galvalloy galvanizing coating in accordance with manufacturer’s
instructions for exterior steel fabrications.
3.4. ERECTION TOLERANCES
3.4.1.
3.4.2.
Maximum Variation From Plumb: 114 inch per story, non-cumulative.
Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/4 inch.
END OF SECTION
Larwin Park
City Of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
METAL FABRICATIONS
05500 - 4
SECTION 061 12
FRAMING AND SHEATHING
1.
1.1.
1.2.
,- I .3.
I .4.
1.5.
PART 1 - GENERAL
WORK INCLUDED
1.1.1. Structural roof framing.
1 .I .2. Roof sheathing.
1 .I .3. Roof Decking.
1 .I .4.
RELATED WORK
1.2.1.
I .2.2.
1.2.3.
1.2.4.
REFERENCES
I .3.1.
1.3.2.
I .3.3.
Concealed wood blocking
Section 0331 0 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.
Section 051 20 - Structural Steel
Section 061 80- Glue Laminated Structural Units.
Section 07322 - Concrete Roofing Tile
APA - American Plywood Association.
AWPA - American Wood Preservers Association: Treating Practices.
RIS - Redwood Inspection Service: Standard Specifications for Grades of California
Redwood Lumber.
WCLIB - West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau: Standard Grading Rules for West
Coast Lumber.
WWPA - Western Wood Products Association.
1.3.4.
1.3.5.
SUBMITTALS
1.4.1. Submit certificate from pressure treatment facility indicating "the wood is free of visible
arsenical surface deposits" following treatment.
Submit certificate based on actual moisture content readings performed in accordance
with paragraph 1.5.5 of this Section, indicating moisture content of all lumber was 19
percent or less at time of installation.
1.4.2.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.5.1.
1.5.2.
Lumber Grading Agency: Certified by specified agency.
Plywood Grading Agency: Certified by specified agency.
Larwin Park
City Of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
FRAMING AND SHEATHING
06112 - 1
1.6.
2.
2.1.
1.5.3. Provide Certificate of Inspection or grade mark by an approved inspection agency on each piece of lumber and plywood, indicating compliance with applicable standards or
grading rules specified in the referenced standards and this Section.
Provide quality mark by an approved inspection agency on each piece of preservative-
treated lumber and plywood, indicating compliance with applicable standards or grading
rules specified in the referenced standards and this Section.
Provide on-site or other approved quality control program acceptable to Architect and
designed to test lumber materials prior to installation in order to demonstrate compliance
with moisture content criteria.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
I .6.1,
1.5.4.
1.5.5.
Store materials on site in a area protected from potential damage. Provide loose opaque
covers or other protection from sun and rain.
Store on skids or other elevated supports.
Pile and strip lumber to insure free air circulation. Allow lumber to season as required to
achieve specified moisture content prior to installation in building.
Prior to beginning installation, all lumber used shall have a maximum moisture content of
19 percent. Provide written certification, based on moisture meter tests, of compliance
acceptable to Owners inspector and Architect.
Prior to finish system installation, protect all roof and wall sheathing with temporary
coverings as required to prevent delamination and splitting.
I .6.2.
1.6.3.
1.6.4.
1.6.5.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
LUMBER MATERIALS
2.1.1 * Lumber Grading Rules: APA, NFoPA, RIS, WCLIB, and WWPA.
2.1.1.1. Lumber Materials: Comply with UBC Standard 23-1 and all other
requirements of Section 2303, Chapter 23, UBC.
Plywood Sheathing Materials: Comply with UBC Standard 23-2 and all other
requirements of Section 2303, Chapter 23, UBC.
2.1.1.2.
2.1.2. Lumber, unless noted otherwise:
2.1.2.1.
2.1.2.2.
2.1.2.3.
2.1.2.4.
2.1.2.5.
Larwin Park
City Of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
Species: Douglas Fir-Larch.
Grade: Unless specified otherwise, No. 1 & Better.
2.1.2.2.1. Provide Select Structural grade at all exposed exterior
applications, selected for appearance and straightness.
Surfacing: S4S.
Moisture Content: 19 percent maximum moisture content at time of
installation.
Where size permits, provide Free of Heart Center lumber at all exterior
applications.
FRAMING AND SHEATHING
061 12 - 2
2.2.
2.3.
2.1.3. Lumber Decking: Provide 2 x 6 T & G decking, Douglas Fir-Larch, Select grade, S4S
exposed face texture and v-groove joint.
2.1.4. Roof blocking: Provide treated Douglas Fir No.2 grade for use as concealed blocking,
nailers, and similar applications in contact with roofing materials or flashings.
PLYWOOD MATERIALS
2.2.1. Sheathing:
2.2.1 .I. APA rated in accordance with PS 1-95.
2.2.1.2. Roof Sheathing: Unless noted otherwise, Structural I Rated Sheathing,
minimum Span Rating 32/16, 5 ply, face veneer C-D, Exposure 1,
Conventional Type.
ACCESSORIES
2.3.1. Nail Fasteners:
2.3.1.1. Common nails complying with UBC Chapter 23, Division 111; size as required
to suit condition and as specified.
Provide hot dip galvanized fasteners at the following applications: 2.3.1.2.
2.3.1.2.1. Exterior framing exposed to weather.
2.3.1.3. Box nails or "sinkers" are not permitted.
2.3.1.4. Where specified, provide ring shank or screw nails complying with minimum
common nail requirements of Table 23-111-C-2, Chapter 23, Uniform Building
Code, at roof plywood sheathing.
2.3.2. Framing Connectors:
2.3.2.1. Connector references, unless noted otherwise, are based on products as
defined in the latest edition of the Simpson Strong-Tie catalog.
2.3.2.1 .I. Silver Teco and KC Metals, with equal configuration,
structural values and jurisdictional authority approval are
approved equals.
2.3.2.2. Alternate connectors submitted to the Architect for consideration as
approved equal shall have equivalent ICBO ES Report Number ratings.
2.3.2.3. Use only fasteners as approved for listed connector. Where more than one
type of fastener in the referenced series is scheduled, provide fastener with greatest capacity.
2.3.3. Bolts:
2.3.3.1. Bolts: A 307, machine bolts, size and type as indicated, with washers under
head and nut. Provide hot dipped galvanized at all conditions defined above
for nail fasteners.
Larwin Park
City Of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
FRAMING AND SHEATHING
06112 - 3
2.3.3.2. Lag Bolts: A 307, cut thread, size and type as indicated, with washers under
head. Provide hot dipped galvanized at all conditions defined above for nail
fasteners.
Building Paper: No. 15 asphalt felt.
Non-Shrink Grout: As specified in Section 03310.
Dry-pack Grout: Type 2 Portland cement grout, ratio of 1 .O part cement to 3.0 parts sand,
by volume, with only enough water to assure placement and hydration.
2.3.4.
2.3.5.
2.3.6.
OTHER MATERIALS
2.4.1. Provide all other materials, not specifically described but required for complete and
proper installation of this work, as selected by the contractor and subject to the approval
of the Architect.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
SURFACE CONDITIONS
3.1.1. Inspection
3.1.1.1.
3.1 .1.2.
3.1 .1.3.
3.1.1.4.
FRAMING
Prior to work of this section, carefully inspect previously installed work.
Verify all such work is complete to the point where this installation may
properly commence.
Verify that work of this section may be installed in strict accordance with the
original design, all pertinent codes and regulations, and all pertinent portions
of the referenced standards.
In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Architect.
Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such
discrepancies have been fully resolved.
3.2.1. Lumber Selection:
3.2.1.1. Select individual pieces so that knots and obvious minor defects will not
interfere with connection. Install all members with crown and tight knots in
the upper position.
3.2.1.2. Do not use lumber with end splits or checks greater than the following:
3.2.1.2.1. 2 x joists: Split length shall be less than or equal to one half
the wide face of the member.
3.2.1 2.2. Beams or headers: Split length shall be less than or equal
to the thickness of the member.
3.2.2. Erect wood framing members level and plumb. Place horizontal members laid flat, crown
side-up.
3.2.3. Construct framing members full length without splices.
Larwin Park
City Of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
FRAMING AND SHEATHING
06112-4
3.2.4.
3.2.5.
3.2.6.
3.2.7.
3.2.8.
3.2.9.
3.2.10.
3.2.1 1,
Construct double joist headers at roof openings unless shown otherwise. Frame rigidly
into joists.
Continuously bridge joists more than 8 inch depth with soid blocking, spaced eight feet
on center. Provide close fitted solid blocking at ends of members.
Predrill holes for nails when necessary to prevent splitting, maximum hole size not more
than 0.90 times nail diameter.
Drill holes for threaded fasteners as follows:
3.2.7.1. Wood Screws larger than # 14: Drill lead holes for shank and threaded
portion to 7/8 times shank and thread root diameter, respectively.
Lag screws: Drill lead hole same diameter and depth as shank; drill hole for
threaded portion to 0.7 times shank diameter.
Bolts: Oversize hole by not more than 1/16 inch.
3.2.7.2.
3.2.7.3.
Re-tighten all threaded fasteners before covering-up.
Cutting:
3.2.9.1.
3.2.9.2.
3.2.9.3.
3.2.9.4.
Provide all cutting of framing members to accommodate structural
members, piping, conduit, ducts, and building system equipment and
fixtures.
Obtain Architect's and Building Department approval prior to cutting of
structural framing not detailed on structural drawings.
Notching is not permitted in framing without Building Department and
Architect's written approval.
Joists over 8 inches in depth may have maximum 2 inch diameter holes
bored at the joist center and within the middle third of the span.
Framing for Connectors
3.2.10.1. Where roofing or other finish occurs, all straps, seats, bolts, and nuts which
occur on the exposed exterior face of framing shall be "let-in," dapped or
countersunk to be flush with the face of the member.
3.2.10.2. Verij, amount and method with Architect prior to proceeding.
Blocking and Backing Installation
3.2.1 1 .I, Provide solid blocking at locations necessary for fastening or installing
subsequent finish materials and/or products. Install as required to provide
flush surface in final installation.
3.2.11.2. Provide fire blocking and draft stops at all concealed framing areas and
spaces per Uniform Building Code . Fire blocking shall be solid framing
material, 2x minimum, or approved alternate.
3.2.1 1.3. Provide all wood nailers, shaped as shown or required.
Larwin Park
City Of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
FRAMING AND SHEATHING
06112 - 5
3.3. SHEATHING
3.3.1. Secure roof sheathing with face grain perpendicular to framing members with ends
staggered. Secure sheet edges over firm bearing. Attachment of roof sheathing may be
accomplished by machine nailing subject to approval of the Architect and DSA inspector.
Over-penetration of the face ply or improper maintenance of edge distances will be
cause for rejection or termination of use.
3.3.1.1. Provide 118 inch spacing between panel edges.
3.3.1.2. At horizontal diaphragms, install sheathing in minimum 4 x 8 foot full size
sheets wherever possible.
3.3.1.2.1. Where construction does not permit full size sheets, provide
minimum 2 foot wide sheathing panel dimension.
3.3.2. Place temporary protection over roof sheathing as required to protect sheathing from
delamination and splitting.
3.4. TOLERANCES
3.4.1. Location: 114 inch maximum from true position.
END OF SECTION
Larwin Park
City Of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
FRAMING AND SHEATHING
06112 - 6
I.
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
SECTION 061 80
GLUE LAMINATED STRUCTURAL UNITS
PART 1 -GENERAL
WORK INCLUDED
1.1.1 Structural glue laminated wood beams.
1 .1.2 Steel hardware and attachment brackets.
RELATED WORK
1.2.1 Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications.
1.2.2 Section 061 12 - Framing and Sheathing.
1.2.4 Section 09900 - Painting.
REFERENCES
1.3.1 AlTC - American Institute of Timber Construction.
1.3.2 ANSVAITC A190.1 and ASTM D 3737 - Design and Manufacturer of Structural Glued
Laminated Timber.
1.3.3 ASTM D 2559 - Adhesives for Structural Laminated Wood Products for Use Under
Exterior (Wet Use) Exposure Conditions.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.4.1 Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacture of glue laminated structural units
with five years minimum experience, certified by the AITC, and approved by the
Architect.
1 A.2 Grade Stamp: Grade stamp each beam with AlTC Quality Mark or other approved grade
marking.
SU BM ITTALS
1 s.1 Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Section 01330.
1.5.2 Indicate framing system, sizes and spacing of members, loads and cambers, bearing
and anchor details, bridging and bracing
1.5.3 Provide technical data on wood preservative materials, application technique, and
resultant performance information.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
1.6.1 Deliver products to site under provisions of Section 01600.
1.6.2 Store and protect products under provisions of Section 01600.
Larwin Park
City Of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
GLUE LAMINATED STRUCTURAL UNITS
06180 - 1
1.6.3 Protect members in accordance with AlTC requirements; bundle wrap concealed beams,
individually wrap beams that will be exposed to view.
1.6.4 Leave individual wrapping in place until finishing occurs. Open ends of wrapping and
loosen at job site to facilitate air circulation.
2. PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GLUE LAMINATED TIMBER: INTERIOR/EXTERIOR CONCEALED APPLICATIONS
2.1.1 Lumber: Douglas Fir-Larch, per UBC, Chapter 23, Table 23-1 C-1.
2.1.2 Grade: Industrial Appearance Grade.
2.1.3 Finish: Smooth Surfaced.
2.1.4 Adhesive: Exterior wet use type, complying with ASTM D 2559; for wet use condition.
2.1.5 Structural Rating: 24f-V4 at simple spans, 24f-V8 at cantilever and continuous spans.
2.1.6 Condition of use: Wet.
2.2 FABRICATION
2.2.1 Fabricate glue laminated structural members in accordance with Section 2312.6, UBC
and ANSllAlTC Standard A190.1 for specified Grade.
2.2.2 Verify dimensions and site conditions prior to fabrication.
2.2.3 Cut and fit members accurately to length to achieve tight joint fit.
2.2.4 Fabricate member with camber built in.
2.2.5 Do not splice or join members in locations other than that indicated, without permission
of Architect, and Structural Engineer.
2.2.6 Fabricate steel hardware and connections with joints neatly fitted, welded, and ground
smooth.
2.2.7 Separate all end joints in adjacent laminations in accordance with ANSVAITC A1 90.1 and
ASTM D 3737.
2.2.7.1 Areas requiring 6 inch spacing are shown on drawings.
2.2.8 Control moisture content at time of gluing and fabrication in accordance with Section
2312.6 and as follows:
2.2.8.1 Maximum moisture content at time of gluing: 12 percent
2.2.8.2 Minimum moisture content at time of gluing: 7 percent.
2.2.8.3 Range of moisture content of laminations assembled into a single
member at time of gluing: 5 percent.
2.2.9 Notches: No notching or boring permitted, unless specifically detailed.
2.2.10 Dry-use type adhesives are not permitted.
Larwin Park
City Of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037 GLUE LAMINATED STRUCTURAL UNITS
061 80 - 2
2.3
2.4
3.
3.1
3.2
3.3
OTHER MATERIALS
2.3.1 Provide all other materials, not specifically described but required for complete and
proper installation of this work, as selected by the contractor and subject to the approval
of the Architect.
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
2.4.1 Continuous fabrication inspection to be provided for under the provisions of Sections
01400 and 01410.
2.4.1 .I Glue-Laminated Timber: Section 2327.7, UBC and ANSIIAITC Standard
A190.1 for specified Grade.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
SURFACE CON DlTlONS
3.1 .I Inspection
3.1 .I .I Prior to work of this section, carefully inspect previously installed work.
Verify all such work is complete to the point where this installation may
properly commence.
Verify that work of this section may be installed in strict accordance with
the original design, all pertinent codes and regulations, and all pertinent
portions of the referenced standards.
3.1 .I .2.1
In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Architect.
Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such
discrepancies have been fully resolved.
3.1 .I .2
Verify sufficient end bearing area is provided.
3.1 .I .3
3.1 .I .4
PREPARATION
3.2.1
ERECTION
3.3.1
3.3.2
Coordinate placement of bearing support items.
Set structural members level and plumb, in correct positions.
Provide temporary bracing and anchorage to hold members in place until permanently
secured.
Fit members together accurately without trimming, cutting, or any other unauthorized
modification.
Tolerances of installed framing members: 1/4 inch maximum from true position.
3.3.3
3.3.4
END OF SECTION
Larwin Park
City Of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
GLUE LAMINATED STRUCTURAL UNITS 06180 - 3
SECTION 06615
CAST PLASTIC COUNTERTOPS
I.
1.1.
1.2.
1.3.
1.4.
1.5.
PART 1 - GENERAL
WORK INCLUDED
1.1.1. Cast plastic countertops.
1.1.2.
RELATED WORK
1.2.1.
1.2.2.
REFERENCES
I .3.1.
1.3.2. National Sanitation Foundation standards.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.4.1.
Coordination with fixtures and components specified in other sections.
Section 06410 - Custom Casework.
Division 15 - Mechanical Work - Plumbing Fixtures.
WIC - Woodwork Institute of California, Manual of Millwork, Current Edition.
Provide fabricator specializing in the fabrication of specified cast plastic countertops, be
accredited by manufacturer, with a minimum of five years documented experience,
including completion of projects of similar scope within past 12 months.
Perform work in accordance with WIC Manual of Millwork, Section 15 Casework, Plastic
Covered Casework; Section 17D; and as required by this Section.
Issue a WIC Certified Compliance Certificate prior to delivery certifying that products fully
meet all the requirements of the WIC Grade specified.
After completion, issue a WIC Certified Compliance Certificate for installation certifying that products fully meet all the requirements of the WIC Grade specified.
Review all fixtures and fittings specified in other sections to verify fit and alignment. Cast
plastic countertop fabricator is responsible for coordinating all components, including
plumbing and electrical components, into a fully functional assembly complying with
specified criteria.
1.4.2.
1.4.3.
1.4.4.
1.4.5.
SUBMITTALS
1.5.1.
1 S.2.
Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Section 01330.
Include materials, component profiles, fastening methods, assembly methods, joint
details, accessory listings, and schedule of finishes. Include seaming plan of all
countertop materials.
Coordinate with fittings, including sinks and faucets specified in other Sections,
Submittals shall include WIC Certified Compliance Label.
1.5.3.
1.5.4.
Larwin Park
City Of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
CAST PLASTIC COUNTERTOPS
06615 - 1
1.6. -
I .7.
1.8.
2.
2.1,
-
1.5.5.
DELIVERY AND STORAGE
1.6.1.
Submit samples under provisions of Section 01330.
Deliver work in this section only at such time as the work is ready and suitable for
installation.
Comply with requirements of WIC Technical Bulletin 419-R, Recommended Care and
Storage of Architectural Millwork and manufacturers published criteria.
1.6.2.
CONTRACTORS GUARANTY
1.7.1. Provide Owner with written Guarantee per Section 00630 on Contractor's letterhead, and
signed by General Contractor and cast plastic fabricator.
Provide guarantee for a time period of three years, commencing from the date of final
acceptance of the project.
Provide guarantee against defects in fabrication and performance, including cracking
and spalling of surface from contact with hot or cold materials, and against staining in
excess of the specified limits.
Restore the affected areas to the standard of the original specifications as soon as
weather permits.
1.7.2.
I .7.3.
1.7.4.
MANUFACTURERS WARRANTY
1.8.1. Provide Owner with manufacturers commercial guarantee written on company
letterhead, warranting repair or replacement of cast plastic components.
Provide warranty covering cost of labor in such repair or replacement activities.
Provide warranty against manufacturing defects for a period of 10 years after installation.
1.8.2.
I .8.3.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
CAST PLASTIC COUNTERTOP
2.1 .I. Manufacturer: Dupont Corian, as distributed by Pinnacle Products, phone (909)-466-
9969, or equal.
2.1.2. Series: Corian Sierra
2.1.3. Configuration:
2.1.3.1. Thickness: Minimum 1/2 inch, with additional thickness as shown on
drawings.
Edge: As shown on drawings.
Splash: As shown on drawings.
2.1.3.2.
2.1.3.3.
2.1.4. Product and Performance Characteristics:
2.1.4.1.
2.1.4.2.
Tensile Strength: 6,000 psi per A.S.T.M. Method D 638.
Flexural Strength: 7,890 psi per A.S.T.M. Method D 790.
Larwin Park
City Of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
CAST PLASTIC COUNTERTOPS
06615 - 2
2.1.4.3. Hardness: 94 per A.S.T.M. Method D 785, Rockwell M and 55 on Barcol
I m presser.
2.1.4.4.
2.1.4.5.
2.1.4.6.
2.1.4.7.
2.1.4.8.
2.1.4.9.
2.1.4.1 0.
2.1.4.1 1.
2.1.4.12.
Water Absorption: Per A.S.T.M. Method D 570.
% by weight, 24 Hours 0.04
Oh by weight, long term 0.4
Specific Gravity: 1.8 solid, 1.69 Sierra color
High Temperature Resistance: No change per NEMA LD-3-3.6.
Boiling Water Surface Resistance: No change per NEMA LD-3-3.5.
Weatherability: No change per ASTM D 1499, 1000 hours.
Ball Drop Resistance: No breakage from 112 pound ball, 144 inch drop, 1/2
material per NEMA LD3-3.03 procedure.
Service temperature range: 500 degrees F.
2.1.5. Chemical Reagent Resistance: After exposure to the reagents contained in specified
manufacturers published literature, there shall be no permanent marring or crazing of
surface.
2.1.6. Fire, Life Safety and Habitability Criteria:
2.1.6.1. Flame Spread: Maximum value of 20, 114 inch thickness, per ASTM E 84.
2.1.6.2. Smoke Developed: Maximum value of 15, 314 inch thickness, per ASTM E
84.
2.1.6.3. Toxicity: Maximum value of 99 grams, solid colors and 66 grams Sierra
colors per Pittsburgh Protocol or approved equivalent.
2.1.6.4. Disinfection Ability: Demonstrated ability to remove HIV from surface.
2.1.6.5. Mold and Fungus Resistance: No mold or fungus growth after 6 month
exposure.
2.1.7. Accessories :
2.1.7.1. Adhesives: Color matched adhesive as recommended by manufacturer.
2.1.7.2. Sealants: Silicone type, acid resistant, as recommended by top
manufacturer for fixture applications.
2.1.8. Color: Sandstone
2.2. OTHER MATERIALS
2.2.1. Provide all other materials, not specifically described but required for complete and
proper installation of this work, as selected by the contractor and subject to the approval
of the Architect.
Larwin Park
City Of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
CAST PLASTIC COUNTERTOPS
06615 - 3
3. PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1. SURFACE CONDITIONS -
3.1 .I. Inspection
3.1 .I .I.
3.1 .I .2.
3.1.1.3.
3.1 .I .4.
Prior to work of this section, carefully inspect previously installed work.
Verify all such work is complete to the point where this installation may
properly commence.
Verify that work of this section may be installed in strict accordance with the
original design, all pertinent codes and regulations, and all pertinent portions
of the referenced standards.
In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Architect.
Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such
discrepancies have been fully resolved.
3.2. INSTALLATION
3.2.1. Set and secure countertops in accordance with details on drawings.
3.2.2. Set all counters level, square and in true alignment. Counters shall fit tightly to walls and
upon completion of installation shall show no marks, indentations, or other defects.
Furnish all fillers, trim and molding required for finished installation.
Install countertops in accordance with manufacturer's procedures and recommendations.
3.2.3.1. Install tops with maximum 1/8 inch seam. Shim as required to provide level
surface. Install in order from one end or side.
3.2.3. -
3.2.3.2. Butter adhesive into all seam joints. Tool flush and tight to surface.
3.3. CLEANING
3.3.1. Clean counters and fixtures per Section 01 770.
Larwin Park
City Of Carlsbad NTD # 2002-0037
END OF SECTION
CAST PLASTIC COUNTERTOPS
06615 - 4
SECTION 071 90
WATER REPELLENT COATING
1. PART I - GENERAL
I .I. WORK INCLUDED
1.1.1. Water repellent coating to exterior exposed concrete masonry surfaces that do not
receive paint or plaster finish.
1 .I .2. Water repellent coating to exterior cast stone and cast-in-place concrete surfaces.
1.2. RELATED WORK
1.2.1. Section 0331 0 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.
1.2.2. Section 04810 - Reinforced Unit Masonry Systems
1.2.3. Section 09900 - Painting.
1.3. QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.3.1. Coating Systems Manufacturer: Company specializing in VOC approved water repellent
systems with three years minimum experience.
1.3.2. Applicator: Company specializing in application of specified water repellent coating, with
3 years minimum documented experience and approved by manufacturer.
1.4. SUBMITTALS
1.4.1. Submit product data under provisions of Section 01 330.
1.4.2. Include details of product description, tests performed, limitations to coating, cautionary
procedures required during application, and chemical properties, including percentage of
solids.
1.4.3. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 01 330.
1.5. ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
1 51. Do not apply coating when ambient air and surface temperature is lower than 45 degrees
F or higher than 100 degrees F.
1.6. WARRANTY
1.6.1. Contractor's Guarantee
1.6.1 .I. Provide Owner with written Guarantee per Section 00630 on Contractor's
letterhead, and signed by General Contractor and water repellent coating
system subcontractor.
Larwin Park
City Of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
I .6.1.2. Provide guarantee for a time period of five years, commencing from the date
of final acceptance of the project.
WATER REPELLENT COATING
07190 - 1
1.6.1.3. Make inspections and emergency repairs to defects or leaks in the roof
system within twenty-four (24) hours of receipt of notice from the Owner,
Restore the affected areas to the standard of the original specifications as
soon as weather permits.
1.6.1.4.
1.6.2. Manufacturers Guarantee:
1.6.2.1. Provide Owner with manufacturers written guarantee complying with the
following criteria:
1.6.2.1.1. Type: Unlimited dollar amount of recovery for material
necessary to maintain surfaces system in a watertight
condition.
Term: Ten (10) years minimum 1.6.2.1.2.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
MANUFACTURERS
2.1 .l* Basis of Design: Characteristics of specific products, where named in this Section, are
indicated to establish required level of quality, appearance, and performance. The
Architect will consider comparable products by alternate manufacturers where listed, and
requests for substitutions, under the provisions of Section 0161 0.
WATER REPELLANT COATING
2.2.1.
2.2.2. Series: Weatherseal Siloxane PD.
2.2.3. Characteristics:
Manufacturer: Prosoco, Inc. phone (949)-348-9009, or approved equal.
2.2.3.1. Composition: Blended Silane/siloxane in VOC compliant water based
system.
Solids content: 7% approximately by weight.
Water Repellency: 94% minimum per ASTM C 67.
2.2.3.2.
2.2.3.3.
2.2.3.4. Accelerated Weathering: No Change.
Finish/Color: No sheen or change in substrate. 2.2.4.
OTHER MATERIALS
2.3.1. Provide all other materials, not specifically described but required for complete and
proper installation of this work, as selected by the contractor and subject to the approval
of the Architect.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
SURFACE CON DIT1 0 NS
3.1.1. Inspection
Larwin Park
City Of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
WATER REPELLENT COATING
07190 - 2
3.1 .I .I. Prior to work of this section, carefully inspect previously installed work.
Verify all such work is complete to the point where this installation may
properly commence.
3.1.1.2. Verify that work of this section may be installed in strict accordance with the
original design, all pertinent codes and regulations, and all pertinent portions
of the referenced standards.
3.1.1.3. In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Architect.
3.1.1.4. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such
discrepancies have been fully resolved.
3.2. PREPARATION
3.2.1. Remove loose particles and foreign matter.
3.2.2. Remove oil or foreign substance with a chemical solvent which will not affect coating.
3.2.3. Scrub and rinse surfaces with water and let dry.
3.2.4. Protect adjacent surfaces not scheduled to receive coating.
3.2.5. If applied on unscheduled surfaces, remove immediately, by approved method.
3.3. APPLICATION
3.3.1. Allow joints to cure a minimum of 20 days prior to coating application.
3.3.2. Apply coating in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, as modified for each
substrate and site conditions.
3.3.3. Apply number of coats necessary to achieve water repellent characteristics.
END OF SECTION
Larwin Park
City Of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
WATER REPELLENT COATING
07190 - 3
SECTION 07322
CONCRETE ROOFING TILE
1.
1.1.
1.2.
1.3.
I .4.
I .5.
PART 1 - GENERAL
DESCRIPTION
1.1.1. Concrete roofing tiles.
1 .I .2.
I .I .3. Fastening system.
1 .I .4.
RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE:
1.2.1.
1.2.2.
REFERENCES
1.3.1.
1.3.2.
1.3.3.
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
1.4.1.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
I .5.1.
Underlayment and Flashing.
Warranty, including Integrated Roofing Systems warranty.
Section 061 12 - Framing and Sheathing.
Section 07620 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim.
ASTM D 312 - Asphalt Used in Roofing.
NRCA - Roofing and Waterproofing Manual.
UL - Fire Hazard Classifications.
Comply with requirements of Uniform Building Code.
Roof Tile Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing specified products, with
minimum five years prior documented experience, including compliance with Uniform
Building Code strength criteria.
1.5.2. Applicator: Company specializing in applying tile roofing with minimum 5 years
documented experience and approved by materials manufacturer.
1.5.3. Underlayment System Manufacturer:
1.5.3.1. Be Associate Member in good standing with National Roofing Contractors
Association (NRCA) for at least five (5) years.
Be nationally recognized in the roofing, waterproofing and moisture survey
industry.
1 s.3.2.
1.5.3.3. Be approved by Owner.
1.5.3.4. Has not been in Chapter 11 bankruptcy during the last five (5) years.
Larwin Park
City Of Carlsbad NTD # 2002-0037
CONCRETE ROOFING TILE
07322 - 1
1.6.
1.7.
1.5.3.5.
1.5.3.6.
1.5.3.7.
1.5.3.8.
1.5.3.9.
1.5.3.10.
1.5.3.1 1.
1.5.3.12.
I .5.3.13.
Provide evidence of financial responsibility: Certificate of Insurance showing
Products Liability in the amount of $25 million minimum and provide an
affidavit signed by a corporate officer showing corporate net worth of $50
million minimum.
Provide a copy of Corporate Health, Safety and Welfare policy.
Manufacturer must manufacture a minimum of 70% of the materials that
they supply, by dollar volume, in facilities owned or solely leased by said
manufacturer, including equipment used in manufacturing operations..
Provide evidence of twenty (20) quarters of continuous plant inspections of
roofing manufacturing sites over the previous five (5) years by an
independent Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) as defined in
29 CFR Ch. XVll (7-1-93 Edition) from the Occupational Safety and Health
Administration (OSHA).
Be IS0 9001 registered for at least the prior five (5) years.
Furnish a service agreement /warranty as specified.
Provide Owner names of at least five (5) qualified applicators.
Employ full-time Field Technical Services Representatives for daily job-site
monitoring and production of daily reports.
Require local Field Representatives to make periodic job-site visits and
produce work quality and progress reports.
DESIGN CRITERIA
1.6.1 Roof System Design Requirements
1.6.1 .I. Unless specified otherwise, provide Roof System suitable for installation
over solid plywood sheathing.
S U 6 MI TTA LS
1.7.1.
1.7.2.
1.7.3.
Submit product data under provisions of Section 01300.
Submit product data indicating tile, underlayment, fastening system and accessories.
Provide letter of certification, signed by roofing installer, that all products used in
completed roof assembly are asbestos free.
1.7.4. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions.
1.7.5.
I .7.6.
Samples: Submit two samples of complete color range specified, full size.
Project Close-Out Report: Underlayment system manufacturer shall provide a Project
Closeout Report upon delivery of the project warranty. This report to include:
1.7.6.1. Overall Project Summary.
1.7.6.2.
1.7.6.3.
Compliance with Project Specifications and Construction Documents.
Progress reports as a result of roof inspections.
Latwin Park
City Of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
CONCRETE ROOFING TILE
07322 - 2
1.7.6.4. Job-site progress photos.
1.7.6.5. Warranty document.
1.7.6.6. Owners Manual describing maintenance and emergency repair..
1.8. PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE
1.8.1. Convene a pre-installation conference one week prior to commencing work of this
Section, under provisions of Section 01 310. Attendance by material manufacturer's
representative is mandatory.
1.8.2. Review installation procedures and coordination required with related work.
1.9. GUARANTEE
1.9.1, Contractor's Guarantee
1.9.1 .l. Provide Owner with written Guarantee per Section 00630 on Contractor's
letterhead, and signed by General Contractor and roofing system
subcontractor, against the following defects:
I .9.1 .l .l. Tile blow-off or dislodging not resulting from unauthorized
roof access.
I .9.1.1.2. Water penetration through tile system.
1.9.1.2. Provide guarantee for a time period of five years, commencing from the date
of final acceptance of the project.
1.9.1.3. Make inspections and emergency repairs to defects or leaks in the roof
system within twenty-four (24) hours of receipt of notice from the Owner.
1.9.1.4. Restore the affected areas to the standard of the original specifications as
soon as weather permits.
1.9.2. Roofing Tile Manufacturers Warranty
1.9.2.1. Provide Owner with written Warranty on manufacturers letterhead,
warranting roofing tile against defects in manufacture for a minimum of 50
years.
1.9.3. Underlayment Manufacturers Warranty and Integrated Roofing Systems Guaranty
1.9.3.1. Underlayment Manufacturer shall have in place a Quality Assurance Plus
Warranty and Service program capable of providing service and warranty
services for the underlayment system used on the work of this section, as
well as all other roofing systems specified in other sections and as listed.
1.9.3.1 .I. Underlayment manufacturer shall execute an Agreement
with the Owner in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace components of roofing system that fail in materials
or workmanship within the specified warranty period.
Failure includes roof leaks.
Larwin Park
City Of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
CONCRETE ROOFING TILE
07322 - 3
1.9.3.1.2. Warranty Agreement includes underlayment roofing
membrane, base flashings, roofing membrane accessories,
roof insulation, all sheet metal-related details, and
termination details.
1.9.3.1.3. Manufacturer will provide, at no cost to owner, the following
services in Years 2, 5, 10, 15 and 20 following the date of
Notice of Substantial Completion:
1.9.3.1.3.1. Inspection by a Technical Service
Representative and delivery of a written
inspection report documenting roof conditions.
1.9.3.1.3.2. Preventative maintenance and necessary
repairs, including splits, tears, or breaks in the
roof membrane system and flashings which threaten the integrity of the roof system and are
not exempt from coverage due to neglect,
negligence, vandalism, or other exclusion.
1.9.3.1.3.3. General rooftop housekeeping and clean-up,
subject to limits, but generally including removal
of incidental debris.
1.9.3.1.4. Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial
Completion.
1.9.3.1.5. The Warranty Agreement shall cover roofing systems for the
project as specified, including:
1.9.3.1 S.1. Section 07322 - Concrete Roofing Tile.
1.9.3.1.5.2. Section 07550 - Modified Bitumen Roofing
System.
2. PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1. MANUFACTURERS
2.1.1. Basis of Design: Characteristics of specific products, where named in this Section, are
indicated to establish required level of quality, appearance, and performance. The
Architect will consider comparable products by alternate manufacturers where listed, and
requests for substitutions, under the provisions of Section 0161 0.
2.1.2. Manufacturer: Monier Lifetile or equal.
2.1.3. Type: One piece, flat tile.
2.1.4. Series: Monier 2000, Terra Cotta 2000 C/T, Slate finish, Color 1STCS 6978, integral
color throughout, blended mix. Surface finished tile not acceptable.
2.1.5. Characteristics
2.1.5.1. Size: 16.5 inches x 13 inches wide.
2.1.5.2. Profile: Cast flat profile, with integral waterlock edge, lugs and weather
checks, with predrilled holes at each tile.
Larwin Park
City Of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
CONCRETE ROOFING TILE
07322 - 4
2.1 53. Weight: Installed weight approximately 9 pounds per square foot.
2.1.6. Accessories:
2.1.6.1. Provide accessories required for a compete watertight installation.
2.1 -6.2. RakelHiplRidge Tile: Provide factory-made hip, rake and ridge accessory
tiles, matching field tile color and type, with predrilled fastening hole.
2.1.6.3. Batten Extenders: Provide factory made batten extenders as required to
maintain clear flashing waterways.
2.1.6.4. Provide manufacturers recommended wind clipsllocks at each tile.
2.1.7. Approvals:
2.1.7.1. ICBO Evaluation Service Number: ER 2656.
2.1.7.2. Conform to UBC Standard 15-5.
2.1.7.3. Conform to specified strength criteria in compliance with Uniform Building
Code.
2.1.7.4. Fire Resistance Rating: Conform to Class A fire rating per UBC Standard 15-
2. Provide test data demonstrating compliance as installed over project
substrate.
2.2. UNDERLAYMENT SYSTEM
UNDERLAYMENT SHEET c 2.2.1.
2.2.1 .I. Type: Coated Trilaminate Reinforced Ply Sheet for Built-up and Modified
Bitumen Roofing Systems Modified with SBS Rubber.
2.2.1.2. Manufacturer: Tremco or equal.
2.2.1.3. Product Characteristics:
Material Property Testinq Standard
Weight ASTM D 228
Tensile Strength ASTM D 5147
Tear Resistance ASTM D 4073
Asphalt Content ASTM D 228
Asbestos Content EPA 600lM4-82-020
Elongation % Change ASTM D 5147
Larwin Park
City Of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
Performance Requirement
0.31 PSF
MD 312lCD 290 Ibflin.
MD 540lXMD 558 Ibflin.
0.10 PSF
0%
MD 7.2lXMD 8.4
CONCRETE ROOFING TILE 07322 - 5
2.3.
2.4.
2.5.
. 2.6.
2.2.2. Asphalt Bitumen: SEBS Rubber Modified Hot Melt Asphalt Adhesive complying with
ASTM D 61 52 and with the following characteristics:
Material Property Testinq Standard Performance Reauirement
Density ASTM D 70-97 8.2 lblgal
Elongation Oh Change ASTM D 412 300
2.2.3.
FASTENING SYSTEM AND BATTENS
Plastic cement: Bituminous roofing cements compatible with underlayment.
2.3.1.
2.3.2.
2.3.3.
MORTAR
2.4.1.
2.4.2.
Provide stainless steel ring shank nails, 11 gage minimum, 5/16 inch diameter head
minimum, and of sufficient length to penetrate into sheathing or support members 3/4
inch.
Battens and Roof Hip Members: Wood framing, per Section 061 12, pressure treated,
size as recommended by manufacturer.
Tile Adhesive: Ohio Sealants RT600 Pro Series or equal tile adhesive, non-staining,
suitable for concealed application and as recommended by manufacturer.
2.3.3.1. Other Fastening Systems: Use of alternate systems shall be subject to
Architect approval prior to use.
Where shown on drawings, provide mortar mix as recommended by the roofing tile
manufacturer and conforming to Uniform Building Code criteria.
Provide integral color as selected by Architect.
FLASH I NG
2.5.1. Provide dead soft 1100 alloy aluminum flashing sheet, for all vent and counterflashing
penetrations through tile. Dead soft aluminum products available from ALL Roofing
Materials, phone 1-800-625-5766, Bay City Metals, phone 800-245-9047 and Bay
Wholesale, phone 415-992-9943 . Use of lead flashing products not acceptable.
ELASTOMERIC FLASHING
2.6.1. Manufacturer: MFM Building Products, phone (714)-474-9098.
2.6.1 -1. Alternate Manufacturer: Polyken or equal.
2.6.2. Type: Rubberized Asphalt, with aluminum film facer.
2.6.3. Series: MFM "Peel and Seal".
2.6.4. Characteristics:
2.6.4.1. Thickness: 0.040 inches (40 mils) nominal.
2.6.4.2. Width: 18 inch.
2.6.4.3. Facing Color: White
Larwin Park
City Of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
CONCRETE ROOFING TILE
07322 - 6
2.7. OTHER MATERIALS
2.7.1. Provide all other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and
proper installation of tile roofing, as selected by the Contractor and subject to the approval of the Architect.
2.8. SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
2.8.1. Provide testing of concrete tile in accordance with UBC Standard 15-5.
3. PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1. SURFACE CONDITIONS
3.1 .I. Inspection
3.1.1 .I. Prior to all work of this section, carefully inspect the installed work of all other
trades and verify that all such work is complete to the point where this
installation may properly commence.
3.1 .I .2. Verify that work may be installed in complete accordance with all pertinent
codes and regulations, the original design, and the manufacturer's current
recommendations.
3.1 .I .3. In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Architect.
3.1.1.4. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such
discrepancies have been fully resolved. -
3.2. COORDINATION
3.2.1. Coordinate tile installation to minimize roof deck weather exposure.
3.2.2. Blend tile layout in accordance with manufacturers recommendations and as required to
avoid shading and streaking.
3.3. INSTALLATION
3.3.1. Underlayment and elastomeric flashing
3.3.1 .I. Install all underlayment as specified and per approved submittals.
3.3.1.2. Fasten base layer of felt underlayment horizontally over entire surface to
receive roof tile, starting with a 19 inch starter sheet and lapping succeeding
courses a minimum of 3 inches, ends a minimum of 4 inches, and hips and
valleys a minimum of 6 inches. Fasten felt with a sufficient number of
roofing nails to hold underlayment in place until roof tiles are applied.
3.3.1.3. Adhere second layer of felt in hot asphalt according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
3.3.1.4. Elastomeric flashing.
.-
3.3.1.4.1. Prepare substrate as recommended by manufacturer.
Prime and detail as required for specific conditions.
Larwin Park
City Of Carlsbad
NTD ## 2002-0037
CONCRETE ROOFING TILE
07322 - 7
3.3.2.
Larwin Park
City Of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
3.3.1.4.2. Install elastomeric flashing as shown on drawings. In
addition, install at ridges and roof edgelwall flashing
transitions.
3.3.1.4.3. Install membrane as an underlayment flashing, lapping all
joints shingle fashion a minimum of three inches. Detail
edge seam as recommended by manufacturer.
3.3.1.4.4. Shingle lap flashing with underlayment and flashings,
coordinating placement and sequence to assure overlapping
transitions.
3.3.1.5. Install battens as recommended by tile manufacturer and per Uniform
Building Code.
Tile Installation
3.3.2.1. Lay tile to straight lines at right angles to eaves. Center rows on roof
s u rface .
3.3.2.2. Lay tile with a minimum 3 inch headlap.
3.3.2.3. Each tile shall be fastened per Uniform Building Code, using specified
method. Provide anchors at spacing as recommended by manufacturer to
resist all applicable loads. Cover all underlayment penetrations with mastic.
3.3.2.4. Roof Tile edges and terminations
3.3.2.4.1. Fasten all tile per Uniform Building Code. Nail all rake tiles
with two nails. Provide approved nose clips at all eave
course tile.
3.3.2.4.2. Install first three courses of tiles at eaves, and all ridge, hip
and rake tiles, with concealed bead of approved roof tile
adhesive at lap.
Where tile joins ridge, fill voids with cement mortar. 3.3.2.4.3.
3.3.2.5. Use mortar sparingly and only to provide proper bedding for tiles in special
situations; unless noted otherwise, do not mortar lap joints between field
tiles.
3.3.2.6. Use mortar where required as a bedding material. Avoid slopping of mortar
onto exposed portions of the roof. Prevent accumulation of mortar.
3.3.2.7. Perform all cutting of tiles in a manner to provide neat edges and a uniformly
straight line.
3.3.2.8. Finish tile roofs as a completely weatherproof and waterproof system
requiring no further normal maintenance.
CONCRETE ROOFING TILE
07322 - 8
3.3.3. Flashing
3.3.3.1.
3.4.
3.5.
3.6.
3.3.3.2.
Install vent flashing using specified aluminum flashing minimum 8 inches
each side of vent, and extending minimum 2 inches under cover tile.
Conform to tile profile. Extend tile on upper side within 1 inch of vent.
Provide di-electric coating at all flashing conditions in contact with galvanized
metal.
Install counterflashing at tile terminations using specified soft aluminum
flashing. Conform to tile profile. Provide di-electric coating at all flashing
conditions in contact with galvanized metal.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
3.4.1. The Owner’s inspection service will provide continuous inspection of underlayment and
roof tile anchorage.
CLEAN UP
3.5.1. Promptly upon completion of this portion of the work, remove from the site all tools,
equipment, surplus materials of this section, tile ends, and debris resulting from the
concrete tile roofing installation.
EXTRA STOCK
3.6.1. Provide Owner with extra tile, as specified, sufficient to re-roof 50 square feet of surface.
In addition, provide 5 accessory tile of each type. Deliver tile to Owner as directed, in
satisfactory containers.
END OF SECTION
Lawin Park
City Of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
CONCRETE ROOFING TILE
07322 - 9
SECTION 07620
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
I.
1.1.
I .2.
1.3. _-
I .4.
PART 1 - GENERAL
WORK INCLUDED
1.1.1. Reglets and counter-flashings over bituminous base flashings.
1 .I .2. Counter-flashings.
I .I .3.
RELATED WORK
1.2.1.
1.2.2.
1.2.3. Section 09900 - Painting.
1.2.4.
I .2.5.
REFERENCES
1.3.1.
1.3.2. ASTM A 653 - Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated, (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated
Underlayments and elastomeric flashings.
Section 07322 - Concrete Roofing Tiles.
Section 07720 - Roof Accessories.
Division 15 - Mechanical Work.
Division 16 - Electrical Work.
ANSVASTM B 32 - Solder Metal.
(Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process..
ASTM A 924 - General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated by the Hot Dip
Process.
I .3.3.
1.3.4.
I .3.5.
ASTM D 4586 - Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos-Free.
FS 0-F-506 - Flux, Soldering, Paste and Liquid.
1.3.6.
1.3.7.
SUBMITTALS
NRCA (National Roofing Contractors Association)-Roofing Manual.
SMACNA - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual.
1.4.1. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Section 01330.
1.4.2. Describe material profile, jointing pattern, jointing details, fastening methods, and
installation details.
1.4.3. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 01 330.
,-
Larwin Park
City Of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
07620 - 1
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.5.1. Fabricator: Company specializing in sheet metal flashing work with 5 years minimum
experience.
STORAGE AND HANDLING
1.6.1.
1.6.2.
Store products under provisions of Section 01600.
Stack preformed and prefinished material to prevent twisting, bending, or abrasion, and
to provide ventilation.
Prevent contact with materials during storage which may cause discoloration, staining, or
damage.
1.6.3.
GUARANTEE
1.7.1. Contractor's Guarantee
1.7.1 .l, Provide Owner with written Guarantee per Section 00630 on Contractor's
letterhead, and signed by General Contractor and flashing system
subcontractor.
Provide guarantee against the following defects for a time period of three
years, commencing from the date of final acceptance of the project.
1.7.1.2.1.
1.7.1 -2.2.
Make inspections and emergency repairs to defects or leaks in the roof
system within twenty-four (24) hours of receipt of notice from the Owner.
Restore the affected areas to the standard of the original specifications as
soon as weather permits.
1.7.1.2.
Flashing blow-off or permanent deformation from wind.
Water intrusion through flashing joints into building interior.
1.7.1.3.
1.7.1.4.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
SHEET MATERIALS
2.1 .l. Galvanized Steel.
2.1.1.1.
2.1.1.2.
Classification: Per ASTM A 653 and A 924.
Finish: Hot Dip galvanized, G90 coating.
galvanizing at all painted flashings.
Gage: As specified and shown on drawings.
Provide Paint-Grip finish over
2.1 -1.3.
UNDERLAYMENT
2.2.1.
2.2.2.
Underlayment: FS-UU-B-790, type I, grade D.
Water-Resistant Underlayment: FS-UU-B-790, Type I, grade B.
Larwin Park
City Of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
07620 - 2
2.3. ELASTOMERIC FLASHING -TYPE 1
2.3.1.
2.3.2.
2.3.3.
2.3.4. Characteristics:
Manufacturer: MFM Building Products, phone (714)474-9098, or equal.
Type: Rubberized Asphalt, with aluminum film facer.
Series: MFM "Peel and Seal".
2.3.4.1.
2.3.4.2. Width: 18 inch.
2.3.4.3. Facing Color: White
Thickness: 0.040 inches (40 mils) nominal.
2.4. ACCESSORIES
2.4.1. Fasteners: Galvanized steel with soft neoprene washers at exposed fasteners. Finish
exposed fasteners same as flashing metal.
Sealant: Type specified in Section 07900.
Flashing Cement: As specified in Section 07550.
Solder: ANSVASTM B 32; type with less than 0.2% lead.
2.4.2.
2.4.3.
2.4.4.
2.4.5. Flux: FS 0-F-506.
2.5. FABRICATION c
2.5.1.
2.5.2.
2.5.3.
2.5.4.
2.5.5.
2.5.6.
Provide sheet metal work as shown on Drawings and not specified under other Sections.
Fabricate as indicated. Where specific details are not shown, fabricate according to
applicable SMACNA "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" criteria.
Form sections true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from distortion or defects.
Match profiles at connections. Provide ribs, cleats, and reinforcement necessary to
make sections rigid and substantial. Allow for expansion and contraction.
Unless noted otherwise, fabricate cleats and starter strips of same material as sheet, minimum .2 inches wide, interlocked with fabrication.
Form pieces in longest practical lengths. Locate joints of fascias, roof edges, and other
sheet metal work exposed to view with respect to panel joints or other architectural
features as indicated on Drawings, or as directed by Architect.
Fabricate vertical faces with bottom edge formed outward 1/4 inch and hemmed to form
drip and cleat interlock.
Generally, provide shop joints single locked and soldered, or lapped, riveted and
soldered. Provide field joints designed to permit expansion, with joint covers or lapped
joints with "S" clips. Do not solder.
2.5.6.1. Provide all concealed stiffeners and bracing at roof edge trim, and fascia.
Larwin Park
City Of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620 - 3
2.6.
2.7.
3.
3.1.
3.2.
2.5.7. Form material with flat lock seams unless noted otherwise. Overlap seams in direction
of flow with finished width of lock seams and soldered lap seams not less than 1 inches,
and finished width of unsoldered lap seams not less than 3 inches.
Where specified, solder and seal metal joints. After soldering, remove flux. Wipe and
wash solder joints clean. Provide smooth even surface on exposed soldering on finished
surfaces.
Provide shop formed transition and corner pieces with locked and soldered corners.
Locate field joints not less than one foot nor more than three feet from actual corner.
Shortest length dimension of any corner piece leg shall not be less than one foot.
Fabricate flashing assemblies as specified in this Section and as shown on Drawings.
2.5.8.
2.5.9.
2.5.10.
FINISH
2.6.1.
OTHER MATERIALS
2.7.1.
Paint flashing applications as specified below in off-site shop location.
Provide all other materials, not specifically described but required for complete and
proper installation of this work, as selected by the contractor and subject to the approval
of the Architect.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
S U R FAC E C 0 N D IT IO NS
3.1 .I, Inspection
3.1 .?.I. Prior to work of this section, carefully inspect previously installed work.
Verify all such work is complete to the point where this installation may
properly commence.
Verify that work of this section may be installed in strict accordance with the original design, all pertinent codes and regulations, and all pertinent portions
of the referenced standards.
3.1 .I .2.1.
3.1.1.2.
Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, or vents
through roof are solidly set, cant strips and reglets in place,
and nailing strips located.
3.1.1.2.2. Verify roof membrane, elastomeric flashing, waterproof
underlayment and base flashings are in place, sealed, and
secure.
3.1.1.3.
3.1.1.4.
In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Architect.
Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such
discrepancies have been fully resolved.
PR E PARATIO N
3.2.1.
3.2.2.
Field measure site conditions prior to fabricating work.
Install starter and edge strips, and cleats before starting installation.
Larwin Park
City Of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
07620 - 4
3.2.3. Except at prefinished material specified, prime coat all counter-flashings and related
flashing assemblies. Prime paint in off-site shop location, complying with paint system
specified in Section 09900. Finish paint and touch up after installation.
3.3. INSTALLATION
3.3.1.
3.3.2.
3.3.3.
3.3.4.
3.3.5.
3.3.6.
Support all flashings with firm and stable attachments, anchored into solid backing as
required.
Fit flashings tight in place. Make corners square, surfaces true and straight in planes,
and lines accurate to profiles.
Where required by installation, solder metal joints watertight for full metal surface
contact. After soldering, wash metal clean with neutralizing solution and rinse with water.
Secure flashings in place using concealed fasteners. Use exposed fasteners only in
locations approved by Architect.
Insert flashings into reglets to form tight fit. Secure in place in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions.
Roof Membrane Flashing:
3.3.6.1. Provide and install in coordination with roofing work, all flashing, counter-
flashing, sleeves, and related components as required to provide a
watertight installation.
3.3.6.2. Set sheet metal installed on or adjoining roofing in continuous bed of
approved roofing cement.
3.4. FABRICATION SCHEDULE
3.4.1. Prefabricated and Fabricated Reglet Counterflashing:
3.4.1.1. Material and Gage: Galvanized steel, 22 gage, painted.
3.4.1.2. Finish: As specified in this Section, painted
3.4.2. Miscellaneous flashing, roof flashing, metal flashing assemblies and counterflashing:
3.4.2.1. Material and Gage: Galvanized steel
3.4.2.1 .I. Flashing with an exposed vertical face of 8" or less: 24
gage.
3.4.2.1.2. Flashing with an exposed vertical face of 8' to IO": 22 gage.
3.4.2.1.3. Flashing with an exposed vertical face of IO" to 15": 20
gage.
3.4.2.2. Finish: As specified in this Section, painted.
Larwin Park
City Of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
END OF SECTION
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
07620 - 5
SECTION 07900
JOINT SEALERS
1.
1.1.
1.2.
1.3.
1.4.
1.5.
I .6.
PART 1 - GENERAL
SECTION INCLUDES
1.1.1. Sealants and joint treatment necessary to provide a positive barrier against passage of
moisture and air.
Sealants at material joints necessary to provide closure for ease of cleaning and
maintenance.
1 .I .2.
RELATED SECTIONS
1.2.1.
1.2.2.
1.2.3.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.3.1. Qualifications: Provide adequate numbers of skilled staff, thoroughly trained and
experienced in the necessary craft and installation methods associated with the specified
products.
Section 07620 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim.
Section 081 10 - Steel Doors and Frames.
Section 09310 - Ceramic Tile.
SU BM ITTALS
I .4.1. Materials ListlProduct Data: Submit complete materials list, including catalogue data, of
all materials, equipment, and products.
Samples: Accompanying Materials List, submit two (2) samples of each type of specified
sealant, including color range available.
1.4.2.
1.4.3. Test Data:
I .4.3.1, Staining: Provide test data, performed on concrete, demonstrating no
staining or discoloration of adjacent substrate from sealant or primer.
1.4.4. Certifications: As a condition of acceptance, submit certification stating that sealants and
joint treatments are installed per submittal and are complete and ready for intended
function.
COORDINATION
1 51. Coordination: Sequence all work to assure an orderly progress in the project, without
removal of previously installed work, and so as to prevent damage to finishes and
products.
PRODUCT HANDLING
1.6.1, Protection: Use all means necessary to protect work in this section before, during and
after installation and to protect the installed work and materials of all other trades.
Larwin Park
City Of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
JOINT SEALERS
07900 - 1
1.6.2. Replacements: In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements
necessary to the approval of the Architect and at no additional cost to the Owner.
1.6.3. Product Storage: Do not retain on site any material which has exceeded the shelf life
recommended by the manufacturer.
1.7. GUARANTEE
1.7.1, Contractor's Guarantee
1.7.1 .I. Provide Owner with written Guarantee per Section 00630 on Contractor's
letterhead, and signed by General Contractor and sealant system
subcontractor.
1.7.1.2. Provide guarantee for a time period of five years, commencing from the date
of final acceptance of the project, against the following defects:
1.7.1.2.1. Adhesive or cohesive sealant joint failure.
1.7.1.2.2.
1.7.1.2.3.
Pin holes or blistering of sealant joint.
Staining of adjacent substrate or surrounding material,
1.7.1.2.4. Chalking or color change exceeding manufacturers
published data.
1.7.1.3. Make inspections and emergency repairs to defects or leaks in the sealant
system within twenty-four (24) hours of receipt of notice from the Owner.
1.7.1.4. Restore the affected areas to the standard of the original specifications as
soon as weather permits.
2.
2.1.
2.2.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
MANUFACTURERS
2.1.1. Basis of Design: Characteristics of specific products, where named in this Section, are
indicated to establish required level of quality, appearance, and performance. The Architect
will consider comparable products by alternate manufacturers where listed, and requests for
substitutions, under the provisions of Section 01610.
SEALANTS
2.2.1 0 General
2.2.1.1. All sealants for any one Type shall be the product of a single manufacturer,
suitable for the intended use, and per the following product characteristics.
2.2.1.2. Unless noted otherwise, use sealants in application as defined below.
2.2.1.3. For other applications provide products especially formulated for the
proposed use and approved in advance by the Architect.
Larwin Park
City Of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
JOINT SEALERS
07900 - 2
2.2.2. Product Characteristics
_-
2.2.2.1. Type I : Unless noted otherwise, at exterior openings, joints, material
transitions, bedding, and other conditions where anticipated joint movement
will be plus/minus 25% or less.
2.2.2.1 .I. Products: Dow Corning 795, Pecora 895, Tremco Tremsil
600, or equal.
2.2.2.2. Type 2: At all exposed metal to metal wall and roof flashing conditions and
all other conditions where anticipated joint movement will be plus/minus 25 -
50%.
2.2.2.2.1. Products: Dow Corning 795, GE Silicones Silglaze II, or
equal.
2.2.2.3. Type 3: At horizontal concrete paving joints exposed to pedestrian and
vehicular traffic, and all joints subject to immersion:
2.2.2.3.1. Products: Pecora DynaTred, Mameco Vulkem 227,
Sonneborn NP2, or equal.
2.2.2.4. Type 4: Exterior application in conjunction with wood products:
2.2.2.4.1. Tremco Dymonic, Sika Sikaflex-la, Sonneborn NP1, or
equal.
2.2.2.5. Type 5: Interior applications in conjunction with sanitary conditions (non-
food use):
2.2.2.5.1. Products: General Electric Silicone Sanitary Sealant 1702,
Dow Corning 786, Pecora 898 Sanitary Silicone Sealant, or
equal.
2.2.2.6. Type 6: Unless noted otherwise, at interior openings, joints, material
transitions and bedding, at locations shown on drawings, and other
conditions where anticipated joint movement will be 25% or less.
2.2.2.6.1. Products: Pecora 864, Dow Corning 795, Sonneborn
Omniseal, or equal.
2.2.2.7. For other applications provide products especially formulated for the
proposed use and approved in advance by the Architect.
2.2.3. Colors:
2.2.3.1. Colors for each sealant application will be selected by the Architect from
standard colors normally available from the manufacturers complete line of
running line colors, including premium and special color lines for each
specified product.
2.2.3.2. Should such standard color not be available from the approved manufacturer
except at additional charge, provide such colors at no additional cost to the
Owner.
2.2.3.3. In concealed installations, and in partially or fully exposed installations where
approved by the Architect, use standard gray or black sealant.
Larwin Park
City Of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
JOINT SEALERS
07900 - 3
AC C ESSORl ES
2.3.1. Pre-compressed Joint Filler: Where shown, provide Emseal or equal, precom pressed
joint filler material, sized for 20% compression.
2.3.2. Primers: Provide primer as specifically recommended for this installation by the
manufacturer of the sealant used and have been tested for staining, adhesion and
durability on all applicable surfaces.
2.3.3. Back-up Materials: Use only those backup materials which are specifically
recommended for this installation by the sealant manufacturer, non-absorbent and non-
staining.
Masking Tape: For masking around joints, provide an appropriate masking tape which
will effectively prevent application of sealant on surfaces not scheduled to receive it, and
which is removable without damage to substrate.
2.3.4.
OTHER MATERIALS
2.4.1. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper
installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Architect.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
SURFACE CONDITIONS
3.1 .l. Inspection
3.1.1.1. Prior to work of this section, carefully inspect previously installed work.
Verify all such work is complete to the point where this installation may
properly commence.
Verify that work of this section may be installed in strict accordance with the
original design, all pertinent codes and regulations, and all pertinent portions
of the referenced standards.
In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Architect.
discrepancies have been fully resolved.
3.1.1.2.
3.1.1.3.
3.1.1.4. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such
PREPARATION
3.2.1. Concrete and Masonry Surfaces:
3.2.1 .l.
3.2.1.2.
3.2.1.3.
3.2.1.4.
3.2.1.5.
Larwin Park
City Of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
Install only on surfaces which are dry, sound, and well brushed, wiping free
from dust.
At open joints, remove dust by mechanically blown compressed air if so
required.
To remove oil and grease, use sandblasting or wire brushing.
Where surfaces have been treated, remove the surface treatment by
sandblasting or wire brushing.
Remove laitance and mortar from joint cavities.
JOINT SEALERS
07900 - 4
3.3.
3.4.
3.2.2. Steel Surfaces:
3.2.2.1.
3.2.2.2.
3.2.2.3.
Unprimed or unfinished steel surfaces in contact with sealant:
Sandblast as required to achieve acceptable surface for bond.
If sandblasting is not practical, or would damage adjacent finish, scrape the metal or wire brush to remove mill scale and rust.
Use solvent to remove oil and grease, wiping the surfaces with clean white
rags only.
Remove protective coatings on steel by sandblasting or by using a solvent
which leaves no residue.
3.2.2.4.
3.2.2.5.
INSTALLATION OF ACCESSORY MATERIALS
3.3.1. When using backup of tube or rod stock, avoid lengthwise stretching of material. Do not
twist or braid hose or rod backup stock.
Prime joints in accordance with manufacturers recommendations.
Provide an approved bond-breaker where recommended by sealant manufacturer.
3.3.2.
3.3.3.
INSTALLATION OF SEALANTS
3.4.1.
3.4.2.
3.4.3.
3.4.4.
3.4.5.
Prior to start of installation in each joint, verify the joint type according to details on the
drawings, or as otherwise directed by the Architect, and verify that the required
proportion of width of joint to depth of joint has been secured.
Equipment:
3.4.2.1. Apply sealant under pressure with power-actuated hand gun or manually-
operated hand gun, or by other appropriate means.
3.4.2.2. Use guns with nozzle of proper size, and providing sufficient pressure to
completely fill the joints as designed.
3.4.2.3. Do not use pourable sealant installation method at hardscape paving joints.
Thoroughly and completely mask joints where the appearance of primer or sealant on
adjacent surfaces would be objectionable.
Install the sealant in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations,
thoroughly filling joints to the recommended depth.
3.4.4.1. Use of sealant dams contained within the hardscape joint is not permitted.
Install sealant without interruption from end to end of joint.
Tool joints to the profile shown on the Drawings, or as otherwise required if such profiles
are not shown on the Drawings.
3.4.5.1. Tool joints to a smooth and consistent transition.
strings, or surface tooling marks in sealant.
Do not leave ripples,
Larwin Park
City Of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
JOINT SEALERS
07900 - 5
3.4.6. Unless otherwise specified, at all sound rated wall and floor assemblies, seal
penetrations and recessed items through the floors and walls with Type 7 sealant. Seal
all penetrations such as electrical device cover plates, pipes, fire extinguisher cabinets
and similar penetrations in room surfaces.
3.5. CLEANING
3.5.1. Remove masking tape immediately after joints have been tooled.
3.5.2. Clean adjacent surfaces free from sealant as the installation progresses, using solvent or
cleaning agent recommended by the manufacturer of the sealant used.
3.5.3. Upon completion of the work of this Section, promptly remove from the job site all debris,
containers, and surplus material derived from this portion of the Work.
Larwin Park
City Of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
END OF SECTION
JOINT SEALERS
07900 - 6
1.
1.1.
1.2.
1.3.
1.4.
SECTION 081 10
STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART I - GENERAL
WORK INCLUDED
1.1.1. Hollow metal rolled steel doors. non-rated for fire resistance.
1 .I .2. Hollow metal rolled steel door frames, non-rated for fire resistance.
RELATED WORK
I .2.1. Section 04810 - Reinforced Unit Masonry System
1.2.2. Section 08710 - Door Hardware.
I .2.3. Section 09900 - Painting.
REFERENCES
1.3.1. ASTM A 366 - Specification for Commercial Steel Sheet, Carbon (0.15 Percent), Cold-
Rolled.
1.3.2. ASTM A 653 - Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-
Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process.
1.3.3. ANSVSDI-1 00 - Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames.
1.3.4. ANSVSDI-119 - Performance Test Procedures for Steel Door Frames and Anchors.
I .3.5. ANSbA250.4 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Physical Endurance, Steel
Doors and Frames.
1.3.6. ANSI-A250.10 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel
Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames.
1.3.7. ANSI A 250.6 - Hardware on Steel Doors (Reinforcement-Application).
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.4.1. Hollow metal supplier shall be a qualified direct distributor of specified products.
1.4.1.1. Distributor shall employ a an A.H.C./C.D.C. or person of equivalent
experience who will be available at reasonable times to consult with the
architect and owner regarding all matters affecting work of this section.
1.4.2. Hollow metal supplier shall be a member of the Steel Door Institute or Hollow Metal
Manufacturers Association Division of NAAMM.
I .4.3. Provide written certification all doors conform to Level 'A criteria of ANSI-A-151 .I,
including testing to 1,000,000 operating cycles.
Larwin Park
City Of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
08110 - 1
1.5.
1.6.
1.7.
1.8.
2.
2.1.
S U BM ITTALS
1 .&I. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Section 01330.
1 S.1 .I. Provide shop drawings illustrating system and component dimensions,
components within assembly, framed opening requirements and tolerances,
anchorage and fasteners; glass and infills; and affected related work.
1 51.2. Provide, where required, shown or specified, custom modifications to
manufacturers or referenced standard, including material gage, anchorage,
dimension and fabrication criteria.
1 51.3. Provide manufacturer's installation instructions and listing requirements.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND PROTECTION
1.6.1. Deliver doors and frames cardboard wrapped, crated, palletized or otherwise protected
during transit and site storage.
1.6.2. Inspect doors and frames upon delivery for damage. Minor damage may be repaired
provided refinished items are equal in all respects to new work and accepted by the
Architect; otherwise remove and replace damaged items.
1.6.3. Store doors and frames at the building site in a dry secure place.
1.6.3.1. Place units on minimum 4 inch high wood blocking.
1.6.3.2. Store in vented shelters.
1.6.3.3. If cardboard wrapper on door becomes wet, remove carton immediately,
1.6.3.4. Provide 1/4 inch spaces between stacked doors to promote air circulation
SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
1.7.1. Order and deliver all doors and frames so as not to delay progress of work of other
sections.
COORDINATION
1.8.1, Coordinate work of this Section with other directly affected Sections involving
manufacturer of any internal reinforcement for door hardware.
I .8.1 .I. In particular, coordinate door preparation in accordance with applicable
regulatory and trade standards specified.
1.8.2. Review all details and conditions prior to fabrication.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
STEEL DOORS
2.1 .I. Manufacturer: Characteristics of specific products manufactured by Curries Company
are indicated to establish required level of quality, appearance, and performance. The
Architect will consider comparable products by alternate manufacturers listed in this
Section, and requests for substitutions, under the provisions of Section 01610.
Larwin Park
City Of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
08110-2
2.1 .I .I. Acceptable Alternate Manufacturers: Amweld, Ceco, Steelcraft, or equal.
2.1.2. T y pelSeries:
2.1.2.1. Type: Flush, Hollow metal, with core material as specified.
2.1.2.2. Series: Series 707/707L.
2.1.2.2.1. Style: As shown on drawings.
2.1.3. Construction:
2.1.3.1. Grade: Grade Ill per SDI 100.
2.1.3.2. Material: Cold Rolled Steel per ASTM A 366.
2.1.3.3. Thickness: 1-314 inch.
2.1.3.4. Face Sheet Gauge: 16 gage.
2.1.3.5. Edge Seams: Continuously welded and ground smooth. Filler not
acceptable.
2.1.3.6. Core: Provide foamed in place polyurethane core, minimum 1 .O pcf density,
R value of 12.5.
2.1.3.7. Louvers: As specified in this Section.
2.1.4. Finish: Hot Dip Galvanized finish per ASTM A 653, A 60 classification.
2.2. STEEL DOOR FRAMES
2.2.1. Manufacturer: Characteristics of specific products manufactured by Curries Company
are indicated to establish required level of quality, appearance, and performance. The
Architect will consider comparable products by alternate manufacturers listed in this
Section, and requests for substitutions, under the provisions of Section 01610.
2.2.1 .I. Acceptable Alternate Manufacturers: Amweld, Ceco, Steelcraft, or equal.
2.2.2. Type/Series:
2.2.2.1. Type: Unless noted otherwise, wrap around, double rabbet, flush frames.
2.2.2.2. Series: M Series Frame.
2.2.3. Construction:
2.2.3.1. Material: Cold Rolled Steel per ASTM A 366.
2.2.3.2. Face Dimension: 2 inches, unless otherwise shown on drawings.
2.2.3.3. Gage16 gage,
2.2.3.4. Gasketingmeatherseal: As specified in this Section.
Larwin Park
City Of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
08110 - 3
2.2.4. Finish:
2.2.4.1.
2.2.4.2.
2.2.5. Anchors:
2.2.5.1,
2.2.5.2.
2.3. FAB RI CAT1 0 N
2.3.1. General
2.3.1.1,
2.3.1.2.
At exterior frames, provide Hot Dip Galvanized finish per ASTM A 653, A 60
classification.
Provide bituminous paint coating at interior surface of grout filled frames.
Provide minimum 18 gage head and jamb anchors suitable for wall condition
and in configuration for welded in place installation.
Provide masonry T-Anchors at masonry walls. Wire anchors not acceptable.
Fabricate all doors and frames in accordance with S.D.I.-100 except where
more stringent requirements are specified.
Supply only doors and frames manufactured by a single manufacturer.
2.3.2. Door Construction
2.3.2.1.
2.3.2.2.
2.3.2.3.
2.3.2.4.
2.3.2.5.
2.3.2.6.
Unless otherwise required by hardware specified in other sections, bevel
vertical lock edges 1/8 inch in 2 inches.
Door lock edge reinforcing: one-piece, full height 14 gage channel.
Closer reinforcing: one-piece, minimum 12 gage plate.
Door hinge edge reinforcing: one-piece, full height 14 gage channel, formed
and tapped for hinges.
Weld both hinge and lock channels to each door face sheet.
Provide minimum 16 gage top and bottom channels, flush or inverted, and
welded to face sheets.
2.3.2.6.1. Close tops of outswinging exterior doors flush by the
addition of steel top channel filler.
2.3.3. Frame Construction
2.3.3.1. Weld all frames and grind smooth. Provide continuous flush welds. Repair
specified finish. Provide continuous weld at sill condition of all openings.
2.3.3.2. Provide temporary shipping bars for protection from damage during transit
and handling.
2.3.3.3.
2.3.3.4.
Remove temporary spreaders before setting frames.
Supply welded in mortar guards at all hardware cutouts in frames built into
masonry or grouted.
Larwin Park
City Of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
08110 -4
2.3.4. Frame Anchors
2.3.4.1. Wall anchors for masonry construction:
2.3.4.1 .I. Provide galvanized anchors at exterior or masonry
conditions.
2.3.4.1.2. Provide masonry anchors, adjustable, flat, corrugated or
perforated 'T' shaped anchors with leg not less than 2
inches wide by 10 inches long. Use of wire type not
acceptable.
2.3.4.2. Provide frame jamb anchors at 30 inches on center (or fractional portion) on
each jamb.
2.3.4.3. Floor anchors:
2.3.4.3.1. Where access to back of frame is possible, provide angle
clip type, 16 gage minimum, welded to the bottom of each
jamb.
2.3.5. Hardware Preparation
2.3.5.1.
2.3.5.2.
2.4. DOOR LOUVERS
Reinforcement: reinforce components for hardware installation in accord
with ANSI A250.6.
2.3.5.1 .I.
2.3.5.1.2.
2.3.5.1.3.
2.3.5.1.4.
Provide 'box' type lock reinforcing, minimum 16 gage.
Provide minimum 7 gage hinge reinforcing, welded to frame.
Provide minimum 12 gage closer reinforcement.
Provide minimum 14 gage reinforcement at other hardware
locations.
Locate factory prepared hardware locations in compliance with
"Recommended Locations for Builders' Hardware for Standard Steel Doors
and Frames", as adopted by The Steel Door Institute.
2.4.1. Manufacturer: Air Lover, Anemostat or equal.
2.4.1 .I. For purpose of establishing required level of quality, characteristics of
products manufactured by Anemostat are specified.
2.4.2. T y pelseries :
2.4.2.1. Type: Ventilation Louver, Non-Vision, Non-Rated
2.4.2.2. Series - Exterior Doors: Series PLSL
2.4.3. Construction:
2.4.3.1. Material: Cold Rolled Steel per ASTM A 366.
2.4.3.2. Face Dimension: 1-118 inches.
Larwin Park
City Of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
081 10 - 5
2.4.3.3. Gage - PLSL: 18 gage frame, 18 gage blades, with 12 gage security face
plate.
2.4.3.4. Fasteners: Spanner Head.
2.4.3.5. Screen: 18-14 mesh insert, galvanized, attached to interior surface of split
louver.
Free Air Criteria: Provide minimum 50% free air flow. 2.4.3.6.
2.4.4. Finish:
2.4.4.1.
GASKET AND WEATHERSEAL
2.5.1.
OTHER MATERIALS
2.6.1,
Provide Hot Dip Galvanized finish per ASTM A 525, G 90 classification.
,Manufacturer: Type 1 sealant per Section 07900.
Provide all other materials, not specifically described but required for complete and
proper installation of this work, as selected by the contractor and subject to the approval
of the Architect.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
SURFACE CON D IT1 0 N S
3.1 .I. Inspection
3.1 .I .I.
3.1.1 2.
3.1 .I .3.
3.1 .I .4.
Prior to work of this section, carefully inspect previously installed work.
Verify all such work is complete to the point where this installation may
properly commence.
Verify that work of this section may be installed in strict accordance with the
original design, all pertinent codes and regulations, and all pertinent portions
of the referenced standards.
In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Architect.
Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such
discrepancies have been fully resolved.
INSTALLATION
3.2.1. Set all frames in accord with S.D.1.105 and as specified.
3.2.1 .I.
Set welded frames in position prior to beginning wall and partition work. Brace frames
until permanent anchors are set.
3.2.2.1.
3.2.2.2.
Set anchors for frames as work progresses. Install anchors at hinge and strike levels.
Use of wire tie method is not acceptable.
3.2.2.
Grout fill all voids at all frames at masonry walls.
Use of KD frames not permitted.
3.2.3.
Larwin Park
City Of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
081 10 - 6
3.2.3.1. Where frame is accessible from back, install sill/floor anchors to slab or floor
assembly.
3.2.4. Use temporary setting spreaders at all locations. Use intermediate spreaders to assure
proper door clearances and header braces for grouted frames.
3.3. DOOR INSTALLATION
3.3.1. Install hollow metal doors in frames using specified hardware.
3.3.2. Clearance at edge of doors:
3.3.2.1.
3.3.2.2. Sills with thresholds: 118 inch above threshold.
Between door and frame at head and jambs: 118 inch.
3.4. ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING
3.4.1. Remove dirt and excess sealants, mortar, or glazing compounds from exposed surfaces.
3.4.2. Adjust moving parts for smooth operation. Use shims if necessary to allow for proper
closing.
3.4.3. Where approved by Architect, fill all dents, holes, and similar defects with epoxy metal
filler. Where required by Architect, fill all dents, holes and similar defects with weld
material. After filling, grind smooth and flush with adjacent surface. Provide approved
zinc rich primer at all galvanized products.
3.4.4. Touch up abrasions with primer.
END OF SECTION
Larwin Park
City Of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
08110 - 7
SECTION 0831 0
ACCESS DOORS
I.
1.1.
1.2.
1.3.
1.4.
2.
2.1.
.-
PART I - GENERAL
WORK INCLUDED
1.1.1. Access doors and frames.
RELATED WORK
1.2.1.
1.2.2.
1.2.3.
I .2.4.
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
1.3.1. Manufacture fire rated access doors and frames to conform to UL 1OB and UBC
Section 04810 - Reinforced Unit Masonry System.
Section 061 12 - Framing and Sheathing.
Section 09260 - Gypsum Board System.
Section 09900 - Painting.
Standard 7-2.
1.3.2. Provide labels indicating rating.
SUBMITTALS
1.4.1.
1.4.2.
Submit product data under provisions of Section 01 330.
Submit schedule indicating location of access panels per Article 2.1 below. Provide shop
drawings defining clearances and alignment with other finish materials and components,
including light fixtures, mechanical air registers, and related items.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
ACCESS DOOR UNITS
2.1 .I * Manufacturer: Characteristics of specific products manufactured by Karp, Inc. are
indicated to establish required level of quality, appearance, and performance. The
Architect will consider comparable products by alternate manufacturers listed in this
Section, and requests for substitutions, under the provisions of Section 0161 0.
2.1 .I .I. Acceptable Alternate Manufacturers: Bar-Co, Nystrom, or equal.
2.1.2. Applications and Series
2.1.2.1. Non-Rated Wall/Ceiling: Style DSC-214M.
Non-Rated Gypsum Board Ceiling: Style RDW. 2.1.3.
2.1.4. Size and Location
Larwin Park
City Of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
ACCESS DOORS
08310 - 1
2.2.
3.
3.1.
3.2.
2.1.4.1. Provide at all locations necessary to access all electrical components,
valves, controls, damper resetting mechanisms, and other corn ponents
requiring maintenance, inspection, adjustment, or reset.
2.1.4.2. Provide panels of such size as necessary to remove largest single
component requiring maintenance or replacement. Unless noted otherwise
on drawings, provide minimum 18 x 18 inches square panel size.
2.1.5. Hinge and Locking Mechanism
2.1.5.1. Provide continuous piano hinge with stainless steel pin.
2.1 52. At areas accessible to public, provide cylinder lock with latch.
2,l S.3. Provide flush cam lock configured for screwdriver operation at all non-rated
access doors in non-public areas.
2.1 54. Provide three keys for each lock configuration.
criteria defined by Owner.
Coordinate with keying
2.1 S.5. Provide release latch accessible from push side of access panel.
2.1.6. Finish: Provide stainless steel, Type 304, Number 4 finish.
OTHER MATERIALS
2.2.1, Provide all other materials, not specifically described but required for complete and
proper installation of this work, as selected by the contractor and subject to the approval
of the Architect.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
SU RFAC E CON DIT1 ONS
3.1.1. Inspection
3.1.1 .l. Prior to work of this section, carefully inspect previously installed work.
Verify all such work is complete to the point where this installation may
properly commence.
3.1.1.2. Verify that work of this section may be installed in strict accordance with the
original design, all pertinent codes and regulations, and all pertinent portions
of the referenced standards.
3.1 .1.3. In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Architect.
3.1.1.4. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such
discrepancies have been fully resolved.
ACCESS PANEL LOCATIONS
3.2.1. Review all portions of the work, including electrical, mechanical, and plumbing systems.
3.2.2. Based on such review, provide all access panels necessary, whether shown on drawings
or not, required to comply with product characteristics defined in Article 2.1.
Lawin Park
City Of Carlsbad NTD # 2002-0037
ACCESS DOORS
08310 - 2
3.2.3. Coordinate location and alignment of access panels with finish materials and other
construction. Verify all alignment issues with Architect.
3.3. INSTALLATION -
3.3.1. Install frame plumb and level in wall and ceiling openings. Locate in proper position and
alignment, providing convenient access to concealed components.
3.3.2. Secure rigidly in place in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.3.3. Prior to closing of work, obtain Districts inspector approval of panel size and location
selection by an actual reach and removal test. Relocate or replace panels not providing
acceptable access or service capability.
END OF SECTION
Larwin Park
City Of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
ACCESS DOORS
08310 - 3
SECTION 08710
DOOR HARDWARE
.-
I.
1.1.
1.2.
1.3.
1.4.
1.5.
1.6.
PART 1 - GENERAL
WORK INCLUDED
1.1.1. Door hardware.
1 .I .2.
I .I .3.
1 .I .4.
WORK FURNISHED BUT INSTALLED UNDER OTHER SECTIONS
1 *2.1.
RELATED WORK
I .3.1.
REFERENCES
I .4.1.
1.4.2.
1.4.3.
1.4.4.
Weatherstripping and gasketing.
Thresholds, door stops, and related finish hardware.
Scope of Work in this Section: Provide all finish hardware necessary to complete work.
Furnish templates to Section 081 10 for door and frame preparation.
Section 081 10 - Steel Doors and Frames.
Builders' Hardware Manufacturers Association (BHMA) standards as specified.
Steel Door Institute (SDI) standards as specified.
Uniform Building Code (UBC), current edition.
Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAG) of 1990 criteria as
specified.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1 51. Hardware Supplier: Provide hardware from company specializing in supplying
institutional door hardware with 5 years experience and approved by hardware
manufacturer. Supplier shall have in its employ a certified Architectural Hardware
Consultant (AHC) to prepare submittals required by this Section and who shall be
available at reasonable times, during the course of the work, for project hardware
consultation to the Owner, Architect, and Contractor.
Hardware supplier shall have a maintenance and service facility located within 100 miles
of the project site. This facility will stock parts for products supplied and be capable of
repairing and replacing hardware items found defective within the warranty period.
1.5.2.
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
I .6.1. Conform to applicable requirements of the Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility
Guidelines of 1990 regarding accessibility requirements for door hardware.
1.6.2. Conform to applicable requirements of UBC regarding exiting and accessibility
requirements for door and entrance hardware.
Larwin Park
City Of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
DOOR HARDWARE
08710 - 1
1.7.
I .8.
1.9.
1 .I 0.
CERTIFICATIONS
1.7.1. Architectural Hardware Consultant shall inspect preparation and initial installation of each
type of hardware condition.
1.7.2. Architectural Hardware Consultant shall inspect the completed installation and certify that
hardware and installation has been furnished and installed in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions and as specified.
S U BM I TTALS
1.8.1. Submit schedule and product data under provisions of Section 01 330.
1.8.2. Provide seven (7) copies of hardware schedule showing each application, the quantity
required, part numbers and finish of each item.
1.8.2.1, Architects review of such schedule does not relieve the Contractor of
providing all hardware required for the Work, whether or not such hardware
was inadvertently omitted from Submittal. No extra cost will be allowed for
changes or corrections necessary to facilitate the proper installation of
hardware.
1.8.3. Accompanying schedules, provide two (2) manufacturer's brochures of each item
specified and scheduled, indicating function, finish, dimensions, and related features. No
hardware schedules will be accepted for review without submission of such brochure
package.
1.8.4. When alternate manufacturers are proposed by contractor, provide two brochures of
originally specified item, marked to identify original specified item.
1.8.5. Submit only manufacturers specified as approved alternates.
1.8.6. Provide samples indicating hardware design and finish when required by Architect.
1.8.7. Provide shop drawings showing all boxes and/or other support components of hardware
assemblies enclosed or embedded in construction.
C 00 R D I N AT IO N
1.9.1. Coordinate work of this Section with other directly affected Sections involving
manufacturer of any internal reinforcement for door hardware.
I .9.1 .I. In particular, coordinate door preparation in accordance with applicable
regulatory and trade standards specified.
1.9.2. Review all details and conditions prior to ordering hardware. If door hand is changed
during construction, coordinate and change all hardware as necessary at no cost to the
Owner.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
1 .lO,l. Submit operation and maintenance data under provisions of Section 01770.
1 .I 0.2. Include data on operating hardware, lubrication requirements, and inspection procedures
related to preventative maintenance. .
Larwin Park
City Of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
DOOR HARDWARE
08710 - 2
1 .I 1. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
1 .I 1 .I. Deliver products to site, store and protect under provisions of Section 01600.
1 .I 1.2. Package hardware items individually; label and identify package with door opening code
to match hardware schedule.
1.12. MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
I .12.1. Provide special wrenches and tools applicable to each different or special hardware
component.
1.12.2. Provide maintenance tools and accessories supplied by hardware component
manufacturer.
1.13. WARRANTY AND GUARANTY
1.13.1. Provide warranty from hardware supplier against all defects on all hardware as follows:
1.13.1 .I. Closers: Ten years.
1.13.1.2. Exit Devices: Three years.
1.13.1.3. Hinges: Life of the building.
1.13.1.4. All other hardware: Two years.
1.13.2. CONTRACTORS GUARANTEE
1.13.2.1. Provide the Owner with a guarantee, in Architect approved form, against the
following specific defects or failures for a period of three (3) years after
Notice of Substantial Completion:
1 .I 3.2.1 .I. Loose or misaligned components, resulting in the inability for
the hardware assembly to function as intended or in
compliance with applicable regulations.
1.13.2.1.2. Finish failure, including rust, pitting, flaking and other finish
appearance defects.
1.13.2.2. Submit Guarantee on form provided in Document 00630.
2. PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1. MANUFACTURERS
2.1 .I. Basis of Design: Characteristics of specific products, where named in this Section and
Hardware Schedule, are indicated to establish required level of quality, appearance, and
performance. The Architect will consider comparable products by alternate
manufacturers where listed, and requests for substitutions, under the provisions of
Section 01610.
2.1.2. Obtain each kind of hardware (latch and locksets, exit devices, hinges, and closers) from
one manufacturer.
Larwin Park
City Of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
DOOR HARDWARE
08710 - 3
2.2. DOOR HARDWARE CRITERIA
2.2.1 I Manufacturers:
2.2.1 .l . Hinges: Hager (HAG)Approved Alternate: Stanley, , Lawrence (LAW).
2.2.1.2. Locks and Latchsets: Schlage (SCH). Approved Alternate: Owners
Standard .
2.2.1.3. Cylinders: Schlage(SCH). Approved Alternate: None: Owner’s Standard.
2.2.1.4. Exit Devices: Von Duprin (VON). Approved Alternate: None.
2.2.1.5. Closer: Norton (NOR). Approved Alternate: Owners Standard
2.2.1.6. Miscellaneous hardware, including pulls and kick plates: lves (IVE).
Approved Alternate: Quality, BBW, Trirnco.
2.2.1.7. Security Pulls: lves (IVE). Trimco.
2.2.1.8. Stop, Anchors and Door Bumpers: Ives(IVE). Approved Alternate: Quality,
BBW, Trirnco (TRM).
2.2.1.9. Seals, Door Bottoms: Pemko(PEM). Approved Alternated: Reese, NGP,
Zero.
2.2.1 .lo. Continuous Hinge: Markar (MAR). Approved Equal: Hager.
2.2.2. Finishes
2.2.2.1. Finishes are identified in Schedule at end of this Section.
2.2.2.2. Where finish not shown, match finish of lockset.
2.2.2.3. Provide black colored seals unless specified otherwise.
2.2.2.4. Provide fasteners matching in finish, base material and color.
2.2.3. Door Closers:
2.2.3.1. Secure closer base or shoe to door with sex bolt fasteners, painted to match
closer finish.
2.2.3.2. Provide parallel arm design, mounted on door, push side, unless noted
otherwise.
2.2.3.3. Provide all required shoes, drop brackets, extension and long arms as
required to install in designated location.
2.2.4. Door Butts:
2.2.4.1. Unless noted otherwise, provide steel hinges, sheradized, with finish as
shown in schedule. Provide pre-finish equivalent to Stanley “K“ at all exterior
doors.
Lawin Park
City Of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
2.2.4.1.1. Unless noted otherwise, provide 3 hinges per door.
DOOR HARDWARE
08710 - 4
2.2.5.
2.2.6.
2.2.7.
2.2.8.
2.2.4.2. Unless otherwise noted or required, provide full mortise hinges, with non-
rising loose pins, ball bearing or oilite bearings, and hospital tips.
2.2.4.3. Provide set screw (NRP) type at exterior outswing doors to prevent pin
removal when door is in closed position.
2.2.4.3.1. Provide security stud hinges at exterior doors and where
indicated on the hardware schedule.
2.2.4.4. Where necessary to maintain door clearance at jamb trim, frame conditions,
door reveals and similar conditions, furnish wide throw hinges as approved
by the Architect.
Locksets, Latchsets and Strikes
2.2.5.1.
2.2.5.2.
2.2.5.3.
2.2.5.4.
2.2.5.5.
Fasteners
2.2.6.1.
2.2.6.2.
Unless noted otherwise in schedule, all locksets, latchsets, cylinders and
component parts shall be the products of a single manufacturer.
Provide strikes at all locks with curved lip of sufficient length to protect trim
and jamb. Each strike shall include wrought strike box. Provide 718 inch flat
lip strikes for pairs of doors.
Unless noted otherwise, provide lever handles at all locks, latches, and other
door hardware. Provide lever design with maximum of 112 inch handle
return, measured from door face.
Unless noted otherwise, provide 2-314 inch backset. Provide minimum 314
inch throw on all latchsets and locksets.
Provide door locks complying with Section 1003.3.1.8, Uniform Building
Code and Chapter 11 B, Part 2, Title 24, CCR.
Unless noted otherwise, provide countersunk, full thread, flat head Phillips
screw fasteners. Provide machine screws at metal substrates and wood
screws at wood substrate.
Provide lead shields or similar anchor devices for items fastened to concrete
or masonry.
Thresholds
2.2.7.1. Unless noted otherwise, provide aluminum finish thresholds, with proper
anchor, insert and fastener. Provide non-slip surface similar to Pemko's
Pem kote.
2.2.7.2. Unless shown otherwise, provide thresholds as indicated in Hardware sets.
2.2.7.3. All thresholds shall comply with Section 1003.3.1.6.1a and 1133B.2.4.1, Part
2, Title 24, CCR.
Kickplates and Accessories
2.2.8.1. Unless noted otherwise, provide stainless steel kickplates, 18 gauge, B4E
finish. Provide 12 inches high, 2 inches less than door width, with
beveledleased edges.
Latwin Park
City Of Carlsbad
NTD ## 2002-0037
DOOR HARDWARE
08710 - 5
2.3.
2.4.
3.
3.1.
2.2.9.
KEYING
2.3.1.
2.3.2.
2.3.3.
2.3.4.
2.3.5.
2.3.6.
2.3.7.
2.3.8.
2.3.9.
2.3.10.
2.2.8.2.
Seals
2.2.9.1.
2.2.9.2.
2.2.9.3.
Floor mounted door stops are prohibited where located in the path of travel.
Unless noted otherwise, provide seals complete with retainers, fasteners
and trim.
Unless noted otherwise, provide brush, silicone or polyurethane seals at all
door jamb and head conditions. Use of vinyl seals prohibited.
Where specified, provide solid neoprene seals complying with MilSpec
R6855, Class II, Grade 40. Provide sponge neoprene seals complying with
MilSpec R6130, Class II, Grade C.
In order to match established Masterkey system, furnish Schlage interchangeable
removable core cylinders, keyways to match keyway of record for each cylinder and lock.
Stamp master keys and grand master keys with a registry number. Do not stamp
"Master" or letter "M".
Stamp individual room keys with plain identification number. Do not indicate key cut.
Factory cut all keys and stamp "DO NOT DUPLICATE"
All locksets and cylinders shall be construction keyed. Provide plug and extractor system for final keyway.
Contractor and hardware supplier shall meet with the Owners Representative and
Architect to establish the keying schedule and to provide the correct grand, master, pass
and change key groups to properly operate all locking devices.
Provide record and registration system as directed by Architect.
All locksets and cylinders shall be keyed, masterkeyed, and grand masterkeyed at the
factory. Supply 4 change keys for each lock and one master and grand master for each
set of locks. Provide a bitting list and key chart for the owners permanent records.
Contractor shall be responsible for completion of keying schedule and ordering all
construction and permanent keys.
Deliver keys and permanent coreskylinders directly to Owner by registered security
shipment direct from hardware manufacturer. Hardware supplier shall not cut keys.
OTHER MATERIALS
2.4.1. Provide all other materials, not specifically described but required for complete and
proper installation of this work, as selected by the contractor and subject to the approval
of the Architect.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
SURFACE CONDITIONS
3.1.1. Inspection
Larwin Park
City Of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
__ . .
DOOR HARDWARE
08710 - 6
3.1 .I .I. Prior to all work of this section, carefully inspect the installed work of all other
trades and verify that all such work is complete to the point where this
installation may properly commence.
3.1.1.2. Verify that work of this Section may be installed in strict accordance with the
original design, all pertinent codes and regulations, and all pertinent portions
of the referenced standards.
3.1.1.3. In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Architect.
3.1.1.4. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such
discrepancies have been fully resolved.
3.2. INSTALLATION
3.2.1. Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and requirements of SDI,
ANSVNFPA 80, WIC, and BHMA. Select applicable standard based on door function,
type and regulatory criteria.
3.2.2. Install hardware using templates provided by hardware item manufacturer.
3.2.2.1. Prior to finishing door, fit hardware to door, utilizing fasteners and templates
as specified.
3.2.2.2. Remove hardware, carefully label and store. Re-install after door finish is
complete.
3.2.3. Unless noted otherwise or shown on drawings, mount hardware in accordance with the
following criteria:
3.2.3.1. Hinges:
3.2.3.1 .I. Top and Bottom Hinge: 9-98 inches to center of hinge.
3.2.3.1.2. Intermediate Hinge(s): Equally spaced between top and
bottom hinge center line
3.2.3.2. Latchset and lockset handle: 38 inches above floor. Verify manufacturers
template with door design.
3.2.3.3. Dead Locks: 44 inches.
3.2.3.4. Push Plate: 40 inches.
3.2.3.5. Door Pulls: 40 inches.
3.2.4. Adjust closer operating effort to conform to Section 1003.3.1.5, Uniform Building Code
and 11 33B.2.5, Part 2, Title 24 CCR.
3.2.4.1. Exterior Doors: 5.0 poundsforce.
3.2.5. Adjust closer delay and operating speeds to comply with requirements of Chapter 11 B,
Part 2, Title 24 CCR and the Americans with Disabilities Act Architectural Guidelines,
Article 4.1 3. IO.
Larwin Park
City Of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
DOOR HARDWARE
08710 - 7
3.2.5.1. Closer Certification: Provide written certification, signed by door closer
representative, stating all closers were inspected and installed in accordance
with specified opening force and delay requirements.
3.2.6. Install closers on push side of door with sex bolts.
3.2.7. Install thresholds in full bed of sealant at front and side edges.
3.3. DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE.
Heading 1
1 SGL DOOR AI01 EXTERIOR I WOMEN'S A101
1 SGL DOOR A102 EXTERIOR / MEN'S A102
3'0" x 7'0" x 1-314" x HMD x HMF x NON-RTD
Each Assembly to have:
1 EA
1 EA
1 EA
1 EA
1 EA
1 EA
I EA
1 EA
2 EA
1 EA
1 EA
CONTINUOUS HINGE
CLRM DEADBOLT
PUSH PLATE
DOOR PULL
CLOSER
WALL BUMPER
TOP DRIP
BOTTOM DRlPlSEAL
JAMB SEALS
HEAD SEAL
THRESHOLD
HG-315
L463R EVEREST D
VR900 NL
7500 X 6890 X 6891 X 7788 PUSH SIDE
WS407
346C
345AP
18041 CP
2891AP HEAD
SRI CLOSER BODY AND ARM
8200 8 X 16 CFTTICUT FOR PULL THRU-BOLTS
THRESHOLD PER DETAIL-PEMKOTE-MS&A
Heading 2
1 SGL DOOR A103 EXTERIOR I UTILITY A103
3'0" x 7'0" x 1-3/4" x HMD x HMF x NON-RTD
Each Assembly to have:
3 EA
1 EA
1 EA
1 EA
1 EA
1 EA
2 EA
1 EA
1 EA
HINGE
CLRM DEADBOLT
DOOR PULL
OVERHEAD HOLDER
TOP DRIP
BOTTOM DRIPISEAL
JAMB SEALS
HEAD SEAL
THRESHOLD
AB800 4-1/2 X 4 NRP
L463R EVEREST D
VR9OONL LLP
900H SERIES
346C
345AP
18041 CP
2891AP HEAD
THRESHOLD PER DETAIL-PEMKOTE-MSBA
Heading 3
1 SGL DOOR A104 EXTERIOR / STORAGE A104
Larwin Park
City Of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
630 HAG
626 SCH
630 IVE
630 GLY
628 PEM
AL PEM
628 PEM
628 PEM
628 PEM
DOOR HARDWARE
08710 - 8
630 MAR
626 SCH
630 IVE
630 IVE
689 NOR
630 IVE
628 PEM
AL PEM
628 PEM
628 PEM
628 PEM
1 SGL DOOR A105 EXTERIOR I ELECTRICAL A105
3'0 x 7'0" x I -3/4" x HMD x HMF x NON-RTD _-
Each Assembly to have:
3 EA
1 EA
1 EA
1 EA
1 EA
1 EA
2 EA
1 EA
1 EA
HINGE
CLRM DEADBOLT
DOOR PULL
OVERHEAD HOLDER
TOP DRIP
BOTTOM DRlPlSEAL
JAMB SEALS
HEAD SEAL
THRESHOLD
AB800 4-112 X 4 NRP SEC STUD
L463R EVEREST D
VR900 NL
900H SERIES
346C
345AP
18041CP
2891AP HEAD
THRESHOLD PER DETAIL-PEMKOTE-MS&A
END OF SECTION
Larwin Park City Of Carlsbad
NTD ## 2002-0037
630 HAG
626 SCH
630 IVE
630 GLY
628 PEM
AL PEM
628 PEM
628 PEM
628 PEM
DOOR HARDWARE
08710 - 9
SECTION 0931 0
CERAMIC TILE
I. PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .I. SECTION INCLUDES
1.1.1. Ceramic tile.
I .I .2. Grout, mortar bed and setting materials.
1 .I .3. Crack isolation and Cleavage membranes.
1 .I .4. Sealers.
1.2. RELATED WORK
1.2.1. Section 04810 - Reinforced Unit Masonry System.
1.2.2. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers.
1.3. REFERENCES
1.3.1. ANSI Al08.16 - Installation of Ceramic Tile on a Cured Portland Cement Mortar Bed
with Dry-Set or Latex-Portland Cement Mortar.
1.3.2. ANSI A108.5 - Ceramic Tile Installed with Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar or Latex
Portland Cement Mortar.
I .3.3. ANSI A1 08.10 - Installation of Grout in Tilework.
I .3.4. ANSI AI 18.4 - Latex-Portland Cement Mortar.
I .3.5. ANSI AI 18.6 -Ceramic Tile Grouts.
I .3.6. ANSI A136.1 - Organic Adhesives for Installation of Ceramic Tile
1.3.7. ANSI AI 37.1 - Specifications for Ceramic Tile.
1.3.8. TCA (Tile Council of America) - Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation.
1.4. SUBMITTALS
I .4.1. Samples
1.4.1.1. Submit four samples of specified colors and patterns of each tile, grout, and
accessory units of the specified items.
1.4.2. Materials ListfDetails: Accompanying samples, submit complete list of all proposed
materials.
+-
Larwin Park
City Of Carlsbad NTD # 2002-0037
CERAMIC TILE
09310 - 1
1.4.3. Certification
1.4.3.1. Prior to installation of tile in any one area, submit written certification to
Architect certifying that surfaces are properly prepared for specified
installation. See 3.1 below.
1.4.3.2. Submit certification that selected sealant specified in Section 07900 will
achieve manufacturer's published adhesion values on specified tile.
1.5. QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.5.1. Conform to ANSI AI 37. I.
1.5.2. Conform to TCA Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation methods as defined in this
Section.
1.6. QUALIFICATIONS
1.6.1. Manufacturer:
1.6.1 .I. Manufacturer shall have produced tile products of similar type for a period of
five (5) years prior to beginning work of this section, and shall have the
capability to produce the specified products to the delivery and quantity
criteria of the project.
1.6.2. Staff
1.6.2.1. Use only personnel thoroughly trained and experienced in the skills required,
have installed similar applications of the specified products within one year
prior to beginning work of this section, and are completely familiar with the
manufacturers' recommended methods of installation as well as the
requirements of this work.
1.6.2.2. Staff installing specified grout shall have attended manufacturer's training
sessions and have installed specified grout within the past 12 months prior to
beginning work.
1.7. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
1.7.1. Deliver products to site, store and protect under provisions of Section 01600.
1.8. ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
1.8.1, Do not install adhesives in a closed, unventilated environment.
1.8.2. Maintain 50 degrees F during installation of mortar materials.
2. PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1. CERAMIC TILE
2.1.1 * Basis of Design: Characteristics of specific products, where named in this Section, are
indicated to establish required level of quality, appearance, and performance. The
Architect will consider comparable products by alternate manufacturers where listed, and
requests for substitutions, under the provisions of Section 01610.
Larwin Park
City Of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
CERAMIC TILE
09310 - 2
.-
2.1.1.1. All tile for like applications shall be the product of a single manufacturer as
indicated below.
2.1.2. Product Characteristics: Wall Tile
2.1 -2.1. Manufacturer: Dal-Tile
2.1.2.2. Series: Keystones Porcelain Mosaic Ceramics.
2.1.2.3. Color: As selected by Architect from Group 2 colors.
2.1.2.4. Finish: UnGlazed.
2.1.2.5. Size: 2 x 2.
2.1.2.6. Grout Joint: Nominal 1/16 inch, all joints equal, except at expansion joint
conditions. Provide minimum 118 inch wide joint at all expansion joint
conditions.
2.2. PORTLAND CEMENT MORTAR
2.2.1, Mortar Bed: Portland Cement and sand mixture, complying with specified method and
ANSI AI 08.1 B.
2.3. PORTLAND CEMENT BOND COAT
2.3.1. Mapei UltralFlex II or equal, polymer-modified one-step mortar per ANSI A108.5 and
A1 18.4.
- 2.4. GROUT AND GROUT RELEASE
2.4.1. All grouts shall be produced by same manufacturer
2.4.2. Sanded Grouts: Mapei Ker 200 or equal. Colors as selected by Architect from
manufacturer’s standard color line.
2.4.3. Grout Release: Provide grout release as recommended by tile manufacturer.
2.5. SEALERS AND FINISHES
2.5.1. Grout Sealer: Miracle Sealants 51 1 Impregnator, phone (800)-350-1901, or equal.
2.6. ACCESSORIES
2.6.1. Sealants:
2.6.1 .I. Interior sealants: Unless noted otherwise, provide sealants as manufactured
by grout manufacturer.
2.6.1.2. Exterior Ceramic Wall Tile Sealants: As specified in Section 07900.
2.7. MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES
2.7.1. Mix and proportion cementitious materials for mortar and grout mixes in accordance with
manufacturers requirements.
2.7.1.1. Do not mix more bond coat than can be used within one hour.
Latwin Park City Of Carlsbad CERAMIC TILE
NTD # 2002-0037 09310 - 3
2.8.
2.9.
3.
3.1.
3.2.
3.3.
2.7.1.2.
ACCESSORY TILE
2.8.1, General
2.8.1.1.
2.8.1.2.
2.8.1.3.
2.8.1.4.
OTHER MATERIALS
If bond coat mixture begins to skin, discard and make new batch.
All accessory tile shall be in matching size, color, and finish.
Stretcher tile can be the standard size of the manufacturer.
Provide surface bullnose trim at all open edges or ends. Unglazed or cut tile
edges unacceptable.
Provide full curved stretcher tile for all outside corners.
2.9.1. Provide all other materials, not specifically described but required for complete and
proper installation of this work, as selected by the contractor and subject to the approval
of the Architect.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
SURFACE CON D IT1 0 N S
3.1 .l . Inspection
3.1.1.1. Prior to all work of this section, carefully inspect the installed work of all other
trades and verify that all such work is complete to the point where this
installation may properly commence.
Verify that work of this Section may be installed in strict accordance with the original design, all pertinent codes and regulations, and all pertinent portions
of the referenced standards.
In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Architect.
Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such
discrepancies have been fully resolved.
3.1.1.2.
3.1.1.3.
3.1.1.4.
MORTAR BED INSTALLATION
3.2.1.
TILE INSTALLATION
Install mortar bed in accordance with specified method and referenced ANSI standard.
3.3.1.
3.3.2.
3.3.3.
Install tile and grout in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and TCA Handbook
methods as specified.
Spread bond coat over area of installation using a notched trowel. Do NOT spread more
bond coat than can be covered with tile within manufacturers recommended time
periods.
Cut and fit tile tight to penetrations through tile. Form corners and bases neatly. Utilize
bullnose trim shapes where tile terminates at dissimilar material in the same wall plane.
Larwin Park
City Of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
CERAMIC TILE
09310 - 4
3.3.3.1. Use saw to cut tile fitting against curved surfaces or edges. Do not use
nippers.
3.3.3.2. Use drill for all pipe or conduit penetrations. Do not Split tile.
3.3.4. Place tile joints in uniform width, subject to variance in tolerance allowed in tile size.
Make joints watertight, without voids, cracks, excess mortar, or excess grout.
3.3.5. Sound tile after setting. Replace hollow sounding units.
3.3.5.1. Back-butter all exterior tile installations.
3.3.6. Allow tile to set for a minimum of 48 hours prior to grouting, or as recommended by
mortar manufacturer.
3.3.7. Grout tile joints. Do NOT allow grout to harden on face of tile.
3.3.8. Install sealant under the provisions of Section 07900 and as specified.
3.3.9. Wall Tile Installation
3.3.9.1. Install wall tile at concrete/masonry wall per TCA Method W2111222, and per
ANSI A108.1B.
3.3.9.2. Grout all wall joints with specified grout per ANSI A108.10.
3.3.10. Toilet Floor Tile Installation
3.3.10.1. Install floor tile at cleavage membrane mortar bed areas per TCA Method
Flll andANSlA108.1B.
3.3.10.2. Grout all floor joints with specified epoxy grout per ANSI A108.10.
3.3.1 1. Installation of expansion and control joint assemblies.
3.3.11.1. Provide expansion joints complying with TCA Detail EJ171 at the following
specified locations and as located and shown on drawings:
3.3.1 I .I .I. At wall tile to floor joints.
3.3.1 1 .I 2. At tile joint at inside vertical corners.
3.3.11.1.3. At tile terminations against curbs, paving or other restraining
elements.
3.4. CLEANING
3.4.1. Clean work under provisions of 01770.
3.4.2. Clean tile surfaces in accordance with the tile and grout manufacturers instructions;
remove all traces of grout scum.
3.4.3. Do not use muriatic acid compounds.
3.4.4. Provide damp cure of all installations per manufacturer's recommendations and per
ANSI AI 08.
Larwin Park
City Of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
CERAMIC TILE
09310 - 5
3.4.4.1. Do not damp cure latex modified grout systems unless recommended by
manufacturer.
3.4.5. Sealing
3.4.5.1. Seal all interior ceramic tile applications per manufacturer's
recommendations.
3.5. PROTECTION
3.5.1. Protect finished installation under provisions of Section 01 500.
3.5.2. Remove and replace any products that are cracked, scraped, or otherwise damaged
after installation and before acceptance by Owner.
3.6. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
3.6.1. Tolerances
3.6.1.1. Grout joint alignment with adjacent edge: 1/8' in 10 feet.
3.6.1.2. Row and column alignment: 1/8" in 10 feet deviation.
3.6.1.3. Alignment with adjacent tile: 1/16" +/-.
3.6.1.4. Level, plane and/or vertical: 1/8" in 10 feet deviation.
3.7. EXTRA STOCK
3.7.1, Provide sufficient field tile of each type and color to cover five square feet
3.7.2. Package in clearly labeled containers, store as necessary until delivered to Owner.
END OF SECTION
Larwin Park
City Of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
CERAMIC TILE
09310 - 6
SECTION 09675
SPECIAL FLOOR TREATMENT
1.
1.1.
1.2.
1.3.
1.4. -
1.5.
PART I - GENERAL
WORK INCLUDED
1.1.1. Concrete epoxy seal coating, clear, with abrasive grit for concrete floors at Rooms AI 01,
A102 and A103, designated as CS.
RELATED WORK
1.2.1.
1.2.2. Section 09900 - Painting.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
I .3.1.
Section 0331 0 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.
Coating Systems Manufacturer: Company specializing in VOC approved coating systems
with five years minimum experience.
Applicator: Company specializing in application of specified coating, with three years
minimum documented experience and approved by manufacturer.
1.3.2.
SUBMITTALS
1.4.1.
1.4.2. Product data:
Provide submittals under provisions of Section 01 330.
1.4.2.1. Include details of product description, tests performed, limitations to coating,
cautionary procedures required during application, and chemical properties,
including percentage of solids.
1.4.2.2. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions.
Samples: Provide two 12 inch square samples of each floor finish, showing color,
texture, and abrasive characteristics.
1.4.3.
1.4.4. Certification
1.4.4.1. Prior to installation of coating in any one area, submit written certification to
Architect certifying that surfaces are properly prepared for specified
installation.
Slip Resistance Testing: Provide written certification that coating as applied
achieves specified slip resistant coefficient of friction.
1.4.4.2.
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
1.5.1. Apply in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Do not apply coating when
ambient air and surface temperature is lower than 65 degrees F or higher than 100
degrees F.
Larwin Park
City Of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
SPECIAL FLOOR TREATMENT
09675 - 1
1.6. WARRANTY.
1.6.1. Provide 5 year warranty under provisions of Section 01770.
I .6.2. Warranty: Include coverage of materials and installation and resultant damage from
failure of installation to resist penetration of moisture.
2. PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1. CONCRETE EPOXY SEAL COATING
2.1 .I * Manufacturer: Conrad Sovig, phone (41 5) 863-3808, or equal.
2.1.2. Type: Epoxy coating at areas designated CS on Finish Schedule. Provide abrasive grit
at specified locations.
2.1.3. Series: Epoxy E-16.
2.1.4. Characteristics:
2.1.4.1. Composition: Two component, water-phase epoxy coating.
2.1.4.2. Coats: Two .
2.1.4.3. Color: Clear.
2.1.4.4. Gloss: Low Sheen.
2.1.4.5. Non-Slip Admixture: Provide silica sand, 80 mesh, abrasive grit, approved by
the manufacturer.
2.2. OTHER MATERIALS
2.2.1, Provide all other materials, not specifically described but required for complete and
proper installation of this work, as selected by the contractor and subject to the approval
of the Architect.
3. PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1. SURFACE CONDITIONS
3.1.1. Inspection
3.1.1.1. Prior to all work of this section, carefully inspect the installed work of all other
trades and verify that all such work is complete to the point where this
installation may properly commence.
3.1.1.2. Verify that work of this Section may be installed in strict accordance with the
original design, all pertinent codes and regulations, and all pertinent portions of the referenced standards.
3.1 .I .2.1. Verify surfaces are dry, clean, and free of efflorescence, oil,
or other matter detrimental to application of coating.
3.1 .I .2.2. Verify swirl texture will meet slip resistant requirements after
installation of sealer.
Larwin Park
City Of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
SPECIAL FLOOR TREATMENT
09675 - 2
3.1 ,I .3. In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Architect.
.-
3.1.1.4. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such
discrepancies have been fully resolved.
3.2. PREPARATION
3.2.1. Remove dust, curing compound, dirt and other contaminants from slab surface.
3.2.1.1. At smooth troweled slab surfaces, lightly sandblast surface to expose fine
aggregate.
3.2.2. Remove oil or foreign substance with chemical solvent which will not affect coating.
Apply neutralizing solution if required by manufacturer.
3.2.3. Scrub and rinse surfaces with water and let dry.
3.2.4. Protect adjacent surfaces not scheduled to receive coating.
3.2.5. Remove loose particles and foreign matter.
3.2.6. If applied on unscheduled surfaces, remove immediately, by approved method.
3.3. APPLICATION
3.3.1. Apply coating in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.3.2. Coordinate application with other work.
3.3.3. Surface Finish:
3.3.3.1. At smooth troweled slab surfaces, apply abrasive grit in accordance with
approved sample. Apply at the manufacturers approved coverage rate
required to provide slip resistant surface with minimum 0.60 coefficient of
friction per ASTM D 2047.
3.3.3.2. At broom, swirl or other textured slab surfaces, do not apply grit.
3.4. CLEANING AND PROTECTION
3.4.1, Protect from foot traffic as required to allow finish time to cure.
3.4.2. Clean surface of residue and curing films where occur in accordance with manufacturers
instructions.
END OF SECTION
Larwin Park
City Of Carlsbad NTD # 2002-0037
SPECIAL FLOOR TREATMENT
09675 - 3
SECTION 09900
PAINT1 NG
1.
1.1.
1.2.
1.3.
1.4.
1.5.
1.6.
PART I - GENERAL
WORK INCLUDED
1.1.1. Surface preparation.
1 .I .2.
RELATED WORK
1.2.1.
1.2.2.
1.2.3.
1.2.4.
REFERENCES
1.3.1.
1.3.2.
Surface paint and stain finishes as scheduled.
Section 07190 - Water Repellant Coatings.
Section 07620 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim.
Section 081 10 - Steel Doors and Frames.
Section 09961 - Graffiti Resistant Coating.
ASTM B 11 7 - Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus.
ASTM D 16 - Definitions of Terms Relating to Paint, Varnish, Lacquer, and Related
Products.
ASTM D 3359 - Test Method for Measuring Adhesion by Tape Test.
ASTM D 4060 - Test Method for Abrasion Resistance of Organic Coatings by the Taber
Abraser.
ASTM E 84 - Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
ASTM G 53 - Practice for Operating Light-and Water-Exposure Apparatus (Fluorescent
UV-Condensation Type) for Exposure of Nonmetallic Materials.
I .3.3.
1.3.4.
1.3.5.
1.3.6.
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
I .4.1, Submit manufacturer's certification of compliance with local criteria regarding VOC limits
for all applied paints and coatings.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1 51. Applicator: Company specializing in commercial painting and finishing with 5 years
documented experience.
1.5.1 .I. Installing Foreman: Individual specializing in applying specified systems with
minimum 10 years documented experience.
SUBMITTALS
1.6.1. Provide submittals under provisions of Section 01 330.
Larwin Park
City Of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
PA1 NT I N G
09900 - 1
1.6.2. Product Data: Submit product data of all proposed products, identifying product series,
material composition, performance characteristics and sheen.
1.6.2.1. Submit manufacturer's certificate that products comply with current safety
and environmental regulations, including hazardous materials labeling and
air qualityNOC regulations
1.6.2.2. Submit manufacturer's certificate that products are physically and chemically
compatible with each other and meet listed ASTM or Federal Specifications,
1.6.2.3. Where applicable, provide manufacturer's written evaluation of existing
paintlcoating systems, including directions as to surface preparation and
primers compatible with existing systems.
I A.3. Submit manufacturer's application instructions for each painting system, including
surface preparation.
1.6.4. Color Selection procedure:
1.6.4.1. Provide Architect with samples of complete color and sheen range available
for submitted products.
1.6.4.2. Based on submitted samples and specified color criteria, Architect will
prepare preliminary color schedule for all field applied coatings.
1.6.4.3. Based on preliminary color schedule, submit samples of all coatings, applied
on specified substrate. Submit three samples, approximately 8 x IO inch in
size, illustrating each color and sheen scheduled.
1.6.4.4. After review of preliminary color schedule samples, Architect will prepare
final color schedule. Where different from preliminary schedule, submit three
samples, approximately 8 x 10 inch in size, illustrating revised color and
sheen.
1.7. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
I .7.1. Deliver products to site, store and protect under provisions of Section 01600.
1.7.2. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptance.
1.7.3. Container labeling to include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, brand
code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup, color designation, and
instructions for mixing and reducing.
1.7.4. Store paint materials at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F and a maximum
of 90 degrees F, in an enclosed metal storage container located outside of building,
unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.
I .7.5. Take precautionary measures to prevent fire hazards and spontaneous combustion.
1.8. ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
1.8.1. Provide continuous ventilation and heating facilities to maintain surface and ambient
temperatures above 65 degrees F for 24 hours before, during, and 48 hours after
application of finishes, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.
Larwin Park
City Of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
PA1 NT I NG
09900 - 2
2.
2.1.
2.2.
2.3.
2.4.
I .8.2. Prior to beginning preparation and coating application, provide lighting level of 80 foot
candles measured on substrate surface. Where natural lighting does not provide such
levels, provide temporary lighting.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
2.1 .I. Basis of Design: Specific products listed on Schedule in Part 3 of this Section, are
indicated to establish required level of quality, appearance, and performance. The
Architect will consider comparable products by alternate manufacturers where listed, and
requests for substitutions, under the provisions of Section 0161 0.
2.1.2. High performance coatings are based on products manufactured by Tnemec.
Substitution limited to products with published test results equal to Tnemec in
performance and test methodology.
MATERIALS
2.2.1. . Coatings: Ready mixed, except field catalyzed coatings. Good flow and brushing
properties; capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags.
Accessory Materials: Provide all admixtures, thinners, flow agents and other materials
not specifically indicated but required to achieve the finishes specified.
2.2.2.
FIN ISH ESlCOLOR
2.3.1.
2.3.2.
2.3.3.
2.3.4. Color Range:
Refer to schedule at end of Section for type of surface finish.
Colors shall be selected by Architect as specified or as shown on drawings.
Each coat shall be a perceptibly different tint.
2.3.4.1. Where no color range is specified, provide single color for each item or
component.
HIGH PERFORMANCE COATING PFX-XX
2.4.1.
2.4.2.
2.4.3. Series: H.B. Endura Shield, Series 75.
2.4.4. System Characteristics: Multiple coats of aliphatic polyurethane over primer
Manufacturer: Tnemec, as distributed by TPC Consultants, phone 310-643-51 91.
Type: Aliphatic Polyurethane system, high build film, chemically resistant.
recommended by manufacturer.
2.4.5. Characteristics and Performance:
2.4.5.1. Adhesion: Minimum rating of 5, Method B, steel, 5 mm crosshatch per
ASTM D 3359.
Salt Spray resistance (fog): For Series 75 topcoat, No failure per ASTM B
117, 1000 hours.
2.4.5.2.
Larwin Park
City Of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
PAINTING
09900 - 3
2.5.
3.
3.1.
2.4.5.3. Temperature Resistance: Acceptable in-service temperature range of 250
degrees F continuous, 275 degrees F intermittent.
2.4.5.4. Abrasion Resistance: Maximum 75 mg weight loss at 1000 cycles with CS17
wheel, 1000 gram load, per ASTM D 4060.
2.4.5.5. Exposure Resistance: Series 74 applied to lightweight unfilled concrete
block, with no blistering cracking or chalking, with less than 30 percent gloss
change and less than 1.5 MacAdarn units for Endura Shield Blue Series 74
after 1500 hours exposure, per ASTM G 53.
2.4.6. Habitability Criteria: Air Quality Compliance: All products used shall comply with local
VOC criteria.
2.4.7. Accessory Products: Primers/Joint Detailing: Provide materials as recommended by
manufacturer for application.
2.4.8. Finish and Color
2.4.8.1. Finish: Semi-gloss.
2.4.8.2. Color: Color selected by Architect from manufacturer's complete Colorbook
line for specified product.
OTHER MATERIALS
2.5.1. Provide all other materials, not specifically described but required for complete and
proper installation of this work, as selected by the contractor and subject to the approval
of the Architect.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
SURFACE CON DIT1 ON S
3.1 .I. Inspection
3.1.1.1. Prior to all work of this section, carefully inspect the installed work of all other
trades and verify that all such work is complete to the point where this
installation may properly commence.
3.1 .I .2. Verify that work of this Section may be installed in strict accordance with the
original design, all pertinent codes and regulations, and all pertinent portions
of the referenced standards.
3.1 .I .2.1. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to
commencement of work. Report any condition that may
potentially affect proper application.
3.1 .I .2.2. Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic
moisture meter. Do not apply finishes unless moisture
content of surfaces are below the maximum levels
recommended by the manufacturer:
3.1 .I .3. In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Architect.
3.1.1.4. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such
discrepancies have been fully resolved.
Larwin Park
City Of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
PA1 NTI N G
09900 - 4
3.2.
3.3.
3.4.
PREPARATION
3.2.1.
3.2.2.
3.2.3.
3.2.4.
3.2.5.
3.2.6.
3.2.7.
3.2.8.
Remove electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, and fittings prior to preparing
surfaces or finishing.
Correct minor defects and clean surfaces which affect work of this Section.
Shellac and seal marks which may bleed through surface finishes.
Steel Surfaces:
3.2.4.1. Shop Primed Steel Surfaces: Sand and scrape to remove loose primer and
rust. Feather edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous.
3.2.4.2. Bare Steel: Sand and scrape to remove loose primer and rust. Clean
surfaces with solvent.
Gypsum Board Surfaces: Latex fill minor defects. Spot prime defects after repair.
Galvanized Surfaces: Remove surface contamination and oils and wash with solvent.
Apply coat of etching primer.
Verify weatherstripping at door assemblies is compatible with specified paint finish.
Steel Doors and Door Frames:
3.2.8.1. Provide specified primer at all frames, including frames with fabricators
primer system. Comply with criteria specified in this Section.
3.2.8.2. Prepare frame steel surfaces as required for proper adhesion and
appearance of specified finish coat system.
PROTECTION
3.3.1. Protect elements surrounding the work of'this Section from damage or disfiguration.
3.3.2. Repair damage to other surfaces caused by work of this Section.
3.3.3. Furnish drop cloths, shields, and protective methods to prevent spray or droppings from
disfiguring other surfaces.
3.3.4. Remove empty paint containers from site.
APPLl CAT1 0 N
3.4.1.
3.4.2.
3.4.3.
3.4.4.
3.4.5.
3.4.6.
Larwin Park
City Of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry.
Apply each coat to uniform finish.
The number of coats specified are minimum. Additional coats shall be applied until finish
is uniform in color and sheen.
Sand lightly between coats to achieve required finish.
Each coat to be approved by the Architect prior to applying succeeding coat.
PA1 NT I N G
09900 - 5
3.4.7.
3.4.8.
3.4.9.
3.4.1 0.
3.4.1 1.
Allow applied coat to dry before next coat is applied.
Where clear finishes are required, tint fillers to match wood. Work fillers into the grain
before set. Wipe excess from surface.
Finish all surfaces of non-factory finished doors, including tops and bottoms.
3.4.9.1. Apply two coats of approved sealer to all surfaces milled for hardware
preparation, including hinge mortise, latching mechanism cutout and related
door penetrations.
3.4.9.2. Apply paint to non-factory finished doors and frames by spray method only.
Paint all structural components and surfaces visible through louvers and vents in wall
and soffit surfaces.
Exterior metal flashings, fabrications and structural components: Unless noted otherwise,
apply paints and coatings as specified below:
3.4.11.1. Apply exterior paint PFX-2 to all roof penetrations visible to the eye from
typically occupied locations in the finished project. "Typically occupied"
includes those portions of the project visible to a standing person from
elevated portions of the site.
3.4.1 I .2. Apply exterior paint PFX-2 to steel structural components and miscellaneous
fabrications visible to the eye from typically occupied locations in the finished
project.
3.4.1 1.3. Unless designated prefinished on drawings, apply exterior paint PFX-2 to
metal roof flashings visible to the eye from typically occupied locations in the
finished project.
3.4.11.4. Apply paint to all other exterior components as specified or shown on
drawings.
3.5. FINISHING MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
3.5.1.
3.5.2.
3.5.3.
3.5.4.
3.5.5.
3.5.6.
Paint shop primed equipment. Paint shop prefinished items exposed to view in non -
utility areas.
Remove unfinished louvers, grilles, covers, and access panels on mechanical and
electrical components and paint separately.
At interior and exterior applications, prime and paint insulated and exposed pipes,
conduit, boxes, insulated and exposed ducts, mechanical equipment units, hangers,
brackets, collars and supports, except where items are prefinished.
Replace identification markings on mechanical or electrical equipment when painted
accidentally.
Paint interior surfaces of air ducts, and heating cabinets that are visible through grilles
and louvers with flat black paint, to limit of sight line. Paint dampers, except fire dampers,
exposed behind louvers, grilles, and convector and baseboard cabinets to match face
panels.
Paint exposed panels, pedestals, boxes, conduit and related electrical equipment
occurring in exterior and interior finished areas.
Larwin Park
City Of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
PA1 NTI NG
09900 - 6
3.5.7. Replace electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, and fittings removed prior to
finishing .
3.6. CLEANING AND EXTRA STOCK
3.6.1. As Work proceeds, promptly remove paint where spilled, splashed, or spattered.
3.6.2. During progress of Work maintain premises free of unnecessary accumulation of tools,
equipment, surplus materials, and debris.
3.6.3. At end of workday remove from building flammable paint, solvents, and reducing agents.
3.6.4. Collect cotton waste, cloths, and material which may constitute a fire hazard, place in
closed metal containers and remove daily from site.
3.6.5. Extra Stock:
3.6.5.1. Extra Stock: Provide an unopened one gallon container of each color and
sheen to Owner.
3.6.5.2. Label each container with color, sheen, and room locations, in addition to the
manufacturer's label.
3.7. SCHEDULE
3.7.1. For ease of specifying, unless otherwise noted, product numbers of Frazee have been
used. Equivalent products of Dunn Edwards, ICI, Sherwin Williams and other
manufacturers may be used subject to the substitution provisions listed under Section
01610. --
3.7.2. INTERIOR SURFACES
3.7.2.1. Gypsum Board - Semi-Gloss Enamel finish (PF-1)
3.7.2.1 .I. One coat # 061 Aqua Seal Vinyl Acrylic Wall Sealer
3.7.2.1.2. Two coats #032 Envirocoat.
3.7.2.2. Steel Doors/Door Frames/Miscellaneous metal- Galvanized - Semi-Gloss
(PF-2)
3.7.2.2.1. Solvent clean, etch with approved solution and rinse with
clear water.
3.7.2.2.2. One coat primer # 561 Acrylic Metal Prime
3.7.2.2.3. Two Coats Finish # 124 Mirro Glide SG
3.7.2.3. Masonry: Graffiti Resistant Coating - See Section 09961.
3.7.2.4. Wood - Opaque - semi gloss finish - (PF-3)
3.7.2.4.1. One coat primer #W 707 for primer and backprime
applications.
Larwin Park
City Of Carlsbad NTD # 2002-0037
3.7.2.4.2. Two coats #W 901.
PAINTING
09900 - 7
3.7.2.5. Ferrous metal piping, miscellaneous metal fabrications and related
components - (PF-4).
3.7.2.5.1. Solvent clean and rinse with clear water.
3.7.2.5.2. One coat primer # 561 Acrylic Metal Prime
3.7.2.5.3. Two Coats Finish # 124 Mirro Glide SG
3.7.2.6. Steel fabrications - Semi-Gloss - (PF-5)
3.7.2.6.1. One coat primer # 561 Acrylic Metal Prime
3.7.2.6.2. Two Coats Finish # 124 Mirro Glide SG
3.7.2.7. Galvanized flashings, ductwork, electrical conduit, and related components -
(PF-6)
3.7.2.7.1. Solvent clean, etch with approved solution and rinse with
clear water.
3.7.2.7.2.
3.7.2.7.3.
One coat primer # 561 Acrylic Metal Prime
Two Coats Finish # 124 Mirro Glide SG
3.7.3. EXTERIOR SURFACES
3.7.3.1. Steel Doors, Door Frames - Galvanized (PFX-1)
3.7.3.1 .l. Etch with phosphoric acid solution and rinse with clear
water.
3.7.3.1.2. One coat primer #661 Metal Prime
3.7.3.1.3. Two Coats Finish # 124 Mirro Glide SG
3.7.3.2. Galvanized flashings where specified and shown on drawings, ferrous
structural components (PFX-2)
3.7.3.2.1. One coat Tnemec primer as recommended by coating
manufacturer.
3.7.3.2.2. Two coats Tnemec Series 75 Acrylic Polyurethane.
3.7.3.3. Ferrous metal piping, miscellaneous metal fabrications, and related
components (PFX-3).
3.7.3.3.1. Solvent clean and rinse with clear water.
3.7.3.3.2. One coat primer #661 Metal Prime
3.7.3.3.3. Two Coats Finish # 124 Mirro Glide SG
3.7.3.4. Wood - Opaque - semi gloss finish. (PFX-4)
3.7.3.4.1. One coat primer #I68 for primer and backprime applications.
Larwin Park
City Of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037 PAINTING
09900 - 8
Larwin Park
City Of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
3.7.3.4.2. Two coats # 124 Mirro Glide SG.
END OF SECTION
PA1 NTI NG
09900 - 9
SECTION 09961
GRAFFITI RESISTANT COATING
1.
1.1.
1,2.
1.3.
1.4. .-
I,
2.
2.1.
,-
PART I - GENERAL
WORK INCLUDED
1.1.1.
RELATED WORK
1.2.1.
1.2.2.
1.2.3. Section 09900 - Painting.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.3.1.
Graffiti resistant coating applied to exterior masonry surfaces.
Section 0331 0 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.
Section 04810 - Reinforced Unit Masonry System.
Coating Systems Manufacturer: Company specializing in VOC approved graffiti systems
with three years minimum experience.
1.3.2. Applicator: Company specializing in application of specified coating, with 3 years
minimum documented experience and approved by manufacturer.
S U BM ITTALS
1.4.1.
I A.2. Materialllnstallation Data
Submit product data under provisions of Section 01330.
1.4.2.1. Provide detailed product description, tests performed, limitations to coating,
cautionary procedures required during application, and chemical properties,
including percentage of solids.
Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section
01 330.
1.4.2.2.
ENVIR NMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
1 51. Do not apply coating when ambient air and surface temperature is lower than 41 degrees
F within 24 hours of application.
Do not apply coating when ambient humidity exceeds 80 percent within 8 hours before or
after application.
1.5.2.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
MANUFACTURERS
2.1 .I. Basis of Design: Characteristics of specific products, where named in this Section, are
indicated to establish required level of quality, appearance, and performance. The
Architect will consider comparable products by alternate manufacturers where listed, and
requests for substitutions, under the provisions of Section 0161 0.
Larwin Park
City Of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
GRAFF IT1 RES1 STANT COAT I NG
09961 - 1
2.2. GRAFFITI RESISTANT COATING
2.2.1. Manufacturer:
2.2.1.1. Prosoco Inc. phone (714)-454-9889.
2.2.2. Product Series: Blok-Guard & Graffiti Control.
2.2.3. Characteristics: Solvent based silicone elastomer, VOC compliant formulation.
2.2.4. Fin ish/Color
2.2.4.1. Finish: No sheen or change in substrate.
2.2.4.2. Color: Clear.
2.3. MASONRY CLEANER
2.3.1. Provide recommended ProSoCo Sureclean masonry cleaner.
2.4. GRAFFITI REMOVAL SOLVENT
2.4.1. Provide ProSoCo DefacerlEraser Graffiti Remover, in quantities specified in Article 3.4.
2.5. OTHER MATERIALS
2.5.1. Provide all other materials, not specifically described but required for complete and
proper installation of this work, as selected by the contractor and subject to the approval
of the Architect.
3. PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1. SURFACE CONDITIONS
3.1 .I. Inspection
3.1 .I .I. Prior to work of this section, carefully inspect previously installed work.
Verify all such work is complete to the point where this installation may
properly commence.
3.1.1.2. Verify that work of this section may be installed in strict accordance with the
original design, all pertinent codes and regulations, and all pertinent portions
of the referenced standards.
3.1 .I .2.1. Verify joint sealants are installed and cured.
3.1.1.2.2. Verify surfaces to be coated are dry, clean, and free of
efflorescence, oil, or other matter detrimental to application
of coating.
3.1.1.3. In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Architect.
3.1.1.4. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such
discrepancies have been fully resolved.
Larwin Park
City Of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
GRAFFITI RESISTANT COATING
09961 -2
3.2. PREPARATION
3.2.1. Remove loose particles and foreign matter.
3.2.2.
3.2.3.
Clean surfaces with recommended cleaner.
Scrub and rinse surfaces with water and let dry for minimum 24 hours.
3.2.4.
3.2.5.
3.3. APPLICATION
Protect adjacent surfaces not scheduled to receive coating.
If applied on unscheduled surfaces, remove immediately, by approved method.
3.3.1. Apply coating in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, as modified for substrate
and site conditions.
3.3.2. Apply at manufacturers recommended rate.
3.3.2.1. Apply using spray equipment, maintaining "wet-on-wet" process, in two-pass
method.
3.3.2.2.
3.3.2.3. Apply two coats.
Stir material prior to application and periodically during installation.
3.3.2.4. Brush out any runs or sags immediately.
.- 3.4. MAINTENANCE STOCK
3.4.1. Provide one (1) gallon of specified graffiti removal coating.
3.4.2. Provide one (1) gallon of coating.
END OF SECTION
.-
Larwin Park
City Of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
GRAFFITI RESISTANT COATING
09961 - 3
1.
1.1.
1.2.
I .3.
1.4.
I .5.
I .6. -
SECTION 101 72
SOLID PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS
PART I - GENERAL
SECTION INCLUDES
1.1.1. Solid plastic toilet compartment doors and pilasters.
RELATED SECTIONS
1.2.1. Section 04810 - Reinforced Unit Masonry System
1.2.2. Section 061 12 - Framing and Sheathing.
1.2.3. Section 10800 - Toilet Accessories.
REFERENCES
1.3.1. ASTM A167 - Stainless and Heat - Resisting Chromium - Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and
Strip.
SUBMITTALS
1.4.1. Submit under provisions of Section 01330.
1.4.2. Shop Drawings: Indicate partition plan, elevation views, dimensions, details of wall, floor,
and ceiling supports and door swings.
1.4.3. Product Data: Provide data on panel construction, hardware, and accessories.
1.4.4. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and perimeter
conditions requiring special attention.
1 A.5. Samples:
1.4.5.1, Prior to fabrication, provide two complete set of samples of partition panels,
3 x 3 inch in size, illustrating panel finish, color, and sheen for Architect color
selection
1.4.5.2. Prior to fabrication, provide hinge, handle and lock samples for Architects
review.
I .4.6. Certification: Following installation, provide certification all hardware is installed in
accordance with manufacturers recommendations.
FIELD MEASUREMENTS
1.5.1. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings.
COORDINATION
1.6.1. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01310.
Larwin Park
City Of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
SOLID PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS
10172 - I
1.6.2. Coordinate the work with placement of support framing and anchors in wall and ceiling.
1.7. GUARANTEE AND WARRANTY
I .7.1. Contractors Guarantee: Provide Owner with written guarantee complying with the
following criteria:
1,7.1 .I, Panel Material Replacement: Complete panel material replacement at no
cost to Owner, including shipping to manufacturer, if panel materials exhibit
breakage, surface crazing, spalling or delamination for a period of 5 years
after installation.
I .7.1.2. Hardware Material Replacement: Complete hardware material replacement
at no cost to Owner, including shipping to manufacturer, if hardware
materials break or rust for a period of 5 years after installation.
1.7.2. Manufacturers Warranty: Provide Owner with compartment system manufacturers
written guarantee complying with the following criteria:
I .7.2.1, Panel Material Replacement: Complete panel material replacement at no
cost to Owner for materials, if panel materials exhibit breakage, surface
crazing, spalling or delamination for a period of 15 years after installation.
1.7.2.2. Hardware Material Replacement: Complete hardware material replacement
at no cost to Owner for material cost, if hardware materials break or rust for
a period of 15 years after installation.
2. PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1. TOILET COMPARTMENTS
2.1 .I. Manufacturer: Capitol Partitions, as represented by Glenn Robertson, phone (702)-896-
7656, Santana Products or equal.
2.1.2. Basis of Design: Characteristics of specific products manufactured by Capitol Partitions
are indicated to establish required level of quality, appearance, and performance. The
Architect will consider comparable products by alternate manufacturers listed in this
Section, and requests for substitutions, under the provisions of Section 01610.
2.1.3. Type: Solid polymer plastic compartment system.
2.1.4. Series:
2.1.4.1. Toilet Compartments: Congress Series, floor mounted system, modified as
specified, with hardware as specified.
2.1.5. Construction:
2.1 &I. Solid Plastic Panel: Poly Pro Plus (P3) Solid polypropylene panel.
2.1 52. Pilaster Shoe: Factory fabricated solid plastic shoes.
2.1 3.3. Attachments, Screws, and Bolts: Provide stainless steel, with tamper proof
fasteners.
Larwin Park
City Of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
SOLID PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS
10172 - 2
2.1 54. Hardware: Unless otherwise specified, provide specified aluminum or
stainless steel hardware components. ZAMAC components are not
acceptable.
2.1 54.1. Stainless steel hinge, 605 series, self closing, with cover.
2.1 54.2. Series 303s slide door latch with exterior emergency access
feature at all compartment doors.
2.1 54.3. Door strike and keeper with rubber bumper.
2.1 -5.4.4. Coat hook at each compartment.
2.1 s.4.5. Series 406 loop style aluminum door pulls with minimum 3
inch clear center to center, at each compartment.
2.1 54.6. Door Stops at top and bottom of each door panel.
2.1.5.4.7. Continuous stainless steel channel at pilaster to wall
connections.
2.1 54.8. Provide continuous aluminum edge strip at all door and
panel bottom edge, installed with tamper-proof fasteners.
2.1.6. Fabrication:
2.1.6.1. Fabricate partitions by forming solid plastic panel with finished faces and
edges. Finish edges convex.
2.1.6.2. Bevel corners and edges of cut - outs.
2.1.6.3. Doors:
2.1.6.3.1. Thickness: 1 inch
2.1.6.3.2. Door Width: 24 inch, unless shown otherwise.
2.1.6.3.3. Door Width at Accessible compartment: 32 inch
minimum clear opening at door located at end of
compartment, 34 inch minimum clear opening at door
located on side of compartment, door swing as shown on
plans.
2.1.6.3.4. Toilet compartment door height: 55 inches.
2.1.6.4. Toilet Compartment Pilasters: 1 inch thick, 72 inches high.
2.1.7. Fire/Habitability Criteria:
2.1.7.1. Self Ignition Temperature: Minimum of 650 degrees F, tested per UBC
Standard 26-6 or approved equivalent.
2.1.7.2. Smoke Density Rating: Maximum value of 75, tested per UBC Standard 26-5
or approved equivalent.
.-
Larwin Park
City Of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
SOLID PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS
10172 - 3
2.1.8. Finish/Color:
2.1.8.1. Colors shall be selected by Architect from complete Poly-Pro Plus solid and
granite color line.
2.1.8.2. Provide color for plastic brackets and channels as directed by Architect.
2.1.8.3. Stainless Steel: No. 4, Satin.
2.2. OTHER MATERIALS
2.2.1. Provide all other materials, not specifically described but required for complete and
proper installation of this work, as selected by the contractor and subject to the approval
of the Architect.
3. PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1. SURFACE CONDITIONS
3.1.1. Inspection
3.1.1.1. Prior to work of this section, carefully inspect previously installed work.
Verify all such work is complete to the point where this installation may
properly commence.
3.1 .I .2. Verify that work of this section may be installed in strict accordance with the
original design, all pertinent codes and regulations, and all pertinent portions
of the referenced standards.
3.1.1.2.1. Verify correct location of built-in framing, anchorage and
bracing.
3.1 .I .2.2. Coordinate with work specified in other Sections to assure
proper type and location of anchors required for installation
into concrete and masonry. Anchorage using molly bolts or
toggle bolts prohibited.
3.1.1.3. In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Architect.
3.1.1.4. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such
discrepancies have been fully resolved.
3.2. INSTALLATION
3.2.1. Install units secure, rigid, plumb, and level in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions. Install all required safety set screws to prohibit removal of integral hinge.
3.2.2. Maintain maximum of 3/16 inch space between door and pilaster.
3.2.3. Attach pilasters to brackets with tamper proof through bolts and nuts.
3.2.4. Provide adjustment for floor variations with screw jack through aluminum angle. Conceal
floor fastenings with pilaster shoes.
3.2.5. Equip each door with specified hinge system, one door latch, two door pulls, one coat
hook and bumper.
Lawin Park
City Of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
SOLID PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS
10172 - 4
3.2.5.1. Provide accessible compartment doors with pun on both sides, mounted at
34 inches above finish floor to bottom of pull.
3.2.5.2. Provide slide latch mounted at 39 inches above finish floor.
3.2.5.3. Mount coat hook at 48 inches above finish floor in accessible compartments.
Locate as directed by Architect. Do not mount on door panel.
3.2.6. Install door strike and keeper with door bumper on each pilaster in alignment with door
latch.
3.2.7. Replace damaged or scratched materials with new materials. Field touch-up of scratches
or damaged finish will NOT be permitted.
3.3. ERECTION TOLERANCES
3.3.1. Maximum Variation from True Position: 1/4 inch.
3.3.2. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 1/8 inch
3.4. ADJUSTING
3.4.1. Adjust work under provisions of Section 01770.
3.4.2. Adjust and align hardware to uniform clearance at vertical edge of doors, not exceeding
3/16 inch.
3.4.3. Adjust adjacent components for consistency of line or plane.
Latwin Park
City Of Carlsbad NTD # 2002-0037
END OF SECTION
SOLID PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS
10172 - 5
SECTION 10210
METAL WALL LOUVERS
1.
1.1.
1.2.
1.3.
1.4.
1.5.
2.
2.1.
2.2.
PART I - GENERAL
WORK INCLUDED
1.1.1,
1 .I .2. Accessories.
RELATED WORK
I .2.1.
1.2.2.
1.2.3.
REFERENCES
1.3.1.
Wall mounted block vent louvers and frames.
Section 04810 - Reinforced Unit Masonry System.
Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications
Section 07900 - Joint Sealers.
AMCA (Air Movement and Control Association, lnc.) Certification for AMCA Standard
500.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.4.1. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacture of AMCA certified louvers with three
years experience.
SUBMITTALS
1 51.
1.5.2.
Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Section 01330.
Indicate on shop drawings, layout, elevations, dimensions, and tolerances; head, jamb,
and sill details; blade configuration; screening; and frames.
1.5.3. Provide product data on preassembled louvers describing design characteristics,
maximum recommended air velocity, free area, materials, and finishes.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
MANUFACTURERS
2.1 .I. Basis of Design: Characteristics of specific products, where named in this Section, are
indicated to establish required level of quality, appearance, and performance. The Architect will consider comparable products by alternate manufacturers where listed, and
requests for substitutions, under the provisions of Section 01 610.
WALL LOUVER: STATIONARY BLADE
2.2.1 *
2.2.2.
Manufacturer: Ruskin, Industrial Louver or equal.
Type: Stationary blade louver with bird screen.
Larwin Park
City Of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
METAL WALL LOUVERS
10210 - 1
2.2.3. Series/Style: Model ELF375DX stationary blade block vent louver.
2.2.4. Construction:
2.2.4.1.
2.2.4.2.
2.2.4.3. Frame Depth: 4 inch.
2.2.4.4.
2.2.4.5.
Finish: Factory baked enamel, color as selected by Architect.
Size: As shown on drawings.
Frame: 6063 T5 extruded aluminum 0.80-inch wall thickness.
Blades: Overlapped at 45 degree angle
Bird Screen: 3/4 x .051 mesh aluminum, removable.
2.2.5.
2.3. OTHER MATERIALS
2.3.1. Provide all other materials, not specifically described but required for complete and
proper installation of this work, as selected by the contractor and subject to the approval
of the Architect.
3. PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1. SURFACE CONDITIONS
3.1 .I. Inspection
3.1.1.1. Prior to work of this section, carefully inspect previously installed work.
Verify all such work is complete to the point where this installation may
properly commence.
3.1.1.2. Verify that work of this section may be installed in strict accordance with the
original design, all pertinent codes and regulations, and all pertinent portions
of the referenced standards.
3.1.1.3. In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Architect.
3.1.1.4. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such
discrepancies have been fully resolved. .
3.2. INSTALLATION
3.2.1. Install louvers level and plumb.
3.2.2. Secure louvers in opening framing with concealed fasteners where possible.
3.2.3. Align louver assembly to ensure moisture sheds from flashings and as required to
provide diversion of moisture to exterior.
3.2.4. install screening to interior of louver.
3.2.5. Provide sealant at all perimeters and as required to assure weather integrity.
END OF SECTION
Larwin Park
City Of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
METAL WALL LOUVERS
10210 - 2
SECTION 10800
TOILET AND WASHROOM ACCESSORIES
1. PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .I. SECTION INCLUDES
1.1.1. Toilet and washroom accessories.
1 .I .2. Lavatory and sink trap and piping prefabricated wrap kit.
1 .I .3. Attachment hardware.
1.2. RELATED WORK
1.2.1. Section 04810 - Reinforced Unit Masonry System.
1.2.2. Section 061 12 - Framing and Sheathing.
1.3. REFERENCES
1.3.1. ASTM A 167 - Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet and
Strip.
1.4. REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS -
1.4.1. Comply with requirements of the Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines
(ADAAG), as currently amended.
I .4.2. Where different or more restrictive than ADAAG, comply with requirements of Chapter
11 B, Part 2, Title 24, CCR, as currently amended.
1.5. SUBMITTALS
1 51. Submit product data and installation instructions under provisions of Section 01 330.
1.5.2. Include physical dimensions, operational features, color and finish, wall mounting
brackets with mounted measurements, anchorage details, rough-in measurements,
location, and details.
1.5.2.1. Review installation and placement of accessories with regard to such
components as counters and door swings. Identify all potential conflicts with
proposed placement of accessories, including compliance with disabled
access regulations.
1.5.2.2. Provide certification written on manufacturer's letterhead, that all
components, such as levers and push buttons, comply with ADA limit of 5
pounds force to operate component when filled and installed. Such devices
will be field tested for compliance.
Larwin Park
City Of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
TOILET AND WASHROOM ACCESSORIES
10800 - 1
2. PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1. MANUFACTURERS
2.1 .l . Basis of Design: Characteristics of specific products, where named in this Section, are
indicated to establish required level of quality, appearance, and performance. The
Architect will consider comparable products by alternate manufacturers where listed, and
requests for substitutions, under the provisions of Section 01 61 0.
2.2. WASHROOM AND MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES
2.2.1. Manufacturer: Bobrick (81 8) 982-9600 or equal.
2.2.2. Toilet Area Accessories:
2.2.2.1. Toilet Paper Holder.
2.2.2.1.1. Type TPH-1: 8-3888, Semi-Recessed.
2.2.2.2. Seat Cover Dispenser SCD-1: B-4221.
2.2.2.3. Sanitary Napkin Disposal
2.2.2.3.1. Type SPW-1: B-254, Surface Mounted.
2.2.3. Washroom Area Accessories:
2.2.3.1. Mirror
2.2.3.1.1. Mirror M-1: B-165, size as shown on drawings, tempered
glass.
2.2.3.2. Soap Dispenser:
2.2.3.2.1. Wall Mount SD-1: 8-21 11, with maximum 5 Ibf operating
force.
2.2.3.3. Sanitary Napkin Dispenser SPD-1: B-3500, TrimLine Series, recessed
mount, coordinate coin mechanism with Owner.
2.2.4. Miscellaneous Accessories
2.2.4.1. Mop Rack: : B-223-36.
2.2.5. Accessories:
2.2.5.1. Fasteners, Screws, and Bolts: Stainless steel or equivalent corrosion
resistant, size and type as required for application. Provide tamper and
vandal resistant heads at exposed fasteners.
2.2.5.2. Shop assemble components and package complete with anchors and
fittings.
2.2.5.3. Provide anchor plates, adapters, and clips and all other components
required for installation.
Larwin Park
City Of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
TOILET AND WASHROOM ACCESSORIES
10800 - 2
2.2.5.4. Keying: Where accessories are keyed, key all accessories alike and as
directed by Architect. Supply 5 keys to Owner.
2.2.6. Finish: No. 4 satin luster, unless noted otherwise.
2.3. GRAB BARS
2.3.1. Manufacturer: AS1 (81 8) 982-9600. No substitution.
2.3.2. Toilet Compartment Grab Bar GB-I: AS1 3100 Series, 36 inches long, concealed
mounting, set screw flange cover, satin finish.
2.3.3. Toilet Compartment Grab Bar GB-2: AS1 3100 Series, 48 inches long, concealed
mounting, set screw flange cover, satin finish.
2.4. TRAP AND PIPING WRAP
2.4.1. Provide Brocar (Phone 1-800-827-1 207) prefabricated trap and piping insulation kit,
C500 series, with all required accessory fittings, color white. Provide at all lavatory and
sink fittings.
2.5. ELECTRIC HAND DRYER
2.5.1, Manufacturer: ASI, phone (714)449-5003 - No Substitution.
2.5.2. Series: Series 0180, Profile Dryer, auto operation (Hands free) surface mounting,
maximum 4 inch projection.
2.5.3. Power Criteria: 1/4 HP, 7500 RPM motor, operating at input voltage range of 100-240
VAC, single phase.
2.5.4. Air Delivery Criteria: 183 CF warm air.
2.5.5. Finish: Prefinished porcelain enamel, color as selected by Architect, with permanent
fused operating graphics.
2.6. CHANGING STATION
2.6.1. Manufacturer: Koala Corporation, phone (800)-985-6252.
2.6.2. Model: Horizontal design, beige color .
2.6.3. Characteristics:
2.6.3.1. Provide 400 pound static capacity, metal on metal hinge assembly with gas
charged support shock.
2.6.3.2. Provide high density polyethylene surfaces with sanitary liner dispenser
component, concealed when changing surface is closed.
2.6.3.3. Provide 400 pound static capacity.
2.6.3.4. Provide factory installed lock and tamper resistant hardware.
2.6.4. Certification: Provide certification of OSHPD Approval R-0367.
Larwin Park
City Of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
TOILET AND WASHROOM ACCESSORIES
10800 - 3
2.7. OTHER MATERIALS
3.
3.1.
3.2.
3.3.
2.7.1. Provide all other materials, not specifically described but required for complete and
proper installation of this work, as selected by the contractor and subject to the approval
of the Architect.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
SURFACE CONDITIONS
3.1 .I, Inspection
3.1 .l.l. Prior to work of this section, carefully inspect previously installed work.
Verify all such work is complete to the point where this installation may
properly commence.
3.1.1.2. Verify that work of this section may be installed in strict accordance with the
original design, all pertinent codes and regulations, and all pertinent portions
of the referenced standards.
3.1 .I .3. In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Architect.
3.1.1.4. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such
discrepancies have been fully resolved.
PREPARATION
3.2.1. Deliver inserts and rough-in frames to site at appropriate time for building-in.
3.2.2. Provide templates and rough-in measurements as required.
3.2.3. Verify exact location of accessories for installation.
INSTALLATION
3.3.1. Install fixtures, accessories and items in accordance with manufacturers' instructions.
3.3.2. Install plumb and level, securely and rigidly anchored to substrate.
3.3.3. Mount in accordance with referenced accessibility regulations and as shown on
drawings.
3.3.3.1. Mount shower coat hooks at 48 inches above finish floor, located as directed
by Architect.
3.3.4. Clean and polish all accessories after installation.
END OF SECTION
Larwin Park
City Of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
TOILET AND WASHROOM ACCESSORIES
10800 - 4
SECTION 15010 - BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.1.1
1.2
1.2.1
1.2.2
1.2.3
1.2.4
1.3
1.3.1
1.3.2
1.3.3
- 1.4
1.4.1
SUMMARY
This specification and the applicable drawings are intended to define the requirement to furnish all labor,
materials, equipment, supplies, and other cost as necessary for the satisfactory completion of all work pertaining to mechanical trades.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
All work shall comply with the requirements of codes, ordinances and regulations of the government having jurisdiction at the location of work, including the regulations of serving utilities.
The latest approved editions of the following specifications and standards shall form a part of this
specification, the same as if herein written out in full, and all materials and installations shall conform to the applicable requirements thereof:
All state and municipal ordinances having jurisdiction.
California Code of Regulations (CCR), Title 8.
California Code of Regulations (CCR), Title 19. California Code of Regulations (CCR), Title 24. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Pamphlet No. 13.
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Pamphlet No. 90 A & 90 B. National Electric Code (NEC).
Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) "Safety and Health Regulations for Construction"
California Mechanical Code (UMC). California Plumbing Code (UPC).
Trade Standards: The latest specifications and standards of the following associations shall form a part
of this specification, the same as if herein written out in full, and all materials, equipment and installations
shall conform to the applicable requirements thereof.
American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE).
Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL).
Air Moving and Control Association (AMCA). Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc. (SMACNA). American Gas Association (AGA).
The following Division 15 Sections shall form a part of this specification.
Section 15400 Plumbing
Section 15850 HVAC Equipment
Section 15990 Balancing Air Systems
DEFINITIONS
"Piping" shall mean pipes, fittings, valves and all piping specialties that are used in conveying system media.
Pressure ratings specified is the design working pressure for the fluid which the device will serve.
"Ductwork" shall mean ducts, plenums, compartments, castings, or any like devices, which are used to
convey air.
UBMITTALS
Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 330.
Larwin Park
City of Carlsbad NTD #2002-0037 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15010 - 1
PERMITS AND FEES 1.5
1.5.1
1.6
1.6.1
1.7
1.7.1
The contractor shall arrange, apply for, and pay for all permits, inspections, fees, and licenses required
by any legally constituted public authority for this work.
DISCREPANCIES
Any discrepancies found between the specification and drawings, or between drawings, shall be brought to the attention of the owner or his representative before installation of the applicable item. Special attention shall be given to voltage requirements and lighting arrangements. Any conflict shall be called to
the attention of the Owner's Representative immediately. Any extra cost caused by neglecting to verify all listed voltages and phase with electrical plans shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.
GUARANTEE
Contractor shall provide a written guarantee that all materials, fixtures, and equipment installed under the contract are guaranteed for a period of one year from the date of completion. Contractor shall provide all
materials and labor necessary for repair, in a reasonable amount of time, and without cost to the owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
EQUIPMENT
All mechanical equipment, both hanging and base mounted, shall be provided with mounting connection points of sufficient strength to resist seismic forces, as required by CCR Title 24. The mounting
connections shall be compatible with vibration isolation used.
Equipment identification number, capacity, and design requirements are specified in the drawing
equipment schedule or applicable specification. Equipment furnished and installed shall meet the design
requirements at operating conditions with the following parameters:
.1 The RPM, motor horsepower, brake horsepower, air pressure drop, equipment weights, outlet velocities, tip speed and dB ratings specified are maximum. An increase will not be accepted.
.2 The CFM, wheel diameters, heating and cooling capacities, and static pressure on fans that are
specified are minimums. A decrease will not be accepted.
RECORD DRAWINGS
The contractor shall maintain a complete "as-built" record set of blue line prints during construction. The
Aas-built@ prints shall be used to record the exact location of all piping and ducting installed, including the
depth of all underground piping. Upon completion of the project contractor shall deliver a clean set of "as-
built" prints to the owner or his representative.
MANUALS AND INSTRUCTIONS
Manuals: The Contractor shall furnish five sets of Operating and Maintenance Manuals. The information
in these manuals shall be bound in a hardback, loose-leaf binder or approved equivalent. Inscribed on the cover shall be the words "OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL", the name and location of
the building or project, and the name of the Contractor. The following shall be included in the Manual:
.I The names, addresses and telephone numbers of each sub contractor that installed equipment and/or systems, and the local representative for each major item of equipment.
.2 Information assembled with tab sheets to conform to a Table of Contents.
.3 Manufacturer's literature for all mechanical equipment. All equipment shall be identified by
make, model and serial number. Electrical characteristics shall be noted and a complete parts list included.
Larwin Park
City of Carlsbad NTD #2002-0037
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
15010 - 2
.4 Operating Instructions: Provide a brief description of the system including proper setting of
switches and other equipment. This may be provided as part of the manufacturer's literature. If
included in literature, provide an index indicating on what page each item is located. Adjustments requiring the technical knowledge of the service agency personnel need not be included.
Maintenance Instructions: Provide a list of each item of mechanical equipment requiring
inspection, lubrication or service, with a description of the schedule and performance of such maintenance, including types of lubricant for each item of equipment. This may be provided as a
part of the manufacturer's literature. If included in literature, provide an index indicating on what
page each item is located.
Controls:
information, spare parts lists, etc.
.5
.6 Provide system control drawings including complete catalog data, calibration
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
3.1.1
3.1.2
3.1.3 _-
3.1.4
3.1.5
3.2
3.2.1
3.2.2
- 3.2.3
GENERAL
Locations: The locations of the mechanical work and equipment as indicated on the drawings are
approximate only, and the required final exact positions shall be verified with the Owner's Representative
prior to installation. All changes in locations of equipment shall be subject the approval of the Owner's
Representative.
Accessibility: All equipment shall be installed so as to be accessible for maintenance and adjustment
(crawling under or over ductwork is not acceptable). Special attention shall be given to motors, belts, air
filters, manual valves and control valves, operating dampers, coils, etc. This section of specifications shall be responsible for the supplying and installation of all required access panels.
Noise and Vibration: It is the intent of the specification and design conditions that the entire system, including equipment, air ducts, piping and all other parts, shall be free of excessive vibrations. If
excessive vibration occurs as a result of installation, it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to correct these conditions at no cost to the Owner.
Coordination: Before proceeding with installation of piping and ductwork, Contractor shall inspect the
Contract Drawings and determine that the location of the work does not interfere with work of other trades. In case of interference, contractor shall notify the Owner's Representative in writing and his
decisions shall govern.
Structural Members: Where piping passes through or interferes with slabs, beams or any structural
member, or where cutting of structure is required, the Owner's Representative shall be consulted. No
cutting of structural members shall be done without approval from the Owner's Representative. When
pipes are placed in partitions necessitating cutting of any structural member, metal ties shall be provided, in accordance with applicable structural code.
EQU I PM ENT I NSTALIATIO N
Obtain manufacturer's printed installation instructions to aid in properly executing work of installing
equipment whenever such instructions are available. Submit three copies of such instructions to the
Owner's Representative prior to time of installation for use in supervising the work.
All recommendations of the manufacturer shall be followed and required clearances maintained. All equipment shall be securely fastened to its base. A copy of the manufacturer's installation and service manual shall be kept with each piece of equipment to allow Owner's Representative to determine if the
installation meets requirements.
Erect equipment in a neat manner and align level and adjust for satisfactory operation. Install equipment
so that connecting and disconnecting of piping and accessories can be made readily, and so that all parts are easily accessible for inspection, operation, maintenance and repair. Minor deviation from
Larwin Park
City of Carlsbad NTD #2002-0037
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
15010 - 3
arrangements shown on drawings may be made, as approved by the Owner's Representative.
3.2.4
3.2.5
3.3
3.3.1
3.3.2
3.3.3
3.3.4
3.3.5
3.3.6
3.4
3.4.1
3.4.2
Rotating or reciprocating mechanical equipment shall be mounted on or suspended from vibration
isolators to prevent vibration and structural borne noise transmission to the building. Refer to each
mechanical section of these specifications for details. All vibration isolators shall be OSHPD pre- approved. Unless otherwise noted, flexible duct connectors shall be used between all fan openings and sheet metal work, and flexible piping connectors shall be used between all rotating mechanical
equipment and piping systems.
Provide seismic restraints for all mechanical equipment, piping, and ductwork in accordance with CCR Title 24, Part 2, Volume 2, Chapter 16A. Methods of installation shall be in accordance with SMACNA AGuidelines for Seismic Restraint of Mechanical Systems@, except mechanical equipment weighing 500
pounds and over shall be seismically anchored as per details on the drawings.
ADJUSTMENT AND OPERATION OF SYSTEM
When the work included in this specification is complete, and at such time as directed by the Owner's Representative, the Contractor shall adjust all parts of the system, advising the Owner's Representative
when this has been done and the work is ready for their final tests. Refer to Section 15990 "Balancing Air
Systems".
If it becomes necessary for temporary use of a system before completion, the Contractor shall adjust all parts as far as possible in order to make temporary use as effective as possible. After temporary use
and before acceptance tests, all systems shall be readjusted to meet permanent operational requirements.
Operation Test: The Contractor shall conduct an operation test to demonstrate that all building systems have been completed and perform in compliance with contract requirements. This test shall be performed under simulated operating conditions for one consecutive twenty-four hour period and may be
witnessed by the Owner's Representative at his option.
Test Cost and Results: The cost of utilities, material, and qualified operating personnel shall be borne by the Contractor. The Contractor shall provide written notice to the Owner's Representative at least five (5)
days prior to starting the test and shall provide a written record of test results using recording type
instruments where practical.
Verbal Operating Instructions: Upon completion of work, and at a time designated by the Owner's Representative, a competent representative from each supplier of major equipment items shall instruct a
representative of the Owner in the operation and maintenance of the equipment supplied by his
company. The minimum instruction time shall be one 4-hour period for air handling units, one 4-hour period for pumps and one 8-hour day for temperature control systems.
Certification: After completion of air and water balancing operations, the authorized representative for
each type of equipment shall check the equipment operation and shall certify that the equipment is operating properly.
CLEANING OF EQUIPMENT AND PREMISES
Contractor shall thoroughly clean all equipment and apparatus and leave in satisfactory condition for finishing and painting. If equipment has been supplied with factory finish, Contractor shall be responsible for touchup work and/or refinishing if required. During construction, contractor shall be responsible for
clean up of cartons, scrap or debris caused by his work, and complete cleanup of the area after each day
of work.
Each air handling system shall be thoroughly cleaned before being put into operation, either by vacuum cleaning or blowing out with a pressure blower.
Lamvin Park
City of Carlsbad NTD #2002-0037
*-* END OF SECTION clr**
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
15010 - 4
SECTION 15400 - PLUMBING
PART 1 - GENERAL -
1.1 SUMMARY
1.1.1 The work under this section includes the furnishing of all labor, material and equipment and performing
all operations in connection with plumbing work, as indicated on the drawings, specified herein, or
reasonably implied to complete the work. This includes but is not necessarily limited to:
.1
.2 Domestic water system
The word "piping" in this section includes pipe, fittings, nipples, valves, and any accessory pertinent to mains and connections throughout the system.
Sanitary sewer and vent system
1.1.2
1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS
1.2.1 The applicable requirements from the following sections shall form a part of this section.
Section 1501 0 Basic Mechanical Requirements
Section 15850 HVAC Equipment
Section 15990 Balancing Air Systems
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.1.1
2.1.2
2.1.3
2.1.4
2.1.5
2.1.6
2.2
2.2.1
2.2.2
2.2.3
2.2.4
GENERAL
All materials, fixtures, and equipment shall be new and of the type and grade specified. All materials
used for the same general use shall be of the same type, grade and manufacturer.
Unless otherwise specified, all exposed AP@ traps shall be adjustable, 17 gauge, chrome plated brass.
Unless otherwise specified, all exposed angle stops, nipples, and escutcheons shall be chrome plated
brass.
Accessible plumbing fixtures shall comply with all of the requirements of CBC section 11 15B.
Heights and location of all fixtures shall be in accordance with CBC table 11 15B-1.
Fixture controls shall comply with CBC table 11 18B.
FIXTURES
Protection: Cover and protect all fixtures until completion.
Exposed Metal: Unless otherwise specified, all exposed metal at fixtures shall be polished chrome plated.
Suppliers: Unless otherwise specified, individual fixtures shall all be from the same manufacturer, not interm ixed .
Water Closet, ADA, WC-1
.1 Water closet shall meet the American Disabilities Act Guidelines and California C.C.R. Title 24.
Water closet shall be 17", floor mounted, white vitreous china, siphon jet, with elongated bowl,
1.6 gallon flush valve, and 1-1/2 inch top spud. Water closet shall be American Standard
Larwin Park
City of Carlsbad
NTD #2002-0037
PLUMBING 15400 - 1
"Madera" 3043.102, or equal.
.2 Flush valve shall meet the American Disabilities Act Guidelines and California C.C.R. Title 24.
Valve shall be chrome plated, 1.6 gallon flush, with connection for 1-1/2" top spud, bumper on
angle stop, and vacuum breaker. Flush valve shall be Sloan ARoyal@ 11 1.
.3 Seat shall be white, solid plastic, elongated, contoured, with open front, and integrally molded
bumpers. Seat shall be Olsonite 95, or equal.
2.2.5 Water Closet, WC-2
.1 Water Closet shall be 15, floor mounted, white vitreous china, siphon jet, with elongated bowl,
1.6 gallon flush valve, and 1-112'' top spud. Water closet shall be American Standard AMadera@
2234.01 5, or equal.
.2 Flush Valve shall be chrome plated, 1.6 gallon flush, with connection for 1-1/2" top spud, bumper on angle stop, and vacuum breaker. Flush valve shall be Sloan ARoyal@ 11 1.
.3 Seat shall be white, solid plastic, elongated, contoured, with open front, and integrally molded bumpers. Seat shall be Olsonite 95, or equal.
2.2.6 Urinal, ADA, U-1
.1 Urinal shall meet the American Disabilities Act Guidelines and California C.C.R. Title 24. Urinal shall be wall mounted, white vitreous china, washout action, with extended sides, 1 .O gallon
flush, and 3/4 inch top inlet spud. Urinal shall be American Standard "Washbrook"6501.010, or
equal.
.2 Flush valve shall meet the American Disabilities Act Guidelines and California C.C.R. Title 24. Valve shall be chrome plated, 1 .O gallon flush, with connection for 3/4 inch top inlet spud, and
vacuum breaker. Flush valve shall be Sloan ARoyal@ 186-1,
.3 Carrier shall be floor mounted, J.R. Smith, Zurn, or equal.
2.2.7 Urinal, U-2
.1 Urinal shall be wall mounted, white vitreous china, washout action, with extended sides, 3/4 inch top inlet spud, and vacuum breaker. Urinal shall be American Standard AWashbrooke
6501.010, or equal.
.2 Flush valve shall be chrome plated, 1 .O gallon flush, with connection for 3/4 inch top inlet spud, and vacuum breaker. Flush valve shall be Sloan ARoyal@ 186-1.
.3 Carrier shall be floor mounted, J.R.Smith, Zurn, or equal.
2.2.8 Lavatory, ADA, L-1
.1 Lavatory shall meet the American Disabilities Act Guidelines and California C.C.R. Title 24. Lavatory shall be counter mounted, self-rimming, white vitreous china, 17 x 20 inch oval, with
faucet ledge and 4 inch centerset. Lavatory shall be American Standard "Aqualyn" 0476.028, or equal.
.2 Faucet shall meet the American Disabilities Act Guidelines and California C.C.R. Title 24.
Faucet shall be polished chrome plated brass, 4 inch centerset, single water connection, slow
closing, metering, vandal proof, with rose spray outlet, and grid strainer assembly. Faucet shall be Chicago Faucets 857-669, or equal.
Larwin Park
City of Carlsbad NTD #2002-0037 PLUMBING 15400 - 2
2.2.9 Mop Sink, MS-1
.1 Mop Sink shall be terrauo material, 24 x 24 x 12 inch, with 3 inch strainer outlet and stainless
steel cap. Mop sink shall be Williams AServiceptor@ SB-900, or equal.
.2 Faucet shall be polished chrome plated brass with vacuum breaker spout, wall flanges, pail
hook, wall support, .75 inch thread outlet, 2.5 inch metal handles and 8 inch centerset. Faucet
shall be Chicago Faucets 897, or equal.
2.2.10 Drinking Fountain, ADA, DF-1
.I Drinking fountain shall meet the American Disabilities Act Guidelines and California C.C.R. Title
24. Drinking fountain shall be wall mounted, dual height, 14 gauge stainless steel, with satin finish, back panel, push button valves, polished chrome plated brass bubbler heads and waste
strainers. Drinking fountain shall be Haws 11 19.14, or equal.
2.2.1 1 Hose Box, HB-1
.I Hose box shall be stainless steel, satin finish, with removable door, cylinder lock, removable
loose key handle, screwdriver stop, 3/4 inch inlet, 3/4 inch male hose outlet, and vacuum
breaker. Hose box shall be Acorn 8151, or equal.
2.2.12 Hose Bibb, HB-2
.I Hose Bibb shall be rough brass with 314 inch inlet, removable AT@ handle, 314 inch male hose
outlet, and atmospheric vacuum breaker. Hose Bibb shall be Chicago Faucets 15T-E27, or
equal.
2.2.13 Floor Drain, FD-1
.1 Floor drain shall be 2 inch, cast iron, adjustable, with 5 inch round nickel bronze strainer and trap primer connection. Floor drain shall be J.R. Smith 2005-P050, or equal.
.2 Flashing material, when required, shall be Nobleflex chlorinated polyethylene drain flashing, or
equal.
2.3 EQUIPMENT
2.3.1 Protection: All equipment shall be protected against damage during storage and installation.
2.3.2 Trap Primer, TP-1: Trap primer shall be automatic, with bronze body, integral vacuum breaker, and shall
have a distribution unit when serving more than one drain. Trap primer shall be J.R.Smith 2699, Zurn Z- 1022, Precision Products model P-1, or equal.
2.3.3 Water Hammer Arrester, WHA-1: Water hammer arrester shall be stainless steel and shall have been
tested and certified in accordance with the Plumbing Drainage Institute AStandard P.O.I. WH-201,
symbol B (for 12-32 fixture units). Water hammer arrester shall be J.R. Smith 5010,Zurn-1700-200, or equal.
2.3.4 Water Pressure Reducing Valve, PRV-1: Pressure reducing valve shall 2", capable of reducing water pressure from 100 PSI to 50 PSI, and shall be approved by the San Diego Water Utilities Dept. PRV valve shall be Watts 223 (2"), or equal.
2.4 PIPING
Larwin Park City of Carlsbad NTD #2002-0037 PLUMBING
15400 - 3
2.4.1 Sanitary Sewer and Vent Piping
.1 All soil, waste, and vent piping material and fittings within building and within 5 feet of building
boundary shall be cast iron, hubless, per ClSPl301 8, IAPMO IS 6, using stainless steel clamps
and shield assemblies per ClSPl 310.
.2 Cleanouts for Finished Floors: All soil and waste piping cleanouts in finished floor areas shall be
cast iron with a round, adjustable, non-skid nickel bronze top, and tapered bronze threaded plug
with raised square head or approved counter-sunk rectangular slot. Cleanouts shall be J.R.
Smith 4023, Zurn ZN-l4OO-SP, or equal.
.3 Cleanouts for Outside: All sewerldrain piping cleanouts outside of building shall be cast iron with
ribbed ferrule and tapered bronze threaded plug with raised square head or approved counter- sunk rectangular slot. Cleanouts shall be protected with a pre-cast concrete box with an iron lid, marked "SEWER. Cleanouts shall be J.R. Smith 4283-RHP, Zurn Z-1449-A-BP, or equal. Box
shall be San Diego Pre-cast Concrete, Brooks 3-T, or equal.
.4 Test Tees and Wall Cleanouts: All test tees and wall cleanouts shall be of an approved type.
Plugs shall be tapered, threaded bronze and shall have a raised square head or approved
counter-sunk rectangular slot.
2.4.2 Domestic Cold Water Piping
1 All cold water piping within building and within 5 feet of building boundary shall be copper, hard drawn, type "L" conforming to ASTM B 88 with cast solder joint fittings per ANSI B 16.18, or wrought solder joint fittings per ANSI B 16.22. Fittings shall be brazed with a silver base brazing
alloy or soldered with a lead-free solder and using a non-corrosive type flux.
.2 Shut off valves 2-inch and smaller shall be 3 piece, full port, bronze ball type, bronze trim, teflon seals, 600 psig WOG, with threaded or solder end joints as required. Valves shall be Nibco S-
595 series, Apollo 82 series, or equal.
.3 Unions 3-inches and smaller shall be all bronze with ground joint and 400 pound WWP.
.4 Nipples shall be red brass.
2.5 ACCESSORIES
2.5.1 Access Panels
.1 Access Panels for Valves and Equipment: Wall and ceiling access panels shall have a minimum
of 16 gauge doors, with continuous, concealed, fire-rated hinges. Panels shall be paintable and sized suitable for removal or repair of valves or equipment, but not less than 8 inches by 8
inches for hand holes and 20 inches by 24 inches for scuttle holes. Access panels shall be J.R.
Smith 4762 series for tile, masonry or dry wall construction, and J.R. Smith 4767 series for plaster or wet wall construction, or equal.
.2 Access Covers for Cleanouts: Access covers for walls shall be, 8 inches by 8 inches. Access
panels shall be J.R. Smith 4730 series for tile, masonry, or dry wall construction, and 4735 series for plaster or wet wall construction, or equal.
2.5.2 Pipe Sleeves: Pipe sleeves shall be schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe.
2.5.3 Dielectric Unions: Dielectric unions shall be Epco, V-Line, or equal.
2.5.4 Sealant: Sealant shall be silicone rubber, except at fire rated penetrations, sealant shall be Dow Corning 785/5, General Electric SCS 1702, or equal.
Larwin Park
City of Carlsbad NTD #2002-0037 PLUMBING 15400 - 4
2.5.5 Insulation
.- .I General: All insulation and covers shall have a UL flame spread not higher than 25 and a smoke
developed rating not higher than 50.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
3.1.1
3.1.2
3.1.3
3.1.4
3.1.5
3.2
3.2.1
3.2.2
3.2.3
3.2.4
3.3
3.3.1
3.3.2
3.3.3
GENERAL
All work shall be performed by skilled mechanics, under the supervision of a competent foreman and in accordance with the highest standards of practice of the trade.
All openings in pipes, fittings, fixtures, or equipment shall be capped at the end of each work day. All
materials, fixtures, and equipment shall have ample protection to prevent damage during construction.
Access panels shall be provided for all valves, cleanouts, and other equipment which is concealed in floors, walls, or ceilings.
The contractor shall be responsible for all damage to any part of the premises or its contents caused by
leaks, breaks in piping, fixtures, or equipment furnished and/or installed by contractor for a period of one
year from the date of acceptance of the work by the owner or his representative.
Fixtures or equipment with damaged finish shall be removed and replaced with new fixtureslequipment at the contractor's expense.
FIXTURE/EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
Fixture Setting: All fixtures shall be anchored and set level and square in relation to wall and floor lines,
and shall be installed with equal spacing where applicable. Voids between fixtures and walls/floors shall
be filled with Dow Corning No. 780, white mastic cement. The contractor shall be responsible for correct fixture locations.
Equipment Setting: All equipment shall be braced or anchored to resist a horizontal force in any direction
using the following criteria: a) 23% of operating weight for fixed equipment on grade, b) 34.5% of operating weight for fixed equipment on structure.
Drain Strainers: All drain strainers, unless otherwise specified, shall be set parallel to adjacent wall.
Electrical Work: See Electrical Section for all electrical work associated with the installation of
equipment.
PIPING INSTALLATION
Workmanship: All piping, except as shown otherwise on drawings, shall be run concealed in furred walls,
partitions, furred ceilings, etc. Prior to installation each piece of pipe and each fitting shall be inspected
inside and outside to assure that there are no defects or obstructions. Threaded joints shall be assembled with an approved pipe joint compound applied to male thread only with not more than two
threads left exposed.
Excavation: The Contractor shall be prompt in installing all piping after excavation or cutting for same, so as to keep all excavations for this work open as short a time as possible. No piping, however, shall be permanently closed up, furred in or covered before inspection and approval of same by the Owner's
representative.
Bushings: No bushings or close nipples shall be used. Reducing fittings and shoulder nipples shall be
used in all cases.
Larwin Park
City of Carlsbad
NTD #2002-0037
PLUMBING
15400 - 5
3.3.4
3.3.5
3.3.6
3.3.7
3.3.8
3.3.9
Pipe Preparations: Copper tubinglpipe shall be cut square and ends shall be reamed to full size with all
burrs removed. Tubing pipe ends and fitting sockets shall be burnished with emery cloth or wire brush
before a uniform coat of non-corrosive type flux is applied.
Pipe Runs: Pipe runs shall be made with full pipe lengths using a minimum of joints. All piping shall be accurately cut to length. No piping shall be forced or sprung into place. All off-sets shall be made with
fittings. Bending of pipe is not allowed.
Pipe Support: Piping shall be supported at each change of direction, at ends of branches, at base and at top of all risers, and wherever necessary to prevent sags, bending, or vibration of the piping. Pipe hangers and supports shall be selected as specified in Manufacturers Standardization Society of Valve
and Fittings Industry (MSS) standard SP-69.
Pipe Isolation: All piping shall be isolated from the building with 114 inch hair felt between pipe
hangers/supports, pipe insulators, and suspension clamps.
Pipe Sleeves: All piping passing through concretehnasonry floors and walls, or fire rated partitions shall
be provided with standard weight steel pipe sleeves as follows:
.I All sleeves through floors above grade shall extend 1 inch above floor line.
.2 All sleeves shall have 1 inch minimum clearance between the sleeve I.D. and the pipe or pipe
insulation.
.3 Clearance between sleeve and piping in non-fire rated walls, floors, or partitions shall be sealed with oakum, or equal.
Connections: All pipe connections to fixturelequipment that requires reduction in size shall be reduced
just prior to connection.
3.3.10 Escutcheons: All pipes passing through walls, floors, and ceilings in finished areas shall have chrome
plated steellbrass escutcheons.
3.3.1 1 Sanitary Drain Systems
.1 Install soil, waste, and vent piping to all outlets as shown on drawings. Piping shall be supported
and strapped in an approved manner. Sanitary piping in and under the building shall run to a uniform grade. Contractor shall verify the point of connection as shown on drawings regarding invert elevation and location before starting work. Waste lines shall not penetrate shear wall top
and bottom plates.
.2 Drains: All drains installed not on grade shall incorporate a clamping collar and flashing.
Flashing shall extend 8 inches out in all directions.
.3 Interior Clean Outs: Interior cleanouts shall be installed where indicated and as required by
code. Cleanouts shall be accessible, and where possible, shall be brought to grade and set flush with finished floor. Horizontal drainage piping shall be provided with cleanouts at its upper
terminals, at changes in pipe sizes and not over 100 feet apart in any lineal run of piping.
.4 Exterior Cleanouts: Exterior cleanouts in concrete or asphalt areas shall set flush with grade or paved area. Cleanouts in earth shall be extended to within 6-inches of finished grade and
terminated in a concrete box set level with finished grade. Clean out plugs shall be liberally
lubricated with graphite, turned tight and backed off slightly.
3.3.12 Sanitary Vent System
.1 Vents shall be connected together in attic spaces or walls where practical to penetrate roof as
few times as possible. Vents shall not penetrate top plates or structural beams but shall offset
Larwin Park
City of Carlsbad PLUMBING
NTD #2002-0037 15400 - 6
around them. All vents through roof shall be flashed.
3.3.1 3
3.4
3.4.1
3.4.2
3.4.3
3.5
3.5.1
.2 Vent Termination: All vents and flue outlets shall be a minimum of 10 feet from all fresh air intakes.
Domestic Water System
.I Install water piping to all fixtures, hose bibbs, etc., as shown on drawings. All branches to
fixtures shall be valved. Single fixtures and lines to hose bibbs shall be valved. Where supplies are concealed, or where indicated, loose-key stops shall be installed. Drop ear fittings with red
brass nipples shall be provided at all 'outlets.
.2 Slope: All water piping shall be graded and valved to provide for drainage control of the system.
.3 Noise: Water piping shall be installed so as to not cause noise from flow of water under normal
conditions.
.4 Isolation: Copper lines shall be isolated from all dissimilar metal and equipment with dielectric
couplings. Dielectric couplings shall be used for all connections between pipe or tubing and all hot water equipment inlets and outlets.
TESTING
General: Operational test shall be conducted on all fixtures, equipment, and devices installed, to
determine proper compliance with specifications. All fixtures, equipment, and devices shall function quietly, efficiently, and undue noise or vibration caused by piping, equipment, etc, shall be promptly
corrected before acceptance.
Sanitary Drain and Rainwater System: All sanitary drain, vent and rainwater piping shall be hydrostatically tested to a minimum of a 10 foot head above the head at the highest inlet. Pressure shall be maintained for a minimum of (1) hour. The system shall have no leaks.
Domestic Water System: Prior to disinfection and installation of pipe insulation, all domestic water piping
shall be hydrostatically tested at 125 psig at the highest outlet for minimum of four (4) hours. Any equipment or fixtures that may be damaged by the test should be disconnected. No perceptible gauge
loss shall be allowed except for temperature change.
CLEANING
Disinfection of Portable Water System
.I General: New or repaired potable water systems shall be disinfected prior to use whenever required by the Administrative Authority. The method to be followed shall be that prescribed by
the health authority or, in case no method is prescribed by them, the following:
.2 The pipe system shall be flushed with clean, potable water until only potable water appears at the point of outlet.
.3 The system or parts thereof shall be filled with a water-chlorine solution containing at least fifty
(50) parts per million of chlorine and the system or part thereof shall be valved-off and allowed to stand for twenty-four (24) hours, or, the system or part thereof shall be at least two hundred (200) parts per million of chlorine and allowed to stand for three (3) hours.
.4 Following the allowed standing time, the system shall be flushed with clean, portable water until the chlorine residual in the water coming from the system does not exceed the chlorine residual
in the flushing water.
.-
.5 The procedure shall be repeated if it is shown by bacteriological examination made by an
Larwin Park
City of Carlsbad NTD #2002-0037 PLUMBING 15400 - 7
approved agency that contamination persists in the system.
**** END OF SECTION ****
Larwin Park City of Carlsbad
NTD #2002-0037 PLUMBING
15400 - 8
SECTION 15850 - HVAC EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1.1.1
I
The work under this section includes the furnishing of all labor material, and equipment, and performing all operations in connection with heating, ventilating and air conditioning work, as shown and specified.
The work includes but is not necessarily limited to:
.1 Exhaust Fans .2 Air Distribution
.3 Ductwork
1.1.2
1.2 REFERENCE TO OTHER SECTIONS
1.2.1 The applicable requirements from the following Sections shall form a part of the heating, ventilating and
air conditioning (HVAC) work and the Contractor shall consult them in detail for general and specific requirements.
Section 1501 0
Section 15400 Plumbing
Section 15950 Balancing Air Systems
Basic Mechanical Requirements
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.1.1
2.2
2.2.1
GENERAL
All material and equipment used in the installation shall be new and in perfect condition when installed.
Material, equipment and components shall be the standard catalog product of reputable manufacturers
regularly engaged in the manufacturing of such equipment. All articles provided for the same general purpose or use shall be of the same make. Submittal of any equipment for approval shall specifically
indicate any item that does not meet the specification. If approval is given when such items have not
been listed, removal of the equipment may be required.
EQUl PM ENT
Exhaust Fan(EF-1)
.1 Fan shall be factory assembled with square housing for in-line mounting in duct. Fan shall have
physical arrangement and capacity shown on drawings. Fan shall be Greenheck Model BSQ, or equal.
.2 Wheel shall be backwardly inclined centrifugal type, constructed of steel or aluminum that has
been statically and dynamically balanced.
.3 The housing shall be constructed of formed steel, square shaped, with factory applied finish.
One of the sides shall be hinged and shall support the motor and wheel assembly, allowing the assembly to swing out for cleaning, inspection or service. The fan inlet shall be a spun venturi
throat overlapped by a backward curved centrifugal wheel with spun cone. The motor shall be
isolated from the air stream by a motor enclosure and shall draw cooling air from outside of the fan housing.
.4 Motor shall be in accordance with paragraph 2.2.6 of this section.
.5 Ratings shall be in accordance with the appropriate AMCA approved test codes and procedures
Larwin Park City of Cartsbad
NTD #2002-0037
HVAC EQUIPMENT
15850 - 1
and bear the "AMCA Certified Rating Seal."
2.2.2 Motors
.I
.2
and Starters
Motors shall be built to the specification of NEMA. The motor shall be ball bearing, drip proof,
squirrel cage induction type, to operate at speeds not to exceed 1,750 rpm, except when indicated otherwise. The motors shall operate at current listed on the drawings. Motors
mounted outdoors shall be totally enclosed (TWO). The minimum service factor shall be
designed to operate in ambient temperatures up to 150 degrees F. All single-phase motors shall have built-in thermal overload protection. Motors of one horsepower and above, which are not
part of a hermetically sealed system, shall be Premium Efficiency type as defined by NEMA Test
Standard MG112.53A (IEEE-112 Test Method B), using segregated loss determination.
Starters shall be across-the-line type or part winding type, as required, with overload protection on all legs, and shall be manual or magnetic. Starters shall be complete with NEMA Type I enclosures, with built-in "Hand-Off-Automatic" switch. Magnetic starters exposed to weather
shall have NEMA Type IV enclosure.
2.2.3 Air Distribution
.I Exhaust air registers and grilles shall have horizontal blades at 3/4 inch centers. Return
registers shall be surface mounted type and shall have opposed blade dampers. Construction
shall be steel. Registers and grilles shall be Krueger Model S80H, Titus, or equal.
.2 Factory applied finish shall be white baked enamel.
2.2.4 Vibration Isolation
.I Mechanical equipment shall be mounted on vibration isolators, as indicated on drawings, to prevent the transmission of vibration and mechanically transmitted sound to the building
structure.
.2 Manufacturer Responsibilities: Manufacturer of vibration isolation and seismic control products
shall have the following responsibilities:
.a Determine vibration isolation and seismic restraint size and locations.
.b Submit shop drawings. Shop drawings shall include spring data, deflection, free and
operating height and structural member sizes.
.c Provide installation instructions and drawings.
.d Provide calculations to determine resistant loads resulting' from seismic forces presented in UBC 2312, governing codes, project seismic requirements; with a
minimum 0.5G seismic acceleration applied at the equipment center of mass. Seismic
calculations shall be certified by a licensed engineer, experienced in the design of
restraints for flexibility mounted equipment.
.e Provide certification of seismic restraints capability to safely accept loads resulting from seismic forces determined by methods defined above. Certification must be substantiated by calculations or test reports verified by a licensed engineer.
.f Corrosion Protection: When exposed to weather, all steel parts of isolator housing and
seismic restraints shall be hot dip galvanized. All hardware shall be cadmium plated
and springs are to be neoprene coated.
.3 Vibration Isolator, Spring Hanger Type (VI-7): Vibration hangers shall contain a steel spring with
a neoprene rod isolation bushing that passes through the hanger box. Spring diameters and
Larwin Park City of Carlsbad HVAC EQUIPMENT
NTD #2002-0037 15850 - 2
.-
hanger box lower hole sizes shall be large enough to permit the hanger rod to swing through a
30 degree arc. Springs shall have a minimum additional travel to solid equal to 50% or the rated deflection. Submittals shall include a scale drawing of the hanger showing 30 degree capability. Hangers shall be Type 30 as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc., Consolidated Kinetics
Corp., or equal.
2.3 DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES
2.3.1 All ducts shall be prime quality, galvanized steel and shall be lock-forming quality (LFQ) with a galvanized
coating of 1-114 ounces total for both sides of 1 square foot of sheet. Round ducts and fittings shall be galvanized steel of spiral construction. The elbows shall be a minimum of 12 times the duct radius.
2.3.2 Flexible Ducts: Flexible duct shall be factory fabricated assembly, consisting of a galvanized spring steel wire helix, covered with a continuous non-perforated air sealed liner, wrapped with glass fiber insulation,
1-1/2" thick (K = 0.25 @ 75 degrees F). The assembly shall be enclosed in a Class 1, fire resistive,
vapor barrier jacket, factory sealed at both ends. Individual lengths of flexible ducts shall be a maximum of seven feet long and shall include factory fabricated steel collars.
2.3.3 Fan Connections: Duct connections to fans, blowers and air handling units shall be made with flexible
duct connector of approved design, with a minimum distance of 2 inches between ducts and fans, and
minimum 112 inch slack in flexible material. Flexible connectors shall be heat-resistant and waterproof glass fiber with a non-porous fire-resistant neoprene coating (both sides). Material shall be approved by
State of California Fire Marshal and Underwriter's Laboratories. Connection shall be easily removable
with an ordinary screwdriver. Connections shall be Ventglass, Ventfabrics, Neoprene by Duro-Dyne, or equal. Flexible material shall overlap minimum 2 inches at seam and shall be closed air tight.
2.3.4 Volume dampers shall be manufactured of 16 gauge sheet metal with locking quadrants and shall be
opposed blade type. Where dimension of duct exceeds 19 inches by 12 inches, blades shall not be over
8 inches wide. Bearing shall be provided; holes punched in ductwork to serve as bearings will not be
accepted. Damper quadrant sizes shall be as follows: Up to 40 square inches shall be 114 inch quadrant,
up to 18 inches wide by 12 inches high shall be 318 inch quadrant, and over 18 inches by 12 inches shall be 1/2 inch quadrant. Dampers shall be caulked in the ducts to avoid by-pass. Damper blade position on all dampers shall be indicated by filing a notch in the exposed operation rod or splitter damper rod.
Volume control dampers shall be installed in all branch ducts, whether shown on drawings or not, to allow
balancing of the system. Where dampers, frames and blades constitute an obstruction in excess of 15% of the duct area, the duct shall be increased in size to receive the dampers.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
3.1.1 All work shall be performed by skilled mechanics, under the supervision of a competent foreman and in accordance with the best standards of practice of the trade.
3.2 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
3.2.1 The installation of exhaust fans, and other equipment specified or shown on drawings shall be strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and installation book. All recommendations of manufacturer shall be followed, required clearances maintained, and factory approval secured for each
installation. All equipment shall be securely fastened to its base. A copy of the manufacturer's
installation and service manual shall be kept with each piece of equipment at all times to determine if the
installation meets requirements.
.1 All mechanical equipment shall be braced or anchored to resist horizontal force acting in any direction using the following criteria.
Fixed Equipment on Grade 23% of Operating Weight _-
Larwin Park City of Carlsbad NTD #2002-0037 HVAC EQUIPMENT 15850 - 3
Fixed Equipment on Structure 34.5% of Operating Weight
3.2.2
3.2.3
3.3
3.3.1
3.3.2
3.3.3
.2 For Closely Restrained, Flexibly Mounted Equipment, use 2x the above values. Simultaneous Vertical Force, use 113 x horizontal force. Where anchorage details are not shown on Drawings
for equipment over 500 pounds, the field installation shall be subject to the approval of the
Owner's Representative.
.3 Seismic Bracing and anchorage of ducts and piping shall be in accordance with sheets 1-48 of "Guidelines for Seismic Restraints of Mechanical Systems and Plumbing Piping Systems", published by SMACNA and approved by Owner's Representative.
Air Handling Units and Apparatus must be kept covered and clean during construction; required
clearances maintained when installed for coil, motor and filter service; duct connections to units sealed air tight with caulking or canvas and lagging adhesive; coil piping installed according to manufacturer's
instructions, generally with water in bottom and out the top, with counterflow between air and water; coil
connections provided with auxiliary pan if required to avoid condensate dripping; insulation on all piping connections complete up to the coil; condensate drains installed to nearest receptor for all cooling coils,
drains must be trapped, depth of trap to equal 1-112 times system operating pressure. Provision for
bearing lubrication where bearings are not easily accessible (oil or grease line extended to accessible side).
Air Distribution
.1 Registers and Grilles in walls or ceilings of plaster or drywall shall be provided with plaster
grounds of 24 gauge galvanized steel to receive screws where removable frames are not
specified.
.2 Terminal Connection to ductwork shall be sealed securely with lagging adhesive and canvas or with caulking compound.
.3 Extractors shall be adjusted to even the air flow across the face of the terminal.
.4 Visible ducts behind grilles, registers and diffusers shall be painted flat black.
.5 Any accessible screws shall have a drop of super glue placed on the thread.
DUCTWORK INSTALLATION
Ductwork fabrication and installation shall conform to the recommendation of the latest edition of the
HVAC Duct Construction Standards, as published by the Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors
National Assoc., Inc., (SMACNA). These standards shall govern type of seams and joints, reinforcing and supports, corner closures duct hangers, elbows, turning vanes (use double vane-type), tapers
offsets; streamliners, branches from mains, tee connections, register grille and ceiling diffuser
connections, volume dampers, access doors in ducts, fire damper installation, and plenums.
Sheet Metal Installation: All necessary allowances and provisions shall be made in the installation of the ducts for the structural condition of the building, and ducts shall be transformed or divided as may be
required, and where necessary to do this, the required area shall be maintained. All of these changes,
however, shall be approved and installed as directed by the Owner's Representative. During the
installation, the open ends of ducts shall be protected to prevent debris and dirt from entering same.
Contractor shall install this work in accordance with the approved progress schedule and in cooperation
with others, so there will be no delay in other trades.
All ducts shall be sealed airtight by covering all duct joints and connections to equipment with a 4 inch
minimum width of 6 ounce canvas pasted in with lagging adhesive or high pressure duct sealer. Duct
exposed in non-conditioned spaces shall have canvas and lagging painted with aluminum paint to match adjacent galvanized duct.
Latwin Park City of Carlsbad
NTD #2002-0037
HVAC EQUIPMENT
15850 - 4
3.3.4
-. 3.3.5
3.3.6
3.3.7
3.4
3.4.1
Larwin Park City of Carlsbad
NTD #2002-0037
All supply and return duct seams and joints exposed to weather shall be caulked watertight with acrylic sealant and shall have 4 inch minimum width of 6 ounces canvas pasted on with lagging adhesive.
Volume control dampers shall be installed in all branch ducts, whether shown on drawings or not, to allow
balancing of system and adjust air quantities to all supply, return and exhaust outlets and outside air
intakes. Dampers provided with outlets shall not be used for balancing.
Flexible duct shall be installed in a fully extended condition, free of sags and kinks, and, as far as
practical, using only the minimum length required to make the connection. Flexible ducts shall be
supported independently of the air outlets, and where horizontal support is required, shall be suspended
on 36-inch centers with a minimum 3/4 inch wide flat banding material. Connection of flexible duct
(termination connections and joints) shall be made with 112 inch wide positive locking steel straps.
Duct Air Leakage Test
.I General: Test all ductwork and plenums for leaks, using a portable high pressure blower and calibrated flow metering tube. Ducts may be tested in sections. Isolate and provide temporary
caps as required. Make test before sections are concealed.
.2 Duct Test Pressure:
.a System pressure up to I" w.g. test for 1-1/4" w.g.
.3 Procedures
.a Seal all openings in duct and plenum section to be tested.
.b Connect blower and flow metering tube to duct being tested, using a flexible duct connection or hose.
Close damper on blower suction side, to prevent excessive build-up pressure.
Start blower and gradually open damper on suction side of blower.
Build up pressure in test section to static pressure indicated.
Determine total leakage by make-up air flow measurement using a calibrated orifice tube with its individual calibrated curve and make repairs as required.
Determine total leakage, allowable of 5%, based upon the total operating CFM of
system being tested. Determine total leakage by summation of leakage for each section of system tested.
.c
.d
.e
.f
ELECTRICAL WORK
Items covered under Electrical Section of Work:
.I All power wiring, conduits and connections serving motors, to disconnect switches for control
circuits, and to control panels which are equipment mounted.
Disconnect switches shall be furnished, installed, wired and connected.
Wiring, gutters, junction boxes, outlets and miscellaneous devices shall be furnished, installed, wired and connected.
Final power connections to electrical power driven equipment.
.2
.3
.4
HVAC EQUIPMENT
15850 - 5
3.4.2 Items covered under Mechanical Section of Work:
.I All power wiring, conduits and connections serving motors on automatic (temperature) control devices and to control panels which are not factory mounted.
.2 All automatic (temperature) control and interlock wiring, regardless of voltage and conduits for
same, necessary for proper operation of equipment, shall be furnished, installed, wired and
connected. This includes interlock wiring between motor starter, coils, interlocking relays, magnetic contractors, equipment control panels and temperature control devices.
.3 Control transformer, push buttons, toggle switches, temperature control devices, etc., shall be
furnished, installed, wired and connected.
.4 Mechanical contractor shall coordinate DDC control panel location and electrical requirements
with the control contractor and electrical contractor prior to bid.
3.4.3 Items covered under both Mechanical and Electrical Section of Work:
.I It shall be the responsibility of both Contractors to provide equipment with the proper electrical characteristics for the electrical service provided. All necessary electrical components to provide
a complete system shall be furnished.
3.5 ID EN T I F I CAT IO N
3.5.1 Equipment: Equipment shall be identified by stenciling the identification plainly (such as AH-I as shown
on equipment schedule) on the service side. Lettering to be minimum size of 1". This applies to air
handling units, fans, etc.
.1 All temperature control equipment shall be identified with vinyl tape with embossed lettering. Minimum 318 inch wide tape.
3.6 TEST AND BALANCE
3.6.1 The Mechanical Contractor shall in general, cooperate with the Test and Balance Agency and specifically
Paragraph 1.7 of Section 15990 of the specifications.
w* END OF SECTION ****
Larwin Park
City of Carlsbad
NTD #2002-0037 HVAC EQUIPMENT
15850 - 6
SECTION 15990 - BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL -
1 .I
1.1.1
1.1.2
1.1.3
1.2
1.2.1
1.3
1.3.1
1.3.2
1.3.3
1.3.4
1.3.5
1.3.6
1.4
1.4.1
SUMMARY
The work in this section includes the adjusting and balancing of all heating, ventilation and air
conditioning systems.
The General Contractor will select and employ an impartial, independent balancing agency to
provide testing and balancing services for the heating, ventilating and air conditioning system of
this project. These services will be paid for by the General Contractor. Final approval of the balancing
agency shall be the Owner's Representative. The balancing agency will have a contractual relationship
with the General Contractor.
The schedule for testing and balancing the HVAC systems shall be established by the General
Contractor in coordination with the balancing agency. It is the balancing agency's responsibility to initiate
this continuing coordination to determine his schedule for the final testing and balancing setvices and the periodic inspections required during construction.
REFERENCE TO OTHER SECTIONS
The applicable requirements from the following sections shall form a part of balancing of air and water
system work and the agency shall consult them in detail for general and specific requirements.
Section 1501 0
Section 15400
Section 15850
Basic Mechanical Requirements
Plumbing
HVAC Equipment
QUALIFICATIONS OF THE BALANCING AGENCY
The balancing agency shall be a member of the Associated Air Balance Council (AABC) or National
Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB).
To perform required professional services, the balancing agency shall have a minimum of one Test and Balance Engineer certified by the Associated Air Balance Council or the National Environmental
Balancing Bureau.
This certified Test and Balance Engineer shall be responsible for supervision and certification for the total
work herein specified.
The balancing agency shall submit records of experience in the field of air and hydronic system balancing
or any other data as requested by the Owner's Representative. The supervisory personnel for the firm
shall have at least five (5) years experience, and all the employees used in this project shall be qualified technicians in this specific field.
The balancing agency shall furnish all necessary calibrated instrumentation to adequately perform the
specified services. An inventory of all instruments and devices in possession.of the balancing agency
may be required by the Owner's Representative to determine the balancing agency's performance capability .
The balancing agency shall have operated for a minimum of three (3) years under its current name.
STANDARDS
The balancing agency shall perform the services specified herein in accordance with the Associated Air
Balance Council's or National Environmental Balancing Bureau's NATIONAL STANDARDS, including
Larwin Park
City of Carlsbad NTD #2002-0037 BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS 15990 - 1
revisions, to the date of the contract.
1.4.2 All terms in this specification shall have their meaning defined as stated in the NATIONAL STANDARDS.
1.4.3
1.5
1.5.1
1.6
1.6.1
I .6.2
1.6.3
1.7
1.7.1
1.7.2
If these specifications set forth more stringent requirements than the NATIONAL STANDARDS, these
specifications shall prevail.
DOCUMENTS
The Architect will provide the balancing agency one (1) copy of the following documents:
.1 Project drawings (mechanical sepias if requested) and specifications.
.2 Approved construction revisions pertaining to the HVAC systems.
.3 Approved submittal data on HVAC equipment and systems to be installed by the Mechanical Subcontractor.
.4 Approved HVAC shop drawings.
.5 Approved HVAC wiring diagrams, control diagrams, and equipment brochures, as appropriate.
COORDINATION
It will be necessary for the balancing agency to perform its services in close coordination with the
Mechanical Subcontractor.
The plans and specifications have indicated dampers, and other devices for the purposes of adjusting the
system to obtain optimum operating conditions. It will be the responsibility of the Mechanical
Subcontractor to install these devices in a manner that will leave them accessible and readily adjustable.
The balancing agency shall provide guidance if there is a questionable arrangement of a control or balancing device.
The General Contractor, Mechanical Contractor, and the suppliers of the HVAC equipment shall all
cooperate with the balancing agency to provide all necessary data on the design and proper application
of the system components. In addition, they shall furnish all labor and materials required toeliminate any
system deficiencies.
RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR
The Mechanical Contractor shall complete the installation and start all HVAC systems to ensure they are working properly, and shall perform all other items as described hereinafter, to assist the balancing agency in performing the testing and balancing of the HVAC systems. The Mechanical Contractor shall
put all HVAC systems and equipment in full operation and shall continue the operating of them during
each working day of testing and balancing.
Air Distribution Systems
.1 Verify installation for conformity to design.
.2 Terminate all exhaust ducts, and pressure test them for leaking, as required by specification.
.3 Ensure that all splitters, extractors, and volume and fire dampers are properly located and
functional. Dampers serving requirements of minimum and maximum outside, return, relief, and
exhaust air shall provide tight closure and full opening, with a smooth and free operation.
.4 Verify that all exhaust, grilles are installed and operational.
Larwin Park
City of Carlsbad NTD #2002-0037 BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS 15990 - 2
1.8
1.8.1
1.8.2
1.9
1.9.1
.5 Ensure that air handling systems, units, and associated apparatus are blanked andlor sealed to eliminate excessive by-pass or leakage of air.
.6 Ensure that all fans are operating and free of vibration. All fans and drives shall be checked for
proper fan rotation and belt tension. Overload protection shall be of proper size and rating. A
record of motor current and voltage shall be made to verify that the motors do not exceed
nameplate rating.
.7 Make any necessary changes to the sheaves, belts, and dampers, as required by the balancing agency, at no additional cost to the Owner.
NOTIFICATION FOR TESTING AND BALANCING WORK TO BEGIN
The General Contractor shall notify the balancing agency in writing when all heating, ventilating, and air
conditioning systems are complete and ready for testing and balancing. The Mechanical Contractor shall attest that he has completed all items as described in Section I .7 of these specifications.
If, upon commencing the work, the Balancing Contractor finds that the systems are not ready, or if a
dispute occurs as to the readiness of the systems, the balancing agency shall request an inspection to be made by the Mechanical Engineer. This inspection shall establish, to the satisfaction of the represented
parties, whether or not the systems meet the basic requirements for testing and balancing. Should the
inspection reveal the notification to have been premature, all costs for the inspection and work previously accomplished by the balancing agency shall be paid for by the General Contractor. Furthermore, such
items that are not ready for testing and balancing shall be completed and placed in operational readiness
before testing and balancing services shall again be requested.
QUANTITIES
In all cases where a device, operation, procedure, tool, equipment, or part of the equipment is herein
referred to in the singular number, it is intended that such reference shall apply to as many such devices
as required to complete the testing and balancing specified herein.
PART 2 - RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE BALANCING AGENCY
2.1
2.1.1
2.2
2.2.1
2.2.2
2.2.3
SCOPE
In accordance with Project Drawings and Specifications and as specified herein, the balancing agency
shall provide all supervision, personnel, instruments, calibration equipment, and all other materials and
services necessary to perform all testing and balancing of the heating, ventilating, and air conditioning systems. All test data, including all pertinent calculations, shall be reported on appropriate forms.
I
GENERAL
The testing and balancing of the heating, ventilating, and air conditioning systems shall be performed by an independent balancing agency approved by the Owner's Representative. The balancing agency shall have a minimum of five years specialized experience in air and hydronic system balancing, and possess
calibrated instruments, qualified Test and Balance Engineers, and skilled technicians to perform all
required tests. The balancing agency shall be a certified member of the Associated Air Balance Council.
The tests shall demonstrate the specified capacities and operation of all equipment and materials comprising the systems. The balancing agency shall then make available to the Owner's Representative such instruments and technicians as are required for spot checks of the system.
The balancing agency shall not instruct or direct the Mechanical Contractor in any of the work. Any proposed changes or revision in the design shall be submitted to the Architect in writing. The Architect
shall, in coordination with his Engineer, process the proposal as appropriate.
Larwin Park
City of Carlsbad
NTD #2002-0037
BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS
15990 - 3
2.3
2.3.1
2.3.2
2.4
2.4.1
2.5
2.5.1
SERVICES
During construction, the balancing agency shall inspect the installation of sheet metal work, temperature
controls and other component parts of the heating, ventilating, and air conditioning systems. The balancing agency shall submit a brief written report of each inspection to the Owner's Representative.
Upon completion of the installation and start-up of the mechanical equipment by the Mechanical
Contractor, the balancing agency shall test and balance the system components to obtain optimum conditions in each conditioned space in the building. If construction deficiencies are encountered that preclude obtaining optimum conditions, and the deficiencies cannot be corrected by the Mechanical
Contractor within a reasonable period of time, the balancing agency shall cease testing and balancing
services and advise the Owner in writing of the deficiencies.
AIR SYSTEM PROCEDURES
The balancing agency shall perform the following testing and balancing functions in accordance with the
Associated Air Balance Council's NATIONAL STANDARDS:
.I
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.a
.9
.IO
Fan Speeds: Test and adjust fan RPM to achieve design CFM requirements.
Current and Voltage: Measure and record motor current and voltage.
Pitot Tube Traverse: Perform a pitot tube traverse of main supply and return ducts to obtain total
CFM.
Static Pressure: Test and record system pressures, including suction and discharge static
pressure of each fan.
Main Ducts: Adjust main ducts to within design CFM requirements and traverse for total CFM quantities.
Branch Ducts: Adjust branch ducts to within design CFM requirements. Multi-diffuser branch ducts shall have at least one outlet or inlet volume damper completely open.
Tolerances: Test and balance each diffuser, grille, and register to within 10% of design
requirements.
Identification: Identify the location and area of each grille. This information shall be recorded on
air outlet data sheets.
Description: Record the size, type, and manufacturer of each grille on air outlet data sheets.
Minimizing Drafts: Adjust all grilles to minimize drafts in all areas.
TEST AND BALANCE REPORT
The Test and Balance Report shall be complete with logs, data, and records as required herein. All logs,
data, and records shall be typed on white bond paper and bound. The report shall be certified accurate and complete by the balancing agency's certified Test and Balance Engineer.
Lanrvin Park City of Carlsbad
NTD #2002-0037
BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS 15990 - 4
2.5.2 Six (6) copies of the Test and Balance Report are required and shall be submitted to the Owner's
Representative.
The report shall contain the following general data in a format selected by the balancing agency. 2.5.3
.I Project Num ber
.2 Contract Number
.3 Project Title
.4 Project Location
.5 Project Architect
.6 Project Mechanical Engineer
.7 Test and Balance Agency
.8 Test and Balance Engineer
.9 General Contractor
.IO Mechanical Subcontractor
.ll Dates Tests Were Performed
.I2 Certification - 2.5.4 The Test and Balance Report shall be recorded on report forms conforming to the recommended forms in the AABC NATIONAL STANDARDS or NEBB STANDARDS. At a minimum, the report shall include:
.I Preface: A general discussion of the system, any abnormalities and problems encountered.
.2 Instrumentation List: The list of instruments including type, model, manufacturer, serial number,
and calibration dates.
.3 System Identification: In each report, the zones, supply, return, and exhaust openings, and
traverse points shall be numbered and/or lettered to correspond to the numbers and letters used
on the report data sheets. A single line drawing shall be prepared for each floor or system to cross reference information on the data sheets.
.4 Air Handling Equipment Test Report Forms: Record the following on each air handling
equipment test form:
.I Manufacturer, model number, and serial number.
.2 All design and manufacturer rated data.
.3 Total actual CFM by traverse; see the AABC NATIONAL STANDARDS or NEBB STANDARDS.
.4 Suction and discharge static pressure of each fan, as applicable.
.5 Actual operating current, voltage, and brake horsepower of each fan motor.
.6 Final RPM of each fan.
Larwin Park City of Carlsbad NTD #2002-0037
BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS
15990 - 5
.7 Fan and motor sheave manufacturer, model, size, number of grooves, and center
distance.
.8 Belt size and quantity.
.9 Static pressure controls final operating set points.
2.6 FINAL ACCEPTANCE
2.6.1 At the time of final inspection, the balancing agency shall recheck, in the presence of the Owner's
Representative, specific and random selections of data recorded in the certified Test and Balance
Report.
2.6.2 Points and areas for recheck shall be selected by the Owner's Representative.
2.6.3 Measurements and test procedures shall be the same as the original test and balance.
2.6.4 Selections for recheck, specific plus random, shall not normally exceed 15% of the total number
tabulated in the report, except where special air systems require a complete recheck for safety reasons.
2.6.5 If random tests demonstrate a measured flow deviation of 10% or more from that recorded in the certified Test and Balance Report, the report shall automatically be rejected. In the event the report is rejected, all systems shall be readjusted and tested, new data recorded, a new certified Test and Balance Report
submitted, and a new inspection test made, all at no additional cost to the Owner.
Larwin Park
City of Carlsbad
NTD #2002-0037
-** END OF SECTION ****
BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS
15990 - 6
"- SECTION 16050 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
SCOPE I .I
1.1.1
1.1.2
1.1.3
1.1.4
- 1 .I .5
1.2
1.2.1
1.3
1.3.1
The provisions of this section are general and are intended to apply to the electrical work in all
sections of these specifications to govern quality of design, fabrication, workmanship, operation
and function of materials, equipment and appurtenances to be furnished and installed for all the
electrical work specified.
The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment and appurtenances necessary for the complete and satisfactory installation and operation of the electrical systems as shown on the
drawings and specified herein.
The Contractor shall also meet requirements specified in the General Requirements and the
Special Provisions for electrical work, such as operating and maintenance manuals, warranty,
shop and working drawings, spare parts, etc.
Throughout the specifications, types of materials may be specified by manufacturer's name and catalog number in order to establish standards of quality and performance and not for the purpose of limiting competition. Alternate methods and/or materials may be submitted to the Architect for
consideration. Those judged to be equal to that specified, may receive written approval.
Throughout the specification material identified in singular or plural tense shall be recognized as
either singular or plural. Refer to drawings for exact number of items.
COORDINATION
The Contractor shall examine all other sections of these specifications and drawings to determine the complete scope of the electrical work and coordinate all of the electrical work required for the
entire project. The Contractor shall provide the correct electrical service to each piece of
electrical equipment whether or not shown on the drawings, and check and coordinate the required electrical service and controls with the actual equipment provided under the other
sections of the project.
INTERPRETATION OF DRAWINGS
The drawings show the general layout of the electrical systems and indicate approximate
locations of outlets, apparatus and equipment. The runs of feeders and branches as shown on the drawings are schematic only and are not intended to shown the exact routing and location of
conduits and conduit termination. The final determination as to routing, location and termination shall be governed by structural conditions, obstructions and job conditions. This shall not be construed to mean that the design of the system may be changed without written approval of the
Engineer; it merely refers to the exact run of raceways and the exact placement of outlets, etc. It
shall be the Contractor's responsibility to obtain all shop ,drawings affecting conduit locations
before installation. The Contractor shall consult all contract drawings and specifications which
may affect the location of any outlet, piece of equipment or conduit run, to avoid improper locations of such items and to avoid interference with other trades.
Larwin Park
City of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
Basic Electrical Requirements
16050 -?
1.4
I .4.1
1.4.2
1.4.3
1.4.4
1.4.5
1.5
1.5.1
I .5.2
1.5.3
1.5.4
1.5.5
1.5.6
1.5.7
RELATED DOCUMENTS
The drawings and the general provisions of the Contract, including the General and
Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to the work of this
section. In particular, note all additional project closeout requirements as described in
Specification Section 01 770.
The related mechanical drawings and Division 15 Specification Sections.
All Division 16 specifications and Electrical drawings and all related drawings.
The related portion of Division 11 Specification Section on Equipment.
The related portion of Division 13 Specification Section on Special Construction.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
The Contract Drawings and Specifications establish the "Minimum Standard of Quality" each product andlor system must meet to be considered acceptable. Products of other manufacturers
will be considered if the product and/or system meets or exceeds the "Minimum Standard of
Qualitf established by this Contract Document.
All work and materials shall be in full accordance with applicable requirements of public authorities
having jurisdiction and utilities furnishing services. Nothing in the plans or specifications shall be construed as permitting work that is not in conformance with any and all applicable codes or
regulations. Codes governing this work include but are not limited to the latest approved edition of
the following:
a. City of Carlsbad Electric Code
b. California Energy Commission - Title 24 c. National Electrical Code NFPA-70
Requirements of codes and regulations shall be considered a minimum. Where contract
documents exceed these minimums without violating code and regulation requirements, the
contract documents shall take precedence. Where codes conflict, the more stringent shall apply.
The Contractor shall furnish all materials and labor required for compliance with codes and
regulations, even though not specifically mentioned or shown.
Should any changes be necessary in the drawings or specifications to make the work comply with
these requirements, the Contractor shall notify the Architect for review and direction before proceeding with the work.
Permits and Certificates: Contractor shall apply for and obtain all necessary permits and
certificates, including the certificate of final inspection and approval of the authorities having
jurisdiction. All expenses inherent to such permits and inspections shall be borne solely by the
Contractor. Upon completion of the entire electrical work, the Contractor shall present to the
Owner all certificates of inspection and approval required by the local and national authorities.
Manufacturer's Certificate: The Contractor shall furnish the Architect with the manufacturer's
certificate for equipment (indicated in the relevant section) stating that the equipment has been installed under either the continuous or periodical supervision of the manufacturer's authorized
representative, that it is operating in accordance with the specified requirement of the
manufacturer, and that the equipment warranty is in effect.
Larwin Park
City of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
Basic Electrical Requirements
16050 -2
.- I .5.8
1.6
1.6.1
Authorized Representative: As related to his obtaining the Manufacturer's Certificates, the
Contractor shall include in his contract price the cost of furnishing competent and experienced
engineers or superintendents who shall represent installers under this contract to assist the
Contractor or when required by another section, to install, adjust and test the equipment in conformity with the contract documents. Before the equipment is placed in permanent operation
for the Owner, such engineers or superintendents shall make all adjustments and tests as
required to prove that such equipment is in proper and satisfactory operating condition, and meets
the requirements for issuing the "Manufacturer's Certificates".
REFERENCE STANDARDS
Materials and workmanship shall conform to the editions of the following standards, codes, or
specifications in effect on the date of this specification, unless otherwise specified.
Codes and Regulations of the Jurisdictional Authorities
NEC
NEMA
IEEE
ANSI
I ES
UL
NESC
IPCEA
ASTM
AASHTO
AWG
EPA
CSA
FAA
FCC
FM
FS
FlPS
ICEA
National Electric Code - Latest edition.
National Electrical Manufacturers Association - applicable standards
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers - applicable standards
American National Standards Institute - applicable standards
Illuminating Engineering Society
Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. - applicable standards
National Electrical Safety Code
Insulating Power Cable Engineers Association
American Society of Testing and Materials.
American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials.
American Wire Gauge
Environmental Protection Agency
Computer Society of America
Federal Aviation Administration
Federal Communication Commission
Factory Mutual Association
Federal Specification
Federal Information Processing Standard
Insulated Cable Engineers Association
Larwin Park City of Carlsbad NTD # 2002-0037
Basic Electrical Requirements
16050 -3
NACE National Association of Corrosion Engineers
NBS National Bureau of Standards
1.6.2 UL Label: All electrical materials and equipment falling within the scope of the underwriter’s
standards shall bear the UL Label.
Conflicts: Where the requirements of any authorities mentioned above are in conflict with the contract drawings and/or specifications, the matter shall be brought to the attention of the
Architect, who will render a decision to reconcile such conflict.
1.6.3
1.7 DEFINITIONS
For the purpose of this contract, the following terms and their derivative forms shall be accorded the
meanings assigned below:
I .7.1
1.7.2
1.7.3
.7.4
.7.5
.7.6
.7.7
I .7.8
1.7.9
1.7.10
1.7.11
1.7.12
1.7.13
1.7.14
1.7.15
1.8
1.8.1
1.8.2
Specified: Unless otherwise stated, as required by the specification.
Shown: Unless otherwise specified, as shown on the contract drawings.
Approved: Unless otherwise specified, as approved by the Engineer.
Directed: Unless otherwise specified, as directed by the Engineer.
Engineer: Authorized representative of the owner.
Jurisdictional Authorities: State, Federal and Local authorities or agencies thereof having
jurisdiction over work to which reference is made.
Work: Labor, supervision, services, materials, machinery, equipment, tools, supplies and facilities to accomplish the requirements of the contract.
Provided: Furnished installed complete in place and successfully tested to demonstrate satisfactory operation.
Submit: Unless otherwise specified, transmit to the Engineer for approval, information.
Shall: Indicates action that is mandatory on the part of the contractor.
Will: Indicates probable action by the owner or its representatives.
May: Indicates permissible action.
Including: Introduces a partial, representative listing of things or actions.
Consisting of: Introduces a complete listing of things and actions that constitute the whole.
Article: An element of the specifications bearing its own alphanumeric designation.
TECHNICAL REFERENCES
When reference is made to codes, regulations, reference standards and specifications, the work
shall conform to the edition current as of the date of receipt of bids, unless otherwise specified.
Where reference standards and specifications conflict with Contract requirements, the Contract
requirements shall govern.
Larwin Park
City of Carlsbad NTD # 2002-0037
Basic Electrical Requirements.
16050 -4
- 1.9
1.9.1
1.9.2
1.9.3
1.9.4
1.9.5
1.9.6
1.9.7
1.9.8
SUBMITTALS
All submittals shall be made in accordance with the General Conditions.
Within two (2) weeks after award of the contract, the subcontractor shall deliver to the Architect a
complete list of all materials, equipment, apparatus and fixtures that he proposes to use. The
Material List shall include size, rating and name of manufacturer and such other information
required to identify the items, or shall state that all materials furnished will be as specified. Where
specification shows a choice, the subcontractor shall indicate the selection made, listing only one
brand, type or manufacturer.
Obtain approval before procurement, fabrication, or delivery of items to the job site. Partial submittals will not be acceptable and will be returned without review. Submittals shall include the
manufacturer's name, trade name, place of manufacture, catalog model or number "indicated", nameplate data, size, layout dimensions, capacity, project specification and paragraph reference,
applicable Federal, industry, and technical society publication references, and any other
information necessary to establish contract compliance of each item to be furnished.
The approval or review of Submittals will be general; neither approval nor review shall be
construed as: a.
b.
c.
Permitting any departure from the Contract requirements.
Relieving the Contractor of the responsibility for any errors including details,
dimensions and materials. Approving departures from details furnished by the Architect except as otherwise specified.
If shop drawings show variations from the Contract requirements because of standard shop
practice or for other reasons, the Contractor shall describe such variations in his letter of
transmittal. If acceptable, the Architect may approve such variations, subject to an appropriate adjustment in the Contract. If the Contractor fails to describe such variations he shall not be
relieved of the responsibility for executing the work in accordance with the Contract, even though such drawings have been approved.
If the shop drawings or schedules as submitted include such variations and show a departure from the Contract requirements, which the Engineer finds to be in the interest of the Owner and to
be so minor as not to involve a change in the contract price or time for performance, the Engineer
may approve the drawings.
In addition to the requirements of the General Conditions, shop drawings shall meet the following requirements. Drawings shall be a minimum of 8.5 inches by 11 inches in size, except as
specified otherwise. Drawings shall include wiring diagrams and installation details of equipment
indicating proposed location, layout and arrangement, control panels, accessories, and other items that must be shown to assure a coordinated installation. Wiring diagrams shall identify circuit terminals and indicate the internal wiring for each item of equipment and the
interconnection between each item of equipment. Drawings shall indicate adequate clearance for operation, maintenance, and replacement of operating equipment devices. If equipment is
disapproved, the Contractor shall revise the drawings to show acceptable equipment and re- submit.
Submittals for each manufactured item shall be current manufacturer's descriptive literature of cataloged products, equipment drawings, diagrams, performance and characteristic curves, and
catalog cuts.
Larwin Park
City of Carlsbad NTD # 2002-0037
Basic Electrical Requirements
16050 -5
1.9.9
1.9.10
1.9.1 1
1.9.12
1.9.13
1.9.14
1.9.15
1.10
1.10.1
1.10.2
Where equipment or materials are specified to conform to industry and technical society
publications of organizations such as American National Standards Institute (ANSI), American
Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM), National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)
and Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL), submit proof of such compliance. The label or listing by the specified organization indicated within the submittal will be acceptable evidence of
compliance. In lieu of the label or listing, submit a certificate from an approved independent
testing organization, adequately equipped and competent to perform such services, stating that the item has been tested in accordance with the specified organization's test methods and that the
itern conforms to the specified organization's publication.
Submit manufacturer's certifications as required on products, materials, finish, and equipment indicated in the technical sections. Certification shall be documents prepared specifically for this contract. Preprinted certifications and copies of previously submitted documents will not be
acceptable. The manufacturer's certifications shall name the appropriate products, equipment, or materials and the publication specified as controlling the quality of that item. Certification shall not contain statements to imply that the item does not meet the requirements specified, such as "as
good as"; "achieve the same end use and results as materials formulated in accordance with the
referenced publications"; or "equal or exceed the service and performance of the specified
material". Certifications shall simply state that the item conforms to the requirements specified.
Certificates shall be printed on the manufacturer's letterhead and shall be signed by the
manufacturer's official authorized to sign certificates of compliance.
Late, incorrect, improper or rejected submittals will not be acceptable reasons for delaying the
work or substituting nonspecified material or equipment. The Contractor is responsible for
providing proper submittals and allowing adequate time for their processing.
The Contractor shall assume any extra costs to other work or trades resulting from the use of
substitutions. Where
discrepancies or apparent errors exist on the drawings, or between the drawings and the specifications, the Contractor shall submit his pricinglbid based upon greater quantity, better
quality, etc. Upon successful bid selection a clarification will be prepared, and a deductive
change-order generated.
All substitutions shall be supplied as approved at no extra charge.
The Architects documented review time for multiple submittals over and above two (2) for any one
category of equipment shall be charged directly to the electrical contractor at the standard Architect's billing rate.
Submittals shall only be reviewed for one manufacturer per product. No "or equal" comments
shall be allowed either.
The contractor shall prepare two separate electrical submittal packages one for site electrical
materials and one for building materials. Materials submittals required for both site and building
electrical work shall be included in both submittal packages.
DELIVERY AND STORAGE
Ship each unit securely packaged and labeled for safe handling and shipment:
a. b. Mark each item clearly. c.
Store products in a dry and secure facility.
Replace damaged or defective items with new items at no additional cost to the Owner.
The Contractor shall provide adequate means to protect finished parts of the materials,
equipment, and existing structures against damage during the progress of the work, and until final acceptance by the Owner.
Larwin Park
City of Carlsbad NTD # 2002-0037
Basic Electrical Requirements
16050 -6
1.10.3 . .-
1.11
1.11.1
1.11.2
1 .I 1.3
1.11.4
1.12
1.12.1
1.12.2
1.12.3
Thoroughly clean all parts of the materials and equipment. Exposed parts shall be thoroughly
cleansed of cement, plaster and other materials; oil and grease spots shall be removed with a nonflammable cleaning solvent.
RECORD DRAWINGS
On a set of separate contract drawings, kept at the site during construction, the Contractor shall
mark all work that is installed differently from that shown, including any revised circuitry, material
or equipment, and with sufficient dimensions to locate all materials installed beneath and outside
the building such as underground conduits, cabling, ground rods and stub-outs, etc.
a. The record drawings shall accurately locate pullboxes and main conduit runs. Conduit runs that are changed from that shown on the drawings shall be clearly noted.
b. The drawings shall be complete, legible, and color-coded in the following manner: Red shall be used for removals, and green shall indicate the revised conditions; blue ink shall not be
used.
The marked drawings shall be kept current as the work progresses and shall be available for
inspection upon request. At the close of the construction the contractor shall provide finished
CAD drawings indicating as built conditions. The contractor shall obtain Cad files from Architect, and place all as built changes and revisions on a separate layer as directed by the Architect.
Complete Record drawings shall bear the signature of the Contractor's organization, certifying compliance with Record conditions, using a rubber stamp as follows:
RECORD date
I certify that this drawing
accurately depicts the work as constructed.
An officer of the Contractor.
signature title
Contractor's Name
The correct and completed "Record" drawings are a prerequisite to final contract payment in conformance with Division 1.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
Submit as required for systems and equipment indicated in the technical sections. Furnish three
copies, bound in hardback binders or an approved equivalent. Furnish one complete manual prior
to performance of systems or equipment tests, and furnish the remaining manuals prior to contract completion. Inscribe the following identification on the cover: the words "OPERATION
AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL", the name and location of the system, equipment, building, name
of Contractor, contract number, project name and name of the Owner.
Include in the manual the names, addresses, and telephone numbers of each subcontractor installing the system or equipment and the local representatives for the system or equipment.
Include a table of contents and assemble the manual to conform to the table of contents, with tab sheets placed before instructions covering the subject. The instructions shall be legible and easily read, with large sheets of drawings folded in. The manual shall include:
Larwin Park
City of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
Basic Electrical Requirements
16050 -7
a.
b.
d.
e. f.
9. h.
i.
C.
A control sequence describing startup, operation, and shutdown.
Description of the function of each principal item of equipment.
Installation and maintenance instructions. Safety precautions.
Diagrams and illustrations.
Testing methods. Performance data.
Lubrication schedule including type, grade, temperature range, and frequency.
The parts list shall indicate sources of supply, recommended spare parts, and name of the
servicing organization.
The appendix shall list qualified permanent servicing organizations for support of the equipment, including addresses and certified qualifications.
1.13 PROJECT CLOSEOUT
1.13.1 At the completion of the project, and before final payments can be made, the Electrical Contractor
shall turn the following items over to the Architect;
a. Completed as Built record drawing markups for the entire project. b. Two copies of complete, bound operating and maintenance manuals. c. Any and all signed off electrical inspection notices.
d. Annotated electrical punch list(s) indicating that all items have been addressed, and
completed to the satisfaction of the Architect.
e. Copy of a transmittal indicating that spare fuses, lamps, keys, and special tools have been
turned over to the owner, in full accordance with the requirements of other following sections
of these specifications. Two bound copies of any and all certified test reports prepared by Third Parties (i.e.
grounding, GFI tests, light fixture aiming adjustments, etc) as required by other sections of
these specifications.
f.
1.14 GUARANTEE
1.14.1 All work shall be guaranteed for a minimum period of one year from either the official date of
completion or from the official date of acceptance by the Owner whichever is the later date.
1.14.2 Certain items shall be guaranteed for a longer period, as stated in the specification for those
items.
1.14.3 Should any problem occur with the installation during this warranty period due to defective
material, faulty workmanship, or noncompliance with plans, specifications, codes, or directions of the Owner, Architect, Engineer or Inspector the Contractor shall furnish all necessary labor and
materials to correct the problem without additional charges.
1.15 POSTED OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
1.15.1 Furnish approved operating instructions for systems and equipment indicated in the technical
sections for use by operation and maintenance personnel. The operating instructions shall
include wiring diagrams, control diagrams, and control sequence for each principal system and equipment.
1.1 5.2 Print or engrave operating instructions and frame under approved laminated plastic. Post
instructions as directed. Attach or post operating instructions adjacent to each principal system
and item of equipment describing startup, proper adjustment, operation, lubrication, shutdown,
safely precautions, procedures in the event of equipment failure, and other items of instruction as
recommended by the manufacturer of each system or piece of equipment.
Larwin Park
City of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
Basic Electrical Requirements
16050 -8
1.15.3
1.16
1.16.1
1.16.2
1.16.3
1.17
1.17.1
1.17.2
1.17.3
.-
1.18
1.18.1
1.19
1.19.1
Provide weather-resistant materials or weatherproof enclosures for operating instructions exposed
to the weather. Operating instructions shall not fade when exposed to sunlight and shall be secured to prevent easy removal or peeling.
INSTRUCTION TO PERSONNEL
Where indicated in the technical sections, furnish the services of competent instructors to give full
instruction to personnel in the adjustment, operation, and maintenance of systems and
equipment, including pertinent safety requirements as required. Each instructor shall be thoroughly familiar with all parts of the installation and shall be trained in operating theory as well
as practical operation and maintenance work.
Instruction shall be given during the first regular workweek after the equipment or system has
been accepted and turned over the owner for regular operation. The number of man-days (8
hours) of the instruction furnished shall be as specified in each individual section.
User staff and maintenance personnel shall be thoroughly trained (minimum of 4 hours) in the use of each system of major piece of equipment installed. This training shall be provided as a part of
the Contractors bid to supply the system or equipment. Additional training requirements shall be
as specified in the subsequent sections of Division 16 specifications.
SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING OF WORK
The Contractor shall coordinate his work with the work of the other trades, so that the work may proceed as expeditiously as possible.
The Contractor shall check the drawings against the drawings of other trades to avoid conflicts.
The Contractor shall give ten (IO) working days written notice to the Owner or his designated representative for the following stages of work.
a. Underground trench examination after setting of equipment pads and exterior equipment. b. Above ceiling examination after setting of all interior distributing equipment, luminaries and
wiring device outlets.
c. Final examinations after all systems are installed and connected but prior to final field testing and setting of devices.
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Electrical characteristics for this project are 120/240 volts, single phase, 3-wire, 60 hertz as
indicated on the drawings for all wiring on this project.
JOB CONDITIONS
Existing Conditions: Prior to submitting the bid, the contractor shall examine the site(s) and existing facilities and compare them with the drawings and specifications with respect to the
conditions of the premises, location of and / or connection of existing facilities and any
obstructions which may be encountered and conduct its work to minimize disruptions to existing conditions. The costs for making changes to or adjusting to the conditions are the responsibility of
the contractor.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS -
Latwin Park City of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
Basic Electrical Requirements 16050 -9
2.1.1 All material shall be new. Material shall be catalogued by the Manufacturer as suitable for its
application for this project. All similar items of a specific type or general classification shall be by the same manufacturer to ensure uniformity and consistent standards.
2.1.2 Materials and equipment shall be current products by manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of such products. Products shall have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial
use for 2 years prior to bid opening. The 2-year period shall include applications of equipment
and materials under similar circumstances and of similar size. The 2-year period shall be
satisfactorily completed by a product for sale on the commercial market through advertisements,
manufacturers' catalogs, or brochures. Products having less than a 2-year field service record will be acceptable if a certified record of satisfactory field operation for not less than 6000 hours,
exclusive of the manufacturers' factory or laboratory tests, is furnished. The equipment items
shall be supported by service organizations, which are reasonably convenient to the equipment
installation in order to render satisfactory service to the equipment on a regular and emergency
basis during the warranty period of the contract.
Where installation procedures or any part thereof are required to be in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations, furnish printed copies of the recommendations prior to
installation. Installation of the item shall not proceed until recommendations are received. Failure to furnish recommendations shall be cause of rejection of the equipment or material.
'
2.1.3
2.2 NAMEPLATE INSTALLATION
2.2.1 Nameplates shall describe the motor or equipment functions and give the circuit number, voltage,
etc.
2.2.2 AI1 other electrical appurtenances, switches, outlets, fixtures, pull boxes, etc., except conduit shall be labeled with the appropriate circuit number such as L-4 or P-5.
2.2.3 All pilot control switches, indicating lights and other pilot control devices shall be provided with
oversized legend plates showing each switch position or device function.
2.2.4 Provide laminated plastic nameplates for each panelboard, equipment enclosure, relay, switch,
and device. Each nameplate inscription shall identify the function and, when applicable, the
position, Nameplates shall be melamine plastic, 0.125-inch thick, and white with black center core, Surface shall be matte finish. Corners shall be square. Accurately align lettering and
engrave into the black core. Minimum size of nameplates shall be 1.0 inch by 2.5 inches.
Lettering shall be a minimum of 0.25-inch high normal block style.
2.3 WIREICONDUCTOR MARKING
2.3.1 Provide permanent wire markers at both ends of every phase and neutral conductor in all
switches, receptacles, pull-box, and junction box. The marker shall clearly indicate the respective
circuit number(s). Markers shall be Brady or approved equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
3.1.1 All work shall be in conformance with recognized practices of the National Electrical Contractors
Association (NECA) Standards of Installation.
3.1.2 All excavating, trench work and backfilling required for the installation of the work shall be
performed in accordance with Division 2 Site Work specifications.
Larwin Park City of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
Basic Electrical Requirements
16050 -10
3.1.3
3.1.4
3.1.5
3.1.6
3.2
3.2.1
- 3.2.2
3.2.3
3.2.4
3.2.5
3.3
3.3.1
After the installation of work requiring excavation has been inspected and accepted, all excavations shall be filled with clean earth and tamped to a consistency so that no settlement will
occur, and the ground left firm at natural grade. All excavated earth that is not used for backfill
shall be removed from the premises or otherwise disposed of as directed.
All rough and finished concrete required for the installation of work shall be installed in
accordance with Section 0331 0, "Cast-ln-Place Concrete".
The Contractor shall cooperate with all trades in providing information at the proper times
regarding openings required in walls, slabs, and footings for conduit and equipment installation. a. The Contractor shall perform all cutting and patching of construction work, which may be
required for the proper installation of the electrical work. All patching shall be of the same materials, workmanship, and finish as, and shall accurately match all surrounding work.
All work shall be done under the Owner's instructions, and, when so required, by the trade
which performed the original work. b.
Electric outlets, devices and equipment furnished by disciplines under the scope of this project
shall be installed and fully connected to the electric circuits.
a. The Contractor shall furnish the necessary flexible conduit, connectors, cords, and other
equipment that may be required for the proper connection of equipment. b. The Contractor shall furnish and install conduit, wiring, and connections required by the heating ventilating and air conditioning system for line and low voltage devices as required.
LOCATIONS AND DIMENSIONS
Install all material and equipment in such a manner as to avoid obstructions, preserve clearances,
maintain code spacings and keep openings and passageways clear.
The drawings are diagrammatic to the extent that many offsets, bends, fittings and exact locations
are not shown. The Contractor shall determine the best methods, exact locations and routes for
his installation and note any conflicts or obstructions. The locations shown for conduits, outlets, materials and equipment may be refined to meet the architectural, structural and mechanical
conditions with the approval of the Owner. Where dimensions are shown, they shall be adhered to as closely as practicable.
Where apparatus and equipment is shown to scale or dimensioned on the drawings, dimensions
have been taken from typical equipment of the general class indicated. The Contractor shall
carefully verify that the material and equipment he plans to install will fit into the spaces provided
and those proper clearances will be maintained. The Contractor shall assume full responsibility for the fitting of his materials and equipment to other equipment and to the structure.
Mounting heights shown are from finished floor or pavement or grade to middle of wall mounted outlet boxes and from finished floor to bottom of suspended fixtures unless otherwise indicated.
Review pertinent drawings and adjust the work to conditions shown. Where discrepancies occur
between drawings and specifications notify the Owner immediately for his interpretation prior to
submitting bid.
FIELD TEST AND/OR OPERATIONAL CHECK
General Scope:
a. Perform field tests and operational checks to assure that all electrical equipment, both contractor and Owner supplied, is operational within industry and manufacturer's tolerances
and is installed in accordance with design specifications.
The tests and operational checks shall determine the suitability for energization.
Schedules test and give a minimum of two weeks advance notice to the ArchitectlOwner. b.
c.
Larwin Park
City of Carlsbad NTD # 2002-0037
Basic Electrical Requirements
16050 -1 1
3.3.2 Failure to Meet Test:
a.
b.
Any system material or workmanship, which is found defective on the basis of performance
tests, shall be reported directly to the Architect. Contractor shall replace the defective material or equipment and have tests repeated until the
test proves satisfactory, without additional cost to the Owner.
3.3.3 Field test andlor operational checks shall apply to the following Divisions 16 Sections:
a. Wires and Cables
b. Electrical Service c. Grounding
3.4 DEMONSTRATIONS
3.4.1 All defective material and workmanship discovered as the result of tests required in other portions
of these Specifications shall be corrected.
3.4.2 It shall be shown by demonstration in service that all circuits and devices are in good operating
condition. Tests shall be such that each item of control equipment shall be tested not less than
five (5) times.
3.4.3 See relevant sections of Division 16 for additional requirements.
3.5 PROTECTION
3.5.1 The Contractor shall protect all work, materials and equipment from damage, and shall provide
adequate and proper storage facilities during the progress of the work. The Contractor shall
provide for the safety and good condition of all work until final acceptance by the Owner, and shall replace all damaged or defective work, materials, and equipment before requesting final . acceptance.
3.5.2 The Contractor shall be held responsible for the protection and correction of the work of all trades
from smears, splashes, stains or damages that might occur during the process of his work.
3.6 NAMEPLATE MOUNTING
3.6.1 Mounting shall be cadmium plated machine screws into drilled and tapped holes to meet NEMA 4
standards. Screws shall not protrude more than 1/8 '' through the metal surface.
3.7 PAINTING OF EQUIPMENT
3.7.1 Electrical equipment shall have factory-applied painting which shall, as a minimum, meet the requirements of NEMA and ANSI.
3.7.2 Touch up electrical equipment to match factory finish in color and texture.
END OF SECTION
Larwin Park
City of Carlsbad NTD # 2002-0037
Basic Electrical Requirements
16050 -12
SECTION 161 10
RACEWAYS, BOXES, AND CABINETS,
PART 1 - GENERAL
I .I DESCRIPTION
1 .1.1 This section specifies providing conduit, raceways, ducts, cable trays, boxes and cabinets to form
raceways and support systems for power, communication and control cables.
1.1.2 Related Work Specified Elsewhere:
a. Basic Electrical Requirements: Section 16050
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.2.1 Codes, Regulations, Reference Standards and Specifications: a. Relevant Codes, Regulations and Reference Standards listed in Specification
Section 16050.
1.2.2 The following items shall be UL-listed or labeled:
a. Conduit and fittings.
b. Surface raceways and fittings. c. Boxes.
d. Cabinets.
I 1.3 SUBMITTALS
Submit the following for review and comment in accordance with Section 16050:
1.3.1 Shop Drawings. Submit catalog information on the following for approval: a. Rigid galvanized steel conduit. b. Electrical Metallic Tubing.
c. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) conduit. d. Flexible Metallic Conduit. e. Boxes.
f. Cabinets.
1.4 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
1.4.1 Ship each unit securely packaged and labeled for safe handling in shipment and to avoid damage
or distortion.
1.4.2 Store products in a secure and dry storage facility.
Larwin Park City of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
Raceways, Boxes, And Cabinets 16110 -1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCTS AND MATERIALS
2.1.1 Rigid (RGS) steel conduit shall be hot-dip galvanized with galvanized threads and manufactured
per requirements of UL 6. PVC-coated RGS shall contain minimum coating of .020 inches thick
and shall be manufactured per requirements of NEMA RN1 .
a. PVC coating shall be either manufacturers standard blue or black color. b. The bonded strength of the PVC to the galvanized surface of the conduit shall exceed the
tensile strength of the PVC. Tensile strength of the PVC shall be 1800 psi (min) per ASTM. c. The PVC coating shall be self-extinguishing. d. PVC sleeve shall extend beyond the coupling end of conduit a minimum of one inch for joint protection.
e. The contractor shall take care to avoid cutting, or scratching the PVC coating. Apply touch up compound such as Robroy plasti-bond on any nicks, cuts or abrasions on coated conduit.
2.1.2 Electric Metallic Tubing (EMT) shall be zinc-coated steel and manufactured per requirements of UL 797.
2.1.3 Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) conduit shall be constructed of a virgin homopolymer PVC compound, and shall contain a 90 degree C UL rating manufactured according to ASTM. Rigid heavy wall
non-metallic conduit shall be Schedule 40 and rigid extra heavy wall non-metallic conduit shall be
Schedule 80. Provide at locations shown on the drawings.
2.1.4 Minimum conduit size shall be 314’’ or larger as required. A %” conduit may be used for final
connections to devices and at end of branch circuit runs to last device. Minimum sizes used must comply with Codes. Provide larger than minimum sizes where shown.
2.1.5 Acceptable Manufactures Rigid Steel Conduit. Pittsburgh Standard, Triangle, Republic, Allied, Youngstown or approved
equal.
EMT. Pittsburgh Standard, Triangle, Republic, Allied, Youngstown or approved equal. Flexible Steel Conduit. International, Triangle or approved equal.
PVC coated RGS. Rob Roy, Korkap or approved equal.
PVC conduit. Pittsburgh Standard, Carlon or approved equal.
Surface Metal Raceway. Wiremold, Square D or an approved equal.
a.
b.
c.
e. f.
g.
2.2 FITTINGS
2.2.1 Fittings for use with rigid or flexible steel conduit shall be manufactured per requirements of UL
and shall be cast-metal with gasketed closures. a. Fittings for RGS conduit shall be malleable iron or forged steel with cadmium or zinc coating.
1. Union couplings for joining rigid conduit at intermediate runs shall be of the same
material as the conduit with which it is to be used, and shall be threaded and concrete -
tight to permit completing conduit run when neither conduit can be turned and to permit breaking the conduit run at the union.
2. PVC coating for conduit fittings and accessories shall be a minimum thickness of 40 mil
(0.040 inch)
Fittings for EMT shall be steel compression type connectors. Die cast connectors are not acceptable.
Fittings on flexible conduit shall be steel setscrew connectors. Squeeze or clamp type
connectors are not acceptable. Conduit accessories, such as lock nuts, bushings and connectors shall be zinc coated.
b.
c.
d.
Larwin Park
City of Carlsbad NTD # 2002-0037
Raceways, Boxes, And Cabinets
161 10 -2
2.2.2
2.3
2.3.1
2.3.2
2.3.3
2.4
2.4.1
2.4.2
2.4.3
e. For enclosures having punched or formed knockouts for conduit entry, nylon insulated
grommet and locknut with ground screw and positive ground connection to the enclosure
shall be provided. Bushings shall be of the same material as the conduit with which the bushings are to be
used.
1. Bushings one and one quarter inches and larger shall be Type B insulated bushings with
phenolic thermosetting insulation.
2. Insulating grounding bushings shall be installed in conduits to protect wires inside
boxes.
g. Furnish electrically conductive pipe joint compound for all threaded conduits. h. Surface metal raceways shall be complete and include all end fitting, elbows, tees,
coverplates, etc. for a complete installation. Provide outlets and spacing as indicated on the
drawings.
Acceptable manufacturers are Midwest, RACO, O-Z-Gedney, Steel City, Thomas & Betts, Walker
or an approved equal.
f.
CONDUIT SUPPORTS
Retaining straps and fasteners. Type, style and size shall be as required. They shall be made of steel or malleable iron and hot - dip galvanized. Galvanized malleable-iron spacer assemblies
with Style A straps shall be used to separate conduits from masonry surfaces. Galvanized-steel
fasteners shall be used to fasten conduits to channel inserts.
Multiple pipe hangers (trapeze-type): Consisting of two or more hanger rods, horizontal member,
U-bolt clamp and other attachments necessary for securing hanger rods and conduit. The
hangers shall be made out of hot-dip galvanized steel. The hanger rod shall not be smaller than
3/8-inch diameter and threaded for sufficient distance at each end to permit at least 1-1/2 inches of adjustment. Horizontal member shall be 1-1/2 inches square or 1-518 inches square 12 gauge
channel or heavier. Weld two or more channels together for greater strength if necessary.
Conduit routed exposed on walls or ceilings shall be anchored with two hole straps.
BOXES AND CABINETS
Outlet boxes shall be capable of accommodating conduits as shown. Material shall be steel or
cast iron as required. For aboveground indoor locations and electrical rooms boxes shall be provided with punched or formed knockouts. For outdoor locations boxes shall have threaded- conduit entrance hubs. Use watertight fitting with gaskets, nylon-insulated throats and sealing
locknuts in boxes having punched or formed knockouts for conduit entry in outdoor locations.
a. b. For wall receptacles and switches, all outlet boxes shall be 2-1/8 inch deep.
For floor receptacles: Watertight cast-iron outlet boxes, four inches in diameter, of suitable
depth and complete with adjustment screws for final leveling, a bronze floor plate flange, five
inches in diameter, extending beyond box 1/2 inch above the unfinished floor. Provide one special screw-plug removal tool with every 10 receptacles.
Junction and pull boxes: Flush-mounted or surface-mounted as shown and suitable in size to accommodate conduit, raceways, number of cables and splices shown. Metallic boxes shall be
made of steel, cast iron or hot dip galvanized steel. Pre-cast boxes shall be as shown.
Cabinets: Cabinets shall be fabricated from galvanized steel and shall be surface mounted,
unless otherwise noted. Provide back plate of reinforced steel for mounting interior components and to ensure rigid support and accurate alignment. Provide lug for cabinet grounding. The cabinet shall be provided with latch and handle. Screw fastening will not be acceptable in lieu of
latch. Metallic surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned, degreased, primed with zinc primer and
coated after fabrication with light-gray enamel.
Larwin Park City of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
Raceways, Boxes, And Cabinets
161 10 -3
2.5
2.5.1
2.5.2
2.5.3
2.5.4
FIRE RESISTANT FOAM SEALANT
Each and every penetration through a fire rated floor or wall shall be sealed to maintain the fire
resistive nature of the structure. The sealant shall be UL classified and meet NEC Article 300-21.
The sealant shall be Chase-Foam CTC PR-855 silicone fire retardant foam that is waterproof and
will prevent the spread of toxic gases and smoke through openings.
The characteristics shall be as follows:
Flame Spread Rating
Full Contribution Factor
Service Temperature Range
Minimum Fire Withstand Temperature
Dielectric Strength 2 Hour Fire Rating Thickness
20
20
-50 degree to+450 degree F
2000 degree F
160 Volts/mil 4 inches
The opening around cables, pipes or conduits shall be filled with a minimum of 4 Inches of foam sealant. Provide a fiber damming material one (1) inch thick in void spaces as required. Trim the
excess foam from openings flush with walls and floors.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
3.1.1 General: a. Use size and type of raceways, ducts, boxes and cabinets as shown and specified.
b. Install metallic raceway, fittings, boxes and cabinets free from contact with reinforcing steel.
c. Where conduit is placed in contact with dissimilar metals or with concrete, separate contact surfaces by means of a gasket, nonabsorptive tape or coating to prevent corrosion.
d. Make metallic conduit, raceways, ducts and cable trays electrically and mechanically continuous and ground them in accordance with Section 16450. e. Install PVC conduit where conduit runs are embedded in concrete and where conduit is
shown as direct burial.
f. Use expansion-bolt anchors to secure equipment to concrete surfaces.
3.1.2 Conduit:
a. b.
C. d. e.
f.
9-
h.
Run exposed and concealed conduit parallel to building lines. Conduit must be continuous from outlet to outlet and from outlet to cabinets, junction boxes,
or pull boxes. Make all joints and connections in a manner, which will insure mechanical
strength and electrical continuity. At conduit terminals provide double lock nuts and insulated
bushings or terminate on conduit hubs. Use of running threads is prohibited. Supply a
grounding-type bushing and ground wire to ground bus/lug in equipment for conduit termination in main switchgear and panelboards.
Install exposed and concealed conduit to avoid interference with other work.
Apply lead-free conductive anti-seize compound to threaded-conduit joints. In outdoor and underground locations, except electrical rooms, use threaded-conduit hubs to
attach conduit to equipment enclosures. Use watertight conduit fitting for attachment of conduit to enclosure having punched or formed knockout.
Before installing any site work, layout the proposed course for any underground conduits, location of manholes, etc, and have same approved.
In aboveground indoor locations and electrical rooms, use locknuts and nylon-insulated bushings to attach conduit to enclosures. Install suitable caps or plugs in empty conduits for future extension.
Larwin Park
City of Carlsbad NTD # 2002-0037
Raceways, Boxes, And Cabinets
161 10 -4
I.
j.
k.
I m.
n.
0.
P.
q-
r.
S.
t.
Thread and ream ends of field-cut conduit to remove rough edges. Use bushings at conduit
entrances to boxes, cabinets and equipment enclosures.
Bends: 1.
2.
Unless otherwise shown or specified, install conduit bends in accordance with NEC
codes. Install bends in buried conduit in accordance with the following:
Size of Minimum
radius of factory of field bend in inches
bend in inches in inches
Minimum radius Conduit size
18 24 3 24 30 4
48 48 5
48 48 6 In above ground locations bend conduit so that field-made bend is free from cuts, dents
and other surface damage. No underground field bend in PVC conduits shall be allowed. Use factory fabricated fittings for all underground couplings, elbows, bends, or
offsets.
The inside radius of a bend in conduit shall be at least 6 times the internal diameter.
When the conduit size is greater than 2 inches the inside radius shall be at least 10
times the internal diameter of the conduit. For fiber optic cable, the inside diameter shall always be at least 10 times the internal diameter of the conduit.
3.
Bends: (Telecommunications conduit)
1.
Support single horizontal conduit with one-hole pipe straps or individual pipe hangers.
Secure multiple conduits supported on trapeze-hangers or channel inserts by fasteners
suitable for such purpose. Where conduit is attached to masonry surface, use malleable-iron spacers with Style A pipe
straps.
Support and secure vertical conduit spanning open areas at intervals not exceeding 10 feet. Support conduit above suspended ceilings using applicable specified methods.
Use minimum of 18-inch long liquid-tight flexible-conduit connections for equipment
enclosures subject to vibration. Do not use ceiling support wires for support of conduit and cable.
Install expansion fittings in exposed conduit runs longer than 300 feet. Install expansion and
deflection fittings where embedded conduits cross structural expansion joints. Where embedded conduits cross a structural contraction joint, paint the external surface of conduit
with linseed oil or other compatible bond breaker for two feet on each side of contraction
joint. All exposed conduit and fittings routed in public spaces shall be painted out to match the finished surrounding surfaces. Exposed conduit routed in non-painted utility type areas
may remain unpainted
Buried PVC conduit: Install in accordance with the following requirements in addition to
those specified elsewhere: 1.
2.
3.
4.
5. Waterproof conduit connections.
6.
Arrange conduit to cross each expansion joint at right angle to joint.
Prevent concrete and other materials from obstructing the conduit. Pack outlets, pull
boxes and junction boxes and cap conduit ends prior to pouring concrete.
Remove burrs from, clean, dry and brush joints in PVC conduit with solvent cement
before installation of coupling. Provide compatible conduit supports and spacers to maintain position of conduit during
placement of concrete.
Rod and swab conduit after installation so as to remove water, cement and other foreign
matter; cap conduit ends, If obstructions cannot be removed or if condition exists which may result in damage to cable, replace conduit. Provide nylon or polyester pull-line with a breaking strength of at least 200 Ibs. In each
spare conduit.
7.
Larwin Park City of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
Raceways, Boxes, And Cabinets
16110 -5
3.1.3
3.1.4
3.1.5
3.1.6
3.2
3.2.1
3.2.2
3.2.3
3.2.4
3.2.5
3.3
3.3.1
3.3.2
3.3.3
8.
9
IO.
11.
12.
Provide transition to PVC -coated rigid galvanized steel conduit where raceways turn up.
Conduit installed for site lighting outdoor branch circuiting and parking lot lighting need
not be concrete encased. Install underground conduit to a depth of 24 minimum to the top of the conduit unless
otherwise indicated.
Route conduit under footings or through rigid metal sleeves or block outs in footing as detailed on the drawings or as indicated by structural engineer. Provide an electrically detectable type plastic warning tape in the backfill no deeper than
6 inches below grade. The tape shall be yellow plastic with integral warning legend repeated continuously throughout the entire length of the tape along the entire length of
all below grade conduit.
Arrangement for Power and Signal Service: conduits with minimum 6 thick concrete wall or 12" of earth. Separate power system conduits from signal
Pitch: Wherever possible pitch conduit toward manholes. On runs where it is impossible to maintain the grade all one way, grade from center so that conduits pitch both directions down toward manholes.
Conduits Entering Buildings: Pitch conduits away form the building. Conduit entrances into building shall be watertight.
Conduit for Future Use (Spare): Demonstrate that conduits installed for future use are clear of obstructions (draw mandrel %" less in diameter than conduit). Install a dragline in each conduit per Article 2.4A? in this Section.
CONDUIT APPLICATION
Rigid galvanized steel (RGS) conduit shall be used where exposed to the weather or where
subject to mechanical damage in exposed areas below 8 feet above finished floor and in sizes
larger than 4 inches in diameter.
Electrical metallic tubing shall be run concealed in dry wall type construction, above suspended ceilings, and exposed indoors not less than 8 feet above finished floor. EMT shall not be installed underground or embedded in concrete. Maximum size of EMT shall be 4-inch diameter.
Flexible metallic conduit shall be used only for indoor motor connections and conduit drops from
remote junction boxes to fixtures installed in suspended ceilings.
Liquid-tight flexible metallic conduit shall be used for motor connections exposed to weather,
water or grease and wiring to outlets at equipment chases. Make the conduit grounding system
continuous at such points by manufacturer installed, UL approved, copper grounding strip or by jumpers sized in accordance with NEC Table 250-95.
Schedule 40 PVC Type It conduit shall be used for all underground duct bank raceways and for underground raceways routed in or below structural slabs and in those areas not requiring
concrete encasement.
OUTLET, JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES
Mount outlet boxes as shown.
Arrange front of box or attached plaster cover flush with finished wall or ceiling.
Keep number of knockouts to minimum.
Larwin Park
City of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
Raceways, Boxes, And Cabinets
16110 -6
3.3.4
3.3.5
3.3.6 Measure height of wall-mounted outlet box from finished floor to horizontal centerline of
Clean boxes thoroughly after installation and correct damage to boxes and to finish.
Install covers on boxes mounted on walls and ceilings.
coverplate.
Fasten floor boxes securely in place.
Install junction and puli boxes so that covers are readily accessible.
Do not install boxes above suspended ceilings except where ceilings are removable or definite
3.3.7
3.3.8
3.3.9
provision is made for access to boxes.
3.4
3.4.1
3.4.2
3.4.3
3.4.4
I_
3.5
3.5.1
3.5.2
3.5.3
3.6
3.6.1
3.6.2
3.7
3.7.1
UNDERGROUND PU LLBOXES
Pullboxes (less than 24” x 36) for exterior underground use shall be reinforced, precast, concrete
electrical type.
Boxes shall consist of a body, cover, with clear interior dimensions as shown on the drawings.
Covers shall be concrete with finger hole bolt down type. All exposed steel shall be galvanized.
Concrete covers shall fit flush and without rocking. Chipped, cracked, or badly fitting covers will
not be acceptable.
Mark all covers permanent raised or depressed letters reading “Lighting”, or applicable
designation. No abbreviations.
UNDERGROUND HANDHOLES
Pullboxes (24“ x 36 or larger) for exterior underground use shall be reinforced, precast, concrete
electrical type.
Boxes shall consist of a body, cover, extensions and base, with clear interior dimensions as
shown on the drawings.
Covers for 24” X 36 pull boxes shall be 1 piece, bolt-down type. Covers for 48 X 48 or larger
pull boxes shall be two piece torsion hinged type. Covers shall be traffic type with galvanized steel checkered plate with angle frame. All exposed steel shall be galvanized. All bolts shall be stainless steel. Mark all covers with permanent raised or depressed letters reading “Electrical”,
“Communications”, or applicable designation. No abbreviations.
CABINETS
Fasten cabinets securely using expansion bolts, toggle bolts or mounting ears.
Touch-up damaged painted finish.
FILLING OF OPENINGS
Where conduit and raceways pass through fire-rated walls, ceilings or floors, provide seals to prevent passage of fire and fumes and to maintain integrity of fire-rated structure.
Larwin Park City of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
Raceways, Boxes, And Cabinets
16110 -7
3.7.2 Where openings are provided for passage of conduit and raceways in walls, ceilings or floors, use
fire-resistant fibrous-glass safing or similar material to seal unused openings to prevent passage
of fire and fumes.
3.7.3 Close unused openings or spaces in floors, walls and ceilings. Plug or cap unused conduit and
sleeves.
3.8 IDENTIFICATION
3.8.1 At end of each run, use metallic tags with stamped markings to establish identification of conduit,
raceways and ducts in accordance with designations shown.
3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
3.9.1 Arrange with the Engineer for inspection and approval of embedded conduit and boxes prior to
concrete placement.
3.9.2 Arrange with the Engineer for inspection by electrical utility company representative of incoming-
service conduits prior to placing concrete.
3.9.3 Test metallic conduit and boxes for electrical continuity. Conduct tests in the presence of Engineer.
3.9.4 Test not less than 0.5 percent of total installed channel inserts and spot inserts as directed for
compliance with specified pullout-load rating. Replace and retest inserts, which fail. Conduct tests in presence of Engineer.
END OF SECTION
Larwin Park
City of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
Raceways, Boxes, And Cabinets
161 10 -8
SECTION 16120 WIRE AND CABLE (600 VOLTS AND BELOW)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .I DESCRIPTION
1.1.1 This section specifies providing wire and cable.
1 .I .2
1.1.3 Related Work Specified Elsewhere:
Requirements for single-conductor cables and for multiple-conductor cables as stated apply,
a.
b. Wiring accessories: Section 16130. c.
Basic Electrical Requirements: Section 16050.
Grounding and Bonding: Section 16450.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.2.1 Qualifications: Select a manufacturer who is engaged in production of similar wire and cable.
1.2.2 Codes, Regulations, Reference Standards and Specifications: a. Relevant Codes, Regulations and Reference Standards listed in specification Section 16050.
1.2.3 Wires and Cables: UL-listed or labeled for its intended use.
- 1.3 SUBMITTALS
Submit the following for approval in accordance with Section 16050 and with the additional
requirements as specified for each:
1.3.1 Submit manufacturer’s data for approval on all proposed cable to be utilized on the project.
1.3.2 Certification: a.
b.
c.
Certified flame-retardancy test reports and data for tests performed not more than 12 months
prior to submittal, for materials, which are identical to those of cable furnished.
Certified test reports demonstrating that cable complies with specified requirements and those of referenced ICEA Standards.
Certificates from manufacturers verifying that products conform to specified requirements. Include certificate with submittal of shop drawings and with each cable shipment.
1.4 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
1.4.1
voltage, manufacturer and number of conductors or phases in accordance with NEC requirements. Mark each single-conductor cable and each multiple-conductor cable to show UL label, size,
1.4.2 Ship each unit securely packaged and labeled for safe handling and shipment.
1.4.3 Store products in a dry and secure facility.
Larwin Park
City of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
Wire And Cable (600 Volts And Below)
16120 -1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.1.1
2.1.2
2.1.3
2.1.4
2.1.5
2. I .6
2.2
2.2.1
2.2.2
2.2.3
2.2.4
2.3
2.3.1
CONDUCTORS
Wire and cable conductor sizes are designated by American Wire gauge (AWG). All conductors shall be copper without exception.
Conductors shall be soft drawn annealed copper, ninety-eight (98%) percent
conductivity, continuous from outlet-to-outlet, without welds, splices or joints.
Minimum wire size shall be No.12 AWG in the lighting and power system. Minimum wire size for
control circuits shall be No.14 AWG, stranded.
Wire smaller than No.8 AWG shall be solid conductor per ASTM B1. No.8 AWG and larger wire
shall be stranded conductor per ASTM B8.
Furnish and install the conductors for the various signal systems per the requirements of each of
the applicable Sections.
Acceptable Manufacturers: General Electric, Okonite, Southwire or an approved equal.
INSULATION
All conductors supplied under the scope of this project shall be insulated for 600 volts minimum. Wires and cable shall meet the applicable requirements of NFPA 70 and UL 83 for the type of
insulation, jacket, and conductor specified or indicated. Wires and cables manufactured more
than 12 months prior to date of delivery to the site shall not be used.
Branch circuit and feeder cables in all sizes shall have “THHN”, or “THWN” insulation unless noted otherwise.
Type “THHN” wire shall be used in all recessed fixtures, continuous fluorescent fixture wiring channels or other locations where subject to abnormally high temperature.
90°C Rate Type “XHHW” shall be used for feeders installed in areas of direct solar exposure.
COLOR COORDINATION
All insulation in AWG sizes ten (10) and below shall be impregnated with color according to the
following:
Phase “A”
Phase “B” Phase ”C” * Neutral
Ground
208/120 Volts Black
Red Blue *White
Green
* Where individual neutral conductors are provided for each phase, the white or gray
neutral shall have a color stripe matching its corresponding phase conductor color for
easy identification.
Larwin Park City of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
Wire And Cable (600 Volts And Below)
16120 -2
I 2.3.2 Where color other than black is not an integral part of the insulation use 3M No. 35 tape of the
same color code to identify both ends of conductors No. 8 and larger. Use other colors as required to identify control or other special circuits. Ground conductor shall have green insulation for 110 and smaller
conductors; green tapes on other colors of insulation are NOT acceptable.
2.4 BARE CONDUCTORS
2.4.1
accordance with ASTM 93 or B8.
Annealed copper conductor 8 AWG and larger unless otherwise shown or specified and in
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 WIRE AND CABLE INSTALLATION
3.1 .I Install cables as specified.
3.1.2 Install single-conductor cables in conduit, underfloor ducts or wireways.
3.1.3
Install motor feeders in 18-inch minimum length liquid-tight flexible conduit at each motor conduit box.
Install motor feeders, service connections and extensions in accordance with referenced codes.
3.1.4 Use nylon straps to bundle and secure wire and cable located in panelboards, cabinets,
switchboards, motor control centers and switchgear.
3.1.5 completed.
No wires and cables shall be pulled until all work, which could cause damage to conductors, is
3.1.6 Blow out and swab conduits before installing conductors.
3.1.7 Care shall be exercised when installing wire in conduit so as not to damage the conductor insulation. Mechanical means of pulling shall not be used unless directed by the Owner. Oils, grease or
any other damaging type of pulling compound shall be not used. To facilitate pulling cable, use Ideal Yellow #77 wire pulling compound or other lubricant recommended by cable manufacturer.
3.1.8 Unless specifically shown otherwise, provide branch circuit feeder homeruns with not more than 3 phase conductors, one neutral conductor and one ground conductor in a single raceway. The use of gutters or junction boxes to gather several homeruns into a large conduit will not be permitted.
3.1.9 Wire in panels, cabinets, pull boxes and wiring gutters shall be neatly grouped and fanned out to the terminals. DO NOT use gutters of panelboards as raceways, junction boxes or pull boxes for
conductors not terminating in panelboards, junction boxes, etc., for future circuits or for wiring installed by
others.
3.1 .IO Feeders shall be run their entire length as continuous pieces without joints or splices. Joints and splices in branch circuits shall be permitted where circuits divide in junction boxes only.
3.1 .I 1 Provide all empty conduits with a nylon or polyester pull-line having a breaking strength of at least
200 Ibs. Leave 24 inches of spare at each end of the pull.
3.1.12 Where shown or as necessary, install cable-seal fittings to prevent entry of water into electrical facilities. Where approved use seal compound.
- 3.1.13 In damp and dusty indoor or outdoor locations, seal cable at conduit terminations using duct- sealing compound.
Larwin Park
City of Carlsbad NTD # 2002-0037
Wire And Cable (600 Volts And Below)
16120 -3
3.2 CONNECTORS
3.2.1 Tools for installing compression connectors shall be made by or approved by the manufacturer of
the connectors, Tools shall be hydraulically operated, requiring proper compression before release of the tool. Follow manufacturer’s instructions for spacing and overlapping of compression areas.
3.2.2 Branch circuit joints or splices shall be made electrically and mechanically secure with pressure
connections, nylon insulators, wing nuts, or spring compression connectors, except that screw-on type connectors shall not be used for wire sizes larger than No. 10AWG. The splice area shall be taped to
provide equal or greater insulation than the original. Tape run-back over the original insulation shall extend
3 to 5 overall diameters of the insulated wire.
3.2.3
3.3 CABLE TERMINATION
Soldering of connectors or the use of friction tape is prohibited.
3.3.1 Termination of insulated power and lighting cables shall be protected from accidental contact,
deterioration of coverings and moisture by the use of terminating devices and materials. Install all
terminations of insulated power and lighting cables in accordance with the manufacturer’s requirements. Make terminations using materials and methods indicated or specified herein or as designated by the
written instructions of the cable manufacturer.
3.3.2
personnel.
All cable terminations shall occur in locations, which are accessible, but only to authorized
3.4 TAGGING
3.4.1 purpose of identifying the various circuits.
All branch circuits shall be left tagged in the panelboards and in all ceiling junction boxes for the
3.4.2 Feeders and mains shall be tagged in switchboards and at each underground pull box.
3.4.3 The method of tagging shall be accomplished using non-metallic fiberboard tags or plastic labels.
Attach tags to cable with slip-free plastic lacing or nylon bundling straps. Use feeder designation shown
and indicate load served and origin of feeder.
3.4.4 Use of wrap around paper wire markers shall not be acceptable.
3.5 GROUNDING
3.5.1 Permanently ground conduit, fixtures, motors and other equipment as required.?
Provide an effective grounding connection at all panelboards, outlet boxes and junction boxes.
3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
3.6.1 Furnish equipment required to perform tests. Prior to insulation and high-potential tests,
disconnect instruments and equipment, which might be damaged during such tests. Conduct tests in
presence of the Architect.
3.6.2 Submit test procedure for approval and perform approved tests including, but not limited to, the
following: a. Single-conductor cable and multiple-conductor cable:
1. Test continuity of cable conductors using ohmmeter.
Larwin Park City of Carlsbad NTD # 2002-0037
Wire And Cable (600 Volts And Below)
16120 -4
2. Proof-test insulation resistance to ground and between insulated conductors for
minimum of one minute using 1,000-volt megger. Insulation resistance: 100,000 ohms
minimum.
When cable shows unsteady insulation resistance of less than 100,000 ohms, perform high-potential test at 80 percent of factory ac test voltage or as recommended by cable
manufacturer.
3.
3.6.3 Submit certified test reports.
END OF SECTION
Larwin Park
City of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
Wire And Cable (600 Volts And Below) 16120 -5
SECTION 161 30
WIRE CONNECTION ACCESSORIES
PART 1 -GENERAL
I .I
1 .I .1
I .I .2
1.2
1.2.1
1.2.2
1.2.3
x 1.3
DESCRIPTION
This section specifies wire-connection accessories, such as connectors, terminal lugs and fittings,
bundling straps, insulating tape and resin.
Related Work Specified Elsewhere:
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Qualifications: Select a manufacturer who is engaged in production of wire connection
accessories.
Codes, regulations, Reference Standards and Specification.
a. Relevant Codes, Regulations and Reference Standards listed in Specification Section 16050.
Source Quality Control:
a.
b. Factory testing: Submit certified copies of test reports for cable splices and tap
Connectors, terminal lugs and fittings shall be UL-listed.
insulation/sealing kits.
SUBMITTALS
Submit the following for approval in accordance with Section 16050:
1.3.1 Shop Drawings.
1.4 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
1.4.1 Ship each unit securely packaged and labeled for safe handling in shipment and to avoid damage.
1.4.2 Store products in a secure and dry storage facility.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CONNECTORS TERMINAL LUGS AND FITTINGS
2.1.1 All connectors shall be UL listed for the intended use.
2.1.2 For 1 OAWG and smaller conductor cables: Tin-plated copper pressure connectors with
nonflammable, self-extinguishing insulation grip with temperature rating equal to that of conductor
insulation.
2.1.3 For 8AWG to WOAWG conductor cables: Tin-plated copper compression connectors and
terminal lugs with nylon insulating sleeve for insulation grip.
2.1.4 For 250 kcmil and larger conductor cables: Long-barrel, double-compression tin-plated copper
connectors and terminal lugs with two-hole pad. I
Larwin Park City of Carlsbad NTD # 2002-0037
Wire Connection Accessories 16130 -1
2.1.5
2.1.6
2.1.7
2.1.8
2.2
2.2.1
2.1.2
2.3
2.3.1
2.3.2
2.3.3
2.3.4
2.3.5
For multiple-conductor cables: Watertight aluminum fittings with stainless steel pressure ring and'
setscrews or compression cone for grounding the aluminum sheath of the cable.
Splices in wire No. 10 and smaller shall be made with twist-on splicing connector or insulated
pressure type connectors. Connections in wires No.8 and larger shall be made with compression-
type and wrapped with insulating tape. Insulating tape shall be applied in a minimum of two layers
of half-wrap built up to match the overall thickness of the cable insulation.
Splices in underground pull boxes shall be spliced using compression connectors and resin encapsulation kits, or heat shrink tubing kits. Splices shall be completely waterproof.
Acceptable Manufacturer. Buchanan, Burndy, Ideal, Kearney, Thomas & Betts, 0-Z Gedney or approved equal.
BUNDLING STRAPS
Self-locking type.
For outdoor use: Ultraviolet-resistant.
INSULATING TAPE
Plastic tape: Vinyl plastic tape with rubber-based pressure-sensitive adhesive, pliable at zero
degree F.
Rubber tape: Silicone-rubber tape with silicone pressure-sensitive adhesive.
Arc proof tape: retardant flexible elastomer, self-extinguishing and noncombustible. Flexible and conformable organic fabric tape, coated one side with flame-
Glass tape: Woven-glass fabric tape with pressure-sensitive thermosetting adhesive.
Acceptable Manufacturers: Minnesota Mining and Minerals Co. (3M) or an approved equal,
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SPLICES AND TERMINATIONS
3.1.1 Make wire and cable splices in outlet, junction or pull boxes, in cable troughs or in equipment
cabinets. Splices in conduit are prohibited.
3.1.2 Secure connectors or terminal lugs to conductors so as to engage all strands equally.
3.1.3 Do not rupture insulation nor expose bare conductors.
3.1.4 Install compression connectors and terminal lugs using tools and pressure recommended by manufacturer. Indent mark connectors and terminal lugs with number of die used for installation.
3.1.5 Apply anticorrosion joint compound to connectors, terminal lugs and bolting pads before
installation.
END OF SECTION
Larwin Park
City of Carlsbad NTD # 2002-0037
Wire Connection Accessories
16130 -2
SECTION 161 40 WIRING AND CONTROL DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.1.1
1.1.2
1.2
1.2.1
I .2.2
1.3
DESCRIPTION
This section specifies providing, switches, receptacles, television and telephone rough-in,
magnetic contactors, photoelectric controls, occupancy sensors, and daylight saving sensors and
time switches.
Related Work Specified Elsewhere:
a. Basic Electrical Requirements: Section 16050. b. Wire and cables 600 Volt and below: Section 16120.
c. Wire connection accessories: Section 161 30.
d. Grounding and bonding: Section 16450. e. Circuit breakers, panelboards: Section 16470.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Codes, Regulations, Reference Standards and Specifications:
a. Relevant Codes and Regulations listed in Section 16050.
Source of Quality Control:
a. Following items UL-listed.
1. Toggle switches.
2. Receptacles and plugs.
3. Occupancy Sensors.
SUBMITTALS
Submit the following for approval in accordance with the Section 16050 and with the additional requirements as specified for each:
1.3.1
1.4
1.4.1
1.4.2
1.4.3
Shop Drawings. Information on the following shall be submitted for approval. a. Catalog cuts of receptacles and faceplates.
b. Catalog cuts of snap switches. c. Catalog cuts of occupancy sensors. d. Catalog cuts of telephone, data and television outlet jacks.
e. Catalog cuts of timeclocks and contactors.
PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
Mark each item in accordance with applicable reference standard.
Ship each unit securely packaged and labeled for safe handling and to avoid damage.
Store products in a secure and dry storage facility.
Larwin Park
City of Carlsbad NTD # 2002-0037
Wiring And Control Devices
16140 -1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.1.1
2.1.2
2.1.3
2.1.4
2.1.6
2.2
2.2.1
2.2.2
2.2.3
2.2.4
2.2.5
2.3
2.3.1
2.3.2
2.4
2.4.1
ROCKER SWITCHES
Specification grade.
Rating:
a. b.
Twenty amperes at 120-277 volts ac.
Horsepower-rated when used as disconnecting device for motor circuit.
Body and base:
compound, "Decora" style.
Fully enclosed, white, fire-resistant, non-absorptive thermosetting phenolic
Contacts: Silver alloy.
Poles: Single-pole, double-pole, three-way or four-way as shown.
Acceptable Manufacturers: Pass & Seymour, Hubbell, Leviton, Bryant or Equal.
RECEPTACLES
Specification grade.
Rating: 20 amperes (2 pole, 3 wire) at 125 volts or as shown.
Base and body: white, fire-resistant, non-absorptive thermosetting phenolic compound, "Decora"
style.
Outlet: Single, duplex, or quadruplex as shown.
For use in restrooms, wash rooms and outdoor locations: NEMA 5-20R and equipped with solid-
state ground-fault circuit interrupter with five-milliampere trip level.
TELEPHONElDATA ROUGH-IN
Provide conduit only for telephone systems as outlined on the drawings. In general, these
systems will comprise outlet devices where shown on the drawings, and raceways, from these outlet locations to the main equipment backboard. The Owner will be responsible for providing all
head-end equipment an final connections within the equipment room.
Acceptable Manufacturer: Pass & Seymour, Hubbell, Leviton, Bryant or Approved Equal.
COVER PLATES
Wall plates: a. NEMA WDI, suitable for specified receptacles and switches, size suitable for recess-
mounted or surface-mounted associated outlet box as shown.
b. For use in indoor office areas: White nylon with satin finish device cover plates.
c. For indoor service areas and electrical rooms: Stainless steel (brushed), as standard with the
manufacturer. d. For outdoor areas: Steel fabricated box shall be installed with a hinged outlet
cover/enclosure. There must be a gasket between the enclosure and the mounting surface, and between the hinge cover and mounting plate/base to assure proper seal. The box shall
be suitable for integral concrete pour applications.
Larwin Park
City of Carlsbad NTD # 2002-0037
Wiring And Control Devices
16140 -2
2.4.2
2.5
2.5.1
2.5.2
2.5.3
2.5.4
2.5.5
2.5.6
2.5.7
2.5.8
2.5.9
2.5.10
2.5.1 1
2.5.12
2.5.13
2.5.14
e. Screws shall be machine types in a color to match the finish of the plate. Sectional type
device plates shall not be used.
Acceptable Manufacturers: Pass & Seymour, Hubbell, Leviton, Bryant or Approved Equal.
OCCUPANCY SENSORS
Occupancy sensors shall be either wall or ceiling mounted as shown on the drawings. Devices and their accessories shall be selected and located as necessary to provide complete coverage
and satisfactory operation in each respective room or space. Additional units from those shown
on the drawings shall be provided as necessary at no additional cost to the Owner where adequate coverage cannot be obtained using a single device.
Wall switch sensors shall be capable of detection of motion at desktop level up to 300 square feet
and gross motion up to 1000 square feet, with 180” coverage.
Wall switch sensors shall be accommodate loads from 0 to 800 watts at 120 volts;
Passive infrared sensors shall have a multiple segmented Lodif Fresnel lens, in a multiple-tier configuration, with grooves to eliminate dust and residue build-up.
All sensors shall be capable of operating normally with any electronic ballast, PL lamp systems and rated motor loads.
Coverage of sensors shall remain constant after sensitivity control has been set. No automatic
reduction shall occur in coverage due to the cycling of air conditioner or heating fans.
All sensors shall have readily accessible, user adjustable controls for time delay and sensitivity.
Controls shall be recessed to limit tampering.
In the event of failure, a bypass manual “override” shall be provided on each sensor. When
bypass is utilized, lighting shall remain on constantly or control shall divert to a wall switch until sensor is replaced. This control shall be recessed to prevent tampering.
Ultrasonic operating frequency shall be crystal controlled to within plus or minus 0.005% tolerance
to assure reliable performance and eliminate sensor cross talk. Sensors using multiple
frequencies are not acceptable.
All sensors shall provide a method of indication to verify that motion is being detected during
testing and that the unit is working.
Where specified, sensor shall have an internal additional isolated relay with Normally Open,
Normally Closed and Common outputs for use with HVAC control, Data Logging and other control options. Sensors utilizing separate components to achieve this function are not acceptable.
All sensors shall have no leakage current to load, in manual or in Auto/Off mode, for safety
purpose and shall have voltage drop protection.
All sensors shall have UL rated, 94 V-0 white, plastic enclosures.
Circuit Control Hardware-CU
a. Control Units- For ease of mounting, installation and future service, control unit (s) shall be able to be externally mounted through a % inch knock-out on a standard electrical enclosure and be an integrated, self-contained unit consisting internally of an isolated load switching
control relay and a transformer to provide low-voltage power. Transformer shall provide
power to a minimum of two (2) sensors.
Latwin Park
City of Carlsbad NTD # 2002-0037
Wiring And Control Devices 16140 -3
b. Relay Contracts shall have ratings of:
13A - 120 VAC Tungsten 20A - 120 VAC Ballast
20A - 277 VAC Ballast
2.5.15 Control wiring between sensors and control units shall be Class II, 18-24 AWG, stranded U.L.
Classified, PVC insulated or Teflon jacketed cable approved for use in plenums, where applicable,
2.6 DIMMING CONTROLS:
2.6.1 Individual dimmer control stations shall be fully compatible with the dimming ballast provided. If
substituted dimming ballasts are accepted, it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to
coordinate and provide completely compatible dimmer switches that match in style, general
appearance, and function to those shown on the contract drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
3.1.1
3.1.2
3.1.3
3.1.4
3.1.5
3.2
3.2.1
INSTALLATION
Install switches, receptacles, occupancy sensors, as shown and in accordance with referenced
codes. All devices shall be installed plumb and square. Recessed boxes shall be flush with finished surfaces so that plates are in contact with the finished surface all around.
Install coverplates on all switches and receptacles.
Ground receptacles, snap switches, and lighting-contactor enclosures in accordance with Section
16450.
Make power cable connections to snap switches, plugs, and receptacles, by means of integral mechanical connectors. If such items are not furnished with integral mechanical connectors,
make connections using compression connectors in accordance with Section 161 30.
Apply matching touch-up paint as necessary.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
General.
Perform the following in the presence of the Owner: a.
b. c.
d.
e.
Test switches and receptacles for connection in accordance with wiring diagram and to prove
that power is available, correctly polarized and grounded.
Test equipment enclosures for continuity to grounding system. Check tightness of all cable connections of snap switches, receptacles, ect.
Test operations of circuits and controls of switches and receptacles.
Test each receptacle having ground-fault circuit protection to assure that the ground-fault circuit interrupter will not operate when subjected to a ground-fault current of less than 4
milliamperes and will operate when subjected to ground fault current exceeding 6 milliamperes. Perform tests using an instrument specifically designed and manufactured for
testing ground-fault circuit interrupters. For applications, shown on plans, where GFI receptacle provides GFI protection to downstream receptacle apply the test to the receptacle,
which is the greatest distance from the ground-fault interrupter. “TEST’ button operation will
not be acceptable as a substitute for this test.
3.2.2 Occupancy Sensors.
Larwin Park
City of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
Wiring And Control Devices
16140 -4
a. It shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to locate and aim sensors in the correct location required for complete and proper volumetric coverage within the range of coverage(s) of
controlled areas per the manufacturer’s recommendations. The locations and quantities of
sensors shown on the drawings are diagrammatic and indicate only the rooms, which are to
be provided with sensors. The contractor shall provide additional sensors if required to
properly and completely cover the respective room.
Install all wall sensors plumb and square.
Test and adjust the system.
b.
c.
END OF SECTION
Larwin Park City of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
Wiring And Control Devices
16140 -5
SECTION 16450
GROUNDING AND BONDING
PART 1 -GENERAL
1 .I
1.1.1
1.1.2
1.1.3
c_
1.1.4
I .2
1.2.1
1.2.2
1.2.3
1.2.4
DESCRIPTION
Extent of electrical grounding and bonding work is indicated by the drawings and schedules and
as specified herein. Grounding and bonding work is defined to encompass systems, circuits, and
equipment.
Type of electrical grounding and bonding work specified in this section includes the following:
a. Solidly grounded.
Applications of electrical grounding and bonding work in this section includes the following:
a. Underground metal water piping. b. M.etal building frames.
c. Electrical power systems.
d. Grounding electrodes. e. Raceways.
f. Service equipment. g. Enclosures.
h. Equipment.
i. Lighting standards.
j. Landscape lighting.
Related work specified elsewhere:
a. Basic Electrical Requirements: Section 16050
b. Wire and Cables (600 Volts and below): Section 16120 c. Circuit and Motor Disconnects: Section 161 70
d. Low Voltage Switchboards (Below 600 Volts): Section 16425
e. Circuit Breakers, Panelboards and Loadcenters: Section 16470 f. Motor Starters: Section 16480
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Codes, Regulations, Reference Standards and Specifications:
a. Relevant Codes, Regulations and Reference Standards listed in Specification Section 16050
Manufacturer’s Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of grounding and bonding
products, of types, and ratings required, and ancillary grounding materials, including stranded
cable, copper braid and bus, grounding electrodes and plate electrodes, and bonding jumpers whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years.
Installer’s Qualifications: projects with electrical grounding work similar to that required for project. Firm with at least 3 years of successful installation experience on
Codes and Standards: a. Electrical Code Compliance: Comply with applicable local electrical code requirements of the
authority having jurisdiction, and NEC as applicable to electrical grounding and bonding,
pertaining to systems, circuits and equipment. UL Compliance: Provide grounding and bonding products, which are UL-listed and labeled
for their intended usage.
b.
Larwin Park
City of Carlsbad NTD # 2002-0037
Grounding And Bonding 16450 -1
c. IEEE Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements and recommended installation
practices of IEEE Standards 80, 81, 141 and 142 pertaining to grounding and bonding of
system, circuits and equipment.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
Submit the following for review and comments and in accordance with Section 16050.
1.3.1 Manufacturer's data on grounding and bonding products and associated accessories, including
ground rods, bare copper conductors, and exothermic welding materials.
1.3.2 Certification. a. Certified test reports verifying that ground resistance of each ground grid when installed and each ground bus when connected to the ground grid does not exceed specified values per
Article 3.8 of this Section.
1.4 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
1.4.1 Ship each unit securely packaged and labeled for safe handling and to avoid damage.
1.4.2 Store equipment in secure and dry storage facility.
1.5 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
1 5.1 Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
grounding and bonding products which may be incorporated in the work include, both are not limited to, the following:
1 5.2 Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide grounding and bonding
products of one of the following (for each type of product): a. Adalet-PLM Div; Scott Fetzer Co. b. Burndy Corporation.
c. Cadweld Div; Erico Products Inc.
d. Crouse-Hinds Div; Cooper Industries. e. Ideal Industries, Inc.
f. Okonite Company.
g. 02 Gedney Div; General Signal Corp. h. Thomas and Betts Corp.
01 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
Except as otherwise indicated, provide electrical grounding and bonding systems indicated; with assembly
of materials, including, but not limited to, cables/wires, connectors, solderless lug terminals, grounding
electrodes and plate electrodes, bonding jumper braid, surge arresters, and additional accessories needed for a complete installation. Where more than one type component product meets indicated
requirements, selection is Installer's option. Where materials or components are not indicated, provide
products, which comply with NEC, UL, and IEEE requirements and with established industry standards for
those applications indicated.
2.2 GROUND RODS
Stainless steel (type 302), with copper jacket, 3/4-inch diameter as shown, by 10 feet long.
Lawin Park City of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
Grounding And Bonding
16450 -2
- 2.3 GROUNDING CONDUCTOR
2.3.1 Grounding electrode conductors:
a. Insulated or bare conductor, as shown, in accordance with the following: 1.
2. Bare conductor: Section 16120.
1.
2.
3.
Insulated conductor: As specified in Section 161 20 for single-conductor
cable.
b. Size:
For use in ground grid and for connecting of ground grid to ground bus:
4/0 AWG. For connection of ground bus in communication rooms to main ground bus in ac
switchboard rooms: 2/0 AWG.
For other grounding electrode conductors: In accordance with NEC Table 250-94.
2.3.2 Equipment grounding conductor:
a.
b.
c.
Sized in accordance with NEC article 250-95 unless otherwise shown as oversized. Insulated equipment-grounding conductor: Single-conductor cable as specified
in Section 16120.
Bare equipment grounding conductor integral with multiple-conductor cable:
Section 161 20.
2.4 TERMINAL LUGS
2.4.1 For 4/0 AWG and smaller conductors: Copper compression terminal lugs.
2.4.2
2.5
For 250 kcmil and larger: Long barrel, copper, double-compression terminal lugs.
BONDING PLATES, CONNECTORS, TERMINALS AND CLAMPS
Bonding Plates, Connectors, Terminals and Clamps: Provide electrical bonding plates, connectors, terminals, lugs and clamps as recommended by bonding plate, connector, terminal and clamp
manufacturers for indicated applications.
2.6 JUMPERS
Copper braided or leaf-type flexible jumper, size as necessary.
2.7 ELECTRICAL GROUNDING CONNECTION ACCESSORIES
Electrical Grounding Connection Accessories: Provide electrical insulating tape, heat-shrinkable
insulating tubing, welding materials, bonding straps, as recommended by accessories manufacturers for type service indicated.
2.8 FIELD WELDING
Field Welding: Comply with AWS Code for procedures, appearance, and quality of welds; and for
methods used in correction welding work. Provide welded connections where grounding conductors
connect to underground grounding and plate electrodes.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION -
Larwin Park
City of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
Grounding And Bonding
16450 -3
3.1 .I
3.2
3.2.1
3.2.2
3.2.3
3.2.4
3.2.5
3.2.6
3.2.7
3.2.8
3.2.9
3.2.10
3.2.1 1
3.2.12
3.2.13
3.2.14
3.2.1.5
Examine areas and conditions under which electrical grounding and bonding connections are to be made and notify Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of work.
Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to Installer.
INSTALLATION OF ELECTRICAL GROUNDING AND BONDING SYSTEM
General: Install electrical grounding and bonding systems and applicable portions of NEC,
NECA’s “Standard of Installation”, and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure
that products comply with requirements.
Coordinate with other electrical work as necessary to interface installation of electrical grounding and bonding system work with other work.
Weld grounding conductors to underground grounding electrodes.
Ground electrical service system neutral service entrance equipment to grounding electrodes.
Ground each separately derived system neutral to:
a. Effectively grounded structural steel columns.
b. Ground rods.
Provide separate 100% rated green ground conductor for each and every branch circuit or group
of branch circuits and for each equipment branch circuit. Ground conductor shall be sized in schedules.
Terminate feeder and branch circuit insulated equipment-grounding conductors with grounding lug, bus or bushing.
Connect grounding electrode conductors to 1 -inch diameter, or greater, metallic cold water pipe
using a suitable sized ground clamp. Provide connection to flanged piping at street side of flange.
Tighten grounding and bonding connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with manufacturer’s published torque-tightening values for connectors and bolts,
Where manufacturer’s torquing requirements are not indicated, specified in UL 486A to assure permanent and effective grounding.
Install braided type bonding jumpers with code-sized ground clamps on water meter piping to
electrically bypass water meters.
Route grounding connections and conductors to ground and protective devices in shortest and straightest paths as possible to minimize transient voltage rises.
Apply corrosion-resistant finish to field-connections, buried metallic grounding and bonding products, and places where factory applied protective coatings have been destroyed, which are
subjected to corrosive action.
Install clamp-on connectors on clean metal contact surfaces, to ensure electrical conductivity and
circuit integrity.
Waterproof Sealant: Use Kearney “Aqua Seal” mastic sealant on all below grade clamp or
compression type connections.
Grounded non-current carrying metal parts of electrical equipment enclosures, frames,
conductors raceways or cable trays to provide a low impedance path for line-to-ground fault current and to bond all non-current carrying metal parts together.
Larwin Park
City of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
Grounding And Bonding
16450 -4
3.2.16 In every receptacle and switch outlet box the green insulated grounding conductor(s) shall be
spliced together. A separate green insulated bonding jumper shall be provided from the splice to
the box body, with attachment using a tapped 10-32 X 318” long machine screw. At receptacles, an additional green insulated bonding jumper shall be provided from the splice to the receptacle
ground screw (even with self-grounding receptacles).
3.3 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTORS.
Provide insulated 100% rated equipment-grounding conductors for all feeders and branch circuits
operating at 50 volts or greater.
3.4 GROUNDING OF SERVICE EQUIPMENT
3.4.1 Ground in accordance with NEC.
3.4.2 Ground enclosure and ground bus in switchgear, switchboard, motor control center or panelboard
to ground bus provided in substation or room using insulated grounding electrode conductor.
3.4.3 Install copper bonding jumper between neutral and ground bus as shown.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
3.5.1 Upon completion of installation of electrical grounding and bonding systems, test ground resistance with ground resistance tester. Where tests show resistance-to-ground is over 2 ohms,
take appropriate action to reduce resistance to 2 ohms, or less, by driving additional ground rods; then retest to demonstrate compliance.
3.5.2 Grounding shall be in accordance with NFPA and ANSI C2, except that grounds and grounding
systems shall have a resistance to solid earth ground not exceeding the following values:
3.5.3 To meet resistance requirements, install additional ground rods.
3.5.4 Test metallic conduit and raceways, equipment enclosures, metallic cable troughs, fences, hand railings, metallic structures and light standards for continuity to grounding system.
3.5.5 Test resistance of connection between ground bus in communications rooms and ground bus in
associated ac switchboard rooms and substations for resistance not to exceed one ohm.
3.5.6 Ground Resistance Test:
a. Grounding electrode resistance testing shall be accomplished with a ground resistance
direct-reading single test meter utilizing the fall-of-potential method and two reference
electrodes. Perform test prior to interconnection to other grounding systems. Orient the concrete-encased ground electrode to be tested and the two reference electrodes in straight-
line spaces fifty (50) feet apart. Drive the two-reference electrodes five (5) feet deep.
Test results shall be in writing, and shall show temperature, humidity and condition of the soil at the time of the tests. In the case where the ground resistance exceeds 2 ohms, owner will
issue additional instructions.
b.
Larwin Park
City of Carlsbad NTD # 2002-0037
END OF SECTION
Grounding And Bonding
16450 -5
SECTION 16470 CIRCUIT BREAKERS AND PANELBOARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
1 .I .I This section specifies the furnishing, installing, connecting and testing of circuit breakers and
panelboards.
1 .I .2 Related Work Specified Elsewhere:
a. Basic Electrical Requirements: Section 16050.
b. Raceways, boxes and cabinets: Section 161 IO. c. Wire and cable:. Section 16120.
d. Wire connection accessories: Section 161 30.
e. Grounding and bonding: Section 16450.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.2.1 Codes, Regulations, Reference Standards and Specifications:
a. Relevant Codes, Regulations and Reference Standards listed in Specification Section 16050.
1.2.2 Source Quality Control: a. Each item UL-listed.
- 1.3 SUBMllTALS
Submit the following for approval in accordance with Section 16050 and with the additional requirements
as specified for each:
1.3.1
1.3.2
1.4
1.4.1
1.4.2
1.4.3
1.5
1.5.1
Shop drawings shall include but not be limited to the following:
a. Overall dimensions. b. Maximum short-circuit bracing.
c. d.
e.
Circuit breaker type, interrupting rating, trip setting. Circuit breaker size for connected loads and spares as indicated on plans. Branch circuit
breaker arrangement shall match the panel schedule shown on contract drawings.
Required number of spaces as per plan.
Certification.
PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
Mark each circuit breaker, panelboard and load center in accordance with the applicable
reference standard.
Ship each unit securely packaged and labeled for safe handling and to avoid damage or
distortion.
Store products in a secure and dry storage facility.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Per the requirements of specification sections 16050 and 16060.
Larwin Park
City of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
Circuit Breakers And Panelboards 16470 -1
9.6 MANUFACTURER
1.5.2 GE, Square D, Westinghouse/Cutler-Hammer, Siemens.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.1.1
2.1.2
2.2
2.2.1
2.3
2.3.1
2.3.2
2.3.3
SPECIAL CONDITIONS
Interchangeability: Components of the same type, size, rating, functional characteristics and
make are to be interchangeable.
Finish for enclosures for enclosed circuit breaker panelboards:
a.
b. Prime with zinc primer.
c.
Clean and degrease metallic surfaces.
Finish with one coat of light gray enamel per ANSI.
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
NEMA AB1, molded-case, bolt on, quick-make/quick-break, mechanically trip-free switching mechanism, with thermal trip for inverse time delay, overcurrent protection and magnetic trip for
instantaneous short-circuit protection. Frame size 225 amperes and above equipped with
interchangeable thermal trip and adjustable magnetic trip unit. Designed to carry continuous rating in ambient temperature of 40 degree C with the following parameters as shown:
a. Number of poles.
b. Rated voltage. c. Rated interrupting current. d. Trip setting. e. Frame size.
PANELBOARDS
NEMA PB1. UL 67
Enclosure:
a. UL50.
b. Code gauge galvanized steel, surface or flush mounted as indicated on floor plan. Sturdy,
rigid chassis assembly shall assure accurate alignment of interior with panel front. Gutter space shall meet or exceed UL and NEC.
c. Type:
1. 2.
3. Outdoor locations: NEMA 3R.
Interior components mounted on back plate of reinforced steel for rigid support and accurate
alignment.
Provide flush-type lock/latch handle in accordance with UL 50; screw fastenings will not be
accepted in lieu of latch.
Provide two (2) keys for each panelboard. All panelboards shall be keyed alike.
Aboveground indoor locations and electrical rooms: NEMA 1. Basement, Industrial locations, except electrical rooms: NEMA 12.
d.
e.
f. Provision for enclosure grounding.
g.
Busbars:
a. ASTMB187. b. 98-percent-conductivity copper.
c. Contact surface silver-plated or tin-plated.
Lawin Park
City of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
Circuit Breakers And Panelboards
16470 -2
d.
e. f.
Rating of neutral and ground bus: Equal to that of phase bus, unless specifically noted
otherwise.
Neutral bus mounted on insulating block. Neutral and ground bus equipped with integral mechanical connectors.
2.3.4 Incoming:
a. b.
C.
d.
e.
f.
9.
h.
Typi of service: 120/240 volts, single phase as shown.
Type of main: Main lugs or circuit breakers or integrally fused circuit breakers as shown,
conforming to requirements specified, located at top or bottom as necessary. Branch circuit: Circuit breaker or integrally fused circuit breaker as shown, conforming to
requirements specified, with number of circuits as shown. Provide lighting contactor in
panelboard where shown on drawings to control the main circuit breaker.
Circuit breaker: Trip device coordinated with that of upstream circuit breakers to provide
selective tripping. Suitable for service entrance where necessary and indicated.
Oversize Lug - Provide Oversize lug within panel enclosure as shown on drawings for special
applications where feeder size is oversized to compensate for voltage drop. All panelboards shall be fully rated to withstand the short circuit current available. Series
rated panelboards are not acceptable.
All panelboards shall be configured exactly as shown on the contract drawings. “Backfed main” arrangements are not acceptable.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
3.1 .I
-
3.1.2
3.1.3
3.1.4
3.1.5
3.1.6
3.1.7
3.1.8
3.2
3.2.1
-
INSTALLATION
Install panelboards at locations shown, with bottom not less than 12 inches above floor. The top of
panelboards shall not exceed 6’-6 to center of highest circuit breaker handle. Where panelboards of varying sizes are mounted in the same room, the top edge of all panelboards shall be evenly
aligned.
Mount panelboards and load centers with fronts straight and plumb. Surface mounted
panelboards shall be supported with four (4) 1/4” toggle bolts for dry wall and 1/4” bolts and inserts for concrete or masonry wall.
When feeders serve more than one panelboard or panelboard section, install separate junction boxes or provide adequate gutter area for termination of feeders and bus taps.
Connect branch circuit wires as shown. Connect neutral wire of branch circuit to neutral bar in
panelboard.
Make conduit connections in accordance with Section 161 10.
Ground panelboards enclosures in accordance with Section 16450. Install bonding jumpers from
grounding bushings on conduits entering panelboard cabinets to ground bus.
Apply matching touch-up paint where necessary.
Provide a spare 3 / 4 inch empty conduit up into accessible ceilings for every 3 spare breakers and every three spaces in all flush mounted panelboards.
DIRECTORY OF CIRCUITS
Furnish each panelboard with legibly printed circuit directory located on inside of enclosure.
Larwin Park
City of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
Circuit Breakers And Panelboards
16470 -3
3.2.2 The directory shall match the panel schedule shown on the contract drawings.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
3.3.1 Furnish necessary equipment and perform the following tests:
a.
b.
Molded case circuit breakers: Perform pole-to-pole and pole-to-ground insulation resistance tests with 1,000 V. d.c. megger. Insulation resistance shall be 50 megohms minimum.
Panel boards: Perform insulation resistance tests of each bus section phase-to-phase and
phase-to-ground for one minute using 1000 V megger. Insulation resistance to be not less than manufacturer's recommended minimum or two megohms minimum.
Test circuit connections in accordance with the wiring diagrams.
Test panelboard enclosures for continuity to grounding system. Check cable connections to circuit breakers and fused switch units for tightness.
Check setting of adjustable magnetic trips for compliance with approved coordination study.
c. d.
e.
f.
3.3.2 Submit certified test reports.
END OF SECTION
Larwin Park City of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
Circuit Breakers And Panelboards 16470 -4
SECTION 1651 0
INTERIOR LIGHTING
PART I - GENERAL
I .I .I DESCRIPTION
1 .I .I This section specifies interior lighting fixtures and lamps.
1 .I .2 Related Work specified elsewhere:
a.
b. c.
d.
e.
f. Exterior Lighting: Section 16520.
g.
Basic Electrical Requirements: Section 16050
Raceway, boxes, cable tray and cabinets: Section 161 IO. Wire and cable 600 volt and below: Section 16120.
Wire and connection accessories: Section 161 30.
Wiring and control devices: Section 16140.
Grounding and bonding: Section 16450.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.2.1 Codes, Regulations, Reference Standards and Specifications: a. Relevant Codes, Regulations and Reference Standards listed in Section 16050.
1.2.2 Each lighting fixture to be UL-labeled or listed.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
Submit the following for approval in accordance with Section 16050 and with the additional requirements as specified for each:
1.3.1 Submit catalog cuts for the following:
a. Lighting fixtures (each type).
b. Lamp ballasts (each type and size). c. Lamps (each type and size).
1.3.2 Certification:
a. Verification that each fixture is in compliance with applicable codes, regulations, reference standards and specifications for the location at which it is to be used. Indicate requirements
that each fixture meets.
1.4 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
1.4.1
or distortion.
Ship each unit securely packaged and labeled for safe handling in shipment and to avoid damage
1.4.2 Store lighting fixtures in a secure and dry storage facility.
1.5 WARRANTY
1.5.1
warranty against discoloration and distortion for a total of four years.
Globes and Diffusers: In addition to warranty requirements of the General Provisions, furnish
1.5.2 Lamps: Warrant the life of lamps as per industry standard.
Lawin Park City of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
Lighting
16510 -1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.1.1
are to be interchangeable, and of the same manufacturer.
SPECIAL CONDITIONS FOR LIGHTING FIXTURES
Interchangeability: Components of same type, size, rating, functional characteristics and make
2.1.2
2.1.3
2.1.4
2.2
2.2.1
2.2.2
2.2.3
2.3
2.3.1
2.3.2
2.3.3
2.5
2.5.1
2.5.2
In accordance with UL.
Materials: As per fixture schedule
Lamps:
a. In accordance with applicable ANSI Standards, these specifications and the fixture schedule. b. All lamps of each type installed on this project shall match exactly in Degree Kelvin, CRI, and visual appearancekolor. Non-matching lamps shall be replaced by the Contractor at no
additional cost to the Owner, as directed by the Engineer.
c. All lamps shall be manufactured by G.E., Philips, OsranlSylvania or Venture only.
FLUORESCENT
Watt rating: As shown.
Color: Color temperature to be per fixture schedule.
Type:
a.
b.
Trim line F32T8: Rapid start or Instant start, CRI = 84, Medium Bi-pin base and 20,000 hours
rated life.
High output T-5: Rapid start, CRI = 82 miniature Bi-pin base, and 20,000 hour rated life.
COMPACT FLUORESCENT
Watt rating: As shown.
Color: Color temperature per fixture schedule.
Type:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
High Lumen Biax T5: Rapid start, CRI = 82, Single End 4 Pin base and 20,000 hours rated life.
Low Watt Biax T4 (non-dimmable): Built-in ballast, CRI = 82, Single End 2 Pin base and
10,000 hours rated life. Double Biax T4 (non-dimmable): Built-in ballast, CRI = 82, Single End 2 Pin base and 10,000
hours rated life.
Double Biax T4 (dimmable): Electronic dimming ballast or electronic ballast (as indicated on plans), CRI = 82, Single End 4 Pin base and 10,000 hours rated life.
Triple Biax T4 (dimmable): Electronic dimming ballast or electronic ballast (as indicated on plans), CRI = 82, Single End 4 Pin base and 10,000 hours rated life.
HIGH PRESSURE SODIUM
Watt rating: As shown.
Color: Clear or diffused, and as indicated on the fixture schedule.
Larwin Park
City of Carlsbad NTD # 2002-0037
Lighting
16510 -2
- 2.5.3 Type: a. 100 watt, Mogul base and 20,000 hours rated life.
.-
2.6 BALLASTS
2.6.1 High Pressure Sodium lamps:
a.
b.
c.
d.
UL 1029, high power factor type.
Operable on 208 volt, 60 Hertz as shown or necessary, type and rating suitable for
associated lamp.
Capable of starting lamp at ambient temperature of minus 20F and above.
Equip with individual fuse protection installed in ballast compartment of fixture.
2.6.2 Fluorescent lamps (electronic ballast for T8):
a.
b.
C.
d.
e.
f.
g - h.
I.
j. k.
1.
m. n.
P.
0.
Fluorescent lamp ballasts shall be high frequency electronic type, operating lamps at a
frequency of 20 kHz with no detectable flicker.
Ballast manufacturers shall have been producing electronic ballasts in USA for more than 10
years with a low failure rate. Ballasts shall be approved and listed by UL.
Ballasts shall comply with FCC and NEMA limits governing electromagnetic and radio
frequency interference and shall not interfere with operation of other normal electrical equipment.
Ballast shall comply with all applicable state and federal efficiency standards. Ballasts shall meet all applicable ANSI and IEEE standards regarding harmonic distortion and surge protection.
Ballasts shall not be affected by lamp failure and shall yield normal lamp life. Lamp current crest factor shall not exceed 1.6.
Ballast shall operate at an input frequency of 60 HZ and an input voltage of 108 to 132 (1 20V
models) or 249 to 305 (277V models).
Ballasts shall have power factor above 90%. Ballasts shall operate as a parallel circuit to allow remaining lamps to maintain full output if
companion lamps fail.
Total harmonic distortion shall be 10% or less. Minimum operating temperature shall be 0 degree F. Ballast factor shall be not less 80 % for any lamp combination.
Ballasts shall carry three-year warranty including labor allowance. Ballasts shall be manufactured by Advance.
2.6.3 Compact fluorescent (elecfronic ballast for T4):
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g. h.
i.
j. k.
1.
Compact fluorescent ballasts shall be high frequency electronic type, operating lamps at a frequency greater than 30 kHz with no detectable flicker (less than 2%).
Ballast manufacturer shall have been producing electronic ballasts in USA for more than 5
years with a low failure rate. Ballasts shall be approved and listed by UL (Class P).
Ballasts shall comply with FCC and NEMA limits governing electro-magnetic and radio
interference and shall not interfere with operation of other normal electrical equipment.
Ballasts shall meet all applicable ANSI and IEEE standards regarding distortion and surge
protection.
Ballasts shall meet all applicable State and Federal efficiency standard. Sound to be rated A (inaudible).
Lamp current crest factor shall not exceed 1.48.
Rapid start operation for maximum lamp life. Ballasts shall have power factor above 98%.
Ballasts shall contain no PCBs.
Total harmonic distortion shall be less than 10%.
Larwin Park
City of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
Lighting
16510 -3
m. Minimum operating temperature shall be -10 degree C. n. Interchangeable with standard ballast.
0. Ballasts shall carry three-year warranty including labor allowance.
p. Ballasts for PL style T4 lamps shall be as manufactured by ROBERTSON.
q. Electronic ballasts for 4-pin triple PL-T style lamps shall have a power factor of 95%, less than 10% THD, a current crest factor of 1.5 or less and be suitable for either 120 or 277 volt operation. One common ballast shall drive 26w, 32w, and 42w lamps. Ballasts shall be
manufactured by Advance.
2.7 FIXTURE BODY AND HOUSING
2.7.1 Shape size and material as shown.
2.8 REFLECTOR
2.8.1 Shape, size and material as shown. Aluminum or stainless steel polished to mirror finish unless
otherwise shown. Minimum thickness 22 gauges unless othetwise shown.
2.9 DIFFUSERS
2.9.1 Shape and size as shown, one-piece molded or extruded clear virgin acrylic or polycarbonate
plastic having the following properties:
a. Interior diffusing with smooth exterior surface. Prismatic acrylic lens to be 0.125-inch
minimum thickness, with type 12 prismatic pattern.
b. Self-extinguishing, in accordance with ASTM D635. c. No material color change when used with fluorescent lamps.
d. No apparent yellowing after 500 hours exposure to fluorescent lamp source under conditions
similar to those existing in the lighting fixture. e. No alteration to optical properties of the fixture when finished diffuser treated with anti-static
wax. f. Formed by carefully controlled processes so that the finished piece retains its design contours and dimensions at normal operating temperature.
g. Resistance to shrinking, warping, crazing, cracking, or discoloring, either in service or when stored in the manufacturer's standard shipping containers under normal conditions.
2.10 GLOBES
2.1 0.1 Clear seamless polycarbonate or high-impact heat-resistant glass as shown.
2.10.2 Shape and size: As shown.
2.10.3 Minimum thickness: 0.125 inch, surface free from visible mold seams.
2.10.4 Reduction in strength: 10 percent maximum after five years.
2.10.5 Maximum haze: Two percent.
2.10.6 Minimum light transmittance: 88 percent.
2.11 LENSES
2.1 1 .I Plastic lenses: Clear polycarbonate as shown, minimum thickness 0.06 inch.
Latwin Park City of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
Lighting
16510 -4
2.1 1.2 ~-
2.1 1.3
2.12
2.12.1
2.13
2.13.1
2.13.2
2.14
2.14.1
-
2.14.2
2.14.3
2.15
2.15.1
2.15.2
2.15.3
2.15.4
2.1 6
2.16.1
.- 2.16.2
Glass lenses: 1/4-inch tempered glass, laminated glass, or 1/8-inch double strength clear glass
as shown, capable of absorbing ultraviolet rays when used with mercury-vapor or metal-halide
lamps.
Refracted lenses: Heat-resistant annealed clear borosilicate glass, with the following additional
requirements: a.
b. Minimum efficiency: 85 percent.
Initial lumen distribution on horizontal plane evenly from zero to 90 degrees: 55 to 60 percent.
FIXTURE WIRE
See Section 16120.
GASKElTlNG
Keyed gasket: One-piece extruded solid neoprene having type A durometer hardness of 30 plus
or minus five when tested in accordance with ASTM D2240.
Self-retaining gasket:
a.
b.
c.
d.
One-piece, closed-cell sponge neoprene, soft or medium density.
Resistant to aging, heat, ultra-violet light, water, oil, weathering and setting as determined by
ASTM D1056. Cemented to component with resilient neoprene sealing compound compatible with finish. Adhesive not applied to diffuser.
Silicone gasket equal to neoprene, at Contractor's option.
HARDWARE
Latches, catches, release mechanism, hinges, screws, bolts, studs, nuts, rivets, washers and springs. Heavy-duty stainless steel or bronze, as shown.
Latches and catches: Captive type.
Operating hardware: Self-retaining type.
CONSTRUCTION
Fixture body, reflectors, wiring channels, end caps and castings formed so as to prevent buckling
or distortion.
Minimum of two wire clips provided in wiring channel to support wiring. Self-cleaning air filter
provided on breather ports.
Seams and joints continuously welded and ground smooth.
When aluminum will be in contact with dissimilar metals, separate contact surfaces with gasket,
nonabsorptive tape, or coating to prevent corrosion.
FINISH
Baked enamel: Nonspecular finish consisting of six-stage hot cleaning wash, phosphate coat,
prime coat, and finish coat of sprayed white or other color acrylic enamel as shown, baked at 350F for a minimum of 30 minutes.
Porcelain enamel: Opaque fused vitreous surface finish, 88 percent average reflectance factor, in accordance with the industry standard.
Larwin Park
City of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
Lighting
16510 -5
2.16.3
2.16.4
2.16.5
2.16.6
2.16.7
2.16.8
2.1 7
2.17.1
2.18
2.18.1
2.19
2.19.1
2.20
2.20.1
2.21
2.21 .l
2.22
2.22.1
Specular anodized coating: 14-stage process for permanently sealed specular or semispecular finish, as shown, in accordance with patented electrolytic process, Alzak or equal. When shown
dark bronze color, match Duranodic 313 Dark Bronze.
Zinc coating: Per ASTM.
Factory painting: Per ASTM standard.
Field painting: Color to match existing finish.
Color anodized finish: Minimum coating thickness 0.8 mil, coating weight 35 milligrams per
square inch, hot water seal overall, tested in accordance with ASTM requirement. Color to be as
indicated.
Electrostatic powder coating: Prepare surfaces by sandblast cleaning, applying coating promptly after cleaning. Ground material to be coated. Apply coating as electrostatically charged dry powder using electrostatic spray gun to produce DFT of six mils plus or minus two mils. Cure by
heat treatment.
LABEL
Mark each fixture and its components in accordance with applicable reference standards.
FASTENERS
Size and type shown or best suited to use.
LIGHTING FIXTURE TYPES
See drawings for Lighting Fixture Schedule.
LAMP COLORS
All lamps of each type, style, wattage, etc, shall be from one (1) single manufacturing batch to
ensure uniform visual appearance when installed and energized. Lamps differing in visual appearance with regard to color, temperature, etc, even if as specified, shall be replaced by the Contractor at no additional charge to the Owner. For further clarifications confer with the
Engineer. All lamps shall be manufactured by G.E.
SPARE LAMPS
Provide a minimum of 6 or 10% (whichever is greater) of each type of lamp style, type, and wattage, etc used on this project. Turn over to Owner prior to project completion
LAMP MANUFACTURER
All lamps shall be manufactured by G.E., Philips, Osram/Sylvania or Venture only. Where
available, all fluorescent lamps shall be of the type that permits non-hazardous disposal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
Larwin Park
City of Carlsbad NTD # 2002-0037
Lighting
16510 -6
.- 3.1.1
3.1.2
3.2
3.2.1
-
3.2.2
3.2.3
3.2.5
3.2.6
General: a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
The Architectural reflected ceiling plan shall take precedent as to location of fixtures. Any
discrepancies shall be brought to the Architect's attention before installation. Coordinate with Division 15 on locations of supply air diffusers and return air grills.
Fixtures shall be completely installed including lenses, lamps, ballasts and finish trim. Fixtures shall be provided with dimming ballasts in rooms which have dimmer switches
shown.
Clean lamps, diffusers, globes, reflectors and exposed-to-view surfaces of the fixtures.
Surface and Pendant Installation:
a.
b.
C.
d.
e.
Mount fixtures rigidly in place, where shown as surface mounted. Use expansion anchors
and machine screws for concrete surfaces and toggle bolts for hollow concrete masonry surfaces. Use appropriate fasteners for attachment to other surfaces. Support lighting
fixtures independent of suspended acoustical panel ceiling systems.
Where aluminum contacts concrete or dissimilar metal, separate contact surfaces with gasket, nonabsorptive tape or bituminous coating to prevent corrosion. Use stainless steel
fasteners. Mount fixtures plumb, level and in straight lines. Install stems of suspended fixtures plumb.
Group-mounted fluorescent fixtures to appear as one unit.
Install chase nipple where fluorescent fixtures are installed in continuous groups.
Fixture wiring to be per Section 16120.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Coordinate the lamp manufacturer with the ballast manufacturer and make sure the ballast and
lamps are compatible.
Coordinate the color temperature of fluorescent lamps in different fixtures at various location and make sure they all match the fixture schedule.
Fluorescent lamps, which are not color temperature coordinated, shall be replaced at no
additional cost to the Owner.
Fixtures and lamps or approved alternates, which are not consistent with the fixture schedule, shall be replaced at no additional cost to the Owner.
Testing: a.
b.
Furnish necessary personnel and equipment and perform tests and adjustments in the
presence of the Engineer. Test lighting circuits for continuity and operation. 1. Test fixtures for continuity of grounding system.
Larwin Park City of Carlsbad
NTD # 2002-0037
END OF SECTION
Lighting 16510 -7
APPENDICES
Appendix A Bid Deduct Alternate No. 1
Appendix B Bid Deduct Alternate No. 2
Appendix C State Water Resources Control Board Waste Discharge Permit
Appendix D Standard Drawings
Appendix E Soils Report
Appendix F Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (Not attached. On file
at Engineering counter at Faraday Center,
1635 Faraday Avenue, Carlsbad, CA )
APPENDIX A
SCALE l'k 20' \
BID DEDUCT ALTERNATE NO. 1
. --
APPENDIX “B”
APPENDIX “C”
- OWNER: Carlsbad City
DEVELOPER: Carlsbad City
COUNTY: SAN DIEGO
SITE ADDRESS: 2685 Vancouver St
Carlsbad, CA 92008-
COMMENCEMENT DATE: 9/1/03
EST. COMPLETION DATE: 1/1/04
Winston H. Hickox
Secretary for
Environmental
Protection
-
State Water Resources Control Board
Division of Water Quality
1001 I Street. Sacramento, California 95814 (916) 341-5536
Mailing Address: P.O. Box 1977 - Sacramento, California 95812-1977 FAX (916) 341-5543 - Internet Address: http://www.swrcb.ca.gov
Gray Davis
Governor
Tuesday, June 03,2003
Liz Ketabian
Carlsbad City
1200 Carlsbad Village Dr
Carlsbad, CA 92008-1989
RECEIPT OF YOUR NOTICE OF INTENT
The State Water Resources Control Board (State Water Board) has received and processed your NOTICE OF
INTENT TO COMPLY WITH THE TERMS OF THE GENERAL PERMIT TO DISCHARGE STORM WATER
ASSOCIATED WITH CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITY. Accordingly, you are required to comply with the permit
requirements.
The WDID identification number is:
Please use this number in any future communications regarding this permit.
9 37C321868.
When construction is complete or ownership has been transferred, dischargers are required to notify the Regional
Water Board by submitting a Notice of Termination (NOT). All State and local requirements must be met in
accordance with Special Provision No. 7 of the General Permit. I have enclosed a NOT for your future use. If you
do not notify the State Water Board that construction activity has been completed you will continue to be invoiced
for the annual fee each July.
If you have any questions regarding permit requirements, please contact your Regional Water Board at
(858) 467-2952. Please visit the storm water web page at www.swrcb.ca.gov/stormwtr/index.html to obtain storm
water related information and forms.
Sincerely,
Storm Water Section
Division of Water Quality
California Environmental Protection Agency
@ Recycled Paper
, . . .. .I
Revision
JRIGINAL
Add Metric
APPENDIX "D"
This drawing is NOT in conformonce with lotest UBC and should be used with care ond judgment.
By Approved Dote RECOMMENDED BY THE SAN DIEGO SAN DIEGO REGIONAL STANDARD DRAWING REGIONAL STANDARDS COMMITTEE
Kerchevol 12/75
T. Stonton 05/03
CURB INLET - TYPE B
?A Monhole frome
and cover see
drawing M-2 T I /#I3 (#4) n around opening
Transition to normal curb
height in 3rn (10') on
both sides unless
otherwise noted
Galv. steel ongle
continuous and
r --
I
I' I/ I
Edge of Gutter SECTION B-B LA LB
PLAN
L
Length shown on plans
#13 (#4)@152mm (6")
I
191mrn (7-1/2") +
4-#13 (#4) oround plpe
Determined by pipe size-1.22m (4') min., 2.44rn (8')mox
SECTION C-C NOTES SECTION A-A
1. See Stondord Drawings D-11 & D-12 for additional notes ond detoils. 2. Types ore designoted as follows: (no wing)& (one wing)B-1, (two wings)B-2.
3. Mointain 38mrn (1 - 1/2") clear spacing between reinforcing and surfoce unless otherwise noted.
4. When V exceeds 4' steps sholl be installed. See Standard Drawing D-1 1 for detoils.
5. Concrete gutter to match odjocent gutters.
6. An expansion joint shall be placed at the ends of the inlet where the curb is to odjoin.
7. Provide 6.35rnrn (1/4") tooled groove in top slab in line with bock of odiocent curb. LEGEND ON PLANS
8. Surface of top slob sholl be sidewolk finished to drain toward street at o'slope of 6.35mm (1/4") per foot.
9 Mointain 38mm (1 -1/2") cleor spocinq between reinforcina and surface unless otherwise noled
DRAWING 1 NUMBER O-2
Thls drawing is NOT in conformance with latest U8C ond should be used with care ond judgment
SAN DIEGO REGIONAL STANDARD DRAWING Revision By Approved Dote
ORIGINAL Kercheval 12/75
4dd Metric T. Stanton 03/03 INLETS AND CLEANOUTS
I
+ .I I-
t
RECOMMENDED BY THE SAN DIEGO REGIONAL STANDARDS COMMITTEE
Vertical reinforcing #13 (#4) 0
457mm (1 8") max. far horizontal
reinforcing, see table on page
D-116.
38mm 1 (- 1/2") Clearance, Typ
0- n DO
13mm (2") Typical c
TYPICAL BOX SECTION
n
19mm (3/4") dia. steelA
bors, hot dipped galvanized 3s
?%
y.
6, 22
STEP DETAIL
NOTES
1, Concrete shall be 332kg/M3-C-22-Mpo (560-C-3250) unless otherwise noted.
2. Reinforcing steel shall comply with this drawing unless otherwise specified.
3. Reinforcing steel shall be intermediote grade deformed bars conforming to latest ASTM specifications.
4. Bends shall be in accordance with lotest ACI code. 5. Minimum splice length for reinforcing shall be 30 diameters.
6. Floor shall hove a wood trowel finish and, except where used as junction boxes, shall have a minimum
7. Depth V is measured from the top of the structure to the flowline of the box. 8. Wall thickness and reinforcing steel required may be decreased in accordance with table above.
9. Wall thickness shall be stepped on the outside of the box.
slope of 1 inch per foot toward the outlet.
10. When the structure depth V exceeds 4 feet, steps shall be cast into the wall at 381mm (15") intervals from
381mm (15") above floor to within 305MM (12) inches of top of structure. Where possible ploce steps in
woI1 without pipe opening, otherwise over opening of smallest diameter.
11. Alternate step moy be an approved steel reinforced polypropylene step. 12. Upon approval of the Agency and the Engineer, as defined by Section 6703 of the Business and Professions
Code, the use of precast storm structures is acceptable as on alternote to cast-in-place. Precast units
shall conform to ASTM standards and be monufoctured in a permanent facility designed far that purpose.
~~ DRAMNG
NUMBER D - 1 1 A NOTES AND DETAILS
This drowing is NOT in conformance with latest UBC and should be used with core and judgment -
DEPTH V
~ ~~~~
BOX SECTION REINFORCEMENT
THICKNESS HOR. & FLR. T REINF. MAXIMUM SPAN X or Y
914rnrn (3'-0") to 1.22rn (4'-0")
1.24rn (4'-1") to 2.13rn (7"")
2.16rn (7'"'') to 2.44rn (8'-0")
914rnrn (3'-0") to 1.22rn (4"")
1.24rn (4'"'') to 1.52rn (5'-0")
1.55rn (5'"") to 1.83m (6"")
1.85rn (6'-1") to 2.44m (8'-0")
914rnrn (3'-0") to 1.22m (4'"'')
1.24m (4'"'') to 1.52rn (5'-0")
1.55m (5'"") to 1.83m (6"")
1.85rn (6'- 1 ") to 2.44~1 (8'-0")
914rnm (3'"'') to 1.22m (4"")
1.24rn (4'"") to 1.52rn (5'-0")
1.55m (5'"") to 1.83m (6'-0")
1.85rn (6'- 1 ") to 2.13rn (7'-0")
2.13rn (7'-1") to 2.44rn (8"")
914rnrn (3'-0") to 1.22rn (4'-0")
Revision
JRlGlNAL
Add Metric
1.24rn (4'-1") to 1.52rn (5'-0")
1.55rn (5'-l"') to 1.83rn (6'-0")
1.85rn (6"") to 2.13rn (7"")
2.13m (7'"") to 2.44m (8'-0")
914rnrn (3"") to 1.22rn (4'-0")
1.24rn (4'"") to 1.52m (5'-0")
1.55rn (5'"") to 1.83rn (6"")
1.85m (6'-1") to 2.13m (7'"'')
2.13rn (7'- 1 ") to 2.44rn (8'-0")
SAN DIEGO REGIONAL STANDARD DRAWING By Approved Date
Kercheval 12/75
T. Stonton 03/03 INLETS AND CLEANOUTS
NOTES AND DETAILS
HORIZONTAL REINFORCING
RECOMMENDED BY THE SAN DIEGO
REGIONAL STANDARDS COMMITTEE
3forlm3 1
Ch6rpe;son R.C.E. 19246 Dote
0-118 DRAWING
NUMBER
This drawing is NOT in conformance with lotest UBC and should be used with care and judgment.
245rnrn (10”) -
Revision
IRICINAL
idd Metric
rl 0 f: N
- SAN DIEGO REGIONAL STANDARD DRAWING By Approved Date
Kercheval 12/75
T. Stonton 03/03
CURB INLET OPENING
-
NOTES
A UA A
Q
L r)
c
25mrn0 (l”0) Support Bolt
1
2.
3.
4.
5.
Foce angle shall be cost into structure continuous for the full lenght ”L”.
All exposed metal parts shall be hot-dipped galvanized after fobricotion.
When curb inlet opening height (H) exceeds 152mm (6”) instoll 25mm (l”0)
lnstoll odditional bars at 89mrn (3-1/2”) clear spacing above first bar when opening exceeds 330mm (13”).
When curb inlet opening length exceeds 2.44111 (8’) instoll 254mm (l”0) Steel support bolts, spoced ot not
more thon 1.52m (5‘) 0.c
steel protection bar.
RECOMMENDED BY THE SAN DIEU REGIONAL STANDARDS COMMITTEE
3lOIl20( 1 C6rpe;son R.C.E. 19246 Date
DRAWING ~-12 NUMBER
This drowing is NOT in conformonce with lolest UBC ond should be used with care ond judgment
.\CVIJI"II
,RIGINAL
Add Metric
D = Pipe Diorneter
W = Bottom Width of Channel
"J ntJp""L" ""LL SAN DIEGO REGIONAL STA,.,. ye.8 ,..l..V Kerchevol 12/75
T. Stonton 03/03 RIP RAP
DRAWING D-40 NUMBER EN ER GY DI SSI PA TOR
p.-j 3D OR 3W
PIAN
Concrete Channel ,- 1/20 rnin.
SECTION 6-6
7lter Blanket
-..... L152mrn (6")\ Sill, Closs 249kg/MS -C- 13Mp0 (420-C-2000) Concrete
SECTION A-A
NOTES
1. Plans shall specify:
A) Rock Class and thickness (1). B) Filter material, number of loyers and thickness. Rip rop shall be either quorry stone or broken concrete (if shown on the plans.) ore not acceptable. Rip rop shall be ploced over filter blanket which moy be either granular rnoteriol or filter fabric.
of rip rop and filter blonket. Rip rap energy dissipotors shll be designated os either
Type 1 or Type 2. Type 1 shall be with concrete sill;
Type 2 shall be without sill.
2. Cobbles
3.
4. See Regional Supplement Amendments for selection
5.
RECOMMENDED ev THE SAN DIEGO
REGIONAL STANDARDS COMMITTEE I D~~,,~,~~ I R!,I A,,,,~,,,,~T~ I nntP I NnARn nRAWINC
/h
This drowing is NOT in conformance with lotest UBC and should be used with care ond judgment
e, C 0 N
e, C 0 N
a, 0. a .-
* 6\" 0 m
* s m
Ij,: \ v03mi (8") min.
0 -- 05mm (12") max v)
Invert Elevation
1102mm (4") Clearance (min )
SECTION
19mm (3/4") Crushed Rock
NOTES 1. For trenching on improved streets see Standard Drawing G-24
2. (*) indicates minimum relotive compaction.
or G-25 for resurfocing details.
RECOMMENDED BY THE SAN DIEGO SAN DIEGO REGIONAL STANDARD DRAWING REGIONAL STANDARDS COMMITTEE qevision By Approved Date
,RlGlNAL Parkinson 2/95
Add Metric 1. Stonton 03/03 3l01lzyzO3 PIPE BEDDING AND TRENCH BACKFILL 26rpe;son R.C.E. 19246 Date
DRAWING ~-60
NUMRFR FOR STORM DRAINS
I
Add Metric I IT. Stonton I03/03 1 PIPE BEDDING AND TRENCH BACKFILL
FOR STORM DRAINS
3l01lzyzO3
DRAWING ~-60 I NUMRFR
This drawing is NOT in conformance with lotest UBC ond should be used with care ond judgment
I 152mrn
Revision By
ORIGINAL
idd Metric
m G D C 3 0
a,
0
VI
a -
g 305mm p (12”) 762mm (30”) rnin n--
SAN DIEGO REGIONAL STANDARD DRAWING Approved Date
Kerchevol 12/75
T. Stanton 03/03
BROW DITCH
NUMBER
152mm
(6”) 914rnrn (3’) rnin 6 1 Omrn
3” 470-C-2000 concrete or 3” 2500 psi, air ploced concrete
with 38mm (1 1 /2”)x38mrn (1 - 1 /2”)
17 gage stucco netting. TYPE C TYPE D
the option of the controctor.
TERRACE DITCH
NOTES
1 Longitudinal slope of lined ditch sholl be 2% minimum.
2 Over slope down ditches shall employ 152mrn (6”) thickened
edge section at both sides of ditch.
DRAINAGE DITCHES
II I
LEGEND ON PLANS
_c_=====--
RECOMMENDED BY THE SAN DIEGO
REGIONAL STANDARDS COMMITTEE
13rnrn (
Revision
ORIGINAL
Add Metric
al C .- JI
RECOMMENDED BY THE SAN DIEGO SAN DIEGO REGIONAL STANDARD DRAWING REGIONAL STANDARDS COMMITTEE By Approved Date
Kercheval 12/75
1. Stonton 03/03
DRAWING G- 1 CURBS AND GUTTER - SEPARATE
NUMBER
152mm (6‘) --
Weokened Plone
279mm (1 1”) M
152mm (6”) CURB
Area=0.083m (0.89 Sq. Ft.)
al C
1 .-
f 3 0
330rnrn (13”) I
203mm (8”) CURB Area=O.lm (1.09 Sq. Ft.)
Width Shown on Plans
457mrn (18” rnin.)
.-
\
1 Gutter Elevotion \ \
\ \ -
*. i
Weokened Plone
(6”)
Joint I L----------l Existing Curb ‘38mrn (1 - 1 /2”) except where elevotions
shown indicote otherwise
GUllER
NOTES
1 Concrete shall be 308kg/M2 -C-l7-Mpo (520-C-2500)
2 See Stondard Drawing G-10 for joint deioils.
3 Slope top of curb 6.35rnrn (1/4”) per foot toward street
LEGEND ON PLANS
~
152mm (6”) curb
13mm (1/2”) R A
A
E a3 r- :L ,..- _.
152mm (6”) +
TYPE
Weakened Plane Joint
,25 4mm (1“) R
W *AREA
W ln
L
.- %
W
0
W
0 U
D c
t 3 0 r ln
ln C 0
0 > a,
W
5
&
._
._
._ ...-
-
-
‘-Revision
dGINAL
Add Metric
‘t
RECOMMENDED EY THE SAN DIEGO SAN DIEGO REGIONAL STANDARD DRAWING REGIONAL STANDARDS COMMITTEE By Approved Date
Kerchevol 12/75
T. Stonlon 03/03
CURB AND GUTTER - COMBINED
DRAWING
W -
t
E E N in -
NUMBER G-2
13mm (1/2”)
G 1610rnm (24”) 1 .124sa. m (1.34sa ft.) I
H 1762rnrn (30”) I ,150sq. m (1.61sq ft;) I
* with 152rnm (6”) Curb Foce
NOTES
1. Concrete shall be 308kg/M3-C- 17-Mpa (520-C-2500).
2. See Stondord Drawing G- 10 for joint detoils
3. Slope top of curb 6.35mm (1/4’) per foot toward street. LEGEND ON PLANS
13mrn (1/2”) R -
\ . ’‘\W,\‘/
I I
c-c _____ .
-e--- +3
Weokened Plane Joint
51mm (2”)
Revision
ORIGINAL
13mm (1/2” R)
SAN DIEGO REGIONAL STANDARD DRAWING By Approved Dote
Kerchevol 12/75
I---
/
I r---- -J I
NON-CONTIGUOUS
13mm (1/2” R)
-I Width os shown on plon
y‘ c Weokened Plane Joint
51mm (2”)
CONTIGUOUS
.-
NOTES
1. Concrete sholl be 308 kg/M3 C 17 Mpo (520-C-2500). LEGEND ON PMNS
.:..1 - ..
^..?. ..I
SIDEWALK - TYPICAL SECTIONS
RECOMMENOEO BY THE SAN DIES0 REGIONAL STANDARDS COMMITTEE
3lOiI2aO3 \
Cdrpekon R.C.E. 19246 Date
DRAWING G-7 NUMBER
Mid Point
1
P.C.R. -
I I I I I I t
I -
152m (5') Typ
a
I
NOTES
1. Expansion joints - - - at curb returns, odjocent to structures ond at i3.7rn (45') intervals.
(See Stondard Drowtng G-10).
2. Weokened Plone Joints ------ at mid point of curb return, when required, and at 4.57rn (15') intervols from P.C R.'
(See Slondord Drowtng G-10).
3. 6.35mm (1/4") grooves - with 6.35 (1/4") radius edges ot 152m (5') intervals.
Revision
IRICINAL
Add Metric
SAN DIEGO REGIONAL STANDARD DRAWING By Approved Date
Kerchevol 12/75
T. Stonton 03/03
SIDEWALK JOINT LOCATIONS
L I, I I
RECOMMENDED BY THE SAN DIEGO
REGIONAL STANDARDS COMMlTTEE
DRAWING NUMBER G-9
RECOMMENDED BY THE SAN OIEGO SAN DIEGO REGIONAL STANDARD DRAWING REGIONAL STANDARDS COMMITTEE Revision By Approved Dote
ORIGINAL Parkinson 2/95
Add Metric T. Stonton 03/03 3fO?Irn3 \
C6rperson R.C.E. 19246 Dote
DRAWING c-10 CONCRETE JOINT DETAILS
NUMBER
4 c-4 :
:
.d
a
N
WEAKENED PLANE JOINT
GUTTER AND PAVEMENT
1 I. d .
-- I
WEAKENED PLANE JOINT
CURB AND SIDEWALK
D
38mm ( 1 1/23 /-3.2mm (1/8”)
. . L b
KEYED JOINT
1 Are0 to be removed I
joint to joint in ponel whichever is less
4
- -
1524mm (5') (Min )
I SIDEWALK PLAN I
joint or edge of pavement
Existing Score Mark Areo to be removed Existing Joint
ad
u
--
a.. \&,.
I SIDEWALK SECTION I
b.
4
- Are0 to be removed 762mm (30") Min. Existing Joint or Edqe - 1524mm (5'), or from joint to joint in ponel whichever is less.
from existing joint
or edge of curb
CURB PLAN
Revision
JRIGINAL
Add Metric
RECOMMENDED BY THE SAN DIEGO SAN DIEGO REGIONAL STANDARD DRAWING REGIONAL STANDARDS COMMITTEE By Approved Date
Kerchevol 12/75
T. Stonton 03/03 31 Oil2003 \
ChGrperson R.C.E. 19246 Dote CONCRETE CURB, GUTTER,
SIDEWALK AND PAVEMENT DRAWING c-1 1 REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT NUMBER
.C.R. Radius- - -----
A4 I Contact Joints per Stondord
Drawing G-10 when
seporote pours ore mode
PLAN
3m (10’) unless otherwise shown on plan 4 ,-l3mm (1/2”) R typical
avmg 178
Base materiol as shown on plans
SECTION A-A
NOTES
1.
2,
3. - = Typical flowlines.
4 O = Elevations to be shown on plans.
5. Return segments to be 178mrn (7”) Thick
6 Curb between P.C.R.S. shall be considered as part of cross gutter. 7. In a11 cases subgrode sholl be compacted to 957, rnin
relative compaction to depth of 305mrn (i2“).
Concrete sholl be 332 kg/M3 C 22 Mpo (560 C 3250)
Weakened plane joints. - - - - - - - - - =
_. ... -.--- ..-- )RIGINAL I 1 Kerchevol 11 2/751
LEGEND ON PLANS
$-k--b
RECOMMENDED BY THE SAN DlEGO
I1 I SAN nlFC;T) RFCIONAL STANDARD DRAWING REGIONAL STANDARDS COMMITTEE Revision I By/ Approved I Date
dd Metric I 1 T. Stonton 103/03
DRAWING G- 12
NUMBER
R/W
Revision
IRIGINAL
dd Metric
-
6\D h
W fl L v
r I E
03 W -
I I I I Depressed Curb 1 I/- Gutter 1 Curb Line 1
914mm (3'"'') 914mrn (3'-0")
RECOMMENDED BY THE SAN DIEGO SAN DIEGO REGIONAL STANDARD DRAWING REGIONAL STANDARDS COMMITTEE By Approved Date
R. Munoz 4/97
T. Stonton 03/03 CONCRETE DRIVEWAY
1
W
(Contiguous Sidewalk)
PLAN
Shown On Plans
,~
Bottom of Curb
E LEVATl ON 305mm (12") R (typ.)
DRAWING G-1 4A NUMBER
'.I Edge of Sidewalk
140mm (5 1/2") Residentio
140mm (5 1/2") Commercia I
S ECTlO N 13mm.(1/2") R v NOTES
1. No concrete sholl be placed until forms and subgrade are inspected by the Agency.
2. Concrete shall be 332 kg/M3 C 22 Mpa (520-C-2500).
3. See Standard Drawings G-15 and G-16 for width and location requirements
4. Driveway ramp to extend to 3m (10') from curb face or to property line whichever is
5. See Standard Drawings G-2 ond G-10 for curb ond joint details.
less. (For commercial driveways only)
-1
REWWUDiOED BY THE SAN DIEGO
12" min. (typ.} feather to
meet existing paving Existing A.C. and Base 1 i""/ Asph
---
Revision By
- ORIGINAL
I
1227777727772
Approved Date *
Parkinson 2/95 SAN DIEGO REGIONAL STANDARD DRAWING maotw STANDARDS ccuuim
0
1
1
7
TYPE A
tr\smW TRENCH RESURFACING Chakpason R.C.E. 18246 Dots
DRAWING G-24 NUMBER TYPES A & B
NOTES
Asphalt Concrete -.J
Base Motcrial
see Note 3
TYPE 6
1. Trench edges to be cut a minimum of 6" wider than trench for trenches
3' wide or less, and 12" wider for trenches over 3' wide.
2. Existing A.C. shall be cut and removed in such a manner so as not to tear,
bulge or displace adjacent pavement.
All cuts shall be parallel or perpendicular to street centerline, when
practical.
substituted for base material.
existing A.C. or P.C.C. contact surfaces, prior to resurfacing.
a) Minimum total thickness shall be one inch greater than existing A.C.
b A.C. shall be hot plant mix.
c Finish course for Type E3 resurfacing shall be laid down using a
6. All A.C. resurfacing shall be seal coated with an emulsified asphalt and
covered with sand. Chip sealing shall be applied as required by Agency.
7. Type B shall not be used on lateral crossings.
8. Sloughing of trench under pavement shall be cause for requiring
additional pavement and base.
Edges shall be clean and vertical.
3. Base material shall be replaced to depth of existing base.
4. A tack coat of asphaltic emulsion or paving asphalt shall be applied to
5. Asphalt Concrete Resurfacing:
A.C. may be
spreader box. !
305mm(l2”) Wide Border with 6mm( 1/4”)
Grove approx. 19mm(3/4) O.C.7
2.74m(9’) min.
See Note 2 In tern o t i on 01 s ym bo1 of accessibility sign see Std. Dwg. M-28A and M-286 for van accessible space, typ.
152mm (6”) blue, Typ.
1,5m(5’)min. - 2.74m(9’) min.
ORIGINAL
Add Metric
102mrn(4”)--/ I
Blue Stripe (Typ.)
.,. -,- G.Porkinson 2/95
1. Stanton 03/03 3lOtlZv03
\ Ch6rpe;son R.C.E. 19246 Date
DRAWING M - 2 7~ NUMBER
DISABLED PARKING STALL(S)
L1.5rn(5’) Min. ot Typ. Accessible Porking Stall.
2,43m(8’) Min. ot Van Accessible
Porking Stall.
NOTES:
1. Provide for adequate drainage.
2. For appropriate romp alternate to conform to topogrophical
3. Slope shall not exceed 2% in any direction unless there is
4. Blue color should match color No. 15090 in the Federol
conditions, see Std. Dwg. G-27 through G-31.
equivalent focilitotion.
Standard 5950 as specified in Section 522(b)2.
Sidewalk
Disobled parking sign see Std Dwg M-28A ond M-28B
Non-Contiguous Stdewolk
152mm(6") Curb Pointed Blue. Typ
- SAN DIEGO REGIONAL STANDARD DRAWING Revision By Approved Dote
ORIGINAL G.Porkinson 2/95
4dd Metric T. Stanton 03/03 DIAGONAL DISABLED PARKING
STALL( S)
1 OZmrn(4") Blue Strip. Typ. I
RECOMMENDED BY THE SAN DIEGO
REGIONAL STANDARDS COMMITTEE
310?/2&93 1 Cdrperson R.C.E. 19246 Dote
DRAWING M - 2 7B
MUM BE R
1.5rn(5') Min. at Typ. Accessible
Porking Stoll.
2.43rn(8') Min. ot Van Accessible
Parking Stoll.
NOTES:
1. Provide for adequote drainage 2. See Std. Dwg G-27 through G-31.
For appropriate romp olternote to
conform to topogrophicai conditions.
UNAUTHORIZED VEHICLE 5 NOT
DISPLAYING DlSTlNCUlSHlNG
PLACARDS OR LICENSE PLATES
ISSUED FOR
DISABLED PERSONS
WLL BE TOWED AWAY AT
OWNERS EXPENSE
TMO wmcw UIV BC PECLUYED
nv rELCW0NIYC
Veh. Code 22511.8(d)
Qevision By Approved
JRlGlNAL G.Porkinson I Add Metric 5. Stonton
Diameter FootingL
of 309k~/M -C-l:
SAN DIEGO REGIONAL STANDARD DRAWING Dote
2/95
03/03
DISABLED PARKING SIGN
r See Std
M-28B
Slope to 6mm above grade
t . D
,
-
a
(520-CL2500) Concrete
NOTES:
u3
‘-yc C
UNAUTHORIZED VEHICLES NOT
PLACARDS OR LICENSE PLATES
DISABLED PERSONS
OWNERS EXPENSE
DISPLAYING DI STl NGUl SHIN G
ISSUED FOR
WILL BE TOWED AWAY AT
TOWED VEHICLES MAY BE RECLAIMED
AT
BY TELEPHONING
Veh. Code 2251 1.8( d)
SIGN DETAIL
1. Sign shall be constructed of o minimum 1.57mm (0.062”) thick aluminum.
2. Lettering, symbol and border shall be reflectorized white, on a blue background.
3. Lettering shall be 25mm (1”) and 51mm (2”) high.
4. Where space is designed for van accessibility, a sign ”VAN ACCESSIBLE” shall be instolled
5. Minimum van accessible vertical clearance is 2.5m (8’-2”)
-32 c N
“r
RECOMMENDED BY THE SAN DIEGO REGIONAL STANDARDS COMMITTEE
Chrpekon R.C.E. 19246 Dote
M-28A DRAWING
NUMBER
r38mrn(l-1/2”) R
ACCESS
I 13mm( 1 /2”)--c/
BLE
-
c m v
E E m N
c\I
, .- I Revision By Approved
VAN
SAN DIEGO REGIONAL STANDARD DRAWING Dote
L DRAWING M - 283
NUMBER
-q- ‘V
NOTES
1. Sign shall be constructed of aluminum, 1.57mm (0.062”) minimum thickness.
2. Colors: Background-Reflectorized Blue
Border ond letters- Reflectorized White
Blue color sholl rnotch color No. 15090 in the
Federal Standard 59% os specified in Section 522(b)2.
Add Metric I IT. Stanton 103/03 VAN ACCESSIBLE SIGN 1-1 FOR DISABLED PARKING SPACE
RECOMMENDED BY THE SAN DIEGO
REGIONAL STANDARDS COMMITTEE
I
Revision
,RlGlNAL
Add Metric
I
SAN DIEGO REGIONAL STANDARD DRAWING By Approved Dote
G.Parkinson 2/95
T. Stanton 03/03
PAVEMENT SYMBOL - DISABLED PARKING
914mm (3’) Min. - -
(a) SYMBOL PROPORTIONS
(b) DISPLAY CONDITIONS
- INTERNATIONAL SYMBOL
OF ACCESSIBILITY
NOTES
1. Povement symbol sholl be painted white
2. Blue color shall rnotch color No. 15090 in the Federol
on o blue background.
Stondord 5950 os specified in Section 522(b)2.
RECOMMENDED BY THE SAN DIEGO
REGIONAL STANDARDS COMMITTEE
DRAWING ~~29 NUMBER
-anS IN CONCRETE TO HAVE CONCRf3E 8cIx WITH TRAFFIC UD 8Y JBR OR BR0C)KS PART No. 3-R-T.
WTW WE (WHEN APPROVED 1. PMN.
NOTES :
1. THE LATERAL SHALL BE BUXXXT ME SAME AS THE MAIN LINE SEWER.
2. IN NO CASE SHnU A LATERAL COerrECT TO ME SEWER MAIN MRECTLY ON TUP OF THE PIPE.
3. SEWER LATERALS SHALL HAVE A 2% MINIMUM SLDPE.
SHLUL 8E COMPRESSION TYPE OR APPROVED SoCVENT WELD.
4. ALL JOINTS ON SEWER LATERAL PIPE
5. AS- BUILT SEWER LATERAL IDCATONS SHAU E RrRNlSHED TD THE CITY
INSPECTOR ON F0FPM.S PROVIED PRIOR TO FINAL APPROVAL OF WORK.
6. ALL LATERAL TRENCHES TO f%W€RTY LINE AND SEWER MAIN TRENCHES TO BE C0MPACTE.Q PER S5.
GRADE AFTER FINAL FINISH GRADING. 7. CLfAN- OUT TO BE ADJUSTED 70
* USE SAME MMENSON WHEN METER IS LOCATED TO REAR OF CURB OR SIDEWALK.
5. FWTION WODEMlDWAY BETWEEN RPELIME AND METER BOX.
I I CARLSBAD MUNICIPAL WATER DISTRICT
IAPPR DmE sm OW. NO.
y w4 m. 2' WATER SkRVICS CONNECTION
FOR 11/2 & 2' METERS AUGUST 1993
APPENDIX “E”
..
Updated Geotechnical
Investigation
CITY OF CMZLSBAD
LARWI. PM
City of Carlsbad, Lad Park
Vancouver Street
Carlsbad, California
Prepared for:
i
City of Carlsbad - Recreation Administration
Attn: LizKetabian
1200 Carlsbad Village Drive
Carlsbad, CA 92008
Prepared by:
I Testing Engineers - San Diego, Inc.
7895 Convoy Court, Suite 18
San Diego, California 92111
Project No. 2002-0570
October 9,2002
I ! !
I I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
g
1
I
1 /
! j
i 1
Testing Engineers - San Diego, Inc. Established I946
Liz Ketabian
City of Carlsbacl - Recreation Ahhistration
1200 Carlsbad Village Drive
San Diego, CA 92008
October 9, 2002
Project No. 2002:0570
- .. ,
Subject: Updated Geotechnical Investigation
Project: City of Carlsbad, Larwin Park
Vancouver Street
Carlsbad, California
Dear Ms. Ketabian:
In accordance with TESD's Proposal No. P2002-0570 dated July 30,2002, Testing Engineers-San Diego,
Inc. has conducted an Updated Geotechnicd Investigation at the above referenced site in Carlsbad,
California. The attached report discusses the earthwork construction and foundation design for site
development.
From this investigation and analysis of the subsurface soils, TESD concludes that the proposed
development is geotechnically feasible if recommendations contained herein will be incorporated into the
design and planning, and implemented during construction,
Testing Engineers-San Diego, Inc. appreciates the opportunity to be of assistance to you on this project and
welcome the opportunity to continue our role as geotechnical consultants. Should you have any questions
regarding the site conditions or contents of this report, please do not hesitate to contact the undersigned.
S@cerely ,
shg En eers8an Diego, hc. L- 10s E. Acbo
2002-0570 Larwin Park Updated Geotechnical Investigationca
gdfi k 3. Aldrich, GE 2565
Kotechnical Engineer
Testing Engineers - San Dieso. Inc.. 7895 Convoy Court, Suite 18 San Diego, CA. 9211 I [858] 715-5800 Fax [8581 715-5810
TABLE OF CONTENTS
.-
1 . INTRODUCTION
1.1 Purpose ............................................................................................................................ 1
1.2 Proposed Development .................................................................................................... 1
1.3 Site Descnphon ................................................................................................................ 1 ..
2 . SCOPE OF SERVICES ................................................................................................................. 2
3 . BACKGROUND ............................................................................................................................ 2
4 . SITE INVESTIGATION ............................................................................................................... 3
4.1 Suburface Exploration ..................................................................................................... 3
4.2 Laboratory Testing Pro gram ............................................................................................ 3
5 . GEOLOGY ..................................................................................................................................... 3
5.1 Geologic Setting ............................................................................................................... 3
5.2 Site Stratigraphy ............................................................................................................... 3
5.2.1. Fill Soils ............................................................................................................... 4
5.2.2. Alluvium ............................................................................................................... 4
5.2 . 3. Bedrock ................................................................................................................ 4
5.2.4. Groundwater ......................................................................................................... 4
.. 6 . CONCLUSIONS AND RECOMMENDATIONS ....................................................................... 4
6.1 General ............................................................................................................................. 4
6.2 Grading and Earthwork .................................................................................................... 5
6.2.1. General .................................................................................................................. 5
6.2.2. Restroom Facility Overexcavation ....................................................................... 5
6.2.3. Pavement ............................................................................................................... 5
6.2.4. Gravel Parking Lot ................................................................................................ 6
6.2.5. Hardscape .............................................................................................................. 6
6.2.6. Fill Placement and Compaction ............................................................................ 6
6.2.7. Fill Material ........................................................................................................... 6
6.2.8. Excavation Conditions .......................................................................................... 7
6.3 Foundation and Slab Recommendations ......................................................................... 7
6.3.1. General .................................................................................................................. 7
6.3.2. Foundations ............................................................................................................ 7
6.3.3. Restroom Slab-on-Grade ...................................................................................... 7
6.4 Asphalt Pavement ............................................................................................................ 7
6.5 Trench Backfill ................................................................................................................ 8
6.6 Construction Materials ..................................................................................................... 9
6.7 Foundation Excavations ................................................................................................... 9
6.8 Plan Review ..................................................................................................................... 9
6.9 Pre-Grade Meeting ........................................................................................................... 9
6.10 Observations and Testing ............................................................................................... 9
7. LIMITATIONS .............................................................................................................................. 9
7.1 Limits of Inveshgatlon ..................................................................................................... 9
7.2 Additional Services ........................................................................................................ 10
..
-
PLATES
Plate 1 - Vicinity Map
Plate 2 - Upper Site Plan
Plate 2 Lower Site Plan
APPENDICES
Appendix A - References
Appendix B - Field Exploration Logs
Appendix C - Laboratory Test Results
UPDATED GEOTECBNICAL INVESTIGATION
VANCOWER STREET, CARLSBAD, CALIFORNIA
LARWIN PARK - CITY of CARLSBAD
TESD # 2002-0570 Date: October 9,2002.
~ ~ ~- ~
1. INTRODUCTION
1.1. PURPOSE
This report presents the results of Testing Engineers - San Diego, Inc. (TESD) updated
geotechnical engineering investigation for the proposed improvements at Larwin Park, located in
the City of Carlsbad, California. The attached Plate 1 shows the Vicinity Map. These conclusions
and recommendations have been developed ffom our interpretation of the existing surface and
subsurface soil conditions at the proposed site. The purpose of the evaluation is to develop
updated conclusions and recommendations as to the site suitability for the currently planned
improvements.
1.2. PROPOSED DEVELOPMENT
The proposed Larwin Park project will include the construction of a decomposed-granitecovered
parking lot at the upper portion of the site located next to the existing Dog Park, asphalt-pavement
parking at the main park access located at Vancouver Street, property walls adjacent the parking
1.3.
lot, a restroom structure, concrete flatwork and planter walls. The attached Upper Site Plan and
Lower Site Plan, Plate 2 and 3, illustrate the proposed improvements in relation to the existing site
contours. The plans also depict a graded walking trail that connects the upper and lower sites,
which includes retaining walIs up to five feet high. An evaluation of the walking trail and
associated improvements is not part of TESD’s scope of services.
SITE DESCRIPTION
Generally? Larwin Park encompasses an area of approximately 22 acres, located north of Carlsbad
Village Drive and west of Concord Street. The site is bordered by Carlsbad Village Drive to the
South and by residential proprieties to the North, East and West. General topography of the site
includes an SO-foot deep drainage, with a north-south orientation. Particularly, the development
and improvements will be located in two areas, one adjacent to the existing Dog Park adjacent to
Carlsbad Village Drive and the other on a relatively level area located at the northeast portion of
the site off of Vancouver Street. The location next to the Dog Park, identified as Upper site,
encompasses an area of OS-acre, slopes gently to the North, and presently is presently covered
with natural grown grass. The second location, identified as Lower Site, encompasses an area of
approximately 3.0 acres. Its grade is generally level and is bordered to the west by a natural
descending slope. The present grade of the lower site suggested that this area was previously
TESD, Tnc. * Larwin Park UDdated Geotechnical Investigation * 2002-0570 * October2002 I
I
i-
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
i
I
1
I I
I 1
1
I !
2.
3.
graded to form a relatively flat pad. Vegetation on both sites included scattered eucalyptus and
other medium sue trees. The lower site access, at Vancouver Street, is covered by inigated lawn.
SCOPE OF SERVICES
The scope of services for this project consisted of reviewing previous geotechnical engineering related
work performed for kin Park and other projects in the area; observing, logging and performing in
situ testing during field explorations; performing laboratory testing and analysis of selected soil
samples; developing conclusions and recommendations; and preparation of this report. Specifically,
the scope of services included
Site reconnaissance and review of the available soils reports previously prepared for the
subject area.
Limited subsurface investigation to verify the conditions presented in the soils reports. This
includes five hand-auger borings excavated within the proposed area of development.
Collection of representative soil samples at selected depths. The samples were sealed in
moisture-resistant containers and transported to the laboratory for subsequent analysis.
Laboratory testing on selected samples. R-value, gradation, chloride and sulfate content,
maximum density and in-place moisture and density were included in the testing program.
Provide. TESD’s geotechnical conclusions and recommendations regarding the site
preparation grading, restroom facility and paved parking lot.
Provide an update geotechnical investigation report.
BACKGROUND
TESD has reviewed the available geotechnical documents for the park site and adjacent residential
development. The “Final Report of Testing and Observation Services During Grading Operations For
Carlsbad Track No. 74-4 (Spinnaker Point)”, prepared by GEOCON Incorporated, dated September
13, 1984, addressed the placement of engineered fill during the grading of Vancouver Street at the
park’s lower site access area. As shown in the &-Graded Plan, Plate 2, the park‘s lower site was cut to
grade in the majority of this area, which resulted in exposing Santiago Formation at the surface
elevation.
The “Geotec+ical Investigation Proposed Larwin Park Development”, prepared by Group Delta
Consultants, Inc., dated May 9, 1991 addressed the proposed development plan for the park that was
planned in 1991. The original development plan included softball and multi-purpose athletic fields,
tennis and basketball courts and other fhcilities, which required 135,000 cubic yards of grading. Group
Delta performed six exploratory borings and twelve test pits for the subsurface exploration of the
complete park area. Test pits T-1 and T-2 were located in the vicinity of the lower site and test pit T-5 ~-
TESD. Inc. * Larwin Park Updated Geotechnical Investigation * 2002-0570 * October 2002
2
I
I I
i-
was located near the upper site. Test Pits T-1 and T-2 encountered Santiago Formation soils at near
surface depths. Santiago Formation was descnied as dense, dry, light brown silty sand. Test Pit T-5
encountered landslide deposits to a depth of five feet conformed by dark gray sandy clay and olive-
gray silty clay, Santiago Formation was encountered underlying the landslide deposits.
4. SITE INVESTIGATION
4.1. SUBSURFACE EXPLORATION
TESD’s subsurface exploration was performed on September 12,2002 and consisted of six hand-
auger borings, labeled E-1 through €3-6. Boring B-1 was located on the upper site and borings E-2
through B-6 were located within the lower site. Plates 2 and 3 show the boring locations at the
upper site and lower site, respectively. The borings were excavated to depths ranging from one to
five feet below ground surface (bgs). TESD’s Staff Engineer logged the subsurface conditions
encountered by the borings and collected samples that were sealed in moisture-resistant containers
and transported to the laboratory for subsequent testing. Logs of the exploratory borings are
attached in Appendix E. Bulk samples and relatively undisturbed ring samples were obtained
from the borings.
4.2. LABORATORY TESTING PROGRAM
A laboratory-testing program was conducted to evaluate pertinent geotechnical engineering
characteristics. Laboratory testing included in-place moisture content and density test, particle size
analysis, maximum density, chloride and sulfate content determination, and R-value evaluation.
All phases of the laboratory-testing program were conducted in general accordance with the
current applicable ASTM specifications and other accepted test methods. Appendix C provides a
summary of test results.
5. GEOLOGY
5.1. GEOLOGIC SE-LTING
The site is located within the coastal portion of the Peninsular Ranges Geomorphic Province of
California. The coastal portion of the province of San Diego County are typically composed of
shallow westward dipping sedimentary materials forming low mesas. West flowing drainage
channels in turn, dissect the mesas. Geologic data and mapping indicates that the site is underlain
by Tertiary-aged Santiago Formation. ,
5.2. SITE STRATIGRAPHY
The subsurface descriptions provided are interpreted flom conditions, which were exposed during the
field investigation andor inferred hm the geologic literature. As such, all of the subsuface
TESD, Inc. * lawin Park Updated Geotechnical Investigation * 2002-0570 * October 2002
3
- I
1
conditions may not be represented. Detailed descriptions of the subsurface materials encountered
during the field investigation are presented on the Exploration Logs.
5.2.1. Fill Soils
Fill soil was encountered in borings B-1 through B-4 and B-6 to depths ranging fiom 0.5 foot in
boring B-3 to 4.5 feet in boring B-2. The fill materials consisted of light brown to tan silty sand
with consistency ranging from loose at boring Rl to medium dense at borings B-2, B-3, B-4
and B-6. The fill encountered in the lawn area at the lower site was wet, likely from the
landscaping irrigation. This soil may need to be dried or blended to achieve the recommended
moisture content for fill placement.
5.2.2. Alluvium
Alluvium soil was encountered in borings B-1 and B-2 underlying the fill soil. Alluvium
consisted of dark brown sandy clay with medium stiff to stiff consistency and moderate to high
moisture content. This material is likely expansive and should not be placed as fill, unless it is
uniformly blended to provide a material with an Expansion Index of 50 or less.
5.2.3. Bedrock
Sandstone bedrock characteristic of the Santiago formation was encountered in borings B-land
B-3 though B-6 at depths ranging fiom 0.0 feet in boring B-5 to 2.5 feet in boring B-I. The
bedrock consisted of tan to light brown, medium to fine grained sandstone with various
amounts of silt. Encountered foundational material was generally damp to moist, dense to very
dense and light to moderately cemented. I 5.2.4. Groundwater
Groundwater was not encountered in the borings at the time of TESD's field exploration.
I
i
6. CONCLUSIONS AND RlECOMMENDATIONS
6.1. GENERAL
Based on the results of our investigation, we consider the proposed development is feasible from a
geotechnical engineering standpoint provided the recommendations of this report are implemented
during design, grading and construction. A TESD engineer should review the final grading and
foundation plans for conformance to the recommendations. General geotechnical 'considerations
applicable to site grading and recommendations for the design and construction of the project are
discussed below.
TESD. Inc. * Lanvin Park Updated Geotechnical Investigation * 2002-0570 * October 2002
4
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
t
i i
I
9 3
I I
1
6.2. GRADING AND EARTHWORK
6.2.1. General
All grading and earthwork should be in accordance with the recommendations herein and any
grading requirements of the governing authorities. Prior to grading the surface obstructions,
vegetation, and other miscellaneous debris should be removed from the areas of the proposed
improvements. Holes and depressions resulting from the removal of trees or obstructions
should be backfilled with compacted fill in accordance with the recommendations contained
in the subsequent sections of this report.
6.2.2. Restroom Facility Overexcavation
The restroom facility pad should be overexcavated a minimum of two feet below bottom of
footing or mat foundation elevation prior to placement of any fill needed to establish finish
grade. The overexcavation will remove the upper disturbed soil and provide a uniform bearing
surface to reduce potential differential settlement. The overexcavation should extend laterally
a minimum of five feet beyond the structure limits.
Following overexcavation and removal of existing materials, the exposed soils should be
scarified to a depth of six to eight inches, brought to within two percent of optimum moisture
content, and compacted to at least 90 percent relative compaction (ASTM D1557). The
excavated soils may then be replaced as properly compacted fill.
-
As an alternative to the overexcavation of the restroom facility pad, the structure may be
designed and constructed with continuous footings or a mat foundation that extends to
undisturbed formational soil. Subgrade supporting slab-on-grade should be scarified a
minimum of 12 inches, moisture conditioned to within two percent of optimum moisture and
,< > recompacted to 90 percent relative compaction (ASTM D15 17). 63 -- ,>kq&,,Jl SJ if' b
6.2.3. Pavement
To provide for more uniform supporting conditions and reduce the potential for differential
movement, TESD recommends that the pavement subgrade area be removed to a minimum
depth of two feet below the existing or proposed subgrade elevation, whichever is deeper.
After removal, the exposed ground surface should be observed by a TESD engineer or
geologist to verify that the encountered subsurface conditions are consistent with those
encountered by the exploratory borings. Undocumented fill or alluvium materia1 deemed
unacceptable should be removed to an approved depth, as recommended by the geotechnical
consultant during grading. Upon observation and verification, the exposed ground surface
should be scarified a minimum depth of eight inches and moistened conditioned to within two I
TESD, hc. * La& Park Updated Geotechnicaf Investigation * 2002-0570 * October 2002
5
percent of optimum, based on the ASTM D1557 test method. The moisture conditioned soil
should then be compacted to a minimum dry density of 90 percent based on the ASTM D1557
test method.
After the surface to receive fill has been prepared, the removed soil may be replaced as
engineered fill. The removed soil should be mixed to a uniform soil condition, moisture
conditioned and compacted as described in section 6.2.6 of this report.
6.2.4. Gravel Parking Lot
The planned decomposed granite parking lot located on the upper site will be underlain by
undocumented fill andor possibly landslide debris. Grading for this gravel parking lot does
not require any remedial grading. However, if the parking lot will ever be paved, we
recommend removing the undocumented fill and landslide debris prior to placing fill.
6.2.5. Hardscape
In order to provide uniform soil conditions, the subgrade in hardscape areas should be
scarified 12 inches and compacted in accordance with the following section of this report.
The scarified and compacted area should extend laterally a minimum of 12 inches beyond the
Hardscape limits.
6.2.6. Fill Placement and Compaction
All fill placed at the site should have the soil moisture adjusted to within two percent of the
optimum and compacted to a minimum relative compaction of 90 percent, based on ASTM D
1557. Fill should be compacted by mechanical means in uniform horizontal loose lifts of less
than eight inches in thickness. Each lift should be observed, tested and approved prior to
placement of subsequent lifts.
6.2.7. Fill Material
The on-site soils with Expansion Index of 50 or less may be used as compacted fill. Both
imported and existing on-site soils to be used as fill should be fiee of debris, organic and
cobbles over six inches in maximum dimension. Imported fill material should be approved by
the geotechnical engineer prior to importing. The geotechnical engineer should be notified not
less than 72 hours in advance of the location of any soil proposed for import. Alluvium and
some fill located in the area of the proposed parking lot consisted of clayey soil. This soil
may be expansive and should be disposed in areas where improvements are not planned, or
may be uniformly blended with sandy soil to provide a mixture with an expansion index of
less than 50.
TESD, Inc. * Lanvin Park Uudated Geotechnical Investimtion * 2002-0570 * October 2002
6
6.2.8. Excavation Conditions
TESD anticipates that excavation of the on-site materials may be accomplished with typical
earthmoving or trenching equipment. Local cemented zones within the sandstone, if
encountered, could require ripping.
6.3. FOUNDATION AND SLAB RECOMMENDATIONS
6.3.1. General
The following paragraphs present foundation and slab recommendations for the proposed
restroom structure. The footings and slab configurations, and reinforcement recommendations
herein should not be considered to preclude more restrictive criteria by the governing agencies
or by structural considerations. A structural engineer should evaluate configurations and
reinforcement requirements. We anticipate that the structure will consist of slab-on-grade and
perimeter footings or a mat slab foundation system.
6.3.2. Foundations v Foundation elements should be founded at a minimum depth of 18 inches below the lowest
adjacent finshed subgrade and be founded entirely on compacted fill or entirely on formation.
Footings bearing entireiy on properly compacted fill soil may be designed for an allowable
dead-plus-live load bearing pressure of 2,000 pounds per square foot. A one-third increase in
bearing pressure may be used for short-term or seismic loads. For foundation elements
supported on undisturbed formational soil, the allowable dead-plus-live load bearing pressure
may be increased to 3,000 pounds per square foot.
6.3.3. Restroom Slab-on-Grade
For geotechnical considerations, TESD recommends a minimum slab thickness of four inches.
A thickened edge may be used for the perimeter foundation. Minimum slab reinforcement
should consist of No.4 rebar at 18 inches on-center, each-way, placed at mid-height of the
slab. The slab should be underlain by four inches of aggregate base. Foundations and slabs
should be designed by a structural engineer in accordance with the applicable sections of the
Uniform Building Code.
6.4. ASPHALT PAVEMENT
The following presents recommendations for the proposed parking lot asphalt concrete (AC)
pavement to be located at the access from Vancouver Street. These recommendations are based on
standard design procedures and our experience with similar pavement structures.
TESD, Inc. * LaMrin Park Udated Geotechnical Investigation * 2002-0570 * October 2002 7
The tested R-value result of 19 indicates a low to moderate capability for support of vehicle loads.
The pavement structural sections are based on assumed traffic loadings in the form of Traffic
Index (TI) values. Based on the tested R-values, the assumed TI and the State of California
Department of Transportation (CALTRANS) standard method for design of pavement structural
sections, TESD recommends a design section of four inches of asphalt concrete (AC) over four
inches of aggregate base (AB).
Prior to placement of the aggregate base course, the pavement subgrade should be prepared as
previously discussed in the earthwork section of this report. The subgrade preparation and
compaction should extend to a horizontal distance of at least two feet beyond the Limits of the
pavement or concrete curbs. The aggregate base should conform to Section 200-2.2 of the
C'Greenbo~k" standard specifications. The aggregate base should be compacted to a relative
compaction of 95 percent with a moisture content within two percent of optimum (ASTM D1557).
fa-A42 mu pz" 47p5
The asphalt concrete should be Type III-C2 or C3-AR4000 in accordance with the "Greenbook"
standard specifications. If desired, a smoother surface may be constructed by using Type 111-D-AR - cz -
4000 for the upper two inches of the asphalt concrete pavement. The asphalt concrete should be
compacted in accordance with Section 302-5.6.2 of the "Greenbook" standard specifications.
r" +.jLE"*
The pavement design section is based on one preliminary R-value test. Additional R-value
testing should be performed on the surface soils after the grading is completed to verify the
pavement design.
6.5. TRENCH BACKFILL
All subsurface utility trench backfill, including water, sewer, and electrical lines should be
mechanically compacted. Water jetting should not be used for compaction. The pipe bedding
should consist of fiee-draining sand or small gravel with a minimum sand equivalent of 30. There
should be sufficient clearance along the side of the utility pipe or line to allow for compaction
equipment. The pipe bedding shall be compacted under the haunches and along side the pipe.
The soil backfill located above the bedding shall be compacted to the requirements described in
the Earthwork and Rough Grading section of this report. More stringent -backfill placement
criteria may be required by the governing authority.
I
TESD, Inc. * La- Park Udated Geotechnical Investigation * 2002-0570 * October 2002 8
6.6. CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS
Testing of select soil samples indicated a negligible sulfate exposure as indicated by the California
Building Code (CBC 1997 Table 19-A-4). The results indicated no requirements for sulfate
resistant concrete. However, TESD recommends Type 11 or Type V Cement with a maximum
water cement ratio of 0.50.
6.7. FOUNDATIONS EXCAVATIONS
Foundation excavations should be observed by the geotechnical engineer prior to placement of
forms, reinforcement, or concrete to verify that the exposed soil conditions conform to those
encountered during this investigation. All excavations should be trimmed neat, level and square.
All loose or sloughed material should be removed prior to the placement of concrete.
6.8. PLANREVIEW
The Geotechaical Consultant should review the grading and foundation plans when they become
available. The purpose of this review is to verify that the recommendations contained in this
report have been properly incorporated &to the plans and specifications.
6.9. PRE-GRADE MEETING
Prior to commencement of grading, a pre-construction meeting should be held with representatives
of the owner, contractor, architect, civil engineer, geotechuical engineer, and building official to
clarify any questions relating to the intent of these recommendations or additional
recommendations, and to help establish a suitable construction sequence.
6.10. OBSERVATIONS AND TESTING
All grading, earthwork and foundation construction should be performed under the observation
and testing of a geotecbnical engineer representative. Testing should be used to verify the
suitability of material and soil compaction.
7. LIMITATIONS
7.1. LIMITS OF INVESTIGATION
This investigation was performed us&g the skill and degree of care ordinarily exercised, under
similar circumstances, by registered geotechnical engineers and geologists practicing in this or
similar localities. No other warranty, expressdd or implied, is made as to the conclusions and
professional advise included in this report. This report is prepared for the sole use of our client and
may not be assigned to others without the written consent of the client and TESD, Inc.
TESD. Inc. * Larwin Park Updated Geotechnical Investigation * 2002-0570 * October 2002
9
The samples taken and used for testing, and the observations made, are believed representative of
site conditions: however, soil and geologic conditions can vary significantly between test
excavations and surface exposures. As in most major projects, conditions revealed by construction
excavations may vary with preliminary findings. If this OCCUTS, the change conditions must be
evaluated by a representative of TESD and designs adjusted as required or alternate designs
recommended.
This report is issued with the understanding that it is the responsibility of the owner, or of his
representative, to ensure that the infomation and recommendations contained herein are brought
to the attention of the project engineer. The necessary steps should be taken to see that the
contractor and subcontractors carry out such recommendations in the field.
The findings of this report are valid as of this present date. However, changes in the conditions of
a property can occur with the passage of time, whether they are due to natural process or the works
of man. In addition, changes in applicable or appropriate standards may occur from legislation or
the broadening of knowledge. Accordingly, the findings of this report may be invalidated wholly
or partially by changes outside of our control. Therefore, his report is subject to review and should
be updated after a period of three years.
7.2. ADDITIONAL, SERVICES
The review of plans and specifications, field observations and testing under our direction is an integral
part of the recommendations made in this report. The required tests, observations and consultation
during construction includes, but is not limited to:
' Inspection of grading removal bottom, overexcavation, temporary cuts, footing excavations,
and slab subgrade. . Observation and testing during grading operations. . Additional consultation as required during construction or upon the owner's request.
The above listed observation and testing are additional services, which are provided by TESD and
should be budgeted within the cost of the project.
*********************e***
Testing Engineers-San Diego, Inc.
TESD. Inc. * J-arwin Park Updated Geotechical Investigation * 2002-0570 * October 2002
10
I
I
i
I
I
I
i
I
i
I
I
I I
1 1
I 1
..
PLATES
i
I
Testing Engineers - San Diego, Inc.
7895 Convoy Court, Suite 18
San Diego, CA 921 11
Tef: (858) 715-5800 Fax: (858) 715-5810
I'
. ....
i
REFERENCES -
.. .. 1. GEOCON Incorporated, March 8, 1983, Quail Ridge, Lots 215 through 219 (Model
Lots) Carlsbad, California, Testing and Observation Services During Grading
Operations; Partial Final Report of Grading, File No. D-0684-M02.
2. GEOCON Incorporated, September, 1983, Find Report of Testinp and Observation
Services Duhg Mass Grading Operations for Carlsbad Tract No. 74-4 (Spinnaker
Point) Phase I.
3. GEOCON Incorporated, June 19, 1984, Carlsbad Tract No. 74-4 (Spinnaker Point
Phase I) EIrn Avenue, Carlsbad, California Final Report of Testing and Observation
Services During Mass Grading Operations.
4. Group Delta Consultants, Inc., February 20, 1991, Summary of Geotechnical
Considerations for Proposed Larwin Park Development, Carlsbad, California,
project no. 13 17-GEOI .
5. Group Delta Consultants, Inc., May 9, 1991, Geotechnical Investigation for
Proposed LanXrin Park Development, Carlsbad, California, project no. 1317-Sol.
6. State of California, 1997, California Building Code.
.. ..
APPENDIX B
l?IELD EXPLORATION LOGS
*
*-
I
GENEU NOTES
SAMPLE IDENTIFICATION
The Unified Soil Classification System is used to identify the soil unless otherwise noted.
SOIL PROPERTY SYMBOLS
N:
Qu:
Mc:
LL
PI:
ad: v:
QP:
Standard Penetration: Blows per foot of a 140 Ib hammer faIling 30 I' on a 2 'I O.D. split-spoon.
Unconfined compressive strength, tsf.
Penetrometer value, unconfined compressive strength, tsf.
Water content, %.
Liquid limit, %.
Plasticity index, %.
Natural dry density, PCF.
Apparent groundwater ]eve1 at time noted after completion.
CAL: ss:
ST
DC:
B K:
SB : sc:
HD:
Bulk :
Block
Modified California Sampler - 2 5/8" I.D., 3.0" O.D., except where noted.
Split-Spoon - 1 3/8" LD., 2" O.D., except where noted.
Shelby Tube - 3" O.D., except where noted.
Drive Cylinder Sample.
Large Bulk Sample.
Small Bulk SampIe.
Sand Cone.
Hand Drive Sample.
Bulk Bag Sample
Undisturbed Block Sample.
RELATIVE DENSTTY AND CONSISTENCY CLASSIFICATION
'IERM (NON-COHESIVE SOILS) STANDARD PENETRATION RESISTANCE tSPT)
Very Loose 0 to 4
Loose 4 to 10
Medium Dense 11 to30
Dense 31 to50
Very Dense Over 50
TERM (COHESIVE SOILS] SPT ou - ITSF)
Very Soft 0 to 2 0 -0.25
Soft 2 to 4 0.25 - 0.50
Medium Stiff 4 to 8 0.50 - 1.00
Stiff 8 to 16 1.00 - 2.00
Very Stiff 16 to 32 2.00 - 4.00
Hard I Over 32 4.m
PARTICLE SIZE
Silt No. 200 - Hydrometer Boulders 12 in. + Coarse Sand No. 4 - No. 30
Cobbles 12 in -3.in Medium Sand No. 30 - No.70 Clay Hydrometer - Gravel 3 in -No. 4 Fine Sand NO. 70 - NO. 200
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
I I
1 I
I
Testing Engineers - San Diego, Inc.
7895 Convoy Court, Suite 18
San Diego, CA 9201 I1
Tel(858) 715-5800 Fax (858) 715-5810
LOG OF BORING
,PROJECTNAME: Larwin Park - City of Carlsbad PROJECT No: 2002-0570 1 METHODOFEXCAVATION Hand Auger DATE OBSERVED: 9/12/2002
LOGGED By: CEA GROUND ELEVATION: N/A LOCATION: See Map
Dark brown, moist, medium stiff, trace of organics, blockly
SANDSTONE (Clayey SAND)
Olive gray, moist, very dense, cemented
I I I I I I 1 backfilled 9/12/02
..
..
SOIL TEST
Y I I I I f I
.OGGEDBY CEA GROUND ELEVATION: N/A LOCATION: See Map
I 1 I
, BORINGNO.: B-2
LAWN and TOPSOIL I
ARTIFICIAL FILL
Silty SAND (Decomposed Granite)
Tan I gray, wet to near saturated, medium dense
AI I UVlUM
Silty CLAY with some sand
Dark brown, wet. stii
Terminated at 5 Ft.
No groundwater encountered
Backfilled 9/12/02
I’
Testing Engineers - San Diego, Inc.
7895 Convoy Court, Suite 18
San Diego, CA 9201 I1
Tel(858) 715-5800 Fax (858) 715-5810
LOG OF BORING
LOGGED BY:
DEPTH
(FEET) CLASS
SM
SM
1 -- -
2- -
3- -
4- -
5- -
6- - -
I~~~~~~~~~E Larwin Park - City of Carlsbad PROJECT NO 2002-0570
~YTE OBSERVED 911 a2002
-I DGGED BY:
GROUND WATIOM z$
D ELEVATION:
MEMOD OFEXCAVATION: Hand Auger
NIA LownoN: See Map
BORING No.: 5-3
DESCRIPTION
ARflFlClALFILL:
Medium to fine SAND with trace silt and gravel
Orange brown, damp to moist, medium dense
SANTIAGO FORMATION
SANDSTONE (Silty SAND)
Light gray /tan, damp to moist, very dense, slightly cemented,
grained medium to fine
Terminated at 12 inches
No ground water encountered
backfilled 9/12/02
N/A LOCATION: See MaD
SOIL TEST
8-1
BORING NO.: 8-4
IFlClAl Fir I
Medium to fine SAND with some silt and trace gravel
Reddishlorange brown, dry to damp, medium dense I
~~ ~
SANTIAGO FORMATION
SANDSTONE (Silty SAND)
Light gray / tan, damp to moist, very dense, slightly cemented,
Drained medium to fine
~ ~
Terminated at 18 inches
No groundwater encountered
Backfilled 9/12/02
I
I
j
I I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
!
I
1 I
I I
I I
il-1 u Pit
PROJECT NAME Lawin
I Silty CLAY with sand ' Dark Brown, wet, soft -
Silty SAND, trace of Clay
Light Brown, wet, soft
SAND
Brown, very moist to wet. medium dense
.---------------------------------------------------------------
- Park -
R-value: 19
Testing Engineers - San Diego,
7895 Convoy Court, Suite 18
San Diego, CA 9201 1 I
Tel(858) 715-5800 Fax (858) 715-5810
LOG OF BORING
City of Carlsbad PROJECT NO:
DATE OBSERVED: 9/12/2002 METHOD OF EXCAVATION: ..
CEA GROUND ELEVATION N/A ' LOCATION -0GGED BK
SM -
1 -- -
2- -
3-' -
4- -
5- -
j- - - -
4
-0GGED BY: 1 GROUND ELE\I
Inc.
2002-0570
Hand Auger
See Map ..
' BORING No.: ' B-5
DESCRIPTION
SANTlA GO FORMATI ON
SANDSTONE (Silty SAND)
Light gray I tan, damp to moist, dense to very dense, slightly
cemented, grained medium to fine
weathered, dry and loose top 3 inches
Terminated at 12 inches
No ground water encountered
backfilled 9/12/02
SOIL TEST
ID = 122.5 percent
IM = 11.5
. . ...
4lA LOCATION See Map
BORING NO.: 5-6
!TOPSOIL I
- I
I SANDSTONE with silt
Light grayish bmwn, moist, very dense
Terminated @ 3.0 ft.
No Groundwater Encountered
Backfilled 911 7/02
APPENDIX c
LABORATORY TEST RESULTS
I-
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
I i
i
\
1
LABOIUTORY TESTRVG -
Laboratory Testing Program
Laboratory tests were performed on representative soil samples to determine their relative
engineering properties. Tests were performed in accordance with test methods of the
American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM) or other accepted standards. The
following presents a brief description of the various test methods used.
Classification - Soils were classified visually according to the Unified Soil
Classification System (USCS). Visual classifications were supplemented by laboratory
testing of selected samples in accordance with ASTM D-2487. The soil classifications
are shown on the Exploration Logs in Appendix B.
Particle Size Analysis - Particle size analyses were performed on a select representative
sample in accordance with ASTM D-422. The results are provided on Plate C- 1.
Maximum Dry Density/Optimum Moisture Content - The laboratory maximum
dry density and optimum moisture content of a select sample was determined in
accordance with ASTM D-1557, Method A. Tbe test result is provided on Plate (2-2.
Soil Corrosivity - Soluble sulfate and chloride tests were performed in accordance
with California Test Methods 643 and 417 to assess the degree of conosivity of the
subgrade soils with regard to concrete and. The test results are provided on Plate C-3.
In-Situ Moisture and Density - The in-place moisture content and dry unit weight at
selected depths were determined utilizing ASTM D-4959. The dry unit weight and
moisture content are shown on the Exploration Logs in Appendix B and on Plate C-4.
Resistance Value (R-value) - An R-value test was performed on a soil sample in
accordance with California Department of Transportation (Caltrans) Test Method 301
The results are shown on Plate C-5.
Particle Size Distribution Report I
GRAl SIZE-mm
% GRAVEL % SAND % FINES
CLAY % COBBLES CRS. I FINE CRS. I MEDIUM I FINE SILT
0.0 0.0 I 0.0 1.4 I 21.6 I 64.4 12.6
SIEVE
SIZE
1/2 in. 318 in. #4 #lo #20 #40 #60 #IO0 #200
PERCENT 1 SPEC.*
FINER
100.0 100.0 ' 100.0 98.6 92.4 77.0 48.6 23.9 12.6
PERCENT r
+ (no specification provided)
PASS?
(X-NO)
2
Sol1 Description
LIGHT GRAY-TAN SILTY SAND
Atterbers Limits PL= LL= PI=
Coefficients D85= 0.543 D60= 0.304 D50= 0.256 '
D30= 0.175 D15= 0.0984 D1 o= c,= C,=
uscs= Classification AASHTO=
Remarks
TESD NO. 5679
Date: 911 2/02 Sample No.: 5679 Source of Sample: Location: B-5 Elev./Depth: 0"-12" - 11 Client: City of Carlsbad - Recreation Administration
Project: City of Carlsbad - Larwin Park Geo. T&I
Project No: 02-0570 Plate 1
TESTtNG ENGINEERS
I i
I I
I
I i I
I
I
I
I I
I
t
i
I
I
I
1
I i
t
COMPACTION TEST REPORT
Curve No.: 1
Project No.: 02-0570
Project: City of Carlsbad - Larwin Park Geo. T&I I Date: 911 2/02
Location: B-5
ElevJDepth: 0"-12ii .
Remarks: TESD NO. 5679
MATERIAL DESCRIPTION
Description: LIGHT GRAY-TAN SILTY SAND
Classifications - USCS:
I
Nat. Moist. =
Liquid Limit =
% N0.4 = 0.0 %
AASHTO:
Sp.G. =
Plasticity index =
% < No.200 = 12.6 %
TEST RESULTS
Maximum dry density = 122.5 pcf I Optimum moisture = 11.5 % I
Test specification:
ASTM D 1557-9 1 Procedure A Modified
100% SATURATION CURVES FOR SPEC. GRAV. EQUAL TO:
Water content, %
TESTING ENGINEERS Plate 2
Testing Engineers - SanDiego, Inc. Established I946
SAMPLE LAB NUMBER
Date : ,
Job No:
Job Name:
Address :
Report No:
ENGINEER:
SULFATE CHLOIRIDE CONTENT CONTENT
September 23,2002
2002-0570
CITY OF CARLSBAD - LARWIN PARK G.Eo. T&I
Cadsbad, Cdifomia
Plan Number: N/A
Pernii t : N/A
App I ication : NiA
4375
BENJAMIN SHIRER, STAFF ENGINEER
I
Plate C-3
‘esting Engineers - San Diego. lnc.. 7895 Convoy Court, Suite 18 San Diego. CA. 92111 [858] 715-5800 Fax [858] 715-5810
I
I
1
I
I
I
1
t
1
P 'I
I
i
Testing Engineers - SanDiego, Inc. Established 1946
Date:
Job No:
Job Name:
Address:
a1 Morstirre And nem,@
(Ring Samples)
September 23,2002
2002-0570
CITY OF CARLsBAD - LARWlN PARK GEO. T&I
Cadsbad, California
4374
BENJAI" SHIRER, STAFF ENGINEER
Report No:
ENGINEER:
PROJECT: LARWIN PARK
DATE SAMPLED: 9/12/02
I .................................................................................... "..."." .............................................. " .................................................... .-...* ..................... ..-
LAB NUMBER: 5677 ............................................................. i ......................................................................................................................................................................
SAMPLE
-JDENTIFIC ATION/NO.
iv/IOISTUR..E CONTENT, % 14.5
DRY DENSITY, pcf 111.3 ................................. ...... ................... " ...................................................................................... .. ............................................................................ ".
Plate C-4
esting Engineers - San Diego, Inc.. 7895 Convoy Court. Suite 18 S-an Dicgo. CA. 92111 [858] 715-5800 Fax IS581 715-j8Io
Testing EnRineers - San Diego. Inc. Established
TESD PROJ. NO. 2002-0570 DATE RECEIVED 9/12/2002
LAB NUMBER 57 10
EXPANSION PRESSURE
I- cn
2.0
I .5
1 .o
0.5
0.0
0.0
100
80
60
40
20
0
0.5 1.0 1.5
COVER BY EXPANSION PRESSURE (feet)
EXUDATION PRESSURE
2.0
EXUDATION PRESSURE (psi)
I
SIhlEIl TRAFFIC INDEX
R-' JE BY EXUDATION Reviewed By:
BENJAMIN SHIRER, STAFF ENGINEER
Plate C-5
ESCROW AGREEMENT FOR
SECURITY DEPOSITS IN LIEU OF RETENTION
This Escrow Agreement is made and entered into by and between the CITY OF CARLSBAD whose
address is 1200 Carlsbad Village Drive, Carlsbad, California, 92008, hereinafter called "City" and
GRlFFlTH COMPANY whose address is 12200 Bloomfield Ave. Santa Fe Springs CA 90670,
hereinafter called "Contractor" and CITY NATIONAL BANK whose address is 2001 North Main
Street, Suite 200, Walnut Creek CA 94596, hereinafter called "Escrow Agent."
For the consideration hereinafter set forth, the City, Contractor and Escrow Agent agree as follows:
1. Pursuant to sections 22300 and 10263 of the Public Contract Code of the State of California,
the Contractor has the option to deposit securities with the Escrow Agent as a substitute for retention
earnings required to be withheld by the City pursuant to the Construction Contract entered into
between the City and Contractor for Contract No. 38561-A, HIDDEN CANYON COMMUNITY PARK
in the amount of $1,414.414.00 dated 8/10/2004 (hereinafter referred to as the "Contract").
Alternatively, on written request of the Contractor, the City shall make payments of the retention
earnings directly to the Escrow Agent. When the Contractor deposits the securities as a substitute for
Contract earnings, the Escrow Agent shall notify the City within 10 days of the deposit. The Escrow
Agent shall maintain insurance to cover negligent acts and omissions of the Escrow Agent in connection with the handling of retentions under these sections in an amount not less than $1 00,000
per contract. The market value of the securities at the time of the substitution shall be a least equal to
the cash amount then required to be withheld as retention under the terms of the contract between
the City and Contractor. Securities shall be held in the name of the City and shall designate the
Contractor as the beneficial owner.
2. The City shall make progress payments to the Contractor for such funds which otherwise would
be withheld from progress payments pursuant to the Contract provisions, provided that the Escrow
Agent holds securities in the form and amount specified above.
3. When the City makes payment of retentions earned directly to the Escrow Agent, the Escrow
Agent shall hold them for the benefit of the Contractor until such time as the escrow created under
this contract is terminated. The Contractor may direct the investment of the payments into securities.
All terms and conditions of this agreement and the rights and responsibilities of the parties shall be
equally applicable and binding when the City pays the Escrow Agent directly.
4. The Contractor shall be responsible for paying all fees for the expenses incurred by the Escrow
Agent in administering the Escrow Account and all expenses of the City. These expenses and
payment terms shall be determined by the City, Contractor and Escrow Agent.
5. The interest earned on the securities or the money market accounts held in escrow and all
interest earned on that interest shall be for the sole account of Contractor and shall be subject to
withdrawal by Contractor at any time and from time to time without notice to the City.
6. Contractor shall have the right to withdraw all or any part of the principal in the Escrow Account
only by written notice to Escrow Agent accompanied by written authorization from City to the Escrow Agent that City consents to the withdrawal of the amount sought to be withdrawn by Contractor.
7. The City shall have a right to draw upon the securities in the event of default by the Contractor. Upon seven days' written notice to the Escrow Agent from the City of the default, the Escrow Agent shall immediately convert the securities to cash and shall distribute the cash as instructed by the City.
!gEct.F.IV'QD
Page 1 of 3
8. Upon receipt of written notification from the City certifying that the Contract is final and complete and that the Contractor has complied with all requirements and procedures applicable to the
Contract, the Escrow Agent shall release to Contractor all securities and interest on deposit less
escrow fees and charges of the Escrow Account. The escrow shall be closed immediately upon disbursement of all moneys and securities on deposit and payments of fees and charges.
9. The Escrow Agent shall rely on the written notifications from the City and the Contractor pursuant
to sections (1) to (8), inclusive, of this agreement and the City and Contractor shall hold Escrow Agent harmless from Escrow Agent's release, conversion and disbursement of the securities and interest as set forth above.
IO. The names of the persons who are authorized to give written notices or to receive written notice
on behalf of the City and on behalf of Contractor in connection with the foregoing, and exemplars of their respective signatures are as follows:
For City: Title FINANCE DIRECTOR
Name Ai9 /LJ/iaA&39 db
Signature
For Contractor:
For Escrow Agent:
Signature L
Name vab
Signatur
Address Walnut Creek, CA 94596
1 N. Main treet, Suite 200
Page 2 of 3
At the time the Escrow Account is opened, the City and Contractor shall deliver to the Escrow Agent
a fully executed counterpart of this Agreement.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties have executed this Agreement by their proper officers on the
date first set forth above.
For City: Title MAYOR PRb Thm -
Address: 1200 Carlsbad Village Dr., Carlsbad CA 92008
For Contractor:
For Escrow Agent: Title Senior Vice President
Name JZCIEPL. Edson B Name JZCIEPL. Edson
Address Walnut Creek, CA 94596
I t'
'a '"r,
ar
Page 3 of 3